> Be =
WHITNEY LIBRARY,
HARVARD UNIVERSITY.
inte Gila OF
i, We RNIN be
Sturgis Hooper Professor
IN THE
MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY
Hate,
>>
AD
D> > BS
A
2D’ >
IDI» Ss
ID DW. SS
dines
ie
4
y
‘
eae
Paheres
Satties
Ps
PROCEEDINGS
AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HELD AT PHILADELPHIA
PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE
Vol, XI
JANUARY 1869 TO DECEMBER 1870
Je TSU AID ID, I eet Itye\e
IP TEAC IN WY IBID) I CO Jey, GUISE IN SO CMl Ia Je ye
BY M CALLA & STAVELY.
om" 1871.
2 XSi
: \ 1065 Sih
| aeta 6
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.
Vor XI: JANUARY, 1869. No. 81.
Stated Meeting, January 1, 1869.
Present, three members.
Mr. Eni K. Prices, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from John
Tyndall, dated London, May 21, 1868.
A request from Prof. Dawson for a set of the Transactions .
for the Montreal Natural History Society, was referred to the
Committee of Publication.
The Surgeon General’s Office, at Washington, was ordered
to be placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Pro-
ceedings.
Donations for the Library were received from the Prussian
Academy, Bureau des Ponts, Royal Astronomical and Geolo-
gical Societies, Boston Natural History Society, Renselaer
Polytechnic Institute, Franklin Institute, and Dr. Newberry.
The report of the Judges and Clerks of the Annual EHlec-
tion for Officers of the Society held this day, was read, an-
A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—A
2
nouncing that the following named members were elected
Officers for the ensuing year:
President.
George B. Wood.
Vice-Presidents.
John C. Cresson,
Isaac Lea,
Frederick Fraley.
Secretaries.
Charles B. T'rego,
K. Otis Kendall,
John L. Le Conte,
Jie Je, Ibesleye
Curators.
Franklin Peale,
Khas Durand,
Joseph Carson.
Treasurer.
Charles B. Trego.
Counsellors.
Frederick Fraley,
Robert Patterson,
Daniel R. Goodwin,
de 1, Jemiees
Pending nominations, Nos. 593 to 621 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
Qo
1869.] [Porter.
Stated Meeting, January 15, 1869.
Present, ten members.
JOHN C. CRESSON, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Society
of Emulation of Abbeville and the Royal Institution.
Letters of envoi were received from the Meteorological
Office of the Royal Society, and from the Society of Physical
and Natural Sciences at Bordeaux, requesting an exchange
of publications, which was referred to the Secretaries with
power to act.
A request for the loan of Mariana’s History of Spain for
six months from President Coppée, was referred to the hLi-
brary Committee with power to act.
A copy of No. 80 of the Proceedings, just published, was
laid on the table by the Secretaries.
Donations for the Library were received from M. Rencon
Mr. O. Warner, Secr’y Com. Massachusetts, Dr. B. A. Gould,
Mr. 5S. Scudder, Boston Public Library, New Jersey Histori-
eal Society, Dr. Joseph Parrish, the Blind Asylum, Medical
News, Librarian of Congress, Treasury Department, and Dr.
Rushenberger.
The death of GC. F. P. von Martius, at Miinich, Decem-
ber 138, 1868, was announced by letter from his son, Dr. C.
A. Martius.
The death of John Cassin, at Philadelphia, January 10,
1869, aged 55, was announced by Dr. Le Conte, and on mo-
tion of Dr. Rushenberger, Dr. Bridges was requested to pre-
pare an obituary notice of the deceased.
The following communication was received from Prof.
T. C. Porter, dated, Haston, Pa., Jan. 6, 1869.
Mr. Boyd’s letter has arrived, and the following extracts contain all
the information he can now give concerning the Indian inscriptions near
Peach Bottom :
‘“The rocks from which I copied the figures sent you are granitic, very
Brinton.] b as [January 15,
hard, and situated in the Susquehanna River about three miles below the
Pennsylvania State-line and twelve or fourteen above Havre de Grace.
During high freshets they are entirely submerged.
The inscriptions are numerous and in a fine state of preservation when
not directly exposed to the abrading force of ice and drift-wood. They
occur on the sides and tops of some half dozen rocks. Although at first
sight they might seem to have no connection with each other, I have
been able to trace an arrangement in horizontal and vertical lines. The
grooves are semi-cylindric, and in some cases have a depth of half an inch
or more.
My copies were taken by placing sheets of paper on the figures and
coloring the portions lying immediately over the grooves. Thus, the out-
lines, if rude, are faithful and of full size.
Owing to the limited time at my command, I did not copy them all,
but confined myself to the more curious.
The people of the neighborhood, although many of them are descended
from early settlers who came into contact with the Indians then living
there, seem to know nothing as to the origin or meaning of these figures.
I regret that the information I send you is so scanty, but, should the
hilosophical Society desire it, it will give me great pleasure to make a
thorough exploration of the rocks and their inscriptions, next July, when
I expect to spend several weeks not far from the locality.”
Dr. Brinton, present on invitation, addressed the Society
upon the nature of the Maya group of languages, and, in his
opinion, the great value of several manuscript grammars and
vocabularies in the Society’s Library. On motion of Mr.
Fraley, the thanks of the Society were tendered to Dr. Brin-
ton, and he was requested to furnish the Secretaries with an’°
abstract of his remarks.
The Maya group of languages comprises those spoken in the old
departments of Yucatan, Vera Paz, Chiapas, Guatemala,.and Soconusco.
The Huasteca also belongs to it, which was current in the province of
Tamaulipas, about Tampico. The Natchez of Louisiana, and the Chahta-
Muskoki family display some affinities with it, which have not yet been
fully investigated. On the ethnological maps of Pritchard, Waitz, Bas-
tian and Kiepert, and others, the Mayas are located on the Greater An-
tilles also, and it is the opinion of the Abbé Brasseur de Bourbourg, as
well as some other writers, both ancient and modern, that the Mayas and
Aztecs both look to the former inhabitants of Haiti—the so called Taini
—as their common progenitors. For this opinion there is no sound
foundation, as there can be brought abundant evidence to prove that both
1869. ] D [Brinton.
the tribes native in Cuba and Haiti, as well as those on the Bahamas,
and those resident on the lesser Antilles before the arrival of the Caribs
were Arrowacks, and came from South America,
The most important dialects of the Maya are the Yucatecan, the Qui-
che, the Cakchiquel, the Tzendal, the Pokonchi, the Huastecan and the
Zahlopahkap. They are as closely allied one with another as the Ro-
manic tongues of modern Hurope, and have many points in common
which give them peculiar interest, in fact the very highest interest,
among American aboriginal languages.
Not merely were they the dialects of the most cultivated branch of all
the red race, from which indeed the civilization of the whole Northern
Continent probably proceeded, but they exhibit certain linguistic traits,
allying them strangely to the more perfected tongues of the Old World.
So strong are these resemblances that of recent writers Brasseur and
Bastian both incline to hold them akin to the Aryan family, and possibly
largely influenced by Scandinavian immigration in the eleventh century.
This however is a baseless hypothesis. “
The traits referred to are: 1st. Their less marked polysynthetic struc-
ture, approaching at times to a plainly inflectional character; 2d. Their
harmonic repetition of vowels like that in Scythian tongues, the suffixes
added to change the grammatical character of words often varying their
vowel to agree with that in the terminal syllable of the root; 3rd. The
pronominal affixes of the verbs, which are added to the verbal root to
express the relation of the action, and form a regular conjugation pre-
cisely as was the case in the primitive Aryan tongue ; 4th. The genesis
of the pronouns, which as recently carefully investigated by M. H. de
Charency has disclosed laws of growth of very general interest.
In these languages also, is found the only native American literature.
The Mayas used a phonetic alphabet as well as ideographic writing, and
thus preserved their chronicles and traditions for many centuries anterior
to the discovery. At the Conquest, their chief literary monument, called
the Book of the Mats (7. e. of the nobles, who sat on mats while the com-
mon people occupied the floors), the Popol Vuh, was written in Roman
Characters in the Quiche dialect. This with several other similar works
has been published in the original and with translations in Spanish and
French.
As the Maya group may thus be considered the key to the civilization, the
mythology, the literature, and earliest possible history of the red race, it
is most desirable that any valuable manuscripts which throw light upon it
shall be published. Two such exist in the Library of the American Phi-
losophical Society, both short, both of the highest value, both unique
and entirely unknown to scholars. One of these is a grammar covering
54 small 4to pages of the Cakchiquel dialect, the other still shorter, em-
braced on 82 small pages, and is the only existing grammar of the Chol
or Putum dialect, spoken by the Lacandones, among the mountains of Vera
Brinton. ] 6 [January 15, 1869.
Paz. The former dates from 1692, and the author is unknown; the
latter is a copy of the grammar of the Dominican missionary Francisco
Moran, and is dated 1695. Itis in duplicate, by different hands, and as
the only known work on the Chol, deserves by all means to be placed
within the reach of linguists. A quite full vocabulary is appended, and a
sufficient number of prayers and dialogues in the dialect to allow a very
satisfactory exhibit to be made of the whole structure of the dialect.
The longer Cakchiquel grammar could likewise be rendered extremely
useful by the proper use of other manuscripts in that dialect now in pos-
session of the Society, and which have not hitherto been used. These
include several dictionaries, books of sermons, Confessionaries, and a
copy of the earliest volume printed in any Central American dialect, the
Doetrina Christiana of Marroquin, printed at Mexico, 1556.
The enlightened attention which this Society has always given to
American linguistics, and the great benefit which the publication of
these two small works, enriched by the notes and illustrations for which
the Society’s Library offers such abundant material, lead me to hope
that your honored body will take the necessary steps to render them
thus available to the learned world.
Mr. Lesley was nominated and elected Librarian for the
ensulng year.
The Standing Committees were chosen for the ensuing
year as follows:
Finance—Mz. Fraley, Mr. J. F. James, Mr. Marsh.
Publication—Mr. . P. James, Dr.) Carson; Prot. ©) B:
Trego, Mr. H. K. Price, Mr. Tilghman.
Haii—Mr. Peale, Mr. P. KH. Chase, Mr. S. W. Roberts.
Library—Dr. Bell, Dr. Coates, Mr. Price, Mr. Barnes, Mr.
Briggs.
The list of surviving members was read.
On the list, Trameisy 1, 1868, U.S. 281, Foreign, 142—423.
Klected in 1368; U.S: 10) Horeien,” ) lass
Deceased in 1868) U./S) 11> Poreign, “a= =e:
On the list, January 1, 1869, U. S. 280, Foreign, 188—418.
Nominations Nos. 593—621 were read and spoken to.
The Committee on the Michaux Legacy reported a resolu-
tion for empowering M. Carlier of Paris, which was adopted.
New nominations Nos. 622, 628 were read.
The Publication Committee reported a recommendation to
if
send the second series of the Transactions, complete, to the .
N. H. S. of Montreal, which was so ordered.
The ballot boxes were then opened by the presiding officer,
and the following named gentlemen were declared duly elect-
ed members of the Society.
George H. Horne, M. D., of Philadelphia.
Wilham M. Gabb, of Philadelphia.
Hakakian Bey, of Cairo.
inant Bey, of Cairo.
Auguste Mariette Bey, of Cairo.
Dr. Ceselli, of Rome.
Hmmanuel De Rougé, of Paris.
Henri Brugsch.
Johannes Diimichen.
Frangois Chabas, of Chalons sur Sdaone.
Samuel Birch, of London.
Kdward Lartét, of Paris.
Joseph Prestwich, of London.
Carl L. Riitimeyer, of Basel.
William H. Flower, of London.
George Rolleston, of Oxford.
Thomas H. Huxley, of London.
Joseph D. Hooker, M. D., of Kew Gardens.
John Phillips, of Oxford.
J. J. A. Worsaae, of Copenhagen.
Sven Nillson, of Lund.
Auguste Carher, of Paris.
Benjamin 8. Lyman, of Philadelphia.
Henry C. Baird, of Philadelphia.
Samuel J. Reeves, of Philadelphia.
Hector Tyndale, of Philadelphia.
Joshua B. Lippincott, of Philadelphia.
Horace Binney, Jr., of Philadelphia.
William Blackmore, of Salisbury (London) England.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, February 5, 1869.
Present, fifteen members.
Dr. GrEorGE B. Woop, President, in the Chair.
Mr. Binney, Gen. Tyndale and Mr. Lyman, new members,
took their seats.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Acade-
my at Amsterdam, Royal Library at the Hague, Batavian
Society at Rotterdam, Zovlogical and Statistical Societies at
London, Leeds Philosophical Society, American Statistical
Society, Massachusetts and New Jersey Historical Societies,
Boston City Library, Yale College, Peabody Institute, and
also from the Philadelphia College of Physicians, returning
thanks for a donation of duplicate pamphlets.
Letters of envoi were received from the Geog. Soe., Vienna,
June 80; Holl. Soc., Harlem, May 20; Acad., Amsterdam,
Sep. 2; Central Bureau of Statistics, Sweden, Nov. 25, 1868.
Donations for the Library were received from Prof. Zante-
deschi; the Geographical Societies of St. Petersburg, Vienna
and London; Academies and Societies of Amsterdam, Rot-
terdam, Harlem and Niirnburg; Antiquarian: Societies at
Copenhagen and London; Central Bureau at Stockholm;
Astronomical and Geological Societies at London; Nat. Hist.
Soc. and Pub. Lib., Boston; Amer. Oriental Society; Silli-
man’s Journal; Medical News; Acad. Nat: Sci., Philadel-
phia; Dr. Carson; Wisconsin Historical Society; and Fen-
dall’s executors at Washington.
The Librarian communicated for publication in the Pro-
ceedings a vertical section of the coal measures of the Georges
Creek portion of the Cumberland Basin, made some years
ago, with great care, by the State Chemist and Geologist of
Maryland, Mr. Philip T. Tyson of Baltimore. On motion it
was referred to the Secretaries with power to publish.
February 5, 1869, ] 9 [Tyson.
SECTION OF CUMBERLAND COAL BASIN.
By Puiuie T. Tyson or BauTIMore.
It contains the position and thickness of rocks of the entire ‘‘ Poto-
mac Coal Field,’’ amounting to about 1400 feet.
In order to have a fixed base I have made the heights on the left hand
margin from the level of tide water, beginning at 670 feet. This was
obtained from the maps and profiles of the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad,
of which I had copies.
I had also those of the Georges Creek Coal and Iron Company, which
connected with the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad. In addition to these I
caused numerous other levelings and measurements to be made between
Georges Creek and the Savage Mount, and was therefore enabled to con-
struct the entire section from actual measurement, with the aid of very
extensive diggings, whilst making Geological Surveys for the Georges
Creek Coal and Iron Company in 1852.
This section extends down to the Devonian, and I have also examined
and find its beds precisely like those below the Yohogheny Coal Field
and the Great Western Field, as seen in the Gap a few miles east of
Connellsville.
The measurements from 670 to 1120 feet were taken on the Savage
river and Potomac. From thence to 1349 feet on Mill run, which flows
into Georges Creek. From thence to 1443 feet on Laurel run, which also
flows into Georges Creek. From 1448 feet on the 8. E. face of Dug hill,
at the foot of which is Lonoconing.
Feet above Tide. Thickness. Character of Rock.
Wy Shale.
SOY Coal.
2050 19’ 0” Shaley Sand Stone.
Pcoum On Shale.
OP OW Coal.
LOM Limestone with Shale seams.
2000 13! 9! Fire Clay.
ay OY Unknown.
ae ay Nodules of Iron in Shale.
1950 ae. ye Shale.
SN GL) Sand Stone, fine grain.
ye Shale.
4’ 3” Coal (2/’ shale parting).
10’ 0” Fire Clay.
By? Ql Coal.
1900 3!’ O/ Fire Clay.
( Sand Stone Shaley.
bl! Ov + Sand Stone Micaceous.
1850 ] Sand Stone Coarse.
421 GU Shales, not fully examined.
A 61! Coal.
OU! Shale.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—B
Tyson.]
Feet above Tide.
1800
1750
1700
1600
Thickness.
1/
4/
1/
1/
9/
a
O//
gi!
10”
3
0”
8//
QO”
All
gi
0"
6”
6!
Q/
6//
6//
(Wd
gi!
0’
g/
Q//
Qo”
6”
Ql
6//
Qo”
vill
QO”
6//
6//
6//
6//
6//
6!
6//
yt
3/7
6//
6//
6//
(Wa
Bu
PA
qu
6//
g//
4/ 10”
10
[February 5,
Character of Rock.
Coal.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Shaley Sand Stone.
Shale ferruginous.
Main Coat.
Bands of Iron ore.
Shale.
Fire Clay.
Limestone.
Shale.
Sand Stone, fine grain.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Shale. Ore No. 20 at its top.
Shale ferruginous.
Coal.
Shale.
Coal.
Ore Nos. 17, 18 and 19 in Shale.
Ore No. 16 in Fire Clay.
Shale.
Coal.
Ore No. 15 in Shale.
Ore balls in stratum of Fire Clay.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Ores No. 13 and 14 in Fire Clay.
Sand Stone.
Ores 12, 11, 10, 9 in Shale.
Shale with ore balls Nos. 8 and 7.
Ore No. 6.
Shale with ore No. 5.
Coal.
Ore No. 4 in Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Shale and Coal together.
Ore No. 3 in Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Ore No. 2 in Fire Clay.
Ore No. 1 in Shale.
1869. ]
Feet above Tide.
1500
1450
1400
Thickness.
oO! 6”
1/ 6//
1/ 6//
1/ 6//
9 6B
5/ Ov
8/ O//
4/ 6//
1/ 6//
vil 4!
AY QO”
Ll) QO”
Q) ol
WW? Q//
39’ 0”
15’ 0”
3/ 0//
6/ Q//
9) O//
10’ 0”
44! Q!/
8//
10”
oF Ql
28/ 6//
11
Character of Rock.
Ore in Shale.
( Undermine in
| the 3/” Coal and
Upper all the Ore above
plick for 4’ will come
pand 1 down. If stack-
Ore" ed in rows and
self-washed for
|} a month, it will
| yield 40 0-0.
Coal.
Shaley Sand Stone.
Shale.
Coal.
Limestone.
Fire Clay.
Coal.
Shale.
Shale ferruginous.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale, brown.
Shale, sandy with balls.
Shaley Sand Stone.
Shale.
Coal.
Fire Clay.
Shales ferruginous.
Shale with balls.
Shale ferruginous.
Shale.
Sand Stone.
Shale.
Ore in Fire Clay.
Limestone.
Ore in Fire Clay.
Shale.
Sand Stone.
Coal.
Shale.
Limestone
Sand Stone.
[Tyson.
Tyson.]
Feet above Tide. Thickness.
1350
1300
1200
1150
1100
1050
6/
6/
6/
4!
1/
{/
3)
4)
6/
6/
30/
9!
1
24!
9)
3)
3)
6/
27!
8)
197
20/
1/
Q”
OQ”
Q”
6”
gi
Ql
Ql
Ql”
QV”
Q//
0”
(a
0”
0”
0”
6”
6/7 -
0”
0”
Qo”
OV
Al)
QO”
8”
0”
6
12
Character of Rock.
Shale.
Hard black band.
Shale very ferruginous.
Shale.
Coal Shaley. «
Coal hard. fe 8//
Coal good.
Sandy Fire Clay.
Ore in Shaley Fire Clay.
Limestone.
Sand Stone.
Shale.
( Ore balls.
Marine shells.
Balls in Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Coal.
Shale.
Coal.
( Shales.
| Fire Clay.
1 Sand Stone.
{ Not explored.
Coal.
Unknown.
Coal crop near top.
Sand Stone at bottom.
Ferruginous Shale.
+ Grey Shale.
Black Shale.
t Six feet Coal.
Fire Clay.
Shales with balls of ore.
Unknown.
Coal.
Shale.
Sand Stone.
Coal.
f Shales.
Fire Clay.
Shales.
| Fire Clay.
Coal.
February 5,
towrd
Su)
1869.] [Tyson.
Feet above Tide. Thickness. Character of Rock.
1000 OOM Fire Clay.
950 92/ 0” Sand Stone [XII].
This rock is constant. It makes the flat
summit of the west mountain; and,
north of Savage creek, has lying on it
isolated cubic blocks, fragments of
itself, as large as three story houses,
very remarkable objects.
ay! OY Large balls of ore.
900 14’ 6” Shale.
3// Shale Coal.
Ie ey Sand Stone, thin layers.
AL 04 Coal.
A GY Shale.
850 42/ Gg! (Sand Stone, &c., not explored.)
Te OM Ore in Shale.
800 83’ 0/ (Principally Sand Stone, ?)
750 ey OY Coal.
Buy Shale. Small interval.
QO Sand Stone, thin bedded.
Coe AVY Lowest known coal bed.
GOO Principally Sand Stone, but not much
550 explored.
90’ 0” Green Shale of XI.
450 2 ? Grey Limestone of XI.
Mr. Chase communicated the results of a careful discussion
of Philadelphia Life Tables, extending through 62 years, and
including more than 400,000 lives.
On motion of the Librarian, the subject of the propriety of
publishing the MSS. grammars of the Chol and Cokchiquel
languages, in the Society’s Library, was referred to the Pub-
lication Committee, to report thereon, after consultation with
Dr. Brinton.
Pending nominations Nos. 622, 623 were read.
At Prof. Coffin’s request and on motion of Prof. Kendall,
the Officers of the Society were authorized to sign a memo-
rial to Congress praying for a sufficient appropriation for ob-
serving properly the total eclipse in August next.
On motion of Mr. Fraley the renting or otherwise dispo-
sing of the Hall was referred to a committee consisting of
Messrs. Price, Fraley, Welsh, Rushenberger and Cresson.
And the Society was adjourned.
14
Stated Meeting, February 19, 1869.
Present, fourteen members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Dr. Horn, a newly elected member, took his seat.
Letters accepting membership were received from Samuel
Birch, dated British Museum, London, February 2d, and Wil-
liam H. Flower, dated College of Surgeons of England, Lon-
don, February 1, 1869.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the London
Antiquarian Society, Nov. 23, 1868, for No. 77, the Essex
Institute, Rhode Island Historical Society and University of
New York City, all for No. 80 of the Proceedings.
A letter from M. Chevalier announced the transmission of
a set of the reports of the Jury of the International Exposi-
tion of 1867.
A letter from Prof. Coppeé enclosed a receipt for Mariana’s
History of Spain.
Donations for the Library were announced from Prof. Zan-
tedeschi, the Russian Academy, French Geographical Society,
B. N. H. Society and Public Library, Mr. Hii K. Price, Dr.
Kirkbride, Prof. Cope and Hon. Charles Sumner.
The death of Charles N. Bancker, at Philadelphia, February
16, 1869, aged 91, was announced by Dr. Hays with appro-
priate remarks, and on motion of Mr. Fraley, Judge Cadwal-
lader was requested to prepare an obituary notice of the de-
ceased.
Mr. Lea communicated for publication in the Transactions
‘Remarks on Thirteen New Species of Crinoidea, from the
February 19, 1869. ] 15 [Cope.
Paleeozoic rocks of Indiana, Kentucky and Ohio, &c. By
Sidney S. Lyon of Louisville, with 4 plates,” which was re- |
ferred to a committee consisting of Mr. Lea, Mr. Cope and
Mr. Lesley.
The Secretary, in the absence of Dr. Leidy, communicated
for publication a memoir ‘On the Geological Age and Equi-
valents of the Marshall Group. By Prof. A. Winchell.”
Which was referred to a committee consisting of Mr. Lesley,
Dr. Le Conte and Dr. heidy.
A letter from Prof. F. V. Hayden communicated “ Notes
on the Geology of Wyoming and Colorado Territories, No. 2,
with 6 wood cuts, already cut, and two ink sketches,” which
was referred to the Secretaries with power to act.
Prof. Cope exhibited and described a jaw of Mylodon an-
nectens from the post-tertiary rocks of South America.
Prof. Cope exhibited the mandible of a gigantic sloth from the post-ter-
tiary of the Banda Oriental in South America. He stated that it belong-
ed to the genus Lestodon (Gervais) but approached in its characters the
Myodon of Owen. He pointed out the anterior canine teeth of Mega-
lonyx, the posterior canines of Lestodon, and the reduction of the same
in Mylodon to the character of small premolars, less than the molars.
In the species exhibited, the canine is removed to close proximity to the
molars, and was as large as the first, immediately following it. The species
differs not only in this respect, but in the form of this and other teeth
from the Mylodon robustus (Owen), to which it is nearly related. The
form of the symphysis is not very different, but is turned outwards at
the anterior angles and emarginate medially. The lateral margin con-
cave. The canine directed upwards, and more outwards than the mo-
lars. Its section presents longer straight inner and anterior sides, and a
short convex outer side, which is connected to the inner by an oblique,
slightly concave side. The second tooth or molar about the same size,
and of subtrifoliate section, the outer lobe more obtuse, and less strong-
ly separated by alveolar ridges than the two inner from each other.
Third molar quite oblique, directed backward and inward, the section
composed of four arcs separated by alveolar ridges. Posterior part of
alveolus of last molar broken away, the anterior part narrower and more
oblique than any other tooth.
Prof. Cope stated that the species seemed to be near the Lestodon
myloides of Gervais, which was however so briefly described as to be
scarcely recognizable. According to the characters of Lestodon, the
canine tooth appears to be at a greater distance from the molar than in
Cope.] 1 6 [Eebruary 19, 1869.
the present animal, where that distance is only twice as great as that
between the first and second molars.
Prof. Cope described several points of novelty and import-
ance in the memoir on the Fossil Batrachia of North America,
which the Society is publishing in Part 1 of Vol. XIV. of its
Transactions; and expressed a desire that the Society should
permit him to illustrate the memoir with additional plates.
He pointed out that all the tortoises of the Cretaceous yet discovered
were fresh water forms, many allied to Chelydra, and that there were no
extinct land tortoises or Testudinidae in North America, the species from
the Western Territories referred hitherto to Testudo being in fact Emy-
did. He called attention to the peculiar characters of the Mosasaurs
and of the Streptosauria, as not having been previously pointed out, and
stated there were eleven species of the first named group known to hin
from North America. One of these, M. depressus Cope, common in New
Jersey, is defined by the transverse ovate form of the vertebral centra
throughout the column, and the presence of a prominent rib of the outer
face of the quadrate bone, throwing the meatal pit inward, and not
reaching the proximal articular face.
He mentioned also the modifications of form in the Dinos skele-
ton, by which an approach to the Birds was indicated. Thus the ilium
from a vertical, assumed a transverse position, the acetabulum being
thrown upward and forward, while the great size and inferior and pos-
terior position of the other pelvic elements transformed the weight of
the viscera posteriorly, to beneath the support. The consequence of this
was the inclosure of a longer series of vertebra as sacral, derived from
the lumbar series, and the support of the body by a powerful hind limb,
more nearly beneath the centre of gravity than in other types of reptiles.
An additional approximation to the birds was seen in the hind limbs.
_ The head of the femur was transverse to the condyles, and the crest of
the ilium furnished with a very elevated crest. In the more quadrupedal
forms as Iguanodon and Hadrosaurus the crest was much curved out-
wards, while in the biped types as Laelaps and Pecilopleurum the crest
projected more forward. In the latter also the astrogalus embraced the
tibia in the closest manner, and presented to the foot at a remarkable angle.
In Compsognathus this element had united with the tibia as in birds.
The latter and Stenopelix Myo, he stated to be the best preserved injpelvic
characters. He stated that these affinities had been explained by him at
a meeting of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, in Feb.,
1867, and had since been confirmed by other authors.
Nominations Nos. 622 and 623, and new nominations Nos.
624, 625, 626 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
February 5, 1869.] 1 7 [Chase.
PHILADELPHIA LIFE TABLES.
By Puryy EARLE CHASE.
More than forty years ago Dr. Gouverneur Emerson, in the American
Journal of the Medical Sciences, began his discussion of the vital statis-
tics of Philadelphia.* His connection with the Board of Health gave
him ready access to the original returns, and after subjecting them to a
rigid scrutiny, he became satisfied that the sanitary condition of the city
was remarkably good.
Doctors W. S. W. Ruschenberger, Wilson Jewell, James N. Corse and
W. Lehman Wells, on behalf of the Committee on Epidemics and Me-
teorology, of the Philadelphia College of Physicians, subsequently pub-
lished some interesting local nozological tables and conclusions. I can-
not find that any other noteworthy use has been made of a valuable
mortuary record, which has been kept with great care, and without inter-
ruption, from the commencement of the year 1807 until the present
time.t+
At the request of the Provident Life and Trust Company of Philadel-
phia, I have recently computed two comparative life tables, from the
* Among the results developed by Dr. Emerson’s investigations connected with the movement
of population and vital statistics of Philadelphia, embracing a period of about thirty years from
the year 1807, when the first official Bill of Mortality was issued, are the following:
1. Great healthfulness of the city proper, in which the annual proportion of deaths to the popula-
tion was only 1 in 56 (See Am. Med. Journal for Nov. 1827).
2. Excessive mortality in the colored population (Ibid).
3. Improved condition of colored population as indicated by reduction of mortality.
4. Excessive mortality of children in the warm months, and demonstration of the fact that the
deleterious operations of heat are almost entirely confined to the first months of life, the influence
of the seasons upon infantile mortality being scarcely perceptible after the first year of life has
passed.
5. The excessive mortality of male over that of female children in the first stages of infancy,
and demonstration that this is not owing, as commonly supposed—to greater exposure of male
children to accidents, but to diseases and physiological causes peculiar to each sex (Am. Jour. of
Med. Sciences, 1827 to 1831).
7. Practical conclusions drawn from results last mentioned (Ibid).
8. Seasons when most births take place (Ibid. Nov., 1845).
9. Influence exerted through epidemic cholera and other depressing agencies, tending to
reduce_the preponderance of male births (Same Journal for July, 1848, p. 78).
j “From authority vested in the Board of Health, this municipal power makes it obligatory upon
physicians to give certificates designating the name, age, and sex of all who die under their care,
and sextons are bound by still heavier penalties not to permit the interment of any dead body
until such certificate is obtained, which he returns to the Health Office on the last day of every
week, for publication” (Emerson; op. cit., vol. I, p. 117).
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—C
Chase.] 1 8 [February 5,
returns of the Board of Health, and of the several monthly meetings of
the Society of Friends in the city and its immediate neighborhood.
The general Philadelphia table is more extensive than any table hith-
erto published for a single locality, being based upon records of 425,502
interments, 265,590 births, and seven successive decennial census enu-
merations. .
The Friends’ table is based upon records of 14,666 interments, 4,264
births, and eight enumerations of membership. This is the first table
ever published that affords any basis for estimating the sanitary advan-
tages of moderation, temperance, and a general regard for the laws of
health and morality. The tables which have been constructed from the
experience of different Tontines and Life Insurance Companies exhibit
some of these advantages, with the added indeterminate advantage of
medical selection.
The following definitions and explanations may facilitate the study of
the tables :
The possible life, is the limit which is sometimes attained in a given
district.
The probable life (‘vie probable’), is the term at which one half of
those who are born alive will have died. It is the age, the probability
of living beyond which is as great as that of dying before the age is
attained. :
The probable life at any age, is the term at which one half of those who
are living at that age will have died.
The expectation of life (‘vie moyenne’), is the average age which will
be attained by all who are born.
The expectation of life at any age, is the average after life-time of all
who are living at that age.
The mean expectation is the average after life-time of all who are living.
The proportionate mortality at any age, is the ratio of the number
dying during the year following that ege to the number living at the
precise age.
The vitality at any age, is in inverse ratio to the proportionate mortal-
ity atthatage. If, for example, out of 1000 children born alive the average
number of deaths under 1 year of age is 180.38, the proportionate mor-
tality per 1000 is 180.38, and the vitality is “""° or 5.54.
180 35
Neither the mean age at death nor the mean age of the living furnishes
a sufficient clue to the expectation of life, or any independent criterion of
salubrity. Emigration, immigration, excess of births over deaths or of
deaths over births, zymotic diseases, and other circumstances, variously
disturb the normal values which are embraced in a perfect life table.
Such a table represents an ideal stationary population, or one in which
the number of annual births is exactly equal to the number of annual
deaths, and one which is not affected by emigration or immigration.
1869. 19 [Chase.
By a joint examination, in accordance with the formulas of De Morgan,
Davies and Farr, of the numbers living at any given age and the num-
bers dying at the same age, the disturbances to which all populations are
subject can be mostly eliminated, and results obtained which will afford
a proper basis for comparisons.
There are, however, some elements of uncertainty which cannot be
removed by any method hitherto proposed. Among these are the fol-
lowing :
1. The old and still mooted doctrine of climacterics, or critical periods
of life in which some great constitutional change is supposed to take
place, appears to derive some confirmation from such irregularities as the
alternate diminution and increase of proportionate mortality, in the Car-
lisle table, at the ages 21, 22, 31, 33, 46, 50, 89, 90, as well as from the
increase of expectation, in the Carlisle table from 91 to 95, in Quetelet’s
Belgian table from 89 to 91, and in the Philadelphia table from 91 to 100.
2. Wherever a population is affected by immigration, two classes of
disturbance may be looked for; one arising from the poorer class of
immigrants, who live in the most unhealthy neighborhoods, exposed to
privations and hazards which increase the mortality of infancy and youth;
the other from a better class, like our house servants, the agents of im-
porting houses, and persons of some property, who increase the average
vitality towards the close of life.
3. In many places, especially in cities, almshouses and asylums for the
aged furnish comforts which tend to prolong life. The tendency is aided
by the freedom from care and anxiety, the infrequency of exhausting
mental effort, and the watchfulnéss of friends or nurses. -
4, Ina Society with birthright membership, like the Society of Friends,
nearly all the deaths in infancy and youth may be entered on the records.
But after reaching maturity the ties of membership are often sundered
for various reasons, and many of the deaths in old age may escape notice.
The ratios of apparent mortality will thus be affected unfavorably, during
the whole course of life.
According to the census of 1860, the foreign-born residents of Phila-
delphia constituted nearly thirty per cent. of the entire population. On
this account any comparisons with other life-tables either in infancy or old
age might convey an erroneous impression. But the mean expectation is
probably but little affected by the foreign element, and it may very
properly be considered in the following comparison with two of the most
celebrated and one of the most unfavorable foreign tables.
Comparative mean expectations :
rice London. Wc ae decisis ae eect ele 23.70 years.
hiladelphiaw ees. shies ee tree sitters on are eae d1.46 ‘*
Hants su molishe INOmos Males erento aerate srs: Siete ee
oe ee SCMeke DNA e ter mete talc tenet sucha cvetercre d2.30 6S
CraTLiSTE DEM cme tee a stiare te Amana ti laonetre ee let lect ast) tauclatehe a 32.66 <
RIOTS ae roan ened Neat) cere minaien ty ve act Shae Ie, 33.11 GO
Chasc.] 20
[February 5,
Notwithstanding the increased juvenile mortality consequent upon
immigration, the Philadelphia table shows a possible life of 114, a prob-
able life of 38.44, and an expectation of 35.09. I know no other city of
much magnitude in which so favorable vital conditions have ever been
reported.
In preparing the Philadelphia table the following values were ascer-
tained :
Ratio of deaths of colored persons to entire number of
deaths foriG2 ivearsa. i). seiarpiaie velar ete. eysianegs 8.7 per cent.
JDO, soROMN WAG To UK, mMNEDIHVOs oosccnadobacecocoacsoous 6.7 ee
Average mOLtalitiy. G2 VALS: «charter ieite eltrerele ayer 1 in 47.836.
a Colored mortality, 62 years.................... 1 in 27.766.
gs i of 1858 to 1862, inclusive....... 1 in 34.780.
Ratio of still-births to total births ...................... 4.3 per cent.
nomen pis ve bh COUPEE OVS apc Maes ale eles aS 8 Hae 9 oe
GC GG. Ibnmabarer LRAT (HO) OO OMEN A oS ooqodcenboondd0dKd 2 Ou vence
Gor OS GRMANS WO IHN oa cacbooosecbdcneesooodiopodesos (A oes
Naturaleannualbimerease reac cies sacle ol crieteecteri rere Peace
AWeragey a COTE OSA ce b aistboumattnr, carey cio emp ihan coc Byer OS
ne SG TyPeNTMIETEHNOM, ¢ sods oqoodsobs5c0c000s00b000 Bp. 6
Meamyacre cbicleat ins. ives. me ie reotenes.) tumuvaseetecrllen te ciel 23.57 years.
68). SO oye idae) JihpiNe eed oo anh woe too pogcodeaouTuseo.0S 24.29 ee
Dr. Emerson’s discussions showed a ratio of deaths of colored persons,
as great as 16 per cent. of the entire number of deaths ; an average white
mortality varying between 1 in 38.25 and 1 in 56.53; an average colored
mortality of 1in 19 from 1807 to 1820 inclusive, and of 1 in 27.2 from
1821 to 1830 inclusive. We have no means of determining the ratio of
colored mortality since the close of the war, but even if it should show a
temporary increase, there can be little doubt that the general sanitary
improvement noted by Dr. Emerson still continues. The diminution in
the per centage of colored deaths, from 16 per cent. to 6.7 per cent., is
attributable in part to this general improvement, and in part to the pre-
ponderating increase of the white population.
The advantages of regular habits are shown by the following compa-
risons :
Friends. Philadelphia. Advantage.
Maximum vitality (age 12)........ 310.56 257.7 20.49 per cent.
Average proportionate mortality
from 20 to 60 years of age..... 14.25 pat) ORB oS
Kixpectationvotelite ei. ane selec 43.73 35.09 24.62 *
Rrobableylife. ye) vaea teen aan 48.08 33.44 43.78 sé
Proportionate mortality at birth... 124.66 180.38 44.70 £6
at
1869.] [Chase.
PHILADELPHIA GENERAL LIFE TABLE.
Living, | Dying, Propor- | Expecta- Living, | Dying Propor- | Expecta-
A J tionate tion, A 5 ’! tionate tion,
S°| Namber, | Number| Mortality, | Number 8° | Number, | Number| Mortality, | Number
per 1000. | of years. per 1000. | of years.
0.|100,000 | 18,038 | 180.38 35.09 58 | 30,799 | 891 2893 | 1597
2 59 | 29908 | 905 3025 | 1543
; aes ew cae a ie 60 | 29,003 | 918 3165 | 14.89
31 69.995 | 2982] 4260 46.59 61 | 28,085 | 931 Bae | TBE
4 | 67013 | 2039 | 30.43 47.74 2) D7 5k 14946 34.84 | 1384
5 | 64,974 | 1,387 | 21.35 48.23 63 | 26208 | 961 AGG || 1B
i 64 | 25,247 | 978 38.72 | 1281
6 | 63,587 943 | 1483 48 27 < . Be
7 | 62.644 651 | 10.40 Aap), || EO eae) | ee OES deel:
8 | 61,993 470 | 7.58 47.49 66 | 23,273 | 1,016 43.64 | 11.81
9 | 61.523 362 | 5.88 46.84 67 | 22.257 | 1,036 AG 55) TBD
10 | 61,161 297 | 4.88 46.12 68 | 21.991 | 1,055 4975 | 1085
69 | 20.166 | 1,073 53.22 | 103%
11 | 60,864 951 | 414 45.34 2 : 2 Z
12 | 60,613 aaa See betes 70 | 19,093 | 1,087 56.94 9.95
13 | 60.377 938 | 3.95 370 71 | 18,006 | 1,096 60 88 9.52
14 | 60,139 955 | 424 49, 87 72 | 16,910 | 1,101 65 08 9.11
15 | 59,884 978 | 4.64 42.05 73 | 15.809 | 1,098 69.48 871
“4 | 14,711. | 1,090 74 10 832
16 | 59,606 307 | 5.18 41 24 c: e ee a oe
Ae || asses Sa | ene ve 75 | 13,620 1.076 78.96 7.94
18 | 58,956 378 | 6.40 39.69 76 | 12.545 | 1,054 84.06 758
19 | 58.578 414 | 7.10 38 4 77 | 11.491 | 1,028 89.44 7.23
20 | 58,164 456 | 7.83 38.21 78 | 10463 | 995 95.14 6.89
as 79 | 9468 | 959 | 101.20 6.57
21 | 57,708 493 8.55 37.51 : s is
3 | 56.686 560 | 9.88 36.17 gi | 7593 | 870 | 11456 5 Ot
24 | 56,126 587 | 1048 35 52 5 Gr23) Ne sto) nmoinos 5 OD
25 | 55,539 610 | 11.00 34.89 83 | 5,904 | 767 | 129.80 5.36
‘ BL BAB NTO) Ie 1ag 1S 5.09
26 | 54,929 629 | 11.45 34.28 : V :
27 | 54,300 643. | 1183 33.67 BD) eer || eal FEDS eee
28 | 53.657 653 | 1218 33 07 a6) Sie |) Ge 156.57 457
29 | 53,004 662 | 1250 32.47 87 | 318 | 5389 | 16920 4.32
30 | 52,342 672 | 1284 31.87 88 | 2646 | 484 | 183.42 410
s9 | 2162 | 439 | 20310 391
31 | 51,670 681) |) 13818 31.28 ye Me 2
“3s | ences Beet aes sae 90 | 1,723 | 3889 | 225.54 3.78
33 | 50,300 698 | 1388 30 10 91 | 1,334 | 319 | 239.32 3 63
34 | 49.602 706 | 14 24 99.52 92 | 1015 | 247 | 24300 3°75
35 | 48.896 716 | 14.63 28.94 93 768 | 187 | 94499 3.79
Ls 94 581 142 | 244.99 3 85
36 | 48.180 722, | 15.00 28.36 :
37 | 47.458 730 | 1538 Ba) PO Bee AOU cesta one
38 | 46,728 736 | 1576 97.22 96 332 80 | 239.67 404
39 | 45,992 743 | 1615 26 64 97 252 59 | 234.40 416
40 | 45,249 748 | 16.53 26.07 98 193 43 | 99554 498
e 99 150 31 | 205.67 4 38
41 | 44,501 754 | 1694 25 50
49 | 43747 tee | gees eat 00 119 23 | 192.76 4.39
43 | 42.987 7686 | 17.83 2436 || 101 96 18 | 186.42 4.31
44 | 42199) "72 | 18.30 93.79 || 102 78 14 | 18286 419
45 | 41,449 778 | 18.78 23.23 || 103 64 12 | 180.78 401
104 9 9 | 179.65 379
46 | 40,671 784 | 19.28 22.66
47 | 39.887 "39 | 19.78 9219 || 105 =o if Eds so o/b
48 | 39.098 795 | 2033 2154 || 106 35 6 78 60 316
49 | 38.303 800 | 20.90 2097 || 107 29 Be a leigins 2.75
50 | 37,503 807 | 21.50 20.41 || 108 24 6 | 189.04 995
5419 0
pin s6/eae) | ets | 22150) oes a) eoe a aes Claiesee maaultaealee
52 | 35,883 821 | 2288 19.28 a Pag 2
53 | 35,062 830 | 23.66 1872 || 111 7 4 1.05
Bt | 34.239 840 | 24.54 1817 || 112 3 2 80
55 | 33,392 851 | 2550 a A) wale 1 1 50
56 | 32,541 865 | 26.56 tz06 |) 21
57 | 31,676 27.70 16.51
Chase.]
Living,
Age amber,
0 | 10,000
1 8,753
2 8,242
3 7,970
4 7,778
5 7,641
6 7,542
7 7,470
8 7,417
9 7,377
10 7,346
i 7,319
12 7,296
i133 7,272
14 7,247
alts) 1,22
16 7189
17 7,154
18 7,115
19 7,07
20 7,022
21 6,968
22 6,910
23 6,848
24 6,782
25 6,714
26 6,645
27. 6,573
28 6,501
29 6,428
30 6,354
381 6,280
32 6,205
i: 6,130
34 6,055
385 5,979
386 | 5,903
37 5,828
3 5,752
39 5,676
40 5,600
41 5,525
42 5,450
43 5,379
44 5,801
45 5,227
46 | 5,153
47 5,07
48 5,006
49 4,932
50 | 4,859
51 4,784
52 4,709
53 | 4,632
54 | 4,553
55 | 4,470
56 4,385
57 | 4,296
Dying,
Number
Propor-
tionate
Mortality,
per 1000.
124.66
DBOrLrAO NokNb Ube
SOOM Pewee who
SMNSH HBOHMHMN DONNK ANON
a
SOOO
Ponce
(=)
an
2
ST
bo
22
[February 5, 1869.
PHILADELPHIA FRIENDS’ LIFE TABLE.
Expecta-
tion.
Number
of years.
3.73
43.89
50.89
51.61
51 87
51.79
51.46
50 95
50.32
49.59
48 80
AST
47.12
46 27,
45.43
44.60
43.79
43.00
42.24
41.50
40.78
40.09
39.43
38 78
38.15
387.53
36.92
36 31
35 71
35 11
34.51
33.92
33.32
32.72
32.12
31.52
30 92
30.32
29.71
29.10
28.49
27.87
27.25
26 62
25.99
25 36
24.71
24 06
23 40
22 74
22.08
21.41
20 75
20.09
19 43
18.78
18.13
17.49
Age.
Living,
Number,
4,204
4,108
4,007
3,903
3,794
3,680
3,562
3,440
3,314
3,184
3,049
2,910
2,768
2,622
2.473
Dying,
Number
HOR EPNPbpARE
Propor-
tionate
Mortality,
per 1000.
22.90
24.45
26.12
27.95
29 90
32 00
34 26
30.72
39.40
42.32
45.50
48.94
52.68
56.70
61.04
65.65
70.58
75.82
81.32
87 10
93.14
99 42
105.96
112 72
119 72
126.94
134.40
142.10
150 00
158.10
166 42
174 93
183.66
192 62
201 80
211 25
220.98
231.02
241.38
252 14
263.30
274,92
287.02
299.66
312.92
826.85
341 54
856.795
872.87
389 96
Expecta-
tion.
Number
of years.
16.87
16.25
15.64
15.05
14.47
13 90
13.34
12.80
12.27
11.75
11 25
TO Hy IS CoM WoO
bottle cc weocctw BRR ER Clore
WO DBADSOCH wRaMMO Hom
TNO RFOPNS FETE O QEEEO ob
Fae ee ae OURS
oro OOF
CONN SHO
Stated Meeting, March 5, 1869.
Present, eighteen members.
Dr. Woop, President, in the Chair.
Mr. Baird, lately elected a member, was introduced to the
presiding officer and took his seat.
Letters accepting membership were received from J. J. A.
Worsaae, dated Castle of Rosenborg, Copenhagen, February 4,
1869; from J. Chabas, dated Chalon sur Sadne, Feb., 1869;
from Hd. Lartét, dated Paris, No. 25 Rue Lacépede, February
15, 1869; from T. H. Huxley, dated Royal School of Mines,
Jermyn Street, London, February 16, 1869; and from W. M.
Gabb, dated Philadelphia, February 19, 1869.
A letter declining appointment to prepare ‘an obituary
notice of John Cassin was received from Dr. Bridges, dated
Philadelphia, February 20, 1869.
Letters acknowledging the receipt of the published Pro-
ceedings of the Society, Nos. 75, 76, 77, were received from
G. Kirchhoff, dated Heidelberg, October 22, 1868; from Pro-
fessor Hornstein, Director of the Prague Observatory, dated
November 5, 1868; and from the Royal Society of Antiqua-
res, Ospanlaan Sanne 1, 1868.
Letters of invoice were received from the Royal Seuica of
Antiquaries; the Jablonowsky Society of Leipsic, November
11, 1868; the Academy of Sciences at Vienna, November 4,
1868; the Swiss Polytechnic School at Zurich, November 27,
1868; the Royal University at Norway, Christiania, Novem-
ber, 1868; and the United States Legation at Paris, February
8, 1869.
24
A letter was read from M. A. Carlier to Mr. Durand,
respecting proceedings taken in the case of the Michaux
Legacy.
Donations for the Library were received from the Natural
History Society at Moscow, the Geographical Society and
Physical Observatory at St. Petersburg, the Royal University
of Norway, the Royal Saxon Society, the Prince Jablo-
nowsky Society at Leipsic, the Societies at Gorlitz, Emden,
Lausanne, and Geneva, the Academy of Sciences at Vienna,
the Geographical Society and Bureau des Ponts et Chaussées
at Paris, the Royal Astronomical, Meteorological and Chemi-
cal Societies of London, Sir John F. W. Herschel, the Bos-
ton Natural History Society, the New York lyceum, the
Franklin Institute, the Medical News, the Episcopal Church
Hospital, Gen. W. F. Palmer, the Rev. Albert Barnes of
Philadelphia, the Peabody Institute of Baltimore, the Public
Library of Cincinnati, the University of Michigan, and the
California Academy of Sciences at San Francisco.
A record was made of the decease of J. K. Paulding and
Alexander Stevens, M. D., of New York.
The committee to which was referred the paper on thirteen
new species of Crinoidea, in the Paleozoic rocks of North
America, in Kentucky, Indiana and Ohio, by Col. 8. 5. Lyon
of Louisville, presented their report, recommending its publi-
cation in the Transactions of the Society, which, on motion,
was so ordered.
The committee to which was referred the paper on the Mar-
shall Group, by Prof. A. Winchell, reported, recommending
its publication in the Proceedings; on motion, it was referred
to the Secretaries with power to act.
Pending nominations Nos. 622 to 626 were read.
‘And the Society was adjourned.
bo
Or
February 19, 1869.] {Ilayden.
NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF WYOMING AND COLORADO TERRITORIES.
INEOe2
By F. VY. HaypEn.
Before describing the geological character of the Laramie Plains and the
country to the west of it, I will attempt to present a resumé of the physical
geography of that very interesting region. If we look at the profile of
the route constructed by the Union Pacific Railroad for their road from
Omaha to Fort Bridger, we shall find that at Omaha, the initial point, the
altitude is 968 feet above tide level. At the mouth of Lodge Pole creek,
a distance of 377 miles, we have an elevation of 3528 or a gradual rise
in that distance of 2560’ or a grade of about 7 feet to the mile. From
the mouth of Pole creek to Crow creek crossing near Cheyenne 513.76
miles west of Omaha we have reached an elevation of 6019 feet, or an
average grade of over 9 feet to the mile for the entire distance.
At Evans’ Pass on the summit of the Laramie range, we have reached
the highest point in the Rocky Mountains, 8248’, a distance of 545.62
miles west of Omaha. The average grade is over 13 feet to the mile.
But for 100 miles west of Omaha the average grade of ascent increases
as we approach the mountains.
If we take the distance from Crow Creek Crossing at the foot of the
mountains to Evans’ Pass, ‘‘the Summit,’’ a distance of 31.86 miles, we
have an average grade of ascent of nearly 70 feet to the mile. We can
see clearly by these figures the plan of growth of that portion of our
continent west of the Mississippi. A number of these profiles have been
constructed across the continent from the Mississippi to the Pacific ocean,
from the north line to the south, all pointing to the same result, and all
agreeing substantially in the aggregate results.
Passing over this first range of mountains to the Laramie plains, from
Crow Creek Crossing to Laramie river 57.53 miles, and 571.39 miles west
of Omaha, the elevation is 7175 feet above tide water. Showing that
even in the plain country on the west side of the first range the elevation
is over 1000 feet higher than at the base of the mountains on the east side.
From the latter point westward there is a continued line of ascent and
descent produced by the same forces that elevated the whole Rocky
Mountain Chain. Passing the Humbolt mountains we then descend by
a moderate grade to the Pacific ocean. The intermediate portions are
occupied by a continued series of more or less elevated mountain ranges
with intervening valleys which are always at a considerable height above
the sea, but vary at different points from east to west. For example
the elevation of the Laramie plains near Fort Sanders is 7175 feet, at
Salt Lake Valley 4285, making a difference of 2990 feet. We shall en-
deavor to show hereafter that this difference in the elevation of the two
localities of nearly 3000 feet operates most favorably upon the agricul-
tural resources of Salt Lake Valley. While the summers in the Laramie
plains are very brief, and it will always be difficult under the most favor-
A. Pp. S.—VOL. XI—D
OF
Hayden.] 26 [February 19,
able circumstances to produce crops to any extent, the productions of
Salt Lake Valley are among the finest in the world.
We can see at a glance therefore that the whole country west of the
Mississippi is as it were an elevated Plateau, out of which rise, as if by
the bursting of the crust, a vast series of ranges of mountains, trending
in the aggregate nearly north-west and south-east, and each of the series
made up of an infinite number of minor ranges trending in almost every
possible direction. In many instances important ranges of mountains
are separated from the main chain by extended plains composed of creta-
ceous or tertiary formations, and without a knowledge of the geological
structure of the country, they would seem to be entirely disconnected.
The Black Hills of Dakota, occupy an area of 6000 square miles. If
we examine the map this important range seems to be entirely isolated
from the main range, but from the south-western side extends a low
anticlinal valley, just exposing the tertiary and for a portion of the dis-
tance the cretaceous beds, and linking the Black Hills with the Laramie
range near Fort Laramie.
Again, the same may be said of the Big Horn range, from the south-east
end of which along the valley of Poison Spring creek extends an anticli-
nal valley, joining the Big Horne range with the Laramie near the Red
Buttes. All these isolated ranges, however distant they may appear to
be from the main range, or however small they may be, are really
connected to the eye of the geologist. It is thus thatthe anatomy of this
great mountain system can be worked out in detail. Never can it be well
done, so as to command the unqualified approbation of the scientific
world, until the minutest topography and the geology are united together.
The northern portion of the Laramie range properly commences near
the Red Buttes. Here the nucleus of feldspathic granite or syenite is
concealed by the overlying unchanged beds, and a broad interval occurs
which is occupied by a great variety of formations, ranging from the
carboniferous to the most recent tertiary. In its southward extension
this range seems to flex around from an almost easterly trend to a south-
west direction, forming almost a half circle. It then joins on to the
main range in the neighborhood of Long’s Peak. Thus the Laramie
range constitutes the east side and the greater part of the north side of
the Laramie plains which forms, thus enclosed, a huge park. On the
south side is the Medicine Bow range, the loftiest ridges covered with
perpetual snow. Connected with this range also are numerous minor
ranges. The west side is an open rugged barren sage plain, with here
and there detached small mountains extending far westward toward
Salt Lake valley.
The Laramie range forms the most beautiful illustration of an anticli-
nal ridge I have ever met with in the Rocky Mountains, with the excep-
tion of the Black Hills of Dakota. Either one of these ranges if
thoroughly studied, would form excellent monographs of the physical
geography and geology of the mountain region.
The nucleus of the Black Hills is composed of red feldspathic granite
.
9
1869. ] = 7 [Hayden.
and other metamorphic rocks, and inclining from the flanks may be seen
the upturned edges of the Potsdam sandstone, Carboniferous limestones,
brick red sands and sandstones. ‘Triassic, Jurassic marls, Cretaceous
and Tertiary rocks, all dipping at various angles, but in such a way as to
be easily accessible to the student.
The Laramie range is equally systematic in its plan of development
but rather more complicated, and the results of erosive action are much
more strongly shown and the superficial deposits or drift in many places
conceal the underlying rocks. Like the Black Hills the Lamarie range
does not give rise to any important streams of water. Myriads of little
streams originate in or near the dividing ridge and cut their channels
down the'slopes and flow into the North or South forks of the Platte.
The main branch of the North Platte rises in the range of mountain
which forms the north side of the Middle Park, very near Long’s Peak.
It takes a course a little west of north, flows through the middle of the
north park, cutting its way through immense canons between the North
Park and the Laramie plains. It then continues\nearly a north course
through tertiary as well as cretaceous rocks to its junction with the
Sweet Water, when it bends around to the eastward so that near the Red
Buttes its course is nearly south-east until it reaches the main Platte
near Long. 101°.
The Sweet Water, which is the principal branch of the North Platte,
rises in the southern end of the Wind river mountains, and flows nearly
east and unites with the North Platte near Independence. These
streams flow through nearly every variety of geological formations
which occur in the West. From the junction of the Sweet Water to
Red Buttes, it flows through granite, carboniferous limestone, red beds,
jurassic marls, and White river tertiary beds. From the Red Buttes,
through lignite-tertiary to a point about 100 miles north-west of Fort
Laramie. There the White river tertiary beds overlap the lignite-tertiary,
and then contiuue to the forks of the Platte.
The Medicine Bow and the two Laramies are important branches
of the North Platte, and take their rise in the lofty snow capped moun-
tains on the south side of the Laramie plains. The region north of the
North Platte is mostly a vast sage plain and but few small branches flow
in from that direction, but a multitude of small streams cut deep chan-
nels through the sides of the Laramie range and flow into the North
Platte. as
From. Red Buttes to Fort Lamarie, a distance of 150 miles, many
beautiful little streams rise in the Laramie and pour a good volume of
water into the Platte. These creeks occur every few miles, and in their
passage from the mountain they have not only worn a deep channel in
the steep side of the mountain, sometimes 1000 feet or more in depth,
but they have also scooped out a wide deep valley which affords the best
of pasture, ground for stock in summer and warm sheltered places in
winter.
The main branch of the South Platte rises in the range of moun-
y
Hayden.] 28 ; [February 19,
tains which bounds the west side of the south park, and flows about
north-east to Cache la Poudre, and there bends round slightly toward the
east and joins the main Platte. The little branches that flow from the
mountain sides are very numerous, and each one cuts a tremendous
channel through the sides of the mountain, affording most excellent sec-
tions of the strata for the geologist. Nearly all the branches that rise
in the plains have very wide valleys, but are mostly dry, especially in the
latter part of the summer and autumn. Although the Platte river is
never navigable at any season of the year, yet the area drained by it is
immense, at least 800 miles from east to west and 350 from north to
south, or an area of nearly 300,000 square miles; and yet the North
Platte is one of the minor branches of the Missouri river.
The South Platte flows through the different formations along the
flanks of the mountain ; and in its course through the plains cuts the
lignite-tertiary for 50 miles or more, when the White river tertiary over-
laps the plains to the junction.
The above brief remarks are intended principally to show by the
geography the gigantic scale upon which every thing in this Western
Country is planned, that even the district drained by the Platte and its
branches is larger than all New England, New York and Pennsylvania.
September ist, I left Fort Sanders with my party to examine the
country along the southern border of the Laramie plains. We passed
over the different beds of the cretaceous period for about 30 miles, until
we reached a point near Cooper’s creek, when indications of the tertiary
begin to overlap the cretaceous.
The examples of the erosive action of water along the northern side
of the mountains that border the Laramie plains are numerous. In the
valley of Cooper’s creek near the foot of the mountains there is a trian-
gular space about five miles long, and two or three miles wide on the
south-west side. On the south side there is a hill 500 feet high, the sum-
mit of which is composed of drift, and the surface paved with partially
worn rocks. On the north-west side there is a long ridge, the top of
which is composed of the yellowish sandstones of cretaceous formation
No. 5, in which a few characteristic species of fossils, like Inoceramus,
occur. These ridges seem to converge about two miles below the Stage
Station, so that the creek passes through a sort of gorge. The valley of
the creek is covered quite extensively with drift materials derived from
the neighboring mountains.
Six miles west of Cooper’s creek we find the first good exposure of
coal. The upper cretaceous beds crop out occasionally in that vicinity,
but are overlapped by the coal bearing strata.
The slopes are all so gentle and the superficial drift covers the country
to such an extent that I found it difficult to get a good section. No. 5
(cretaceous) seems to pass gradually up into the coal-bearing beds, and
the change in the sediments of the two systems is slight.
What appears to be the lowest bed of the coal-bearing scries in this
region, is a brown grit, very loosely aggregated with, sometimes, irregu-
IC
1869. ] 29 [Hayden.
lar layers of sandstones ; at other times inclosing concretions, with con-
centric layers or composed of thin laminze and readily cleaving in pieces
on exposure to the atmosphere. JImmediately underneath the coal les a
bed of drab clay varying in thickness from three to five feet. The first
locality where the coal is exposed by the uplifting of the beds is near a
small lake. The dip is about 10°° towards the north-east and from the
mountains. There is about six to eight feet of pure and impure coal
together. Above, is a bed of drab clay ; and over this again a layer of
fine grit, capped with hard-sandstone. The clay over the coal is full of
small rounded nodules of iron and yellow sandy concretions.
About a mile west from this locality is another outcropping of coal.
The bed is here separated by about 23 feet of drab arenaceous clay, with
five feet of excellent coal above and six to eight feet below, making in
all from ten to twelve feet of solid coal. Some of it has a dull bitumi-
nous look, other portions are as glistening and black as anthracite.
Above the coal is the usual clay bed, many layers in which are largely
composed of the stems and leaves of plants. Above this there are beds
of loose rusty brown sand and sandstone with some ferruginous conere-
tions ; and a layer of light brown very compact silicious rock caps the
hill. The dip of the beds is not more than 3° to 5°. At the immediate
entrance to the mine the inclination is about 5°. The coal can be easily
wrought and the mine well drained, in spite of its clay roof. The coal
is of excellent quality, but like most of the brown coals of the west,
crumbles on exposure to the atmosphere, as appears from the condition
already of the large coal heaps in front of the mine.
So far as I have been able to ascertain, I am inclined to believe that
the coal bed already alluded to is the lowest in the region and identical
with the one so successfully worked at Carbon Station on the line of the
Union Pacific Railroad ; but I do not think that it is the oldest coal bed
in the tertiary series of the West.
The valley of Rock creek is from three to five miles in width and evi-
dently a valley of erosion. On the west side of it there is a ridge at
least 500 feet high, composed of tertiary beds, which in some places
incline 10° to 15°, but the general dip is not more than 5°.
On both sides of the stage road for ten miles west of Rock creek there
is a large area covered with huge piles of rusty brown sandstone, mostly
concretionary. In some localities a great many impressions of deciduous
leaves were found. The tertiary beds extend to the mountains and form
a large part of the foot hills. Here lofty wall-like exposures of sand-
stone make their appearance, giving a very rugged appearance to the
country. As far as the eye could reach we saw peculiar looking pyramidal,
conical and dome-shaped hills, from 300 to 500 feet high, composed of
alternate layers of rusty yellow sandstone and greenish gray indurated
sands, which are sometimes in the valleys of streams exposed for a thick-
ness of 1000 or 1500 feet. These beds incline gently from the mountains,
about north-east.
Since crossing the Big Laramie river exposures of the red beds have not
30
Hayden. ] 2) [February 19,
been observed in the foot hills of the mountains. Usually they form
a most conspicuous feature.in the scenery. Their absence here is due
either to the comparatively small erosive action, insufficient to wear away
the cretaceous and tertiary beds; or to the fact that they are covered
with a thick deposit of drift. The inclination of the beds are gentle and
the ascent of the mountain side is as it were by steps; one series of foot
hills rising slowly above another, until the snow capped ranges are
reached. In this region all the hills, and even the gorges through which
the little streams flow, are so covered with debris and the whole surface
is so clothed with grass, that the rough points are smoothed down and
the underlying rocks are difficult to see. Hven Elk mountain, which
must rise at least 1500 feet above the bed of Medicine Bow creek, is so
smooth and so covered with grass, that the rocks are nowhere visible.
North of the road for 30 miles or more, the tertiary beds are on the
contrary worn by atmospheric agencies into a great variety of rugged
forms, so that the scenery recalls portions of the ‘‘ Bad Lands” on the
Upper Missouri composed of the same formations. Fig. 1 illustrates the
character of the coal-bearing formation of the Upper Missouri, but is
equally descriptive of the region under notice. The feature of greatest
interest is that which affords evidence of comparatively recent glacial
action, not merely in valleys of erosion, but in vast deposits of water-
rolled rocks, everywhere visible. The mountain sides toward the plains
are literally paved with rounded boulders, commonly of no great size ;
but the sides of the hills opposite the mountains, have scarcely any on
them, and are in most cases covered with bushes or with grass. The
bottoms of the streams are also covered with pebbles or boulders ; and
the nearer the mountains the larger and more numerous these rocks
become.
FIG. 1.
The Medicine Bow creek, a fine mountain stream fringed with a con-
siderable belt of cotton-wood, has a valley extending far into the moun-
tains, with a gradual ascent. It is by far the most beautiful yalley west
(9)
1869. ] v0 1 [Hayden.
of the Laramie river. Although covered thickly with boulders the soil
is good, and the grass excellent. It has been for years a favorite pasture
ground.
Elk mountain is a short range of spurs with its highest point fronting
the creek ; it resembles the short range, with abrupt front, east of the
Little Laramie. The metamorphic rocks have been uplifted, while the
unchanged rocks have remained quiet, or been let down at the foot of
the mountain, without leaving that series of upheaved ridges which we
find running along the base of most of the mountains. The range is
about 10 miles long, forming what I have called an abrupt anticlinal ;
that is, on one side of the mountain the anticlinal is complete, the un-
changed rocks inclining from the mountain in regular order of sequence;
while on the mountain side the rocks are nearly vertical, and the sedi-
mentary beds jut up against the base, their edges being entirely con-
cealed. Against the north side of Elk mountain the cretaceous and
some of the tertiary beds jut so abruptly that all the older rocks are
concealed, while on the opposite side, the entire series, from the granite
nucleus to the cretaceous formation, may be measured across their up-
turned edges.
Along the immediate base of the mountains there is a belt of country
which in many instances might be called a monoclinal valley. It has
been even more smoothed by erosion than any of the valleys of the
streams, and aiways runs at right angles to them. ‘Through this
valley of erosion the old stage road and Western Union Telegraph line
is located.
North of the road can be seen a series of upheaved ridges somewhat
irregular in their continuity but gradually receding northward like sea
waves. The first ridge is composed of aseries of dark brown indurated
clays and sands, with layers of more or less laminated rusty sandstone of
fine texture, and tendency to concretionary forms, varying rapidly in
thickness from 2 to 10 or 12 feet, dipping N. 20°? W. from 5° to 10°, 20°
west of north. In this ridge are quite extensive beds of lignite, one of
which is about six feet thick separated into three parts by layers of clay.
In the harder layers above and below are great quantities of indistinct
vegetable impressions. The interval between the first main ridge and
the second is about 15 miles, and in that interval several lignite beds -
crop out with layers of light gray fine grained siliceous rock.
The second main ridge is composed of a variety of beds inclining 3° to
5°, the general color being brown, or light drab, while the harder layers
are rusty sandstones. One bed, perhaps 50 feet thick, is of fine gray
indurated sand with a greenish tinge. At the summit of this ridge were
very distinct indications of the lignite bed at some period in the past.
Several feet of rocks were baked to a brick red_ color, and fragments of
completely fused rock lay scattered about. From the bed of the Medi-
cine Bow to the summit of the second ridge I estimated that 1200 to 1500
feet of strata were exposed to view, and from the presence of lignite and
deciduous leaves I regarded them all as belonging to the tertiary series.
Some of the sandstones are made up of an aggregate of crystals of
oo
Hayden. ] 2) [February 19,
quartz and feldspar, showing that the materials were derived at least
in part from the metamorphic rocks. Many of these sandstones disinte-
grate by exfoliation, or exquamation, and have the rusty spherical concre-
tions scattered through them.
The main trend of these ridges is N. E. and $. W. The general ap-
pearance of the country is extremely desolate and cheerless; scarcely
any vegetation but sage and grease-wood ; with here and there a little
lake, which from its alkaline character only adds to the dreariness of the
scene.
Near the summit of the second ridge in the burnt rocks are quite
abundant impressions of plants ; and more especially lower down, about
the middle of the ridges, there is a layer of the iron rocks about 2 feet
in thickness largely composed of fragments of leaves.
A few miles west of Fort Halleck a very conspicuous hill, called Sheep
mountain, is composed of carboniferous limestones, red beds; and is
probably capped with lower cretaceous rocks. These beds incline 252,
but a very hard bed of sandstone capping the summit dips 35°. .There
appears to be an unusual thickness of triassic (?) rocks at this locality.
The average dip of the strata is from 80° to 50°, varying between west
and north.
FIG. 2.
From Medicine Bow river to Rattle Snake Pass, a distance of about 30
miles, the road extends through a monoclinal valley.* For nearly our
* Vig. 2 illustrates the character of the upheaved ridges which everywhere are seen upon the
margins of the mountain ranges, extending in many cases for miles, like waves; and the geologist
can walk across the upturned edges of all the formations from the granite to the most recent ter-
tiary inclusive.
)
1869.] 5 [Hayden.
entire route the road seems to form the line of separation between the
eretaceous and tertiary rocks, the former being well displayed on our
left, jutting up against the mountain sides; the latter extending in wave
like ridges into the distance on our right. As we approach Pass creek
however about 5 miles to the east, the cretaceous beds reveal themselves
clearly on the right side of the road, No. 5 attaining a great thickness ;
while, on the left, inclining from Sheep mountain Numbers 3 and 2 are
very plainly shown in a series of irregular and rather low ridges. All
along Elk mountain the red beds are visible but not conspicuous, and
they do not give color to the debris at the foot of the hills. In this
vicinity the tertiary beds must be at least 5000 feet thick, which, with an
equal thickness of the cretaceous, makes in all at least 18,000 feet, a
larger development than I know at any other point to the eastward.
Indeed we shall be able to show that these formations continue to in-
crease in thickness as we go west.
On the north side of Pass creek we have an uplift of rather fine grain
yellow sandstone, which presents a front like a wall composed generally
of vertical columns. On the summit are isolated piles of every form,
the relics of erosion. The sandstone is about 200 feet in thickness and
the ridge inclines northward at an angle of about 19°. The trend of all
these ridges varies between north and west.
As we emerge from the hills through the Pass on the Pass creek, we
strike a vast open plain, and the ridges of upheaval seem to pass off and
die out en echelon in the plain, the ends making a gentle flexure from
the west northward, so as to form one side or rim of the plain. There
appears to be in these formations many alternate beds of brownish yel-
low sand and sandstones, the whole readily yielding to atmospheric in-
fluences, covering the hills as well as the valleys, with a great depth of
fine sand, from which the long lines of harder sandstone project. These
ridges of upheaval run at various distances from each other, from 100 to
1000 yards, with monoclinal valleys intervening.
The broad plain west of Elk mountain must be a region of depression;
or a portion of the country left undisturbed while the surrounding parts
were elevated. As far as the eye can reach this plain appears to be per-
fectly level; and no cuts to show the character of the underlying beds.
A thick deposit of drift covers every thing. On its northern side the
mountain ridges seem to trend about north-east and south-west, the
southern end sloping gently down with the plain. The rusty calcareous
sandstones which form the inner ridges facing the plain are undoubtedly
cretaceous and incline 80° to 45°. These rusty sandstones here form a
belt about 15 miles in width, with intercalated layers of yellow arena-
ceous material covered with grass, only the harder layers projecting here
and there above the surface. In one of these higher ridges of sandstone
a Baculite (B. ovatus) was found. In another ridge was a seam about
six inches in thickness composed entirely of a small oyster about the
size, ‘‘though probably distinct from’’ O. Congesta. Inthe plain country,
A. P. 5. —VOL. XI—E
(>)
Hayden. ] 34 [February 19,
even far distant from the mountains, the rocks are more or less disturbed,
but generally not exposing older beds than the cretaceous.
We find also that there is an irregular series of anticlinals and syncli-
nals resembling somewhat, but on a gigantic scale, the furrows in a
ploughed field. Not unfrequently we meet with a high synclinal
ridge, formed of rocks inclining toward each other; and then following
the same beds along and across the ridges we shall find them dipping
away from each other making a synclinal valley.
I have given my observations along this route somewhat in detail from
the fact that no accurate information concerning the geology of this
region has ever been published; and because we have had no definite
data for coloring a geological map. Our course was along the Overland
Stage Road just at the base of the mountains, on the south side of the
Laramie plains, from 5 to 20 miles south of the Union Pacific Railroad
line ; and by comparing my observations of the geology along the stage
road with those along the line of the railroad it will be seen that there
are many points of difference. As I have before remarked, the-Laramie
range of mountains forms one of the most complete and beautiful anti-
clinal systems in the West.
The Laramie plains, as the area enclosed by these mountains is called,
exhibits a broad, undulating almost treeless, surface about 60 miles long
from East to West, and 50 miles broad from North to South. From Fort
Sanders along the stage route to Little Laramie river, the distance is
about 18 miles. The surface is quite undulating, but all the slopes are
moderate in their inclination. All the basis rocks belong to the creta-
ceous period. At the crossing of the Big Laramie may be seen a small
thickness of the black clays of No. 2, and here and there are isolated
hills which show the yellow chalky layers of No. 3. Some of the higher
ridges which extend down into the plains from the foot of the mountains
reveal here and there the rusty yellowish arenaceous marls of No. 5.
From Little Laramie Station to Cooper’s creek the distance is 15 miles.
Over this interval the cretaceous rocks prevail and belong mostly to the
upper portion of that period. There are probably isolated patches of
tertiary overlapping the cretaceous beds. One of these isolated areas of
tertiary occurs about two miles north of Cooper’s Creek Station on the
west bank of the creek where an excellent coal bed has been opened
nine feet thick. The coal is quite pure, compact, but rather light, and
burns well. I do not think it will be continuous over a very large area,
but it will yield a large amount of fuel before it is exhausted.
From this point westward nearly to Fort Bridger, and perhaps beyond,
the tertiary beds may be said to prevail in the plain country. Rocks of
older date with comparatively few exceptions are not seen except in
close proximity to the mountains. In some instances the mountains
abut abruptly on the plains, the tertiary or cretaceous beds jutting
against the granite or igneous nucleus, and concealing for long distances
all the older rocks. Again, intervening between the plain country and
the principal mountain ranges are 50 to 100 miles of what: may be called
9
1869. ] ‘ 39 [Hayden.
foot hills, or minor ranges of the mountains, in which are exhibited on a
grand scale the entire series of unchanged rocks known to exist in this
country.
In the mountains near the sources of the Little Laramie the red beds
show themselves in very great thickness and give to the scenery pecu-
liarly picturesque features.* Near Elk mountain the red beds appear
again ; but in the interval they seem to be partially concealed either by
drift or cretaceous and tertiary beds. It will be impossible to represent
minute details of the geology of this country by colors except on a care-
fully prepared topographical map constructed on a much larger scale
than any that we have. We are satisfied, however, whether the older
formations are well shown or are concealed entirely, or in part, that they
either do now or did once extend across the country with a nearly uni-
form thickness.
= ' TE ——
iq —<. saiibnanes sa
My oe Ny A a 0 NN ni UNS rr
sally
=
We will now return to Laramie City and examine the geological char-
acter of the country along the line of the Union Pacific Railroad west-
ward. From Laramie City to Cooper’s Lake Station, a distance of 25.6
miles, there is a good degree of uniformity in the character of the coun-
* The action of the atmosphere upon these brick red sandstones of the Triassic Age is beau-
tifully shown in the wood cut, Fig. 3, taken from a photograph. These worn sandstones form a
conspicuous feature in the scenery of the Laramie Plains.
36
Hayden.] 2) [February 19
y y 19,
try. On our right the Laramie range appears like a wall bending round
to the north-west and west, and finally disappearing from view at Coop-
er’s Creek Station. Near the crossing of the Big Laramie river we sce
on our right the red beds which are somewhat marked. We can follow
them up to the foot of the mountains by their peculiar brick red color.
Then come the cretaceous rocks, especially the upper members of the
group, soon after crossing the Laramie river, and continue to a point
about 5 miles east of Como Station, more than 60 miles west of Laramie
City. There may be some few isolated patches of the tertiary beds.
The principal rocks seem to belong to No. 5.
Carmichael’s Cut east of Rock Creek is a locality quite well known.
The strata cut through are mostly rather friable fine grained rusty gray
sandstones, with bluish brown calcareous concretions of various sizes
scattered through them, which when broken open reveal a great variety
of shells—Baculites, Ammonites, Inoceramus, and many other species
characteristic of No. 4 and 5, which undoubtedly blend throughout this
region, and cannot be separated as distinct divisions of the system.
No. 3 has not been observed along the immediate line of the railroad,
but it is well showed in many localities in the Laramie plains.
From Laramie City to Cooper’s Station the country as far as the eye
can reach presents a cheerful appearance. The irregularities of the sur-
face are smoothed down and a long stretch of level prairie is covered
with grass, with here and there a grass covered ridge or rounded butte.
The basis rocks are mostly indurated arenaceous clays or loose yellow
sands which yield readily to atmospheric influences. There are many
rounded arenaceous concretions, and sometimes a thin layer of laminated
sandstone. There is a slight disturbance of the beds; and the ridges
of upheaval seem to trend nearly east and west.
As we proceed westward from Cooper’s Station we find the black
clays of No. 2, and the appearance of the country becomes dreary and
sterile in the extreme. They extend to a point about 5 miles east of
Como. The waters are alkaline, and there is no timber along the creeks
except stinted willows, and very little grass or vegetation of any kind ;
as far as the eye can reach nothing but black plastic clays.
Just before reaching Como we come to a very interesting quarry of
sandstone from which the materials for the construction of the extensive
railroad buildings at Laramie City and Cheyenne are obtained. The
rock is a gray, rather friable, sandstone, and occurs in isolated patches
resting on the shaly clays of No. 2, and are so filled with fragments of
vegetable impressions, sometimes quite distinct deciduous leaves, that
one is reminded of the tertiary sandstones. J am inclined to think how-
ever that it is a local deposition of sandstone in the cretaceous series.
This point and the district about Como is extremely interesting to the
geologist, and there are some curious problems yet to be solved.
At Como Station the railroad runs for some distance through a distinct
anticlinal valley, the strata inclining away to each side. The south side
of the road exhibits the most complete series of the beds. A high ridge
or
1869.] ol [Hayden.
is composed of jurassic beds mostly capped with the sandstones of No. 1,
while as far as the eye can extend southward the low wave like ridges of
No. 2 can be seen. Towards the southwest the anticlinal valley seems
to close up, but north-eastward expands indefinately, and extends no
doubt to the Laramie mountains. In the valley the red arenaceous beds
are quite conspicuous.
These jurassic rocks are composed for the most part of alternate layers
of loose sands and some harder beds of sandstones, but there are a few
layers of sandstone and marl; and in these are great quantities of an
Ostrea, Pentacrinus, Asteriseus, and Belemnites densus, all well known
jurassic types.
These beds throughout the jurassic series are full of tidal ripples, mud
markings and irregular laminee of deposition, indications of a shallow
water deposit. All the fossils are badly broken and worn as if they had
been transported from a great distance and deposited in turbulent waters.
About a mile west of the station the road cuts through the full series of
jurassic beds with Nos. 1 and 2 of the cretaceous inclining north-west at
an angle of 45° to 50°.
From a point about 10 miles east of Como to St. Mary’s Station, for a
distance of about 50 miles, the tertiary formation occupies the country
with the sands, sandstones and clays peculiar to it and also numer-
ous coal beds. The most marked development of the coal beds is at
Carbon Station, about 80 miles west of Laramie Station. The rocks
incline nearly south-east or south and east. Three entrances have been
made to mine a bed 9 feet thick. The openings follow the dip and con-
sequently descend. The mines are about 300 yards from the railroad; a
side track has been laid to them. More than 1000 tons of coal have
already been taken out, and the Union Pacific Railroad Company are
ready to contract for any amount that can be supplied. The coal at Car-
bon is of the best quality of tertiary splint, very compact and pure. It
is not as hard as anthracite, but the miners informed me that it was
more difficult to work than the bituminous coals of Pennsylvania. It is
used to a great extent on the locomotives, and the engineers speak in
high terms of it. Over the coal is what the miners call slate, a somewhat
earthy bed breaking into slabs showing woody fibre, and much of it look-
ing like charred wood or soft charcoal. As we pass up in the section
fragments of deciduous leaves are seen more distinctly, and finally the
whole graduates into a dark drab clay. At the bottom of the coal are
thousands of impressions of deciduous leaves, such as Populus, Platanus,
Tilea, &c. Some of the layers of rock, 2 to 4 inches in thickness, are
wholly composed of these leaves, in a good state of preservation, and so
perfect that they could not have been transported any great distance.
The Union Pacific Railroad Company have placed their coal interests
in charge of Mr. Thomas Wardell, an old English miner, who is con-
stantly employed in prospecting and opening mines the whole length of
the road. At Carbon he has erected six pretty cottages, as residences
for the miners, and a number more are in process of building. At
9
Hayden.] 38 [February 19,
Separation and Point of Rocks other villages will be built. All the
apparatus for permanent and extended mining operations are being
gradually introduced. Nearly all the wood now along the line of the
road has to be transported from 10 to 40 miles, and in two years from
the present time most of it within a reasonable distance of the road will
have been consumed. The future success of this great thoroughfare is
therefore wholly dependent on the supply of mineral fuel, and its im-
portance cannot be too highly estimated.*
From St. Mary’s to Rawlings Springs, a distance of about 30 miles,
the railroad passes over rocks of cretaceous age. No coal beds need be
sought for in the immediate vicinity of the road, although it is quite
possible that on the north side of the road isolated patches of tertiary con-
taining coal may be found. The railroad from a point about 8 miles east
of Benton to Rawlings Springs, passes through one of the most beautiful
anticlinal valleys I have seen in the West. On either side the rusty gray
sands and sandstones dip away from the road at an angle of 10° to 15e.
This anticlinal valley is most marked near Fort Steele at the crossing of
the North Platte.
About 5 miles east of Fort Steele I made a careful examination of a
railroad cut through a ridge of upheaval which inclined about south or a
little east of south. We have, exposed here, commencing at the bottom :
1. Gray fine grained sandstone, rather massive and good for building
purposes and easily worked, 80 feet thick—dip 25°.
2. A seam, 2 feet thick, of irregular black indurated slaty clay, with
layers of gypsum all through it then 2 feet of aranaceous clay.
3. Ten feet of rusty gray compact sandstone.
4, Hight feet of clay and hard arenaceous layers, very dark in color,
passing up into harder layers which split into thin lamin, the surfaces
of which are covered with bits of vegetable matter.
5. About 50 feet of rusty yellowish gray sandstone. All these sand-
stones contain bits of vegetable matter scattered through them.
6. 100 to 150 feet of steel-brown indurated clay with some iron concre-
tions. The clay is mostly nodular in form.
7. A dark brown arenaceous mud rock, quite hard, 80 feet.
From bed 5 I obtained numerous species of marine shells, among them
a species of Ostrea and Inoceramus in great numbers. The upper surfaces
of the hard clay layers appeared as though crowded with impressions of
sea-weeds or mud markings. In another railroad cutting about 4 miles
* Mr. J. P. Carcou, an assistant on the survey, made an analysis of a fair specimen of the coal
from the Carbon mines with the following result:
Moisture at 100° C. 11.60.
Volatile Combustible Matter, 27.68.
Fixed Carbon, 51.67.
Ash, 6.17.
Sulphur, 2.88,
Color of Ash, light grey.
Specific gravity, 1.37.
Weight, per cubic yard, 2212 tbs.
(>)
1869. ] 39 [Hayden.
east of Rawlings Springs I obtained the same Jnoceramus and a large
species of Ammonite. These fossils are important in establishing the
age of these rocks.
At Rawlings’ Springs are some very interesting geological features.
At this locality the elevatory forces were exerted more powerfully than
at any other point along the railroad from Laramie Station to Green
river. The entire series of rocks are exposed here, from the syenites to
the cretaceous inclusive. The railroad passes through an anticlinal
opening. To the south of the road are variegated gray, brown and red-
dish siliceous rocks dipping 5° to 10° S$. W. A very hard bluish lime-
stone resting upon them I have no doubt is carboniferous, although I
was unable to find any fossils in this region. North of the road ridges
of upheaval stretch away toward the north-west and attain a height of
1200 to 1500 feet above the road. On careful examination the red syenite
may be found exposed in a number of places, and gives us the opportu-
nity of studying the relation which the unchanged rocks sustain to the
metamorphic. The syenite beds dip 70° about 8. E., the unchanged beds
resting upon them in nearly a horizontal position. The layers imme-
diately on the syenite are a beautiful pudding stone of rounded quartz
pebbles and feldspar, and above it layers of fine siliceous rock with thin
intercalations of clay, the whole having the position and appearance of
Potsdam sandstone. Iam inclined to believe that we have here lower
silurian representatives. In all cases these rocks repose on the upturned
edges of the syenite ; sometimes nearly horizontal ; again inclining 3° to
10°. In one or two places these lower silurian (?) beds are lifted a thou-
sand feet or more into the air, still maintaining a nearly horizontal pos-
ture. On the mountain sides the beds are broken off so as to incline 50°,
60°, up to nearly 90°.
These siliceous rocks, covered with ripple marks, Ge., afford excellent
building stone, and are much used by the railroad company. They
reach a thickness of 500 to 800 feet. Upon them rests the blue lime-
stone, 30 to 40 feet thick ; then variegated sandstones ; and the red beds
in the distance.
From the tops of these ridges one can see numbers of both synclinal
and monoclinal valleys. There is one monoclinal valley, 3 to 5 miles
wide, which stretches far into the north-west, a smooth and level grassy
prairie. All these ridges have suffered great erosion, and the silurian (?)
beds are planed and grooved even to a greater extent than the more
recent beds. Everywhere the evidences of erosion during the drift
period are on a gigantic scale.
A fine sulphur spring from under the bed of blue limestone gives name
to the station. The water is clear and possesses excellent medicinal
properties.
About 4 miles west of Rawlings’ Springs the tertiary beds begin to
overlap, but in the distance on either side are lofty ridges of cretaceous
and perhaps still older rocks. The ridge, 15 miles south of Separation,
at least 1000 feet high, is certainly formed of lower cretaceous and prob-
Hayden.] 40) [February 19,
ably also of that great thickness of sandstones and clays which hold a
position between the transition No. 1, and the brick red beds.
Near Separation, about 10 miles west of Rawlings’ Springs, a coal bed
11 feet thick has been opened, probably the same as the one opened at
Carbon, and near Rock and Cooper creek. The dip is nearly west about
10°. The opening being at the summit of the hill, all the coal will have
to be drawn up a slope, and the difficulties of drainage will be greatly
increased. The coal is of excellent quality. Above and below the coal
is the usual drab indurated clay. Below the clay is a bed of gray ferru-
ginous sandstone.
On the summits of the hills in the vicinity are layers of fine grained
siliceous rocks with arenaceous concretions, some of them containing
impressions of deciduous leaves.
The tertiary beds lie in ridges running across the country. The beds
are uplifted in every direction. A more desolate region I have not seen
in the West. Nothing seems to grow but sage bushes, and in some of
the valleys they grow very large. All over the surface of the hills and
in the plains are great quantities of water-worn pebbles. Many of these
valleys were scooped out by an amount of waters far in excess of any
known at the present day in this region. Some of the widest and deepest
do not now contain any running stream.
The layers of fine grained sandstone on the hills in this vicinity con-
tain more or less impressions of leaves, like Populws and Platanus, in a
good state of preservation.
West of Separation the dip of the tertiary beds diminishes. Before
reaching Creston, about 13 miles west of Separation, they le nearly hori-
zontal, and all the surrounding country presents more the appearance of
aplain. At that station the Union Pacific Railroad Company haye a
well 100 feet or more deep, at a depth of 88 feet in which was struck an
8 foot coal bed, with 4 feet of excellent coal and 4 feet of coaly shale.
The coal was of about the same quality as that near Separation, probably
from the same bed. If so, coal at a depth of about 80 feet must underlie
an area of at least 100 square miles. In this well beds of bluish arena-
ceous clay were passed through first, then black clay with carbonaceous
matter throughout. Just over the coal was fine bluish indurated clay
with very distinct impressions of leaves, among which the most abundant
were Populus and Plutanus. ‘The railroad cuts and the valleys them-
selves show very distinctly the character of the intermediate softer beds.
The erosion has been so great in this country, and all hills and cantons
are so covered with debris that it is almost impossible to obtain a clear
idea of the color and composition of the intermediate softer beds. The
harder sandstones, &c., project from the surface and are accessible to the
eye without much excavation. Marine and fresh-water tertiary forma-
tions occupy the whole country along the line of the railroad to Quaking
Asp Summit, west of Fort Bridger, and possibly over to Salt lake to a
greater or less extent.
From Creston to Bitter Creek Station, a distance of 45 miles, the beds
1869.] 4 } (Hayden.
are mostly fresh water and hold a nearly horizontal position. West of
Bitter creek we get again upon marine tertiaries dipping 80 to 6°
nearly east. We have therefore between Rawling’s Springs and Green
river a sort of syneclinal basin, the marine tertiary dipping west about
10° on the east side, and the same marine beds inclining east 3° to 6° on
the west side; while at Table Rock, Red Desert, and Washakie, a con-
siderable thickness of purely fresh water beds are filled with shells of the
genera Paludina, Unio, Melania, &c.
Table rock is a square butte lifting itself about 400 feet above the
level of the road, composed of the beds of a sandstone which in many
instances is little more than an aggregation of fresh water shells.
After leaving Bitter Creek Station the hills approach nearer to the
road and show the characteristic features of the marine tertiary again.
Seams of coal appear in many places, while yellow arenaceous mazrls,
light gray sand with indurated clay beds and more or less thick layers of
sandstone occur. The dip varies from 3° to 6° east or nearly east.
At Black Bute Station on Bitter creek, about 15 miles west of Bitter
Creek Station there is a heavy bed of yellow ferruginous sandstone, irreg- ;
ular in its thickness and in part concretionary, and full of rusty concre-
tions of sandstones of every size from an inch to several feet in diameter,
mostly spherical, and when broken revealing large cavities filled with
oxide of ironloam. ‘This sandstone, 150 to 200 feet in thickness, forms
nearly vertical blufts, and is worn by atmospheric agencies into the most
fantastic shapes. Above it are sands, clays, sandstones of every texture
and coal beds, one of which, near the summit of the hills, has been
burned, baking and melting the superincumbent beds. I found in seve-
ral layers the greatest abundance of deciduous leaves, and among them
“a fine Palm leaf, probably the same species which occurs in the coal beds
on the Upper Missouri, named by Dr. Newbury Campbellt.. There is also
a thin seam near one of the coal seams made up of a small species of
Ostrea.
The railroad passes down the Bitter creek valley which has been run
through the tertiary beds, and on each side high walls can be seen ineli-
ning at low angles. As we pass down the valley toward Green river,
the inclination brings to view lower and lower beds. These are all plain-
ly marine tertiaries, while an abundance of impressions of plants are
found everywhere. No strictly fresh water shells occur, but seams of
Ostrea of various species. There are also extensive beds of hard tabular
rocks which would make the best of flagging stones. On the surface are
excellent illustrations of wave ripple marks, and at one locality tracks
of a singular character; one looking asif it had been made by a soli-
ped. It resembles the tracks of mules on the soft bottom ground.
Others seem attributable to some huge bird ; another to some four-toed
Pachyderm. I obtained specimens and careful drawings of these tracks.
In the field report some detailed sections of these tertiary beds will be
given. Yet Iam convinced that local sections are not very important. The
character is so changeable that two sections taken ten miles apart would
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—F
Hayden. ] 4 2 [February 19,
not be identical, and in some cases not even very similar. The more
- recent the age of formations the less persistent seem to be their litholo-
gical characters over extended areas.
Although the coal beds seem to be abundant everywhere along the line
of the road in the lower tertiary deposits, they have been wrought as yet
in few localities. Near Point of Rocks Station, about 45 miles east of
Green river, one of the best coal mines I have yet seen in the West has
been opened, and Mr. W. Snyder, the able Superintendent of the Union
Pacific Railroad, has ordered a side track to be laid to it about a quarter
of amile long. Five coal beds have been opened in a vertical height of
80 feet. The lowest is about 100 feet above the bed of the creek. They
are respectively 5, 1, 4, 3 and 64 feet thick. The five foot bed is the
most valuable, and as the strata are nearly horizontal it can be worked
with ease and free of water. The hard, compact coal is pitched down
the sides of the hill more than a hundred feet without being broken by
the fall. It is purer and heavier than any coal I have yet seen west of
the Laramie mountains. The other beds already opened will yield
moderately good coal. Several other beds are in these hills which have not
yet been examined. Near the summit of the hills, above the coal beds,
there is a seam six inches thick composed entirely of oyster shells, about
the size of the common edible oyster, but of a distinct and probably un-
described species.
Another bed of coal has been opened about 28 miles west of the Point
of Rocks, at Rock Spring. It is about 4 feet thick, with a bed of sand-
stone at the bottom and a slaty clay roof. It cannot be worked to
advantage.
Scattered all through the coal-bearing strata are seams and concretions
of brown iron ore in abundance, sometimes persistent over extensive
areas, and varying from 4 to 12 inches in thickness. The ore occurs
mostly however in a nodula® form, and much of it can be made of
economical value when there is a demand for it. There are also numer-
ous Chalybeate and Sulphur springs with excellent medicinal properties.
Near Rock Springs fresh water beds again incline nearly west 6° to 10°,
but apparently different from those between Creston and Bitter creek.
The beds exposed at this point are made up of drab clays, sometimes
a little sandy, with heavy beds of gray and rusty yellow easily disinte-
grating sandstones. There are also in the clay beds quite thick beds of
coal which have ignited spontaneously and baked the superincumbent
layers, in many cases melting the rock. There is very linge vegetation
on these hills, only now and then a dwarf cedar.
Near the summit of the hills there is a thin layer of limestone com-
posed of an aggregate of small melanias.
From Rock Spring to Bryan the rocks present a peculiar appearance,
occurring mostly in thin laminez or layers like slate. There are 300 to
500 feet of these drab gray laminated shales, and above them, capping
the hills about Green river, are from 300 to 500 feet of rusty yellow
shales, which are weathered into castellated forms.
1869. ] 4 3 [Hayden.
Near the junction of Bitter creek and Green river there is a bed of
very singular bituminous earth which has excited much attention. It
has been used as a fuel and burned so readily in stoves, that some people
valued it more than true coal; but it is not now much used. An analysis
shows that it is an inferior fuel.* The bed is usually about 4 feet thick,
but sometimes only 2 or 24. It is often parted by several thin seams of
shaie. These Green river shales or slates as they might be called, must
contain some calcareous matter, although not very fossiliferous. Possi-
bly a more careful study will reveal a greater variety of animal and vege-
table forms.
In the same cuts between Green river and Bryan, a distance of about
13 miles, great quantities of fossil fishes occur in a kind of chalky slate.
Quite perfect impressions are formed upon the surfaces of the slates,
presenting the appearance of having been preserved in quiet waters.
Indeed all the Green river rocks may be said to possess a soft chalky
character. At Bryan some fine specimens of fish were obtained from a
well about 60 feet below the surface.
On the distant hills of this locality are layers of a chalky limestone
which would make excellent lime and is now used as a building stone.
It has the appearance of oolite, and in fact is made up of an extinct unde-
termined species of Cypris. About 7 miles west of Bryan we have:
4, Yellowish chalky laminated beds, very thinly divided.
3. Thin layers of gray chalky limestone filled with fresh water shells
like Corbula.
2. Rusty indurated sandstone, somewhat shaly.
1. Gray shale.
Many of the layers in bed No. 8 are made up almost entirely of a small
_ bivalve shell.
About 2 miles above Green River Station the river cuts through a
great thickness of fine sand and gravel shqwing, on the slope and bottoms
a vast deposit of drift. Much of the shale in this region has a greenish
tinge, and the river in passing over them seems to have taken up some of
the green coloring matter, so that the water has a peculiar green color
and hence the name.
From Bryan to a point about 10 miles west of Fort Bridger the entire
surface of the country is covered with buttes of every shape, cones,
* Mr. Carson’s analysis of a specimen of this bituminous earth gives the following constituents -
Silicic acid, 18.58.
Sulphuric acid, 3.88.
Sesquioxide of Alumina, 8.14.
Sesquioxide of Iron, » 2.19.
Lime, 14.11.
Magnesia. 7.11.
Carbonic acid, 17.40.
Water, 2.90.
Volatile Matter, 22.25.
Fixed Carbon, 3.73.
100,29.
L
Hayden.) 44 [February 19,
pyramids, and long ridge-like hills which show a vast amount of erosion.
Indeed the portion about Church Butes is precisely hike the Manvaises-
terres or Bad Lands of White river.*
FIG. 4.
In a cut along the railroad nearly opposite to Church Butes there is a
bed formed of clay filled with small kidney shaped masses of fine bluish
clay, the whole filled with beautiful specimens of Unios, Paludinas and
other fresh water shells. There are also in the same cut layers of green-
ish clay much indurated, flesh colored concretionary and rusty drab
sandstone. :
About 6 miles west of Carter’s Station a cut in the road reveals a
tough plastic dark gray clay, and at the top of the cut a bed of flinty
concretions filled with small seams of chalcedony. The whole country
is paved with small water worn pebbles, mostly of opaque flint and some
of them exceeding 4 or 5 inches in diameter. Over a belt about 10 miles
wide from east to west and of unknown length from north to south,
there are the greatest quantities of moss agates. Iam inclined to the
opinion that they originated in thin irregular seams in this recent ter-
tiary formation, probably somewhere south of Church Butes. The
origin of all this drift is evidently local and it is most probable that the
transporting power had its origin in the Utah mountains. These ter-
tiary beds are all nearly horizontal, inclining not more than 1° to 3°.
At South Bend Station there is a layer of silicious limestone filled with
small Melanias, which are entirely changed into chalcedony. ‘Some Unios
also occur. The bed below it is composed of ashen gray shale a little
arenaceous ; then comes a silico-caleareous layer. Above the shell seam
* The geologist can compare the following illustration of the “Bad Lands” of White river,
Dakota, with Fig. 4, which is engraved from a photograph taken from nature, of Church Butes.
The peculiar features of the weathered hills in this region bear a striking resemblance to those on
White river.
1869. ] 45 [Hayden.
is a great thickness of shale, capped with a kind of conglomerate made
up of rounded pebbles and concretions, with here and there a Unio. In
the south and east, 75 miles distant, we can see a range of snowy moun-
tains, Minetah; and the intermediate country is covered with rugged
tertiary bluffs. To the north, 100 to 150 miles away, the Wind River
range is visible, and this interval is also occupied by the same rugged hills.
At Church Butes a remarkable undescribed species of turtle was found
projecting from the hill sides.
The beds of this basin near Church Butes and Fort Bridger incline to
the eastward, but are nearly horizontal, and seem to jut. up against the
mountain sides with very little inclination. The style in which they
have weathered or suffered erosion, their position in relation to the older
formations, and the general appearance of the surface, suggest their
identity with the White River formations. But they are more arena-
ceous. JI am inclined to the opinion that while they are independent
basins they were synchronous.
The western rim of this recent fresh water basin is well defined at
Quaking Asp ridge. Everywhere here the examples of erosion are dis-
played on a tremendous scale, and the rounded water worn boulders
almost pave the ground. The west sides of the hills are quite abrupt,
and are covered with the worn rocks; while the eastern sides slope
gently down in long ridges; showing the direction from which the forces
have acted as well as their local character; that they originated some-
where in the direction of the mountains, and by scooping out the valleys,
strewed the surface with rocks.
Near Fort Bridger, and west to Quaking Asp Summit, there are in
the recent tertiary formations several beds of the reddish grit which
give its peculiar variegated character to much of the surface in this part
of the West. Inthe cuts of the railroad are shown numerous beds of
brick red and purplish clays and sands. » The inclination of the beds just
on the western margin of the basin is 3° to 5°. There are 100 to 150 feét
of reddish indurated clays, slightly arenaceous, with some light brands,
and one or two layers of gray sandstone ; above this, 100 feet or more of
light gray arenaceous material, with some hard layers of sandstone ; then
irregular harder layers of sandstone, sometimes concretionary, project-
ing from the sodded hills’ and many of the peculiar features of the
scenery are due to their existence.
After passing Quaking Asp Summit westward we come into a region
underlaid by a distinct series of formations of older date than those at
Fort Bridger, and in many cases nearly or quite vertical. The same dip
is again to the westward. /
About 20 miles west of Fort Bridger there is a fine soda spring yield-
ing the most delicious water. Judging from a deposit near the spring of
what appears to be limestone, the water must hold lime as well as iron,
&e., in solution. Probably it will be a place of resort at no distant day.
On Bear river there are several outcroppings of coal. The principal
one by the side of the railroad near the station is nearly vertical, en-
Hayden.] 46 [February 19,
closed between beds of drab clay, and separated into two members by a
clay parting of from 8 to 10 feet thick. There is probably an aggregate
of from 12 to 15 feet of good coal. The dip is towards the northwest
60° to 80°. Ongthe upper side, above the drab clay, there is a bed of
rather soft gray sandstone 50 to 100 feet thick. Below, are beds of rusty
sandstone, clay, and indurated arenaceous clay, yellowish, drab, reddish
and gray.
In a railroad cutting, about a mile east of the coal mine, are 25 to 50
feet of drab indurated clay, covered with 150 to 200 feet of ferruginous
and gray sandstone dipping north-west. The lowest beds shown here
look like cretaceous clays of No. 2; and in some of their slaty layers are
an abundance of fish scales, a species of small oyster and a shell like an
Inoceramus. These black plastic clays, are undoubtedly cretaceous and
lie below the coal. The strata enclosing the coal are evidently marine,
for all the organic forms thus far discovered seem to belong to marine
types. There is also an oil spring in Bear River valley in which parties
are sinking a shaft. The whole country exhibits abundant signs of drift
action, and the hills as well as the valleys are paved with worn rocks.
Between Bear and Sulphur creeks, there is a fine plateau 40 to 50 feet
high, covered with sage—Artemesia tufida, and as smooth as a table.
The soil in the bottoms of the streams is most fertile ; if irrigated, vege-
tables of all kinds grow well, and there is abundance of water for that
purpose.
On the right side of Bear river, 10 miles below the station is, Medicine
Bute, which must be 800 to 1000 feet high above the bed of the creek.
It is undoubtedly composed for the most part of the strata of the coal
series, which I am inclined to regard as of older tertiary age, although
the evidence is as yet conflicting.
Passing westward from Bear Creek Station, over beds nearly horizon-
tal or inclining at a small angle, we suddenly come to an upthrust of
rocks, called the Needles, dipping east or south-east 25° to 385° or 40°.
This is a more remarkable exhibition of massive conglomerate than any
I have ever seen further east. The rocks project their summits in the
shape of sharp pointed peaks to a height from 300 to 500 feet above the
road. Some of the worn masses which compose the conglomerate are an
aggregation of worn pebbles, proving that a portion of the materials
were derived from some still older conglomerate. Sometimes there is a
thin local seam of coarse sand containing only a few pebbles, but the
whole mass, from 500 to 1000 feet thick, is in the main a coarse conglom-
erate made up of water worn rocks varying in size from the smallest
pebble to boulders a foot in diameter. The pebbles are mostly flint,
mixed with a few of sandstone ; rocks of modern data being compara-
tive rare. This seems to be a local outburst of the conglomerate through
a vast thickness of variegated sands and clays which inclines westward
40° to 600. The trend is a little west of north. These ‘‘needle rocks”’
are near Yellow Creek Station, and the ridge of upheaval extends down
from the Minetah range. In the vicinity of the mountain ranges such
is
1869.] 47 [Hayden.
local dips are common, and keep to no regular direction ; but far distant
from the source of power the ridges are comparatively regular.
From the hills about a mile west of Yellow Creek Station we have the
first and most extended view of the country I have ever seen in the West.
We can examine objects with considerable distinctness on a clear day for
a radius of 50 to 100 miles in every direction, over a most rugged surface,
with high ridges and deep gorges, the strata showing red, yellow, gray,
and in fact every variety of color. Other beds are composed of quite
light colored sandstone.
From Fort Bridger westward one of the most interesting phenomena is
the favorable change that takes place in the vegetation of the surface.
Broad plains and hill slopes covered thickly with grass, with compa-
ratively little sage, is now the rule. Patches of quaking asp appear here
and there and along the streams are fringes of cotton wood.
About 3 miles west of the Needles there is an upheaved ridge carrying
a bed of white limestone, with streaks of chalcedony in it resembling
those of the White River tertiary limestones, and dipping nearly east at
an angle of 20°. After leaving this point the rocks, again nearly horizon-
tal, have for the most part a prevailing reddish tinge, with alternations of
reddish indurated clays, and gray and reddish sandstones. The harder —
layers form quite abrupt bluffs 150 to 200 feet high all along the streams
or valleys. Ina tunnel at the head of Echo cafion, where the beds have
been excavated by the Union Pacific Railroad Company, the base is a red
indurated clay, slightly arenaceous, with bands of hard sandstone of a
greenish tinge; above this, a red grit, much indurated, but becoming
less so as we approach the summit. At Echo Station there are high
bluffs of the red grits, with gray sandstones; but the prevailing color of
all the rocks in Echo cation from source to mouth is reddish or dark
purple. The excavations for the grading of the railroad are extensive in
this region and give a clear idea of the succession of the beds; but there
is a great uniformity in the composition of the rocks. The sandstones
are gray or yellow, and always yielding readily to the weather, wearing
into all sorts of fantastic shapes, full of holes and caves, projecting points
and pillars. The hills are covered with a considerable amount of loose
material, worn rocks, &c. The valleys are also covered with a heavy
superficial deposit.
From Bear creek to Echo Kanyon Station, 20 miles, most of the way
is over the red grit beds. The railroad runs directly down the Echo
valley from its source to its junction with the Weber valley. Its scenery
is wonderful from its general ruggedness; the water is excellent; the
grass is good and all the valleys are susceptible of cultivation. Timber,
though scarce everywhere, is more abundant than in localities farther to
the east.
Passing down Echo Kanyon from Hanging Rock Station to the mouth
of Echo valley, bluffs of massive sandstone rise upon the right to a height
of from 400 to 1000 feet, colored gray and yellow, yellowish purple and
brick red, and containing some conglomerate.
Hayden.] 48 [February 19,
A mile below Hanging Rock a drift into the bank 20 feet beneath a bed
of conglomerate, discovered six inches of carbonaceous clay between two
beds of ash colored, somewhat sandy, indurated clay, each about 6 feet
thick. Below the coaly layer there are 2 inches of a material, which an
analysis shows to be composed of Water 2.62, Volatile Matter 73.92, Ses-
quioxide 1.41, Lime 0.87, Magnesia trace, Sulphuric acid 0,37, TeLnosyali.e=
ric acid a trace, Silica 59.14—99.80.
From the mouth of Echo up the valley the rocks seem to form a sort of
gentle anticlinal for about 10 miles and then the inclination is reversed.
The general dip however is 5° to 15°, nearly north-west; but for 6 miles
below and 3 miles above Hanging rock it is increased to 25° and even to 35°.
This formation, which differs somewhat lithologically from any with
which I am acquainted, must have an aggregate thickness of at least 3000
feet. The conglomerate portion must be at least 1500 feet in thickness.
Tt includes beds of coal, and shows a few fossils, which are all either im-
pressions of deciduous trees or marine shells.
Near Coalville, a little town in the valley of Weber river, 5 miles above
the mouth of Echo creek, coal outcrops several times. At Spriggs’ open-
ing the dip is 20° or 30° east; and the coal bed about 15 feet thick ; capped
with gray sandstone, much of it charged with pebbles. I was informed
that in other places this pebbly sandstone rests directly on the coal bed.
A few hundred feet from Spriggs’ opening, a shaft to strike the same bed
has been sunk 79 feet deep, through 12 feet of gravel and sand, into black
clay growing hayler downward, and holding numerous specimens of a
species of Inocerumus, Ostrea, and Ammonites, showing that the black clays
are certainly of cretaceous age. If these beds do actually lie above the
coal as the dip would indicate, then this formation of doubtful age, ex-
tending from Quaking Asp Summit to Salt lake, must be cretaceous, and
some of the finest coal beds in the West are in rocks of that age.*
The Weber river flows directly west and the rocks incline in a sort of
half circle between north and south. Several beds of massive sandstone
cap the high hills, and between them are layers of clay with a reddish
tinge. I -was informed that there were in this section 6 or 7 beds of coal
varying in thickness from 18 inches to 15 feet. i
Passing down the Weber valley the dip would carry down the Coalville
coal beds, in a distance of 5 miles, that is, at Echo City, to a depth of from
1200 to 1500 feet beneath the surface. So that the coal area that can ever
be made available for economical purposes in this region must be very
limited.
An interesting feature along the Weber river is its terraces. Near
Echo City there is a rather narrow bottom near the river; then an abrupt
ascent of 80 feet; then a level plain or bottom of 200 to 400 yards; then
a gentle ascent to the rock bluffs. The summit of the first bluff at Echo
is 500 feet high; it then slopes back to the plains beyond.
Passing down the Weber valley, about a mile below Echo Station, the
beds begin to dip 25° N. E. The whole valley is filled with rounded .
f* Confirming the published opinions of Dr. Le Conte and Dr. Newberry.—Ep1ronr. |
1869.] aI 9 (Hayden.
boulders, some of them 3 to 4 feet in diameter. The Weber river through-
out the greater part of its course seems to plough through a monoclinal
valley; but just before reaching the entrance of Lost creek it seems to
pass along a local synclinal valley. A long ridge of conglomerate extends
down from the direction of the Wasatch mountains, nearly north-east and
south-west, inclining nearly north-east 5° to 10°. At this point, the
Weber, instead of continuing in the synclinal valley, cuts through the
ridge, isolating a portion about half a mile in length and forming a huge
chasm, or gorge, which is called here the Devil’s Gate. After passing
through this ridge, the Weber receives Lost creek, and makes an abrupt
bend to the southward; and here are exposed an immense thickness of
the older rocks in a nearly vertical position. These rocks extend down
the Weber river four miles or more, when the beds abruptly change from
the nearly vertical position to a nearly horizontal one.
Commencing near the ‘‘Narrows,’’ or the mouth of Lost creek, we
have a considerable thickness of the jurassic limestones and marls, dip-
ping 70° or 80° north-east, of a bluish ash color, very hard and brittle,
cleaving into thin layers, and fracturing in every direction, so that the
sides of the hills are covered toa great depth with its debris. Then comes
a series of mud shales, with ripple marks, some layers of very white sand-
stone, and a thick bed of hard red sandstone, destined to take the highest
rank among the building stone of Utah. It can be easily wrought into
fine forms for culverts, fronts for buildings, caps and sills, &c. Then
comes a vast thickness of gray, and dark gray, more or less cherty,
limestones, which are probably carboniferous ; and below these again a
very hard silicious rock, oftentimes massive, which I referred to the
Potsdam period, portions of which are filled with holes at right angles to
the layers, very similar to much of the Potsdam east of the Mississippi
pierced by Scolithus linearis. In this quartzose group there is a bed of
shaly limestone, 6 to 10 feet thick. A few indistinct molluscs, were ob-
served in the limestones and the mud shales.
The distance from the mouth of Lost creek to the end of the nearly
vertical series of rocks is about three miles. So that we have here a
thickness of strata not much less than two miles from the top of the
Jurassic downwards so as probably to include the Silurian.
At the mouth of Lost creek, there is a remarkable example of non-con-
formity in hills of different ages. The reddish conglomerate rests directly
upon the upturned edges of the vertical beds described above, and it is an
important question what has become of all the intermediate beds, contain-
ing the coal, which are so conspicuous about 5 miles above Echo city.
Descending the Weber from the ‘‘ Narrows ”’ we find some of the most
remarkable rugged scenery in the west. The walls are very noticeable,
and are formed of two beds of limestone, projecting from the sides of the
valley, at right angles, from between which 10 or 12 feet of loose material
has been washed out. Near the tunnels the rocks on the left side of the
Weber dip about 10°, nearly north, while on the other side the strata
incline in the opposite direction 3° to 5°, as if the valley was anticlinal.
IN TES Sp VO,
Hayden.] 50 [February 19,
Then again the valley would appear to be monoclinal, the strata on the
right side of the river inclining 20° south, and on the opposite side, though
presenting a nearly vertical front, inclining south also. A little farther
on down the yalley, and on the right side of the river, come beds of red
sandstone ; below these again gray sandstone, with a reddish tinge, the
red sandstone dipping east 12°; while on the opposite side of the river,
the hills are open, rounded and grass covered.
The cherty crinoidal limestone extends to Morgan city and generally
disappears. The red sandstones are seen among the foot hills.
At Morgan city, we come out of the principal cation of the Weber, into
a broad open bottom, filled with little villages and farm houses. The
soil is of great fertility. The hills on either side are smoothed off and
covered thickly with loose material and vegetation. The high vertical
exposures all disappear. The Wasatch range seems to trend nearly north
and south ; even the foot hills of this range are so smoothed off and
covered with drift and then with grass, that the underlying rocks are not
to be seen. The industry shown by the Mormons in this valley is worthy
of all praise: The little streams are made use of to irrigate the rich bot-
tom lands, which produce abundantly, and the houses look neat and com-
fortable. Fruit cannot be raised to any extent in the Weber valley. The
varieties of trees are confined mostly to the bitter-cotton-wood, although
from Echo city down, we meet with a small dwarf, oak-box, elder, striped
maple, and choke-cherry.
Just below the little village of Enterprise, I saw in the hills rocks
composed of an aggregate of quartz pebbles, the whole mass looking like
the Potsdam. Still farther down, we come to feldspathic rocks, indicating
that the dip of the gneissic beds of the Wasatch range is westward. ‘The
Wasatch range is composed of gneiss so far as the rocks can be seen
along the Weber. The rocks are beautifully banded everywhere. There
are also coarse aggregations of quartz and feldspar with large masses of
tourmaline ; and all through the gneiss are seams of feldspar and quartz
of various thicknesses.
The evidence is quite clear that from Morgan city to the entrance of
the Wasatch Kanyon stretched a lake, the waters of which must have filled
up the valley, rounded off the hills and covered the sides of the mountains
with loose debris. Along the sides of the Kanyon of the Wasatch, 43 miles
long, are thick deposits of loose sand interspersed with water worn boul-
ders in many places. These deposits have been cut through in making
excavations by the railroad, and the lines of current deposition are
curiously well marked. About half way through the kanyon, there is a
sudden bend in the Weber river, by which a small portion of one of gneis-
sic ridges is cut off. Opposite this ox-bow, a kanyon descends the moun-
tain side, down which a vast quantity of loose material has been swept,
filling the channel of the river with local drift, and probably driving the
current through the gneissic ridges. The Weber river, if its channel were
straightened, would run through this deposit of drift, which is about 0
kK
1869.] ol ; {Hayden.
feet thick ; instead of which, it makes a bend and cuts its way through a
massive gneissic ridge.
Extensive deposits of whitish, fine blue and rusty yellow sandstones,
hard enough for building purposes, with flesh colored marls, probably of
pliocene age, and resembling very closely in many respects the more
recent tertiary beds along the Platte, occur in this valley. ‘These recent
beds dip east or south-east. We thus learn that some of the later move-
ments in the elevation of these mountain ranges have been of compara-
tively modern date. Terraces continue to show themselves the entire
length of the Weber river, and they are probably synchronous with those
which surround the basin of Salt Lake valley.*
a ey,
SAW ATAUTT RS
ee —
We ies =A Hosea >
Aral esha
———_——S
After emerging from the Wasatch Kanyon of the Weber valley, we pur-
sued a southerly course along the base of the Wasatch range to Salt Lake
city. For 20 miles or more, all the unchanged rocks have been worn
away from the flanks of the mountains or completely concealed by debris.
All over the gentle slopes at the foot of the mountains are strewn masses
of rocks ; all gneissic and evidently from the central parts of the moun-
tains. Terraces distinctly surround this basin everywhere. There is one
large one, with two or three smaller ones, on the sides of the mountains,
and from the lowest one downwards, the surface slopes gently to the lake.
I was informed that the lake had risen 9 feet vertically since 1868, and of
course the water has aggressed upon the land to a great distance. I have
heard no explanation of this phenomenon. All the lakes in the west are
said to be rising more or less.
* This illustration from a sketch by Mr. F. W. Meek of the terraces along the Missouri river be-
tween Council Bluffs and Sioux City, will apply equally well to Helena or Salt Lake valley; and
they are doubtless synchronous in age. In the sketch, the distant high hills are composed of yellow
marl or “ loess,” the terraces the same, and the bottom of rich vegetable mould.
Hayden.] ; : 52 [February 19,
The carboniferous limestones begin to make their appearance along the
flanks of the mountains about 10 miles north of Salt Lake city, and con-
tinue to a great or less extent all around the rim of the basin.
On the flanks of the mountains, east of the city, are the red beds (juras-
sic?); probably a careful study would reveal jurassic, cretaceous, and possi-
bly even tertiary beds. President Young has long since offered a large
reward to any one who would discover workable beds of coal within a
reasonable distance of the city, and a thorough search has been made for
them, but thus far without success. A bed of coaly clay only has been
found near the city in the mountains. All the coal used in the valley is
transported in wagons from Coalville, on the Weber. The best of red
sandstone for building purposes is brought from red sandstone canon,
just east of the town. Iam inclined to believe that it is carboniferous.
The beautiful gray granite which is used in the.construction of the Mor-
mon temple is brought from Cottonwood valley in the Wasatch mountains.
It is composed of white feldspar, quartz and black mica.
The surface of Salt Lake valley has been rendered fruitful by the
industry of the Mormons. Like the greater portion of the west, it was
originally a vast sage plain. Now by irrigation all kinds of cereals and
roots grow luxuriantly, and there are no better apples, peaches, plums,
grapes, &c., raised in America. Itmay eventually become a vine growing
region.
Following the stage road eastward, 16 miles from Salt Lake city to the
Brewery at the mouth of Parley’s Kanyon, we reach the foot of the moun-
tain, over sand beds which are probably of post-pliocene age. Here a
little stream cuts through the sand beds, exposing a vertical bluff 200
feet high, composed of some fine sand, horizontally stratified and overlaid
with a great thickness of water worn pebble conglomerate. There are
indications all along the flanks of the mountains, that nearly or quite all
the formations already recognised as far west as this point are here rep-
resented. At the entrance of the kanyon, the carboniferous limestones
dip north-east 70° to 80°; over them lie the purple and red sandstones
and rusty yellow layers; and under them reddish shales. Beneath these
shales an immense thickness of dark gray silicious rock stands nearly
vertical. Allthis vast thickness of older rocks, in appearance semi-meta-
morphosed. are undoubtedly the counterparts of the series described in
the Weber valley just below the entrance of Lost creek.
The road passes up a monoclinal valley between the ridges of silurian (?)
rock, having a brittle fracture, and the monoclinal slopes are covered with
debris. No gneissic rocks are noticeable along this road.
Before reaching the summits, in fact soon after we begin the ascent, we
come to the conglomerates and sandstones which accompanied us down
the Echo and Weber valleys. Near the summit all the hills are rounded
by erosion and grassed over, and water-worn boulders are scattered about
here and there, so that the underlying rocks are partially concealed. Just
beyond the summit we arrive at a broad open exposure in the valley of
the stream called Parley’s Point, half a mile wide, and about 7000 feet
Ko
1869.] . vo [Hayden.
above sea level. Settlements are numerous all along the road ; but while
there is very good grazing, few of the cereals will grow.
All the rocks on the eastern slope incline at a greater or less angle ap-
parently towards the east. Just as we enter Silver Creek valley, we come
to numerous upthrusts of partially changed sandstones and conglomerates,
the first indications that we get along our route of the neighborhood of
igneous rocks. Some of the masses of rock which go to make up the
conglomerate are of great size, very compact and of a steel gray color,
and are enclosed in a gray siliceous paste ; but whether large or small, all
are angular. The formation looks much like that near South Boulder
creek, near Denver.
Passing down the valley of Silver creek, we soon emerge into the valley
of the Weber. We come to the hills enclosing the coal which dip down
the valley at angles of from 20° to 50°, and of course the belt along which
the coal beds are exposed is very narrow. Five or six beds as I have be-
fore said, varying in thickness froma few to 15 feet, are reported. I heard
also that about 4 miles from Mr. Sprigg’s opening, a bed of fossil oysters
had been seen above the coal. That these coal strata are of marine or
estuary character Ihave no doubt; but the limited time given me for
their study prevented me from securing such positive evidence as is
desirable; and as this formation occupies a vast area west of Fort Bridger,
it seems all the more important to fix its geological position. That it is
not older than the cretaceous we know by the occurrence of leaves of
deciduous trees, and the black plastic clays of No. 2, helding quantities
of fragments of fish-remains.
I will now recapitulate briefly the principal geological formations along
the line of the Union Pacific Railroad from Omaha to Salt Lake city.
The Upper Coal Measure Limestones are seen at Omaha, near the-
water’s edge, and quarried all along the Platte nearly to the Elk Horn
river.
The Lower Cretaceous rusty sandstones of No. 1, overlap the Upper
Carboniferous limestones about four miles above the mouth of the Platte,
and extend to the mouth of the Loup Fork ; but the yellow marl deposit
or leess, conceals for the most part the underlying rocks. A fine yellowish
sand, ofthe same age, or a little less recent, overlaps the cretaceous near
Columbus.
The chalky limestones of No. 3, with the characteristic Inoceramus
problematicus, here and there crop out, and some obscure exposures have
been detected in the Pawnee Reservation, 15 or 20 miles up the Loup Fork.
This fine yellowish sand soon gives place to the Pliocene beds of the
Platte, Loup Fork and Niobrara rivers, indurated marls, sands, or sand-
stones, which continue on as far as the margin of the Laramie range of
mountains, 5380 miles west of Omaha, that is, for nearly 480 miles along
the line of the railroad. In the grand anticlinal of the Laramie range,
which I have already described, they sometimes repose with a slight dis-
cordance on the older rocks ; sometimes, as near the Laramie peak, they
rest directly on the syenites, and entirely conceal, for a distance of 40 or
Hayden.] o4 [February 19,
50 miles, all the unchanged rocks of older date ; but a careful study of the
eastern flank, from Red Butes to Long’s Peak, will reveal all the forma-
tions that are known to exist in this part of the west, inclining from the
sides of the granitic nucleus at various angles.
The railroad then for 40 miles passes over and cuts through a great
variety of Syenites; some compact, beautiful building stones, almost
equal to the Scotch lyenites, but the greater part ferruginous and easily
disintegrating on exposure.*
ws M4 Ay, CES
BS tu NG ray a ehALAnK
: AL UAY ane s Ah Ne iy
“ ihe SS
AN REE aK YON oS
On the west side of the Laramie range, we pass across the upturned
edges of the counterparts of the various formations seen on the eastern
slope. From Laramie city to Salt Lake, formations of different ages con-
tinually appear and disappear. The Cretaceous formations occupy the
country for 60 miles from Laramie city nearly to lake Como.
Genuine Jurassic beds, with characteristic fossils, are here exposed for
a short distance, in an anticlinal valley, along which the railroad passes.
Belemnites densus are in great numbers.
Cretaceous beds mostly No. 2, appear again west of Como.
Miocene coal beds overlay the cretaceous, just before reaching Carbon
* These syenites weather into most beautiful forms resembling gigantic ruins, so that they
have sometimes deserved their common appellation, of broken down temples, castles, &c, The
sketch, (Fig. 5,) shows well the peculiar features which these piles of rocks assume through atmos-
pheric influences. It is engraved from a photograph of ascene on the Laramie range, taken by Mr.
Carbutt, photographer, of Chicago, Illinois.
Ie
1869.] Ty) [Hayden.
Station, 80 miles west of Laramie. At Carbon where they are exposed to
view, impressions of fossil leaves occur in the greatest abundance. The
species are few and nearly all of them identical with those described by
Dr. Newbury, from the miocene tertiary beds of the Upper Missouri.
Some strata consist almost entirely of leaves, in a fair state of preserva-
tion, as if they had not been subjected to a great deal of drifting prior to
deposition. Indeed, the trees themselves must have grown near the spot,
to shed their leaves in such great abundance, just as we find leaves
accumulated now in muddy bottoms. Dr. Newbury has identified from
this locality, Pepulus Cuneata, Populus Nebrascensis, Platanus Haydent and
an undescribed species of Cornus. The Wyoming Coal Company’s shaft
sunk at this station to reach the coal, has descended nearly 60 feet through
a considerable thickness of bluish-black arenaceous clay, in rather thick
layers, upon the surface of which are great quantities of Populus and
Platanus. Very nearly the same species are described throughout a great
thickness of these tertiary beds, and the evidence seems to be pretty clear
that the vegetation was nearly uniform throughout the period of the
deposition of the coal strata.
The Cretaceous beds are again exposed in a sort of anticlinal valley,
about 10 miles east of the N. Platte crossing. But a few miles on either
side of the railroad tertiary beds are seen.
At Rawling’s Springs, all the formations from the syenites to the cre-
taceous, are thrown up over a restricted area; 2 miles farther west, the
tertiary beds again overlay. At Separation, 26 miles west of Benton Sta-
tion, a bed of excellent coal has been opened by the railroad company, in
the rocks over which Platanus Haydeni and Cornus acuminata, (N,) with
other undetermined species of plants occur. This forms the eastern rim
of a basin which extends about 110 miles to the westward.
Soon after leaving Separation, the strata becomes nearly horizontal, and
are of fresh water instead of estuary origin. Beyond Bitter Creek Station,
estuary beds reappear dipping east. At Washakie, Red Desert and Table
Rock occur thick beds made up of an aggregate of fresh water shells, of
the genera Unio, Paludina, Limnea, Melania, &c., At Black Butes and
Point of Rocks, a great abundance of impressions of deciduous leaves are
found. At Black Bute Station, about 850 miles west of Omaha, I found
in the coal strata Sabal Campbelli, N, Rhamnus elegans, Cornus acuminata,
Quercus aceroides, Tilia antiqua, with some undescribed species.
At Point of Rocks, an important coal station, about 14 miles farther
west, I found Platanus Haydent, P. Nebrascensis, Cornus acuminata, and
Magnolia tenerafolia. In the vicinity of Elk mountain, along the overland
stage road, in beds which I regarded as belonging to the older tertiary,
and holding a position near the junction of the tertiary and cretaceous,
and nearly or quite on a parallel with the lower tertiary beds near Den-
ver, Colorado, I found Platinus Haydent, Quercus aceroides, Magnolia
tenerafolias with fragments of Cornus and Rhamnus.
Near Green River the eastern rim of what appears to be another tertiary
basin commences, the beds having a gentle dip to the westward. Between
Hayden.] 56 [February 19,1869.
Green River crossing and Bryan Station, fine specimens of fossil fishes
occur in rocks which resemble the Solenhofen slates. West of Bryan,
fresh water shells of the genera Corbicula, Limnea, Physa, Paludina, Mela-
nia, and Unio occur in the greatest quantities. This basin extends to
Quaking Asp ridge, 22 miles west of Fort Bridger.
We then come to a series of variegated beds, whose dominant color is
red or reddish, of estuary or marine origin, with coal beds from 6 to 15
feet thick. These extend far westward to the Wasatch mountains, pos-
sibly farther. The evidence inclines one to regard them of cretaceous
age, but they may be older tertiary.
_ In Weber valley there is an immense thickness of the older sedimentary
rocks from the jurassic inclusive to the silurian inclusive, the thickness
of which I estimated at from 5,000 to 10,000 feet.
The Wasatch range is composed of metamorphic rocks, mostly gneisic,
which are well shown in the valley of Weber river for the distance of 4
miles.
The Union Pacific Railroad from Omaha to Salt Lake valley, a distance
of nearly 1200 miles, really pass through metamorphic rocks but twice;
first in crossing the Laramie range, a distance of 20 or 30 miles, and in
the Weber valley through the Wasatch range, 4 miles. At Rawling’s
Springs, the syenites are seen on the north side of the road for a little
distance, but not immediately along it.
It will thus be seen that over the vast region known as the Rocky
Mountain district proper, the area that can be colored on a geological
map as occupied by igneous or metamorphic rocks is comparatively small,
while the more modern formations as tertiary and cretaceous, are met
with everywhere even up to the summits of the loftiest ranges and some-
times covering them.
Nore. The illustration, Plate 1, Fig. 2, Pulpit Rock, shows the high
nearly vertical bluffs of conglomerate, at the entrance of Echo creek into
the Weber river, Utah Territory. I am inclined to regard these rocks
as older tertiary, from the fact that they lie along the coal beds of this
region, but they may be cretaceous.
Twin Peaks, No. 1, Plate 1, form a part of a mountain range, enclosing
Salt Lake valley. The terrace system is well shown, as described in the
preceding paper.
Lo
March 5, 1869. ] 5 / (Winchell.
ON THE GEOLOGICAL AGE AND EQUIVALENTS OF THE MARSHALL
GROUP.
By Pror. A. WINCHELL.
CONTENTS.
I. The existence of controversy.
II. History of discovery and opinion.
III. Present state of our stratigraphical knowledge.
Tables of stratification in various States.
Parallelism of these strata.
The Black Shale.
The Carboniferous Conglomerate.
The strata between the Conglomerate and the Waverly series.
The Waverly series and its equivalents. «
Not synchronous with Portage and Chemung.
Huron Group synchronous with Portage and Chemung in Michigan,
Ohio, Kentucky, Lowa.
This synchronism consistent with the tenor of Geological History.
IV. Present state of our paleontological knowledge.
Characters and parallelism of the Huron Group.
Catalogue of fossils from the Marshall Group and its equivalents.
Discussions of the catalogue.
Relations of Western localities among themselves.
Relations of these to Portage and Chemung.
Relations of the same to Conglomerates of western New York.
V. The Fauna of the Marshall Group presents a Carboniferous aspect.
Fossils identified with Carboniferous species of America and Europe.
Fossils whose analogies recur in Carboniferous rocks.
Generic and subgeneric types of a Carboniferous character.
VI. The Fauna of the Chemung Group presents a Devonian aspect.
VII. Can the Marshall and Chemung Group be synchronized?
Reliability of fossils in determining parallelism.
The Marshall and Chemung cannot be synchronized.
Influence of geographical conditions.
VIII. Parallelism of the Catskill and Marshall Groups.
Objections considered.
Paleontological affinities of the two.
Table of geological equivalents.
1X. Their names.
Appendix. References to publications on the subjert.
I. ExIsTENCE OF CONTROVERSY.
Every person conversant with the history of American geological science
is aware of the controversy which has long existed in reference to the age
and equivalents of the strata lying between the Corniferous limestones and
the limestones of the Lower Carboniferous system. Geologists of the
highest ability—both American and European—have participated in the
discussions ; and western geologists, almost without exception, have been
constrained to commit themselves, for specific reasons, to definite, though
often diverse, views in reference to the geology of the zone in question.
Asadditional facts have been successively brought to ight, some important
progress has been made in the settlement of controverted points ; and the
great body of western geologists seem to have united with considerable
unanimity ina judgment upon the main issues. Very persistent oppo-
An BS So=S\WOllg a
Winchell.] 58 [March 5,
sition is manifested, however, in certain quarters, to the verdict which is
already shadowed forth; and there are probably few whose convictions
have been satisfactorily and finally settled by a comprehensive comparison
of the facts which have been collected. I think, therefore, it may be use-
ful, in the present state of opinion, to bring forward a review of the data
upon which the controversy has proceeded, and to furnish the grounds of
the convictions which for some years past have been strengthening in my
own mind. In doing this, I hope I shall be actuated by a spirit of candor,
and sentiments of profound respect for the distinguished names arrayed
against my position. I seek only the truthful determination of the ques-
tion; and I would not raise my voice in a discussion where so many worthier
ones have been heard, did I not recall to mind that the merest child, or
the humblest peasant may stumble upon phenomena which the philosopher
had long sought in vain, and which may serve as the solvent of chronic
and distressing doubts.
Il. History or DiscovERY AND OPINION.
So far as I have observed, the first distinct allusion by any geological
writer to the zone of rocks under consideration, is embraced in an elabor-
ate description of the topography and geology of the ‘‘bituminous coal
deposits of the valley of the Ohio, and of the accompanying rock strata”’
by that distinguished pioneer of western geology, Dr. 8. P. Hildreth.!
In the section which he has given ofthe ‘‘Ferruginous deposits,’’? it
would appear that the lower beds, 500 feet in thickness, extend into the
series afterwards designated the ‘‘ Waverly series’’ by the Ohio geologists.
Dr. Hildreth styles them the ‘‘Great Lias Rock,’ and afterwards an
‘¢ Argillaceous sandstone rock, very fine grained,’”’ &c. Dr. 8. G. Morton
appends to this paper descriptions and figures (mostly too imperfect for
identification) of several species of included fossils.
In 1888, Mr. C. Briggs,’ assistant upon the geological survey of Ohio,
bestowed the name ‘‘ Waverly Sandstone Series’’ upon the lower portion
of the succession of shales, sandstones, and shaly sandstones, interposed
between the so-called Black Slate and the great Carboniferous Conglome-
rate. The series took its name from the village of Waverly in the southern
part of the State in Pike county, since some of the most beautiful building
stones afforded by the series had been quarried at that place. The Ohio
geologists, however, in other and subsequent publications, generally
referred to this assemblage of strata under the designation of. ‘‘ Fine
Grained Sandstone Series.’’4 The lower limits of the series, as defined,
were distinctly marked by the horizon of the Black Shale ; but the upper
limits were not stated with precision. It does not appear however that
the series was originally supposed to reach upwards to the Conglomerate ;°
1 Amer. Jour. Science and Arts, vol. 29, p. 1, and Plates 1 to xxxvVi.,
2 Tb. p. 133; also 136, 3 First Ann. Rep., Ohio, p. 79.
4 See for instance ‘‘ Report of Special Committee to report on the best method of obtaining a
complete geological survey,” 1836, p. 13, where the expression seems to have been first employed;
Whittlesey, Second Ann. Report, 1838, p. 56; J. W. Foster, Ib. p. 76; Briggs, Ib. pp. 122, 130.
5 Whittlesey, 2d Ann. Rep., p. 56.
a
1869.] og [Winchell.
though the Ohio geologists appear eventually to have given the term ‘‘Fine
Grained Sandstone Series’’ that extension of meaning ; and Col. Whit-
tlesey, Prof. Hall, Dr. Newberry and others, have since treated the term
““Waverly series’? as synonymous. The Ohio geologists abstained, on
principle, from expressing any opinion on the subject of the American or
foreign equivalents of these rocks.
During the same year, Mr. J. W. Foster® made a report in which he de-
seribed the Fine Grained Sandstone of Licking and Franklin counties, as
a continuation of the Waverly seriés of-Briggs, and expresses the opinion
that it is ‘‘a member of the mountain limestone formation.’’ I direct
particular attention to this early judgment. It must be noted, however,
that the older Cliff Limestone was also at that time regarded as belonging
to the mountain limestone series. Both Foster and Briggs speak of the
paucity of organic remains in the lower portion of the series, and their
abundance in the upper portion.
The public geological survey of Michigan was inaugurated at about the
same time as that of Ohio. The earliest mention of sandstones in that
State, occupying a position in the zone under consideration, is found in
Dr. Houghton’s report for 1838.7 Under the head of the ‘‘Upper Sandstone
of the Peninsula,’’ he notices those rocks which I have designated’ the
“* Woodville Sandstone’’ above the coal; the ‘‘ Parma Sandstone ’’ be-
neath it, and those portions of the ‘‘ Marshall group” which outcrop in
the southern counties. The outcrop of the last named sandstones in the
vicinity of Pt aux Barques, east of Saginaw bay, is treated by Dr. Hough-
ton in connection with the Lake Superior Sandstone under the head of
“‘TLower Sandstone or Graywacke group”’ (p. 9).
In the report of the following year, the Marshall sandstones are again
stated by Dr. Houghton to belong to ‘‘the great carboniferous group of
rocks.’’9
The first attempt at a systematic account of these strata was made in
1840 by Bela Hubbard, assistant on the geological survey. Mr. Hubbard
correctly apprehended their position as beneath the coal producing strata,
and alluded to the richness of the lower beds in organic remains. The
deeper and more argillaceous strata were never, tn southern Michigan, asso-
ciated as in Ohio, with the newer and more arenaceous beds. The entire
series of argillaceous strata, including the black shale of the state, which
is very inconspicuous in the southern counties, were described by Hubbard
as the ‘‘ Kidney Iron Formation.’”’ This was regarded as the bottom of
the Carboniferous system. The northern outcrop of these groups were
reported upon in 1841.1! In his attempt to assign them to their proper
stratigraphical position, Mr. Hubbard fell into singular errors, and intro-
duced into the most elaborate account of the lower peninsula which was
destined to be published for twenty years, a confusion of facts which ren-
dered the geology of Michigan an enigma to every one who attempted to
® Second Ann. Rep. Geol., Ohio, p. 103. 7 First Ann. Rep. Geol. Mich., p. 3.
8 First Bienn. Rep. Mich., 1861. ® Mich. Geol. Rep., 1839, p. 28.
10 Mich. Geol. Rep., 1840, p. 87. M Mich. Geol. Rep., 1841, p. 114.
Winchell.] 60 [March 5,
parallelize the rocks with those of surrounding States.!2. The following is
Mr. Hubbard’s tabular statement of the succession of groups embraced in
the lower peninsula,
A. Erratic Block group or Diluviums,
B. Tertiary Clays,
C. Coal measures,
D. Sub-carboniferous Sandstones,
E. Clay and Kidney Iron formation,
F. Sandstones of Pt aux Barques, ~
G. Argillaceous slates and flags of Lake Huron,
Hi. Soft, light-colored Sandstones,
I. Black, aluminous slate,
K. Lime rocks of Lake Erie. 3
In this table, as we now know, the groups marked D, F, and H, are but
different outcrops of the Marshall group ; and those marked H, G, and I,
but different outcrops of the Kidney Iron or Huron group. Following
Dr. Houghton in the report of 1838, Mr. Hubbard regarded the Pt aux
Barques sandstones and conglomerates as occupying a position beneath the
Kidney Iron formation of the southern portion of the state, and conse-
quently failed to identify the underlying shales. In the next place, Mr.
Hubbard identified with the Pt aux Bdrques shales, the shales of the
‘Michigan Salt group,”’ struck in the salt wells at Grand Rapids, although
these latter actually occupy a position above the Marshall sandstones.
When, therefore, these sandstones and the underlying Huron shales were
struck in the boring of the salt wells, they were supposed to constitute
the third couplet of similar strata, and are set down as groups H and I,
in the above table.!4 This confusion is illustrated by the following dia-
gram :
Michigan Salt Group, 1 is ts ae B
Marshall Group,..... Baars y
Huron Group,....... Hl
The Pt aux Barques sandstone were rightly recognized by Hubbard as
the equivalent of the characteristic portion of the Waverly sandstone se-
ries in Ohio; and it is singular that they were not observed to be equally
identifiable with the sandstones of Hillsdale county in the southern part
of the state. The upper conglomeratic portion of the Pt aux Barques
sandstones was erroneously synchronized with the Carboniferous con-
glomerate, which though reposing on the Waverly of Ohio, is separated
from the equivalent Marshall in Michigan, by the Carboniferous limestone
and the Michigan Salt group. The Black Shale was also recognized as
12 In his attempt, in 1843, to parallelize the strata of Michigan with those of other states, Prof.
Hall assigned the Pt aux Barques series to the zone of the Waverly Series and the Portage and
Chemung; but he seems not to have known how to dispose of the rocks denominated by Hough_
- ton and Hubbard the ‘‘Upper Sandstone of the Peninsula.” Rep. Geol., 4th Dist. N. J., p. 519.
13 See also Report, p. 136. M4 Report, p. 133.
1869.] 61 (Winchell.
agreeing ‘in general character and position”? with ‘the Black Shale
stratum of Ohio and Indiana.”’ §
In 1841, when Professor Hall was closing up his labors upon the geology
of Western New York, he undertook an extended tour through the west-
ern states for the purpose of ascertaining to what extent the formations
recognized in New York could be traced in other regions. The general
results of this tour were announced in 1842.16 At this time, he was led
to regard the Waverly series (embracing everything between the Black
Shale and the Conglomerate), as a prolongation of the Chemung and Por-
tage groups of New York. The thick bedded sandstones at Newburg and
Waverly were identified with the Portage sandstones, while the shaly
sandstones and flags near Cleveland were regarded as representing the
Gardeau shales and flagstones. From Newburg to Cuyahoga Falls, and
also at Akron, he identified the shales and sandstones of the Chemung
group.
Passing down the Ohio into Indiana, Prof. Hall again identified strata
corresponding to the Portage, and doubtfully to the Chemung ; while
above these, and beneath the carboniferous limestone, was a series of are-
naceous strata becoming interstratified above with beds of mountain lime-
stone, and, on the whole, exhibiting affinities with the Carboniferous
system. Nevertheless he inclined to regard them as ‘‘ sub-carboniferous”’
(used in the sense of swbter-carboniferous,) remarking that ‘a limit should
be fixed between what is to be strictly referred to the Carboniferous period,
and older deposits.’’ 17 The Black Shale of Ohio and Indiana was regarded
by Professor Hall as the equivalent of the Marcellus Shale of New York
‘“being the only representation of that rock, the Hamilton group and the
Genesee slate’’ (Ib. 280). .
During the same year, Mr. Conrad !8 read a paper before the Academy
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, in which he embraced brief descrip-
tions of three fossils from the Marshall sandstone of Moscow, Michigan,
which he referred to the Carboniferous system. Mr. Vanuxem’s Report
on the Geology of the Third District of New York, also appeared this
year.
In 1847 the distinguished European geologist, de Verneuil, gave the
world the results of an extended and critical investigation of the parallel-
15 Tt is interesting to note this early identification of the now styled Marshall sandstones with
the characteristic portion of the Waverly sandstone serics; and the Black Shale of Michigan with
the Black Shale of Ohio and Indiana; as these opinions were expressed by Hubbard anterior to
the first elaborate attempts by Hall and de Verneuil to trace the parallelism of formation in the
different states. Dr. Houghton had, indeed, previously recognized the correspondence of the “Black
Shale ” with certain formations in western New York, as described in the annual reports of that
State; though there is room to doubt whether he made the identification preferably with the Mar-
cellus or the Genesee Shale. Under the great natural difficuities attending the exploration of the
“‘wilderness of Michigan,” then just emerging from a territorial condition, and the equally great
embarrassments resulting from the undisturbed condition of the strata, it is indeed remarkable
that the early geologists of the state succeeded in establishing So many conclusions which have
stood the test of nearly a third of a century. ;
1s Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlii p. 51; Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. v. p. 1, and more fully in
Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol., p. 267. See also Geol. Rep., Fourth Dist. N. Y., p. 229.
Mv Trans. Assoc. Am. Geol., p. 281, 18 Jour. Acad. N. S., Phil., vol. viii, p. 249 and 269.
A»)
Winchell. ] 6 fe [March 5,
ism existing between American and European paleozoic formations.!9 This
paper was translated and somewhat condensed by Professor Hall for pub-
lication in America.”
Professor Hall’s translation is accompanied by criticismsand additions. 2!
One of the results of de Verneuil’s studies was to lower the base of the
Devonian system from the bottom of the Portage group where it had been
placed by Conrad, to the bottom of the Oriskany sandstone, and to fix
the summit above the Catskill group. He recognized the prolongation of
the Portage and Chemung groups into Ohio, but did not detect them in
Indiana, Kentucky, and Tennessee; though Prof. Hall in his notes upon
the paper, was inclined to recognize them in Indiana above his and Owen’s
‘‘sub-carboniferous.’’ The upper, or fossiliferous portion of the Waverly
series was regarded by de Verneuil as falling within the limits of the car-
boniferous system. The Black Slate of the West was identified with the
Genesee Shale of New York. These conclusions are fortified by extended
paleontological comparisons.
Professor Hall in his commentary upon this elaborate paper, seems to
oscillate between two opinions. He insists at one time upon the Silurian
relationships of the Hamilton, Portage and Chemung, and the broad
lithological and paleontological gap intervening between the Chemung
and the Catskill, 22 intimating that there is the place to draw the systemic
lines ; while at another time he asserts that the Chemung is more inti-
mately ‘‘related to the Carboniferous sandstones of the West than the
Hamilton group of New York ’’ #—that ‘there is no well defined line of
separation between the Chemung rocks of New York, and the sandstones
of Ohio and Indiana, which contain carboniferous fossils’’—and that
‘‘the error of American geologists who have attempted to compare our
formations with those of Europe, has been, in this instance, that of regard-
ing the great Carboniferous limestone as forming the basis of that system,
including all the strata below it in Devonian and Silurian.’’?4
In 1848 Mr. Murray, of the geological survey of Canada, made an ex-
amination of black bituminous shales on the south-east shore of Lake
Huron at Kettle Pt., and described them? under the head of ‘* Hamilton
group,’ remarking that they contained Lingula, but ‘‘neither of the two
species represented by Mr. Hall as belonging to the Genesee slate.”” Mr.
Murray adds that ‘‘no trace of the sandstones [of the Portage and Che-
mung groups] . . . has yet been met with in western Canada.”
19 “Sur le parallélisme des dépots paléozoiques de ’Amerique Septentrionale avec ceux del’
Europe; suivie @’ un tableau des éspéces fossiles communes aux deux continents, avec l’ indication
des étages ot elles se rencontrent, et terminée par un examen critique de chaque de ces éspéces.”
Bulletin de la Soc. Geol. de France, 2me Ser. Tome, iv, p. 646.
20 Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, [2] vol. v. pp. 176 and 359 and vol. vii. pp. 45 and 218.
21 See further critical remarks by Sharpe, ‘‘On the Paleozoic Rocks of N. A.,” in Quar. Jour. Geol.
Soc. Lond., Aug. 1848, and a paper by Mr. Elle de Beaumont, entitled ‘‘ Note sur les systémes de
Montagnes les plus anciens de ’ Europe.”
22 Amer. Jour. Sci., [2] v. 367, Note; vii, 46, Note 3 and p. 231. He had previously pointed out the
break below the Catskill. Pal. N. Y., vol. 1, introd. p. xvi.
22 Amer, Jour. Sci., [2] vii, p. 46, Note (a,)
24 Amer. Jour. Sci, [2] vii, 45, Note.
25 Report of Progress, 1848-9, p. 24.
9
1869.] 63 [Wincheil,
In 1850 Professor Hall resumed the discussion of the parallelism of
eastern and western formations, and the parallelism of the whole with the
standard systems of Europe.?°
In this celebrated discussion, Professor Hall states that ‘‘ the shalesand
sandstones of the Catskill mountains, . . . have no representatives
at the West. Succeeding the Black Shale, however, there is a group of
shales and sandstones which, from the fossils they contain, are regarded
as belonging to the Carboniferous period.”®” And again, ‘“‘the green
shales and sandstones of Ohio and Indiana, which succeed this Black
Shale, have been recognized as carboniferous by their fossils, though
there is still some doubt whether the lower part may not represent the
Chemung group of New York.’’ He still insists on the carboniferous
aspect of the rocks from the Marcellus to the Catskill, and cites, after de
Verneuil, the Goniatites rotatorius and Goniatites princeps as proving the
carboniferous age of the ‘‘ Rockford bed”’ WHELs he regards as embraced
in the Marcellus shale.”
About the same date, Mr. Murray®° reported new observations on the
Black Shales of Canada West, in the region more recently famous for its
production of petroleum. These he still regarded as embraced in the
Hamilton Group, and probably continuous with those previously exam-
ined at Kettle Point. He remarks that the ‘‘ bituminous springs [of
Enniskillen] probably owe their origin ’’ to this formation.
Tn 1851, Mr. Christy?! read a paper before the American Association at
its Cincinnati meeting, in which he announced that the Rockford Gonia-
tite limestone is centrally located in the Black Slate of Indiana, and ac-
cording to YVerneuil embraces the carboniferous fossils Gontatites rotator-
zus and G. princeps, and Cyclolobus. Mr. Christy specifies several locali-
ties at which the limestone and the slate may be seen in juxtaposition,
and accounts for Dr. D. D. Owen’s error in pronouncing the limestone a
portion of the Cliff limestone. Mr. Christy states that the Goniatite
limestone has about 28 feet of black shale below it, and about 30 feet of
black shale above it. The latter is succeeded by ‘‘about 350 to 400 feet of
soft shale with an occasional stratum of limestone and some beds of sand-
stone, including fossils.’’®?
At the same meeting Col. Whittlesey3? read a paper ‘‘On the equiva-
lency of the rocks of north-eastern Ohio, and the Portage, Chemung, and
Hamilton rocks of New York.’’ Col. Whittlesey’s extended and accurate
observations in the state, enabled him to furnish valuable sections of the
Ohio strata, to which I shall have occasion again to refer. Following
Professor Hall in his paper published in 1842, he places the Ohio rocks,
from the Cliff limestone to the Conglomerate, in the zone of the New
York Upper Devonian.
In 1852 Dr. D. D. Owen*! published a geological map of the North- west,
?
26 Foster and Whitney’s Rep. Min. Land District, L. Sup., vol. 11., chap. xviii, p. 285.
27 Ib. p. 292. 2 Tb: p. 307
23 Tb. p. 309. 80 Rep. Progress Geol. Sur. Can., 1850-51, p. 29,
31 Proc. Amer, Assoc., vol. v., p. 76. 32 Tb. p. 80.
33 Ib. p. 207. ‘1 Geol. Rep. Wis. Iowa, and Minn.
Winchell J 64 [March 5, |
in which he colored as Carboniferous, all those regions in Missouri and
Towa underlaid by rocks intervening between the Carboniferous limestone
and the Black Slate. Dr. Owen embraced in the Mountain limestone
series, the yellow sandstone at the base of the exposure at Burlington,
Iowa, and from the associated odlitie bed he describes and recognizes
Producta Cora, Spirifera striata and Cryroceras Burlingtonense (Ib. p.
95). :
Professor Swallow in his Missouri Report, published in 1855, recog-
nizes the Chemung group, and establishes three divisions called respec-
tively, in descending order, the ‘‘ Chouteau limestone,”’ the ‘‘ Vermicular
sandstone and shales,’’ and the ‘‘ Lithographic limestone.’’ Professor
Swallow in referring to differences of opinion about the age of these rocks,
says: ‘‘Many of our fossils are either identical with, or very similar to
those of the Chemung group of New York. Among these are a species
of those remarkable forms of the New York reports called Hucoides cauda-
gall? and Filicites gracilis; also Avicula subduplicata and Nucula bellatula.
Mr. F. B. Meek** in his appendix, enumerates 55 species of fossils from
these rocks, of which 19 are described by Dr. B. F. Shumard as new
species ; 13 are identified with European carboniferous species, while one
only, Avicula duplicata (Hall, ) is identified with species from the Chemung
of New York, and two—Spirifera mucronata? and Nucula bellatula, ‘are
identified with Hamilton species. Such determinations would seem to
afford but slender support to Professor Swallow’s decision, to range
these rocks on the horizon of the Chemung.
During the same year Mr. Marcou*’ reproduced in Europe the geologi-
eal chart of the United States, which he had first published in America®
in 1858. In this chart’he colors as underlaid by the Mountain Limestone,
the entire area in Michigan which we now know to be occupied by the
Marshall and Huron groups. The area of the Waverly series is colored as
Devonian. This chart was again reproduced in 1858 %9 with alterations,
at which time, Mr. Marcou seems to have regarded the area of the Mar-
shall group in Michigan as also of Devonian age.
Norwood and Pratten 4° in 1855, in describing Chonetes Fischeri from
the yellow sandstones at Burlington, Iowa, refer them to the ‘‘base of
the Mountain Limestone.”’
The ‘‘ Knobstone’”’ formation of Kentucky was ranged by D. D. Owen?!
in 1856, as ‘* sub-carboniferous’’; while the ‘‘ Black Singula Shale,”’ as he
styles it, was regarded as Devonian.
Professor Safford 4? in the same year advanced the opinion that the
Black Shale of Tennessee ought to be regarded as Carboniferous.
In Mr. Murray’s48 Canadian report for the year 1855, he decides to
transfer the Black Shale of Canada West to the ‘‘ Portage and Chemung
3% Rep. Geol. Surv. Mo. 1., p. 101. 36 Tb. IT, p. 218. \
37 “Geol. Karte d. Verein’ Staaten,” in Peterm. Mittheilungen, p, 149.
33 Geol. Map of U.S., with explanatory text.
29 Geology of North America, with Maps and Plates, Zurich.
40 Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., [2] vol. iii, p. 25. 41 Geol. Rep. Ky., vol. 1. p. 89.
42 Geol. Reconnoissance Tenn., p, 158. 42 Rep. Geol. Sury. Can., 1863 6, p. 129.
f
1869.] 65 [ Winchell.
group ;”’ assigning as his motive the fact that ‘‘ Professor Hall, on seeing
the section at Kettle Pt., expressed it as his opinion that the rocks were
the lowest measures of the Portage and Chemung group,’’ and the fact
that ‘‘a nearly complete section of the Hamilton group’ had been dis-
covered on ‘‘ some of the tributaries of the River Sable (south).”’
The ferruginous shales of the Marshall group of Michigan were again
pronounced Carboniferous in 1858, by Dr. R. P. Stevens,44 who described
from Battle Creek three species of Leda and one species each of Vucula and
Chonetes. These are spoken of as occurring in ‘‘association with an Ortho-
ceras, Nautilus, and Bellerophon Uret, which is evidently carboniferous.”’
In tlre same year, Professor Hall 4> published his Report on the geology
of Eastern Iowa, in which he embraced the first separate account which I
have observed of the yellow sandstones which outcrop on the banks of the
Mississippi at Burlington and other localities. He speaks contidently of
their equivalency to the Chemung rocks of New York, and points out a
bed of green shale at the base, which he thinks might represent the Por-
tage group. He does not fail to recognize, however, the imperceptible
graduation of these sandstones into the overlying Burlington limestone,
and expresses the opinion that the Chemung group of Missouri, as organ-
ized by Professor Swallow, ‘‘ will probably be found to include a portion
of the Hamilton group.’’4® Professor Hall describes eleven species of fossils
from these strata, but makes no identifications with fossils from the typi-
cal Chemung of New York. Mr. C. A. White’s ‘‘sections’’ of the rocks
at Burlington, in the appendix to this report, possess very great interest,
as embodying the results of exact observations.
In September, 1860, Messrs. Meek and Worthen‘*’ published descriptions
of five new species of fossils from the Rockford limestone. In the same
month, Mr. C. A. White*® published ‘‘ Observations on the Geology and
Paleontology of Burlington, lowa, and its vicinity ;’’ embracing descrip-
tions of seven new species from the yellow sandstones, and elaborate
discussions establishing the intimate relations existing between the yellow
sandstones and the overlying Burlington limestone.
During 1859-60-1, a geological survey of the lower peninsula of Michi-
gan was in progress under my direction. The first public announcement
of the determinations made upon this survey was in the form of a lecture
delivered at the University by myself to an audience consisting mainly of
a delegation from the Chicago Academy of Sciences, who were then on an
excursion to the University of Michigan. This lecture was reported in
full and published in the Chicago Tribune in December, 1860. A summary
of the results of the survey was also published in the Detroit Tribune,
December 11th, 1860, and briefly in the Detroit Advertiser of January 26,
1861. Advance sheets of my official report were sent off August 18th,
1861, and noticed in the American Journal of Science and Arts in Septem-
ber, 1861.
44 Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxv-., 262. 45 Geology of Iowa, 1, p. 88.
48 Tb. p. 91. 47 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., September, 1860, p. 447.
43 Jour. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. vil, p. 209.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—I
Winchell.] 66 [March 5,
Tn the several documents to which I have just referred, I stated distinetly
that I regarded the Marshall sandstones of Michigan as the equivalents of
the Fine grained sandstone series of Ohio, and the Black Shale of Michigan
as equivalent to the Black Shale of Ohio and Indiana. I also stated as a
matter of stratigraphical demonstration, that these black shales are seen in
Thunder bay of Lake Huron and in Grand Traverse bay of Lake Michigan
to rest above the well characterized Hamilton limestones. I had at first
considered these black shales as the equivalent of the Genesee Shale of
New York,4? but in deference to the judgment of Professor Hall, person-
ally expressed, I united them with my overlying Hudson group, which
was organized to receive a series of bluish and greenish argillaceous strata
beneath the Marshall sandstones, and supposed by me-to correspond to the
Portage group of New York.5® I was not aware at that time, that Mr.
Murray had had an almost identical experience,®! as I have already stated.
Tn 1860, Professor Swallow®2 published descriptions of 19 species of fos-
sils from the Chouteau and Lithographic limestones of Missouri ; and in
the same year, Mr. Lyon®? published a section of the rocks of Kentucky,
in which he ranges the ‘‘ Knobstone formation ’’ under ‘‘sub-carbonifer-
ous,’’ and inclines to place the Black Slate in the same position.
Early in 1861, Professor Hall®! published ‘‘ Notes and Observations
upon the Fossils of the Goniatite Limestone in the Marcellus Shale of the
Hamilton group in the eastern and central parts of the State of New York,
and those of the Goniatite beds of Rockford, Indiana, with some anala-
gous forms from the Hamilton group proper.”” In this paper Professor
Hall returns with strong assurance to his original opinion enunciated in
1842, that the Black Shale of the West is the equivalent of the Marcellus
of New York, and that the ferruginous sandstones of Ohio and Indiana,
are the equivalents of the Portage and Chemung. He describes as new
18 species from the Rockford beds including those recognized as Gonitatites
rotatorius,»> and Goniatites princeps by Verneuil, and two species previously ,
described by Meek and Worthen. He, however, fails to identify a single
species from the Rockford limestone with any species occurring in the
Marcellus Shale or other Devonian rocks of New York.
The same number of Silliman’s Journal which contained the announce-
ment of my official report, contained also a paper by Messrs. Meek and W or-
then®® on the “‘ Age of the Goniatite Limestone at Rockford, Indiana, and
its relations to the Black Slate.of the Western States, and to some of the
succeeding rocks above the latter.’’ These authors deny that any portion
of the Black Slate is found above the Goniatite limestone, as had been
asserted by Christy, and announced that it lies entirely below. The
limestone they identify with the Chouteau limestone of Missouri, founding
the opinion on an identification of at least six out of 23 or 24 Rockford
species, and a close resemblance amongst most of the others. They argue
49 Mich. Geol. Rep., 1861, p. 78. 50 Tb. pp. 79 and 139.
51 Jn alluding to this fact in my report, I inadvertently attributed this experience to Mr- Billings;
Report, p. 79- 52 Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci., 1, 635.
53 Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci.. 1, 620- 54 xiii. Report New York Regents App., p. 95.
99 This is described as G. Ixion, in a note, p.125. °* Amer. Jour. Sci.. [2] xxxiii., 167.
67
1869.] ( (Winchell.
with a degree of paleontological acuteness which cannot be gainsayed, that
both the Rockford beds, and the three members of the Chemung group
of Missouri as interpreted by Professor Swallow, present characteristics
which forbid their introduction into the Devonian system. They affirm
the judgment of de Verneuil, that the Black Slate of the West is the
equivalent of the Genesee Shale of New York. In an appended note they
propose to adopt the name Kinderhook group for the rocks in Ilinois
lying between the Black Shale and the Mountain Limestone.
Some time in 1862, Professor Hall>” published a ‘‘ supplementary note’’
to his paper on the Rockford limestone, in which he states that having
identified the Rockford Gondatites Hyas among fossils from the Waverly
sandstone of Licking county, Ohio,®® he is led to ‘‘conelude that the
position assigned to the Goniatite beds of Rockford may be erroneous, and
that the true position is higher in the series, or more nearly in a parallel
with the Chemung group.”’
During the year 1862 large additions were made to our exact knowledge
of the species of fossils embraced in the series of rocks immediately under-
lying the Mountain Limestone. In February, Messrs. White and Whitfield®?
published a paper entitled ‘Observations upon the rocks of the Missis-
sippi valley, which have been referred to the Chemung group of New York,
together with descriptions of new species of fossils from the same horizon
at Burlington, lowa.”’ This paper embraces descriptions of 31 new species,
The authors in their introductory remarks, synchronize the yellow sand-
stones of Burlington, with the Chemung of New York, though admitting
the strong paleontological contrast, and their striking affinity with the
Burlington limestone and higher carboniferous rocks. This opinion is
founded upon the identification of several lowa and Missouri fossils with
species from the Waverly series of Ohio, which is assumed to be in physi-
cal continuity with the Chemung of Western New York, as originally
alleged by Professor Hall. ,
In April, Mr. White published further descriptions of new species
from the same horizon at Burlington, lowa; Hamburg, Dlinois; and
Hannibal and Clarkesville, Mo.;and in the same month Professor Swallow®!
published descriptions of two new species from the Chouteau limestone of
Missouri.
In May I published® a paper ‘‘On the rocks lying between the Carbon-
iferous Limestone of the Lower Peninsula of Michigan, and the limestones
of the Hamilton Group, with descriptions of some Cephalopods, supposed
to be new to science.”? Of the species enumerated, 24 were from the
Marshall group, and one from the Huron. In this paper the Black Shale
- 57 Fifteenth Report New York Regents, App., p. 81.
53 Having myself examined the fossils, 1 do not consider it identified wlth G. Ixion, Meek and
Worthen (=G. Hyas, Hall,) but with G. Marshallensis, Winchell, which differs from G., Lyoni by
constant technical characters, having an additional accessory lobe and saddle, and having the dorsal
lobe broader and relatively longer. A transverse section of G. Lyoni, is broadest near the umbilicus,
while a section of G- Marshallensis is regularly oval. Professor Iall’s inference, however, remains
unchallenged.
59 Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. vol. viii, p- 239° 60 Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist-, vol. ix, p- 8.
61 Trans. St- Louis Acad. Sci-, vol. 2, p-sl- 82 Amer Jour Sci, [2,] xxxiil., 352.
Winchell.] 68 [March 5,
of Michigan and Canada West, were again identified and ranged within
the limits of the Huron group, next above the Hamilton.
In September® I continued the enumeration of Michigan species from
the Marshall and Huron groups, giving 63 from the former, and 17 from
the latter. Of the Marshall species, 5 were identified with fossils previously
described from Rockford. Of the Huron species, 6 were identified more
or less doubtfully with species from the Hamilton group of New York.
In November, Col. Jewett! and Professor Hall® both made publication
of the results of late observations upon the rocks in Eastern New York,
which had been embraced within the limits of the Catskill group upon the
geological map of the state. Col. Jewett declared the opinion as the result
of his examinations, that the Catskill group did not exist within the limits
of the state ; while Professor Hall admitted that the upper limit of the
Chemung rocks must be carried in the Catskill mountains, ‘‘ to an elevation
of at least 2,000 feet above tide-water.’’ He stated that it now becomes
necessary to restrict the term Catskill group to the beds above [the Che-
mung of Delaware county, hitherto regarded as Catskill, ] or to those for-
merly known as X and XI of the Pennsylvania Survey.’’ He closes by
remarking that ‘‘in tracing the Chemung group westward, there are many
indications that it may require to be restricted in its designation,’ and that
‘‘the Waverly sandstone group of the Ohio reports, at one time regarded
by [himself] as entirely equivalent to the Portage and Chemung groups,
may, in its upper members, constitute a distinct enOuD) though we do not
yet know any line of demarkation between them.’
In 1862, Professor R. Owen in his Report on the geology of aia,
ranges the shales and sandstones underneath the Mountain Limestone in a
group designated after D. D. Owen, ‘‘sub-carboniferous,’’? regarding them
as at the base of the Carboniferous system, and the equivalent of at least
some portion of the Waverly series of Ohio. The Black Slate he identifies
with the Genesee Shale.
In January, 1863,°7 after having read Col. Jewett’s announcement of the
unreal character of the Catskill group, and Professor Hall’s admission
that this group must, at least, be very materially reduced in thickness, I
gave utterance to convictions which had for some time been maturing,
that not only were the Waverly rocks of the West of Carboniferous age,
but that also the Chemung of New York, which Hall, White, Whitfield,”
Swallow, and others had persisted in identifying with these, must also be
regarded as Carboniferous. I furnished a synopsis of the paleontological
evidences that the Chemung, Waverly, Marshall, Rockford and Burling-
63 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil-, September, 1862, p. 405. In the Sixteenth Report of the New York
Regents Professor Hall has given figures of the internal structure of Centronella Julia, described
in this paper, from drawings furnished by myself. He however, refers the species to Cryptonella—
an error which he has since recognized. (Notice of vol. iv. of the Paleontology of New York, p. 21-)
64 Fifteenth Report Regents New York, p- 198, and Amer. Jour. Sci., [2,] xxxiv, 418.
65 Canadian Naturalist and Geol., vol. vii, p- 377-
66 Indiana Geol. Rep-, 1862, pp- 92, 108, &c.
67 Amer. Jour. Sci., [2] xxxv, 61. In this paper, an editorial alteration makes me say “Old Red
Sandstone of New York,” when I wrote “ Old Red Sandstone of Scotland.”
1869. ] 69 (Winchell.
ton beds were synchronous, and that all should be ranged within the Car-
boniferous system. ®®
In January, 1863,°9 I published a series of ‘‘ descriptions of fossils from
the yellow sandstones lying beneath the Burlington limestone, at Burling-
ton, Iowa.’? The number of new species described in this paper was 59,
and the number of old species there first identified from the yellow sand-
stones was 10—raising the total number of species thus far known from
those strata from 66 to 185. The Carboniferous facies of this assemblage
of organic remains was again insisted upon.”
Sir William Logan”! in the Geology of Canada, published in 1863 or 1864,
refers the Black Shale of Canada West to the Genesee, but states that
Professor Hall embraces the Genesee in the Portage. This is what I had
done in 1860.
In November, 1863, a pamphlet appeared from Professor Hall’? contain-
ing descriptious of 17 species of crinoidea obtained from the Waverly
sandstone series at Richfield, Ohio. While admitting that this assem-
blage of crinoids presents affinities with Carboniferous types, he asserts
that the aftinities are quite as strong with types from the recognized
Chemung and even the Hamilton of New York. Horbesiocrinus lobatus
is actually identified with a Hamilton species, while 7. communis, though
intimately related to forms from the Keokuk limestone, has also been
found in the Chemung. He regards Scaphiocrinus Afgina as closely re-
lated also to Poteriocrinus diffusus of the Hamilton group. He concludes:
‘‘Left to the evidence afforded alone by the collection, and the means of
comparison at present possessed, I should infer that the geological posi-
tion of these species is between the Hamilton group and the lower Car-
boniferous beds; while the occurrence of a single species identical with
a species in the middle of the Chemung group will ally them more nearly
with the fauna of the Hamilton group than with that of the Carbonifer-
ous period.’’
The age of the Ohio sandstones was again touched upon by Professor
Hall in 1864, who thought that the study of the fossil plants of the
Chemung tended to confirm opinions previously entertained as to the
Carboniferous affinities of these rocks and those in Ohio, which he had
68 The identifications with Chemung fossils had been reported by others; as at that time I had
not personally examined Chemung specimens. I had identified one Avicula from Professor Hall’s
figure and description.
69 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Jan., 1863. p. 2.
70 The genus Syringothyris established in this paper, though not accepted by Professor Hall, (Proc.
Amer. Phil: Soc. May, 1866, p. 250) has been shown to be valid by the examinations of some of the
highest authority in America and England. (See Meek: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Dec., 1865, and
Carpenter: Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist., July, 1867, p. 68, where the genus is partially illustrated-
Davidson; Geolog, Mag., July, 1867, who gives a fully illustrated description of the genus—partly
from drawings furnished hy myself.) Dr. Carpenter now refers to this genus a part of Spirifer cus-
pidatus from Millicent Ireland (as first suggested by Mr. Meek;) S. Hannibalensis Swallow, S. Capax,
Hall, Syntrielasma hemiplicatus, Meek and Worthen—also probably a portion of Spirier distans of
Belgium.
7. Geology of Canada, 1863, p. 387
7 Pamphlet; reprinted in xvii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 1865, p. 50.
73 xvi. Rep. N. York Regents, pp. 92and107. Note.
70
Winchell.] / [March 5,
regarded as contemporaneous. Ina note he remarks that the Catskill
rocks of Eastern New York must probably be restricted to ‘‘the coarse
conglomerate of the upper part of the Catskills,’? which corresponds to
the outliers occurring on the summits of the higher hills in Western New
York, and to a continuous formation beyond the limits of the State in
Pennsylvania. .
In July, 1865, I presented’ a continuation of the results of my re-
searches in the paleontology of the rocks under consideration, embracing
descriptions and notices of fossils from the States of Michigan, Ohio, In-
diana, Illinois, Iowa and Missouri, in all which I had made personal ex-
plorations. The number of species noticed in this paper is 94, of which
36 were therein first described. This paper presents a shadowing forth
of conclusions which I feel constrained to think, demand the candid con-
sideration of paleontologists. To this time I had been impressed with
the expectation that the Chemung rocks of New York would eventually
be synchronized with the Waverly series of Ohio upon paleontological
grounds. It had generally been supposed that the Chemung strata em-
braced from three to six species which could be identified with western
species from the horizon of the Waverly sandstone ; and that on the com-
pletion of the study of these rocks by the paleontologist of New York,
further identifications would be effected. At the suggestion of Professor
Hall, I spent several days with him in February and March 1865, in
making direct comparisons between the types of the Chemung group of
New York and a collection of fossils supposed to belong to the same
horizon, from the Western States. The western fossils brought under
comparison numbered about 175 species. To the great surprise of both
of us, we were unable to identify a single species with Chemung types.
All the reputed identifications had to be abandoned. This is a conclusion
in which Professor Hall united with myself.
Not satisfied to be completely frustrated in my attempt to determine
the New York equivalent of our western sandstones, I turned my atten-
tion to an examination of the facts in connexion with strata occupying a
position in Western New York above the typical Chemung strata. Pro-
fessor Hall’> had described a conglomerate in Western New York as ter-
minating the Chemung series, and had remarked that it contained Che-
mung fossils; though it does not appear that any critical and final exam-
ination had been made upon this point. The Catskill group had been
restricted at the east to certain conglomerates capping the Catskill moun-
tains, and at the west to detached outliers of sandstone becoming also at
times conglomeritic.7® In addition to these he had described a conglom-
erate which he identified with the Carboniferous of Pennsylvania and
Ohio”. It does not appear that any two of these conglomerates had been
74 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.. July, 1865, p. 109. The materials for this investigation, besides my
own collections in different States, embraced Col. Whittlesey’s Ohio collection and numerous resi-
dual investiganda of the White collection of the University, from Jowa, Missouri and Illinois,
7 Geol. Rep. 10th Dist. N. Y., p.252 and elsewhere,
76 Canadian Naturalist, vii. p. 380. 77 Rep. Geol. 10 Dist. N. Y., p, 284.
} :
Ra
1869.] il. [Wincheil.
seen in juxtapasition,78 and Iam not aware of the evidence upon which
they had been pronounced stratigraphically consecutive.
Through the kindness of Professor Hall I was permitted to examine
the original specimens of fossils from the so-called Chemung and Car-
boniferous conglomerates. The fossils of the latter had been collected
from a single locality, about four miles north of Panama in Chatauque
‘county, and did not number in all more than half a dozen species, of
which three had been described in the New York Report.7? Of these,
four were found, to the surprise of both of us, to be identical with species
from the horizon of the Waverly series of the West.
Nor was this all. On comparing specimens of the so-called Chemung
conglomerate with these, [remarked not only a great lithological similarity
but a striking general resemblance of the fossils, and ‘an actual identity
of two species with species which had been identified in the Carboniferous
conglomerate. My conclusions, so far as any could be reached, were
announced in the following words :
‘Tn the light of these identifications, and in the absence of all identifi-
cations between the western species and those of the Chemung, as wellas
between the species of this (so-called Chemung) conglomerate and those
of the Chemung, it might not seem unreasonable to doubt its affinities
with recognized Chemung rocks, and to suspect its continuity with the
supposed ‘Carboniferous conglomerate,’ until observation shall have
demonstrated that its stratigraphical position is really below that forma-
mation. And further, since we must probably abandon the attempt to
coérdinate the Chemung of New York with the fossiliferous portions of
the sandstones and shales of the West lying between the ‘Black Slate’
and the Coal Conglomerate, it seems not unlikely that we may yet be able
to prove the conglomerate of Western New York to be the attenuated
and littoral prolongation of those western sandstones and shales—at least
of the superior and fossiliferous portions of them ; so that the latter would
stand as a hitherto unrecognized group of strata lying at the very base of
the Carboniferous system ; while the Chemung rocks of New York fall
within the Devonian system, toward which the writer is now inclined to
think that their paleontological affinities attract them.”
“Tt yet remains to determine by observations in the field, whether the
so-called ‘Carboniferous conglomerate’ of Western New York is really
the equivalent of the Coal conglomerate of Ohio ; and whether any actual
junction of superposition can be discovered in Western Pennsylvania or
Eastern Ohio between the Chemung rocks in their westward prolongation
and the fine grained sandstones and gritstones of the Western States.”’
In December, 1865, Messrs. Meek and Worthen®® described three
additional species from Ohio and Illinois ; and Mr. Meek®! took up a dis-
cussion which involved the characters and validity of the Genus Syringo-
thyris from the yellow sandstones of Iowa:
In 1866 I published®? the results of a geological and economical survey
73 Hall—Rep. Geol. 10 Dist. N. Y., p. 292. 79 Geol. 10 Dist. N. Y.. p. 291.
80 Proc. Acad. Nat-Sci. Phil., Dec., 1865, p. 245. 8! Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Dec., 1865, p 275-
% The Grand Traverse Region, p. 51.
Winchell.] ’ 72 [March 5,
of the Grand Traverse Region in the lower peninsula of Michigan, among
which I alluded to the ratification of my previous opinions that the Black
Shale of the West is the equivalent of the Genesee Shale. J announced
here, for the first time that this shale had afforded me two characteristic
New York fossils from near the mouth of Bear Creek in Canada West—
Leiorhynchus multicosta and Discina Lodensis.®8
In this report I repeated my correction that the ‘‘green shales’? above
the Genesee Shale in Michigan correspond to some portion—perhaps the
Cashaqua Shale—of the Portage group of New York, while the higher
bluish, argillaceous shales might answer to the Chemung.
In June of the same year, having occasion to make a survey and report, *4
in conjunction: with Dr. Newberry, upon portions of Knox and Coshocton
counties in Ohio, I cited several Waverly sandstone species as extending
upward into the Coal Measures, and suggested that the Ohio equivalent
of the Portage and the Chemung might be the series of the ‘‘ Chocolate
Shales and Flags,’’ whose existence beneath the fossiliferous sandstones
of Ohio had been demonstrated by borings. The deepest of these borings
indicated the existence of 1060 feet of shales and sandstones between the
base of the False Coal Measures and the top of the Genesee Shale. Of this
distance 534 feet were occupied by the so-called ‘‘chocolate shales and
flags.”’
In July of the same year Messrs. Meek and Worthen® described two
additional species, of which one was from Richfield, Summit county, Ohio,
and the other from Rockford, Indiana.
During the same year (1866) appeared the first volume of the final Re-
port on the geology of Illinois, in which Mr. Worthen,*®® speaking of the
Kinderhook group, locatesit at the base of the Carboniferous system, insists
upon the carboniferous affinities of its fauna, and expresses the opinion
that no rocks exist in Illinois or Indiana which can be referred to the
Chemung group of New York.
Before the close of the year the second volume of this Report appeared,
in which the paleontology of the Kinderhook group is described by Messrs.
Meek, Worthen, and Newberry,®” the facts of which seemed fully to sus-
tain the previous opinions of those geologists in reference to the age of
the group. :
During the same year (1866) Professor Hall§* also made advance publica-
tion of some views which were to be embodied in lais fourth volume of the’
Paleontology of New York. In this paper he insisted with great earnest-
ness upon the probable Chemung age of the Waverly series and its west-
ern equivalents, explaining the contrast of the eastern and western faunas
on geographical and hydrographical considerations.
83 Mr. J. P. Lesley has somewhere attributed the discovery of these fossils to Professor Hall. It
is true that I had exhibited them to Professor Hall and obtained his acquiescence in my identifica-
tion, but he did not intimate that he previously observed them west of New York, Indeed, in his
latest known opinion these Canadian shales had been referred to the Portage group. (Geology of
Canada, 1863, p. 387.
84 Prospectus of the Neff Petroleum Co.,p.7. *% Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., July, 1866, p. 251.
®6 Geol. Survey IIL, I, p. 108. 87 Geol. Surv. Ill. IJ, Paleont. pp. 62, 77, 80, 145.
88 ‘Trans. Amer. Philosophical Soc., 1866, p- 246; in advance of Vol. LV, Paleont. of N. Y.
ro
1869.] lo [Winchell.
In 1867, at the meeting of the National Academy at Hartford, Professor
Hall reiterated the same views with considerable amplification. Professor
Agassiz, who was present, gave them his earnest endorsement, pronouncing
them the natural and philosophical conclusions of a geologist who had
devoted 30 years to the study of the data upon which the conclusions
rested. His remarks in reference to geologists who felt themselves con-
strained to entertain divergent opinions were at least emphatic, if they
were not complimentary.
Finally in August, 1868, Dr. T. S. Hunt read a paper before the Chicago
meeting of the American Association®® in which he makes note of the
occurrence, in the extreme western part of the province, of some gray and
more or less blackish shales overlying the Genesee Shale proper, which he
ranges in the horizon of the Portage group. It will be noticed in the
sequel of this paper that I have made a similar disposition of similar strata
in Michigan, Ohio, Indiana, Kentucky, and Missouri.
Such is a sketch of the history of opinion in reference to the rocks under
consideration. %
III. PrREesENT STATE OF OUR STRATIGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE.
In the State of New York the strata above the Genesee Shale have
been arranged by Professor Hall®! as follows :—
Carboniferous Conglomerate :—Coarse silicious conglomerate and diag-
onally laminated sandstone.
Catskill Group :—Conglomerate of the Catskill mountains. Along Gen-
esee river, a calcareous sandstone, sometimes highly ferruginous, ap-
proaching iron ore.
Chemung Group :—Conglomeritic at top in Western New York. Green-
ish gray sandstones with occasional fossiliferous bands.
Portage Group :—A., In Eastern New York.
1. Shales and shaly sandstones and flagstones 100 feet.
2. Red shale and shaly sandstone 400 to 500 feet.
3. Greenish and gray shales and shaly sandstones.
4. Darker shales to Hamilton Group.
89 Published in Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts [2] XLVI. p.355. In this paper Dr. Hunt takes occasion
to state that “ Professor Winchell, for some reason, doubts the existence of the Portage formation
in Ontario.” As Dr. Hunt makes no reference to any published doubts entertained by me on this
subject, lam at aloss to know the source of his mis-information. I have heretofore always iden-—
tified with the Portage (or Portage and Chemung) the series of argillaceous strata extending from
the Genesee Shale to the Marshall sandstones, (See the various references already made in this
paper.) If these strata exist in Ontario I should pronounce them Portage. I have already described
them upon the Michigan borders of Ontario, and it is to be presumed that they extend across the
boundary. As Dr. Hunt states, these Portage shales are physically a continuation of the Genesee
shale proper, and by ranging them all in my Huron group, I did in 1861, what Dr. Hunt has done in
in 1866 and 1868.
90 T have made no note of the elaborate and able researches of Dr. Dawson upon the fossil vege-
tation of rocks lying in and near the zone under consideration. Dr. Dawson’s papers—together
with some minor papers. also passed over—will be referred to in an Appendix.
#1 Final Rep. 1V Dist. N. Y.; Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, vol. vii., p.377; xvi. Report Re-
gents N. Y.,p.107. Note.
Ne rong Si
lay /
Winchell.] i4 [March 5,
B, In Western New York.
1. Portage Sandstone, thick bedded.
2. Gardeau Shales and Flagstones—green and black—slaty and sandy
shales with thin layers of sandstone.
3. Cashaqua Shale—soft, argillaceous, green, crumbling to a tena-
ceous clay.
In Ontario, although Professor Hall and Sir William Logan have
assigned at least a portion of the black shales to the horizon of the Por-
tage Group, I have not been able to distinguish any of them from the
Genesee shale proper containing Ledorhynchus multicosta and Discina Lo-
densis. As overlying shales of the age of the Portage Group however
exist in Michigan close to the national boundary, I have always pre-
sumed that they extend across it. This opinion Dr. Hunt has very re-
cently confirmed.
In Michigan I have been able to make out a complete determination of
the strata as follows :°?
Parma Conglomerate :—a whitish or rusty, often conglomeritic and ob-
liquely laminated sandstone with vegetable remains. 105 feet.
Carboniferous Limestone :—irregularly bedded, often cherty or ferrugi-
nous, and much shattered 7m sitw—becoming arenaceous below. 70 feet.
Michigan Salt Group:—consisting of aluminous and gypseous shales,
thin gray flags, bands of limestone and thick beds of gypsum. 200 feet.
Marshall Group :—consisting of :—
Napoleon Sandstone, pale buff, often conglomeritic, obliquely lami-
nated, thick bedded. 128 feet.
Marshall Sandstone, reddish, yellowish, olive, obliquely laminated,
highly ferruginous—the iron often under a rudely concentric, concre-
tionary arrangement. In places calcareous. Highly fossiliferous.
160 feet.
Huron Gritstones, bluish or greenish gray, fine grained, regularly
bedded. 15 feet.
Huron Group, consisting of :-—
Argillaceous shales and flagstones—the latter less prominent in the
southern part of the State. 500 feet.
Green arenaceous shales, especially in Grand Traverse Bay. 25 feet.
Black bituminous shale (Genesee shale). 25 feet.
Hamilton Group. [The calcareous member of this group is conspicuous
in Michigan. ]
In the State of Ohio the succession of strata seems to be nearly as fol-
lows :°8
Conglomerate, buffish, obliquely laminated, more or less pebbly, often
with rudely concentric spheroids of iron ore. Sometimes underlaid by
“* Halse Coal Measures.”’
92 Mich. Geol. Rep., 1861, p. 138; Amer. Jour, Sci. [2] xxwxiit., 352; The Grand Traverse Region,
p. 49.
® Foster Geol. Rep. Ohio, p. 77; Briggs—Ib., p. 79; Whittlesey—Proc. Amer. Assoc. Vv. p- 76;
Winchell—Mich. Geol. Rep., 1861, p. 78, also, Prospectus, Neff Petroleum Co., p. 7.
Be
1869] (e [Winchell.
Gritstone series, consisting of flaggy shales, ferruginous, somewhat thick-
bedded sandstones with iron-stone partings, often with interstratified
blackish or bluish shales. Followed downward by shales of a bluish,
brownish or reddish color, 100 to 150 feet.
Waverly series:—Bluish or greenish gray, fine-grained and evenly bed-
ded, often fossiliferous sandstones and flags, with interstratified brown-
ish shales. 200 feet. [In Knox county the Gritstone and Waverly
series are together 517 feet. ]
Chocolate shales, argillaceous, chocolate colored, bluish and blackish.
250 to 300 feet. [In Knox county this series is 450 feet. ]
Black Shale, 100 to 150 feet. [This is an abnormal thickness of the Black
Shale in the West, and it is probable the upper portion belongs with the
Chocolate series. ]
In the State of Indiana the series seems to be constituted as follows :9!
Carboniferous Conglomerate.
St. Louis Limestone, freely represented.
Warsaw Limestone.
Keokuk Group, consisting of :—
Gray limestone and calcareous shales (Floyd county) 50 feet. Wanting
in Northern Indiana.
Brown shales with geodes and nodules of hornstone.
Knob formation or gritstones, micaceous, ferruginous, friable, with in-
tercalated limestones in the upper part. 150 feet or more.
Rockford Limestone, with Goniatites, Wce.; represented by a thin bedded
sandstone in Northern Indiana. Wanting in Western Indiana.
Black Shale.
Tn the State of Illinois we have the following succession of strata.°%
Burlington Limestone.
Kinderhook Group, consisting of ‘‘gritstones, sandy and argillaceous
shales, with thin beds of fine-grained and oélitic limestone.’’ 100 to 200 ft.
Black shale. ‘‘Dark blue, green, or chocolate colored shales, passing
locally into a black bituminous shale.’’ [Presents in Southern and
Western Illinois, rather the characters of the Huron shales of Michigan.
May it not constitute, with the lower portion of the Kinderhook group,
a representation of the Portage and Chemung of New York ?]
In Iowa (at Burlington) the series of strata is the following :%
No. 8. Upper Burlington Limestone. 20 feet.
No. 7. Lower Burlington Limestone. 30 to 50 feet.
No. 6. Odlitic Limestone, with fossils. 2 feet.
No. 5. Yellowish Sandstone with abundant casts of Brachiopods. 4
to 6 feet.
No. 4. Limestone, with Brachiopods. 9 feet.
No. 3. Odlitic Limestone. 3 in.
%! Hall—Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol. p. 280; Meek and Worthen—Amer, Jour. Sci. [2] xxxii., 167;
W orthen—TIll. Geol. Report, vol. i., p. 116; Christy—Proc. Amer. Assoc., V., p. 76.
9 Worthen—Geol, Surv. Ill., I., p. 108; TIT., p. 115.
9° Hall—lowa Geol. Rep., I.,90; White—Ib., Append.
76
Winchell.] ( [March 5,
No. 2. Bluish-brown Limestone with corals. 8 in.
No. 1. Yellowish Sandstone, passing downward into a bluish indurated
clay. Fossils rare. 68 feet and more.
In Missouri we are furnished with the following series of rocks :°7
Encrinital Limestone, regarded as equivalent to the Burlington Limestone.
Chouteau Limestone. 10 to 70 feet.
Limestone, brownish-gray, earthy, silico-magnesian, in thick beds. 40
to 50 feet.
Limestone, blue or drab, compact, thin and irregularly bedded.
Vermicular Sandstone and shales. 30 to 100 feet.
Sandstone, buff or yellowish-brown, fine-grained, argillo-calcareous.
Sometimes becomes an impure magnesian limestone.
Shale or fire-clay, blue or brown, argillaceous, in regular, thin strata.
Lithographic Limestone, light drab to light buff and blue, pure, fine,
compact, even-textured, silicious. 60 to 70 feet.
At bottom is a blue shale 30 to 40 feet thick.
In Kentucky, according to my own observations, we have at Knob
Lick and Pine Knob, four miles south of Danville, the following section :
Sandstone, yellowish, from top of Knob down. 150 feet.
Shale, blue, arenaceous, with bands of iron ore and ferruginous sand-
stones, forming the phenomenon known as ‘‘ Knob Lick.”’ 80 feet.
[Resembles shales of Huron Group. ]
Black Shale, only moderately bituminous. 40 feet.
Silicious and Geodiferous Beds, containing Oystiphyllum Americanum,
Phillipsastrea gigas, Heliophyllum Halli, Fistulipora Canadensis and
other Hamilton fossils. %
Hydraulic Limestone, blue, arenaceous, very thick bedded, with frag-
ments of fossils. 12 feet.
Nashville Group.
In Tennessee the Black Shale rests directly upon the Nashville group,
and is overlaid by about 150 feet of the ‘‘Silicious Group,’’ in the very
lowest beds of which I have recognized Producta semireticulata, Orthis
Michelini, Spirifera Logani, and an undescribed Zaphrentis, which, with
the Spirifera, is regarded as characteristic of the Keokuk Limestone.
Above the Silicious group we have 394 feet of cherty limestone, mainly re-
ferable to the St. Louis division, ! since it contains Lithostrotion Canadense,
Producta semireticulata, Streptorhynchus wmbraculum, Spirifera Keokuk
Var, S. perinflata? The presence of Rhynchonella Verneuiliana indicates
that the Warsaw limestone may also be represented in the lower portion
of this formation. Next above we have 6038 feet of limestone abundantly
971 Swallow—Neo. Geolo. Report, L., 101 and Tab. 15, p. 99; Meek and Worthen—Amer. Jour. Sci.
2) xxxii., 171.
% PD). D. Owen speaks of no Devonian in this part of Kentucky except the Black Shale. He, how-
ever, speaks of Upper Silurian rocks; these I have not seen.
99 These fossils were collected in Hickman and Maury counties, and kindly furnished me by Prof.
Safford.
100 In its physical characters this cherty limestone is a continuation of the Silicious Group, and
Prof. Safford informs me that he so treats it in his forthcoming Report.
td
1869.] (7 [Winchell.
stocked with the crinoids of the Kaskaskia division of the Mountain lime-
stone, embracing Pentremites Godont, pyriformis, symmetricus and globosus
and Agassizocrinus gibbosus. This section is from the eastern border of
the basin of Tennessee along the road from Nashville to Sparta and the
summit of the Cumberland Table Land at Bon Air.
A black bituminous shale exists in considerable force in Carrol county
and other parts of Arkansas, immediately superimposed by lower carbon-
iferous limestones; but Dr. D. D. Owen expresses a doubt whether it
answers to the Devonian Shale of Ohio ; and he also doubts the existence
of rocks in Arkansas corresponding to the Knob formation. !!
In attempting to trace the parallelism of these formations on purely
structural and lithological grounds, it may be remarked, in the first place,
that the identity of the Black Shale cannot now be mistaken. Itisa
matter of no surprise that it should at any time have been referred to the
horizon of the Marcellus Shale, as long as stratigraphical observations
were confined to Ohio and Indiana. Its stratigraphical position above the
Hamilton group is now, however, demonstrated by actual superposition
in Grand Traverse Bay of Lake Michigan, Thunder Bay of Lake Huron,
at various points in the peninsula of Ontario, and on the borders of the
““Knob region’’ below Danville in Kentucky. Its position immediately
below the arenaceous and argillaceous beds which are the subject of dis-
cussion in this paper, is demonstrated by the order of superposition at Pt
aux Barques of Lake Huron, at sundry points in Branch, Kalamazoo and
Allegan counties, Michigan, and at various places in northern and cen-
tral Ohio. When at Rockford, Indiana, I had the opportunity to make
my observations under favorable circumstances. The milldam had been
broken away by a freshet, and the exposure of Black Shale three-fourths
of a mile above was such as to indicate clearly by the dip, that this rock
passes under the Goniatite limestone. My observations in this vicinity
enabled me to determine the following succession of strata.
Goniatite Bed—seen below the dam and at Wilson’s creek,
Semi-indurated clay.
Limestone, fine, compact but shattered, bluish, rusted in the vicinity of
the fractures. Contains the Brachiopods and Radiates described from
Rockford.
Black Shale.
It is further possible, as first suggested by Messrs. Meek and Worthen,
that the blue shale at the base of the Lithographic Limestone in Missouri
should be co-ordinated with the Black Shale. I think, however, there are
reasons for considering the Genesee Shale unrepresented in Missouri.
It is proper to remark that the so-called Black Shale or ‘‘ pyroschist’’!92
101 Geology Reconnois. Ark. J, pp. 87, &c., and 135.
12 Dr.T.S. Hunt proposes this Anglicised Grecism of the “‘Brandschiefer” of the Germans,
(Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxvi., 159,) since, as he asserts, this shale contains no free bitumen. Jn this,
however, he is certainly mistaken, as I have seen it oozing from the cliffs in Grand Traverse Bay ;
and I am informed that the odor has sometimes attracted the attention of travelers. It appears,
furthermore, that the intimate mingling of comminuted organic matters with argillaceous ma-
terials creates the most favorable conditions for the spontaneous evolution of hydrocarbonaceous
products from the rocks.
78
Winchell.] / [March 5,
varies very materially in the percentage of bituminous and carbonaceous
matters at different localities ; and the thickness of the dark bituminous
beds is also extremely variable. In Michigan and Tennessee the bitumi-
nous beds are comparatively thin, but in the former State there is a vast
mass of non-bituminous or slightly bituminous shales immediately over-
lying the lower portions, which pass by insensible gradations into the
typical black shale. These, according to Hunt, occur also in Ontario.
Proceeding from structural data alone, I united this entire series of shales
in one formation which I styled the Huron group; and I am even now
strongly inclined to associate this shale with the strata above rather than
with those below. Should it be thought these facts tend to point out the
equivalency of the Black Shale proper with the dark shales existing in the
lower part of the Portage group of New York, it may be stated that the
existence of Lingula spatulata in great abundance in the Black Shale of
Ohio and Kentucky and the presence of Discina Lodensis and Leiorhynchus
multicosta in the Black Shale of Ontario will effectually narrow the deter-
mination to the Genesee Shale of New York.!°
In the next place, the Carboniferous Conglomerate marks a superior
horizon which cannot ordinarily be mistaken. The Parma Conglomerate
of Michigan, as I have heretofore indicated,!°! occupies the same strati-
graphical position. The conglomerate of Western New York identified
by the New York geologists with the Coal Conglomerate of Ohio, presents
undoubtedly a lithological affinity. The same is true, however, of the
conglomerate represented as terminating the Chemung series, and also of
the conglomeratic portions of the Catskill group. Iam not informed of
the lithological or structural grounds upon which these three similar con-
glomerates (each locally varying to similar sandstones) have been ranged
in an order of sequence. As they are nowhere seen in immediate super-
position, it is at least supposable that they are but local occurrences of
one and the same formation. If thus identifiable, the question still re-
mains to be determined whether the formation les in the horizon of the
Chemung, in that of the Catskill or that of the Coal Conglomerate. The
only evidence at present in our possession bearing upon the determination
of this question is paleontological. This evidence, as I have already inti-
mated, tends to unite the so-called Chemung and Carboniferous conglome-
rates and range them in a zone below the Coal Conglomerate of Ohio.
This subject will be resumed in the paleontological part of this paper.
In the third place, it may be remarked that we are now in possession of
the means of determining the parallelism of the western strata between
103 [ desire to remark, in passing, that the Marcellus shale of New York is probably represented
in Little Traverse Bay by the highly bituminous and earthy limestone near the base of the Ham-
ilton group. ‘The same is seen at Thunder Bay Island, Lake Huron, and in the oil wells of Ennis-
killen, Ontario. This shale seems therefore, like the Genesee shale, to constitute only an appendage
to another formation.
104 Michigan Geol. Rep., 1861, pp. 114, 138. So far as I know this was the first instance in which a
geological designation was bestowed upon this formation. The Canadian geologists in the Report
of 1863, apply the name “ Bonaventure formation” to a series of arenaceous strata ‘‘ belonging to
the base of the Carboniferous series.” (p. 404.) In the Atlas to accompany this Report, published
in 1866, the Bonaventure formation is put down as the equivalent of the Coal Conglomerate of the
United States,
Ke
1869. ] i9 [Wincheil.
the Carboniferous Conglomerate and the summit of the arenaceous series
which has been locally designated Waverly, Marshall, Kinderhook, &c.
The Carboniferous limestone of Michigan has been shown !% on paleonto-
logical grounds to possess affinities with the median stages of the Carbon-
iferous Limestone series of the Mississippi valley. The Michigan Salt
Group has at length yielded some beds of fossiliferous flags, from which,
as might have been anticipated, it is shown to stand in close relation with
the same series. The Knobstones of Indiana and Kentucky, always
ranged by geologists within the limits of the Carboniferous system, pos-
sesses strong lithological affinities with the Waverly series, and withal
occupy the same relative position between recognized Carboniferous lime-
stones and the Black Shale. But paleontological evidence compels us to
elevate them into the zone of the Mountain Limestone which, at every
point of contact, is shown to lie above the Ohio psammitic series. Indeed,
it appears from observations made by others and by myself, that the Knob-
stone formation of Indiana and Kentucky, with the associated shales and
limestones, is substantially restricted to the horizon of the Keokuk
division of the Mississippi Limestone series, or ‘‘ Mississippi group.’’!0
The Silicious group of Tennessee is only a southward prolongation of
the same under changed petrogenetic conditions ; though in that State, the
silicious characteristics also invade the horizon of the Warsaw and St.
Louis Limestones—as may be seen along the valley of the Calfkiller river,
and on the first bench of the ascent to the Cumberland Table Land.
We come now to the series of strata, the determinations of whose
equivalencies has presented the most serious difficulties. The Gritstones
and Waverly sandstones of Ohio offer marked petrographic affinities with
the arenaceous strata of the Chemung and Portage groups of New York ;
and it is doubtful whether on purely lithological and structural grounds
we should ever be able to distinguish them. The same may be said how-
ever, and has been said, of the Knobstones of Indiana ; and the same is
also measurably true of a comparison between the Chemung and Catskill
strata, or the Catskill and Millstone Grit, or the Waverly and Millstone
Grit. There seems to be, moreover, a connection of continuity between
the psammites of Ohio and the Chemung flags of Chatauque county. A
similar petrographic resemblance is apparent between the Marshall rocks
of Michigan in the northern and southern outcrops, and the Waverly of
Ohio. Furthermore, no little resemblance can be traced between these
sandstones and the yellow sandstones beneath the Carboniferous limestone
of Iowa. The Rockford limestone and the calcareous strata of the same
zone in Illinois and Missouri present considerable contrast, but they ap-
proximate, on the other hand, certain calcareous beds in the Waverly
series of Summit county, Ohio, and the Marshall series of Calhoun county,
Michigan. Moreover, these calcareous strata are intimately associated in
Illinois and Missouri, with arenaceous strata which everywhere recall the
aspect of the arenaceous strata of other States. In respect to stratigraphi-
10 Mich. Geol. Rep. 1861, p. 103.
106 T propose the use of this term as a geographical designation for the Carboniferous Limestones
of the United States which are so largely developed in the valley of the Mississippi river.
Winchell.] i 80 [March 5,
cal position, we find all these formations lying beneath the Mississippi
limestones and above the Genesee shale.
The synchronism of the Waverly and Gritstone series of Ohio, with
the Portage and Chemung of New York, has not only long been
asserted—at least at invervals—by Professor Hall, but has been generally
assented to by others, who have had occasion to consider the subject, or
have felt disposed to defer to competent authority. The controversy
which has existed has been rather in reference to the systemic position
of the two, as the citations which I have already made from the history
of the controversy sufficiently indicate. The Waverly series has gene-
rally been regarded of late years, as extending down to the Black Shale ;
and the denial of the parallelism of this series with the Chemung and
Portage las appeared to leave no space for the existence of the latter
groups in Ohio. There is, as Professor Hall has frequently asserted, an
improbability that a group more than a thousand feet thick in western
New York, should have completely thinned out before reaching the
meridian of Cleveland or the peninsula of Michigan. There are some
facts in my possession, however, bearing upon this subject, which I have
never yet had the opportunity to bring into prominent notice.
In my Report on the lower peninsula of Michigan I described a series
of argillaceous strata!’ underneath the Marshall sandstones, and ex-
tending to the Hamilton limestones. The Genesee Shale constitutes the
lower portion of this group—being structurally a portion of it. In my
Report I assign but 210 feet of thickness to this group, as this was all
that I had actually measured at outcrops; but borings subsequently
executed in various parts of the State, show that the group actually pos-
sesses a thickness of 500 to 600 feet.1°S This mass occupies the place of the
Portage and Chemung strata. In the southern portion of the State it
is quite purely argillaceous, passing vertically at intervals into mica-
ceous arenaceous shales, or even calcareo-arenaceous flags ; but in its
northern outcrops, we find compact flagstones frequently intercalated in
the series, giving it a physical approximation to the New York strata,
whose stratigraphical position it usurps. Moreover, in Grand Traverse
Bay, we discover, not far above the Genesee Shale, a mass of green are-
naceous shales which apparently answer to the Cashaqua Shale of the
Portage group.
We have in this series all that is requisite to answer the demands of
the Portage and Chemung groups. The thickness is, indeed, conside-
rably reduced ; but it must be remembered that all the other New York
groups traced into Michigan exhibit even a greater attenuation than this
parallel would imply.!9
.
107 Tembraced in this group 14 feet of gritstones, which I subsequently removed, on studying
their paleontology. (Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxili., 352.
108 J have several times published these later determinations, but Dr- Hunt continues to quote
from my Report of 1861, (Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlvi., 357,) having evidently overlooked my
later announcement. (See, for instance, “The Grand Traverse Region,” (1866) p. 52.)
10 Dr. Hunt thinks the Salina Strata will yet be found to attain agreater thickness in Michigan
than that assigned to them in my Report of 1861, (Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlvi., p. 359.) The
facts announced by him would certainly justify such an expectation; but I embrace the opportu-
nity to state that though bored through in several places since the date of my Report, the thickness
has not been found materially greater than stated in 1361.
1869.] 81 [Winchell.
Let us now inquire whether in Ohio, which lies contiguous to Michigan,
anything can be discovered which answers to the Huron group. The
lower portion of the series super-imposed upon the Black Slate of Ohio,
has generally been passed by with the remark that it appears to be
unfossiliferous, or that it may belong to a different epoch from the fos-
siliferous sandstones above. I think, however, the thickness of these
subter-psammitic strata has not been generally suspected. As in Michi-
gan, so in Ohio, we are indebted to the enterprise stimulated by the late
petroleum-industry, for the disclosure of the full extent of the argillaceous
and flagey deposites immediately above the Black Shale. We are now
assured of the existence of a vast series of shales in Ohio which corres-
pond both in position and in lithological characters to the Huron group
of Michigan. In Knox county they attain a measured thickness of 450
feet. Here, again, we discover ample scope of strata to answer the
demands of the New York Portage and Chemung, without bringing in
the Waverly and Gritstone series above.
In Kentucky also, at ‘‘ Knob-lick,’”’ south of Danville, and at other
points, we discover a series of argillaceous strata not less than 80 feet
thick, reposing upon the Black Shale, and presenting again all the phy-
sical characters of the Huron group. As these shales are surmounted by
Knobstones of Keokuk age, we have no stratigraphical determination
whether they should be synchronized with the Huron group, or the
Marshall, or the lower part of the Mississippi group. I think it will be
admitted, however, that some presumption exists that they lie in the
horizon of the Huron Shales.
In Iowa it seems not unlikely that the base of the yellow sandstone
series, with its bluish, slightly micaceous sandstones, comes into the
same zone ; while the blue shales, 80 feet thick, beneath the Lithographic
limestone in some parts of Missouri, may probably be more correctly syn-
chronized with the argillaceous shales of the Huron group than with the
black or Genesee section of that group. I would suggest also that the
Tllinois shales, somewhat doubtfully referred by Prof. Worthen to the hori-
zon of the Genesee shale, may le rather in the horizon of the Huron
shales of Michigan.
It appears from the foregoing statements that we are by no means com-
pelled to resort to the Waverly and Marshall series to discover the western
representatives of the Portage and Chemung of New York. If the appar-
ent continuity of the eastern and western formations should appear to
compel such identification, let it be remembered that the Knobstones
stand in the same apparent relation to the Waverly that the Waverly does
tothe Chemung, and yet we yield to the weight of paleontological evidence
in denying their equivalency. If, moreover, it appears that the Chemung
and Portage have become finer and more argillaceous in their westward
extension, it will be remembered that the Waverly strata also, when traced
into Indiana, Illinois, and Missouri, have assumed a finer constitution,
and have received moreover that accession of calcareous constituents
which we always expect to characterize formations remoter from the
A. P. S.—VOL. XI— K
29 :
Winchell.] 82 [March 5,
ancient continental shores.!!° During the periods which followed the Gene-
see epoch, the time was approaching when the agitations of the terres-
trial crust should culminate in the spread of thousands of square miles of
coarse débris over the bottom of the continental lagoon of North America;
the materials of the great Carboniferous Conglomerate. In the progress
of the gathering convulsion, the movement of the waters had attained
such a degree of violence during the period of the Portage and Chemung
as to give rise to the formation of flags and sandstones within the limits
of the State of New York, while yet the quieter waters which rested over
Michigan and Ohio were precipitating only the materials of shales , and
the regions further west were as destitute of mechanical sediments as of
the organic débris which give origin to limestones. In the following or
Marshall period, the disturbance of the terrestrial crust had attained such
a limit as to give distribution to the Catskill and so-called Chemung and
Carboniferous Conglomerates of New York, while in Ohio and Michigan,
it attained only such a degree of energy as had been witnessed in New
York during the preceding period, and resulted in the sandstones and
shales of the Waverly and Marshall series. Still further West the quiet
conditions of limestone-making continued to prevail. In the Knobstone
epoch following this, the agitation had extended still further West. While
3,000 feet of mechanical sediments were accumulating in Pennsylvania,
the conditions of sandstone accumulation had traveled towards the centre
of the American lagoon as far as Indiana, Kentucky and Tennessee, while
even yet, the state of quiet was sufficient in Nlinois and west of the Mis-
sissippi to permit the existence of limestone making animals. The grand
agitations of the Millstone grit epoch followed, with the still later oscilla-
tions of the surface which conditioned the phenomenon of the Coal epoch,
terminated by the tremendous convulsions which gave birth to the moun-
tain barriers of the Atlantic border. But none of these events were felt
in the far West. Deep seas and limestone-forming operations—as Prof.
Hall has well shown!!! continued to characterize the history of the inter-
ior of the continent while the coal marshes of Ohio and Pennsylvania were
heaved and tossed in the titanic pastimes of geological forces.
This sketch of the succession of geological events shows that the parallel-
ism which I have traced is in strict harmony with the method of later Pale-
ontological Time; and instead of suggesting abrupt disappearances and
incongruous synechronisms, is the only marshalling of the American strata
which keeps perfect time with the grand march of geological events.
10 There is a priori evidence against the continuity of the Chemung and Waverly. Arenaceous
sediments, from the circumstances and conditions of their origin, must be limited in extent, at least
in one direction. We should therefore expect the Chemung to grow finer and to lose its physical
identity in its western prolongation; and, if a sandstone recurs at the West, the immediate pre-
sumption arises that it is a phenomenon of changed continental conditions, characterizing another
geological period. Compare Hall: Foster and Whitney’s Rep. IT, p. 287-
11 Report on the Geol. and Pal. Mex. Boundary Surv. p- 124; Iowa Geol. Rep. p. 137—141.
85
1869.] {Marston.
Stated Meeting, March 19, 1869.
Present, ten members.
JOHN C. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Letters accepting membership were received from C. L.
Riitimeyer, dated Basel, February, 18th, and from J. Prest-
wich, dated Shoreham, near Seven-oaks, England, March 2,
1869.
A letter of envoy was received from the Meteorological
Office of the Royal Society at London, dated Dec. 24, 1868.
Donations for the Library were received from the Meteoro-
logical Office of the Royal Society of London, from M. Che-
valier, Membre de la Commission de |’Exposition Interna-
tionale de 1867 at Paris, from the London Board of Trade,
from the Boston Natural History Society, from the American
Antiquarian Society at Worcester, from the Editors of the
American Journal of Arts and Sciences at New Haven, from
Prof. Cook, State Geologist of New Jersey, at Newark, from
Mr. Henry C. Carey, Mr. Pliny H. Chase, and the College of
Pharmacy, at Philadelphia, and from the Smithsonian Insti-
tute, at Washington.
~ Commodore John Marston presented, for the cabinet, four
fragments of painted pottery, dug up by him, early in the year
1861, from the soil of the Island of Sacrifices, near Vera Cruz,
Mexico.
The principal piece is 5 inches long by 2 inches wide, a sort of doll,
with a fillet over the head, and a painted white plain ribbon-like collar
round the neck, from which seems to have depended six painted white
and red tags, four on the breast, and one behind each shoulder. The fillet
over the forehead is painted in alternate red:'and white sections. The skin
of the forehead and nose, the region around the mouth, the lower parts of
the ears, and the half-seen eyeballs, are painted the same dead white ; the
rest of the doll has been painted a deep red, much of which has worn off.
Two banded bent arms can be traced down the sides and upon the breasts,
ending in two white spots for hands. An attempt has been made to sig-
nify the left arm by a slight relief. The head has the Astec monument
look, there being nothing but backhead and forehead. The eyes are half
closed, and the upper teeth exposed by the drawing back of the upper lip.
This gives the impression that it was intended to represent a corpse or
Emerson. ] 84 [March 19,
mummy. Two small holes show that the cylinder is hollow ; but they do
not communicate.
One of the other three pieces is a whistle, made of a human head with-
out neck, the aperture slanting up over the forehead. The cheeks are
hugely swollen, and the mouth set to represent the act of blowing. The
nose is colossal, and the whole thing full of that peculiar humor of Mexi-
can art, which is so strikingly exhibited in the set of masks (?) which the
Society has in its Poinsett Cabinet.
The other two fragments are very imperfect, and seem to have been
pipe-stands, ornamented, the one with a bird’s head, and the other with
something like a calf’s.
Judge Cadwalader read, by appointment, an obituary notice
of Mr. Bancker, which was followed by remarks by Mr. H. K.
Price, describing the consequences of the policy inaugurated
by Mr. Bancker, as President of the Franklin Insurance Com-
pany, of holding a large number of small mortgages. ‘T’o the
encouragements and facilities which this policy affords me-
chanics and builders with small capital, and, therefore, to Mr.
Bancker, the City of Philadelphia has been largely indebted
for its rapid extension.
Dr. Emerson communicated a description of an ingenious
and important improvement in Whitney’s Cotton Gin (1798),
made by Mr. R. R. Gwathmey, of Kentucky (1867), and
already adopted by planters in the Southwestern States.
Whitney’s gin requires the cotton to be picked by hand from the boll,
before it can be ginned. Gwathmey’s machine, by simply reversing the mo-
tion of the saws, rejects the hulls unbroken, and thereby increases the
working capacity of a field hand fourfold, that is, from the old rate of five
bales of (400 Ibs.) per month to twenty.
Pending nominations Nos. 622 to 626 were read.
The Chairman of the Special Committee on the Letting or
Selling of the Hall reported that the Committee desired the
advice of the Society respecting price. In view of the small
attendance of members, on motion, this subject was made the
order of business for the next meeting, notice to be sent to all
the members.
On motion of Prof. Trego, the subject of the Rittenhouse
Clock was referred to the Curators, with power to act, report-
ing their action to the Society.
And the Society was adjourned.
1859.] 85 [Cadwalader.
OBITUARY NOTICE OF MR. BANCKER BY JUDGE CADWALADER.
Cuaries Nicott BAaNncKER, one of our oldest members, died on 16th
February last, aged 91 years. The Society’s request that I would prepare
their memorial of him is fulfilled with a mournful pleasure. But my
domestic connection with him was so close that the duty cannot be per-
formed without a feeling of some embarrassment. The spontaneous ten-
dency to the language of eulogium will be restrained.
I will not here speak of him in his religious or social relations. My re-
marks will be limited to subjects which may concern more directly his
relations to our Society.
We may thus consider the career of Mr. Bancker as a merchant on an
extended scale, as a practical and scientific insurer, and as a man of gene-
ral scientific information.
New York, the city of his birth, was, in the days of his youth, a place
of secondary importance. He removed, in his boyhood, to Philadelphia,
then the commercial, political, and literary metropolis, where he entered
the counting house of John Guest, one of the largest importers from Eng-
land, and was thoroughly educated for the pursuit of commerce. Before
he had completed his twenty-first year, he became, through his abilities,
energy, and assiduous efficiency, the partner of Mr. Guest, who changed
his residence to England, leaving their vast concerns here in the sole charge
of his young associate. This was Mr. Bancker’s responsible relation for
many years, including the latter part of the first war, and a great part of
the second war, of the French revolution. In each of these eventful periods,
the commercial navigation of the world was, in a great measure, carried
on under the flag of the United States. The opposing belligerents asserted
that the cargoes, professedly of neutral ownership, in vessels thus navi-
gated, were of more than twenty times the greatest value that could be
honestly owned by neutrals. The retaliatory maritime hostilities of the
opposing belligerents against professed neutrals were chiefly directed
against the United States. Cruisers and privateers captured our vessels
and those of avowed enemies almost indiscriminately. Such were the
causes of the maritime war of the United States with France in 1799, and
of their general war with England in 1812.
I believe that Mr. Bancker’s house in trade owned no vessels, and
neither imported nor exported merchandize for the account of others. The
immense business in which they were engaged for their own account re-
quired the purchase of millions of sterling bills. This important part of
their business was conducted so regularly and carefully that not a penny
was ever lost from the failure of parties to such paper. The fact is remark-
able, and the reason is interesting. It was not that parties to the paper
did not fail. Many failures of course occurred. Of perhaps five sets of
Exchange, three, or even four, through capture, might not reach their
destination. But there was no loss, for the reason that Mr. Bancker’s
=
Cadwalader. ] : 86 [March 19,
house took no bills which they did not, on sufficient grounds, believe to
have been drawn upon shipments, orintended shipments, of adequate value.
His house were mere buyers in the exchange market. They did not them-
selves take, or directly control, any security except the personal responsi-
bility of the drawers of the bills. But this was not the security on which
they relied. Believing that the business in which every bill had been
drawn was legitimate, they had no doubt that the bill would be accepted
abroad, upon the credit of shipments which had been, or would be fully
insured against capture.
Capricious vacillation marked the belligerent conduct of the British
Government in the occasional suspension and renewal of ill judged retali-
atory measures affecting neutrals. A sudden commercial crisis, from one
of the most ill-timed of these vacillations, caused, in 1810, an unprece-
dented depression of the values of a large stock of British imports in the
United States. The heaviest losers were Guest and Bancker. The part-
nership was dissolved. He retired from it, without retaining any property,
but was not indebted to any one.
During the interval which preceded the war of 1812, he visited Eng-
land on business of Stephen Girard, then the wealthiest merchant of
the United States, with results of extraordinary profit for Mr. Girard, and
of corresponding advantage to himself. He soon resumed commercial
business on his own account, and continued it variously for several years.
At one time, he dealt largely in cotton, including the product of the re-
motest parts of our country in which it was grown. »His practical experi-
ence in almost all subjects of internal and external trade, was of the most
extended range.
He was not engaged in commerce after 1826. It then became neces-
sary for him to seek other employment ; and his attention was turned to
imsurance.
The science of insurance—for it 7s a science—cannot be sufficiently
taught by professors of law, nor fully understood by mere merchants, nor
very deeply fathomed by mere mathematicians. Insurance, we may be
told, is a substitute for capital, and should enable men without capital to
engage securely, on borrowed means, in enterprises otherwise unduly
hazardous; and, therefore, that where insurance has been made, and the
premium paid, anything which may tend to prevent fair indemnification
against loss, ought in law to be deemed a breach of contract, and must
in ethics be a subterfuge and fraud. On the other hand, we may be told
that the contract is one of indemnity against a risk of which the subject
is always beyond the insurer’s reach or controi, and is at the exclusive
charge and disposal of the insured ; that the insurer is therefore entitled
always to expect a rigid application of the purest principles of ethics for
the protection of his interests, and that no public interest would be pro-
moted by excusing a careless disregard of his rights. Each proposition,
when correctly understood, may, with certain applications, be true. But
neither proposition is of much practical use. In the absence of fraud,
)
1869. ] 87 [Cadwalader.
persons insured do not ordinarily forfeit their insurances through any
mere carelessness of themselves or their agents. But no prudent msurer
will take a risk where any interest of the insured would be promoted by eare-
lessness of the subject of the risk. Insurance, it has again been often said,
is an aleatory contract, that is to say, a bargain upon a chance, like a
throw of dice. An insurer’s tables of risks may, in a certain sense,
resemble those which might be made for the use of a professional
gamester on a grand scale. But beyond this, there is properly no anal-
ogy to gaming. Insurance, in its general results, is, in fact, though not
in form, a contract of mutual benefit; and the benefit is not, im any
proper sense, wncertain upon either side. The values of life insurances
ean thus be calculated with approximate certainty, because, however
uncertain may be the continuance of an individual life, the average dura-
tion of human life, is known from experience, and is almost invariable.
Then, as to marine insurances, it has been often said with truth, and, in
our own city, has been practically tested in more cases than one, that a
merchant employing a great many ships, or shipping a great many
cargoes, may prudently calculate for himself whether he would more
probably lose by insuring than derive benefit; in other words, whether
the premiums to be paid would probably exceed the maritime losses to
be incurred.
Fire Insurance, under this head, is not an exception. Where the
risks are sufficiently numerous, at points detached from one another,
and of small amounts, or where large risks are divided among several
insurers, the rates of premium are safely adjustable to a standard of uni-
formity. The more the insurances are with due caution multiplied, and
the source of profit increased, the greater is the safety of the insurer.
These are truisms, whatever may be the complexities of their safe appli-
cation. I will not add any general remarks concerning the reservation
and investment of accruing income to meet losses.
It is a misfortune of the present age, and an especial evil in this
country, that men do not scruple to engage in responsible business,
without any apprenticeship, or other preparatory training. An insurer
without experience would be not less unfit for the business than a lands-
man for navigation. In Mr. Bancker’s time, interests of importance
were not thus trusted in untried hands. His youthful experience of
marine insurance had been acquired when it was principally the business
of underwriters not incorporated. It had been regulated by them on the
sound basis of self interest. The insurance of his own shipments may
have been instructive to him, but had probably been less so than his
necessary constant observation, during the wars of the French revolution,
of the transactions of other merchants, whose bills he purchased when
the safety of his remittances depended upon the insurances of millions in
value of shipments afloat, whose dangers have been mentioned under a
former head. He had afterwards been, for some years, the agent, in
this country, of one of the largest associations of English insurers; and
had been a director of a life insurance company in this city. Fire
Cadwalader. ] 88 [March 19,
insurance was the branch of the business in which he proposed specially
to engage. To the preparatory study and observation of the peculiarities
of insurance of this kind, he devoted more than two years until 1829,
when, through his influence, the Franklin Fire Insurance Company was
incorporated. He conducted this Company’s business for almost forty
years.
At his death, the Company, with an entire capital of $400,000, had paid
five-and-a-half millions of losses, and the claims unsettled were less than
$24,000. The annual income was $360,000, or 90 per cent. on the capi-
tal. The yearly dividends for ten years had been 82 per cent.; and the
assets were more than $2,600,000,—the accrued surplus being about
$1,100,000. Nothing had ever been lost upon an investment ; nor was
there an existing investment of doubtful security. This complete success
of the Company was due entirely to his administration of its affairs.
The attainment of such success, or of much greater seeming success,
would not have been surprising, or even extraordinary, if there had, in
the meantime, been a corresponding hazard of proportional heavy losses.
But such hazard had not been incurred. At the outset, serious difficul-
ties were indeed encountered in promoting the extension of the new
Company’s business without assuming an undue proportion of extra-
hazardous risks. Of risks of small amount in Philadelphia, most of the
less hazardous were taken by two or three mutual insurance Companies
of long established standing, which made no dividends. Competition
for such risks, at full premiums, could not be expected until a corres-
ponding surplus fund, in addition to the capital, should have been accu-
mulated. The division of large risks among several insurers was then
difficult, if not impossible, because fire insurers, and fire imsurance
agencies, were few, and fire insurance brokers fewer. Upon manu-
facturing establishments and the contents, insurances might readily have
been effected. But there could be no standard of premiums on such
risks uniformly proportional to the actual hazard, because, independently
of the combustibility of the subjects, and of general reasons which under
a legislative policy of artificial protection affect such risks, the con-
stantly recurring changes in the protective legislation of the United
States made the inducements to care of such subjects by the parties
insured peculiarly variable. These early difficulties were for a time
partly overcome by the obvious and ordinary, though often unsatis-
factory expedient of establishing agencies at points more or less distant.
The difficulties were completely overcome through the adoption of a very
simple plan to multiply insurances upon small risks near home.’
The plan was to lend on first mortgages of newly constructed dwelling
houses of moderate dimensions, in Philadelphia and the suburbs, enough
money to pay the cost of the ground and the premium of a perpetual
insurance on the buildings, with sometimes the addition of a small portion
of the cost of their construction. The insurances were, of course, made
by the Company’s own policies. The two-fold purpose of a proper
insurance, and a safe investment, was thus effected in every such case.
1869.] ; 89 (Cadwalader.
There was nothing novel in such transactions of combined investment
and insurance. The novelty in this Company’s transaction of such busi-
ness was, that they were the first insurers who made it systematic instead
of occasional. Every builder of limited means became aware that he
could, with certainty, on making such an insurance with this Company,
obtain the accommodation of such a loan upon mortgage, and that the
time of credit, however limited in form, would, in fact, be indefinite, if
the interest were punctually paid. The Company’s business of this kind
increased until such mortgage investments, I believe, 1100 or 1200 in
number, of an average amount of less than $2,000, constituted four-fifths
of the assets.
Thave described this method of investment in order to introduce the
statement of a wonderful truth. It is that, although this Company has
paid, as I have said, five and a half millions for losses by fire, these losses
have all, with one or two insignificant exceptions, occurred on property
not mortgaged to the Company. The exceptions have been within a year
or two, and of an amount so small as to be quite inappreciable. Thus, it
may be said that these insurances and investments have actually been
made without any toss. The Company, for several years past, might have
annually divided more than 20 per cent. on their capital, though during
the whole of this time, not a single new insurance had been effected. I
do not mean that it would in that case, have been prudent for insurers to
have done so. But the fact attests the safety of the business of an insurer
who while extending it to the utmost fair limit, adheres to the cardinal
maxim, already mentioned, of never insuring where the interest of the in-
sured might be promoted by carelessness of the subject of insurance.
But who may be the cautious and energetic insurer capable of combin-
ing constant adherence to this maxim with a continual increase of busi-
ness? Without answering the general question, let us consider Mr.
Bancker’s peculiar capacity for executing the two-fold function.
His perception was most acute, clear and comprehensive, his intellectual
energy the most active, his decision was always prompt, and his purpose
firm. I have already shown that the range of his practical experience was
almost universal. Let me add here that no extent or magnitude of his
operations ever prevented his vigilant, particular, and accurate attention
to the minutest details of any and every business in which he was con-
cerned for himself or others. This minute attention to the details of his
duty was continued until the closing hour of his life.
Asaman of general scientific tastes and attainments, he was known
within these walls, and extensively beyond them. The general results of
existing knowledge were, in the concrete, well understood by him; and
he pursued experimental and analytical investigation sufficiently to enable
him to understand the causes and modes of improvement, and to keep pace
with its progress. His mind was thus amply stored with true knowledge.
He was a constant, it might be said, universal reader. To the day of his
death, he read as a student, not, according to the ordinary habit of old
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—L
Cadwalader.] 90 [March 19,
age, as a critic or a censor. His own extensive library contained, in the-
ology, in metaphysics, in history, belles lettres, natural philosophy, and
every other department of useful knowledge, or polite accomplishment,
all the literature of his varied and unremitting study. New books in every
department, read by him, and on his parlor table upon their first publi-
cation, were, in due season, transferred to their proper shelves. His phi-
losophical apparatus, constantly renewed from all parts of the world, was
the collection of his long lifetime, and, like his library, was arranged
according to the most improved plan. Possibly this apparatus may now,
in some part, be antiquated. But I am informed that in certain depart-
ments, every modern improvement has been supplied, and that, under
some heads, for example the polarization of light, the means and ap-
pliances for illustrative experiment are complete and unsurpassed.
He took pieasure in promoting and assisting the pursuit of useful
knowledge by others. Such aman may, through such benevolence, con-
tribute more to the diffusion of scientific information than those who
justly obtain the praise of useful discoverers. Public lecturers on
natural philosophy and on experimental chemistry, had always the free
use of his apparatus. They frequently availed themselves of the privi-
lege. I heard, in my childhood, public acknowledgments of his liberality
in this respect; and they were, after the lapse of half a century, renewed
in the hearing, perhaps, of others now present.
Tf I have described him rightly, it will be understood that he may have
been eminently capable of comparing the results of investigations by
other persons in different branches of art and science. This made his
conversation often useful and instructive to practical men. Fallacious
pretensions to originality of invention he detected at once, by intuition,
as it were. He discerned, with as quick a glance, latent merit which
was ultimately to succeed, not only in the practical, but likewise in the
fine arts.
Stated Meeting, April 2, 1869.
Present, twenty-two members.
JOHN C. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from S. Nillson,
dated Lund, Sweden, 8d Marz, 1869.
A letter was received from Mr. J. Whiteaves, Curator of
the Museum of the Natural History Society at Montreal, dated
March 29, 1869, acknowledging the receipt of Transactions
1869.] 9 if [Davidson.
and Proceedings, and offering a set of the Canadian Naturalist
in exchange.
A letter from the London Antiquarian Society, acknowl-
edged the receipt of Proceedings, A. P. 8., No. 80.
Donations for the Library were received from the London
Geological Society, Essex Institute, Peabody Academy at
Salem, New Bedford Library, George H. Ellis of Cambridge,
New Jersey Historical Society, Franklin Institute, Academy
of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, and the Protestant Episco-
pal Church Hospital.
The decease of Dr. Robley Dunglison on the Ist inst., aged
71, at Philadelphia, was announced by Mr. Peale, and on mo-
tion of Mr. Fraley, Dr. Pancoast was appointed to prepare an
obituary notice of the deceased.
Professor Trego communicated an extract from a letter from
Mr. Davidson of the Coast Survey, to Mr. D. B. Smith of
Germantown, detailing the method employed to obtain the
recent determination of Longitude and the velocity of the
electric current between Cambridge and San Francisco.
San Francisco Chronograph.
—| Cambridge
D on ; eee 7000 miles
NMIAIN LINE )
7 Onn
eewesiee! a) B+ rt a)
prolongation = D 7 me
ee ( uy i] = = § a Man
== | 5
ea \ Qe . )
( A a) )
\ puns
2 otneanenEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEeeneneenE
[ San Francisco
~~ | relay
Kr
a | | E
Local circuit RE
Local battery Ra
Nee = W]/ Earth at San
\\ aa eo ANY Barth at Sa
O. Sending pen. 1, Receiving pen.
San Francisco, March 1st, 1869.
I give you the first written news not only of our telegraph longitude
success, but of the success of my plan for determining the time of trans-
mission of clock signals from my clock to Cambridge and back, over 7,000
miles of wire, through 13 repeaters and a multitude of relays. Through
the liberality of the Western Union Telegraph Company, I had two
trans-continental lines placed at my use, and last night I succeeded
Dubois. ] 92 [April 2,
beautifully. My circuit was as follows. My clock breaks the local
circuit every second, depriving the helix A of its electricity, and the
magnet of its magnetism. This relieves the armature B, which is drawn
away by a spring, and the pen C makes its record on the revolving
cylinders of the chronograph. At the same instant the main current to
Cambridge and back is broken by the insulated prolongation of the arma-
ture at D, and the break transmitted to Cambridge and back, through
7,000 miles of wire, to my relay E, which relieves the armature F, and
the local circuit is broken; the helix G deprived of its electricity and the
magnet of its magnetism, relieving the armature H, which is drawn
away by a spring, and the pen I makes the record on the revolving
cylinders of the chronograph. These two pens are on the same horizontal
line. Our experiments show that it took 0.87 of a second to traverse the
above circuit. I also made experiments through to Buffalo, Chicago,
Omaha, Cheyenne, Salt Lake, and Virginia, and back. All successful.
As this experiment was not contemplated by the programme of the longi-
tude experiments, I have the satisfaction of seeing my ingenuity success-
fully proved.
Prof. Kirkwood communicated through Mr. Chase a discus-
sion of the periodicity of the Sun’s spots.
Mr. Chase made a communication of certain curious rela-
tionships of astronomical elements.
Mr. Dubois presented through Dr. Harris a specimen and
analysis of silver ore.
Mr. Dubois offers the following recent notes from the Assay Office, U.
S. Mint: ;
By far the largest single piece of silver ever brought to the Mint, was
a cake or test-bottom, deposited on the 16th March, by Mr. Christian,
President of the Brown Silver Mining Company, of Colorado. Its weight
was 4,343 ounces troy, equal to 290 lbs. avoird. nearly. There was a
small proportion of gold, and the net Mint value was 5,720 dollars, silver
coin. This was stated to have been extracted from twenty tons of galena
in the gangue ; making about 286 dollars to the ton.
In the Report of the British Commission on International Coinage,
lately published, we find an extract from the ‘‘Journal des Debats,”’ of
Noy. 13th, 1866, stating that the German assayers had found the average
fineness of French gold coins of that year to be 898 thousandths, ‘‘and a
fraction.’’ It adds that this is an unworthy source of gain to Govern-
ment, whose ambition it should be to have the coins correct.
The ‘‘Moniteur’”’ of Nov. 20th (official organ), replies, that this is as
near to standard as can be expected from the defects of practical opera-
tion ; and that it is the duty of Government to prevent these ‘‘ ill-founded
criticisms.”’
1869.] 93 [Dubois.
Our own assays for many years, have proved a deficiency in the French
coins, averaging about one thousandth.
The apology of the ‘‘Moniteur’’ has no just foundation. Both at this
Mint, and at San Francisco, the gold coins are kept close to the mark,
scarcely varying the tenth of a theusandth; as is proved by annual
assays, and by foreign reports. British coinage is equally exact.
This fact affords an argument against the project of International
Coinage. If we work to 900, and France to 899 or less, and both pass
alike, the difference is against us.
We have a letter from a gentleman of South Carolina, an extract from
which may lead to philosophical reflections, and therefore be in place :
“Our State, poor as it is, is full of coin. Planters will have nothing to
do with securities. They can’t spend money on negroes—they have land
enough—and so they get gold, and bury it. I know of more than one
who has over 30,000 dollars in gold, and of one who has 80,000 dollars.
‘Even the 5 cent nickel is hoarded to an enormous extent. We have
sent great quantities into the interior, but in travelling in the country
you will never meet with them. I am told they are regarded as of full
silver value.”’
Herewith is shown to the Society, a specimen of silver ore from the
White Pine Region of Nevada, which is now drawing so much attention.
This new mining district is in Lander county, in the mountain range, east
of the Reese River district.
This specimen is from the ‘‘ Black Spider Mine,’’ and is a silicious
gangue containing sulphides of copper and antimony, with rich seams of
chloride of silver. It came marked ‘‘$10,000 per ton,’’ and Mr. Eck-
feldt’s assay found it to contain half that proportion ; or as we prefer to
say in such cases, $2.50 per pound ; inasmuch as such ores are not found
by the ton ; and it is desirable to avoid the grandiloquence which favors
deception.
Mr. P. W. Sheafer communicated through the Secretary
some boring records from the Anthracite Basins.
The Committee on the disposal of the Hall reported, and
on motion of Dr. Le Conte, the subject was postponed.
The Publication Committee requested instructions as to the
disposal of ninety pages of new matter, with several wood
cuts and two more plates inserted by Prof. Cope in the me-
moir now going through the press, explaining that the origi-
nal estimate of cost would probably cover the expense of the
new matter. On motion of Dr. Le Conte the subject was re-
ferred to the original Committee.
Pending nominations, Nos. 622 to 626 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
Kirkwood. ] 94 [April 2,
ON THE PERIODICITY OF THE SOLAR SPOTS.
By DanreL KirRKWwoop.
§ L—The Results of Observation.
(1.) The most ancient observations of sun-spots, of which we have any
record, are those of the Chinese in the year 321, A. D. The first notice
of their detection by Europeans is found in the annals of the Frankish
kings. <A black spot, according to Adelmus, was seen on the sun’s disk,
March 1%th, 807, and continued visible 8 days. Similar phenomena were
again observed from the 28th of May to the 26th of August, A. D. 840.
The year 1096 was also signalised by the appearance of spots so large as
to be visible to the naked eye. The next date, in chronological order, is
that of 1161, when a spot was seen by Averroés. Finally, on the 7th,
8th, and 16th of December, 1590, ‘‘a great blacke spot on the sunne,”’
apparently ‘‘about the bignesse of a shilling,’’ was observed at sea by
those on board the ship ‘‘Richard of Arundell.’’* The foregoing are,
we believe, the only undoubted instances in which these phenomena were
observed previous to the invention of the telescope.
(2.) From 1610 to 1750 the sun was frequently observed through instru-
ments of various optical power, and the sparseness, or even the entire
absence of spots, during considerable intervals of time, as well as their
great number and magnitude at other epochs, were noticed by different
astronomers. From the latter date till the close of the first quarter of the
present century the solar observations were more frequent and regular ;
still, no idea of the prevalence of Jaw in the varying numbers and magni-
tudes of these mysterious objects had been even conjectured. We come
now, however, to a most interesting and remarkable epoch in the history
of solar physies. 8
(3.) The 11-Year Period of Schwabe.—In 1826, Hofrath Schwabe, of
Dessau, commenced a series of sun-spot observations, which have been
continued without interruption to the present time (1869). On each
clear day he notes the number of visible groups, giving to each a special
designation, to guard against counting it twice in a single rotation of the
sun. In the first year, 1826, 118 spots were observed; the number was
considerably greater in 1827 ; and in 1828 it had increased to 225. During
the next five years there was a gradual decrease; the minimum being
reached in 1833. The results of 43 years’ observations are presented at
one view in the following table: ,
* For authorities see Humboldt’s Cosmos, Vol. [V., and Chambers’ Descrip. Astronomy, p. 21.
1869.] 95 [Kirkwood.
TABLE I.
SCHWABE’S OBSERVATIONS OF SOLAR SPOTS.
|
Year. Days of Obs.| Days>fno |New Groups.| Maz. and Min.
Spots. ‘according to
Wolf.
1826 277 22 118
1827 273 2 161
1828 282 0 225 Max, (1829.5)
1829 244 0 199
1830 217 1 190
1831 239 3 149
1832 270 49 84
1833 247 139 33 Min. (1833.8)
1834. 273 120 51
1835 244 18 173
1836 200 0 272
1837 168 0 333 Max. (1837.2) |
1838 202 0 282 |
1839 205 0 162
1840 263 3 152
1841 283 15 102
1842 307 64 68
1843 312 149 34
1844 321 111 52 Min. (1844.0)
1845 332 29 114
1846 314 1 157
1847 276 0 257
1848 278 0 330 Max. (1848.6)
1849 = OR 0 238
1850 308 2 186
1851 308 0 151
1852 337 2 125
1853 299 3 91
1854 334 65 67
1855 , 813 146 79
1856 321 193 34 Min. (1855.2)
1857 324 52 98
1858 335 0 188
1859 343 0 205
1860 332 0 211 Max. (1860.5)
1861 322 0 204
1862 317 3 160
1863 330 2 124
1864 325 4 130
1865 307 25 93
1866 | 349 76 45
1867 312 195 25 Min. (1867.0)
1868
(4.) This table presents a very marked periodicity ; the interval be-
tween two consecutive maxima or minima, being, according to Schwabe,
about 10 years. Soon after the announcement of this interesting dis-
covery Dr. Lamont, of Munich, detected a corresponding decennial
period in the variation of the magnetic needle; the epochs of maxima
and minima in the latter coinciding with those in the former. These
results have also been confirmed by other observers in places quite
remote from each other; so that the decennial magnetic cycle may be
regarded as well established. The equality of this period with that of
the solar spots naturally suggested the hypothesis of their intimate rela-
tionship. Such a causal connection may be difficult of explanation : the
fact, however, is placed beyond doubt by the researches of Wolf and
Sabine.* The former, besides carefully observing the sun-spots since
# These magnetic variations, which will not be discussed in the present paper, are mentioned to —
give completeness of view to the phenomena under consideration. It is also worthy of remark
that the Aurora Borealis is believed to exhibit a corresponding periodicity.
Kirkwood.] 96 [April 2,
1847, has discussed all accessible recorded observations, both solar and
magnetic, bearing on the subject. He has thus ascertained a number of
epochs of maxima and minima anterior to those observed by Schwabe,—
from all of which he has determined the period of the spots to be
11.11 years. He undertakes to show, moreover, that this period coincides
more exactly with that of the magnetic variation than the 10-year cycle
of Lamont.
(5.) The 56- Year Period.—Besides Schwabe’s period of 11 years, Wolf
finds a larger cycle of 55 years, in which the solar activity passes through
a series of changes. It is not, however, so distinctly marked as the cycle
of Schwabe. Its last maximum was about 1837, and that preceding,
about 1780. - The relative number of spots in different years, from 1749 to
1826, when Schwabe commenced his systematic observations, are given
(according to Wolf) in Table II.
TABLE II.
SoLaR Spots, FROM 1749 To 1825.
Year. | Rel. no. Maz.| Min.|| Year. | Rel. no. | Maz.| Min.
of Spots. | | of Spots.
1749 63.8 1788 90.6 1788.5
1750 | 68.2 |1750.0 1789 | 85.4.2)
1751 40.9 1790 75.2
1752 33.2 4791 46.1
1753 23.1(?) 1792 52.7(2)
1754 73.8 1798 20.7(2)
1755 6.0 1755.7 1794 23.9 :
1756 8.8 1795 16.5
1757 30.4 1796 9.4
1758 38.3(2) 1797 5.6
1759 48.6(?) 1798 2.8 1798.5
1760 48.9 1799 5.9
1761 75.0 1761.5 1800 16.1
1762 50.6 1801 30.9(?)
1763 37.4 1802 38.3(?)
1764 34.5 1803 50.0(?)
1765 23.0 1804 70.0(2) |1804.0
1766 17.5(?) 1766.5)| 1805 50.0(2)
1767 33.6 1806 30.0(?)
1768 52.2 || 1807 10.0(?)
1769 85.7 1808 2.2
1770 79.4 1770.0 1809 0.8
W771 73.2 1810 0.0 1810.5
1772 49,2 1811 0.9
1773 39.8 1812 5.4
1774 47.6(?) 1813 Sell
1775 27.5 1775.8'| 1814 20.0(?)
1776 35.2.2) 1815 35.0(?)
1777 63.0 | 1816 45.5 1816.8
1778 94.8 | (| L817 43.5
1779 99.2 \1779.5 1818 34,1
1780 72.6(2) ‘| 1819 22.5
1781 (Gn 1820 8.9
1782 33.2?) 1821 4,3
1783 22.5(?) 1822 2.9
1784 4.4(?) 1784.8 1823 1.3 1823.2
1785 18.3 1824 6.7
1786 60.8 1825 17.4
1787 92.8
|
(6.) The 233-Day Period.—Prof. Wolf, after carefully discussing his
own and Schwabe’s observations, claims to have discovered two or three
minor periods of solar activity. ‘ By projecting all the results in a con-
he
1869.] 97 [Kirkwood.
tinuous curve, he finds in it a series of small undulations succeeding each
other at an average interval of 7.65 months,’’* or 233 days.
(7.) The 27—Day Period.—The same astronomer thinks he has detected
a short period of variation corresponding to the sun’s time of rotation
with respect to the earth, or about 27 days.
(8.) The 584-Day Period.—De La Rue, Stewart and Lewy, have found
a period varying between 18 and 20 months; the mean being about 584
days.{ Other periods of maxima and minima will probably be detected ;
but those we have enumerated are perhaps the only ones sufficiently well
established to justify any attempt at explanation.
§ I.—Discussion of the Phenomena.
(9.) That the solar spots are produced in some way by the planetary
disturbance of the photosphere, is now generally admitted. As yet,
however, the manner in which this influence is exerted, can be little more
than matter of conjecture. If the action is analogous to that of the moon
on the earth, the relative disturbing power of the different members of
the system will be as follows :
TABLE III.
RELATIVE INFLUENCE OF THE PLANETS ON THE SuN’s SURFACE.
YN
|
Name. Mass. | In Aph. |At M. Dist.| In Perih.
ae greivsr (Hneke) Laer Tel 219
Mereury | 7 i? (Leverrier) ; 102 180 355
Venus E0L2IT 203 207 211
Earth 314760 95 100 105
Mars 2I9VLTIO 2 ts 4
Jupiter Torr 194 214 236
Saturn spay 8 10 12
Uranus 2t899 0 0 0
Neptune Tetey 0 0 0
This table is derived from the formula
where ¢ represents the disturbing power of a planet, m, its mass,
and =, its distance.
(10.) The connection between the number of sun-spots and the posi-
tions of the planets was noticed by Wolf as long since as 1858. In the
Comptes Rendus, for January, 1859, he published a formula in which the
number of sun-spots was made to depend on the different configurations
of Venus, the Earth, Jupiter and Saturn. In the learned and interesting
memoir—previously referred to—of De La Rue, Stewart and Lewy, the
causal connection between the positions of Venus and Jupiter and the
behaviour of sun-spots seems to be clearly established. Professor Wil-
* Sir John Herschel, Quart. Jour. Sci., Vol. I., p. 228, April, 1864.
y+ Am. Journ. of Sci. and Arts, for March, 1867.
A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—M
Kirkwood.] 9 8 [April 2,
liam A. Norton, of Yale College, in his ‘‘Treatise on Astronomy,’’ pp.
434—436, presents a brief but valuable discussion of the same subject.
An inspection, however, of Table III., shows that writers generally have
given undue weight to Saturn’s influence. Again, although Mercury’s
action at aphelion is but feeble, and even at his mean distance, less than
that of Venus or Jupiter, his perturbing power at perihelion is the
greatest of all planets—a fact which certainly demands consideration in
any theory which refers the origin of solar spots to planetary agency.
In short, after giving the subject much study and attention, I deem it
impossible, with the numbers given in table III., and without the intro-
duction of any modifying cause, to establish a general correspondence
between the different sun-spot periods and those of regularly recurring
planetary configurations.
(11.) But the hypothesis that a particular portion of the sun’s surface
is more favorable to spot formation—or, in other words, more susceptible
to planetary influence—than others, will, it is believed, obviate all diffi-
culty. Is there, then, any independent probability of the truth of this
hypothesis? It is well known that the formation of spots occurs chiefly
between particular parallels of /atétuwde, and that the numbers are greater
in the northern than in the southern hemisphere. It seems, therefore, at
least not improbable that a like difference may exist in regard to longi-
tude. ‘*‘Sommering directs attention to the fact, that there are certain
meridian belts on the sun’s disk, in which he had never observed a solar-
spot for many years together.’’* Buys-Ballot, of Utrecht, has found,
from an elaborate discussion of a great number of meteorological ob-
servations, that there is a short period of variation in the amount of solar
heat received by our planet; the period from maximum to maximum
coinciding, at least approximately, with that of the sun’s rotation with
respect to the earth. Sir William Herschel also believed that one side
of the sun, on account of some peculiarity in its physical constitution,
was less adapted to radiate light and heat than the other.
(12.) On the hypothesis which we have ventured to suggest, the sun-
spot period would be equal to the interval between two conjunctions of
the disturbing planets on the heliographic meridian (designated by M) of
that part of the surface most susceptible to their influence. It would
depend, therefore, on the ratio of the sun’s period of rotation to the inter-
val between two consecutive conjunctions of such planets. Or, as Mer-
cury’s influence is extremely variable, a maximum would be produced
by this planet’s perihelion passage, when the most susceptible part of the
sun’s surface had the same, or nearly the same, heliocentric longitude.
In order, then, to test this hypothesis, we must first inquire what is the
most probable period of the sun’s rotation ?
(13.) On account of the proper motion of the solar spots, the time of
the sun’s rotation as determined by their apparent motion across the
disk, varies from about 25 to 29 days. The proper motion of the spots
* Humboldt’s Cosmos, Vol. LV., p- 378.
1869.] 99 (Kirkwood.
has recently been discussed with great labor and ability by Professor
Spéerer, of Anclam, and Mr. Carrington, of England, who haye shown
conclusively that the rapidity of movement varies regularly with the lati-
tude. The equatorial portions have the greatest angular velocity ; in
other words, the proper motion of the spots is in a direction contrary to
that of the sun’s rotation. The formula by which the astronomers named
express the law for the dependence of the sun’s apparent period of rota-
tion on the latitude are as follows:
According to Carrington, 5 = 865’ — 165! sin 77. 3 . (1)
a “¢ Spéerer, & == 116.°84'75 — 3°. 3812 sim (41°13! +7,). (2)
where = is the are described in a solar day. The true time of rotation is
supposed to be that indicated by an equatorial spot ; and on this assum p-
tion, (1) gives
P — 24,49711 — 244 28h 18m 93s : : : : : : (3)
or, (2) gives
P — 24.462447 — 24¢ 14h 59m Qs ; 5 : : : (4)
The true value is probably between the results here given.
(14.) But will this modifying element in the theory of planetary action
afford a satisfactory explanation of the periodic recurrence of maxima
and minima of solar spots? Let us consider.
(a.) The 11-Year Cycle.—The anomalistic period of Mercury is 87.4
9702, and
87.9°9702 x 46 — 4046.96292 — 11.¥077 — T, 4 : : : (5)
This is very nearly equal to Wolf’s value of the cycle, and agrees at
least equally well with recorded facts.* Again,
a = MLA = aon Ayn On ER ray
which is nearly a mean between Spéerer’s and Carrington’s values of the
sun’s period of rotation. With this, therefore, as the time of the sun’s
axial revolution, we have 46 times the period of Mercury—equal to 163
times that of the sun’s rotation. The recurrence of maxima at mean
intervals of 11.077 years would thus be accounted for.t Again, the
epochs at which sun-spots were seen before the invention of the telescope
may be presumed, with much probability, to have been nearly co-incident
with the maxima epochs of Schwabe’s cycle. Now, it is a remarkable
* The following astronomical cycles are also nearly equal to this period
of variation :
1. 18 periods of Venus =11.074y. 4, 17¢,=11.030y
2. 35 syn. per. of Mer.=11.104 5. 28¢,=11.082
3. 1 period of Jupiter.—11.860 6. 45¢,=11.063,
where ¢, =the syn. per. of Venus with respect to Jupiter ; ¢,=syn. per. of
Mercury with respect to Venus; and ¢;—that of Mercury with respect to
Jupiter.
7 It is not probable that Mercury is on the meridian M precisely at the epoch of perihelion
passage. Itis only necessary to suppose this coincidence to occur when the planet is near the
perihelion point. Even at the distance of 20° the diminution of the disturbing power would be
extremely small.
Kirkwood.] 100 [April 2,
fact that all of those dates given in Art. (1), except perhaps the last, har-
monise with the value which we have adopted for Schwabe’s period of
variation. Thus,
From 321, A.D. to 1860, we have 139 periods of 11.072+years each.
Co al to 807 oe dt sf 11.045 sf
*¢ 807.22 to 840.5 3 ne 11.093 ts
“¢ 840.5 to 1096 oS 23 a 11.109 me
«<< 1096 to 1161 Be 6 Hf 10.833 ve
Seema Git to 1590.9 ‘* 39 Cy 11.024 ve
Hn mlO9OE9 to 1750.0‘ 14 es 11.367(2) os
Smet O20 to 1829.0 ‘‘ 7 4 11.286 ae
omens 2940 to 1860.5 ‘‘ 5) af 10.500 a
The variability of the period will be hereafter considered.
(b.) Wolf’s Cycle of 56-57 Years.—The synodic revolution of Mercury
is 115787748, and
115.487748 x 177 — 20510.9 31896 — 56-y 15324 — T, c ; (7)
In this period the line of conjunction of Mercury and the earth
advances 56.15324 revolutions. Now,
T,
826.15324 ~
This value of the sun’s period of rotation differs from that in (6) by only
29 seconds. Adopting it, therefore, we find that Mercury and the earth
will be in conjunction on the same heliographic meridian at regularly
recurring epochs of 56 years and 56 days.
(c.) The 233-—Day Period.—The mean interval between the consecutive
conjunctions of Venus and Jupiter is 2367992. The close agreement of
these periods, leaves little room to doubt that the latter is the true period
of spot variation.
(d.) The 27-Day Period.—This is at once satisfactorily accounted for
on the hypothesis prepared in Art (11).
(e.) The 584-Day Period.—The identity of this period with that of the
synodic revolution of Venus has already been indicated by De La Rue,
Stewart and Lewy.
(15.) It would be easy to point out theoretically other periods of varia-
tion, which an exact discussion of observations would probably confirm.
It will be obvious, however, that the actual phenomena must be ex-
ceedingly complicated. The great eccentricity of Mercury’s orbit; the
ever-varying configurations of the disturbing planets; the probably
unequal susceptibility of different parts of the sun’s surface to their
influence; combined, perhaps, with other causes, but imperfectly under-
stood, must render the complete discussion of the phenomena both
operose and difficult. The subject, in short, presents a new and interest-
ing department of the theory of perturbations.
(16.) A careful inspection of tables I. and II. will indicate that
Schwabe’s cycle is lable to considerable variation, both in duration and
intensity. The epochs of greatest disturbance were 1837 and 1848, when
the number of spots was about 50 per cent. greater than in 1828 and 1860.
DAds628 24a 19) 49m 505 10 ey
1869.] 1 0) 1 [Kirkwood.
The observations of recent years seem to render it probable, moreover,
that the epoch of extraordinary activity is passing away. The number
of new groups in 1867 was less than in any other year since the com-
mencement of Schwabe’s observations; while the whole number counted
during the 11 years from 1857 to 1867 inclusive, as compared with that of
the 11 years immediately preceding, was as 1483 to 1715.
(17.) The Great Irregularity of the 11-Year Cycle from 1828 to 1860.—
Mercury was in perihelion about 1838.277, and this was probably the
maximum epoch depending on Mercury alone. But the observed epoch of
greatest disturbance was about 1837.2. Let us, then, inquire whether
any configuration of the disturbing planets will account for this marked
deviation from regularity.
Mercury and Venus had the same mean longitude (343°) near the 1st of
April, 1837, or, about 1837.247*, when Mercury was at less than its mean
distance from the sun. If this conjunction occurred on, or very near, the
solar meridian M, an extraordinary disturbance of the photosphere would
evidently result. Now, the interval from 1837.247 to 1838.277 was
376.92075, during which time the sun would have performed 15 entire
rotations ; also the arc between longitude 343° and 75°, (that of Mercury’s
perihelion, ) is 92°. The daily motion of Mercury, moreover, when nearest
the sun is about 5°. If, then, the conjunction of 1837.247 occurred over
the solar meridian M, and if we represent by ¢ the number of days from
1838.277 till Mercury was on the same solar meridian, we shall have,
taking the sun’s period of rotation as adopted in (6)
376.2075 + ¢
=---_ == 24,826 . s 5 2 : ‘ : (9)
1B D2 Se Ont
whence ¢ = 3.98 +, and 5° ¢=—19° + . : : : a (10)
Hence the longitude of Mercury when on the solar meridian M in 1838,
and at other recent maximum epochs, was 94°, or 19° from the perihelion.
Again, the interval between two consecutive conjunctions of Mercury and
Venus is 1444.5651, and
144.4 5651 » 28 — 4047.4 8228,
exceeding the period of 163 solar rotations by 1.419. It is easy to see,
therefore, that when the mean longitudes of the planets were the same
(about 348°) in 1848.328, the ecliptical longitude of the solar meridian M
was 12° in advance, and that the disturbing effect would consequently be
diminished, although still sufficient to fix the maximum in 1848 instead
of 1849. In like manner the further decrease of solar activity in 1859—60,
as well as the observed increase from 1828 to 1837, is readily accounted
for.
(18.) Mercury and the earth had the same mean longitude, 0°, + about
1837. 726.
Mercury and Venus, es ee 34894 0~«(*
1837.247,
* [his is not the precise epoch of conjunction; wemay adopt it, however, without material error,
It may be remarked that a great disturbance of the photosphere would also be produced by the
passage of the planets successively over the meridian M, shortly before the time of actual con-
junction.
Kirkwood.] 102 [April 2
The interval between these epochs was 174.195. Hence if these con-
junctions occurred on the solar meridian M, the sun, during the interval,
must have performed 7.047 revolutions. Now,
174.4 95
Rona
the same value of the sun’s period of rotation as was found in (6). The
harmony of these results affords a striking confirmation of the proposed
hypothesis.
(19.) We have given a very imperfect discussion of the spot-cycles due
to the disturbing effect of Mercury, Venus, and the earth. These results
must be materially modified by Jupiter, whose disturbing influence has
not yet been considered. It is not too much to hope that by means of a
more exact analysis, in which the action of each of the planets, Mercury,
Venus, the earth, and Jupiter shall be taken into account, the condition
of the sun’s surface may be predicted with as much certainty as the
ebbing and flowing of the tides at any particular locality on the surface
of our planet.
(20.) An easy calculation will show that the greatest tide produced in
the sun’s photosphere by any single planet must be less than-an inch in
height. The actual disturbance, therefore, is certainly much greater
than might reasonably have been expected from a cause apparently so
insignificant. It is conceivable, however, that the physical constitution
of the fluids forming the luminous surface may be such that a very slight
impulse may be sufficient to create a rupture, and thus occasion the phe-
nomena observed.
(21.) The foregoing discussion justifies, we think, the following con-
clusions :
1. A connection between the behaviour of sun-spots and the configura-
tions of certain planets has been placed beyond reasonable doubt.
2. The theory, however, of spot formation by planetary influence is
encumbered with anomalies and even inconsistencies, unless we admit
the co-operation of a modifying cause.
3. The hypothesis that a particular part of the solar surface is more
susceptible than others to planetary disturbance is rendered probable by
the observations of different astronomers.
4. The 11-year cycle of spot-variation is mainly dependent on the
influence of Mercury.
5. The marked irregularity of this period from 1822 to 1867, is ina
great measure due to the disturbing action of Venus.
6. Wolf’s 56-year cycle is determined by the joint action of Mercury
and the earth. And,
Finally, the hypothesis proposed accounts, as we have seen, for all the welt
defined cycles of spot-variations.
mE oaa'go6:
BuLoomMiIneton, InpIANA, March 15th, 1869.
1869.] 103 [Chase,
COSMICAL RELATIONS OF LIGHT TO GRAVITY.
By Piiny EARLE CHASE.
Prof. Kirkwood’s very interesting presentation of the evidence which
indicates special lines of disturbance on the Sun’s surface, furnishes a new
analogy to guide the researches of investigators. The well known de-
pendence of one class of magnetic fluctuations on the position of ocean
meridians, strengthens his hypothesis of similar meridians beneath the
solar photosphere* which may possibly be detected by spectroscopic ob-
servations, while the coincidence of luminous, magnetic, and gravitating
lines encourages renewed efforts to trace out the fundamental harmonies
of our planetary system.
Wheatstone’s experiments have been generally regarded as proving
that the velocity of electricity is greater than that of light. But the out-
break of the solar spot recorded by Sir John Herschel, and the simulta-
neous agitation of the magnetic needles at Kew and elsewhere, render it
probable that electrical action is sometimes, if not always, transmitted
with precisely the same velocity as light. May it not be that the induc-
tion between the successive coils of a wire, however widely they may be
separated, produces a spark before the electric current has traversed the
whole extent of the wire? Or, if the wire were transparent, is there any
reason for supposing that it would transmit a wave of light less rapidly
than one of electricity?
The analogies to which attention has been called by numerous ob-
servers, between phenomena which are dependent upon various forms of
force, may be supplemented by relations, no less curious and interesting,
of light to cosmical gravitation, some of which are shown in the follow-
ing equations. They appear to open a new field for inquiry, in which
analysts may, perhaps, find profitable employment.
Let the sun and planets be denoted by the following subscript figures.
Oi; $25 933 Gis $5; inner asteroid,; mean asteroid,; superior asteroid,;
Yo5 2103 Bas Vio
Let h be the modulus of solar light, on the hypothesis that the luminif-
erous ether is an indefinitely elastic, material medium, and that, therefore,
h = , u denoting the velocity of light.
=o)
V = velocity, and T — time of theoretical planetary revolution at the
surface of the sun, or of a planet.
0. = velocity, and t, = time, of axial rotation of n
7 — radius
m — Mass
d — mean distance from sun
¥ — centre of gyration — //2_
* See also Henshall on 6 of ie Q, and 2 with same face of sun. Cosmos, xvii., Noy.
1860. p. 573.
Chase.] 1 04 [April 2,
e — 1 + orbital excentricity
2 — effective inertia of votation — moment of inertia divided by time of
revolution = m 7/a Then
} i Tr
I, = BS (=) -*. Ot, = U, and» = 29, eigen : Bony, Uae
u gi u 4 u iP
2 crags (ay Mid of zther
Pi Te m
3 coe (+ 3
d, i
4 dy, = Go
5 dy (2 z
Ter Gre
eee
6 d, = € d,
64
9.
uy Gy = oF d,
emai
8. d,; = 2 (d, — 7a,)
9 dy 1 Xb
pies LtOy
10 iy Ew
il. V2 ds = a
12. 7d, = d,
13. dy. x dy (S z
Oh S< Pi M4
14 OF (oe oo ds a) = OP ah
15 Nap
v7 1
AIG Vs —= Uy SG “ & x a
Ug M4
The motion of the air in the earth’s annual revolution and daily rotation,
is slightly undulatory, but hardly perceptibly differing from a regular
ellipse. Its motions are controlled, mainly by solar, and subordinately by
terrestrial force, the former giving a motion of 63.8, and a moment of in-
ertia of 548,000,000 times the latter. According to Marriotte’s law, the
specific gravity of the atmosphere should be determined by the conjoined
pressure of solar and terrestrial gravity. The liquid and solid portions of
the earth, however, are not subject to Marriotte’s Law.
In any fluid which is simultaneously affected by two attracting
masses, e. g: by the earth and the sun, it would seem that two systems of
waves should be generated, moving with velocities v, v! such that » =
V2gh w= V2gh
But if the fluid is on the earth’s surface, = i!, while at the centres of
ORGE, G) 3G B38 UD 2 Tic
1869. ] 105 [Chase.
In the orbital motion the pressure of solar force is nearly constant, but
terrestrial gravity tends to maintain the atmosphere at a uniform level,
orin a constant volume. Now the kinetic energy under constant pres-
sure : that under constant volume : : 1.421 :1, or very nearly :: 72:1.
M. Treves found that the number of oscillations in a tuning fork was
increased ,+, by magnetizing the fork. Farther experiments are desir-
able to determine whether his result may be accepted as a general one,
but it may be temporarily regarded as curiously coincident with our
hypothetical case. in which
aye gyle « BE ery
Dy Ve = 1/ Qn = V ne!
ie Ess Fer a May cas
S17: 12: y 2m, : V mM,
18. V 2m,: Vm, : : sp. gr. water : sp. gr. air (at mean tempera-
ture)
Sy 1
119° (2m, \a: ( M4 4 2 Gh 3 Oa
Is <
9 @) 4 =
20. 2 Os ty X I; V4
21. The inertia of the air which is retarded by the thermal and
tidal ‘‘brakes’’ appears to be overcome and the wave-equilibrium re-
stored, after g, has acted for a sufficient time to give V,.
‘ yearl 2
22. Dy = (aa barometric range ) at St. Helena x g, t,?
a peck oe 2
23. BV Pion DS 8 WV Ten & OCR BUR OX (a)
24. Mean vel. of sound = mean vel. of air.
25. If * be divided in proportion to the 7 of the several planets,
TY
Jupiter’s proportion will be 8, of 1125.84 — 692.83, and 692.83 » V, = w.
It may be desirable to modify some of these equations by considerations
connected with centrifugal force. The closeness of the principal analo-
gies may be illustrated by a few examples, in which I assume the following
values asa basis of comparison: 1 : = 1.449662; 4 7,= 5.630384 .°. 4 k=
4
m
11.302517 ;—and Newcomb’s estimates, a = 326,800; d, = 92,380,000 ;
4
= 185,600.
Spo6rer. Faye. Carrington. Kirkwood. Theory. Mean.
1 t, = 24.62447 dy. 25.07472 dy. 24.9711 dy. 24.82594 dy 25.0297 dy. 24.9052 dy.
o*. U = 188,697 m. 185,267 m. 186,035 im. 187.123 m. 185,600 m. 186,528 m.
Theoretical. Assumed.
(ile 30.070552 h
3. PaO MONE! ees
A suranga = 468,770 465,604.
d.
4 —! _ 682.3516 5% ores 3.1416 3.153.
Ty d.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—N
Chase.] 106 [April 2,
d
5. = GaSe . t _ 326,800 (327,280]*
7 mM
di, 30.070552 d.
10. 2a Gales 12am 1
a aE Ge = 81416 83,1524.
d
155. 2695 5 Me 216,395 218, 142.
r; OF
17. He cite .. 22 __ 333, 750 326,800.
o} ‘ GBs ; ;
ter f
18. Mean s.g.——.— — 807.45+ .-. 7" 325,380 326,800.
air Ws .
al i O
19. (2 x 826,800)? — 28.43 .-, 4 _ 98.48 28,162.
9s
20. Thine Se a Lg OR gary TO 18.4.
1
21, 29,1302 60) 18. 376aneiya a) Nin) 8:3 Ogos
135 \2 2
22. (ane qt, —92,361,900m. .-.d,—= 92,361,900 92,380,000.
. 438° XK Zar
o4, cee a Za 1112.07 ft, .- vel. — 1112 o7a mem grog
4
25, 692.83 V, — 187,750 m. 1. = 187,750 185,600.
26. The earth’s proportion would be .000862 of 1125.84 — .97, and
97 x Vi Me 405 _ _mass of sun
2, 38 © mass of planets
27. aU SS) Ge IY, = Oh
The following estimates of the sun’s mass and distance, and the veloc-
ity of light, are derived from the foregoing equations :
From mag- From sp. From From at- From an- From in- From
netic accel- gravity length of mospher- nual baro- ertia of mean esti-
eration. of air. day. ic inertia. m’icrange. Jupiter. mate ofgif
Sun’s mass 333,750 325,380 341,560 325.520 326,610 338,490 321,940
Sun’s distance 93,033,200 92,246,000 93,886,300 92,260,000 92,361,900 93,450,000 91,920,000
Vel. of light 186,910 185,330 125,630 185,360 185,560 187,750 184,670
The study of gaseous molecular motions may, perhaps, be aided by the
analogies of luminous vibrations. The equation ~ — g, t, seems to be an
important one. A solitary planet or particle would acquire the velocity
of revolution in a circular orbit in 4 of the time of revolution, but the
particles of the hypothetical elastic fluid to which the luminous vibrations
are attributed, under the combined pressure of g, and of their own adja-
* As the value assumed for r, was derived from this equation, the theoretical and assumed
results of course correspond exactly. The bracketed number corresponds to: the ordinary value
d4
nm
t+ According to Johnston’s Physical Atlas, the average of the air and ocean temperatures on the
parallels of 45° latitude, is 539.69 F. he specific gravity of air at that temperature is ] +
807.45.
{ The retardations of the atmospheric tides at St. Helena, at Abs 6a 12
= 216.4. The estimates vary from 214.9 to 217.5.
hy and is respectively,
atte jfk 9 pas) m . . = m a f C
are 59’ 85, 26 and 31 , the mean retardation being 5014 [See Trans, A, P. S., vol. 13, py
128. |
@ Mean of polar (32°) and equatorial (82°) = 579. Isothermal of 57° = latitude 439°.
1869.] 107 [Sheafer.
cent particles, do not acquire the oscillatory velocity of light until yg,
has acted for } the time of rotation. Does this indicate successive vibra-
tions in the directions of three co-ordinate axes ? And does the tidal action
of the planets contribute to the disturbance from which the vibrations
originate? The sun-spot theory, and equations 25, 26, and 27, favor
such a hypothesis. The proportionality indicated by (1,)
Ob 8h 88h Ge RA ae Ph
becomes significant, if we consider that any equatorial particle must
move through the distance 2 z 7, before it returns to the same relative
position, and that during the entire series of disturbances, through which
it passes in the interval, g, is exerting an energy, the resultant of which
is equivalent to a fall of g, ¢,2.
BORING RECORDS FROM THE ANTHRACITE BASIN.
By Mr. P. W. SHEAFER.
Record of Lower Boring. Nassau Shaft. One mile north of Scranton.
From Surface below R. Road. 8! 3"
Rock, ay (OY 11”) 3
Coal, 1’ 0”
Rock, 2!
Sandy Gravel, 2
Slate, 6//
Rock, aly a
Slate, Ome
Sand Stone, 8! 4”
Light Slate, 4! 6!
Dark Slate, 4lr 39/ 10”
Coal, a
Dark Slate, Ri wal
Hard Rock, 6//
Dark Slate, oh ai 9’ 11"
Coal, 3/ (0!
Slate, off
Ceal, OL 4’ 3"
Slate, 2
Slate, (hard bands,) 1/11’
Hard Rock, 3! 6!’
Slate, (hard bands,) 20/ 8’
Dark Hard Reck, BO gu
Dark Slate, 10’ 6” 44’ gl’
Coal, pure, 8! 4N
Coal, bony, Syl
Coal, good, 6!’
Coal, bony, 6"
Coal, good, ay 10’ 6”
Hard Rock, 1’ 4”
128’ 9”
Sheafer. ] 108 [April 2,
The above is from the journal kept by Wm. Barryman, reported to
Mr. P. W. Sheafer, Eng. Mines, Pottsville, in 1857. Rocks dip gently
South.
Record of Upper Boring. Nassau Coal Company. One mile north of
Scranton, Pa.
From surface, 13/ 00”
Rock, 12) G 26! 27
Coal mixed with Slate, ROL
Light Rock, 21’ 3!
Dark Sand, 6”
Hard Rock, May als 30/ 10/
Coal, W007
Slate, dark soft, 7 OY
Slate, dark, We ay
Rock, light, 12’ 4”
Slate, dark, 4! -Q!! 187 6/!
Coal, gy
Black Slate, Diam Oe
Coal (with Slate, ) wy
Coal, pure, ay (OY oO
Slate, dark, hard, LOG 0”
Rock, OH
Slate, TUS a OY
Coal, We ey
Slate, (hard bands, ) BY a
Rock, 1’ 0”
Slate, (hard bands, ) 6/38 12/ 117
Coal, 9/ BI
Slate, dark hard, 12/ 9”
Rock, light, Die
Slate, (hard bands, ) S/O!
Rock, hard, WT By4
Slate bands, 4’ 3”
Slate and hard bands, 18’ 10/’
Slate, dark, 8 are
Rock, hard, BY OY
Rock, light, GM?
Slate, dark, 9/7 66’ 4!
Coal, pure, 8’ 0”
Slate, dark, By G”
Slate, hard, light, WW?
Rock, hard, 8”
Rock, hard, light, Nel Bi
Slate, dark, 1 OQ! 25! 6//
Coal, ae. (oi
Slate, dark, WO"
Slate, light, 6! 9// Stay
1869. ]
Coal,
Slate, light,
Coal,
Slate, black, 6/
Slate, (hard bands, ) 8’
Slate, dark, 2!
Rock, light, 5/
Slate, dark, 8/
Slate, light, 8/
Rock, light, ile
Slate, black, 3/
Rock, hard,
Slate, black, 1’
Coal,
Slate,
Rock, hard,
109
11
qi
5//
1//
8//
6//
0”
11!
a
8!
6//
10//
(Sheafer.
WE
gi
1 Oo” 9/ gir
Ay 4"
HOM RS
91
(measured on rods) 309’ 34
Nore. Journal kept by Mr. Berryman, and reported to Mr. P. W. Sheafer, in 1857.
Swartz Boring above Dunmore, about N. 78° 2E. (7,000 feet) from the
corners, in Dunmore, near Scranton.
P. W. Sheafer.
Earth from Surface down,
Sand Rock, hard, coarse,
Sand Rock, yellow,
Coal,
Sand Rock and Slates,
Blue Rock, hard,
Slate,
Coal,
Slate,
Sand Rock,
Blue Rock, hard,
Slate,
Coal,
Slate,
Blue Rock, hard
9!
28'
By Mr. Stevenson, Jan. 6, 1857, to
National Anthracite Company's Cross Section.
Top Rock.
Slate,
Bony Coal, 2!
Top Bench of worked Coal,
Middle Bench of Coal,
Bottom Bench of Coal, il
Bony Coal, rough, 2!
Slate, 19/
6//
0”
0”
0”
O//
OQ’! 49/ O/!
5/ Oo”
Oo”
O//
6// 49) 6/1
4/ oI
6//
O//
0”
QO’ 62/ 6//
4/ 6//
0’ Ley
O// 190/ 8//
5/ 6//
10” patil 10/7
to 2! OV
|
Sheafer.] ] 10 [April 16,
Tolerably Good Top Slate,
Top Bench of good Coal, 4’ 10”
Slate, 6” 6/ 14"
Bottom Bench of Rough Coal, 95!
The above is a section of the two beds of Coal in the Lackawanna Coal
Basin, 1} miles west from Scranton, furnished by the boss miner to P.
W. Sheafer, March 11, 1857. Opened by two drifts on the South bank of
the Lackawanna, where the Coal dips about 5° West.
These Coal were known as the 9 and 11 foot beds.
Stated Meeting, April 16, 1869.
Present, seventeen members.
Dr. GkorcE B. Woop, President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from J. C.
Mill, dated Blackheath Park, March 22, 1869.
Letters acknowledging the receipt of diplomas of member-
ship were received from John T'yndall, dated London, March
20th, and from H. A. Newton, dated Yale College, March 2d,
1869.
Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Academy and Observatory at Turin, the Geological Society
and M. Bossange at Paris, the R. Astronomical Society and
Mr. Quaritch at London, the Royal Society at Edinburgh, the
Portland Society of Natural History, the Rev. J. B. Perry,
the Essex Institute and Cambridge Museum, the editors of
the Journal of Medical Sciences, Dr. Isaac Lea, J. B. Lippin-
cott & Co., and the Fairmount Park Commissioners of Phila-
delphia.
Professor Spencer F. Baird, of Washington, was appointed
to prepare an obituary notice of the late member, John Cassin,
of Philadelphia.
The Committee to which was referred additions to the
Memoir of Professor Cope, reported in favor of publication.
1 1 1 [Lesley.
Professor Cresson introduced the subject of the brilliant
Aurora Borealis of the preceding evening, which Dr. Emer-
son, Mr. Price, and Mr. Chase described as seen by them.
Mr. Lesley said that it was so brilliant and roseate at Washington,
D. C., that the fire engines were taken out; that it did not invade the
southern half of the heavens to any extent; but that he observed a
brightly illuminated feather, 30° or 40° in length from east to west, float
slowly west-north-westward, some little distance south of the zenith,
gradually expanding its dimensions but scarcely changing its form, during
half an hour. Its head or eastern point was, when first seen, say 40° east
of the meridian, and at the end of half an hour, quite that distance west
of the meridian. It was evidently an electrified cirrus cloud, and could
no doubt have been watched until it sank to the horizon, but for the fact
that it passed lengthwise directly under the moon, then about four days
old, and very bright. Castor and Pollux shone brightly through it, as it
passed beneath them. At one time an auroral feather shot from its
northern edge and streamed along. westward, nearly parallel with its
northern edge, continuing brilliant about twenty seconds. Soon after, an
electric spot glowed suddenly in its centre for about the same length of
time. With these exceptions, it appeared steadily and uniformly illumi-
nated. Mr. Lesley compared it with the triple curtain aurora which he
saw July 23d, 1862, on the banks of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and
described in the Proceedings of the Society, Vol. IX, page 60.
Dr. Emerson called the attention of the Society to the Rob-
bins’ process for preserving wood from mould and decay by
the injection of the vapors of coal tar. Professor Cresson ex-
plained the difference between this and other processes for
attaining the same end; especially one now in use in Phila-
delphia, in which the spontaneous inflammability of wood
injected with high volatile hydrocarbons is guarded against
by a subsequent injection of the surface with silicates.
Nominations Nos. 622 and 626 were read and spoken to.
At the request of the recommenders, nomination No. 626, after
being discussed, was postponed, for the purpose of affording
an opportunity for associating with it other names mentioned
in the discussion. Nos. 622 to 625 were then balloted for.
The Rittenhouse Clock. The curators were authorized to
have it put in complete order, although it is no longer fit to
use for astronomical purposes.
The following named persons were declared duly elected
members of the Society :
112
D. G. Brinton, M. D., of Philadelphia.
A. D. White, President Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
J. H. C. Coffin, U. 8. N., Supt. Naut. Almanac, Washing-
ton, DAC;
Joseph Wharton, of Philadelphia.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, May 7, 1869.
Present, nine members.
JOHN C. CREsSON, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Dr. Brinton was introduced to the presiding officer, and
took his seat.
Letters accepting membership were received from J. H. C.
Coffin, dated Nautical Almanac Office, Washington, April 21,
1869; D. G. Brinton, dated 1001 North Sixth street, Phila-
delphia, April 19, 1869; A. Carlier, dated 6 rue de Milan,
Paris, Avril 19, 1869, and D. White, dated Cornell Univer-
sity, Ithaca, N. Y., May 1.
Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Academies and Societies at St. Petersburg, Berlin, Copen-
hagen, Gottingen, Munich, and Dublin; the Societies of Sei-
ence at Offenbach, Frankfort, Bordeaux, Manchester and
Leeds; the Geological Societies at Vienna, and Geographical
Societies at London and Paris, the Zoological Botanical So-
ciety at Vienna, the London Astronomical, Chemical, Meteor-
ological and Asiatic Societies, the Boston Natural Historical
Society and Wool Manufacturers Association, the American
Pharmaceutical Society, Academy of Natural Sciences, Frank-
lin Institute, House of Refuge, Deaf and Dumb Institute,
Dr. C. D. Meigs, the United States Sanitary Commission, the
Congressional Library, and Mr. IT. B. Brooks, Civil Engineer
at, Negaunee, Michigan.
Dr. Hayden presented, for publication in the Transactions,
an Appendix to his report of the Geology on the Yellow and
Missouri Rivers, under the superintendence of Captain Ray-
‘
May 7, 1869.] 113 [Chase.
nolds, said Appendix consisting of a sub-report on the Carices
of the Expedition made by the late Dr. Dewey. On motion,
the Memoir (with its five plates) was referred to a Committee
consisting of Mr. Durand, Mr. James, and Dr. Ruschenberger.
Mr. Rothwell, Engineer of Mines, exhibited through the
Secretary a published copy of his new map of the eastern end
of the first Anthracite Coal Basin, with cross sections, showing
the excessive plication of the synclinal. (See Plate 2, fig. 2.)
Mr. Chase communicated by permission of Mr. Pierce, Di-
rector of the U. S. Coast Survey, the more recent results of
his Investigations into the rain gauge curves.
The observations which were examined, and the method of treatment,
were described in my discussion of the tidal rain-fall of Philadelphia,
(ante, vol. x., pp. 528-7).
The frequent tendency to triple maxima and minima, which I have at-
tributed to lunar influence on the daily barometric spheroid,—the estab-
lishments, both of temperature, and of position with reference to great
bodies of water,—the different relations of precipitation to atmospheric
pressure at different seasons of the year, —the influence of the moon and of
each of the principal planets on temperature, winds, cloudiness, and both
frequency andamount of rain-fall, the probability that the influences upon
temperatnre are due to the induced aerial currents and not to radiation,
(a South wind raising, and a North wind depressing the thermometer),—the
secular variation, which appears to depend principally upon the combined
action of the Moon and Jupiter,—are all clearly indicated by the normal
curves.
Most of the curves show a great similarity at the opposite equinoxes,
and a great contrast at the opposite solstices, both at Greenwich and at
Philadelphia. But in the total rain-fall at different solar hours, the equi-
noctial and solstitial contrast is modified by a synchronous divergence at
the two stations, the Philadelphia curves differing greatly at the equinox-
es and being nearly alike at the solstices. This peculiarity may be owing
to the fact that the prevailing winds at Greenwich are from the ocean,
while those at Philadelphia are from the land, so that an atmosphere sat-
urated with moisture is normal at the former station, abnormal at the
latter.
The planetary curves are so strongly marked that it seems impossible
to account for them by any action analogous to the Moon’s differential at-
traction. They may perhaps be satisfactorily explained by the moment
of inertia, and the constantly and often rapidly varying distance of the
centre of gravity of the earth and disturbing planet.
Dr. Brinton communicated the information which he had
obtained respecting the valuable Arawak MSS. Grammar and
OPES Vi OL EXO
114
Vocabulary by Shultz, in the library of this Society, and the
desirableness of publishing a discussion of their relations to
other MSS. existing in Europe. It appears that the language
which Columbus reported to be common to all the larger
islands of the W. Indies was neither Carib, nor Maya, but
genuine Arawak, scarcely differing from that now spoken be-
tween the Amazon and Orinoco, not more than Chaucer's
English from the English of to-day. It is an added proof that
the whole fauna (man included) of the islands outside the
Gulf Stream came from the Spanish Main, the movement
being in the opposite direction to that of the fauna of N.
America which terminated its course in Florida.
A letter and enclosed testimonial note of the proceedings
of the Michaux Legacy were read, from M. Carlier, announ-
cing the final settlement of the legacy at Paris and in Pon-
toise; and on motion of Mr. Chase, these documents were
referred to the Committee on the Michaux Legacy with in-
structions to prepare the needful papers, and procure the sig-
nature of the President of this Society, and to remit funds for
the expenses incurred ; and they are hereby authorized to draw
upon the Treasurer of the Society for the necessary amount.
A communication from the Janitor was referred to the
Committee on the Hall. And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, May 21, 1869.
Present, seventeen members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Mr. Wharton was introduced to the presiding officer, and
took his seat.
A letter returning thanks for election to membership, was
received from the President of the United States, dated Ex-
ecutive Mansion, April 24, 1869.
A letter acknowledging the receipt of a set of the Society’s
115
Proceedings, Vol. I to X., was received from the London Me-
teorological Office, May 9th, 1869, and from the R. Academy
at Lisbon, acknowledging receipt of No. 77.
Donations for the Library were reported from the Berlin
Academy, Dr. Jarvis, Mr. Haven, Dr. Le Conte, Prof. Coffin,
the New York Canal Commissioners, Buffalo Young Men’s
Association, Cincinnati Observatory, and California Academy
of Sciences.
The Committee on Dr. Dewey’s Carices, &c., reported, re-
commending its publication in the Transactions, which was so
ordered.
A communication and letter was received for the Magellanic
Premium, read by title and regularly referred to the Board
of Officers.
Dr. Horn presented for publication in the Transactions a
paper entitled Revision of the Tenebrionide of America north
of Mexico, by Geo. H. Horn, M. D., which was referred to
Dr. Le Conte, Dr. Leidy and Dr. Bridges.
Mr. Lesley exhibited a photo-lithograph of a section across
the Alleghany mountains, to illustrate the proportionate pli-
cation of the earth’s surface to its radius. See Plate 2, Fig. 1.
Dr. Hayden’s Geological Map of the Upper Missouri was
exhibited, together with many sketches and photographs of
scenery and structure. It was afterwards resolved, that
the Secretaries be instructed to address a letter to Gen’l
A. A. Humphreys, Chief Hngineer U 5S. A., expressing
the desire of the A. P. S. to have the results of the
Geological explorations made in the Territories of the
U.S. by Dr. Newberry, Hayden and others, while employed
by the Government, made speedily available for present use
by publication at the expense of the Government, or in such
other manner as may be thought expedient.
The Committee to which was referred the publication of
the Choltee MS. recommended its publication in the Pro-
ceedings, under the supervision of Dr. Brinton, which was so
ordered, and on motion of Mr. Price, the Secretaries were au-
thorized to print additional copies, according to their best
judgment.
And the Society was adjourned.
116
Stated Meeting, June 18, 1869.
Present, ten members.
Mr. FraueEy, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from Professor
Rolliston, University Oxford, England, May 29.
Letters of invoice were received from the Imperial Geog.
Society of Russia, May 15; U.S. Nav. Obs. May 19th; Cin-
cinnati Obs. May; and A. M. Mayer, of Bethlehem, May 26.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Im-
perial Geographical Society of Russia. The Cincinnati Ob-
servatory requested the completion of its imperfect set of the
Proceedings.
The Meteorological Office reported its change of address to
No. 116 Victoria street, London, 8. W.
Donations for the Library were received from the Paris
Geographical Society and School of Mines, the London As-
tronomical Society, Prof. Rolliston, of Oxford, the Bath So-
ciety, W. T. Blanford, the Boston N. H. Society, the Rhode
Island Society for En. Dom. Industry, Franklin Institute,
College of Pharmacy, Medical News, Philadelphia University,
West Penn Academy, Prof. Mayer, Prof. Ennis, Provost C. J.
Stille, the U.S. Sanitory Commission, Naval Observatory,
Census Bureau, R. W. Rossiter, Wilmington Institute, and
St. Louis Public School Commissioners.
Mr. Cope made a communication concerning a discovery of
certain fossil remains found in New Jersey, the structure of
which indicated a connection between the bird and reptile
classes, and described the peculiarities of construction pre-
sented by the fossil referred to. He also exhibited fossil re-
mains of the Plesiosaurus and Mososaurus orders or types,
and described their relation to other genera of similar type.
117
June 18, 1869.] [Cope.
The fossil which Prof. Cope exhibited was the almost perfect cranium
of a Mosasauroid reptile, the Clidastes propython. He explained various
peculiarities of its structure, as the moveable articulation of certain of the
mandibular pieces on each other, the suspension of the os-quadratum at
the extremity of a cylinder composed of the opisthotic, &c., and other
peculiarities. He also explained, from specimens, the characters of a
large new Plesiosauroid from Kansas, discovered by Wm. E. Webb, of
Topeka, which possessed deeply biconcave vertebrae, and anchylosed
veural arches, with the zygapophyses directed after the manner usual
among vertebrates. The former was thus shown to belong to the true
Sauropterygia, and not to the Streptosauria, of which Hlasmosarus was
type. Several distal caudals were anchylosed, without chevron bones,
and of depressed form, while proximal caudals had anchylosed diapophy-
ses and distinct chevron bones. The form was regarded as new, and
called Polycotylus latipinnis, from the great relative stoutness of the
paddle.
He also gave an account of the discovery, by Dr. Samuel Lockwood, of
Keyport, of a fragment of a large Dinasaur, in the clay which underlies
immediately the clay marls below the lower green sand bed in Monmouth
County, N. J. The piece was the extremities of the tibia and fibula,
with astragalo-caleaneum anchylosed to the former, in length about
sixteen inches; distal width fourteen. The confluence of the first series
of tarsal bones with each other, and with the tibia, he regarded as a most
interesting peculiarity, and one only met with elsewhere in the reptile
Compsognathus and in birds. He therefore referred the animal to the
order Symphypoda, near to Compsognathus Wagn. The extremity of
the fibula was free from, and received into a cavity of the astragalo-cal-
caneum, and demonstrated what the speaker had already asserted, that
the fibula of Ignanodon and Hadrosaurus had been inverted by their
describers. The medullary cavity was filled with open cancellous tissue.
The species, which was one half larger than the type specimen of Hadro-
saurus foulkii, he named Ornithotarsus immanis.
Dr. H. C. Wood spoke of his investigations with regard to
the Fresh Water Aloze of Eastern North America.
Pending nominations, Nos. 628 to 638, new nominations,
Nos. 638 to 640, were read.
Dr. H. Allen offered and read a paper ‘“‘On Human Oste-
ology, containing the heads of divisions of a more extended
communication, which he proposes to present at a future
time.
Allen.) 1 1 8 {June 18, 1869.
The following observations have been instituted with the object of
testing the value of the following propositions:
Ne
That a true conception of the skeleton can be only secured by studying em-
bryology and osteology conjointly.
For inasmuch as the skeleton is the frame-work adapted to protect
internal organs, and to afford attachments to ligaments and muscles, and
since the osseous particles (centres of ossification, either free or combined)
are the results of forces acting in obedience to the necessities of organs
to be protected and of trunks to be moved, it follows that bones can be
best studied when understanding the requirements calling them into
existence.
ele
That the ‘centre of ossification’’ is the osteological unit.
For since ‘‘the bones’’ are associations of centres of ossification having
little or no determinate value, it is rational to prefer these centres as the
primal forms, before the more or less arbitrary ones, the results of their
combination.
Ill.
That the causes of variation of the forms of ‘‘ bones’ within the limits of
health are to be found in the muscles placed in association with them.
Since the idea of a limb is progression, the bones stand up as fulera and
levers to the power, we find the degree of power holds a direct ratio to
the strength of lever and amount of weight. Hence, bones of limbs cor-
respond in point of strength and size to the muscles associated with
them. Habit is thus seen to be indirectly the chief cause of the variation
of ossific forms.
IV.
That the causes of localization of diseased action are best determined by the
application of the foregoing propositions.
(1.) A number of centres of ossification coalescing to protect a given
viscus, the resultant form may preserve, throughout life, a physiological
as well as a mechanical unity. Example: The centres composing the
brain case. When, however, the centres of ossification in the bones of
limbs unite, while losing their identity in form they maintain a peculiar
independence of action throughout life. Example: The centre com-
posing the femur and tibia.
(2.) The evidences of retrograde activity (atrophy) are most marked
along the lines of progressive activity (growth. )
(8.) Activity of development is accompanied with vascularity. In-
creased vascularity is an exciting cause to morbid action. Therefore it
follows that diseased action may be often found in association with an in-
complete genetic process.
(4.) Since muscles control the normal shapes of bones during harmo-
nious action, their inharmonious action may prove a cause of deformity.
(5.) Continual excitation of points of connection of muscles with bones
may prove an exciting cause to disease within such areas.
The Society was then adjourned.
PROC. AMER. PHIL. SOC, VOL.XI. PL.IN
J.P. LESLEY 1869. PHILADELPHIA.
FIG.I. SECTION OF I50 MILES ACROSS THE APPALACHIAN BELT |N PENSYLVANIA
DRAWN TO THE SAME SCALE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL,
South Mountain
(Blue Ridge)
saliW
\S Carboniferous
Alleghany
W.N.W.
. Wepre \siturian
Present
Surface
Line
oF
Lawrentran
50 miles
joo miles
1s0 miles
FIG.2
PR
LEHIGH COAL& NAVIGATION COSCOALPROPERTY- =~» —
SECTIONS
EBAL MEASURES.
June 18, 1869. ] 1 19 [Wood,
PRODROMUS OF A STUDY OF THE FRESH WATER ALGAE
OF EASTERN NORTH AMERICA.
By Horatio C. Woop, Jr.,
Professor of Botany in the University of Pennsylvania.
For several years all the leisure, my more strictly professional duties
allow me, has been devoted to the study of the Alga-fauna of our inland
waters, and I had intended delaying publication until ready to offer to
the scientific world an elaborate memoir upon the subject. The field is
however so constantly enlarging, that the day of final preparation seems
rather to recede than draw near. This and the hope of stirring up other
laborers, have induced me to print now a very brief abstract of the results
that have so far rewarded my efforts. In enumerating and describing the
species herein contained, I shall follow the classification and arrangement
adopted by Rabenhorst in his ‘‘ Flora Europea Algarum.’’ It should,
however, be plainly understood that I do not do this, as endorsing the
method of the German Professor, but simply because I do not feel pre-
pared at present to discuss the natural arrangement of this group, and
desire to leave the whole subject for a future Memoir.
The desire of enlisting the assistance various of observers, as already
mentioned, has been one of the motives that have prompted me to publish
at this time. Iam already greatly indebted to several botanists for aid,
amongst whom I may mention Dr. J. S. Billings, U.S. A., Professor H.
W. Ravenel, and Mr. William Canby, and am thereby emboldened to ask
for more. If there are any persons engaged in the study of these plants, I
will be most happy to exchange specimens with them, either fresh or
mounted for the microscope; and when occasion may arise, will most
freely give all the credit due them for species new to America or Science,
If there are others willing to help me, I will do all in my power to aid
them in return by labelling specimens, giving information as to books,
&c., or make such other returns as circumstances will permit. Any one
who is thus willing had better address me by letter, when I will forward
to him preservative fluid, with some directions.
A certain amount of experience and knowledge of the subject greatly
facilitates the collection of these plants, but scarcely so much as in other
departments of cryptogamic botany. Most of the species of fresh water
algae are so small that the most experienced algologist does not know
how great the reward of the day’s toil may be until he places his booty
on the object glass of his compound microscope. In order to aid any one
who is desirous of collecting and studying these low forms, it seems to
me not amiss to make here a few remarks upon the where and the when
to look, and the how to preserve after they are found.
There are three or four distinct classes of localities, in each of which a
distinct set of forms may be looked for. Stagnant ditches and pools;
_ springs, rivulets, large rivers, and other bodies of pure water; dripping
rocks in ravines, &c.; trunks of old trees, boards, branches and twigs of
living trees and other aerial localities.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—P
Wood.] 120 June 18,
In regard to the first of these—stagnant waters—in these the most con-
spicuous forms are oscillatoriz and zygnemacese. The oscillatorize may
almost always be recognized at once, by their forming dense, slimy strata,
floating or attached, generally with very fine rays extending from the
mass like a long, delicate fringe. The stratum is rarely of a bright
green color, but is mostly dark; dull greenish, blackish, purplish, blue,
&e. The oscillatoriz are equally valuable as specimens at all times and
seasons, as their fruit is not known, and the characters defining the spe-
cies do not depend upon sexual organs. The zygnemas are the bright
green, evidently filamentous, slimy masses, which float on ditches or lie
entangled amongst the water plants, sticks, twigs, &c., inthem. They
are only of scientific value when in fruit, as it is only at such times that
they can be determined. Excepting in the case of one or two very large
forms, it is impossible to tell with the naked eye with certainty whether
a zygnema is in fruit or not; but there are one or two practical points,
the remembrance of which will very greatly enhance the probable yield
of an afternoon’s search. In the first place, the fruiting season is in the
spring and early summer. The latter part of March, May and June are
the months when the collector will be best repaid for looking for this
family. Again, when these plants are fruiting they lose their bright
green color and become dingy, often yellowish and very dirty looking—
just such specimens as the tyro would pass by. The fine, bright, green,
handsome masses of these algae are rarely worth carrying home. After
all, however, much must be left to chance; the best way is to gather
small quantities from numerous localities, keeping them separate until
they can be examined.
Adhering to the various larger ditch plants, to floating matters, twigs
and stones, &e., will often be found filamentous algae, which make fine
filmy fringes around the stems, or on the edges of the leaves; or per-
chance one may meet with rivulariz or nostocs, &c., forming little green
or brownish balls, or indefinite protuberances attached to small stems
and leaves. These forms are, however, to be looked for especially later
in the season. Whenever seen, they should be secured.
Tn the latter part of summer, there is often a brownish gelatinous scum
to be seen floating on ditches. Portions of this should be preserved, as it
frequently contains interesting nostocs and other plants.
In regard to large rivers, the time of year in which I have been most
successful in such localities, is the latter summer months. Springs and
small bodies of clear water may be searched with a fair hope of reward at
any time of the year when they are not actually frozen up. I have found
some exceedingly beautiful and rare algae in such places as early as March,
and in open seasons they may be collected even earlier than this. The
desmids are most abundant in the spring, and possibly most beautiful
then. They, however, rarely conjugate at that time, and the most valua-
ble specimens are therefore to be obtained later—during the summer and
fall months; at least, so it is said; and the little experience I have had
with this family seems to confirm it. Rivulets should be watched espe-
cially in early spring, and during the summer months. |
9
1869.] 1 21 [Wood.
From the time when the weather first grows cool in the fall, on until
the cold weather has fairly set in, and the reign of ice and snow com-
mences, is the period during which the algae hunter should search care-
fully all wet, dripping rocks, for specimens. Amongst the dew bearing
stems of wet mosses—in dark, damp crevices, and little grottoes beneath
shelving rocks—here, at this season, is the algae harvest to be reaped.
Nostoes, palmellas, conjugating desmids, sirosiphons, various unicellular
algae, then flourish in such localities. My experience has been, that late
in the fall, ravines, railroad cuttings, rocky river-banks, &c., reward time
and labor better than any other localities.
The vaucherias, which grow frequently in wet ground, as well as sub-
merged, fruit in the early spring and summer in this latitude, and are
therefore to be collected at such times, since they are only worth preserv-
ing when in fruit.
In regard to algae which grow on trees, I have found but a single spe-
cies, and do not think they are at all abundant in this latitude. Farther
south, if one may judge by Professor Ravenel’s collections, they are the
most abundant forms.
As to the preservation of the algae—most of the submerged species are
ruined by drying. Studies of them should always, when practicable, be
made whilst fresh. Circumstances, however, will often prevent this, and
I have found that they may be preserved for a certain period, say three
or four months, without very much change, in a strong solution of acetate
of alumina. If this is not to be had, I would recommend a trial of a
preservative liquid, made of glycerine, carbolic acid (creasote of the
shops), and water. This mixture might be made by dissolving half an
ounce of pure carbolic acid (a little more of the impure), in three fluid-
ounces of glycerine, and adding a full pint of pure water.
Almost all species of algae which are firm and semi-cartilaginous, or
almost woody in consistency, are best preserved by simply drying them,
and keeping them in the ordinary manner for small plants. When studied,
fragments of them should be soaked in water.
The only satisfactory way that algae can be finally prepared for the
cabinet is by mounting them whole, or in portions, according to size, for
the microscope. Of the best methods of doing this, this is hardly the
place to speak ; but a word as to the way of cleaning them will perhaps
not be out of place. Many of them, especially the larger filamentous one,
may be washed by holding them fast upon an ordinary microscope slide,
with a bent needle or a pair of forceps, and allowing water to flow or slop
over them freely, whilst they are rubbed with a stiffish camels hair pencil
or brush. In other cases, the best plan is to put a mass of the specimens
in a bottle half full of water, and shake the whole violently ; draw off the
water from the plants in some way, and repeat the process with fresh
additions of water, until the plants are well scoured. At first sight, this
process would seem exceedingly rough, and liable to spoil the specimens,
but I have never seen bad results from it, at least, when practised with
judgment. The water seems so to envelope and protect the little plants
that they are not injured.
Wood.] 1 22 (June 18,
After all, in many instances it appears impossible to clean these algae
without utterly ruining and destroying them—the dirt often seeming to
be almost an integrant portion of them ; so that he who despises and rejects
mounted specimens, simply because they are dirty and unsightly, will
often reject that which, scientifically speaking, is most valuable and
attractive.
In concluding this introduction, it is perhaps pardonable to state, that
there are in my possession elaborate descriptions and drawings (from
nature) of nearly all the plants mentioned in this paper, and that of the
species mentioned, all but a dozen or two are new to science or new to
this continent.
CLASS PHYCOCHROMOPHYCEAE.
ORD. CYSTIPHORAE.
FAM. CHROOCOCCACEAE.
GEN. CHROOCOCCUS.
C. REFRACTUS. Sp. Nov.
C. cellulis in familias solidas arcte consociatis, plerumque subquad-
ratis, saepius triangularibus, rare multiangulis; familiis saepius loba-
tis; cytiodermate tenui, vix visibile, achroo; cytioplasmate subiliter
granulato, subfusco vel subluteo, valde refrangente.
C. Cells closely associated together into solid families, mostly sub-
quadrate, very often triangular, rarely multiangular; families often
lobed ; cytioderm thin, scarcely perceptible, transparent; cytioplasm
finely granular, brownish or yellowish, highly refractive.
Diam. cell.so0’’ sog0/’, rare in cellulis singulis 5,5,/’; famil. 7.55”
S/H)
17 3
0
Hab. In rupibus irroratis prope Philadelphia.
C. MULTICOLORATUS. Sp. ov.
C. in strato mucoso inter algas varias sparsus; cellulis singulis sphae-
ricis, vel 2-4 (rare 8) aut angulis aut semisphaericis aut abnormibus in
familias oblongas consociatis ; cytiodermate crasso, hyalino, haud lamel-
loso; tegumentis plerumque nullis, interdum subnullis; cytioplasmate
plerumque homogeneo, interdum subiliter granulato, vel luteo-viride
vel caeruleo-viride vel luteo vel subnigro, vel brunneo, vel saturate
aurantiaco, saepe ostro tincto.
Diam. cell., sing. sine tegm., 5,55'’ cum teg. 73457’ o ’; cell. in famil. sing.
a¥00'—a300- Fam. long. 5'59//—z50"" 5 lat. gs'p9!—as'00"-
C. Occurring scattered in a mucous seer with other algae ; cells
spherical and single, or else angular semisphaerical or irregular and asso-
ciated together in oblong families of from 2-4 (rarely 8) ; inner coat thick,
hyaline, not lamellate ; outer coat generally wanting, sometimes indis-
tinctly present ; endochrome mostly homogeneous, sometimes minutely
1869. ] 123 [Wood.
granular, either a yellowish green or bluish green, or yellowish, or brown,
or blackish, sometimes tinged with bright lake.
Hab. In rupibus humidis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. GLOEOCAPSA.
G SPARSA. Sp. Nov.
G. in strato mucoso sociis algis variis sparsa ; cellulis sphaericis, vel
oblongis vel ovatis, 2-8 in familias consociatis ; familiis subglobosis vel
subovatis, interdum numeroso-aggregatis; tegumentis internis aureo-
fuscis, firmis, rarissime coloris expertibus, homogeneis, vel lamellosis ;
tegumentis externis achromaticis, rare subachromaticis, plerumque vix
visibilibus; cytioplasmate homogeneo.
Diam. max. cell. oblong. sine tegum. long., z/yq/’; lat., 7A;5/’; cell.
glob., sine tegum., 555/’; cum tegum., ;j,5//; fam., -4,/’.
G. scattered in a mucous stratum composed of various algae ; cells
spherical, or oblong, or ovate, associated together in families of from
2-8; families subglobose or subovate, sometimes aggregated together
in large numbers; inner tegument yellowish brown, firm, rarely colorless,
homogeneous or lamellate; external tegument achromatic, rarely sub-
achromatic, generally scarcely visible.
GEN. MERISMOPEDIA.
M. CONVOLUTA. Bréb.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
Remarks. —I have only a slide of specimens, which were given me by my
friend Dr. J. Gibbons Hunt. Our American form seems to be too close to
the European species to be separated from it, although in no case is
the frond in any wise plicate or convolute, and the cells are somewhat
smaller (long diameter, ;759’’).
M. Nova. Sp. Nov.
M. thallo membranaceo, distincte limitato, cellulis numerosissimis
composito; cellulis ovalibus, arcte approximatis, 16 in familias consoci-
atis, dilute caeruleo-viridibus, interdum medio constrictis; thalli margini-
bus rectis, integris.
Thallus membranaceous, distinctly limited, composed of very numer-
ous cells ; cells oval, closely approximated, consociate in families of 16,
light bluish green, sometimes constricted in the middle ; margin of the
thallus straight and entire.
Diam. cell. ad. zyyq/’.
Hab. In flumine Schuylkill, prope Philadelphia.
FAM. OSCILLARIACEAE.
GEN. OSCILLATORIA.
O. NIGRA. Vawuch.
In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
6
Wood.] 1 24 [June 18,
Remarks.—Our American form does not quite equal the measurements
given by Rabenhorst. I have never measured it over ;;)55’/ in diameter.
oO. Limosa. (Roth.) Agh.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
Remarks.—The dissepiments are never granulate, at least that I have
seen. Otherwise our American forms agree in all respects with the de-
scriptions of the European.
0. NEGLEOCTA. Sp. Nov.
O. trichomatibus modice brevibus, aut dilute purpuraceo-plumbeis aut
plumbeo-cinereis, plerumque rectis, aut stratum mucosum atro-purpureum
haud distincte radiante formantibus, aut in strato gelatinoso haud
radiante subplumbeo dispersis et cum algis aliis intermixtis, rare oscil-
lantibus sed lente sese moventibus; articulis diametro fere 4 plo bre-
vioribus; dissepimentis plerumque haud granulosis, rare indistincte
granulosis; apiculo obtuse rotundato, interdum breve nonnihil atten-
uato.
Filaments rather short, of a dilute purplish lead color, or leaden gray,
generally straight, either forming a mucous, blackish purple stratum
without marked rays, or diffused with other algae in a gelatinous mass,
rarely oscillating but gliding ; articles about four times shorter than broad ;
joints for the most part not granulate, rarely indistinctly granulate ; ends
obtusely rounded, occasionally shortly somewhat attenuate.
Diam. 7=57//=.0066.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
0. IMPERATOR. Sp. Nov.
O. in strato mucoso, plerumque natante, olivaceo-atro, longe radiante ;
trichomatibus rectis aut subrectis, tranquillis, dilute viridibus vel satu-
rate olivaceis, haud oscillantibus, sed ambulantibus; apiculis nonnihil
attenuatis, late rotundatis vel subtruncatis, curvatis; articulis diametro
5-12 plo brevioribus, ad genicula indistincte contractis ; cytioplasmate
homogeneo, olivaceo-viride ; vaginis firmis, ad genicula distincte trans-
verse striatis,
O. Occurring in an olive-black mucous stratum, mostly swimming and
with long rays; filaments straight or straightish, light green or deep
olive, tranquil, not oscillating, but moving with a gliding motion; ends
somewhat attenuate, broadly rounded or subtruncate, curved ; articles
5-12 times shorter than broad, slightly contracted at the joints ; cytio-
plasm homogeneous, olive green; sheaths firm, distinctly transversely
grooved at the joints.
Diam. .002.’
GEN. LYNGBYA.
L. BICOLOR. Sp. Nov.
L. trichomatibus simplicibus in cespites nigro-virides dense in-
tricatis, varie curvatis, plerumque inarticulatis, interdum breve articu-
1869.] 125 [Wood,
latis et ad genicula contractis; cytiodermate dilute caeruleo-viride,
plerumque copiose granulato, saepe interrupto; cellulis perdurantibus
cylindricis, saepe elongatis, saturate brunneis, sparsissimis; vaginis firmis,
achrois, in trichomata matura modice crassis.
L. with the filaments closely interwoven into a blackish green mat ;
filaments variously curved, simple, mostly inarticulate, sometimes shortly
articulate with the joints contracted; endochrome light bluish green,
mostly very granulate, often interrupted; heterocysts cylindrical, often
elongate, deep brown, very few; sheaths firm, transparent, in old fila-
ments moderately thick.
Diam. 7757’’.
Hab. In flumine Schuylkill prope Philadelphia.
FAM. NOSTOCHACEAE.
GEN. NOSTOC.
N. CALCICOLA. Ag.
Hab. In rupibus prope Catoosa Springs, Georgia.—Prof. Ravenel.
Remarks.—The heterocysts in the American plant are both intermixed
and terminal, otherwise the description of the European form is well
answered. The region of country in which the specimen was collected
is a limestone one. Iam unable to say more positively whether the rocks
on which it was growing were limestone or not.
GEN. SPHAEROZYGA.
S. POLYSPERMA. Labenhorst.
In stagnis prope Camden, New Jersey.
S. SUBRIGIDA. Sp. Nov.
§. natans ; trichomatibus singulis, rectis aut subrectis, minimis, dilute
viridibus ; articulis cylindricis aut subglobosis, distinctis; sporis cylin-
dricis, in medio gradatim nonnihil constrictis, singulis aut duplicis, sine
cellulis perdurantibus inter se; cellulis perdurantibus brevecylindricis,
singulis, distinctis.
8. Floating; filaments single, straight or straightish, very small, light
green; articles cylindrical or subglobose, distinct; spores single or
double, in the middle gradually a little constricted, not having a hetero-
eyst between them ; heterocysts shortly cylindrical, single, distinct.
Diam. cell. veg. trans. g¢p5q//=.00016; spor. transv. g9y5!-z2s55"/=
-00023//—.00022” ; long. 7.455/=.00066” ; cell. perd. transv. ,,155//=.00022.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. CYLINDROSPERMUM.
C. FLEXUOSUM. (Ag.) Rabdenh.
Hab. In humo irrorato prope Philadelphia.
Wood.) 1 26 [June 18,
c. MINUTUM. Sp. Nov.
C. trichomatibus dilute aerugineis, plerumque flexuoso-curvatis et
intricatis, interdum subrectis; articulis cylindricis, ad genicula plus
minus constrictis, homogeneis vel granulatis; cellulis perdurantibus ter-
minalibus, hirsutis, globosis; sporis ellipticis, diametro 2-3 plo longiori-
bus, subtilissime granulatis.
Filaments light aeruginous green, generally curved and intricate,
sometimes straightish; articles cylindrical, more or less constricted at
the joints, homogeneous or granulate; heterocysts terminal, hirsute,
globose ; spores elliptical, 2-3 times longer than broad, very minutely
granulate.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. ANABAENA.
A. GELATINOSA. Sp. Nov.
A. thallo mucoso gelatinoso, indefinite expanso, dilutissime brunneo,
nonnihil pellucido ; trichomatibus haud vaginatis, leviter flexuoso-curva-
tis, nonnihil distantibus, haud intricatis, aut dilute aureis aut dilute
caeruleo-viridibus ; articulis globosis, homogeneis; cellulis perduranti-
bus articulorum diametro fere aequalibus, globosis, vel rare oblongis ;
sporis terminalibus, singulis, globosis, (fusco-brunneis ?)
Thallus gelatinous, mucous, indefinitely expanded, somewhat pel-
lucid, with a brownish tinge; filaments not vaginate, somewhat curved,
rather distant, not intricate, either a light golden yellow or light bluish
green ; joints globose, homogeneous ; heterocysts about equal to the fila-
ment in diameter, globose or rarely oblong ; spores terminal, globose.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
GEN. NOSTOCHOPSIS. Gen. Nov.
Trichomata ramosa cum cellulis perdurantibus aut in latere sessilibus
aut in ramulorum brevissimorum apicibus dispositis. Vaginae nullae.
Thallus definitus.
Thallus definite ; filament branched; heterocysts sessile upon the sides
of the filaments or raised upon the apices of short branches; sheaths
none.
Remarks.—The curious plant upon which this genus is founded has
the habit of a nostoc. The outer portion of the frond is condensed so
as to give the appearance of a periderm; there is, however, no true peri-
derm. The consistence of the thallus is that of a firm gelatinous mass.
The trichomata or filaments radiate from the inner part of the frond
towards the outer surface, but many of them take their origin in the
outer portions of the thallus. In most places they are distinctly articu-
lated, and indeed often seem to be composed of globular cells, resem-
bling the filaments of a nostoc; on the other hand in certain portions
they are not at all articulated. No sheaths are anywhere visible. The
heterocysts are strangely enough never placed in the continuity of the
1869.] 127 [Wood.
filaments. Sometimes they are sessile immediately upon the latter, some-
times they are raised upon very short branches. They are globose with
rather thick walls. No spores were discovered. It seems to me best for
the present to class this curious plant with the nostochaceae, although I
am not altogether satisfied as to its affinities.
N. LOBATUS. Sp. Nov.
N. thallo vivide viride aut luteo-viride, cavo, enormiter lobato, natante,
modice magno, firmo, gelatinoso; trichomatibus plerumque longis,
flexuosis, dilute viridibus, plerumque articulatis, partim inarticulatis,
cylindricis aut sub-moniliformibus, sparse granulatis.
Diam. trichom ; cell. perdur.
Remarks.—I found this plant floating upon the Schuylkill river just
above Manayunk. The hollow frond was buoyed up by a bubble of gas
contained within it. It was an irregular, flattened, somewhat globose
mass, of a bright green color and about 3 an inch in diameter. It seems
very probable that in its earlier condition, it was a solid attached frond.
The long slender filaments are often very tortuous, but run a pretty
direct general course towards the outer surface.
FAM. RIVULARIEAE.
GEN. GLOIOTRICHA.
G. INCRUSTATA. Sp. Nov.
G. globosa vel subovalis, firma, solida, ad pisi minimi magnitudinem,
dilute viridis, crystallophora ; trichomatibus rectis aut leviter curvatis, in
pilum productis, viridibus aut flavescentibus, saepe infra laete viridibus
sed supra flavescentibus, haud ordinatim articulatis ; articulis inferiori-
bus in trichomatibus maturis brevibus, plerumque compressis; pilo apicale
recto aut leviter curvato, plerumque indistincte articulato, saepe inter-
rupto; vaginis amplis, achrois, saccatis, interdum valde constrictis ; spo-
ris cylindricis, saepe curvatis, diametro ad 9 plo longioribus; cellulis
perdurantibus sphaericis.
Diam. trichom. cum vag. 7355//-73959/’ Sporis Max. 73459//—7s4yq’’ 5 Cell.
perd. ps5007-
Frond globose or suboval, firm, solid about the size of a very small
pea, light green, crystal bearing; filaments straight or slightly curved,
produced into long hairs, green or yellowish, sometimes bright green in
their proximal portions but yellowish above, not regularly articulate ;
lower articles in the mature filament short, and generally compressed ;
apical hair—like portion straight or slightly curved, mostly indistinctly
articulate, frequently interrupted; sheath ample, transparent, saccate,
sometimes strongly constricted ; spores cylindrical, frequently curved,
about 9 times as long as broad.
Hab. Schuylkill river, plantas aquaticas adhaerens.
$
A. P. S.—VOL. XI. Q
(9 Xe)
Wood. ] ] 28 [June 18;
GEN. RIVULARIA.
R. CARTILAGINEA. Sp. Nov.
R. subglobosa, parva, cartilaginea, saturate brunnea vel sub-atra, soli-
taria in plantis aquaticis :—trichomatibus maturis sterilibus rectis aut sub-
rectis, cylindricis, elongatis, haud articulatis ; cytioplasmate saepe inter-
rupto; vaginis arctis et distinctis; cellulis perdurantibus globosis, dia-
metro subaequalibus :—trichomatibus fertilibus rectis aut sub-rectis, supra
spora cellulis 8-9 instructis ; sporis elongatis, rectis, cylindricis ; vaginis
nonnihil crassis, arctis :—trichomatibus immaturis, breve articulatis ;
vaginis subamplis.
Frond subglobose, small, cartilaginous, deep brown or blackish, soli-
tary upon aquatic plants: mature sterile filaments, cylindrical, elongated,
not articulated, their cytioplasm frequently interrupted, their sheaths
close and distinct, their heterocysts globose and about equal to them in
diameter ; fertile filaments straight or nearly so, above the spores fur-
nished with 8 or 9 cells; spores elongate, straight, cylindrical; sheaths
rather thick, close; immature filaments shortly articulate, their sheaths
rather large.
Diam. trich. cum vag. 3755’; spor. sg57/’.
Hab. In palude, Northern Michigan.
GEN. DASYACTIS.
D. MOLLIS. Sp. Nov.
D. parva, ad magnitudinem pisi minimi, enormiter subglobosa, mol-
lis, gelatinosa, dilute viridis, haud distincte zonata ; trichomatibus pler-
umque subrectis, partim distincte, partim indistincte articulatis ; vaginis,
in trichomatibus maturis haud visibilibus, in trichomatibus juvenibus
supra subamplis; cellulis perdurantibus sub-globosis, globosis, vel ellip-
ticis, diametro duplo majoribus, plerumque singulis sed interdum bi vel
triseriatis.
Frond small, about the size of a small pea, irregularly subglobose,
soft, gelatinous, light green, not distinctly zoned; filaments generally
straightish, partly distinctly, partly indistinctly articulate; sheaths in
the mature filament not perceptible; in the young filaments rather large
in the upper portion; heterocysts subglobose or globose or elliptic, twice
as large as the filament, generally single but sometimes bi or tri-seriate.
Diam. trich. gpo9//-zs50’ 5 cell. perd. zryq/’-
Hab. In palude plantas aquaticas adhaerens, Northern Michigan.
GEN. MASTIGONEMA.
M. ELONGATUM. Sp. Nov.
M. initio subglobosum, postea saepe nonnihil fusinum, nigro-viride, lu-
bricum, firme ; trichomatibus aerugineis, valde elongatis, flagelliformibus,
interdum inarticulatis sed saepius breve articulatis, interdum ad genicula
valde constrictis ; apice interdum truncato sed plerumque in pilo, longo,*
achroo, flexuoso, producto; vaginis achrois, arctis, saepe apice truncatis ;
cellulis perdurantibus globosis vel subglobosis.
w
1869.] 1 9 [Wood.
Thallus at first subglobose, afterwards frequently fusiform, blackish
ereen, slippery, firm; filaments aeruginous, very elongate, sometimes
not articulated, but more generally shortly articulated, sometimes
strongly contracted at the joints; apices sometimes truncate but gener-
ally produced into a long, flexuous, translucent hair ; sheath transpar-
ent, close, frequently truncate at the apex; heterocysts globose or sub-
globose.
Diam. 52,7//=-00026.”’
Hab. In aquario meo.
GEN. MASTIGOTHRIX.
M. FIBROSA. Sp. ov.
M. trichomatibus dilute caeruleo-viridibus vel olivaceis vel sub-
aerugineis, infra haud articulatis, supra saepe breve articulatis ;
apice in trichomatibus maturis in setam hyalinam, distincte articu-
latam, longam, producto; vaginis achrois, in filamentis immaturis,
distale distinctis, latis, hyalinis, infra modice crassis, arctis—in trichoma-
tibus maturis infra arctis, et indistinctis, supra in fibetillis dissolutis, in
apice, absentibus ; cellulis perdurantibus globosis interdum geminis.
Filament either light bluish green or olivaceous or subaeruginous, below
not articulate, its upper portion often shortly articulate ; apex produced in
the mature filament into a hyaline seta, which is long and distinctly ar-
ticulate ; sheath transparent—in the immature filament, distally distinct,
broad, hyaline, but proximally close and rather thick—in the mature
filament below closeand rather indistinct, and superiorly dissolved in fibril-
lae so as to be entirely wanting at the apex; heterocysts globose, some-
times in pairs.
Diam. trichom. 335,’'; cell. perdur. y3499//-rs$50""-
Hab. In strato mucoso cum algis variis, in rupibus irroratis prope
Philadelphia.
FAM. SCYTONEMEACEAE.
GEN. SCYTONEMA.
Ss. CATARACTA. Sp. Nov.
S. rupicola, caespitosum, fusco-atrum, longe et late expansum ; tri-
chomatibus flexuosis, flexilibus, fere 0.25// longibus, vage pseudoramo-
sissimis, superficie laeve; pseudoramis elongatis, singulis, rarissime
geminis, liberis, interdum fuscis, saepius hyalinis, apice plerumque
truncato, rare nonnihil attenuato, saepe barbato, haud rubello; tricho-
matibus internis aerugineis, tenuissimis, plerumque distincte articulatis ;
articulis diametro plerumque brevioribus, sed interdum longioribus,
saepe sejunctis, saepe subglobosis ; vaginis crassis et firmis ; cellulis per-
durantibus et basilaribus et interjectis, singulis, rarissime geminis.
Diam. trich. c. vag. plerumque .00045/’; max. .0011/’; sine vag. max.
.00013.//
8. Forming on rocks an extended turf-like stratum of a brownish
Wood.] 130
[June 18,
black color; filaments flexuous, flexible, almost 0.25” long, irregularly
branched, their surface smooth; branches elongate, single, rarely in
pairs, free, sometimes fuscous, frequently hyaline, their apices generally
truncate, rarely somewhat attenuate, frequently provided with enlarge-
ments, never reddish ; cytioplasm aeruginous, very thin, generally dis-
tinetly articulate; articles mostly shorter than broad, but sometimes
longer, frequently disjoined, often subglobose ; sheaths thick and firm ;
heterocysts both basal and interjected, single, extremely rarely gemi-
nate.
Hab. In flumine Niagara prope cataractam.
S. CORTEX. Sp. Nov.
S. minutissimum, stratum tenue submembraneum formante; tricho-
matibus sparse pseudoramulosis, pseudoramulisque repentibus et plus
minus concretis, viridibus aut dilute fuscis, varie curvatis, haud rigidis ;
cytioplasmate viride, articulato, rare distincte granuloso ; articulis diam-
etro longioribus aut brevioribus; vaginis arctis, nonnihil tenuibus,
achrois, plerumque coloris expertibus, sed interdum dilute fuscis; cellulis
perdurantibus et singulis et geminis, et basalibus et interjectis, globosis
vel subglobosis.
8. Very minute, forming a thin, submembranaceous stratum ; fila-
ments sparsely branched, together with the branches, creeping and more
or less concreted together by their sides, green or light brown, variously
curved, not rigid; cytioplasm (internal filament) articulate, rarely dis-
tinctly granulate ; joints longer or shorter than broad; sheaths close,
rather thin, transparent, generally colorless but sometimes light brown ;
heterocysts globular or subglobular, single or in pairs, basal or other-
wise.
Diam. trich. cum vag. 73355//-73359//
Hab. South Carolina in ramis (Platanus occidentalis). Prof. Ravenel.
8. RAVENELLII.* Sp. Nov.
S. lignicola, breve caespitosum, viride-nigrum ; trichomatibus plerum-
que repentibus, vel fusco-olivaceis vel aureo-fuscis, modice pseudoramosis;
ramis ascendentibus, rigidis, flexuosis rare pseudoramulosis, vel fusco-
olivaceis vel aureo-fuscis, rarissime cum apicibus subachrois ; trichomati-
bus internis coloris expertibus, granulosis, saepe vagina erumpentibus,
plerumque articulatis; articulis diametro longioribus aut brevioribus ;
vaginis arctis, crassibus, fusco-olivaceis vel aureo-fuscis, plerumque supra
truncatis et apertis, superficie nonnunquam irregulare ; cellulis perduran-
tibus subquadratis, singulis, interjectis.
S. Forming little, shortly turfy spots, on bark, of a greenish color ;
filaments mostly creeping, either brownish olive or yellowish brown,
moderately branched; branches ascending, rigid, flexuous, very rarely
provided with secondary branchlets, either brownish olive or yellowish
*It affords me great pleasure to dedicate this species to Prof. H. W. Ravenel as an acknowledg-
ment, not so much of the aid rendered in my studies of our fresh water algae, as of his great ser-
vices to science in some of her kindred branches.
1869.] 131
[Wood.
brown, rarely subtransparent at the apex; cytioplasm colorless, granu-
lar, often extending out beyond the sheaths, generally articulate ; joints
longer or shorter than broad ; sheaths close, thick, brownish olive or yel-
lowish brown, for the most part truncate at their ends and open, their
surface sometimes irregular ; heterocysts subquadrate, single, interstitial.
Diam. trich. cum vag. 73959//—7s859// 5 TAM. C. Ve zsh g/— 4 285g"!
Hab. South Carolina, in ramis Celtis. Prof. H. W. Ravenel.
GEN. SYMPHOSIPHON.
S. CORIACEA. Sp. Nov.
S. in strato ad 2 lineam crasso, coriaceo, nonnihil spongioso disposita ;
trichomatibus pseudoramulisque flexuosis, dense intricatis, arcte concretis ;
trichomatibus internis rarissime haud articulatis sed plerumque breve et
distincte articulatis, plerumque pallescentibus, interdum dilutissime
aerugineis, saepe interruptis ; articulis granulosis, interdum sejunctis,
diametro subaequalibus ad fere duplo longioribus ; vaginis crassissimis,
distincte lamellosis, achrois et coloris expertibus, stratis externis saepe
intumescentibus, superficie corrugata, hirta; cellulis perdurantibus
nullis?
S. Forming a leathery and spongy, tough stratum of about 2 lines in
thickness and of a light slate color. Filaments and branches flexuous
densely intricate, closely concreted ; internal filament very rarely not
articulated, in most cases very distinctly jointed, generally nearly
colorless, sometimes with a faint aeruginous tint, often interrupted ;
articles granular, sometimes disjoined, from about equal to twice the
length of their diameter; sheaths very thick, transparent and colorless,
very distinctly lamellated, external lamella often swollen, their surface
corrugate and variously rough and ragged ; heterocysts none. ?
Diam. trich. c. vag. max. zsh%55//=.00083; sin. vag. max. zziq9//=
00025.
Remarks.—\ have examined a great number of filaments and have
nowhere seen anything like a heterocyst. The specimens examined had
been preserved in solution of acetate of alumina, but I do not think the
salt had changed materially their color.
Hab. Texas. Prof. Ravenel.
cen. TOLYPOTHRIX.
T. pistorTA. (Miiller.) Ktz. Var. ?
In aquario. Dr. Fricke.
Remarks.—The specimens which have been identified as T. distorta,
agree well with the descriptions of that species, except in the fact that the
heterocysts are often 4-seriate and that they are rather parallelogram-
matic than subglobose, as well as in the circumstance that the sheaths
are close. I do not think the differences are sufficient to distinguish
species.
Wood.] 1 32 [June 18,
FAM. SIROSIPHONEACEAE.
GEuN. SIROSIPHON.
S.. PULVINATUS. Bred.
Hab. In rupibus irroratis prope Philadelphia.
Ss. GUTTULA. Sp. Nov.
S. in maculis subnigris, parvis, tenuibus, plerumque rotundatis, inter-
dum enormibus, dispositum ; trichomatibus arcte intertextis, ramossis-
simis, rigidis, inaequalibus, subcylindricis, nonnihil contortis ; ramulis
abbreviatis vel nonnihil elongatis, apice obtuse rotundatis ; ramulorum
et trichomatum cellulis tri-multiseriatis, plerumque pachydermaticis,.
ferrugineo-fuscis, enormiter globosis, homogeneis; cellulis apicalibus
interdum breve cylindricis, haud articulatis; vaginis sat amplis, luteo-
brunneis vel dilute ferrugineo-brunneis.
Arranged in small, thin black spots, which are generally round,
but sometimes irregular: filaments closely interwoven, very much
branched, rigid, unequal, subcylindrical, somewhat contorted ; branches
abbreviate or somewhat elongate, apex obtusely rounded ; cells of the
trichoma and branches 3 to many seriate, mostly with thick coats, ferru-
ginous-fuscous, irregularly globose, homogeneous ; apical cells sometimes
shortly cylindrical, not articulate, sheaths ample, yellowish brown.
Diam. max. trich. cum vag. -4,//=.0018.
Hab. South Carolina, ad Taxodium distichon corticem. Prof. Ra-
venel.
S. ACERVATUS. Sp. Nov.
S. in guttulis minutissimis, subcrustaceis, nigris, in strato sub-
continuo saepe aggregatis; trichomatibus parvis et brevibus, rigidis,
admodum inaequalibus, prostratis, tuberculis, arcte et dense ramos-
sissimis, viridibus aut aureis aut brunneis; ramulis brevibus, pler-
umque haud ramulosis, erectis aut ascendentibus, saepe abbreviatis,
papilliformibus, obtusis, saepe lateraliter connatis; cellularum serie in
trichomatibus multiplici in ramulis plerumque simplici ; cellulis subglo-:
bosis vel subangularibus, viridibus, haud distincte granulosis, in ramu-
lorum apice saepe breve cylindricis et interdum obsolete articulatis ;
vaginis aureis, nonnihil hyalinis.
Arranged in drops, which are very minute, subcrustaceous, black,
and frequently aggregate into a subcontinuous stratum ; filaments small
and short, prostrate, rigid, somewhat unequal, tuberculate, densely and
closely branched, green or golden or brown ; branches short, for the most
part not branched, erect or ascending, frequently abbreviate, papiliform,
obtuse; series of cell multiple in trichoma, mostly simple in the
branches; cells subglobose or subangular, green, not distinctly granu-
late, in the apices of the branches frequently shortly cylindrical and
sometimes obsoletely articulate ; sheaths golden, somewhat hyaline.
Hab. South Carolina, ad corticem (Ilex opaca). Prof. H. W. Ra-
venel.
1369.] 133 [Wood.
Diam. trich. cum. vag. max. 34, Ram. 7255 - zs5o0
Remarks.—This species is closely allied to §. coraloides, but I think is
distinct from it.
S. Lienrcota. Sp. Nov.
S. strato expanso, tomentoso, atro; trichomatibus ramossissimis,
arcte intertextis; ramulis abbreviatis vel elongatis, subrectis aut varie
curvatis, apicibus obtuse rotundatis vel subacuminatis ; trichomatum et
ramulorum cellulis uni vel biseriatis, plerumque pachydermaticis, dilute vel
saturate aerugineis, enormibus, plerumque homogeneis ; cellulis termi-
nalibus elongatis, cylindricis, saepius nonnihil oscillatorium modo articu-
latis, granulosis ; vaginis sat amplis, haud achrois, vel luteo-brunneis vel
fuscentibus vel ferrugineis.
Occurring in an expanded, tomentose, black stratum ; filaments very
much branched, closely interwoven, branches abbreviate or elongate,
nearly straight or variously curved, their apices obtusely rounded or sub-
acuminate ; cells 1-2 seriate, mostly thick walled, light or deep aerugin-
ous, irregular, mostly homogeneous ; terminal cells elongate, cylindrical,
frequently articulate somewhat like an oscillatoria, granulate ; sheaths
somewhat ample, not transparent, light brown, fuscous or ferruginous.
Diam. trich. cum vag. max. 7-4y//—.00066”.
Hab. South Carolina ; in lignis fabrefactis. Prof. H. W. Ravenel.
Ss. NEGLECTUS. Sp. Nov.
-$. immersus ; trichomatibus subsolitariis, longis usque ad lineas quatuor,
cylindricis, ramossissimis; ramulis singulis; cytioplasmate interdum
aerugineo, plerumque aureo-brunneo; cellulis uniseriatis rarissime bi-
seriatis, subglobosis, interdum sejunctis sed plerumque arcte connectis
et moniliformibus, modo confluentibus, haud distincte pachydermaticis ;
cellulis terminalibus elongato-cylindricis, saepe nonnihil oscilatorium
modo articulatis ; cellulis interstitialibus nullis; vaginis achrois, inter-
dum brunneis, plerumque coloris expertibus.
5. immersed, subsolitary, attaining a length of 4 lines, cylindrical, very
much branched; branches single ; cytioplasm aeruginous, mostly yellow-
ish brown; cells uniseriate, very rarely biseriate, subglobose, sometimes
separate but more frequently closely united and moniliform ; terminal cell
an elongated cylinder, often articulate somewhat like an oscillatoria;
interstitial cells wanting ; sheaths transparent, sometimes brown, mostly
colorless.
Remarks.—This species is perhaps too close to S. crameri, but appears
to differ from it very markedly in habit and place of growth.
Diam. trich. cum. vag. 545 = .0017; sine. vag. zy457/
Hab. In stagnis prope Camden, New Jersey.
Ss. PELLUCIDULUS. Sp Nov.
S. immersus ; trichomatibus ramossissimis, solitariis vel subsolitariis ;
ramis plerumque unilateralibus, ramulosis; ramulorum apicibus late
rotundatis, haud attenuatis; cellulis in seriebus simplicibus dispositis, in
Wood.) 134 [June 18,
trichomatibus nonnihil rotundatis, in ramulis saepe angularibus, plerum-
que compressis, diametro aequalibus—4 plo brevioribus, terminalibus
cylindricis, obscure articulatis ; cellulis interstitialibus nullis ; vaginis
arctis, hyalinis, haud lamellosis ; cytioplasmate aerugineo vel brunneo,
minute granulato.
S. immersed ; filaments very much branched, solitary or subsolitary ;
branches mostly unilateral, branched ; apices of the branches not atten-
uate, broadly rounded ; cells disposed in a simple series, in the trichoma
somewhat rounded, in the branches frequently angular, mostly com-
pressed, equal to 4 times shorter than the diameter ; terminal cell cylindri-
cal, obscurely articulate ; interstitial cells none; sheath close, hyaline,
not lamellate ; cytioplasm aeruginous or brown, minutely granulate.
Diam. trich. cum vag. 73°5,//=.00106” ; sine vag. .0008’’-
Hab: In stagnis, prope Hibernia Florida. Mr. Wm. Canby.
S. SCYTENEMATOIDES. Sp. Nov.
S. strato submembranaceo, nigro-viride, saepe interrupto, cum super-
ficie inaequale ; trichomatibus saepe arcte intricatis, flexuosis aut varie
curvatis,. haud rigidis, plerumque vix ramosis; cellulis uniseriatis,
interdum interruptis, arctis, irregulare quadrangulis, diametro sub-
aequalibus aut 1-3 plo brevioribus, haud distincte granulatis, caeruleo-
viridibus ; vaginis amplis, haud distincte lamellosis, superficie enormiter
corrugatis et hirtis, achrois, plerumque coloris expertibus interdum
dilute brunneis.
S. In a submembranaceous, blackish green, frequently interrupted -
stratum, with an uneven surface; filaments often closely intricate, flexuous
or variously curved, not rigid, mostly sparsely branched ; cells uniseriate,
sometimes interrupted, close, irregularly quadrangular, about equal in
length to their diameter, or about 1-3 times shorter, not distinctly gran-
ulate, bluish green ; sheaths ample, not distinctly lamellate, their surface
rough and corrugate, transparent, mostly colorless, sometimes light
brown.
Diam. sine. vag. max. 73'55//=.00066”’; cum vag. max. 7}}9//=.0013”.
CLASS CHLOROPHYLLOPHYCEAE.
FAM. PALMELLACEAE.
GEN. PALMELLA.
P. JESENII. Sp. Nov.
P. thallo indefinite expanso, initio dilute aut laete viride, molle, pellu-
cidulo; aetate provecta firmo, tuberculoso, saturate olivaceo-viride ;
cellulis globosis vel ellipticis, —in thalli aetate immaturo, plerumque singulis
aut geminis, saepe distantibus,—in aetate provecta saepe in familias con-
nexis, plerumque confertis ; tegumentis in thalli aetate immaturo plerum-
que diffluentibus, aetate provecta plerumque distinctis.
Thallus indefinitely expanded, in the beginning soft and pellucid, after-
1809.] 135 [Wood.
wards firm, tubercular, deep olive green: cells globose or elliptical ; in
the immature thallus, single or geminate, frequently scattered; in the
mature thallus often closely conjoined into families, mostly crowded ; in
the young thallus the teguments of the cells are mostly diffluent, after-
wards distinct.
Diam. cell. glob. max. 32/57’/=.00028 ; cell. oblong. long. max. 33'59/’
=.0004.
GEN. TETRASPORA.
T. LUBRICA. (Roth) Ag.
In aquis limpidis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. RHAPHIDIUM.
R. POLYMORPHUM. Fresen.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
FAM. PROTOCOCCACEAE.
GEN. SCENESDESMUS.
s. acutTus. Meyen.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
Ss. PoLYMORPHUS. Sp. Nov.
S. cellulis fusiformibus, aut ovalibus aut ellipticis aut globosis, sin-
gulis aut 2-8 conjunctis, plerumque utroque polo aculeo unico, interdum
aculeis duobus, instructis: apicibus obtusis, acutis, vel acutissimis ;
aculeis gracillimis, rectis, modice elongatis, inclinatis.
S. cells fusiform, or oval, or elliptic, or globose, single or 2-7 con-
joined, furnished in most cases with a single spine, sometimes 2, at each
end ; ends obtuse, acute or very acute; spines exceedingly slender and
acute, straight, moderately long, inclined.
Diam. y59//—750/; plerumque zy457/’-
Hab. In aquis quietis prope Camden, New Jersey.
GEN. HYDRODICTYION.
H. UTRICULATUM. Roth.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. PEDIASTRUM.
B. BORYANUM. (Turpin.) Mengh.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—R
Wood.] 1 36 June 18
FAM. DESMIDIEFEAE.*
cen. PALMOGLOEBA.
P. CLEPSYDRA. Wood.
P. saxicola et bryophila, in gelatina achroa interdum dilute viride
nidulans ; cellulis cylindricis, cum polis obtuse truncato-rotundatis, diam-
etro 2-3 plo longioribus ; lamina chlorophyllacea axili, plerumque indis-
tincte, saepe nulla; plasmate dilute viride; nucleo plerumque distincto ;
zygosporis subfuscis aut subglobosis aut enormiter in clepsydre forma ;
membrana externa enormiter excavata et sulcata.
P. living on rocks and mosses, swimming in a transparent, sometimes
light green jelly; cells obtusely truncated, rounded at the ends, 2-3
times longer than broad ; chlorophyll lamina axillary, mostly indistinct,
often wanting; endochrome light green; nucleus generally distinct ;
zygospore subfuscous, either subglobose or of an irregular form,
somewhat resembling that of an hour-glass; external coat irregularly
excavated and sulcate.
Diam. ;33,/’.
Hab. In rupibus et in muscis irroratis ad Chelten Hills, prope Phila-
delphia.
GEN. CLOSTERIUM.
C. EHRENBERGI. Menegi.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
C. DIANAE. Hhrod.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
Cc. LUNULA.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
C. ROSTRATUM. EHhrb.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia,
C. SETACEUM. Hhrb.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
C. LINEATUM. Hhrb.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
C. LEIBLEINII. tz.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
C. PARVULUM. WNaeg.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
c. ACEROSUM. (Schrank.) Hhrb.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
*T have paid so little attention to the Desmids that I intended at first to omit the family, but
afterwards thought best to mention the few I have identified.
137 [Wood.
1869.]
GEN. TETMEMORUS.
T. GRANULATUS. (Bréb.) Raifs.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
GEN. PLEUROTAENIUM.
P. TRABECULA. (Hhrb.) Naeg.
Hab. Prove Philadelphia.
GEN. SPIROTAENIA.
8. BRYOPHILA. (Bréb.) Rabenhorst.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
cEN. MICRASTERIAS.
M. TRUNCATA. (Corda.) Brib.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
M. JENNERI. Ralfs.
GEN. STAURASTRUM.
S. PUNCTUALATUM. Bréb.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
GEN. DIDYMOPRIUM.
DR. GREVILI. FKéz.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
GEN. COSMARIUM.
C. CUCUMIS.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
c. BOoTRYTIS. (Bory.) Menegh.
Hab. Prope Philadelphia.
FAM. ZYGNEMACEAE.
Remarks.—In this family I only enumerate such species as Ihave found
in fruit, since there can be no certain identification of sterile plants. My
list | am well satisfied, however, by no means completely represents the
fauna of the neighborhood of Philadelphia.
GEN. RHYNCONEMA.
R. ELONGATA, Sp. Nov.
R. articulis vegetativis diametro 7-20 plo longioribus ; articulis spori-
feris multo brevioribus, valde tumidis ; cytiodermate utroque fine pro-
tense et replicato ; fascia unica, laxissime spirali ; anfractibus plerumque 7;
sporis ellipticis, diametro 1-23 plo longioribus.
Sterile joints 7-20 times longer than broad; fertile joints much
Wood.] 138 [June 18,
shorter, greatly swollen; cell wall at each end produced or folded in ;
chlorophyll filament 1, spiral lax ; turns mostly 7; spores elliptical, 2-24
times longer than broad.
Diam. Spor. -,5 = .00106. Artic. vegetat. -=55 .0005.
Hab. In aquis limpidis prope Philadelphia.
R. PULCHELLA. Sp. Nov.
R. articulis sterilibus diametro 2-3 plo longioribus ; sporiferis nonni-
hil tumidis; fascia unica; anfractibus 3-4; sporis ellipticis, diametro
fere duplo longioribus ; cytiodermate utroque fine protense et replicato.
Sterile joints 2-3 times longer than broad; fertile joints somewhat
swollen; chlorophyll band one; turns of spiral 3-4; spores elliptical,
almost twice as long as broad; cell wall at each end produced or
folded in.
Diam. Artic. Steril. 455 - 757 = -00033 - .0013. Spar. 2,5 -— 7495
= .0012 .00133.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. SPIROGYRA.
8. WEBERI. tz.
Remarks.—The American form agrees pretty well with the European,
but is however, larger, its cells also a attain a greater proportionate
length, and their chlorophyll bands have more turns. The lower
limits of the American form are, however, so overlapped by the upper
limits of the European, that it seems to me they must be considered
identical.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
s. DUBIA. Kitz.
Remarks.—I have never seen the sporangial cell swollen in American
specimens, in other respects the agreement is complete.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
S. QUININA. (Ag) Kéz.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
S. RIVULARIS. (Hassall), Rabenhorst.
Hab. In rivulis prope Hibernia, Florida. Mr. Wm. Canby.
S. LONGATA. (Vauch), Ktz.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
s. INSIGNIS. (Hassall), Itz.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
s. PROTECTA. Sp. Nov.
S. saturate viridis, lubrica ; articulis sterilibus diametro 6 plo longiori-
bus; sporiferis vix tumidis; cytiodermate in cellule utroque fine pro-
tense et replicato ; fascia unica; anfractibus 6; sporis oblongis vel ellip-
ticis : membrano crassissimo.
S. Deep green, slippery ; sterile joints 6 times longer than broad ; fer-
1869. ] 139 [Wood.
tile cells scarcely swollen; cell wall folded in at the ends; chlorophyll
band single ; turns 6 ; spores oblong or elliptical, spore wall very thick.
Diam. Rete steril. tig! =.00146 ; spor. lat. -405//—-42,//—.00133—.0016
long. -235—0033.
Ss. ORASSA. Kitz.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
s. DILUTA. Sp. Nov.
S. articulis sterilibus diametro subzqualibus ad duplo longioribus ;
fructiferis haud tumidis ; fasciis spiralibus 5, angustissimis, laxis, valde
nodosis; anfractibus plerumque 3, interdum 1; zygosporis sparsis, late
ellipticis vel ovatis aut globosis; cytiodermate modice teuue, in utroque
fine nec protenso nec replicato.
8. Sterile joints about as long as broad to twice longer, fertile cells not
swollen; chlorophyll bands 5, exceedingly narrow, lax, strongly nodose ;
turns mostly 3, sometimes 1 ; zygospores few, broadly elliptical, ovate or
globose ; cell wall moderately thin, not infolded at the ends.
Diam. Artic. steril. -#2,//=.008”.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
S. PARVISPORA. Sp. Nov.
S. articulis sterilibus diametro 2-4 plo longioribus ; fructiferis haud
tumidis, diametro 1-24 plo longioribus; fasciis spiralibus 4, angustis,
nodosis, anfractibus pluribus ; zygosporis parvissimis, ellipticis, diametro
4-2 plo longioribus; cytiodermate utroque fine nec protenso, nec
replicate.
Sterile joints 2-4 times longer than broad; fertile not tumid, 1-23
times longer than broad; chlorophyll bands i narrow, nodose ; turns
many ; zygospores very small, elliptical, 14-2 times longer than broad ;
cell wall not infolded at the end.
Diam. Art. Steril ~23,//=.003 spor. diam. transv. 7435//-744)//—.002-
0023; long 723,//-738,5//=
Hab. In stagnis, Hibernia, Florida. Mr. Wm. Canby. f
GEN. ZYGNEMA.
Z. INSIGNIS. (Hassall), Ktz.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. SIROGONIUM.
S. RETROVERSUM. Sp. Novo
8. articulis sterilibus diametro 7-15 plo longioribus ; fasciis spiralibus 1,
rare 2, latis, granulatis; anfractibus 1-9 ; articulis fertilibus valde tu-
midis, retroversis, copulatione genuflexa et sine tubo connexivo ; cytio-
dermate nonnihil crasso, utroque fine protenso vel replicato; sporis
ellipticis.
Sterile joints 7-15 times longer than broad ; chloroplyll band 1, rarely
2, broad, granulate ; turns 1-9; fertile article very tumid, retroverted ;
Wood.] 140 [June 18,
union of cells without connecting tubes, genuflexuous; cytioderm
somewhat thick, infolded at the ends; spores elliptical.
Diam. cell. steril. --%5//=.0012.
GEN. MESOCARPUS.
M. SCALARIS. Hassal.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
ORD. SIPHOPHYCEAE.
FAM. HYDROGASTREZA.
GEN. HYDROGASTRUM.
H. GRANULATUM. (Linn). Disv.
Hab. In stagnis exsiccatis, Delaware. Dr. I. F. Billings.
FAM. VAUCHERIACE.
GEN. VAUCHERIA.
Vv. GEMINATA. (Vauch). De C.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
Vv. POLYMORPHA. Sp. Nov.
V. in cespites dense intricata ; thallo capillari, tenui; antheridia cor-
niculata ex ramuli lateralis apice formatis; ramulis fertilibus interdum
et oogoniis et antheridiis instructis, interdum antheridiis solum ; oogoniis
plerumque geminis, interdum singulis, globosis vel ovatis, sszepe brevi-
rostratis, plerumque distincte pedunculatis sed rarius sessilibus ; oosporis
enormiter subglobosis vel ovatis; sporodermate achroo e stratis duobus
composito.
Ceespitose ; thallus hair like, thin ; antheridia corniculate, formed of
the apex of lateral branches ; fertile branches sometimes furnished both
with oogonia and antheridia, sometimes with antheridia alone ; oogonia
sometimes single but mostly in pairs, occasionally shortly rostrate, gen-
erally distinctly pedunculate but sometimes sessile ; oospores irregularly
subglobose or ovate, surrounded by a transparent double spore coat.
Hab. In aquis prope ‘‘ Buffalo Bayou,’’ Louisiana. Prof. H. W.
Ravenel.
Vv. SERICEA. Lyngd.
Hab. In stagnis et humis irroratis prope Philadelphia.
v. AVERSA. Hassal.
Remarks.—I have found this species in the neighborhood of Philadel-
phia, if indeed it be a species. Prof. Rabenhorst thinks it probably
merely a form of the preceeding and all the specimens I have seen
appeared to run into it.
1869.] 141
[ Wood.
ORD. NEMATOPHYCEAE.
FAM. ULVACEAE.
GEN. SCHIZOMERIS.
S. LEIBLEINII. <Ktz.?
See Proc. Biolog. and Microsc. Department, Ac. Nat. Sc. 1868, p. 12.
FAM. OEDOGONIACEAE.
0. MIRABILE. Sp. Nov.
O. gynandrum, rare setigerum ; articulis diametro 2-8 plo longiori-
bus; oogoniis plerumque singulis, rare geminis, nonnihil ovatis, infra
latis sed supra contractis et medio tumidis; poris lateralibus duobus
supra medium positis; oosporis aut late ovalibus aut subglobosis ;
sporodermate haud signato; antheridiis plerumque bicellularibus, inter-
dum tricellularibus, plerumque in filo vegetativo infra oogonium aut in
oogonio insidentibus; spermatozoideis singulis et geminis.
O. gynandrous, rarely setigerous; articles 2-8 times longer than
broad; oosporangia mostly single, rarely geminate, subovate, in the lower
portion broad, in the middle swollen, in upper part contracted ; the 2 lat-
eral pores situated above the middle ; oospore subglobose or broadly ovate ;
it coats without markings; antheridia generally bicellular, sometimes
tricellular, numerous, placed generally upon the female filament either
upon or below the oosporangia.
Diam. Artic. veget. -255//—74$5//—. 0004-0017. Spor. 7485//-,295//=.0024/"
—0027/".
H. ab. In rivulis quietis prope Philadelphia.
o. HUNTII. Wood. (American Naturalist.)
Hab. In aquario meo.
0. INEQUALE. Sp. Nov.
O. dioicum; cellula basali biloba; plantis femines quam plantis
masculis permulto majoribus; oogoniis enormiter globosis vel subovoideis,
poro laterale supra medium posito instructis ; oosporis forma eadem, sed
paulo minoribus.
O. dioecious, basal cell bilobate; feminine plant very much larger
than the male plant; oosporangium irregularly globose or subovoidal,
opening by a lateral pore above the middle ; resting spores of the same
form as the sporangium but a little smaller.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
0. MULTISPORUM. Sp. Nov.
O. gynandrum; oogoniis singulis, vel binis vel ternis continuis,
globosis ; pore laterale distale instructis ; oosporis globosis, oogonii lumen
replentibus; antheridiis plerumque pluribus planta feminea insidentibus,
cellula inferiore multo majore.
O. gynandrous: oosporangia single or bi or triseriate, globose, about
Wood.] 142 [June 18,
the same size as the sporangial cavity; antheridia bi or tricellular,
curved, with the lower cell much the largest, generally adhering in con-
siderable numbers to all parts of the female plant.
Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia.
GENUS BULBOCHAETE.
B. CANBYII. Sp. Nov.
B. permagna ad .035/’ longa, sparse ramosa; articulis sterilibus dia-
metro 2-8 plo longioribus : oogoniis lateralibus vel in ramulorum apicem
positis, transverse enormiter ovalibus; oosporis, transverse enormiter
ovalibus, plerumque nonnihil triangularibus, oogonii lumen replentibus ;
sporodermate crasso, haud costato, enormiter punctato ; antheridiis bicel-
lularibus.
B. very large, attaining a length or more than one-third an inch,
sparsely branched ; sterile joints 2 to 8 times longer than broad ; oospor-
angia lateral or placed upon the ends of branches, irregularly trans-
versely oval ; oospores of a similar shape often a little triangular, filling
the cavity of the sporangium ; spore coat thick, not costate but irregu-
larly punctate.
Diam. cell. steril. -,5//—=45//—-00066-001. Spor. transv. -47,//=.00226.
Hab. In aquis quietis prope Hibernia, Florida, Mr. William Canby.
Remarks.—It affords me great pleasure to dedicate this very handsome
species to Mr. William Canby, as an acknowledgment of favors received,
and as a testimony of respect and high personal regard for him as a man,
and as being among the foremost students of American phanerogamic
botany.
B. DuMOoSsA. Sp. Nov.
B. articulis diametro 13-2 plo longioribus; oogoniis plerumque in
ramorum brevissimorum apicibus positis sed interdum lateralibus,
plerumque setam terminalem gerentibus ; oosporis enormiter ovalibus
aut ovatis, nonnihil indistincte longitudinaliter oblique subarcte striatis 5
antheridiis bicellularibus, stipite instructis, cellula basale medio tumida,
supra saepe contracta.
Joints 14-2 times longer than broad : oosporangia generally placed upon
the ends of short branches but sometimes lateral, mostly carrying a ter-
minal seta ; resting spores irregularly oyal or ovate, somewhat indistinctly
obliquely longitudinally and rather closely striate ; antheridia bicellular,
furnished with a little stipe, their basal cell tumid in the middle, fre-
quently contracted above.
Hab. In aquario meo.
B. IGNoTA. Sp. Nov.
B. sparse ramosa, elongata ; articulis diametro max. (7+59/’=.0066) 13—
24 plo longioribus ; oogoniis interdum lateralibus et sessibilius, interdum
inter ramulorum cellulas vegetativas positis, dissepimento nullo; oosporis
ovalibus, longitudinaliter nonnihil oblique et distante costatis, sporo-
dermate nonnihil crasso; antheridiis 3-4 cellularibus, stipitatis.
1869.] 143 [Wood,
B. sparsely branched, elongate with the joints 13-25 times longer
than broad (;-5,//=.0066) ; oosporangia sometimes lateral and sessile,
sometimes placed upon the apex of a branch, sometimes situated
in the length of the branches between their cells ; the empty cell which
supports them without dissepiment ; oospores oval, filling closely the
cavity of the spore case, longitudinally somewhat obliquely and distantly
costate ; spore coat rather thick ; antheridia 3-4 celled, scarcely stipate.
Hab. In aquis quietis prope Philadelphia.
FAM. CHAETOPHORACEAE.
GEN. CHAETOPHORA.
c. PpistForMis (Roth) Ag.
Hab. In stagnis plantas, &c., adhaereus prope. Philadelphia.
GEN. DRAPARNALDIA.
D. PLUMOSA. (Vauch.) Ag.
Hab. In aquis quietis prope Philadelphia.
D. GLOMERATA. (Vauch.) Ag.
Hab. In rivulis et stagnis et aquis limpidis quietis prope Philadelphia.
D. BILLINGsII. Sp. Nov.
D. valde gelatinosa; filis et ramis primariis achrois ad ,3}5/’ crassis,
sparsissime ramosis, articulis diametro 2-6 plo longioribus, saepe medio
valde tumidis; fasciis chlorophyllis dilute viridibus, saepe nullis aut
subnullis ; ramulorum fasciculis distantibus, late ovalibus vel late trian-
gularibus, alternantibus vel oppositis vel triplo verticellatis, sparse
ramosis, patentissimis ; ramulis cum pila longissima robusta terminate ;
oosporis globosis, moniliforme conjunctis ; sporodermate crasso.
Frond very gelatinous, filament and primary branches attaining a diam-
eter of ;},/’, very sparsely branched, their articles 2-6 times longer than
broad, often very much swollen in the middle ; chrorophyll band light
green, frequently almost or entirely wanting; fascicles of branches
distant, broadly oval or triangular, alternate, opposite or in whoris of
three, very open; ultimate branchlets terminating in a long, robust,
hyaline hair; resting spores globose, with thick walls, arranged in long
moniliform sometimes branched filaments.
Remarks.—I dedicate this very beautiful species to Dr. J. 8. Billings,
U.S. A., to whom I am under the greatest obligations for aid in the
prosecution of this research, and whom I have ever found to unite the
greatest scientific liberality to a strong enthusiasm for and able prosecu-
tion of the study of these lower vegetable forms.
Hab. In aquis limpidis quietis prope Philadelphia.
GEN. APHANOCHAETE.
A. REPENS. A. Braun.
Hab. In algiis confervaceis prope Philadelphia.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—S .
Wood.] 144 [June 18,
CLASS RHODOPHYCEAE.
FAM. PORPHYRACEAE.
GEN. PORPHYRIDIUM.
P. CRUENTUM. (Ag) Naeg.
Remarks.—A small piece of bone was sent me by my friend, Dr. Bil-
lings, on which were a few specks of this little organism. The bone had
been picked up on Goyernor’s Island, New York Harbor, and it is very
possible that it was a fresh arrival from Europe. I have never met with
traces of the species elsewhere.
P. MAGNIFICUM. Sp. Nov.
P. cellulis globosis vel subglobosis, rare nonnihil polygonis; cytio-
plasmate purpureo, granulato ; cytiodermate crasso, haud lamelloso.
Cells globose or subglobose, rarely somewhat polygonal ; endochrome
purple, granulate ; cell wall thick, not laminate.
Dram. Cell cum. tegum. sz85o-zde50° «= Tegum. 3gtu0-is000-
Hab. In terra humida, Texas. Prof. Ravenel.
FAM. CHANTRANSIACEAE.
GEN. CHANTRANSIA.
cC. Expansa. Sp. Nov.
C. caespitosa, in lapide stratum saturate violaceo-purpureum lubri-
cum, indefinite expansum formans; filis purpureis, modice ramosis, fere
2 lineas longis et ramis plerumque strictis et rectis, saepe elongatis ;
ramulis fertilibus brevibus, ascendentibus ; articulis diametro 3-8 plo lon-
gioribus, extremis obtusis; polysporis in ramellis lateralibus racemosim
et confertim cumulatis, ovalibus vel nonnihil obovatis.
Caespitose, forming a dark purple, slippery, indefinite stratum on
-stones; filaments purple, moderately branched, almost 2 lines long,
together with the branches strict and straight, often elongate ; infertile
branches sometimes very few, sometimes very numerous ; fertile branches
short, ascending ; joints 3-8 times as long as their diameter, the final
articles obtusely rounded: polyspores racemose, crowded on the fertile
branches, oval or somewhat ovate.
Diam. Fil. ;457//=.0004’’, Spor. transv. 3745,//=.00027 long.54,,= .0004”
Remarks.—\ formerly referred this species very doubtfully to C. viola-
cea Ktz., but am now convinced that it is distinct. Its size, mode of
growth, and habit all are very different from those of that species.
Hab. In rivulis prope Philadelphia.
Whilst the above has been going through the press I have found float-
ing on a ‘‘brick pond” the following new nostochaceous plant.
1869.] 1 45 [Wood,
ANABAENA GIGANTEA. Sp. Nov.
A. thallo nullo, trichomatibus singulis et numeroso-consociatis, natan-
tibus, rectis, in aetate juveni spiraliter convolutis ; articulis plerumque
subglobosis, arcte connexis, granulosis; cellulis perdurantibus interjectis,
articulis vegetativis subaequalibus utroque polo punctiforme incrassatis,
subsphaericis ; sporis subsphaericis.
Thallus wanting; filaments occurring floating singly on water or in
great numbers, str mone but in the young state often spirally convolnte ;
articles mostly subglobose, closely connected, granular, heterocysts sub-
sphaerical, interstitial, a very little larger than the vegetative cells,
thickened at each end in a punctiform manner; spore subsphaerical.
Diam. Artic vegetat. max Fa050 Heterocysts 3j55=-0005.
Sige at. 12000 Long. zo50
With the above aaanaena was a Caelosphaerium, which
appears to be the C. dubiwm Grun. In no instance, however, was the
frond of nearly so great size as the European form is said to attain to.
Thave also recently identified the following plants, new to this continent.
|
So
S&S
=
GEN. CLADOPHORA.
C. BRACHYSTELECHA. Radbenh.
Hab. In aquis prope Philadelphia.
c. FRACTA. Dillw.
Hab. In flumine Schuylkill.
Stated Meeting, July 16, 1869.
Present, eight members.
Mr. Fraxey, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from John
Phillips, dated Oxford, England, June 12, 1869.
A photograph for the Album was received from J. H.C.
Coffin, of the National Observatory, Washington, D. C.
Letters of invoice and acknowledgement were received from
the Royal Library at Munich, the Royal Academies at Pesth
and Brussels, and from Mr. 8. A. Green, Librarian of the
Massachusetts Historical Society.
A letter was received from Gen. Humphreys, in reply to
146
the communication of the Secretaries respecting the publica- ~
tion of geological surveys in the. West.
Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Societies and Academies of Tasmania, Hungary, Prussia, Ba-
varia and Belgium, the Societies at Moscow, Gorlitz, Bremen,
Penzance and Liverpool, the Observatories at Munich, Brus-
sels, Washington and Cincinnati, the Geological Societies at
Berlin and London, the Geographical Societies at Paris and
London, M. Barrande, M. Zantedeschi, the Astronomical and
Meteorological Societies at London, the Boston Public Library,
Massachusetts Historical Society, Peabody Museum and Har-
vard College, the Franklin Institute, the Peabody Institute,
the Bureau of Refugees and War Office at Washington, and
the Wisconsin Historical Society. A large number of Edu-
cational volumes and pamphlets were received in exchange
from the Massachusetts Historical Society.
The report of the Committee on Dr. Horn’s paper was read
and accepted, and the paper referred to the Publication Com-
mittee, with instructions to publish in the Transactions.
The death of Dr. C. D. Meigs, at his residence in Media,
Pa., June 28, in the 78th year of his age, was announced by
Dr. Rushenberger, and on motion the President of the Society
was requested to nominate a member to prepare an obituary
notice of the deceased.
Prof. Cope exhibited drawings of the fossil remains of a large
Cretaceous Mosasauroid. He offered also for the acceptance
of the Society six 8vo lithographic plates already prepared
on stone to illustrate two papers of fossils found in Virginian
eaves. On motion the plates were accepted, and the Secreta-
taries directed to have the requisite number of impressions
taken to illustrate the two papers, for the next number of the
Proceedings.
~ On motion the balloting for nominations 626—637 was
postponed until October, on account of the small number of
members present.
Pending nominations 638, 639, 640 were read, and the
Society was adjourned.
Are
July 16, 1869.] 14 ( (Cope.
SEVENTH CONTRIBUTION TO THE HERPETOLOGY OF
TROPICAL AMERICA.
By Epwarp D. Corer.
{ Read before the American Philosophical Society, July 16, 1869.]
HYDROMEDUSA TECTIFERA, Cope, sp. nov.
Char. The anterior portion of the carapace depressed and prolonged ;
the first vertebral scutum nearly twice as long as wide ; the nuchal scu-
tum narrow transverse, twice as wide as the first vertebral ; four times
as wide as long. Light brown, with slightly radiating or transverse
darker brown spots on the costal plates. Below bright yellow.
Description. Carapace more elevated at the anterior vertebral bone
than above the pelvis, then descending steeply, and prolonged roof-like
to the nuchal margin. Posteriorly rather abruptly decurved to oppo-
site the lowest plane of the sternum, and considerably below the strongly
recurved points of the posterior lobe of the same. Two posterior verte-
brals and each posterior costal with a projection at the posterior part.
Margin a little elevated and turned out above the hinder limbs. The
sides descend steeply, and the superior plane is broad outside of the
scapule. Lateral marginals not prominent, being a ridge directed rather
upwards, which is bounded above by a strong groove. Fine median mar-
ginals not united to disc throughout, but by costal processes. The first
three marginal bones very much wider than long, the second nearly twice
as wide. The nuchal marginal very large, as long as wide. ‘Three mar-
ginal bones of the bridge with an undulate ridge along their upper
margin, the third with the ridge running diagonally across it, descending
behind.
Two last pairs of costal bones united on the median line. Last verte-
bral scutum of an urceolate form, much narrower at its point of contact
with the penultimate. The latter the narrowest of the series. Penulti-
mate marginal scutum extending nearly to the middle of the last verte-
bral. Second marginal scutum much longer than wide, the first, twice
as long as wide. First costal longer than wide.
Sternum without fontanelle or intersternal elements, the anterior
lobe both longer and wider than the posterior. The gular scuta small,
the humeral and femoral each considerably wider than the pectoral.
No axillary or inguinal plates, bridge short; claws strong. Posterior
lobes with a deep rounded emargination.
Measurements.
In. Lin.
Henetlicarapacel (oversaneh)-y 1h). <.rjspsiet ke st ere 11 4
ID NaS Bob coco He Dicom teem ele Mere aocare eran ie 3 1
hen othe stem Umiey- eee fon iuleeesie ap aisrauueleiNe aveipSelees> « 8 4
Motalawadthpbelowereadscee ee eee eae 6 2
Wenoth bridge. sa 4. 1- Beets Me eae me cites 1 8
a6 HEMET (GUANGING))o5600e000000n0bans0endsaN0 2 4
a Lill} hose scree. sol Serica mine teirvatn erase oe tia cer 2 5
ie LOC Gs © ORIN Cd LO CRE ONS, HOH EELS AES I Amini ae 23
Upper surface of limbs dark brown.
Cope.] 148 [July 16,
Habitat. This turtle occurs in some of the tributaries of the Parana
or Uraguay rivers, either in the Argentine Confederation or the Banda
Oriental, but in which, I do not know. My information is derived from
W. W. Morgan, M. D., of Philadelphia, who resided many years in
Monte Video, where he obtained the specimen from a collector.
This species differs from those already known, in the greater extension
forwards and laterally of the anterior margin of the carapace. Jn conse-
quence the forms of the vertebral, nuchal, and marginal plates are ex-
aggerated in form, the first in length, the last two in width.
CHELOPUS RUBIDUS, Cope.
If this genus be regarded as co-extensive with the Geoclemmys of Dr.
Gray, it embraces with the present addition, fourteen species.
Carapace oval, moderately elevated and with obtuse median keel ; mar-
gin entire not recurved. Vertebral plates broader than long, with con-
cave posterior sutures, except the anterior, in which the length is some-
what in excess. Its lateral margins are parallel and the anterior angle is
produced, curtailing the small nuchal. Scuta concentrically grooved,
visible, though obsolete in the old individual. Plastron rather plane,
deeply emarginate behind; very openly in front. Inguinal and axillary
scales very small. Areolz of the scuta a little above and behind their
centres. ‘i
Claws short, toes much united on all the limbs. Soles and palms with
large scales. Forearm with six cross-rows of large scales in front, and
two longitudinal rows on the outer side. A cross series of three across
the carpus behind. Posterior foot club-shaped. Testudo-like, the heel
with three cross rows of shields of 1, 3, 2 respectively, the posterior of the
last two very large, double the next smallest. Rest of the hind limb
small sealed.
Head broad plane above, muzzle and loreal region vertical. Beak ob-
tusely hooked, not emarginate ; alveolar faces without grooves or ridges.
Ground color of body yellow, the limbs and throat shaded and spotted
with red, which is margined with black. The neck above and laterally
is marked with numerous black rings and lines; below with the gular
region it is closely black dotted. Tail very short, even in the males,
yellow, with fine black longitudinal lines above. Limbs with black and
pink dots. A chevron shaped red band extends from the orbits round
the canthus nostralis and muzzle, and another wider and with narrow
black margin between the orbits, with the apex forwards. Two similar
bands extend from the orbits posteriorly to the obscure tympanum, and
two are concentricably arranged on the occiput, the apex of the anterior
being separated as a large red spot. In the male the colors are deeper
and brighter. Carapace yellowish brown, each costal scutum with a hori-
zontally oval black-edged yellow spot in its area, surrounded by yellow
annuli. The young shows: shows that there are two such concentric
annuli. Marginals with alternating longitudinal yellow and black lines
above, brown below. In the young, the vertebrals have a marginal yel-
low anuulus, and median. oval. ring with yellow and black variations.
1869.] * 149
(Cope.
Below, deep brown, the plastron broadly yellow all round. In the young
the yellow extends over the whole plastron ; in the very old the brown is
very narrow medially.
Measurements, (No. 265.)
Greakestmenothy plastromey:)lyyscijicleis-/sy-velley sir- <- (m. .1525
Wadthynvedially (hotall)evvseie tt) arises ee 1128
Greatest length carapace...................--- gS vod UG
Greatest elevation carapace................... “064
JehuaGl lhirnlo wROUN LeNeO>poodaesocooboodsusG5050u0 0538
Fore GS CID OW Ree tisie soy onus cei Beek ‘041
eadtand neck: abOvies es .scce ec sycls oe see Sees th
TWhvichin Meal “leunynorel\bod boeeeusdeupaccvcouce “024
OiROeA OHS 150) Gravel WMVAAIGs Soancoocecsddanou0. “e .0082
Habitat. Tuchitan Tehuantepec, Mexico, discovered by Prof. Francis
Sumichrast. Four specimens, Nos. 264-5-6-7.
This handsome land tortoise appears to approach sufficiently near the
C. callicephalus, Gray (Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1868, 254), of unknown
habitat, to render a comparison proper. That species according to Gray,
has a posteriorly truncate plastron, and a notched beak. The vertebral
scuta are as long as broad, the second and thirdlonger. ‘The chin, throat,
and upper parts of the neck are spotless. We owe this species to our
active correspondent, F. Sumichrast, who since the days of Natterer,
has not been equalled in the thoroughness and extent of his zoological
researches in Tropical America.
CoNIOPHANES PICEIVITTIS, Cope.
Scales in twenty-five longitudinal series, vertex and muzzle in one
plane; upper part of rostral plate prominent, not produced between the
internasals. Latter less than half prefrontals. Prefrontals longer than
wide, decurved to the subquadrate loreal. Postnasal higher than pre-
nasal. Preoculars one or two, postoculars two, superior larger. Super-
ciliaries narrow. Frontal rather wide, with long posterior angle, and
parallel lateral outlines which are little shorter than the anterior. Occipi-
tals elongate, scarcely emarginate behind. Superior labials eight, fourth
and fifth entering orbit. Sixth higher than long ; seventh largest. Tem-
porals 1-2. Postgeneials shorter than pregeneials. Inferior labials ten.
Gastrosteges 158 two anals; urosteges, 90. Total length, .542 m.; of tail,
.063 m.; from muzzle to canthus oris, .014 m.; interorbital width, .0048 m.
The ground color above and below is white, which is immaculate
below, except on the throat and chin, where it is black dusted. Above
three broad black bands extend from the end of the muzzle to the end of
the tail. The inferior commences on the middle of the third row, and
occupies three and two half rows of scales ; a row and one-half intervenes
between this and a median dorsal band which covers six and one or two
half rows. The ground color on the head is an irregular line from the
muzzle along each canthus and beyond orbit, and the upper labial plates ;
these are thickly dusted with black, the anterior spotted on the edge.
Cope.] 150 [July 16,
From Chihuitan, Tehuantepec, Western Mexico. F. Sumichrast, Coll.
in Mus. Smithsonian, No. 248.
SYMPHIMUS LEUCOSTOMUS, Cope, sp. et gen. nov.
Char. gen. Dentition isodont ; cephalic plates normal except that the
internasals are confluent with the nasal, and the latter with each other
and with the loreal. Preorbitals one. Rostral shield not prominent ;
scales smooth, equal, uniporous ; anal bifid. General form elongate.
This genus differs from Chilomeniscus, to which its technical characters
are similar, about as much as any colubrine serpent does from a burrowing
calamarian. Its form is nearly that of Cyclophis, and it should perhaps
be placed nearest toit in the system. Steindachner’s Bergenia mexicana*
should, it appears to me, be referred to Chilomeniscus Cope, of which it
is the fourth species.
Char. specif. The head narrow, not very distinct, the muzzle acumin-
ate, but obtuse at the extremity. The scales in fifteen longitudinal
series. The form is cylindric and elongate. The tail of medium length
as in Cyclophis. Rostral plate high as wide, scarcely visible from above,
not prominent. Side shield of the muzzle pierced by the nostril and ex-
tending to the preocular ; latter long as high, not reaching the frontal.
Postoculars one on one side, two on the other. Superior labials seven,
third and fourth bounding orbit, all longer than high except the fifth ;
temporals 1-2 large, the anterior bounding the fifth and sixth labials.
The median sutures of the rostronasal and prefrontal plates of equal
length. Frontal longer than wide, with concave sides; superciliaries
wide, occipitals elongate, common suture nearly as long as prefrontals
and frontals together, truncate behind. Inferior labials eight, fifth
largest—narrow ; pregeneials a little longer than postgeneials. The eye
is rather small. Urosteges, 111, gastrosteges.
Color olive gray above, a dorsal band of light brown extending over
three rows of scales to the origin of the tail ; the skin of its median region
being yellow. Throat, chin and superior labials light yellow, a black line
above the superior labials from the second posteriorly. The brown of the
upper regions descends to the lower row of scales at about the twelfth
transverse row; two or three lower rows are pale edged. Belly dirty
white. The dorsal band is posteriorly ill defined, and extends a little be-
yond the vent ; tail brown.
Tn. Lin.
MotalvenathwNoOwe40 eee oener eae ter een 31 B38
Wemortlas taytleseiec sy. 3 ave ce deena epee baler eee eave cn Neue ea 10 9
eno thiaietuswiNow22 (ieee see eel res 6.8
iimterorbivalliswidthy uur apa vee eee reese i dpa
AWitdigh: jamz, Zee at oer RAS ROARS an ee 1.8
VV ir ty Oral G ets yeacielc ole ce tsa aie Meira ce nO ce AAR 1.4
Bree Fog oh tl As Ge RAI Pee A es Bree ALF Oy clean C005 ci cto Gis 7 0
No. 240. From Chihuitan, from the same.
No. 227. From the collections of the Smithsonian Institution from the
province of Oaxaca, Mexico, made by Francis Sumichrast.
* Reised. Oester. Freg. Novara Reptilia, 92 fig.
1869. ] 151 [Cope.
LEPTODIRA MYSTACINA, Cope.
Scales in nineteen longitudinal series. Body very slightly compressed,
head distinct, an elongate oval. Superior labials seven, the second in
contact with the upper and lower preoculars, third and fourth with orbit,
and fifth with occipital excluding the temporal. Fourth, fifth, and
sixth higher than long ; temporals 1-1-2. Oculars 2-2, inferior small in
both sets. Internasals long as wide, prefrontals longer than wide.
Frontal longer than wide, with parallel sides, considerably in contact
with superior ocular. Occipitals oval, scarcely emarginate behind.
Postgeneials longer than than pregeneials. Gastrosteges 187, anal 1-1,
urosteges 70.
The ground color is a dirty white, and is uniform below. Above it,
marked by very broad cross-bands, which extend to the gastrosteges and
are twice as wide as the intervals of ground. There are thirteen to the
vent ; on the posterior half of the body they divide on the vertebral
line, and alternate ; one is thus continuous with two of an opposite side,
leaving the ground in lateral squares. Head above, including occipitals,
a lighter speckled brown above, leaving a white collar. A black band
from eye to angle of mouth, and a second from below the eye to mouth,
parallel to the above, encloses with it a light band ; a black band from
eye to nostril ; lips in front black spotted. Total length 16.25 inches ; of
mouth 7 lines; of tail 4.25.
Habitat. The western region of Mexico, near the Isthmus of Tehuan-
tepec, two specimens (251-261) sent to the Smithsonian Institution by
Francis Sumichrast. This serpent approaches very near the L. pacifica
Cope in details, but differs totally in coloration. The structural differ-
ences are the following :
L. mystacina. LL. pacifica.
Head elongate oval ; Head short wide.
Preocular reaching frontal; Preocular not reaching.
Prefrontals longer than wide; P. f. wider than long.
Fifth labial to occipital ; Fifth labial not to occipital.
TRIMORPHODON, Cope.
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1861, 297.
This peculiar genus, hitherto not found outside of the Mexican, Cen-
tral-American and Sonoran districts, is well illustrated by the collections
received by the Smithsonian Institution. Two species have been hith-
erto known, and I now add three others, as follows :
I. Scales in 21-8 Rows.
Seven (six) superior labials ; three loreals; head black in front with
a white T shaped mark ; back with uniform black rhombs.
T. TAU.
Hight superior labials ; head broad, short; three loreals ; head dark-
brown, with light cross-bar on muzzle and between eyes, and V on oc-
ciput ; body with broad brown annuli; tail one-fifth the total.
T. UPSILON.
A. P. S.— VOL. XI—T
2
Cope.] lo2 [July 16,
Nine superior labials ; head long, swollen behind ; two loreals ; head
with a lyre-shaped pattern, back with irregular rhombs, with pale
centres; tail one-sixth the length. T. LYROPHANES.
Nine superior labials; head long; two loreals; head with chevron
bands ; body with irregular pale centred rhombs.
T. BISCUTATUS.
Seales in 27 Rows.
Nine superior lJabials, three loreals ; head elongate ; two dark cross-
bands and two chevrons on head ; back with very irregular rhombs, with
pale centres ; tail one-sixth. T. MAJOR.
TRIMORPHODON TAU, Cope.
Scales in twenty-three series. Muzzle projecting considerably beyond
the mouth. Rostral plate somewhat produced behind ; internasals,
about one-fourth size of prefrontals, which are long as wide. Frontal
with straight lateral margins, which are longer thananterior. Occipital
not longer than frontal, regularly rounded behind. Nostril in middle of
nasal. Three loreals, three post and three preoculars. Temporals, 2-3-4.
Superior labials six, the fifth probably composed of two plates fused, as
it is twice as long as deep, on both sides. The fourth and fifth enter the
orbit, the third is cut down by the lower loreal and preocular. Inferior
labials, eleven. Body strongly compressed. Total length Om. 236; of
tail, .035 m.
Above gray, with twenty-three jet-black rhombs, which extend to the
gastrosteges by their lateral angles. Tail with ten rhombs ; all every-
where unspotted with paler. Sides of belly black spotted. Head gray
with a black mask above as far as the middle of the occipitals, but with
two lateral ear-shaped prolongations on the same ; a pale T-shaped mark
extends transversely between orbits, and longitudinally to end of
muzzle.
One specimen, No. 236, from F. Sumichrast, from the western part of
the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Mexico.
TRIMOPHORDON UPSILON, Cope.
Internasals broader than long, prefrontal broad as long, frontal with
parallel outline not reached by the preocular. Oculars 8-3. Nasals dis-
tinct, loreals three, forming an L. Temporals 3-3-3. Fourth and fifth
labials in contact with orbits. Twelve inferior labials. Scales in 2-3
series. Body with twenty-four brown annuli, which are broken imto
irregular spots on the belly, and are broader than long on the vertebral
line. On all but the anterior third the length, a vertical brown bar stands
between these on the sides. Chin and lips white, superior plates brown
spotted above. Loreal region spotted. Temporal and occipital region
brown with a pale Y on the occipital common suture. Total length
0.34m. Tail .052 m.; head to aictus .011 m.
One specimen in Mus. Smithsonian from I. I. Major, from Guadalaxara,
- West Mexico.
1869. ] 153 [Cope.
TRIMORPHODON MAJOR, Cope.
This large species hasa head of lanceolate form; the body is com-
pressed and the tail slender. The large number of series of scales char-
acterizes it most distinctly. Gastrosteges 258, anal 1-1, urosteges 88.
The preocular does not reach the frontal; temporals 3-4-5. There is a
broad brown band across the muzzle and chevron, ceasing between the
eyes, whose limbs are lost above the rictus ovis. A second chevron be-
hind this is closed by a spot connecting the limbs behind. The dorsal
rhombs extend to the gastrosteges, and are manifestly formed by the
union. of four spots, two vertebral, and one on each side ; they enclose
three spots of the ground in a cross-row.
Two specimens from near Tehuantepec from Francis Sumichrast.
TELEOLEPIS STRIATICEPS, Cope, sp. et gen. Nov.
Character genericus. Dentition diacranterian. Cephalic shields nor-
mal; two nasals, the nostril in the anterior one ; the loreal region with a
deep longitudinal groove. Scales equal, smooth, biporous; anal shield
entire. Tail short, body slender ; head wide, very distinct.
Disregarding the scale pores, this form might be regarded as a near ally
of Xenodon, or perhaps of Opheomorphus, for it has the head of the
first and the body of the last. The importance of Reinhardt’s scale pores
I have often had occasion to observe, and I believe their absence or single
or double existence to be as important indices of natural groups as any
other structural feature. In general, Reinhardt’s tables show that sub-
terranean and aquatic Colubrine serpents do not possess these pores,
while the more highly developed and typical forms of a more aerial life
possess them double ; the Coronelline forms of an intermediate character,
possess single pores, though frequently none, and rarely two.
Teleolepis agrees with Alsophis in many technical characters, except
in having a single anal shield, but the latter differs especially in its exces-
sively elongate tail. A close approach appears to be made by Zamenis,
but here the anal plate is double also. Bothrophthalmus Schleg. a Ly-
codont, presents the peculiar loreal groove.
Character specificus. The body is rather compressed, the urosteges not
angulate. The scales are in nineteen longitudinal series, and are rather
wide on the dorsal region The length of the tail enters the total 5.66
times. The head is broad and flat, and the neck narrow. The rostral
plate is flat, and slightly visible from above. The internasals are little
shorter than the prefrontals, but not so wide. Both nasals are visible
from above, but not the loreal; the preocular reaches the frontal. The
latter is as long as the occipitals and rather narrow, with concave borders.
Each occipital is as broad as the middle suture ; the superciliaries large.
The eyes are large and with round pupil.
Nasals about equal; the loreal with a curved supero-posterior mar-
gin, which invades the single preocular ; postoculars three, the superior
in-contact with occipital only, the inferior the largest, joining only the
fifth and sixth superior labials. The temporals are very small and num-
ber 2-2-4. Superior labials eight, fourth and fifth entering orbit ; sixth
Cope.] 154 [July 16,
quite elongate, last two each longer than high. Inferior labials nine ;
geneials equal, not elongate. Gastrosteges 189, urosteges 70. Total
length of a young animal 0m 30; of tail 0m 03.5.
Color above light brown, with a dorsal series of transverse quadrate
deep brown spots extending from nape to middle of tail; they extend
over seven and two half rows of scales, and are restricted by a light yel-
low line, which extends on each side the back. The spots are yellow-
edged anteriorly and posteriorly. The sides are marked with two rows
of alternating pale brown blotches, of which the superior is opposite the
dorsal series. There is a triangular dark edged yellow spot on the ex-
tremity of each gastrostege ; belly closely brown punctate. A blackish
band extends from the rostral plate to the side of the neck, and three
similar bands with pale middles extend on the top of the head to the
nape. Lips and chin yellow, brown blotched.
This species was found by Geo. Sceva, of the Thayer Expedition to
Brazil, and is No. 909, Mus. Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.
LYGOPHIS LACHRYMANS, Cope.
This species repeats the generic characters of Lygophis in the dia-
cranterian dentition, lack of scale pores, tail of medium length and nor-
mal scutellation.
Seales in seventeen series, obtuse. Muzzle short, rostral shield not as
high as wide, not prominent. Internasals broader than long ; frontal
broad, shorter than occipitals, with a right angle behind. Superior
labials eight, fourth and fifth only in orbit, sixth only higher than long.
Loreal longer than high ; oculars 1-2, the anterior not reaching frontal ;
temporals 1-2. Inferior labials large, nine; pregeneials shorter than
postgeneials. Gastrosteges 173; anals 1-1; urosteges 78.
Color aboye, chestnut brown ; ends of gastrosteges and first three and
a half rows of scales blackish, yellowish margined above from side of
neck to end of tail. On the anterior half the body is divided by a yellow-
ish band on the first and second rows of scales. Below and labials bright
yellow, the anterior superior labials brown margined. A deep brown
band from eye across sixth labial, another across seventh, and a black
spot on side of neck. Head above brown. Habitat, unknown.
This species is remotely like Coniophanes fissidens. It differs from
Rhadinaea taeniolata Jan. (Hnicognathus) in the broader frontal, and
the lip bands as well as uniform back.
ALSOPHIS RIJGERSMAEI, Cope.
Six specimens of this species serve to represent its characters. In
three the scales are in 23 series, in one in 21. The loreal plate is longer
than high, and with a straight superior suture, except on one side of one
individual, where it is angulated above as in A. antillensis. The muzzle
projects considerably beyond the mouth, but the rostral plate is not pro-
longed on its upper surface. Superior labials eight, third, fourth, and
fifth in orbit ; these with the sixth are the only labials higher than long.
Temporals 1-2 the anterior in contact with inferior of the two postocu-
lars only. One preocular occasionally divided and not reaching frontal.
1869.] 155 [Cope.
Nasals different in size, the anterior much smaller and not more elevated
than the loreal. Muzzle very narrow, internasals longer than broad,
vertical elongate and contracted by the concave superciliary sutures, its
anterior suture one-half its length, which equals the common occipital
suture. Occipitals emarginate behind. Gastrosteges 201, 201, 204, 210;
anal 1; urosteges 100, 122, 108, 100. Length 37.25 inches, of which the
tail measures 3.25 inches.
Color, dark slate brown above, with a number of blackish cross-bands
behind the head, which are sometimes quite indistinct and sometimes
separated by paler bands. A broad brown band from the nostril through
the eye which expands and is lost on the temporal region, though its
lower boundary is continued as a line on the side of the neck. The
scales on the median dorsal line have a white border. Belly, the
posterior half black, anterior yellowish, gray spotted. Upper labial
region orange, brown spotted; gular region grayish brown and orange
mingled. Frontal and occipital plates dark medially. This species is in
general appearance much like the A. sanctaecrucis, but it has the loreal
plate of the A. angulifer, and several more series of scales than either.
The frontal shield is of a narrower form than in either A. sanctaecrucis or
A. antillensis.
Habitat. So far as yet known, this distinct species is confined to the
small island of St. Martins, in the Spanish West Indies, which has an
area of only about thirty square miles. Six specimens were sent to the
Academy Natural Sciences by Dr. R. E. Van Rijgersma of that island.
I dedicate the species to him in recognition of his labors in endeavoring
to lay a basis for the complete zoology of that island.
XENODON ISOLEPIS, Cope.
Eight superior labials, fourth and fifth entering orbit, sixth the largest,
exceeding the seventh. Anal shield bifid. Scales of the body in nine-
teen series quincuncially arranged of equal size and form, one pitted.
General arrangement that of a Coluber; the body is also as in that type
entirely cylindric. Oculars 1-2; loreal little higher than long ; postnasal
highest ; rostral not prominent. Temporals 1-2. Frontal longer than
wide, longer than occipital.
Gastrosteges 156 ; urosteges 55.
Color uniform leaden above, flanks greenish, below dirty white. Pos-
terior tooth rather short. This species is nearest in technical characters
to the X. neovidii Gth. but differs entirely in color, and the equal size
and form and quincuncial arrangement of the scales. The sixth upper
labial is according to Gunther’s figure (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 18638, V.
C.,) much smaller than the seventh ; here the latter is distinctly smaller
than the former.
From Pebas Equador on the upper Amazon. Received from Professor
James Orton, of Vassar College, New York. A collection recently re-
ceived from that gentleman from the same locality embraced the follow-
ing species, all of which are in the Museum of the Academy Natural
Sciences, presented through the liberality of Prof. Orton.
Cope.] 156 July 16,
Testudinata.
Chelys matamata.
Ophidia.
Typhlops reticulatus, L.
Tortrix scytale, L.
Rhabdosoma microrhynchum, Cope.
Leptodira annulata, L.
Oxyrhopus clelia, L.
Xenodon isolepis, Cope.
Herpetodryas carinatus, L.
Himantodes.
Leptognathus catesbyi, D. B.
Elaps lemniscatus, Linn.
Elaps imperator, Cope, (#. batesi, Gthr.)
Elaps scutiventris, Cope.
Bothrops bilineatus (27 series of scales only.)
Lacertina.
Amphisbaena alba, L.
Amphisbaena fuliginosa, Schreb.
Amiva surinamensis, Gray.
Thecadactylus rapicauda, Houtt.
Anolis viridiaeneus, Peters.
Batrachia.
Pithecopus tarsius, Cope. Specimens with head and body five inches
in length.
Pithecopus tomopternus, Cope.
Hyla marmorata, Daud.
Hyla leucophyllata, Beireis. A curious variety with a round or dis-
cord blackish spot on the vertex, brown lateral band from end of muzzle,
and whole under surfaces a bright salmon color. Another variety appa-
rently has been named Hyla triangulum by Gimther, P. Z. 8. Lond., 1865.
Scytopis allenii, Cope.
Bufo naricus, Spix.
Bufo margaritiferus, Merr.
Pipa surinamensis, L.
ELAPS SCUTIVENTRIS, Cope.
Form slender, tail short, thick. Oculars 1-2; superior posterior with
its inferior suture continuous with that of the occipital. Superior labials
seven, third and fourth in orbit, all except the first higher than long,
none reaching occipital. Temporals 1-1. Superciliaries broad as long ;
prefontals and internasals of equal length, the former much the wider.
Rostral broader than high, not prominent. Symphyseal largely in con-
tact with pregeneials. Scales in fifteen series. Gastroteges 274; anal
divided ; urosteges 15.
Above black, except a broad yellow head-band, which extends from the
posterior margin of the prefontals to that of the occipitals. Tail with
Ort
iy
1869. ] 1 i [Cope.
one or two crossings above. Below black, with large transversely oval
yellow spots, which extend to the third row of scales, and include three
or four gastrosteges at intervals of the same width. Length, 17.5 inches,
tail, 7 inches.
From Pebas on the Amazon in Equador. From Prof. Orton.
This species appears to be nearest the E. narducci of Jan.
TRIGONOCEPHALUS (Bothrops) ARBOREUS, Cope.
Scales in thirty-five longitudinal series, all carinate except the inferior.
Eight superior labials which diminish in size posteriorly, bounded above
behind posterior line of orbit by seven small scales, which are not distin-
guishable from those of the temple. Second labial forming anterior
boundary of fossa; two rows scales between fourth and orbit. Inferior
labials eleven. Three scales on the canthus above, the anterior two large,
forming with a pair on top of the muzzle a shielded space of six plates.
Supercilaries large, separated by nine rows. Gastrosteges 201, urosteges
64 pairs. The body is much compressed, and the coiled tail with
slightly expanded prehensile extremity, appropriately to arboreal life.
Color, greenish yellow, the first series of scales yellow,-ends of the gas-
trosteges with a green line. Dorsal region with faint brownish yellow
spots often paired; many scales black edged. Labial scales of both
jaws black edged ; a black band with yellow interruptions from eye to
angle of mouth.
This handsome and venomous tree serpent was discovered by Dr.
Otho Wucherer, near to Bahia, Brazil. It is a near ally of the B. bilinea-
tus of Nieuwied, but that animal has 27-9 rows of scales, and the top of
the muzzle is sealed, (as given by Schlegel in the atlas of his Physionomie
des Serpens), and the color is slightly different.
TRIGONOCEPHALUS (Bothrops) PUBESCENS, Cope.
Scales in twenty-three rows, all including the inferior, keeled. Eight
superior labials, the fourth longest, and separated from the orbit by three
rows of scales. Second not extending to the front of the maxillary pit.
Posterior labials quadrate shorter. Seven rows of scales between super-
ciliaries ; two on canthus rostralis above, besides the edge of the preocular.
The anterior quite large, flat, the second separated by five rows scales.
Maxillary, palatine and pterygoid, mandibular and laryngeal margins
with the fang sheaths, silky pubescent, forming short longitudinal
fringes. Color, brown, with blackish brown spots on each side from ver-
tebral line to fourth row of scales. The spots are rounded and pale
edged and alternating. They are divided by a longitudinal line of the
ground near their middle. There are in their intervals above, round pale
edged brown spots, A brown band from eye to angle of mouth, pale
edged below ; a similar band across head in front of superciliaries ; two
divergent brown spots behind the same plates, and two divergent brown
bands behind these, all yellow edged. Sides of face and throat thickly
brown dusted. Belly closely brown spotted ; widest spots near end of
gastrosteges. Gastrosteges 182, urosteges 25.
One specimen of this serpent was brought by the Thayer expedition
Cope. ] 158 [July 16,
from the Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. It is nearest the B. nieuwiedii,
Spix, but may be distinguished by the extraordinary character of the
silky fringes in the mouth as well as by the entirely different coloration.
In the Jatter respect it is rather more like B. diporus.
CNEMIDOPHORUS GRANDENSIS, Cope, sp. nov.
Char. Ten series of abdominal plates; brachium plated ; two fronto-
parietals. Green with 2-3 white longitudinal lines on each side, a row
of brown spots between the two superior and above the more dorsal of the
latter.
Description. The nostril is anterior to the naso-frenal suture. Infra-
labials four, separated from labials behind by one series flat scales (not
granules), mesoptychium entire, with 3-4 rows plates, some small ones
on the margin, except at middle. Supranasals in contact; also the pre-
frontals. Frontal single, much angulate in front. Supraorbitals four,
not separated from frontals and frontoparetals by granules. ‘Two pairs
wedge shaped parietals, interparietal parallelogrammic as large as one
pair. Scutellation minute, caudal scales strongly keeled. Brachiais and
antibrachials continuous, latter in two rows only; former continuous
with postbrachials, the two forming together five rows, all smooth. Nine
femoral pores. Anals continuous with abdominals, composed of one
large median plate, margined laterally and behind by six plates, the two
posterior marginals.
Coloration.—The inferior lateral pale line is interrupted aud not well
marked ; sides pale green, between and above the superior lateral lines,
brown ; median dorsal line bright green. Nineteen brown spots between
nape and rump above upper line, those below rather fewer. Femur with
two pale streaks behind, tibia and fore-arm spotted in front. Belly and
throat uniform yellow.
Habitat. The Rio Grande, Brazil, brought by Capt. George Haminaton,
and presented to the Essex Institute, Salem, Mass., (No. 388, ) Museum
Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia.
This species only resembles the C. murinus, D. B., and the C. hetero-
lepis, Tschudi in the increased number of its abdominal shields. In C.
murinus the brachium is altogether granular, while the C. heterolepis
differs in having but one frontoparietal plate, and only two parietals,
with frontoparietal smaller than either. It is from Peru.
On account of the united frontoparietal shields I refer C. hypery-
thrus, Cope as type, and C. heterolepis, Tschudi, as second species
of a genus different from the present, under the name of VERTICARIA.
Measurements of C. grandensis.*
Motel@lenetietcies es): Omid 932s) Horeslimab sere ei 12. Om 02
CPU OuvVieMitiere ce ania Omi06*>) oe Eindae ase ae eee Om 036
08 150) GOllighes sooabor Om 01.9 Cor LOOtI Meas hitter Om 2
AMEIVA ANALIFERA, Cope, sp. nov.
Of the group of A. plei, ¢. ¢., with twelve ventral series of scales, no
* In the lezal measure of the United States the metre and decimal fractions.
E@
1869.] 159 [Cope.
heel spurs, and one frontal plate. The tibial shields in three rows, the
outer much larger, and outer toe longer than inner. It differs from that
species in having the prebrachial shield small, and in three sub-equal
longitudinal rows, graduating into the large prebachials regularly, in hav-
ing ten or eight regular marginal anal plates, the median pairs not ab-
ruptly larger, and in not having a series of black spots on the sides. The
teeth are from the nostril posteriorly 9 canine like, and seven or eight
obutuse molars, two or three posterior usually with a lateral cusp. Two
median plates in front of the anals. Gular scales in a transverse band of
about nine rows, larger ; relatively larger also than in A. plei, also the
latter has several rows of scales between the labials and infralabials ; the
A. analifera but one row.
Greenish yellow below, brownish olive above, with blackish cross-
shades on the nape in St. Martin’s specimens. Sides, groin and tail
above white spotted ; some white spots in rows across the rump.
In Lin
Total length (two irches of tail reproduced)...... 13
JEMGl WHWAAIS 1D). WEI > oacdocaocoadscezoooonmacuos 4 6
JEUhaVel Iibem bo sey eetracis Meciominin oe Site Ae Rle ine, MAG ately ed 3 11,8)
TINGORG So o-0rd @ SRC aeniG a Stok ee ees eae ee ere ee 1 6
HER OME UMUIIT RY Sree mbehale toes cacielencial sai nets qelersievune ] 8
Head including membr. tympani................. Here lec)
Several specimens in Museum Academy from the island of St. Martins,
West Indies, presented by Dr. R. E. Van Rijgersma, correspondent of the
“Academy at that place ; also one specimen from the adjacent island of St.
Bartholomews, from Dr. A. H. Goés of that island. The following species
were included in the collection of Dr. Rijgersma.
IGUANA NUDICOLLIS, Cuy. This species occurs also in the Swan Islands
off the coast of Honduras ; Museum Columbia College, New York.
ANOLIS GINGIVINUS, Cope, P. A. N. §., Philadelphia, 1864, 170.
AMIVA ANALIFERA, Cope, supra.
MABUIA AENEA, Lacep.
ATSOPHIS RIJGERSMAEI, Cope, supra.
HYLODES MARTINICENSIS, Dum. Bibr.
SCELOPORUS SINIFERUS, Cope.
Twenty-four transverse series of scales between interscapular region
and rump. Seven longitudinal series at the latter point, ten at the former.
Lateral scales large, nearly equalling the ventral, which are considerably
smaller than the dorsal. All well keeled and mucronate, except the ven-
tral, which are smooth and without mucro or emargination, except a few
spinous series in front of the vent. Gular scales entire. Palms and soles
strongly keeled ; tail slender, its scales strongly keeled like those of the
back. Male with three, female with six femoral pores. No granular
space in front of shoulder, and no longitudinal folds in the same region,
but a short vertical fold in which the skin is so deeply inverted as to
Ae Pass =O XU
Cope.] 160
[July 16,
form a deep pocket extending more than half way to the tympanum, and
with some subdividing folds. No auricular scales different from the
temporal ; all strongly keeled.
Two pairs of supranasals, two pairs frontonasals separated by a small
iaternasal. Frontal divided transversely and longitudinally ; frontoparie-
tals small. Parietals small, transversely divided; interparietal large,
broader than long. Supraorbitals four on each side, preceded by three
scales, and bounded inwardly and outwardly by much smaller scales:
None striate ; those on muzzle weakly one keeled.
Tn. Lin.
Noranl Nave, cen dboonoodadcussscdbavesceoddoa00~ 6 8.2
IbemyENN TO WEIIis ocoonedascccecctaccdonhodoucdcogs 2 1.4
OGRA Ts Tayi cll ee Panne eg Mea canes dec dt kd ayes Wad nt aaah 10.2
Gf TORCANEMUS OPISHe sera ee Bie eee ; Dea
56 libavoll Waal] cass petaepen Mee ates spat rae Me come ale 1 8.4
36 OE COOLS aE ReMERe Be Rn aiolarebara c rath ak On eases 10.1
Gt AOTRE TMH ADOT OVSee LEAN ea NS DAT RIER REE nh ay em Toes Sas Alert 6 10.6
VAG ERGs Gocabagcousscucoood RRR eR a Ate aT ey, 4.8
This species is comparable to 5S. oligoporus, Cope, in the large scales
and few femoral pores, but differs much in the division of the frontal
plate, large interparictal and cervical pocket. It is considerably smaller
and of different coloration.
Numerous specimens in Smithsonian collections from Francis Sumi-
chrast, from the Pacific side of the Isthmus Tehuantepec.
LiyLA RUGULOSA, Cope, sp. nov. Cystignathidarum.
Prefrontal bones in close union with each other and the fronto-parietals.
Vomerine teeth present; auditory apparatus well developed. Manu-
brium cartilaginous, xiphisternum emarginate. Toes webbed ; dilata-
tions well developed, supported by T-shaped phalanges. Abdomen nearly
smooth.
This genus is very near to Hylodes,* differing almost entirely in the
webbed toes. Keferstein, who has just described this genus (Archiv. f/
Naturgesch, 1868, 926), in consequence of his adhesion to the system of
Giinther, has attained to a very coufused idea of its affinities.
Character Specificus.—Head broad, body short ; heel extends to end of
muzzle. Vomerine teeth in two approximated fasciculi, much behind
the posterior line of the nares. Choanae half the size of the ostia
pharyngea. Tongue oval, one-fourth lree, openly emarginate behind.
Tympanum nearly as large as orbit. Skin thin, with sundry rugosites
on the sides of the dorsal region. Muzzle acuminate, not projecting ;
nostrils nearly terminal. Canthus rostralis well marked, lores slightly
coneave ; front a little convex. Tarsal fold slight, metatarsal tubercle
one inner. Solar web to the middle of the first (proximal) phalange on
the first and fifth digits; to the base of the same on the others. Third
%* Lithodytes rhodopis, Cope, Pr. A. N. Sci., Phil., 1866, 323 is Hylodes sallei, Gthr. P. Z. 8.
Lond., 1868-
1869. ] 161 [Cope.
digit very elongate. Anterior toes free; lengths 2-4-1-3. A weak dis-
coid abdominal dermal fold. Abdomen very obscurely areolate, medially
nearly smooth.
Color blackish-brown above, sometimes with pale vertebral streak.
Femora not marked behind ; above with three oval brown areas enclosed
by light lines. <A black band between orbits. A dark band from orbit
to nostril, and thence to lip ; two similar bands from orbit to lip. Below
unspotted white, except gular region, which is brown.
enathphead sand podyae-j. 4 eee) ae Omen HOS
us ‘¢ to posterior line tympanum............ .O14
\Wicliin . So Bip GANAS ORIS soocopbeoccouoonsodwodas .0145
Oxrbitsborendimuazles seers tyes ci aes astee ovement aveiere .0049
Wenetloetoresimllopyasiecwwschers rials “avers lslateeersceryolettet sae ears 0215
GG LO OLR OM coer area: + ol Sits anette teed wlan .0105
SG" Inrbaal ooG HMONG WAVES c conn doaccocncccndoedc .0185
Ge Sra MTIADIetee Paras ete sue voneliene ts uat cvi el seebereney onic uAiSO eusmralene 064
Habitat. Two specimens of this new form were sent to the Smithsonian
Institution by Dr. Francis Sumichrast from the Pacific region of the
isthmus of Tehuantepec, Mexico.
The collection sent from this locality embraced the following thirty-six
species.
CROCODILIA.
CROCODILUS AMERICANUS, Seba; various large specimens, which dis-
play the most remarkable variations in the number and position of the
osseous scuta. They exhibit from two to four nuchal scuta, and from
two to five cervical. In several specimens scuta of the external dorsal
series meet on the median line, excluding the inner pair entirely.
TESTUDINATA.
CHELOPUS RUBIDUS, Cope Supra.
LACERTILIA.
HELODERMA HORRIDUM, Wiegmann.
CNEMIDOPHORUS, sp.
UTA BICARINATA, Phymatolepis bicarnatus Duméril.
SCELOPORUS SINIFERUS, Cope.
SCELOPORUS VARIABILIS, Wiegmann.
7 CYCLURA (Ctenosaura) QUINQUECARINATA, Enyaliosaurus quin. Gray.
Catalogue of Sauria in Brit. Mus. This region is the undoubted home
of this hitherto rare species, as Sumichrast finds it in abundance. Gray
was unable to assign its habitat.
—CYCLURA (Clencsuura) ACANTHURA, Wiegm.
IGUANA RHINOLOPHA, Saur. Probably only a variety of I. tuber
-culata. :
OLIGOSOMA GEMMINGERI, Cope.
PHYLLODACTYTUS TUBERCULATUs, Wiegmann.
)
Cope.] 162 [July 16,
OPHIDIA.
STENOSIOMA.
OGMIUS VARIANS. Ozyrhina varians Jan. This genus is strongly
glyphodont like Stenorhina. Prof. Jan considered it is isodont. His
name Oayrhina has been used variously before, on which account I pro-
pose the name above given. For a synopsis of genera allied to Ogmius.
See Silliman’s Journ. Sci. Arts, 1864, 457.
STENORHINA VENTRALIS, D. B. A form with series of dots on the
scales, confirming the identity of the lined var. freminvillei with the
species.
OPHIBOLUS POLYZONUS, Cope.
CONIOPHANES PICEIVITTIS, Cope.
CoNOPHIS VITATTUS, Peters.
TOMODON NAsutTus, Cope.
OXYRHOPUS CLELIA, Linn.
LEPTODIRA MYSTACINA, Cope.
LEPTODIRA ANNULATA, Linn.
TRIMORPHODON BiscuTatus, D. B (Dipsas).
TRIMORPHODON TAU, Cope, supra.
‘SYMPHIMUS LEUCOSTOMUS, Cope, supra.
MASTICOPHIS MARGARITIFERUS, Schl.
OXYBELIS ACUMINATUS, Wied.
ELAPS AGLAEOPE, Cope.
ANCISTRODON BILINEATUS, Gthr.
BOTHRIECHIS BRACHYSTOMA, Cope.
BATRACHIA.
LiyLA RUGULOSA, Cope.
CYSTIGNATHUS MELANONOTUS, Hallow.
CysTIGNATHUS GRACILIS, D. B. Not distinguishable from specimens
in the Mus. Compar. Zoology from Uruguay, except in less depressed
extremity of the muzzle. The same species from Vera Cruz.
ScYTOPIS ALLENII, Cope.
Fingers free and teeth in fasciculi between nares and otherwise gener-
ally as in P. xsignatus; but the muzzle is broadly rounded, there is a
black band from eye to middle of sides, followed by numerous large black
spots on yellow ground; femora not cross. barred above, with large light
spots on black ground.
The black scapular bars of this species are broad, and are not angulated
and converging as in S. xsignatus, but are parallel; two black bars on
sacral region diverge towards the groin. There are several black spots
in the axilla, and longitudinal black line on front and back of humerus
and three on front and under side of humerus. Tibiae vermiculated on
; Q
1869. ] 163 [Cope.
under surface above with an incompletg, outlining of cross bars. Teeth
between nares. Proportions of limbs generally as in the common variety
of S. xsignatus; head equal foot beyond tarsus less the last phalange and
two-thirds the tibia; foot 1.5 head and body. Orbit equal muzzle to
beyond nares; belly immaculate, throat smooth. Heel nearly to nares.
Length head and body 15.25 lines.
Habitat. Para Brazil. One specimen, No. 473 Mus. Comp. Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass. Pebas Equador, Prof. Orton. Named for my friend,
Prof. Harrison Allen, of the Pennsylvania University.
HyLA PULCHRILINEATA, Cope.
Form that of H. arborea. Fingers free, toes webbed to the base of
the penultimate phalange. Dilatations well developed. Vomerine teeth
in asingle transverse series opposite the posterior margin of the internal
nares ; the latter much larger than the ostia pharyngea. Tongue slightly
free behind. Canthus rostralis distinct, lores concave. Eyes large, prom-
inent; membranum tympani one-fourth their size. The skin is smooth
above, and the areolae of the abdomen are unusually weakly developed.
No dermal appendages to the limbs or body. The extended hind limb
brings the heel to the front of the orbit.
ILemerin (Koa) rela so Ase ooaocodc op odcseddouesoes ome 38.
Pe ator evemloiaxial nt 25 nt tera ee 58.
*¢ to posterior margin tympanum..............-- i
GE" HOMO IMME Go's olen eco seo ooCoDos Oo Pare eer eo 22.8
os aoGl tbh ono ncededae mod spoaedocso Ba ataare Oe 58.5
OG Ont TED OR ars a Ge lens Bates ately Velen iane tie Rae Sen Rena tte 24.5
SOT UAT SUS ere lege aystauerogs) ker SEA IeTAGey nate nea eee a eneeaen: 12.
Aili Qs GMaANMS CHI oaocchoacooo4ocuudsopccocsuade 12.
Ground color above pale ashy brown. A strong citron yellow band
passes round the muzzle, below the tympanum, and along the side to the
groin. On the side it is wider, slightly undulating, and bordered above
and below with slate color, which forms a pale blotch below it on the
groin. A narrow unmargined, bright citron yellow line extends from
the end of the muzzle to the vent, medially ; and a similar one passes
above the canthus rostralis and orbits along a line equidistant between
the vertebral and lateral lines, joining the latter at the groin. ‘The fem-
ora are finely yellow above and behind, and a yellow longitudinal line
marks the tibia on both the inner and outer sides. The pigment of the
metatarsus does not extend on the outer digit.
This pretty and uniquely marked species was brought by William M.
Gabb, member of the Academy and Chief of the Geological Survey of the
Island of San Domingo, from the eastern part of that island. The thumb
can be opposed to the fingers as in the species formerly referred to Litoria.*
The sacral diapophyses are narrower than usual in the genus. The fronto-
* Two species were described by Dumeril,as L. marmorata and L. punctata, from Australia. On
the union of these with Ilyla, I changed their names to H. thyposticta and H. dimolops respec-
tively (Journ. A. N- Sci., 1866, p.85), as there were Hylae already described under those names.
164 [July 16,
Cope. ]
parietal bones are more extensively ossified than in most species of
Hyla, and constitute an approach to Scytopis,* Cope. The a is the
first true Hyla discovered in the West Indian subregion.
The species brought by this naturalist from the same locality are :—
Dromicus parvifrons, Cope.
Uromacer catesbyii, D. B.
Amphisbaena innocens, Weinl.
Anolis semilineatus, Cope.
Anolis cclestinus, Cope.
Anolis distichus, Cope. A. domdnicensis Liitk. isa variety of this:spe-
cies. )
Anolis cybotes, Cope. A. riised Reinht. and Liitk.
Trachycephalus marmoratus, D. B. var.
Hyla pulchrilineata, Cope.
Lithodytes ricordii, Dum. Bibr.
It may be mentioned in this connection that a valuable catalogue of
West Indian Reptiles and Batrachia was issued by Reinhardt and Litken
in 1863 in the Naturalist. Foren. Vidensk. Meddel. Kjobenhavn. <A few
doubles emplois occur in its pages, as follows. Their Anolis trinitatis I
think is a variety of A. alligator, D.B. Numerous specimens are in
Mus. Smithsonian. Amphisbaena antillensis, Rhdt. and Liitk. is Diphalus
fenestratus, Cope. Liophis Andreae, R. & L., is the young of Dro-
micus fugitivus, Donnd. Hylodes riseti, R. & U., is Lithodytes
lentus, Cope, and H. antillensis is H. auriculatus, Cope. Though
this paper of the Danish naturalists was read one month before that of
the writer, in which these Hylodes were described, it was evidently pub-
lished much later, as they quote in ita paper of the writer’s, which was
not issued till 1863.
Among West Indian Anoles it is to be added, that the A. grahami Gray
is established on a young A. iodurus, and that A. poreatus is A. princi-
palis; also that A. stenodactylus is not a valid species.
HYLA POLYTAENIA, Cope.
Hyla rubicundula, “ Reinhdt. & Liitk.” Gimther P. Z. Soc. Lond.,
1868, 489, Tab. X, fig. 3, nec. Reinh. et Liitk.
Fingers one-third palmate ; toes only palmate to the extremity of the
basal phalange of the longest toe. No dermal margins on body or limbs.
Tongue entirely attached behind. Vomerine teeth in short transverse
fasciculi entirely behind the line of the posterior margin of the inner nares.
Choanae smaller than nares. Tympanum less than one-fourth eye.
Skin above everywhere smooth. Digital dilations moderate ; eye large ;
head wide ; muzzle short ; loveal region concave.
* Four species of this genus are enumerated in my genera of Arcifera (Journ. Acad. 1866) but
were not named. They are S. yenulosus (Ilyla Daudin); 8. acumlnata (Hyla Cope); S. allenii
Cope and §. ruber (Hyla Daudin).
1869.] 165 [Cope.
Inches.
Length from end muzzle to orbit.......... soobugoeo oD 20
ue ie ae behind tympanum........ 40
GE GC Go VWeuly (ab ooessusesosue 13
Os Ge Sons WPMD Ioedaouwerpecudeebuc dso No uomeue .90
GY OPoMT IT AUNT Se Bice ensue acteie sua kee shan cere cool seehet ei sae 2.00
bE COME TROXON Nr ES eee ates kee OR STE RE Oar RCE Se ec eR ere .90
Of OfelaEsuiSeen some ea RO eral AU RU en COnU Sy (G
IDNANINSOI DyOs asargcosocovadcosabonsodovonsoensoay ae .B9
WyiGliln IngeGl xeon obo sacodtodopo couse ude uole cb ob Al
The pigment of the upper surfaces extends to near the edge of the lip
and in a band on humerus and femur, covering three outer fingers,
an outer metatarsus and two outer toes. A grey-brown band extends
along the border of the lip above the axilla to the groin; a second and
wider extends from the nares through eye and tympanum to groin. In
our specimen the reddish-cream color of the dorsal region is marked with
indistinct dap ; in a second, with nine longitudinal grey-brown lines, of
which a vertebral, and one from above the lores and over each orbit to
groin are band-like. In both, a similar band bounds the antebrachium,
tibia and metatarsus, and the posterior margin of the pigment on the
femur. In the lined specimen there are additional lines on the lips hu-
merus and femur.
This species has the opposable thumb and slight palmation of some of
the Hylae referred to Litoria. It is in general allied to H. palliata,
but has the toes much less palmate, and the vomerine teeth more pos-
terior.
This species is figured by Giinther as the H. rubicundula of Rhdt. &
Liitk. as above. It is however not that species, which differs according
to the original description in Danish, in first, having the ‘vomerine teeth
between the nares: second, in having the tongue half free; third, the
palmation of the feet extends over one phalange more, and fourth, that
of the fingers is better developed.
From Brazil ; collected by G. Sceva, of the Thayer expedition to that
country, under Prof. Agassiz. No. 906 Mus. Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge.
STEREOCYCLOPS INCRASSATUS, Cope, sp. et. gen. nov. Phryniscidarum.
Char. gen. Of section I. of Phryniscidae with Hypopachus and Calo-
phrynus. The prefrontals are fully developed and form a continuum with
each other and with the fronto parietals. Tongue large. Membranum
tympani thin, concealed. No dorsal or parotoid gland; no metatarsal
shovel. Coccyx united by two condyles. Xiphisternum cartilaginous,
much dilated and entirely in contact with the coracoids. Anterior por-
tion of the sclerotica ossified, so as to form a hard annulus round the
cornea. Pupilround. Toes free.
Char. Spec. The whole form is much depressed, and the physiognomy
approaches Pipa. The cranial box partakes of this and presents a strong
median longitudinal crest. Tongue large; equal inner nares. A short
a
Cope.] 166 [July 16,
frenum across the palate behind. The vomer is cartilaginous between
the nares, except on axis. Gape large, the muzzle projecting slightly be-
yond it. No canthus rostralis, nostrils latero-superior. Limbs short,
humerus and femur included in the skin. Toes very unequal, the inner
and outer very short; related thus, 1-2-5-3-4. An obtuse tubercle at the
base of the outer toe. The epidermis is everywhere thickened by a
chitin-like de»osit, which is readily cracked. It is thickest on the soles,
the tarsi, and the gular region.
Color everywhere leather-brown ; a narrow white line from end of muz-
zle to vent.
Gene thvof wneadvamaliiodiy sae ae lye sata eens 057
a GG JousmnGl Ibanlb) RON INCAS Goobdeooccosncaeceeos 0495
He GPS ita WS URSIME me ees Renee UCR CORN ak iUean nary ea Mrae pI ER .009
sf COME CIMAIN CCT Of tOOL NN Meee LS ne rear .0245
66 ‘« fore limb from elbow............ URGE deca came .0200
Width between angles mandible...... pee nti Sat eae .020
ae ot ODP Ai ie NAN gaye aera he Ome ot: BNR .CO9
vs es MOMGANS. ccoo000 SEE LOM ISA EY Ben teh UP Ne .004
Found near Sao Matheos, south of Rio de Janeiro, by Messrs. Hartt
and Copeland, of the Thayer Expedition to Brazil, Mus. Comparative
Zoology, Cambridge, Mass., No. 855.
This is a remarkable type, with a certain resemblance to Engystoma.
It is the first type among the Raniformia which betrays even a remote
resemblance to Pipa.
HYPOPACHUS INGUINALIS, Cope, sp. nov.
This species is of about the same size as the H. variolosus Cope,
and like it has the toes partially webbed at the base. It differs by many
marked characters throughout.
Muzzle rounded conic, projecting beyond lip; nostrils superolateral.
Width of head behind orbits, double length to opposite the same point.
A groove from orbit to humerus. Diameter of former equal length of
muzzle from the same. Mandible with symphyseal knob little marked ;
gular slits large ; tongue flat, ovate, largely free and thin behind, with-
out free border in front. Nares large, double the small ostia pharyngea.
Two metacarpal tubercles close together ; fingers slender, with subartic-
ular knobs. The metatarsal tubercles with cutting edges in nearly the
same line without blackening of the sheath, the inner the longer. No
tarsal fold. Skin everywhere smooth, except some minute pappillae on
the sacro-coccygeal region.
Coloration. Above a pinkish leaden, with a more or less indistinct nar-
row vertebral line from the end of the muzzle. A largeanda small black
spot on the groin and one on the knee. A large black spot on the
scapula; a pair of blackish lines which converge from the orbits to the
inter-scapular region, then diverge and form an imperfect circle on the
middle of the back. Sides of head blackish; a yellow bar from orbit to
humerus. <A black bar across closed femur and tibia above. The femur
1869. ] 1 67 (Cope.
is a strong pink, and is sometimes spotted behind and sometimes not.
Belly with delicate reticulate brown lines on yellow ground, sometimes
obsolete. Total length, 04’ 4/’’; do. to orbit behind, 8’. Fore limb,
02’' 2///, hand, 01/’. Hind limb, 04/’ 1’; harsus, 9/’’. Entire foot,
02’ 03/''.5.
Habitat. Vera Paz, near the ruins of Coban. Sent to the Smithsonian
Institution by Henry Hague. This gentleman has made highly interest-
ing observations on and contributions to the Natural History of that once
populous, but now almost unknown region, which have been communi-
cated to the Smithsonian Institution.
The known species of this genus is Hypopachus variolosus Cope
(H. seebachit Keferstein Gottingen, Nachrichten, 1867, 352. Archiv. f.
Naturgesch, 1868, 293, tab. IX., f. 1, 2. Hngystoma variolosum Cope.
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1866. Systomado. Journ. A. N. Sci.,
1867, 194,) which is found in Costa Rica. Keferstein well separates this
species from Systoma on account of its claviculus, though it is not certain
that it is not Copea Steindachner. In an essay on Costa Rican Batrachia
this author enumerates eight species. Of these it may be remarked that
Bufo sternosignatus Giinther has been described by an older author under
a prior name. Oecedipina uniformis Kef. is an interesting Plethodont
salamander, apparently the same as the Opheobatrachus vermicularis of
Gray. No generic characters are given which are not possessed by species
of Oedipus. I may mention here that I have hitherto regarded the latter
genus as identical with Geotrition, and no author has presented charac-
ters by which to distinguish them. I find, however, that the European
genus possesses two premaxillaries, the American one ; on this ground they
may be separated. In the same way Spelerpes pophyriticus (vel
salmoneus) has two premaxillaries, and all the Spelerpes proper but one.
I therefore refer the first to a new genus under the name of Gyrinophilus.
RANULA AFFINIS, Peters, Cope.
This species is extensively distributed. We have it from Pebas, Equa-
dor, Coban Guatemala, and the Rio Verde, Tehuantepec, Mexico. Giin-
ther, after examination of this frog, says (Zoological Record, 1868,) that
it is ‘‘ Hyloid,’’ an expression we fail to comprehend, as he oan
cannot mean that it bears any relationship to Hyla.
The digital relations, if such they can be called, are not lar ger than in
the Rana sylvatica, which has just passed its metamorphoses. It is in
fact most closely allied to the group of Rana to which R. temporaria be-
longs, as already perceived by Peters, who calls it affinis on this ac-
count. Like it, it possesses a dorso-lateral dermal fold, as is common in
Hylorana.
Steindachner proposes to united Hylorana and Polypedates. On this
Giinther remarks that this herpetologist could not have devoted much
study to them, as they differ in the presence and absence of this dorso-
lateral dermal fold respectively. Ginther’s criticism, however, like most
of those which he too frequently directs at the labors of his fellow-stu-
dents, is really applicable to himself.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—V
Cope.] 168 July 16,
So far as the ‘‘Catalogue of Batrachia Salientia in the British Mu-
seum’’ is concerned, no characters to distinguish them can be found.
But I pointed out, some years ago, that the difference consisted mainly
in the structures of the distal phalanges characteristic of each : also that
Hylorana is much nearer to Rana, and is only to be distinguished from it
generically, without the interposition of any possible form which would
not unite them. The T-shaped phalange in some Hyloranae is so weak,
while the expansion of the tip of the same in Rana temporaria and others,
isso distinct, as to render the permanent distinction of the two genera a
mere matter of future discovery.
LIMNOMEDUSA MACROGLOSSA, D. B.
Having had an opportunity of examining the sternum of this species
for the first time, I find that it possesses the styloid xiphisternum which I
have indicated as characteristic of the typical group Cystignathi of the
family Cystignathide, and it must therefore be referred to the neighbor-
hood of Cystignathus. Besides other points, Limnomedusa, Cope, is
distinguished from Cystignathus by the vertical pupil.
Keferstein states that I erroneously aseribe an osseous stylus of the
xiphisternum to the genus Borborocaetes Bell. The facts are as follows :
This genus was distributed by Giinther in the Catal. Bat. Sal. Brit. Mus.
in two widely different groups, Cystignathus, and one he called Limno-
dynastes. I first pointed out* that this series of species differed radically
from Cystignathus and its allies, in the scutiform cartilaginous xiphis-
ternum, and also in the large cranial frontanelle.
Up to that time the Australian species called Limnodynastes had never
been received other than specific characters, as that by which it was stated
by Giinther to differ from Cystignathus, viz., the transverse extension of
the series of vomerine teeth, is one included in the range of many well-
known genera, as Rana, Lithodytes, and Cystignathus itself. TheSouth
American species named by Bell long previously, Borborocaetes, differ
only from those of Australia in the shortening of these series, and not
more than Cystignathus taeniatus does from C. albilabris.
GOMPHOBATES BILIGONIGERUS, Cope.
Gomphobates notatus, Reinhdt. and Liitken, Vid. Medd. Copenhagen,
1861, 338 Tab. IV, f. 38. Liwperus biligonigerus, Cope, Proc. Ac. N. Sci.,
Phila., 1860, 517. Uraguay.
EusoPHUS NEBULOSUS Cope, Cystignuthus nebulosus Girard. It is prob-
able that the Cystignathid described by Ginther, P. Z. S., Lond., 1868,
482, as Cacotus maculatus, is a variety of this species. It agrees in all
respects except in having a black suborbital spot, and line on the canthus
rostralis, which Girard’s types do not exhibit. Giinther placesit among
his Bombinatorina. It is scarcely necessary to observe that it has not
the least affinity to Bombinator.
* Nat. Hist., Review 1865.
169 [Cope.
1889. ]
APPENDIX.
ZONURUS TROPIDOSTERNUM, Cope, sp. nov.
Char. Seales +2=16, lateral ventral, pectoral and gular keeled, the
dorsal keeled and very rugose. Caudalscalestrihedral spine-like. Inter-
nasal reaching rostral. Dark-brown, yellow below.
Descr. This species belongs to the typical group and is near the Z.
griseus of the Cape, but differs in many characters. The rostral is in
contact with the internasal, which is much longer than wide, and of
course separates entirely the supranasals. It is well separated from the
frontal by the frontonasals. The other head plates are similar, except
that there are six rows of temporals, the longest seven deep ; those of the
Z. griseus are much larger, including the two marginal auriculars,
which are rudimental in the new species. AJ] the plates of the head are
excessively rugose, with longitudinal striae. Upper labials six, the fifth
not more elevated than the others ; inferiors, six ; infra-labials, five ; all
in contact, and without larger scales within them. Gular scales in 22
series from angles of mandible ; those of the neck abruptly larger, mu-
cronate, forming a rudimental collar. Median ventrals nearly smooth,
laterals mucronate keeled. No lateral fold; lateral scales increasing
regularly in size from the ventrals, sub-round, widely separated from each
other by minutely granular intervals, strongly muconate keeled. Dorsal
scales in 24 series from nape to opposite femur, all strongly mucronate
keeled, and rugose; the median series like the others. Caudal whorls
very spinous, the scales not serrate, but striate on the surface. Femoral
pores, seven on each side ; preanal plates small, equal, except two mar-
ginal a little longer.
Muzzle to vent Om 09// 2//’ | Width head... 0m .02//
Ot G6" GAIES bao odo 04” 4’ | Hind limb..... OR 0): aL
More limb 2. 35. B/! Ql GS WOOQGsbooc C6 (Vp
Color. Below and upper lip to ear, yellow; above rich brown, with
several indistinct blackish cross-shades, head above, wood brown.
Habitat. Madagascar, Mus. Essex Institute, No. 500.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE Ix.
Claudius angustatus, Cope. Yucatang Mus. Smithsonian, Proc. A. N.
Sci., Phila., 1865. This plate with the others presented to the author by
Joseph Jeanes.
“PLATE X.
Cachryx defensor, Cope, Proc. A. N. S., Phila., 1866, 124. Yucatan, ”
Mus. Smithsonian.
PLATE XI.
Laemanctus alticoronatus, Cope 1. c. 124. Mus. Smithsonian, Yucatan.
Humphreys. ] ] i0 [July 16,
To BrevET MaJon-GENERAL A. A. HUMPHREYS,
Chief of Engineers U. S. Army.
Sir—At a recent meeting of the American Philosophical Society it
was stated by one of the members that there remained on file in the En-
gineer Bureau, U. 8. A., several reports of explorations in the Territories
of the United States, awaiting the necessary funds for publication.
The Secretaries of the Society were thereupon directed to address you
on the importance of rendering the scientitic parts of the reports, and
more especially those relating to the geology of the regions traversed, ac-
cessible to the public, with as little delay as possible.
The American Philosophical Society, ever mindful of the object of its
organization, ‘‘for promoting useful knowledge,”’ feels particular solici-
tude in everything that concerns the great mineral resources of the in-
terior of the continent, called by President Grant the strong box of the
nation, and knowing that the geological explorations referred to have
been made by men eminent in science, and deserving of the confidence of
the community, is anxious that the results of their labor, acquired at
great cost to the government, shall not be superseded, or the wise cau-
tions contained therein rendered nugatory, by explorations conducted in
the interests of private speculations. ;
The liberal appropriation granted by the last Congress to the geologi-
cal survey of Nevada and Utah under Clarence King, Esq., has caused
the Society to hope that an application for the means to publish the
scientific results already obtained, and now on file, may not be without
success.
In conclusion, we would add that the present communication, as di-
rected by the Society, is intended for use, at such time and in such man-
ner as you may think most proper for carrying out the object desired, and
to aid you, so far as lies in the power of the Society, in rendering assist -
ance, as you have heretofore done, to the great scientific and industrial
interests of our country.
Signed, Charles B. Trego, E. Otis Kendall, John L. Leconte, J. P.
Lesley, Secretaries American Philosophical Society.
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF ENGINEERS,
Washington, D. C., July 8, 1869.
GENTLEMEN— Your letter of the 26th ultimo, respecting the publication
of Reports of Explorations, affords me great satisfaction, since it informs
me of the powerful aid of the American Philosophical Society in securing
authority to complete some of the chief objects of the explorations of out:
Territories by disseminating the information obtained as to their resources
and the means for their development.
It gives me pleasure to state that the Secretary of War has sanctioned
the publication of the Report on Geology, by Dr. Hayden, in connection
with the exploration of the Yellowstone and Missouri rivers, and that it
is now in the hands of the printer, and will soon be ready for distribution.
The results of Mr. Clarence King’s surveys in Utah and Nevada, will
be published as soon as they are prepared, Congress having made provi-
sion for it. The Report of Captain, now Brevet Brig. Gen. J. H. Simp-
son, has not been printed. It is hoped, however, that authority for the
publication of the scientific portions at least will be given, and to this
end your letter will afford valuable aid.
There are no other reports of explorations on the files of this office.
Cordially thanking the Society for its support, I have the honor to be,
very respecttully, your obedient servant,
A. A. HUMPHREYs,
Brig. Gen. and Chief Engineer.
=t
—
1869. ] 1 [Cope.
SYNOPSIS OF THE Extinct MAMMALIA OF THE CAVE FORMATIONS IN THE
UNITED STATES, WITH OBSERVATIONS ON SOME MyRrIAPODA FOUND IN
AND NEAR THE SAME, AND ON SOME EXTINCT MAMMALS OF THE CAVES
or AnGuILLA, W. 1., AND OF OTHER LOCALITIES.
By Epwarp D. Cope.
The following list is published in consequence of the discovery by the
writer of a number of species of Mammalia in a cave breccia in Virginia.
As the number of species previously described as having been. found in
similar situations is but small, they have been added. Ihave not inserted
the extra-cave species of the beds known as Champlain, since it is not
certain that they represent parts of the same fauna, though it is highly
probable that they do. The coexistence of a number of species appar-
ently still living on our territory, with some restricted to South America,
and with others entirely extinct, is a point of considerable interest. The
cotemporaneity of man with the Mastodon on this continent is not a mat-
ter of doubt* ; and the coexistence of the Mastodon and recent peccary
D. torquatus, and the extinct D. compressus is equally certain. These
species were cotemporaneous at Galena, witha fauna quite similar to that
which I found in Virginia.
The cave breccia consists, in the localities where examined Be me, of a
number of irregular masses, occupying depressions and short galleries, in
the southeast side of a line of hills in Wythe County, Virginia. When
these masses are excavated from their beds the floor and roof of a portion
of a cave is exposed, with the stalactites, stalagmites, and usual incrus-
tations. Sometimes the termini of the masses could not be reached, and
they wound about between large blocks of limestone which once, no
doubt, had lain on the floor of a subterranean chamber.
The teeth and bones were discovered at three different points ; two of
them near together, on the property of Abraham Painter, and the third
about three miles on the same side of the same ridge. The Kanawha
(New) River cuts the hill at the latter point, and on the side of a bluff
the cavity occurred, containing Castor, Dicotyles, etc. On the other side
of the same ridge, three miles further in the same direction, I examined
several similar cavities of breccia, but could find no organic remains,
while Abraham Painter, an old resident and careful observer, informed
me that the deposit could be found on the hill side, in continuation of
those on his property, for a distance of two miles in the opposite direction.
The limestone of this ridge abounds in the Carbonates of Lead and
Zinc, and there can be little doubt that they predispose the rock to easy
~ decomposition. It is also probable that, as Lesley shows, the decomposi-
tion has been followed by the successive deposit, as a precipitate of the
more insoluble Silicates of those metals. This is rendered highly prob-
able‘by the mode in which the silicates occur with reference to the car-
bonates. While the latter are distributed through the limestone rock
* See Leidy, Nott and Gliddon Indigenous Races of the Earth, p. xviii.
79
Cope.] 1 4 [JulyL>,
in place, the former occupy irregular pockets, caverns and veins. They
occur as incrustations, sometimes tubular and of singular tenuity, as
well as in masses.
The breccia caverns no doubt had their origin in the same way. The
ready decomposition of the limestone has permitted them to be rapidly
formed and filled again.
It is interesting to note that the only similar bone deposits occur in the
galena bearing Hill Limestone of Illinois. These have been described
by Drs. Leconte and Leidy, and their species are included in the present
list.
MEGALONYX JEFFERSONII Harlan. Fragments of teeth. Found also in
caves in Tennessee, Georgia and Alabama.
STEREODECTES TORTUS, Cope, gen. et. sp. nov.
This animal is represented by a nearly perfect upper incisor tooth, and
fragments of numerous others. It appears to be a rodent, and the tooth
in question presents several points of resemblance to that of Arctomys
monax, from which it does not differ much in size. The characters
which determine its distinction from that genus are very important, and
indicate widely different affinities. The central pulp cavity is exceedingly
small, and the tooth for a length no doubt considerably above that of the
A.monax, solid, with that exception. At the distal fractured extremity
it is narrowly linear in the plane of compression of the tooth, while at the
proximal fracture it is round, and of perhaps a shade greater diameter.
The anterior face of the tooth is as usual, covered with an enamel layer
about as thick as that in Arctomys, which extends round the outer face,
covering its anterior two-fifths, and is very slightly decurved on the inner
plane face. Viewed from the centre of the are which the tooth describes,
the shaft is seen to form a slight sigmoid. ‘The posterior narrowed mar-
gin forms a still stronger sigmoid, throwing the extremities of the shaft
in opposite directions. JI have not observed this torsion in any living
genus of Rodentia, except in abnormal specimens. — :
The specific characters are as follows: A section of the shaft is a nearly
isosceles spherical triangle. Distally the inner face is more nearly plane
than the outer, while proximally the outer is the less oblique of the two.
The anterior face is convex in section, and regularly continuous to the
outer side. There is a slight groove below the edge of the enamel on the
inner side, and a few weak transverse indications across the shank. The’
enamel is nearly smooth, under the microscope displaying weak, minute
striae, much asin Arctomys. The are in profile is a perfectly regular
segment of a circle. The color is white, and this in a matrix where the
yellow color of incisors of other Rodentia is well preserved. °
Length of chord between outer circumference at frac- mee
(HUG! CMSs ocebesgoos soos Bor Oibia aero ote 04 saatheronglOs
Long diameter proximal end.............. st ieee eRe
Short y° gs O85 Che ter syste eet see PS baie lore)
I am unable to throw much light on the affinities of the animal which
1869. ] 175 [Cope.
bore these teeth. They are more compressed than in the Beaver, and
deeper than in the Vischaca ; they are not so narrowed anteriorly as in
theagutis. The solidity is only approached by the Castorides ohien sis,
and to some degree Amblyrhiza inun data, of the same period.
Castor FIBER, Linn. C. Canadensis, Kuhl.
Portion of mandible with three molars, not distinguishable from recent
specimens.
NEOTOMA MAGISTER, Baird. Mammals of North America, p. , tab.
Said to be larger, and otherwise different from the following. Found
in the Bone Caves near Carlisle, in the great Appalachian Valley, in
Pennsylvania.
NEOTOMA ?FLORIDANUM, Say. et. Ord.
A superior molar, incisors, and other portions. The first is not larger
than in recent animals, and does not conform in peculiarities to those
ascribed by Baird to his N. magister from the Pennsylvania Bone
Caves. The latter is, however, described from mandibular pieces.
The recent Neotoma of this species is exceedingly common in allof the
caves which I examined. Their marks can be found from near the
mouths to the most remote recesses. They build, in dry places in the
more distant chambers, nests of complete and durable construction. In
such a chamber in the Hoge’s Cave, Montgomery County, Va., I found
a number of these nests near together and fastened by interwoven sticks
and corn-husks in some mass, to the points and crevices of the rocks.
The upper surface of the pile, in which the nest was made, was composed
apparently of chewed linden bark, forming a soft, tough, and nearly
white material. This surface was always oblique, and enclosed a round
cavity, large enough to hold one’s two fists, which was entered by a mouth
a little more contracted than the whole diameter. Numerous fresh seeds
of the Celtis pumila lay about them. They are sweet, and the small
tree which produces them is abundant where the traces of the cave were
found. Seeds undistinguishable from these are abundant in the limestone
breccia with the remains of Neotoma, and testify to the identity of habit
of this species in the days of Tapirs, Peccaries and Sloths.
ARCTOMYS MONAX, Gmel. The Ground Hog. One nearly perfect ramus
mandibuli with all teeth but the last molar, not distinguishable from re-
cent examples. :
Found also at Galena. (See Leidy, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., XI., p-
100.)
Arvicona, Sp. Noted by Leidy, 1. c., from Galena, Il.
GEOMYS BURSARIUS. Leidy, l. c., p. 100.
Found at Galena by Dr. E. D. Kittoe with numerous other species
enumerated by Leconte and Leidy.
HESPEROMYS ? LEUCOPUS, Raf.
Molar teeth undistinguishable from those of this common mouse.
Cope.] 1 14 [July 16,
TAMIAS LAEVIDENS, Cope, sp. nov.
This ground squirrel is indicated by the distal half of a mandibular
ramus, with adjacent fragments, probably of maxillary and squamosal.
The successional first molar appears above the alveolar border, and an-
other tooth apparently is in place, but so encrusted with calcite, as to be
quite obscured.
This species differs in three marked peculiarities from the T. stri-
atus. The first molar has two anterior cusps instead of one; they are
separated by a deep groove ; there is also a little cusp between the ex-
ternal two. The incisor teeth are not striate grooved on their anterior
face, asin T. striatus, though they have three narrow grooves on the
outer longitudinal angle; they are wax yellow anteriorly. Third, the
ramus is more slender, especially in the portion anterior to the molars ;
the depth at the mental foramen is just half the length between the first
molar and the base of the incisor above. As in T. striatus, this foramen
is nearer the superior outline of the ramus. There is less curvature visible
in the inferior face than in some individuals of the existing species.
Lines-
JU Sralen ck TATIONS CHbIRS KONE WO) Ws Noo ondodocGucoobo0 4094 40< 2.6
Depthvatmental foramen ry) yeriere eters alr larelo ae ote 1.4
U6 (0 86 SiVESIh WOU pooo oc sogadpoosenomedocoouasee eps ball
IDWATNEEIE TNENSOs 36s ca nibodopocooagdadDoddaDoGDOGODOS alte
IDO iG WIE es sodclo6as cob cccdasgnoDoMOoDOD OOO ODGOuS 2.2
ScruRUS PANOLIUS, Cope, sp. nov.
A small squirrel of the size of the Chipmunk (Tamias striatus),
but of the type of dentition and form of the Sciurus hudsonius. It is
represented by a ramus mandibuli, containing two molar teeth, and the
included portion of the incisor, the coronoid, and vertical ramus being
lost. Numerous fragments, including incisors, ete., are probably to be
referred to this species.
The ramus is quite flat, being perfectly plane on the inner face, below
the molars; its diameter below the first is equal to that at the incisive ©
alveolar margin above. Theseries of molars is very little oblique to the
plane of the ramus, and, judging by the positions of the anterior three,
not curved. There is, therefore, but a slight projection of the alveolar
border on the inner face of the ramus. The least depth of the edentu-
lous portion, equals the chord from the base of the first molar to the edge
of incisive alveolus. The mental foramen is near the middle of this
length, and a little above the middle of its depth. The anterior margin
of the masseteric fossa, is below the posterior third of the first molar.
The two molars are well worn, the first being successional: the animal
was therefore adult. The worn faces are concave; the inner .anterior
point of the margin is the most elevated, while the two external lobes are
in both the most prominent. There is also a slight emargination on the
inner face. The first molar is about as long as wide, the second a little
wider than long, and slightly oblique forwards and inwards; the inner
ry
1869. ] 1 if) [Cope.
and outer lateral margins in each are about equal. In profile the first is
slightly the more elevated of the two.
Measurements.
Lines.
Length of ramus from maxillary foramen to incisive al-
VEOMUE GOOG ca cdooponopoounboboeoS aclonadodneodbee tba)
Length of bases of two anterior molars.......... Peano!)
es from base of m. 1 to do. of incisor.............. 1.7
oS “¢ mental foramen to base of incisor....... . 1.55
Least depth ramus (near mental foramen)............ 2.
Depth ramus at first tooth......... eG Aehistaliei usr eveneconseanerse ome sO
se ue GT ee tee Saasree aoc viret Suse SB mes ah 2.4
Width ue Second oyiges= = see Kava water Nel srareeneeamitlce
These indicate a much stouter form than in the Tamias striatus.*
The foramen mentale is lower in position; the series of molars is much
less oblique to the axis of the ramus than in the chipmunk, and the inci-
sor tooth is stouter. As compared with the S. hudsonius the measure-
ments are absolutely one third greater, indicating a difference in size of
nearly two to one. Viewed from above the thickness of the ramus at the
middle in Se. panolius is proportionately very much less, while at the
incisive margin there is less difference; the two measurements being
equal in 8. panolius, the incisive much narrower in Sc. hudsonius.
The first molar in the existing species is narrower outside than inside and
simple; in Sc. panolius, equal and emarginate.
This little species has not furnished sufficient materials to indicate its
relationships fully; but it is smaller than any true squirrel now inhabiting
the United States. -
LEPUS SYLVATICUS, Bachm.
Numerous molar and incisor teeth from both jaws, and two partially
broken rami of the mandible. One of these is broken off behind the third
molar; another complete only as far.as the usual line of the coronoid
process, and containing the second, third and fourth molars. These por-
tions are similar to those of the common species now found throughout
the eastern district of North America. Also from Galena; see Leidy 1. ec.
XI, p. 100.
ANOMODON SNYDERI, Leconte. Amer. Journ. Sci., 1848, 103. Journ.
Ac. Nat. Sci., Phil., I1J, 171, Tab.
A large and remarkable insectivore known only as yet from an incisor
tooth from Galena.
BULARINA, sp.
A nearly complete ramus with dentition perfect, of about the size of
that of the common B. talpoides was found, but unfortunately
mislaid.
* See Baird. U.S Pac- R. R. Exp]. VIL, Tab. XLVI, 2 and 1.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—W
1 716 [July 16,
Cope. ]
VESPERTILIO, 8p.
Numerous bones of bats occur in the breccia. <A portion of maxillary
with teeth was preserved, but fractured in the attempt to expose it.
TAPIRus HAYsII, Leidy.
Several inferior maxillary molars. They all have a rather greater an-
teroposterior diameter than those of the existing Central and South
American species.
Equus ?compiicatus, Letdy. H. americanus, Leidy.
Upper and lower milk and permanent molars.
DicoryLEs NAsuTus, Leidy. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philada., 1868,
Several molar and canine teeth.
DicotyLEs compressus, Leconte. Platygonus compressus, Lec., etc.
Amer. Journ. Sci., 1848, 102. Dicotyles, Leidy, Trans. Am. Soc., XI, p.
97, also X, 324,
Not found by me in Virginia; abundant at Galena and elsewhere.
CARIACUS VIRGINIANUS, Gray. Cervus, Bodd.
Molars and other fragments of this species are perhaps the most abun-
dant in the breccia. One posterior portion of ramus mandibuli with
tooth in situ is in the collection.
Bos ?antiquus. Bison, Leidy.
Molar teeth.
URSUS AMPLIDENS, Leidy. Proeeed. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1853.
A single posterior lower molar of this species, identical with that de-
seribed by Leidy from a ravine near Natchez.
Ursus AMERICANUS, Linn. Leidy, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phila., III,
169.
From various caves; not found by me in Virginia.
Procyon Priscus, Leconte. Leidy, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., ITI, 169.
Perhaps the same as the next. From Galena.
PROc¥YON. LOTOR, Linn.
A posterior inferior molar; not distinguishable in any point from a
specimen froma New Jersey peat swamp, both identical with the common
raccoon.
MIXOPHAGUS SPELAEUS.
This animal is represented by a molar tooth, which though somewhat
imperfect is so characteristic as to require notice. It appears to have
been derived from the lower jaw from the behind position of the sectorial.
It resembles the tubercular sectorial of the bear, but is even less acutely
tuberculate, and is a little smaller than the same tooth in the raccoon.
The surface of the crown exhibits concavities between small pointed
cusps. The outer margin is a low ridge of four cusps. In front it rises
into a more elevated cusp. Here also the tooth is wider, and presents a
wider plane of the crown. Part of the inner margin is here broken away,
but a little behind its middle a stronger cusp rises, one-third of the width
1839.] vial [Cope.
within the inner margin. The posterior margin is slightly elevated, and
in front of it is another very small cusp, similar to those on the external
margin.
The characters are less carnivorous than those in Ursus, and approach
remotely the smoothness of Cercoleptes. There are indications of two
roots, one of which is broken away. The are of the base of the
crown determines the position of this one, and of the anterior margin of
the tooth. The strong anterior tubercle is slightly transverse, and the
anterior face near its crest being preserved, indicates the extremity of the
crown to have been but little beyond. Hence the following measurements:
Lines.
Length to crest of transverse tubercle....,......,..... 3.7
Width at median outer tubercle....................... 2.5
Depth crown between roots...... SharisiByatine lee RAS e OWA tte 1.8
WiiclthvotTo ote cee ele bcio sie We a Mata coe hea eG ra 1,6
GALERA PERDICIDA,* Cope, sp. nov.
This is a small carnivore of the Lutrine group of the Mustelidae, appa-
rently allied to Mephitis and Lutra. It is only represented by a left ra-
mus of the mandible, with dentition complete. Its characters are as
follows: Dentition es Be i :. The tubercular molar is relatively
as in the allied genera, but without sharp tubercle; the sectorial charac-
terizes the genus as distinct from the two mentioned. The posterior lobe
is without the marked internal and external acute tubercle seen in Me-
phitis, nor the tubercular crest of Lutra, but is rounded and slightly
concave. The median crests, inner and outer, are strongly developed,
and with the anterior, quite as in Mephitis.
The jaw pertained to an adult individual of smaller size than the com-
mon skunk, Mephitis chinga. The bases of the crowns of the first and
second premolars, and to the outer side of the canine are surrounded by
a well marked cingulum. The length of the crown of the molar is
greater in proportion to the length than in the skunk. The axis of
the coronoid process is as in it, at right angles to that of the ramus.
The latter is straighter on the inferior border than in the skunk, and ex-
hibits a marked difference in the angle being nearly on the same line, and
not raised above it, as in the species of American skunks and otters, fig-
ured by Baird.
Measurements.
Lines.
From angle to outer incisive alveolus............ see salds6
Depth at coronoid............ PETS Ah ines Oe Ate Me A le both 8.
From base condyle to tubercular molar............... 5.
iene thysectomialgmolarannee eae ee en nee .. 0.6
Width fe COREG DSP ARED 50) URW BA Cat ees OES HY 1.2
Height from basal shoulder......................-. ee
* Depth ramus at tubercular.......... EOE ceuat ley hyn: 2.7
‘y OAD ME NB OLS: Pes Big er pide Rather nt Asan Ase AAS See Bh alh
Length of crown of canine............... US bias Bi 5. 1)
* The pedant would write this perdicicida.
~
Cope. ] : 1 i 8 [July 16,
There are two mental foramina in the specimen, one below the third,
the other below the first premolar. The crown of the canine is contracted
and curved; slightly flattened on the inner side.
Recapitulation.
Wiholemumberiotspeclessnnere creas ce ecemckeire eer 27
INtIMbEerteXbINCti. ote eee crm sore setts eens ne ete re enero 14
GENETATEXTIMC HY Ae Nee hates oem etardin thesis cw cclerniel whee Syne eae 5
ic roMNeoLroplcal tiypenar-aciiee eras cele eee eerie 6
Helices are extremely abundant in the matrix, with a few other mol-
luscs. They have been identified for me by my friend, Geo. W. Tryon,
as follows:—
Mesodon dentiferus, Binney.
‘¢ major, Binn.
‘¢ albolabris, Say.
Xolotrema appressa, Say.
Xolotrema palliata, Say.
Stenotrema sp. near hirsuta.
Anculotus carinatus.
Associated were numerous vertebre of Crotalus and perhaps Tropido-
notus, fragments of Trionyx and Cistudo, and. Menopoma. Also frag- -
ments of a Unio, and the ungueal phalange of a bird of prey. There
were no human remains of any kind discovered in the breccia.
A collection of fossils of similar character to the preceding, was ob-
tained by Dr. Samuel Harrison of Easton, Talbot co., Maryland, and is
preserved in the cabinet of the Baltimore Academy of Natural Sciences.
The specimens were exhumed in the course of excavating for marl on the
farm of Lambert Kirby, in Oxford Neck, Talbot County. They consist
of a considerable number of fragments of the Elephas americanus,
Leidy, with two molars, the tusks, and maxillary, premaxillary and parts
of frontal bones. Fragments including parts of antlers, not distinguish-
able from Cervus canadensis, and Cariacus virginianus; the
humerus of a Chelydra not distinguishable from that of C. serpentina
and of the largest size the species is known to attain; and a portion of
the margin with posterior costal and vertebral bone of Cistudo eurypygia
Cope, sp. nov. A molar tooth accompanied the above, which resembles
that of the half grown Elephas primigeniusor E. columbi, but
has not the lateral curvature of the latter.
In the earth on the floors of the caves which abound in the lime-stone
region of South Western Virginia, the remains of the existing Mammalia
of the country may always be found. I have procured Lynx, Vulpes,
Procyon, Cariacus, Didelphys, etc. In one chamber the fresh food, ap-
parently of a raccoon, was found, consisting of fresh hazel nuts, wild
plum, choke cherry, chicken grapes, acorn, etc. In many, human remains
occur, with beads, needles of bone, ete. .
In Erhardt’s Cave, Montgomery County, Virginia, the writer found
four or five specimens of a new Anophthalmus, the A. pusio of Horn, ata
1869.] L719
[Cope.
distance of not more than three hundred feet from its mouth. The species
is small, and all were found together under a stone. Their movements
were slow, in considerable contrast to the activity of ordinary Carabide.
Myriapoda are the only articulates which can be readily found in the
remote regions of the caves, and they are not very common in a living
state. I append a list of these, with their congeners of the outer world,
which I collected in the mountainous region. Many of them have been
kindly named for one by my friend Dr. H. C. Wood, the author of the
Monograph on the American species.
ScOLOPENDRIDZ.
OPISTHEMEGA PosTicA, Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci.
This species, or a variety of it with the posterior pair of limbs con-
siderably stouter than the specimens from North Carolina, described and
figured by Wood, is one of the most abundant species in the mountains
of southwestern Virginia. It occurs every where under stones, etc., and
is very active. Its great peculiarity is the modification of the posterior ~
pair of limbs into a pair of stout jaw-like members, which like the an-
terior jaws are used in offence and defense. They seize the finger with
them easily, and penetrate the skin with their sharp chitinous points,
though not as effectively as with the jaws. Thus armed at both extremi-
ties, they are even less pleasantly handled than the Scolopocryptops se x-
spinosa, which is also common in the same country. An undescribed
Scolopocryptops, with a green body and reddish head, is also common.
LystopEraLipa. Wood, defin.
The genera of this family appear to the writer to be two, defined as
follows :
Annuli without pores. SPIROSTREPHON.
Annuli with two pores on each side the median line.
PSEUDOTREMIA G. N.
SPIROSTREPHON LACTARIUs, Brandt, Wood Monograph Myriapoda N.
A., 192, Julis lactartus, Say.
Not uncommon.
PSEUDOTREMIA CAVERNARUM, Cope, sp. nov.
This animal inhabits the deepest recesses of the numerous caves which
abound in Southern Virginia, as far as human steps can penetrate. I
have not seen it near their mouths, though its eyes are not undeveloped,
or smaller than those of many living in the forest. Judging from its re-
mains, which one finds under stones, it is an abundant species, though
rarely seen by the dim light of a candle even after considerable search.
Five specimens only were procured from about a dozen caves.
Segments twenty-nine, without dorsal keel or groove, but quite convex
in antero-posterior section, and somewhat swollen at a dorso-lateral point,
forming a slight shoulder and slightly quadrate transverse section. The
shoulder becomes much stronger on a few anterior segments. Surface of
the annulus rugose, above most so on the shoulders; laterally to the legs
Cope.] 180 [July 16,
longitudinally (with the axis) coarsely many striate. Posterior annuli
but slightly compressed, the last unarmed. Diameter of anterior seg-
ments rapidly decreasing to the head. Lateral pores not distinct on ante-
rior segments. An impressed line crosses the latter at the inner lateral
pore. Basilar segment smooth, not emarginate in front. Front sparsely
hairy ; lateral regionrather prolonged, openly emarginate. The antennze
as in the other known American species of this family, are elongate and
hairy, the relative lengths of the joints being: third longest, 3, 5, 4, 2, 7,
8, 1. Eyes in well developed triangular patches in depressions behind
the antenne.
Length 11 lines; diameter 1.1 line ; segments of specimens of consid-
erably larger size, while two taken in copula were rather smaller. Color
varying from a nearly white to a pale red.
Taken in Erhart’s Cave, Montgomery Co., and Spruce Run and Big
Stony Creek caves, in Giles Co.
PsEUDOTREMIA VUDII, Cope, sp. nov.
This species differs much from the last, and resembles rather P. caesio-
annulatus of Wood. The points separating it from the latter will be
pointed out below.
Number of segments same asin the B. cavernarum, twenty-nine,
but they are neither convex nor rugose nor coarsely striate, but marked
with a very minute, irregular longitudinal striation. Segments cylindric,
without shoulder, but with a small point directed backwards on the pos-
terior margin of the lower part of the annulus, which is enlarged on the
front segments. This elevation is furnished on the anterior and posterior
regions, and probably everywhere, in an uninjured condition, with a
bristle. On the anterior segments a hair in front of each pore. Front
plane, with finer and coarser hairs sparsely distributed. Labral margin
with an opennotch. Antenne hairy, with a bristle at the distal extremity
of each joint. Lengths, 3rd, 5th, 4th, 2nd, 8th, 7th, lst; the eighth joint
longer than in A. cavernarum. Hye patch triangular, notin a depres-
sion. Posterior segments considerably compressed, the last scutum with
four transparent marginal bristles ; extremity of body. slightly recurved.
Total length, eleven lines.
Color pinkish-brown, with a pale band from below to the external pore
on each side of each annulus. ‘Top of head black.
A single specimen, the exact locality not preserved, but probably Mont-
gomery Co., and, I think, not from a cave. I have conferred on it the
name of my friend Dr. H. C. Wood, Jr., to whom we are indebted for a
system of the Myriapoda, and the means of studying the American
species. It differs from the A. caesioannulatus of his monogtaph, in the
rounded dorsum without keel or groove, the 29 instead of 32 segments,
and the coloration. The eye patches are not in a depression, nor is the
labrum deeply emarginate, as Wood describes.
1869. ] 181 [Cope.
JULIDAE.
SPIROBOLUS AGILIS, Cope, sp. nov.
This is the pigmy of the genus, and is not less distinguished by the
small number of its segments, and the greater activity of its movements.
The short antennae, and anteriorly produced second segment, are precisely
those of other species of the genus.
Segments thirty-eight, smooth above, but with delicate, irregular
longitudinal striae below. Front higher than wide, smooth, not punc-
tate, but with a faint trace of median groove. Two rows of hairs on and
above the labral margin. Bristles of the legs weak. Preanal plate trans-
verse narrow elliptic. Antennz sparsely hairy. Total length, eight lines.
Color, wood-brown, with a reddish posterior marginal band to each seg-
ment ; front and antenne pink.
Giles County, Va.
CAMBALA ANNULATA Cope, Julus annulatus Say, J. A. N. S., 1st, II,
103. Spirostrephon Newport, Wood. ?‘‘ Julus lactarius Say’? Gray et
Newport not of Say. Cambala lactaria Gray and Newport.
Gervais and Wood have pointed out the error of Gray and Newport in
regarding this animal as the the J. lactarius Say, but have not suspected
that it is the J. annulatus of the same author. The species is quite rare,
as I have seen but one specimen, which I took in the Spruce Run Cave on
the Kanawha River, in Giles Co., Va. It has considerable superficial
resemblance to the Sptrostrephon lactarius, and is one of our most elegant
Myrapoda. In generic characters it has the second annulus of Julus, and
the short thick antennz of Spirobolus, but adds a speciality in the almost
obliteration of the visual organs. These are reduced to a single linear
series of not very distinct occelli immediately adjoining the margin of the
basilar segment on each side.
Segments sixty-one ; color deep mahogany brown above. Total length
2 in. 2 lin.
Say’s description applies exactly to our specimen. It would not be
safe to insist that this is the Cambala lactaria of Newport, but it most
probably belongs to the same genus, characterized by linear eye-patches.
JULUS MONTANUS, Cope, sp. nov.
This species is in most respects similar to the J. pennsylvanicus as
given by Wood. There are two impressions on the vertex ; the antennae
are elongate ; the last scutum is prolonged into a moderate straight mucro,
and the posterior segments are quite pilose. The color is a dark brown
with a series of blackish dots on each side. It differs from J. pennsyl-
vanicus solely, so far as can be ascertained, in having 69 instead of 63
segments, and in the median portions of the same being smooth, and the
_inferior portions closely many grooved, instead of having ‘‘above punctae
which give rise to obsolete grooves,’’ Wood.
Mountains of Giles and Montgomery Counties.
PoLYDESMID#, Latr.
POLYDESMUS VIRGINICUS.
PoOLYDESMUs CoRRUGATUS, Wood.
=
Cope.] 1 82 July 16,
ANDROGNATHID&, Ham. nov.
A group intermediate between the suborders Strongylia and Sugentia.
Characters. The labium a broad slightly cordate plate, extending be-
neath the consolidated elements of the front, and having a slight mem-
branous marginal attachment externally, leaving a small oval orifice at
the anterior extremity. The mandibles rudimental, extremely minute,
far within the margin of the inferior face of the head, composed apparently
of two segments. Segments of the body consolidated. Preanal segment
an uninterrupted cylinder.
/.
ANDROGNATHUS,* Cope, genus novum.
Char.—Joints of the antennae five, the sixth and seventh confluent,
and with the closely joined fifth, forming a club, supported by the short
proximal joints; segments of the body numerous, (over fifty in the only
species, ) muzzle short.
This singular genus is one of the hitherto unknown forms connecting
the suctorial group of Myriapoda with the mandibulate. It furnishes a
clue also to the structure of the suctorial mouth of the former group,
which appears to have been as yet unexplained. Thus we see that the
mandibles disappear, and the labium extends, and uniting by its margins
on either side leaves the mouth a transverse fissure. With a further
union of the mandibles with a prolonged labrum on each side, we would
have a form of Sugentia, perhaps like Brachycybe of Wood, between
which and the Polydesmidae the present genus stands. Like many of
the members of the latter family, this one occurs under bark of decaying
logs, though its food is more probably of a soft character, as the de-
composing fungi often found in such situations or the bodies of dead in-
sects and molluscs.
ANDROGNATHUS CORTICARIUS, Cope, sp. nov.
This is a rather slender and cylindric species with fifty-six segments,
having rather short, strong, lateral laminae projecting abruptly from all
except the anal. The dorsal portion of the segment is convex above the
lamina, but less so than the ventral. The anterior laminae are transverse
but the majority have an oblique anterior truncation. Non sheathing
part of each segment slightly convex, and divided on the median line by
a groove, within which runs a delicate thread or bead, which is raised
on the lower part of the segment, and extends throughout the length.
Upper surface of segment also divided transversely by one annular groove,
the raised portions being minutely rugose. The same rugosity exists
below the laminae. The anterior shields and laminae at least, have a fine
pubescence. The antennae and front are densely pubescent. Labral
margin flat, not emarginate. The muzzle is not so long as the antennae,
and less contracted than in Wood’s figure of Brachycybe. Anal annulus .
elongate, smooth, truncate, enclosing the short lateral anal plates. Length
nine lines; proportions slender. Color in life, a very pale yellowish |
brown, lighter below. |
From Montgomery County, Virginia.
* gyno man, 7va00¢ jaw.
1830.) 183
[Cope.
IT. Description of two large extinct rodents from Anguilla, West Indies,
with remains of human art associated.
AMBLYRHIZA, Cope.
Molars curved prismatic, rootless, some composed of four, others of
five dentinal columns, separated by more or less transverse plane lami-
nae of enamel; the whole enclosed in a sheath of cementum. The fangs
contracted, closing one or more of the dentinal columns at the base.
Triturating surfaces plane, subquadrate, or subtrigonal. Incisors nar-
row, with very small pulp cavity for much of the length ; anterior plane
transverse, the enamel equally folded in a narrow band on the inner and
outer faces. Digits subungulate.
The characters of the genus ally these animals to the Chinchillae, and do
not present more thana small number of differences, though important
ones. Thus the closure of the dentinal columns below, indicates either
a limit to the formation and protrusion of teeth of the same degree of
complication, or the entire termination of such process, as in the root
bearing types. It presents in fact an interesting transition between the
monophyodont and diphyodont structures. There are two extinct genera
related to the Chinchillae, with which the present may be compared ;
Archaeomys Laiz. Par. and Megamys D’orb. The first is said only to
differ from Lagidium in the presence of an additional dentinal column, so
that the form of the root is to be presumed to be the same ; it therefore
differs from Amblyrhiza in that respect, as well as in having the dentinal
columns # instead of 3. The known species are from the fresh-water
limestone of Allier, France. Megamys patagoniensis is only known from
a tibia and rotula, and its dental characters are therefore not ascertain-
able. I cannot refer the present animal to that genus with any proba-
bility. The species is much larger than that described by D’orbigny.
AMBLYRHIZA INUNDATA, Cope. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philada.,
1868, p. 313.
The remains of this large rodent were found in a mass of breccia, which
was thrown out in the excavations made in a cavern in the small Island
of Anguilla, W. I. The remains occurring in that most eastern region
of the West Indian Zoological district, might be anticipated to have a
special interest in connection with the history of the submergence of a
‘once great continent. With this impression, the writer examined a quan-
tity of the above breccia and cave deposit, which was brought to Phila-
delphia as a probably available phosphatic manure. It was found to be
valueless for this purpose, and the only result of the outlay was the dis-
covery of the Amblyrhiza. Most of the fragments were dressed from a
single block. There were in this the extremity of a right femur with
patella, shafts of various long bones, fragments of pelvis and maxillary
bones, with three molars, and two partially complete, and other much
broken incisors. The teeth were scattered among the bones, and are so
related in size to most of them, as to induce the belief that they all be-
long to the same animal. This is strengthened by the occurrence of the
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—X
Cope. ] 1 84 [July 16,
distal portion of the right femur of another individual in another mass,
and the entire absence of bones or fragments which could be referred to
any other animal. In the matrix occurred Turbo pica L., whereby the
postpliocene age of the deposit is to be inferred.
The molars belong to an animal of the average size of the Cashoroiles
chiensis Foster, and as the epiphysis of the femur is not yet codssified,
‘and the animal is young, I have no doubt, the proportions of the species
are quite equal to those of the beforementioned largest of known Ro-
dentia. This is confirmed by the proportions of the femora, whose shaft
and condyles are larger than those of the 2 Cervus elaphus of four years
old, with which I have compared it. What the bulk may have been, is
difficult to infer without additional portions of the skeleton, but it is suf-
ficiently obvious that this ancient chinchilla exceeded the Virginian
deer, and more than equalled the American Black Bear in this respect.
Three molars are preserved, two of which present four dental columns,
and one three. These columns are transverse, the first, which I assume to
be anterior, transverse ; the second the longest, the third shortened in-
wardly, and slightly curved round the very small fourth, which occu-
pies a posterior-external angle of the crown. All are separated by rather
thick enamel lamine. The form of the crown of the largest presents
two sides of a square anteriorly and externally, the inner side bilobed in
correspondence with the two anterior columns; the posterior strongly
convex backwards and outwards. The other, similar molar, differs in the
posterior outline being more nearly transverse, and the anterior out-
lines being united by a continuous curve. The large portion of the third
tooth preserved is perhaps the external; it is a part of a nearly regular
transverse oval.
The first described molar is strongly curved posteriorly, and its diam-
eter narrows regularly to the contracted base ; there is a shallow groove
at the junction of the anterior enamel lamina with the inner wall. This
groove is much more strongly marked in the second described, but ceases
before attaining the contracted extremity. The shank of the tooth is less
curved than in the other. The contraction is less gradual than in the
first, but is strongly marked at the base, where the pulp cavity is not
wider than one of the columns.
Lines
Length anterior face No. 1 (on curve)................ 14.3
Diameterjerowa Congitudinal)s se: anaes eeee 6.
fe ic: GURAMSV.CTSC) iran tes cone coe ae ocion ern 5.7
ou THO MC HOIGLINEN)) SG ons bopoascusnencodboccs 4.
enothyanteriortaceiNonca- oh dace eee eee eeeroe . 14.8
Diameter shanks (longitudinal)e.-it-).4 ceria taeteite é.
fe se, 0 \(UPATIS VONSE))| p< pevavaya< ten gests choyenveiererelewel tate 5.
A portion of one of the inferior incisors of some forty-six lines in length,
and another shorter piece, furnish characters of the species and genus.
The inner face of the tooth is plane, and at right angles to the anterior ;
the outer is rounded obliquely inwards ; the inner face is broad and not
1859. ] H 85 [Cope.
prolonged ; the curve of the tooth is in one plane, and the depth is about
equal to the width. A narrow fold of the enamel embraces the anterior
border of the inner and outer faces ; it is folded back at a right angle
within and with a truncate angle without. The enamel is sculptured into
numerous close, fine longitudinal grooves, which do not inosculate. The
separating ridges number 14 near the middle of the tooth, those near the
borders being the strongest. One, strongest of all, is on the external
turn of the enamel, and near it numerous interrupted ridges have a slightly
oblique direction.
The incisors are, as in the modern representatives of the Amblyrhiza,
of more slender proportions than in the beavers, Arctomys, and other
rodents, and their extinct predecessors. They are, also, relatively
less stout than those of the Castoroides. Their sculpture is quite similar
to that seen in the Lagidium and other chinchillas.
Lines
Width anteriorly........ Sehsreysih sl sista ieiaps Bits Sid RUS eek mieistevens: as
IDXSVO1A Tare ea orem a ere ae isueyerayenetsiene eRecichapt tects Para ciskiis ass 5.17
Having requested Dr. Rijgersma to make further search in the locali-
ties where the preceding specimens were obtained, that gentleman made
a special trip to Anguilla, and made a successful search among the debris
and in the caves, whence the supposed phosphatic earth had been exca-
vated. He found a considerable number of bones and five additional
molars of Amblyrhiza ; also seven molars referred below to a distinct and
allied genus (Loxomylus Cope) with numerous incisor teeth belonging to
both genera.
Two adjacent molars of the first named, are in excellent preservation,
and the posterior displays one dentinal column more than any other
tooth ; it is, therefore, probably the posterior superior. They all display
the curved shank and plane crown and contracted root already described.
A portion of a superior incisor measures 1.35 mm. in transverse diameter, —
and 1.4 mm. in depth.
A distal phalange (figured) displays -clearly the subungulate character
of the genus, in its straight shaft and depressed, truncate extremity. It
was found with a few of the teeth and other bones of this species, which
are distinguished from the others by their bright red color.
On a third examination of the locality Dr. Rijgersma found some
masses of breccia, in one of which is enclosed a very fine superior incisor
of the left side, probably belonging to this species. Both extremities are
broken off, but the remaining fragment measures 7 in. 5 lin. in length;
the width of the anterior or enamel covered face is nearly eight lines, and
the depth eleven lines; the latter measurement somewhat increased by the
partial crushing of the shaft. The enamel exhibits the usual longitudi-
nal ridges, but there are two stronger a little within the external margin,
and another strongly marked, a quarter inch within the inner margin.
This tooth indicates an animal as large as the largest known Castoroides,
for though the incisors of some of the latter slightly exceed those of the
present animal, these teeth have a larger proportion to the general bulk
in Castoroides than in Amblyrhiza.
ao
Cope. | 1 56 [July 16,
The extremity of the femur is remarkably broad and depressed ; it ex-
pands a little at the condyles. The trochlear groove is but little raised
above the plane of the anterior (superior) face of the femur, while its lat-
eral bounding ridges are strong, the inner the more prominent. The
width of the groove is about equal to the transverse diameter of the
tuberosity on the inner side, and greater than that of the outer. The
faces of the condyles are. quite inferior, and sub-depressed, the outer ex-
tending rather more posteriorly than the inner. Both are so separate
from the trochlear groove as not to have had any continuous face with it;
this is not entirely clear, as the surface is slightly injured at the point of
connection. The inter-condyloid fossa is continuous both with the infe-
rior face of the femur, and with the trochlear groove, without separating
ridges, as many rodents exhibit. Just above the inner condyle there is
a strongly marked fossa of a regularly rounded form.
The general character of the two femora confirms those of the teeth, as
of a large rodent. The form and relations of the articular faces differ
alike from those exhibited by Carnivores, Ungulates and Edentates. The
patella, which pertains to one of the femora, is an elongate bone, with
thinned and rounded distal extremity. The proximal portion is lost, but
at the fracture the section is very convex. More distally it is flat.
In. Lin-
Width femur just above condyles................. 2 3.7
Depth ce “ Set Re NM ec rote ieee 14.
ANAC ENG TH OSKOSMIBIOS, 6o5500dcn00000000000d00008 5 3 4.8
GG . ROG MEENP CROOWE, GhIstAMly, 6 654oc0seo00ed006 16.
Gc, MMV, COMCV Cs eels eae ee pe ds. eae nuances 14.2
Se ROUGET: Be atlas Shasta eaeou the gests aici Gaile abate ea eas 18.
OG Than eNOVEHVIIONG! WORISEIs 0a coo pacaaeoensanecdac ie
Wenethiytralomemibyp aitelllaseeetercte statue) carer 2 6.
Width at middle OMB oo teeta usbeeccucks save) eaten cuca gs 146
Depth at fracture..... Eee eines ane 10.4
Loxomy.us, Cope.
Molars straight, prismatic, composed of three dentinal columns, one of
which is incurved, but none closed at the base. The triturating surface
very oblique in the vertical direction, indicating the greater elevation of
the teeth at one extremity of the series than the other. <A horizontal
obliquity of the dentinal columns is produced by their lateral displace-
ment. Enamel plates but slightly curved. An external cementum layer.
This genus differs in many points from Amblyrhiza ; these are, the lack
of one and two dentinal columns ; the double obliquity of the crowns, the
absence of curvature, and less closure of the base. It is nearer to Arch-
aeomys Laiz. et Par., but differs in two points; that the upper molars
have but three dentinal columns like the lower, instead of four, and that
the horizontal grinding surface is oblique. This last peculiarity alone
seems to distinguish it from Jagidium and Chinchilla, indicating a rela-
tion to the latter similar to that between the great extinct beaver of
Europe Trogontherium cuvieri, and the existing genus Castor.
) ber
1859. ] 18 ‘ [Cope.
LOXOMYLUS LONGIDENS, Cope.
This large rodent is represented by seven molar teeth and probably
some incisors and bones of the skeleton; all except one tooth in the col-
lection made by Dr. H. E. Van Rijgersma in the caves, and caye breccia
taken from the caves in the island of Anguilla, West Indies.
I cannot distinguish the incisors as belonging to this species, and they
are probably identical in character with those of the Amblyrhiza inun-
data, asis generally the case with nearly allied genera and species of
Rodents.
A section of all except the terminal teeth is an oblique rhomboid, the
longitudinal diameter being but little greater than the transverse. A
Single terminal tooth (either superior posterior or anterior inferior ), is
narrowed in the terminal column. All the teeth possess one longitudinal
groove on one side and two on the other, which are covered but not ob-
literated by the cement layer. The teeth, though much straighter and
more slender than those of Amblyrhiza, yet possess a light lateral, though
no antero-posterior curvature ; those of the upper and lower series cury-
ing in opposite directions.
Inches.
Wenetheoteapme dianenn olan reeyryaeistae traits tiers Wee
Antero-posterior diameter (oblique)................... De
Transverse se (both of crown)....... eat Se ANAS,
48 MY terminal molar............. oa
Longitudinal a ie SECS eaae bo ooaks 56
One tooth of this species was taken from a mass containing molars and
incisors of A. inundata, and the species is without doubt of identical
age with it. Its molars indicate a less robust animal; but I find no in-
cisors which indicate an animal of generally small size. An inferior in-
cisor to which adheres a portion of a molar apparently of this species, is
not distinguishable from that of the A.inundata. It measures .11 in.
in length and .012 in width anteriorly. This species was probably as
large as but more slender than the Amplyrhiza.
The Island of Anguilla could not readily have supported a fauna of
which these huge rodents formed a part. Such large animals have no doubt
ranged over a more extended territory. This, and other facts mentioned
by Pomel, lend probability to the hypothesis of the latter author, that the
submergence of the ranges connecting many of the Islands of the Antilles
has taken place subsequent to Pliocene times.
Associated with the preceding remains, Dr. Rijgersma discovered a
highly interesting relic of the stone age of the human inhabitants of this
portion of the West Indian Islands. I use the term stone age in a chrono-
logical sense only, since the region in question possess chiefly coral rock,
and little or none that is adapted for conversion into cutting instrumenis,
so thatthe inhabitants resorted to the use of animal products, as teeth,
bones and shells. The implement found by Dr. Rijgersma is a long ovate
spoon-shaped scraper or knife, cut by human hands from the lip of the
large Strombus gigas. The ribs of the external surface and the smooth
188
Cope.] [July 18,
internal surface are easily distinguished, and the distinct natures of the
lamellar and prismatic layers have been evidently well understood by the
artificer, who has ground away the latter in order to put a sharp edge on
the former at one end. This edge is sharp, and mainly well preserved.
The implement has a greater median width, and smoothly ground thick
margin ; the end of the plate is obtuse and with thick edge, almost en-
tirely composed of the prismatic layer. It has evidently been held in the
hand, and been used after the manner of the stone chisels of the North
American Indians.
The cotemporaneity of man with postpliocene Mammalia in Europe
and North America may be considered as established. It is, however, an
important question to decide whether man occupied successively regions
more and more remote from a supposed place of origin by migration, or
whether a cotemporary postpliocene existence can be traced over the
whole earth. His remains were not found by Lund after remarkable and
extensive investigations into the postpliocene cave fauna of Brazil,
though human remains from caves not far from Rio Janeiro, are in the
Academy’s Museum. What the precise age of these is, cannot now per-
haps be stated. On the Peninsula of Florida Prof. Wyman has found
remains of Man, but not associated so far as I can ascertain with any ex-
tinct species of Mammalia.
The present shell-chisel was found by Rijgersma under circumstances
preéisely similar to those attending the discovery of the gigantic rodents.
Some portions of each of the species described were embedded in the
breccia, and others occurred loose in a red earth in cavities of the breccia.
The chisel has the color and constitution of the latter teeth and bones,
and was found with them in this earth. Some of the teeth are even
more fresh looking and less stained than the chisel. Though the evidence
is not quite conclusive, yet the inference is very strong that the Amblyr-
hiza and Loxomylus had human cotemporaries.
If now these large herbivorous animals lived before the submergence
of the mountains, whose peaks the present Virgin and other West Indian
Islands are, we are enabled, with due regard to the slenderness of the
evidence, to suggest human co-existence with that great geological event.
A probability is thus added in favor of the lateness of the period of sub-
mergence of a former Caribbean continent, as already suggested by
Pomel.
III. On two extinct Marine Mammalia from the United States.
ANOPLONASSA, Cope.
This genus is represented by a considerable portion of the mandible.
No other fragment has as yet come under my observation. The portion
does not extend posterior to the symphysis, but the latter is very long,
and the rami slender, indicating a form of muzzle quite like that ofa
gayvial or a Squalodon. It is strikingly different from the latter genus in
being for the most part edentulous. The foramina of the dental arteries
issue numerously along the outer mirgin of the superior face of the
ramus, and are more or less connected by a longitudinal groove. Shallow
.
)
1869.] 189 [Cope.
alveoli for two representatives of teeth on each side, indicate a peculiar
character of the genus. The two largest alveoli occupy the extremity of
the symphysis, looking upwards and forwards. They are closely approx-
imated, and are together wider than the mandible immediately behind
them, which expands to support them. They are shallow, with rugose
floor, which is somewhat elevated medially, and perforated by numerous
nutritious foramina. The other alveole are nearly twice the middle of
the mandible behind the anterior pair. They are much smaller than the
latter, and equally shallow, and of a longitudinal ovate form; the fundus
is rugose, not elevated, and furnished with nutritious foramina, which
are smaller than those of the edentulous gum.
That true teeth occupied these positions, appears to me doaibtful, from
their shallowness, and small foramina. I rather suppose them to have
been knobs or bosses, possibly corneous in structure. The edges of the
mandible resemble those of such edentulous Cetacea as Hyperaodon and
Xiphius, and indicate not very distant relationships to tooth bearing
types. The mental foramina are Jarge and subdivided, so that the largest
and posterior opening is inferior, the superior anterior.
The affinities of this very curious genus appear to be in a general way
with the aberrant Cetacea. The nearest types appear to be on the one
hand Sirenia, and on the other, Squalodon. How remote it may be from
either, it is difficult tostate; of approximation to either little can be said.
Should the posterior part of the ramus exhibit teeth, their character
would indicate its Sirenian or Cynorcoid relationships. We can now ouly
indefinitely regard it as a shore loving Cetacean, with a long slender
beak, which it must have used much as nippers, perhaps probing mud or
deep cavities, but for what kind of food it is difficult to imagine.
ANOPLONASSA FORCIPATA, Cope.
The length of the portion of the mandible described is seven inches,
six lines. The transverse diameter differs very little to a point half way
between the alveole, where it is gently contracted; it is then slightly ex-
panded, and presents an obtusely projecting outline at the extremity. In
profile the symphyseal extremity curves gently upwards from the point
where it first contracts, so that the ridge separating the alveole is quite
elevated. In transverse section the fragment is almost practically an
isosceles spherical triangle, with a straight superior side. The superior
face is however slightly convex in section, and a little elevated above the
dental grooves on each side. There is a slight groove on each side of the
symphysis below, which becomes very strongly marked distally. They
diverge and continue to the extremity through the mental foramina, and
reaching the upper surface nearly meet again. They enclose a strong
symphyseal ridge, which is distally divided by a groove.
Measurements.
Kenothiotdtiragment.nneer sacs = REPS Bt A Ee iad 1920
0) CO SECCAG! QINVEOMUS cco snaccesoncosbavoomoce 0735
Centre Ore Les A Acie Ahan 8 Aone Ayelet Ae ans .0140
oe of first UAW sh Be eee ear Bway RAG .0240
: C
Cope. ] 190 [July 16,
Wadthdistallycn.pacreck teisn ae eee tees US 0825
oi VeASt AL eee SICH NRE MOGs eh ee CEA Ac .0270
“ DRoPaciMWNWhyoomscodcescovtdocn eter oho ial arene .0320
ss otidistalvalveolutssemenctu nent ees ee renee .02
Ot Gr secon 8 os ssoocco Maines Merete Boo ol)
This species was found with a number of rolled fragments of Mastodon
not far from Savannah, Georgia. The specimen is silicified, is dense and
heavy, and slightly worn. Its color is black, and it resembles in all
respects the remains of the Mastodon accompanying. It is preserved in
the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass, and was lent
me for examination by Prof. Agassiz, the director.
HEMICAULODON, Cope.
This genus is established on a right upper incisor of a large Sirenian
Mammal allied to the Dugong.
The form of the tooth is that of a compressed, slightly curved cylinder,
with distal and proximal vertical diameters equal. There are two open
grooves on the inner and one similar on the outer side, the former enclos-
ing a broad bead. The transverse diameter posteriorly is less than that
anteriorly. The substance of the tooth is composed of a large axis of
osteo-dentine surrounded by a broad cylinder of dentine, which is in turn
surrounded by a thick stratum of cementum. The dentine is marked at
regular distances by annuliform ridges, which are more or less undulate.
They become gradually more distant distally. These ridges can be traced
through the cementum. The cementum is everywhere entire, and is
thicker distally. It presents externally a few longitudinal grooves at ir-
regular distances, and numerous fine striz irregularly disposed.
The pulp cavity is small and compressed; how far it extends into the
shaft is uncertain, as it is choked by hard debris; but at the lowest point
it is much contracted and sublinear. But a portion of the triturating
surface is preserved; it truncates the tooth upwards and backwards in
relation to its axis, as would be anticipated in a superior incisor.
The characters of this genus ally it to Halicore and Rhytiodus Lartet.
In Trichechodon Lankester, the dentine does not present the external
transverse ribs; the same character distinguishes it from Halitherium
Kaup; in both these genera there is a distal acumination not visible in
Hemicaulodon. Ontocetus Leidy from the Miocene of North Carolina,
which I suppose to be a large Sirenian allied to Halicore, presents very
weak and approximate dentinal ridges on part of its surface. It differs
from this genus in the acuminate form of the tooth, and it probably pre-
sented a conic apex as in Trichechodon. '
The comparison with its nearest allies is as follows. Both Halicore and
Rhytiodus have the upper incisors dilated and flattened distally, and with
a narrow oblique triturating surface. This extremity is, according to
Owen, the only portion of the tooth which is exposed beyond the gum.
In the present genus no such expansion exists so far as observed, and the
truncation and exposure of the tooth, takes place at a point which would
correspond to the basal third of the fang in those genera. In the latter
1869. ] 1 3} 1
[Cope.
this point is deep within the alveolus. It is therefore much shorter, even
supposing its extremity to have been broken off, and worn on the frac-
tured surface. Both the above genera possess a layer of enamel on the
external, and a sheath of cementum on the internal side; in this genus
there is a thick sheath of cementum all round. The plane of the worn
surface is in Halicore oblique to the short diameter of the shaft of the
tooth (see Lartet on Rhytiodus, Bull. de la Soc. Geol. de France, 1866,
Pl. XIII), while in the present species it is oblique to the long diameter.
HEMICAULODON EFFODIENS, Cope sp. nov.
The transverse diameter of this tooth is greater anteriorly than poste-
riorly. The ribs of the dentine are strongly marked and distant. The
dentinal layer is about one half the thickness of the osteodental axis, and
three times that of the cementum.
Metres.
Greatest length of specimem-..................... .015 .00
a Gliametenerreeieier iat Pasenaeale age oh seocae Ay 4)
Least Osan ory Slt aster ete cn a Net ies ie .... 004 .50
The external surface of the cement is slightly rugose from interrup-
tions of strie. The widths of the tooth increase very little from the basis
to the worn surface.
The only specimen of this remarkable species which I have yet seen is
considerably larger than the corresponding portion of the Indian Dugong.
It was first brought to notice by Dr. Samuel Lockwood, of Keyport, Mon-
mouth co, N. J., who obtained it from the Eocene marl pits at Shark
River, Monmouth co.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PLATE III.
Fig. 1.—1 a. Galera perdicida, Cope.
ro)
‘* 2.—2 a. Mixophacus spelaeus, Cope, double nat. size.
‘« 3.—3 a. Sterodectes tortus, Cope, external and posterior views of
superior incisor.
Fig. 4.—Tamias laevidens, Cope, double nat. size.
*¢ §.—Sciurus panclius, Cope, 5a, right ramus of mandible from
above; both double nat. size.
Fig. 6.—Tapirus haysii, Leidy, inferior molar; 6 a, another inferior
molar, from above.
The above are of the natural size, except where stated otherwise.
PLATE IV.
Fig. 1.—1 a. Amblyrhizainundata, Cope, inferior incisor; 1 a, from the
outside; nat. size.
Fig. 2.—Do. molar, from behind; 2 a, crown, grinding surface, nat size.
*« 3.—Do. two posterior superior molars from the side; 3 a, grinding
surface; nat size; 3b, root of do. from behind.
Fig. 4.—Do. right femur, from above; 4 a, distal end of same, slightly
restored from specimen of fig. 5. One half nat. size.
AC Ps S:—— VO. XI— vi
Cope. | 192
[July 16.
Fig. 5.—Do. right femur of second individual from the outer side; one
half nat. size.
PLATE V.
Fig. 1.—Amblyrhiza inundata, distal phalange, lateral view; 1 a, ante-
rior view.
Fig. 2.—Leptomylus longidens, Cope, two molars, lateral view; 2 a,
crowns of do.
Fig. 3.—Leptomylus or Amblyrhiza, premaxillary teeth and bones from
below, showing incisive foramen.
Fig. 4.—Human implement made from Strombus gigas., 4 a, lateral
view.
Fig. 5.—Anoplonassa forcipata, Cope, mandible from above; a, from the
side.
Fig. 6.—Hemicaulodon effodiens, Cope, incisor from the side; a, tritu-
urating surface.
Stated Meeting, August 20, 1869.
Present, four members.
JUDGE LowRIE, in the Chair.
A letter from Prof. Coppeé announced the return of Mari-
anna’s History of Spain.
A letter from the President nominated Dr. Bell to prepare
an obituary notice of Dr. Meigs, deceased.
A letter from Dr. Leidy accompanied a donation of three
highly ornamented Ojibwa pipes to the Museum of the So-
ciety by Mr. Clark.
A letter from the Mayor of the XVI Arrondissement of
Paris requested a donation of the Publications of the Society
for a Public Library in that precinct.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Society
at Moscow, April, 1869, for Proceedings No. 77; the Vienna
Academy, XIII. 1. 738-77; Society at Rome, 77; at Bor-
deaux, March 12, 76, 77; Lisbon Academy, March 28, 1868,
list. Catalogue, 1 Bo IN. He S. 7s, 70.80; Ame nia oes
XCM Tin OR. Island Sec) Sil) Yale Coll veieWoscoucinelse
Sky SIL .
A letter circular from the President of the Congrés Inter-
national d’ Archéologie Préhistorique a Copenhagen, 27 Aout,
1869, date March 1, 1869, was read.
193
Donations for the Library were announced from the Obser-
vatories of Turin, Dorpat and Prag; the Academies and Geo-
logical Societies of Berlin and Vienna; the Natural History
Societies at Bonn, Harlem, Bordeaux, Montreal, Salem and
Philadelphia; the Antiquarian and Historical Societies at
Copenhagen and Worcester; the Oriental S. at New Haven,
the London Meteorological, Chemical and Zoological Societies;
Sir James Clarke, Charles Ritter d’ Elvert of Briinn; Prof.
C. H. Hitchcock, Dr. 8. D. Gross, the Surgeon General U.5.,
and the Public Library of Cincinnati.
The death of Prof. Cleveland, in Philadelphia, August 18,
aged 67, was announced by Prof. Trego.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, Sept. 17, 1869.
Present, seven members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from Joseph
D. Hooker, dated Royal Gardens, Kew, July 12th, 1869.
Letters acknowledging receipt of Transactions XIII. 3,
were received from the Boston Pub. Lib. Mass. Hist. Soc.;
Harvard, Yale, and Amherst College Libraries; New York
Hist. S., Hospital, and State Library.
Letters acknowledging receipt of Proc. 81, were received
from the Essex Inst.; Boston Pub. Lib.; N. Y. Hist. Soe., and
Cincinnati Observatory.
A letter from M. Carlier to Mr. Durand was read, prom-
ising the official documents in the matter of the Michaux
Legacy to be forwarded by the hands of Mr. Biddle now in
Europe. All the forms of French law are now satisfied, and
M. Germain of Pontoise has given M. Carlier a receipt in full
of all demands in settlement of fees.
Mr. Price, after remarks explanatory of Michaux’s known
tastes and intentions, offered the following:
Resolved, That the Committee on the Michaux Legacy be authorized
194
to make inquiry whether the trust under the will of André Francis Mi-
chaux may not be executed in whole or in part within the Fairmount
Park ; with authority to communicate with the Commissioners of the
Park upon the subject ; and to make report to the Society.
The resolution was agreed to.
A letter from Mr. Sullivant to Mr. James was read, refer-
ring to the discovery of a posthumous work by Schwarz the
bryologist. On motion, permission was granted to Mr. James
to select from the Muhlenberg herbarium certain mosses for
Mr. Sullivant to examine, in reference to Schwarz’s determ1-
nations, to be returned to their places in the herbarium.
Donations for the Library were received from the Berlin
Academy, Teyler Museum, Paris Geographical and London
R. Astronomical Societies, Mr. Scudder at Boston, Silliman’s
Journal, the Franklin Institute and the Medical News.
“The Arawak Laneuage of Guiana in its Linguistic and
Ethnological Relations,” by D. G. Brinton, M. D., was offered
for publication in the Transactions, and referred to a commit-
tee consisting of Mr. Lesley, Mr. Chase, and Mr. Haldeman.
“A second addition to the History of the Fishes of the Cre-
taceous of the United States, by Edward D. Cope,” without
illustrations, was read by title and referred to the Board of
Secretaries.
“The maintaining Forces of Cosmical Motions,” was the
title of a paper read before the Society, by Judge Lowrie; a
discussion ensued in which Mr. Price, Mr. Lesley and Mr.
Fraley took part. Mr. Lesley dissented from the opinions
expressed in the paper, so far as any claim was set up to a
discovery calculated to effect a radical change in the accepted
methods of regarding planetary motion.
Mr. Marsh described the peculiarities of the Meteor of
August 24th, and others, belonging as he suspected to a group
passing the earth during the day time in the United States,
and therefore only the last of which became visible at or
after sundown.
Pending nominations Nos. 227 to 640, and new nominations
641, 642, were read. And the Society was adjourned.
QA
Sept. 17, 1869.] 195 [Lowvie.
SOME SUGGESTIONS ON THE MAINTAINING FORCES OF
COSMICAL MOTION.
By WALTER H. LowRkIn.
I desire to submit for consideration some suggestions tending to the
production of a true theory of the force by which the revolutions of the
planets are maintained against the tendency of attraction to draw all
bodies to a common centre, or a solution of what Sir John Herschel calls
“the theorem’’ of the conservation of the ods viva of cosmical motion.
I know of none hitherto received except that composed of the postu-
late of an original impulse and the law of inertia: that a body set in
motion by a single impulse and out of relation with other bodies moves
forever with its initial velocity and direction. Such a proposition is
evidently not a product of induction, for no body was ever known to be in
such a case or to move thus; and therefore it defines no actual class of
motions whatever, as every physical law ought to do. Indeed philosophy
never treats of things out of their relations. This is, therefore, a mere
metaphysical idea, meaning only this, that, in the investigation of mo-
tions so as to find their system, the mind demands a cause for every
change in their degree or direction.
It very properly assumes an original propulsion; because motion ex-
ists, and its origin could not possibly be a matter of human observation.
But the theory founded on this law goes beyond the law, and treats of
bodies that are 77 relation with each other, and then assumes, that, by
reason of this relation, that is, by the attraction of a primary body upon
its secondary, motion may be changed in direction without being changed
in degree; and thus, according to it, the original propulsion is the true
motive power of all cosmical systems, while the only function of attrac-
tion is to deflect tangential into elliptical motion and hold it there.
Now this theory is both logically and philosophically vicious; because
it takes our idea of absolute motion and uses it as a true expression or
law of relative motion; and because, while treating attraction as deflec-
tive of tangential motion, it overlooks the question, that it may also re-
tard and suppress it, and thus it treats this force as absolute in degree
while relative in direction.
An idea or rule that is absolute in its character can tell us nothing
about actual things, though it may regulate our mode of thinking about
them. In this instance it bids us seek a cause which maintains cosmical
motion against the centralizing force of attraction. We must seek it in
this cosmos, just as it is, with its countless bodies, all moving in harmony
and yet with countless forms and degrees of motion.
It is impossible to find it in a single initial impulse given at the start
of the motion; because the force of attraction of each body on the others
would everywhere affect the motion thus given, deflecting, retarding,
accelerating, reversing and finally absorbing it, without its having any
capacity, as a ois viva, of recovering itself. The initial impulse once
Lowrie. ] 1 96 [Sept. 17,
given, becomes, as a cause, past and ended, and its assumed effect is
uniform velocity forever; but it does not assume to resist the retarding,
accelerating and other disturbances that assail the body, and it is impos-
sible that it can do so. Nor can it resist the attraction of its. central
body, which is constant in its direction, and also in its degree so long as
the distance is unchanged. A force that interferes to deflect a moving
body must thereby decrease its velocity, and the more direct the inter-
ference the greater is this decrease, as a direct one may stop it altogether.
In order to get a clear conception of some of these retardations and
accelerations, it is necessary to get beyond the motion of each body, in
so far as it is merely relative to its primary, and consider it in a more ab-
solute way. Take the moon in its revolution round the earth, starting
with it at its first quadrature. Then it is 240,000 miles in the rear of the
earth. It must of course overtake the earth, as it does at full moon, and
pass on to its second quadrature, where it will be 240,000 miles in advance
of the earth; and then, in another half lunation, it must fall back, rela-
tively, twice 240,000 miles to the same relative position from which we
started with it.
And it is well to notice that this motion, apparently a circle round the
earth, is really, in relation to the sun and in a long period, a series of
alternate small undulations on each side of the earth’s orbit, the longer
ones being on the outside and the shorter ones on the inside, and the dif-
ference between their chords being nearly a million of miles; and while
the moon is making this slow motion in relation to the earth, it advances
near fifty millions of miles with the earth along its orbit round the sun.
No other satellite moves so slowly, because no other is so little held by
the attraction of its primary compared with that of the sun, which is
2.2 of the earth’s, while, in relation to most other satellites, it is meas-
ured by thousandths, and in relation to only the two outer satellites of
Saturn and Uranus does it rise above hundredths.
Take also the earth in its revolution round the sun. Its apparently
circular orbit changes entirely when we take into account the sun’s mo-
tion in its own orbit, said to be 150 millions of miles a year. If we start
with the earth at its vernal equinox, it is 95 millions of miles in the rear
of the sun, and in six months it moves forward to a position as far in
advance, with the chord of its curve elongated 75 millions of miles by its
motion with the sun. Passing its autumnal equinox to the inside of the
sun’s orbit, it sweeps back in another six months to its original relative
position in the rear of the sun, and yet, having moved with the sun,
it is found 150 millions of miles in advance of the position whence we
started with it, and 115 millions in the rear of its position six months
before, and its real annual orbit turns out to be an immense scollop, the
loop of which on the sun’s orbit is 115 millions of miles wide, the motion
being really retrogressive during the second half of each year, and the
length of its real journey in absolute space along its real orbit being
near twice as great in the first half of the year as in the second half.
Thus all the planets and satellites have orbits consisting of very long
1869.] LON
[Lowrie.
curves in the outer half of each revolution, connected together by short
curves, some of them loops, in the inner half, and perform journeys im-
mensely greater in absolute space in one than in the other. Surely it is
impossible that these alternations of fast and slow motion can be account-
ed for by the single transient impulse given to each body at the start of
the system. Surely we are required to find some constant abiding or
constantly renewed force to account for such phenomena. What is it?
Where shall we find the force that prevents the consolidation and cen-
tralization threatened by the force of attraction? Of course we must
find the answer in the phenomena of our solar system, that being the
only one of which observation gives us any competent knowledge. Phi-
losophy cannot go back to find it in the phenomena of creation, for that
is not phenomenon for us, and therefore that process must ever remain
transcendental to us, until we can witness it in some other system and
transfer it by analogy to our own; the only way in which we can know
anything of our own personal origin.
All these regulated aud phenomenally self-sustaining movements have
a strong analogy to life, though we do not conceive of life as a mere
property or movement of matter in a system. Phenomenally and stati-
eally it is the normal interaction of all the particles of a given system
that sustains and constitutes its life; though this definition cannot deter
us from our natural seeking after the dynamics of the system, the forces
and causes of this interaction. And so it isin our investigation of the
solar system.
We have given to us, by observation of it, over one hundred cosmical
bodies, each revolving about some other, which is also moving, and each
having a force attractive of all others, and moving at such a distance and
with such velocity that it is neither drawn to nor driven from its central
body. We find therefore a permanent system of moving and attracting
bodies, and for convenience in the study of this fact, we analyse it into
two forces—bodies attracting and bodies moving, or, more simply into
attraction and motion; though in physics and apart from bodies, these
last are nothing but abstract ideas, being the mental instruments by
which we handle the actual and concrete forces—bodies moving and
attracting.
We infer that the forces of attraction and of motion balance each
other so as to prevent both consolidation and dissolution; but neither, by
itself, can maintain the system. Without seeking after the origin of
these motions, it is enough for us, that, at any given instant of time,
they balanced the force of attraction. Then the question arises—how is
this system of motions maintained? Or more definitely thus—given a
satellite revolving round a planet, itself round another body and it round
another, how is the motion of the satellite maintained? What is there
in the forms and forces of this system that constantly restores the proper
degree of motion in the satellite amidst the retardations and accelera-
tions which we have discovered?
The readiest illustration of the system is the motion produced when a
)
Lowrie. ] 198
[Sept. 17,
ball at the end of a string is swung from right to left around one’s hand
as one moves rapidly in the same direction around a path, composed of a
series of curves or loops all turning to a common centre. If we analyze
the motion of the ball, we find that, while, relatively to the hand, it is
nearly circular, it really performs a very complex figure relatively to the
centre of the greater circle in which the person moves, passing an equal
or nearly equal portion of time on each side, and yet with a much shorter
path and slower motion on the inner, than on the outer side; this differ-
ence being always increased with the rapidity of the motion in the larger
circle and with the slowness of that in the smaller one. Thus the ball’s
motion may resemble that of the most remote planets or of our moon,
consisting of a series of alternate long and short undulations, or that of
the other planets and satellites, being a series of scollops or of alternate
long and short curves looping into each other.
And while the ball is performing this motion, the hand does not keep
on the line of the greater circle, but performs a series of motions alter-
nately on each side of it, corresponding in form to the larger ones of the
ball; and in this its motion resembles the small motion of the planet on
its orbit, no planet having a satellite ever moving exactly along its
theoretic orbit.
Let the moving ball represent the tangential, and the string the attrac-
tive force of the whole movement, and we have the statical condition of
a balance of forces. But the tangential force, not being a vis vtva, would
soon give way to the other, if there were no recuperative arrangement in
relation to it, and our illustration directs us to the actual arrangement.
It consists of the constant motion of the central force. This is the key
to the dynamics of the system: attraction by a constantly and peculiarly
moving central body. Of course both bodies exert this force, though
that of the central body is always immensely greater than that of the
other: it is all one force acting along the same line.
This is the moving force that maintains the motions of its dependent
bodies, and we find no repulsive force; though, for distinctness of thinking,
we find it necessary to analyze the motion into radial and tangential ele-
ments, and consider these as representing two colliding forces. A system
of forces is an essential element of every system of actual things, and
there can be no motion within the system except what is given or upheld
by the very forces that constitute the system, supposing of course no
interference from without.
This is a force constantly acting, and moving as it acts, ever changing
the position whence it acts and therefore the direction of its action; always
departing from its point of action and therefore from the very results
which its action in each moment tends to produce; always fluent in itself
and always fluent in its effects.
As the planet sweeps, with its unsteady rythm of undulations, along
its own series of scollops or loops, called its orbit, the satellite sweeps
tangentially throughout that orbit; and thence, obeying the attrac-
tive force of the planet without giving up the force of its own motion,
199 [Lowrie.
.
bends its course into a curve which carries it out far beyond the planet’s
orbit, and, still further obeying the same force, it hastens forward with
it until, passing in advance of it, its speed is checked by the same force,
and it swings round through the same orbit and is, by the force of its
own motion, carried far inside of it, where it reduces its speed, because,
by reason of the forward motién of the planet, this motion can there
make but little draft upon it, and waits until the planet again passes
in advance of it and renews its force, when it rises again through the
orbit, and repeats the same series of movements. Here then is the force
that corrects all the irregularities of motion in the system, checks all
accelerations and revives from all retardations. By analogy to the term
central force, I venture to call it the orbital force of cosmical motion,
because it proceeds from a body moving in its orbit. I think I have said
enough to present the subject sufficiently to those who desire to think
about it.
But it is impossible to stay the mind at this point; it must seek to find
the next link backwards in the chain of causes. If thus planets move
and maintain the motions of their satellites, then the sun must move in
a similar way to maintain the motions of the planets; and we have evi-
dence that it is so. And the sun also must have its moving centre, and
so on indefinitely. This too we may suppose, though we have no direct
evidence of it.
This ought not to surprise us; for no where, in the acquisition of
knowledge, does observation carry us back to the Great Centre of all
causes, nor often to very remote ones; and yet it is a natural process of
our philosophic faith to reach out and assume a cause for every thing,
and we do assume it in harmony with the character of the effect; physi-
cal or spiritual, moral or intellectual, personal or impersonal, according
to its demands. Thus only can we fill up the inevitable gaps which expe-
rience and observation leave to be supplied in every investigation; and
thus we are continually led back to the assumption of causes, principles
and ideas that can be, as it were, felt by the mind, and which yet trans-
cend all the definitions and manipulations of deductive logic. All our
abstractions are natural reachings of the mind towards the absolute in
some special aspect of it, and often we make thereby very valuable ac-
quisitions.
And certainly it is not desirable that we should have capacity to start
from first causes and deduce from them all the systems and events of the
universe; for our happiness depends, not upon the reach of our minds,
but upon their continued and proper growth; and this can be only a
gradual process, rising from the observation of things and events and
from a study of their dynamics to proximate causes, and from a co-ordi-
nation of these to more remote and higher ones, without any supposable
end to the means or to the functions of our progress. A mind whose
chief function is growth cannot commence with the condition to which
it aspires, for then it could have neither growth nor aspiration.
And it is not chargeable as a vice, that we are compelled to postulate
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—Z
1869. ]
Lowrie.] 200 [Sept. 17,
.
forces beyond the special system which we are studying, analogous to
those found in it, nor even if we postulate others within it. Every sys-
tem of actual things requires such postulates to connect it intellectually
with some higher system, or to furnish it with at least a provisional
foundation, or to give completeness to its structure; and especially every
phenominally self-sustaining system re@uires us to postulate and then
seek within itself the forces by which it is maintained, besides its initial
force proceeding from without. Thus every class of plants and animals
has within itself the forces by which the creative act is maintained,
though always dependent on the larger system of the universe; and the
science of physiology is founded on this assumption.
In the study of language, having no history of its origin, we may
assume that it was a gift by God to man; but, thus received, it could be
but very feebly maintained as a mere treasure of the memory, and in the
very form in which it was bestowed; and, in order to account for its con-
tinuance in all its varieties, with its degradations, restorations, additions
and improvements, even with a fundamental identity of structure, we
must postulate other mental forces, which, with memory, constitute our
faculty of language, and then proceed to seek them out.
And so it is with law, government and religion, with all their rules,
forms, rites, symbols, and principles of faith and conduct. Their origin
may be beyond our reach; but we are not, for this reason, prevented from
learning that memory is the mere servant of other faculties in maintain-
ing them through all the changes which they, with man, undergo, and
that it is a prominent function of our life to work out our own develop-
ment of them, and to improve by doing so.
I now venture to suggest very generally and briefly some of the conse-
quences that would seem to follow from the admission of the dynamical
views here presented.
1. We must give up Sir Isaac Newton’s mode of accounting for the
elliptical form of cosmical orbits. I expressed this in August, 1860, to
the Academy of Science and Arts at Pittsburgh, founding it merely on
the fact that all cosmical centres are themselves moving. The foregoing
considerations now make this result more obvious.
2. There are many forms of cosmical motion, treated as inequalities,
which are as normal elements of the special or partial system in which
they are found as are the eccentrics on the axis of a steam engine, and
they are not abnormities or disturbances produced by the forces of bodies
out of the system, though they may themselves, in some cases, be dis-
turbed, exaggerated, obliterated or even reversed by such forces. I ven-
ture to name as belonging to this class, the moon’s annual equation, the
motion of apsides, variations of eccentricity and of major axis, and also
the recession of planetary nodes, including the procession of the equi-
noxes
3. This orbital force requires great inequalities of relative as well as of
absolute motion, and presents a very obvious explanation of the ine-
qualities of the moon’s motion as the earth, with its unequal velocity,
1869.] 201 [Lowrie.
passes from perihelion to aphelion and back. Considering the real form
of the moon’s orbit in relation to the sun and to the earth and its dis-
tances from each, and the very small angles of eight minutes formed at
the sun by the radius of its orbit at its quadratures, and of one minute at
its syzigies, it does not seem that such inequalities can be mere dis-
turbances of the moon’s orbit by the central force of the sun.
4. This force would seem also to require a change in the mode of cal-
culating cosmical disturbances. Instead of starting us from the basis of
an ideal ellipse, depending on a transient force of unknown quantity, it
gives us real ones depending on a constant force for each case, which
may be calculated. The forms thus given must be the true normal forms
of the respective orbits, and departures from them must alone be treated
as disturbances.
I have only to add that, however unsatisfactory it always is to elimi-
nate any element of a system by declaring it anomalous, yet I do not see
how this is to be avoided in relation to the satellites of Uranus, if the
observations reported about them are accurate.
Stated Meeting, October 1, 1869.
Present, twenty-two members.
Prof. CRESSON, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from Linant
Bey, dated Cairo, April 20, 1860.
An extract from a letter from M. Carlier to Mr. Durand
respecting the Michaux Legacy was read.
An extract of a letter from Mr. Lesquereux to the Secre-
tary respecting Mr. Schimper’s Paleontologie Végdtale was
read.
Donations for the Library were received from M. Linant
de Bellefonds Bey, the British Association, the London Geo-
logical Society, Mr. Gore, F. R. S., and the Boston and Mon-
treal Natural History Societies.
The death of Dr. Dorr, member of this Society, at German-
town, Sept. 18, aged 73 years, was annoureed by Mr. Fraley.
Chase. ] 202 [Oct. 1,
Prof. Mayer laid before the Society an abstract of the pho-
tographic observations of the total eclipse of the 7th of Au-
cust at Burlington, lowa, with numerous photographic plates
and illustrations.
Prof. McClune exhibited a drawing of the appearance of
the Sun to the naked eye made by Prof. Gummere and him-
self, and described some of the phenomena of the eclipse.
Prof. Morton exhibited a copy of the photograph picture
got by Mr. Whipple in 40 seconds, for Prof. Pierce’s party of
observation; the object being to obtain by a longer exposure
than usual with sun pictures, an image of the corona. Photo-
graphs of the protuberances required but 5 to 16 seconds;
those of the sun before total immersion were exposed but the
one 500th of a second, a narrow slit in a flying trap-cover
serving to sweep a beam of light across the plate.
Mr. Chase gave the results of his further discussion of Mr.
Dines’ weather records in England.
Pending nominaticns 627-642 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
TIDAL RAINFALL BY P. E. CHASE.
Since the publication of my paper on the Tidal Rainfall of Philadel-
phia, (Proc. A. P. S. v. x, pp. 523-5387), Mr. Dines has continued his
discussion of ‘‘the moon’s influence upon the fall of rain’’? (Proc. Me-
teorolog. Soc. for April 21, 1869), adding forty years’ observations at
Chiswick to those at Cobham, which he had previously examined.
The evidences which I have adduced of ‘‘establishments”’ in the tidal
rainfall, and of more strongly marked characteristics in low latitudes,
forbid any general inferences from observations at two stations which
are so near each other, and in so high a latitude as Cobham and Chis-
wick. But my study of laws that have been developed by records at
more than a hundred different observatories, in Europe, Asiaand America,
led me to look for additional confirmation of those laws even in the valu-
able abstracts which rendered Mr. Dines so skeptical. I accordingly
‘‘smoothed”’ the irregularities, both in the Cobham and in the Chiswick
tables, and arranged and treated in a similar manner President Caswell’s
observations at Providence, R. I., from December 1831, to May 1860, and
the Toronto observations from March 1840, to January 1849. The results
are given in the following Tables.
Ds
1869.] 203 [Chase.
LUNAR DAILY RAIN AT PROVIDENCE, COBITAM, CHISWICK AND TORONTO.
Fall at Providence. Providence Normals.
iz AS = Nera ———
So Sh Se ie Me oS <
5 SS, SSE SE he Soe NS os ss
8 x o8 ben 1g Cr) = 3 ~5 ak BS
NQAARNA N
1 TbS) 13i384 9 20!45) 649 871 105l 2572 1 2096.59 2123.32 5.75 562
2 12.07 12:78 15.42 720 -819 946 QAR5 2 2064.42 2146.70 13.10 627
8 IGS IO © BAR 9.10 798 785 843 2425 3 2072.18 2148.28 10.65 624
4 13.98 8:73 12:51 (828° 796 811 243 4 2102.64 2139.65 7.92 571
l3-22) el 3e5d0. 15:95) S18) 862 818 2498 5 2112.27 =2105.04 6.47 552
Gi 9392) 19233) 9.80 847 905 821 2572 6 2066.98 2032.78 9.20 606
T 13:64 100838 13.19 932 882 €34 2648 7 2010:92° 1967-77 11.16 682
8 23:02 11.94 15.00 961 854 £43 2657 8 2024.04 1925.24 12.66 710
9 10:13 15.75 13.43 e864 850 804 2518 9 2095.94 2082.71 11.23 667
10 10.54 12.04 9.63 748 817 Tas 2304 10 2142.59 2155.38 7.91 593
Wl ME TIERS ey 1S Paz 701 2155 «11 2189.12 2145.07 8.18 554
12 17.15 5.55 11.72 «=772 ~=6683 TOT Q112 «12S 2147.62 2100.55 7.70 578
3 y S67 10.31 8.77 810 592 754 QN5S 13 2079.44 2054.21 10.82 636
14 14.43 9.42 15.53 817 600 812 2229 14 2033.18 2009.76 11.37 668
15 16.41 8.93 14.01 762 639 836 2937 15 ~ 2026.34 1995.83 11.66 630
16 5.36 10.14. 10.74 689 7066 827 °2222 16 2050.26 1993.59 TOT 554:
iy hall eS eT eles alae 814 2304 17 2039.60 1949.40 4.97 516
US} TGs) TIPS) OAS) SAE ee 02 2460 18 1998.82 1970.17 10.23 547
19 15.15 11.90 12.19 895 894 807 2597 19 2002.99 1941.88 8.71 615
20 13.98 18.95 10.57 | 8&9 942 868 698 20 2077.74 2025.00 10.66 667
CHL WNP). UPS 17/83 $70 = 935 956 2761 = 2146.76 2213.61 14.02 666
22, info) jes) 18353 871 876 990 273 22 =: 2118.39) 2200.21 6.17 631
3) 7) Uy aft) 9.27 862 &0L 975 26389 23 2016.49 2059.24 10:01 622
24 14:03) 10:67 19:17 826 - 745 971 2538 24 1962.35 1932.40 10.3 642
ple NOL) LBS Ba 7feB} 783 970 2466 25 2002.72 1904.18 12.16 652
26 12.96 9159) 16255) 7163 747, 941 2451 26 2065.88 1921.18 6.23 644
Zi O25) 12) 1262) 763 862 920 2550) 27, =~ 2103581 «1922279 = t462 «62
QS G47) 19243) 112703) 9758" 991 958 2706 28 2139.50 1936.00 6.53 548
299. 8.77 18:85 20.77 TW 1021 1033 2758 29 2167.64 1992.72 5.93 491
30 «10.3 12.92 13.81 646 952 1081 2678 30 2148.55 2067.47 8.83 496
The foregoing Normals not only corroborate the inferences in my pre-
vious papers, but they also show that the eastward movement of storm
waves, which has been so clearly demonstrated by Prof. Henry, prevails
to some extent in the Eastern, as wellas in the Western Continent. The
Toronto observations cover so short a period, that their independent value
in determining the form of the lunar monthly raincurve is small, but
when compared with the observations at Philadelphia and Providence,
they show that a similar lunar influence is felt at each station, modified
by the local establishments.
An extensive investigation and comparison of observations may be ne-
cessary, to determine whether the direction of storm-progression in Eng-
land is determined, either wholly or in part, by the trend of the Doffrafield
Mts., or is owing mainly to the earth’s rotation. In consequence of
Alpine influences I should look for indications in Central Europe, of a
subordinate system of storm-waves, moving nearly in the line of the me-
ridian, or at right angles with the general system of the globe.
Mayer. ] 204 [Oct. I,
AN ABSTRACT OF SOME OF TILE RESULTS OF MEASUREMENTS AND
EXAMINATIONS OF THE PHOTOGRAPIIS OF THE TOTAL SOLAR
ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869.
By ALFRED MaygEr, Pu. D.
Professor of Physics and Astronomy in the Lehigh University, Penna.
Ihave the honor to lay before the American Philosophical Society a
few results of my measurements and examinations of the Photographs
of the Total Solar Eclipse of Aug. 7, 1869, taken at Burlington, Iowa.
The Photographie expedition, of which these photographs are part of
its results, was organized by Prof. Henry Morton of Philadelphia, under
the authority of Prof. J. H. C. Coffin, U.S. N., Superintendent of the
American Nautical Almanac.
The expedition occupied three stations in lowa; viz. Burlington, Mt.
Pleasant and Ottumwa, respectively under the charge of Professors
Mayer, Morton and Himes.
Burlington is situate in Lat. N. 40° 48’ 21.//58; Long. 0h. 56m. 13.88s.
W.of Washington. Itwas 7 miles N. of the centre of the moon’s shadow.
The telescope used was by Merz & Mahler of Munich, and is the
property of the Central High School of Philadelphia. It is equatorially
mounted; of 6.42 inches aperture and of 9 feet focus, and is driven by
one of Fraunhofer’s friction governor clocks.
The sun’s image was formed on the plate of the camera by a Huy-
ghenian eye-piece, the lenses of which were specially computed to give
the least aberration when they formed an image of the sun in the camera
of 2.04 inches diameter. The image of a reticule of two spider threads
at right angles to each other was also projected on the plate with the
sun’s image, and these threads were by me accurately adjusted, the one
parallel, the other at right angles to the celestial equator; thus, the pho-
tographs have given precise position-angles of the contacts and of the
protuberances.
A plate having a transverse slot of ;,th of an inch in breadth shot
across the eye-piece by the action of a spring and thus gave the exposure
during partial phase. The duration of this flash of the sun upon the
camera has, since the eclipse, been made by me the object of an experi-
mental determination, and by means of an electrical break-circuit clock
and chronograph, I have found that the exposure of the collodion plate
to the sun’s image was almost exactly the ;=},th of a second.
[ Prof. Mayer here exhibited the camera used; explained the action of
the exposing plate and how by its fall the time of exposure was electri-
cally recorded on a chronograph fillet; and showed the arrangement of
the aparatus by which he determined the time of exposure. ]
While taking the photographs during partial-phase only 2 inches aper-
ture of object-glass was used; but, during totality the full aperture was
employed and the slide-plate allowed the whole beam to fall upon the
plate. The exposure of the totality photographs varied from 5s. to 7s.
Forty-one perfect photographs were taken during the eclipse, and five
of these were obtained during totality, which lasted 2m. 42s. The five
totality pictures were taken in one minute and thirty-nine seconds.
-
1869. ] 205 [Mayer.
[ Prof. Mayer here exhibited copies on plate-glass, taken from the origi-
nal negatives with an orthoscopic lens, and also copies on paper enlarged
to about five inches in diameter. <A large diagram showed more dis-
tinetly to the members the forms and positions of the protuberances. ]
Photograph No. 4, taken 2.8 seconds after observed contact, shows a
depression in the sun’s limb at the position of first contact, and from
this depression shoots into the sun a high lunar mountain, whose posi-
tion measured from the 8. point of the cusp, is about Jth of the distance
to the N. point of the same. Mr. W. 8. Gilman, Jr., of New York,
who observed with exquisite skill at Sioux City, lowa, informed me that
he obtained his time of first contact by seeing this mountain peak thrust
itself into the sun’s limb before a flattening occurred from the contact of
the lower general surface of the moon.
[ Prof. M. here gave an account of the geometrical methods used to
determine the times and angles of contact from measurements on the
cusps of the sun. ]
The time of first contact deduced from approximate measures on two
plates gave 18h. 2m.-1.24s., Burlington Sidereal Time, which is 1.1s. be-
fore contact as observed by Prof. Coffin, and 0.1s. before Dr. Gould’s
observation. From measures on another plate we deduced 18h. tin.
57.3s., which is 4s. before contact as observed by Dr. Gould, and ;',th of a
second after contact as determined by Prof. Young with his new spec-
troscopic method of observation.
Measures on plate No. 8 gave for the position-angle of
MILES AC ONUGA Chiersderaaleeorveurerayeuspaistons)sicfeus lapels. ste Gee eee —T0° 48’
Coonapmnibeclamalloscscoodeocesccosoccduo das SSopod ales —71°
Mitierenm CEH aa wry aero teen amas Se AS eA —(° 12!
Plate 41 gave for position-angle fourth contact....... 108° 34!
Comnyputieclam@lOs. ccooccococnncagesocoonobonegose LOS Oma,
ID IWRC 5 a6 soccodoecoood. cies sis houeversbstenonwccarape ate iale - 40° 34/
Sixteen spots were visible on the sun’s dise during the eclipse. Two
large spots, one in the 8. W. quadrant, the other in the N. E., are beauti-
fully defined on the photographs. Near the eastern point of the sun’s
limb is a remarkably beautiful and characteristic spot, greatly fore-short-
ened from its position so that the penumbra has disappeared on the west
side of the umbra, against which rests the large bright faculae, which
enclose the spot, while one bridges over the spot ina N. E. direction and
seems to divide it into two portions. I here exhibit drawings of the spot
in the S. W. quadrant which show the rapid changes which took place
in the form and dimensions of this spot in 1h. 59.5m., the imterval be-
tween the times of taking the plates from which they are drawn.
On plate 4, we see the umbra and penumbra of a general circular out-
line, with an intensely white projection into the N. W. point of*the
margin of the penumbra. The mean diameter of the umbra is 6,600
miles.
Mayer. ] 206 [Oet. 1,
Plate 42 shows that the circular outlines of umbra and penumbra have
changed into elliptical boundaries, the direction of the longer axis being
N. W. and S$. E. The umbra has widened in this direction 4/’, or 1796
miles, and has, in the transverse direction, narrowed its breadth 5.//5, or
2357 miles, while the outward projections of the umbra (which can be
identified on plate 4) have become greatly lengthened.
Photograph No. 15, of the series, shows this spot bisected by the limb
of the moon. ‘
All the photographs show a gradation of shade from the border of the
sun inwards. This shading of the source of light is due to the absorp-
tion of the peripheral rays which necessarily pass through a greater thick-
ness of the dense solar atmosphere, than those which emanate from the
central portion of the disc.
We also observe on the photographs close to the limb of the moon, a
bright glow like that of early dawn, which on plate No. 11 can be dis-
tinetly traced to 18/’ beyond the limb of the moon. If this phenomenon
cannot be explained in mode and in measure by diffraction, it must be
due to a lunar atmosphere, though it is difficult to reconcile its existence
with the inappreciable refractive effect on small stars, and especially
on double stars, when occulted by the moon.
TI will not attempt at present a complete description of the plates ob-
tained during totality. Imerely refer you to the diagram which I have
prepared, and call your attention to those of the most remarkable protu-
berances. ‘These protuberances | have numbered from 1 to 12, going
from N. through E. to N. |
No. 4, on the eastern limb of the sun, has the appearance of an eagle
with outspread wings resting on the trunk of a tree which leans towards
the north, on plate No. 27, where the base of the protuberance is cut off by
the advancing moon, the resemblance to an eagle on the wing is perfect.
The form of this object indicates instability, and impresses one with the
idea that it is a great travelling whirl of flame, the direction of whose
rotation—as indicated by the position of ‘‘the wings’’ and the projection
of one on the other—is retrogade or in the same direction as the hands
of a watch. I have examined with care the successive photographs of it,
and although at first I thought the last impression differed from those
preceding in that the wings had become longer and more in a line with
each other, yet, on subsequent examination, I could not really decide
that a perceptible motion had taken place during the time of totality.
The position-angle of the N. side of the base of this object is 96° 25/;
its height is 1/ 22/’, or 36,700 miles, and the spread of the wings is 9° 31’,
or 70, £00 miles.
On the western limb of the sun we see the remarkably large and mas-
sive protuberance No. 8. It is shaped like an albatross head, with the
beak and under-side of the head resting on the periphery of the moon.
On a photograph taken at Ottumwa, Iowa, just before the sun came out,
this*protuberance had the exact appearance of an albatross head, with
the beak open, holding a rounded mass between the extremity of the
jaws. It lies between the position-angles of 20° 18’ and 245° 46’; its
1869. ] 20 ( [Mayer.
length is 150 33/, or 115,700 miles, and its greatest height is 75/’, or 38, 600
miles.
The protuberance No. 10, bears the most striking resemblance to a
caterpillar, out of whose head issue two horns; the one nearest the front
being the higher of the two, and terminated with a knob or ball from
which comes a broken line of light to the border of the moon. Its mean
position is 287° 33’ and it extends through 11 degrees or 81,800 miles.
Its maximum elevation, which is at the head of “ the caterpillar’ is
52//, or 23,300 miles.
We here give a table of the position-angles and heights of the protuber-
ances. Those on the eastern limbs of the sun, viz: 1 to 7 inclusive, were
determined from measurements on the first plate of the fotality series,
taken 17.1 seconds after second contact; those on the western limb of the
sun were determined from the last plate of totality, taken 50 seconds be-
fore third contact.
The angles of position of prominences, 1 to 7 inclusive, should be
diminished 32./5, to make them correspond to the positions they had on
the first plate of totality; for reasons which are given in my official
report.
Table of the position-angles and heights of the Prominences.
No. Prominence. Position-angles. Tleight.
1S rece ene BS? OO BF BO) gaiccoo0 22"!
ee eee ee BO WAP hoy WE Oe oe cooley
Mee terete caesar SHO 16Y sodmoosaoc Be Meccteeie EM TION
4. (ERO OH )ocoo WO Aa we Ce AY soe aeode 82//
4 (tip of N. wing) ...... 90° 39/
AM (tay Ole Senay AIS) alee 100° 10/
Dyasepcpaeecarneravateiens 101° 23/ to 118° 36’ ..,,.... 136/’ (nebulous cloud. )
Gia ertiscs seared easy AG Phy roy WA) BW cab acanc 45!’
Tad Stee aati cos eis 1562 46/ to U6 59” 20... 37!
Opener ates) cash 2302 M3! bo) 2405 467 sence 75!
OE eee eiavaus aie woe Bue Ail
IND Soe ie cette BSVo NB! Wo) ABO WA 5 spo soo Oa
SNL epee ce ten ene eae Bil” G4" 10) BBN WAY coscveve 44!)
oN aia ee ee enna BD! TWD BABS Biel couo6e oo NE?
Observations on the application of photography to the determination of the
times of contacts during the transit of Venus in 1874 and 1882.
We here venture a few remarks, showing the peculiar value of photo-
graphy in the observations of the transits of Venus.
It has been shown that the sun’s image was photographed on the
camera plate with an exposure of only ;},th of a second; and the dura-
tion of exposure for any other instrument can be determined with as
great precision by the method which I employed.
The instant the mechanical movement exposes the plate, it also records
the time of that exposure on a chronograph connected with a break-cir-
cuit clock, and thus we have an accurately delineated figure of the transit
A. P. S.— VOL. XI—2A
Mayer.] 208 [Oct. 1, 1969.
corresponding to a ¢t#me marked on the face of the clock employed; and
this correspondence of figure and time is unaffected with personal equa-
tion either of sight or of hearing. Now if the error and rate of the
clock can be entirely freed from the personal equation of the observer
who determined them, and if the longitude of the station be found by
the coincidences of the beats of a sidereal clock with those of a break-
circuit mean solar clock placed at the observatory of the first meridian,
we have the most accurate means of obtaining the absolute times of con-
tacts at the station of observation.
Thus we see how applicable will be photography to these observations,
for the data of the solar parallax will be given either by observing the
absolute time Of the ingress or of the egress (which method is alone of
value in the transit of 1874), or by determining the duration of the tran-
sit of Venus over the solar disc. The photographs are permanent phe-
nomena on which we can repeat our measures at leisure, with every ap-
pliance of precision, while it is impossible to attain a similar degree with
eye and ear, from the difficulty of micrometically measuring at a precise
instant the distance of Venus frcm the sun’s limb, and from the (vecord-
cd) distortions of Venus at contacts.
It will also be of great value to have a photographic record of the
appearance of Venus at the contacts, for, 7f the dise of the planet then
should appear on the plate to depart from a circle and have attachments
to the sun’s limb, these distortions can be measured and allowed for.
An idea may be formed of the apparent size of Venus during its tran-
sit of the sun’s disc, from the fact that the umbra of the solar spot in
the south-west quadrant is 15// in diameter, and that Venus at transit
will subtend an angle of about 70/’; so that the planet would appear on
the plate as a dise 42 times the diameter of this spot, or, as a disc of .107
inch diameter on an image of the sun of 3 inches in diameter.
The negatives of these photographs I find from trial will stand a mag-
nifying power of 50 under the micrometer, and as 1// of are will equal
-i,th inch on a solar image of 3 inches diameter, we can, with the above
mentioned power, divide a second into ten parts. This supposes. how-
ever, that the bisection by the micrometer thread is on a perfectly well
defined point, and this does not exist in the outlines of any photograph,
and especially is the limb of the sun indistinct on account of its shading,
and of the manner in which the silver is deposited in the collodion film.
From actual experience in measurements under the micrometer, I find
that we cannot, as yet, hope to make a bisection on the sun’s limb closer
than 4 of a second. On the boundary of the umbra of a well defined
solar spot, we can read to + of a second, and from this I should think the
2, of a second might probably be attained as the limit in a reading on the
imb of the image of Venus.
But with measures as close as these, and the tables of Venus brought
to the accuracy which existing unreduced observations can give, we may
reasonably hope for a determination of the solar parallax conporting
with the most exact astronomical measures of this century.
The Lehigh University, Pa., 7th September, 1869.
209
Stated Meeting, Oct. 15, 1869.
Present, eleven members.
Prof. CRESSON in the Chair.
A letter from Prof. Newton of Yale College, to the Secre-
tary, in behalf of M. St. Claire Deville, Director of the New
Observatory at Paris, requesting exchanges, and announcing
the transmission of the Bulletin of the Observatory, was
read, and, on motion, the Observatory was ordered to be
placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Proceedings.
Letters acknowledging the receipt of Transactions, Vol.
XIII., Part 8, and Proceedings No. 81 were received from
the Peabody Institute at Baltimore, and the New York Ly-
ceum of Natural History.
Donations for the Library were received from Prof. Zante-
deschi, the Essex Institute, the Boston 8S. N. H., the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences, Mr. E. M. Stone, of Provi-
dence, the New York Lyceum, the Philadelphia Academy of
Natural Sciences and Medical Journal, and the State Depart-
ment and Coast Survey Bureau at Washington.
The Committee to which was referred the Memoir of Dr.
Brinton, entitled the ‘‘ Arowack Language of Guiana,” &c.,
reported in favor of its publication in the Transactions; and
on motion of Mr. Fraley it was so ordered.
Prof. Cresson laid before the Society a profile of the eleva-
tions attained by the recent flood in the Schuylkill river, for
a distance of 34,200 feet above the dam at Fairmount, and
from the dam to Chestnut street Bridge, with a table of
210
heights reached by the floods of previous years. He ascribed
the extra elevations, at certain points along the profile sec-
tion, to the obstruction which a narrowing of the water basin,
or a change in its direction, should produce. Instead of the
usual difference of 1.8 foot, between the levels of the surface
of the water, at the head and at the foot of Fairmount pool,
there occurred a difference of 20 feet, at the height of the
flood. Oscillations in the flood-level, averaging six minutes
in duration, were observed on the shores, and in the forebay,
near the dam, the greatest of which was about 18 inches in
vertical extent. The maximum velocity of the water was
about nine miles an hour where it passed over the dam.
Height of Water above. Water Works Guage. City Datwn.
1822 Tce flood of Feb. 21...55..... 9508 a0 vie eee 13.17 feet.
18389 .. oi mealle woo Ae aeseiante LO SIG7: 8 Tek aries geet 14.25
1840 IMD, IUDs oS ocio Bo Te Osa Neate en 11.09
1841 DAI amet te eres S50) a eset 12.09
1846 Meme lie aaiclesets Hie Tie ee eee WN 7
1850 Summer July 19.......2-. Bets Oi AiR Si Biter. 12.09
1850 Autumn Sep. 2.......... MORO D iii me we Sys ieee 15.01
SDs Me ane 3) 2 Wameters ac. cece ate TEX OE Rat eee eee 11.09
1869 OGtied nash Nee LA GAS Eman a Nae:
Nominations for membership were read and balloted for.
On motion, the New Bedford Public Library was ordered
to be placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Pro-
ceedings from the beginning.
The ballot-boxes were then examined by the presiding off-
cer, and the following persons declared duly elected members
of the Society :
Miss Maria Mitchell, of Vassar College, N.Y.
Mrs. Mary Somerville, of England, now of Naples.
Mrs. Elizabeth Agassiz, of Cambridge, Mass.
Charles Darwin, of England.
George Rawlinson, of England.
Louis Gruner, Ecole des Mines, Paris.
Carl Vogt, of Geneva.
Carl T. EK. Von Siebold, of Munich.
Carl Fr. Naumann, of Leipsig.
At
Ferdinand Von Hochstetter, of Vienna.
George Von Frauenfeld, of Vienna.
Philp T. Tyson, of Baltimore.
Edward Hopper, of Philadelphia.
Charles Bullock, of Philadelphia.
Alfred M. Mayer, of South Bethlehem, Pa.
George W. Anderson, of West Haverford, Pa.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Mecting, Nov. 5, 1869.
Present, fifteen members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Mr. Edward Hopper was introduced to the presiding officer
and took his seat.
Letters accepting membership were réceived from Miss
Maria Mitchell, dated Vassar College, Pokeepsie, Oct. 22d,
Mrs. Agassiz, dated Cambridge, Nov. 1, and Prof. Alfred M.
Mayer, dated Lehigh University, 8. Bethlehem, Oct. 26, 1869.
Letters of Envoi were received from the Academies at
Vienna, Gottingen, Stockholm, the Royal Society, and the
Manchester Literary and Philosophicai Society.
Donations for the Library were received from the Acade
mies at Stockholm, St. Petersburg, Copenhagen, and Phila-
delphia; the Societies at Riga, Moscow, Bamberg, Frankfort
am Main, Manchester, Quebec, and Montreal; the Geographi-
eal and Geological Societies of Vienna, the Observatory at
Gottingen, Prof. Riitimeyer at Basil, the Observatory or
Montsauris, the Anthropological Society and School of Mines,
at Paris, the Royal Society, and Meteorological Committee,
R. Geographical, Zoological and Asiatic Societies at London,
the R. Geological Society at Dublin, the Franklin Institute,
Prof. Kirkwood, and the Cornell Library at Ithaca, N. Y.
A Communication for Publication in the Proceedings of
the Society was received from Dr. Hayden, entitled Field
Notes on the Geology of Colorado and New Mexico, by F.
V. Hayden, U.S. Geologist.
On motion, permission was granted to Mr. George Harding
to have a photographic copy made of the Society’s engraved
likeness of Chief Justice Marshall.
Mr. Price, as Chairman of the Michaux Legacy Committee,
reported that the Society was now in possession of the docu-
ments sent by M. Carher, and moved the following resolution,
which was adopted ;
ReEso_veD, That the thanks of the American Philosophical Society
are due and are hereby cordially tendered to M. Auguste Carlier, for his
devoted attention to and successful accomplishment of the establishment
of the claim of the society for the legacy given by the will of the late
André Frangois Michaux for its use, and that the officers of the society
be requested to transmit a copy of this resolution to him, in testimony of
their grateful appreciation of his disinterested services in the matter of
said claim.
A paper entitled Second Addition to the History of the
Fishes of the Cretaceous of the United States, by Ed. D. Cope,
was presented and its reading postponed. (See page 240.)
And the Scciety was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, Nov. 19th, 1869.
Present, fourteen members.
Mr. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter, dated Paris, Oct. 25th, 1869, was read from M.
Carlier, informing the Society officially of the termination of
* his duties as agent for the Society in the matter of the Michaux
Legacy.
Circular letters were read, dated Nov. 1, 1869, from Mr.
Axel Hrdmann, chief of the Geological Survey of Sweden,
announcing the transmission of charts and pamphlet descrip-
tions of the Survey, and requesting exchanges.
Donations for the Library were received from the Swedish
Survey, the Geographical Society of Paris, the London Astro-
nomical Society, the Boston Society of Natural History, Yale
College, Dr. Newberry, the New Jersey Historical Society, the
General Superintendent of Freedmen Schools at Washington,
and Dr. J. W. Hoyt of Wisconsin.
A communication was read entitled ‘“ On Comets and Mete-
ors, by Daniel Kirkwood, LL. D., Professor in Indiana Uni-
versity.” (See page 215.)
A communication was read by Judge Lowrie, entitled a
search for a “ Normal Cause of the Recession of Cosmical
Nodes.” (See page 220.)
Dr. G. B. Wood exhibited a number of Indian relics, disinter-
red from a bed of sand in the neighborhood of his residence in
Southern New Jersey, consisting of portions of the skull and
leg bones of a man, who had been buried in a sitting posture,
214
with the face towards the East; and a finely wrought. celt, or
hatchet to be held in the hand, and a flaked spear-head, buried
with the corpse. The bones were not fossilized ; but their can-
cellated tissues were filled with fine sand, and their age ap-
peared very considerable when a comparison was instituted
with those of the skeleton of a white man, buried in the same
neighborhood, about a century ago. There were also obtained,
from that neighborhood, rubbed and furrowed hammer-heads,
a large and well formed pestle, other implements apparently
made out of Delaware pebbles, and a large quern, or mill-stone,
of rock brought also from a distance. A ridge, composed
chiefly of oyster-shells, near by, is popularly accounted for by
supposing it to have been formed of the refuse of the food of
the aborigines. Dr. H. C. Wood explained it as an out-crop
of a shell-bed of Hocene Tertiary age. This is the more in-
teresting, as the Tertiaries of New Jersey have been supposed
to belong exclusively to the Miocene age.
Dr. H. C. Wood communicated to the Society some recent
experiments which he had made with Veratria, after which he
considered it proved, that purgation was connected especially
with the action of the pneumo-gastric nerve-system.
The minutes of the Board of Officers and Members in Coun-
cil were read.
Dr. Carson described the character of the Memoir upon the
Physiological Qualities of American Hemp, and the reasons in-
fluencing the Board to recommend it, not for the Magellanic,
but for an extra premium, in accordance with the action of the
Society, of date Feb. 12, 1864; whereupon, on the motion of
Mr. Fraley, it was
Resotvep, That an apprepriation of one hundred dollars be made from
the income of the Magellanic Fund, for the payment of the said premium,
and that said sum be transmitted to the author of the essay, with a suit-
able certificate engrossed on parchment, of the award of said premium,
said certificate to be under the Seal of the Society, and to be attested by
the signature of the officers thereof.
RESOLVED: That said essay be published in the proceedings. (P. 226.)
New nominations Nos. 648 to 648 were read.
rae)
—
On
N ov. 19, 1869. ] (Kirkwood,
ON COMETS AND METEORS.
By Danie, Kirkwoop, LL. D., Prormssor 1n INDIANA UNIVERSITY.
Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. 19, 1869.
The comets which passed their perihelia in August, 1862, and January,
1866, will ever be memorable in the annals of science, as having led tothe
discovery of the intimate relationship between comets and meteors.
These various bodies found revolving about the sun in very eccentric
orbits may all be regarded as similar in their nature and origin, differing
mainly in the accidents of magnitude and density. The recent researches,
moreover, of Hoek, Leverrier and Schiaparelli, have led to the conclusion
that such objects exist in great numbers in the interstellar spaces ; that
in consequence of the sun’s progressive motion they are sometimes
drawn towards the centre of our system ; and that if undisturbed by any
of the large planets they again pass off in parabolas or hyperbolas.
When, however, as must sometimes be the case, they approach near
Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus or Neptune, their orbits may be transformed
into ellipses. Such, doubtless, has been the origin of the periodicity of
the August and November meteors, as well as of numerous comets.
In the present paper it is proposed to consider the probable con-
sequences of the sun’s motion through regions of space in which
cosmical matter is widely diffused ; to compare these theoretical de-
ductions with the observed phenomena of comets, erolites and falling
stars ; and thus, if possible, explain a variety of facts in regard to those
bodies, which have hitherto received no satisfactory explanation.
1. As comets now moving in elliptic orbits owe their periodicity to the
disturbing action of the major planets, and as this planetary influence is
sometimes sufficient, especially in the case of Jupiter and Saturn, to
change the direction of cometary motion, the great majority of periodic
comets should move in the same direction with the planets. Now, of the
comets known to be elliptical, 70 per cent. have direct motion. In this
respect, therefore, theory and observation are in striking harmony.
2. When the relative positions of a comet and the disturbing planet
are such as to give the transformed orbit of the former a small perihelion
distance, the comet must return to the point at which it received its
greatest perturbation ; in other words, to the orbit of the planet. The
aphelia of the comets of short period ought therefore to be found, for the
most part, in the vicinity of the orbits of the major planets. The actual
distances of these aphelia are as follows :
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—2B
Kirkwood.] 21 6 [Noy. 19,
I. Comets whose Aphelion Distances are Nearly Equat to 5.20, the Radius
of Jupiter's Orbit.
Comets. Aph.Dist.'\ -Comets. Aph. Dist.
1. Encke’s (4.09 | %. 1766 IL. 5.47
2. 1819 IV. 4.81 8. 1819) 110. 5.09
3. De Vico’s 5.02 9. Brorsen’s 5.64
4, Pigott’s (1748) | ‘5.28 || 10. D’Arrest’s 5.75
5. 1867 11. He) | dal, Wenye’s 5.93
6. 1748 I. 10.02 12. Biela’s 6.19
II. Comets whose Aphelion Distances are Nearly Equal to 9.54, the Radius
of Saturn’s Orbit.
Comets. | Aph. Dist.
1. Peters’ (1846 VI.) 9.45
2. Tuttle’s (1858 I.) 10.42
TIl. Comets whose Aphelion Distances are Nearly Hqual to 19.18, the
Radius of Uranus’s Orbit.
| Comets. | Aph. Dist. |
sy TSG Il 19.28
| 2. Nov. Meteors. 19.65
| 3. 1866 I. - 19.92
TV. Comets whose Aphelion Distances are Nearly Equal to 30.04, the
Radius of Neptune's Orbit.
Comets. | Aph. Dist |
Comets. | Aph. Dist.
1. Westphal’s (18521V.)| 31.97 | 4 De Vico’s (1846 IV.) | 34.35
2. Pons’ (1812) 33.41 5. Brorsen’s (1847 VY.) 35.07
3. Olbers’ (1815) 34.05 | 6. Halley’s 30.00
The coincidences here pointed out (some of which have been noticed by
others, ) appear, then, to be necessary consequences of the motion of the
solar system through spaces occupied by meteoric nebule. Hence the
observed facts receive an obvious explanation.
In regard to comets of long period we have only to remark that, for any
thing we know to the contrary, there may be causes of perturbation far
exterior to the orbit of Neptune.
3. From what we observe in regard to the larger bodies of the universe
—a clustering tendency being everywhere apparent,—it seems highly
improbable that cometic and meteoric matter should be uniformly diffused
through space. We would expect, on the contrary, to find it collected in
cosmical clouds, similar to the visible nebule. Now, this, in fact, is pre-
visely what has teen okserved in regard both to comets and meteors. In
1869.] 2 1 7 [Kirkwood.
150 years, from 1600 to 1750, 16 comets were visible to the naked eye ;*
of which 8 appeared in the 25 years from 1664 to 1689. Again, during
60 years, from 1750 to 1810, only 5 comets were visible to the naked eye,
while in the next 50 years there were double that number. The probable
cause of such variations is sufficiently obvious. As the sun in his pro-
progressive motion approaches a cometary group, the latter must, by
reason of his attraction, move toward the centre of our system, the nearer
members with greater velocity than the more remote. Those of the same
cluster would enter the solar domain at periods not very distant from each
other; the forms of their orbits depending upon their original relative
positions with reference to the sun’s course, and also on planetary per-
turbation. It is evident also that the passage of the solar system through
a region of space comparatively destitute of cometic clusters would be
indicated by a corresponding paucity of comets. By the examination,
moreover, of any complete table of falling stars we shall find a still more
marked variation in the frequency of meteoric showers.
Previous to 1833, the periodicity of shooting stars had not been sus-
pected. Hence the showers seen up to that date were observed acc?-
dentally. Since the great display of that year, however, they have been
regularly looked for, especially at the November and August epochs,
Consequently the numbers recently observed cannot properly be com-
pared with those of former periods. Now, according to the Catalogue of
Quetelet, 244 meteoric showers were observed from the Christian era to
1833. These were distributed as follows :
Centuries. ee ek i Centuries. fee
Oto 100 5) 1000 to 1100 22
100 to 200 0 1100 to 1200 12
200 to 3800 3 1200 to 1300 3
300 to 400 1 1300 to 1400 4
400 to 500 1 | 1400 to 1500 4
500 to 600 20 1500 to 1600 7
600 to 700 1 1600 to 1700 7
700 to 800 | 14 1700 to 1800 24
800 to 900 3 1800 to 1833 48
900 to 1000 31
A remarkable secular variation in the number of showers is obvious
from the foregoing table. During the 5 centuries from 700 to 1200, 116
displays are recorded ; while in the 5 succeeding, from 1200 to 1700, the
number is only 25. It will also be observed that another period of abun-
dance commenced with the 18th century. <A catalogue of meteoric stone-
falls indicates also a corresponding increase in the number of erolites,
which cannot be wholly accounted for by the increased number of ob-
servers. Now, there are two obvious methods by which these variations
may be explained. LHither (1) the orbits of the meteoric rings which
*See Humboldt’s Cosmos, vol. 1V. p. 538, The writer called attention to this variation as long
since as 1861.
¢ @)
Kirkwood. ] al 5 [Nov. 19,
intersect the earth’s path were so changed by perturbation towards the
close of the 12th century as to prevent the appulse of the meteoric groups
with the earth’s atmosphere ; or, (2) the nebulous matter is very unequally
diffused through the sidereal spaces. That the former has not been the
principal cause is rendered extremely probable by the fact that the num-
ber of epochs of periodical showers was no greater during the cycle of
abundance than in that of paucity. We conclude, therefore, that during
the interval from 700 to 1200 the solar system was passing through, or
near, a meteoric cloud of very great extent ; that from 1200 to 1700 it was
traversing a region comparatively destitute of such matter; and that
about the commencement of the 18th century it again entered a similar
nebula of unknown extent.
The fact that the August meteors, which have been so often subse-
quently observed, were first noticed in 811, renders it probable that the
cluster was introduced into the planetary system not long previous to the
year 800. It may be also worthy of remark that the elements of the comet
of 770 A. D., are not very different from those of the August meteors
and the 3d comet of 1862.*
Adopting Struve’s estimate of the sun’s orbital velocity, we find the
diameter of the nebula traversed in 500 years to be 14 times that of
Neptune’s orbit.
Tt is remarkable that with the exception of Mars the perihelia of the
orbits of all the principal planets fall in the same semi-circle of lon-
gitude—a fact which can hardly be regarded as accidental. Now, if the
orbits were orginally circular, the motion of the solar system through a
nebulous mass not of uniform density would have the obvious effect of
compelling the planets to deviate from their primitive orbits and move in
ellipses of various eccentricities. It is easy to perceive, moreover, that
the original perihelion points of all the orbits would be on that side of
the system which had passed through the rarer portion of the nebulous
mass. We have thus a possible cause of the eccentricity of the planetary
orbits, as well as of the observed distribution of their perihelia.+
4. The particles of a cometic mass, being at unequal distances from
the sun, will tend to move at different rates and in somewhat different
orbits. This tendency will gradually overcome the feeble attractive force
etween the particles themselves. The most distant parts will thus
become separated from the nucleus, and move in independent orbits.
The motion of such meteoric matter will be in the same plane with that
of the parent comet; the orbit of the former, however, being generally
exterior to that of the latter. The connection recently discovered: be-
tween comets and meteors, and especially the fact that the period of the
* The interval between the perihelion passage of 770 and that of 1862 is equal to 9 periods of 121.36
years. Oppolzer’s determination of the period of 1862 III. is 121.5 years. Hind remarks that the
elements of the comet of 770 are “‘rather uncertain,” but says ‘“‘that the general character of the
orbit is decided.” Itmay be worthy of remark that a great meteoric shower, the exact date of
which has not been preserved, occurred in 770.
+ This suggestion is due to R. A. Proctor, F, R. A. S., the distinguished author of ‘Saturn and its
System.”
»
1869. ] 219 [Kirkwood.
November group is somewhat greater than that of the comet of 1866, are
in striking harmony with the views here presented.
5. Owing to this loss of matter, periodic comets must become less
brilliant, other things being equal, at each successive return ;—a fact
observed in regard to the comets of Halley and Biela.
6. The line of apsides of a large proportion of comets will be approxi-
mately coincident with the solar orbit. The point towards which the sun
is moving is in longitude about 260°. The quadrants bisected by this
point and that directly opposite extend from 215° to 305°, and from 35°
to 125°. The number of cometary peribhelia found in these quadrants up
to July, 1868, (periodic comets being counted but once) was 159, or 62 per
cent.; in the other two quadrants, 98, or 388 per cent.
This tendency of the perihelia to crowd together in two opposite
regions has been noticed by different writers.
7. Comets whose positions before entering our system were very remote
from the solar orbit must have overtaken the sun in its progressive mo-
tion; hence their perihelia must fall for the most part, in the vicinity of
the point towards which the sun is moving; and they must in general
have very small perihelion distances. Now, what are the observed facts
in regard to the longitudes of the perihelia of the comets which have ap-
proached within the least distance of the sun’s surface? But three have
had a perihelion distance less than 0.01. All these, it will be seen by the
following table, have their perihelia in close proximity to the point re-
ferred to:
I. Comets whose Perihelion Distances are Less than 0.01.
Perihelion Passage. | Per. Dist. | Long. of Per.
—— j | ——
1. 1668, Feb. 28d. 18h. | 0.0047 217° 2!
2 L680 Dees i 23 0.0062 262. 49
3. 1843, Feb. 27 9 0.0055 278 39
In table II. all but the last have their perihelia in the same quadrant.
Il. Comets whose Perihelion Distances are Greater than 0.01 and Less
than 0.05.
Perihelion Passage. Per. Dist. Long. of Per.
1. 1689, Noy. 29d. 4h. 0.0189 269° 41’
2. 1816, March 1 8 0.0485 267 3)
3. 1826, Nov. 18 ) 0.0268 3l5 31
4. 1847, March 30 6 0.0425 276 2
5. 1865, Jan. 14 2 0.0260 141 15
The perihelion of the first comet in table III. is remote from the
direction of the sun’s motion; that of the second is distant but 14°, and
of the third, 21°.
Lowrie. ] 220) [Nov. 19,
Ill. Comets whose Perihelion Distances are Greater than 0.05 and Less
than 0.1.
Perihelion Passage. | Per. Dist. | Long. of Per.
1. 1593, July 18d. 134. | 0.0801 | 176° 197
2. 1780, Sept. 30 22 0.0963 246 85
3. 1821, March 21 12 0.0918 239 29
With greater perihelion distances the tendency of the perihelia to crowd
together around the point indicated is less distinctly marked.
8. Few comets of small perihelion distance should have their perihelia
in the vicinity of longitude 80°, the point opposite that towards which
the sun is moving. Accordingly we find, by examining a table of com-
etary elements, that with a perihelion distance less than 0.1, there is not
a single perihelion between 35° and 125°; between 0.1 and 0.2, but 3;
and between 0.2 and 0.3 only 1.
BLOOMINGTON, InprANA, September 14th, 1869.
A SEARCH FOR A NORMAL CAUSE OF THE RECESSION OF
COSMICAL NODES.
By Hon. Water H. Lowrie.
Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. 19, 1869.
The analogy between the recession of the nodes of all the planets and
satellites of the solar system, including that of the earth, called the pre-
cession of the equinoxes, is so complete and manifest that the mind, on
the discovery of it, naturally inclines to attribute them all to like causes.
These phenomena have not been so treated heretofore, but have been re-
garded as disturbances produced by various causes, the influence of which
I do not feel entitled to question, while I think there is a normal cause
which ought to be considered.
It seems to me to be a proposition of axiomatic plainness, that, in any
system or sub-system of moving bodies, all its periodic motions ought
to be presumed normal, rather than abnormal, that is, the causes of them
ought to be first sought in the plan of the system itself; and only when
this search fails ought we to suspect them to be disturbances caused by
forces which are alien to the system. Thus, all the periodic motions of
the planets ought to be presumed to depend on their relation to the sun,
until the contrary appears; and all the periodic motions of the satellites
ought to be presumed to depend upon their several planets.
1869] 221 [Lowrie.
Our scientific systems consist only of the elements from which, and of
the order by which we construct them, and are, therefore, charged with
all the defects of our knowledge and constructive skill. In the early
stages of astronomy, many phenomena were treated as exceptional and
disturbing, which are now known to be normal pulsations of the vs viva
of the solar system, because now this force is better comprehended. And
the same is true of all growing sciences. All our scientific systems are
accustomed to discover that their ideals of nature are often very unreal,
and that the perturbations, which they attribute to nature, belong only
to themselves. Newly discovered facts or principles must always cause
some derangement or re-arrangement of the old furniture of the school
that admits them.
Now that we know that the solar system is a part of a much grander
system, in which the sun itself revolves, we have a fact which is, in many
respects of great astronomical importance, and which did not enter into
the inductions of former times; and considering its character, it is not
unnatural to suppose that it is an essential element in all the motions of
the system. If this be so, then our whole system of astronomical
dynamics must, to some extent, open up to admit its influence and to
submit to such modifications as it may require.
This fact can no more be without influence on the motions of the plan-
ets, than can be the revolution of the planets on their satellites. It ne-
cessarily made a great change in our knowledge of the form of planetary
orbits, though it may not greatly change our reasoning about them.
And yet, what is the parallax of a star worth to us now, unless we know
whether the sun’s motion (say 150,000,000 miles a year) was taken into
account, and whether the base of the parallactic angle was 190,000,000
+ 75,000,000 miles, or 190,000,0C00—75,000,000, or some chord of inter-
mediate length ? How, without this, shall we value any ancient obser-
vation of the place of a star, or the record of stellar movements sup-
posed to be made in the construction of the pyramids? It may now be
thought better to take one, or ten, or more years of the sun’s motion
in the base of such an angle.
Such changes in scientific theories do not often make any serious
changes in the laws which observation had discovered as facts, but rather
account for them, and show the common bond that unites them in nature
and in reason. When the centre of cosmical motion was transferred
from the earth to the sun, the laws of the solar system, as they had been
learned before, were not annulled. When light changed its base from
EMISSION to UNDULATION, the laws of optics were not seriously affected.
A law may be true as an expression of observed phenomena, even when
its principle is unknown or mistaken, or when it is erroneously supposed
to be itself a final and independent principle.
Ithink the normal cause, not to speak of disturbing ones, of the re-
cession of the nodes can be found in the system or sub-system to which
the motion belongs, and that it is the same everywhere. It seems to me
to be a necessary consequence of the inclination of the dependent to the
Lowrie.] [Nov. 19,
principal orbit, and, so far as we know, this form pervades the whole
solar system.
True, we know not yet the direction of the real orbit of the sun, and,
therefore, cannot tell how the other orbits are inclined to it. But we
know that all the others have different inclinations, and that, therefore,
not more than one, and probably none, of them coincides with the sun’s.
And if the observations of Sir William Herschel and his successors, on
the course of the sun, are near the truth, then it is proved that all are so
inclined ; and we do not mark recessions on the sun’s orbit because we
have not yet found where it is. Finding the law that recession of nodes
always accompanies their existence, we naturally expect a like cause for
all cases, a cause growing out of like relations to the main force of the
system or sub-system; and therefore we ought to study how the central
force operates on a dependent body moving in that form.
Let us be sure, even at the risk at an unnecessary presentation of rudi-
ments, that we have a right possession of this phenomenon of the reces-
sion of the nodes, and that it is a phenomenon of the earth’s motion. It
is, of course, difficult for a person unused to the study of the motions of
the solar system to form or retain very clear conceptions of all their
changing complications. He will often be mistaken in his geometry of
the heavens, and may seldom have the pleasure of more than a transient
confidence in his conceptions about it. Occupying a revolving and rotat-
ing position, and obliged to find from it the courses and velocities of the
shifting currents of the cosmical ocean, and fix them by the floating land-
marks of the skies, he will often get confused and suspect himself in-
competent. 3
We shall not need to go beyond the instances of the earth and moon to
get illustrations of this motion sufficient to show its unity of form and
unity of relation to the central body. It is involved in the geometrical
conception of a cosmical system, that, where its orbital planes differ in
inclination, each must internode with all the others by a line passing
through their common centre, and this is the line of its nodes. But if
the planes always maintained the same direction in space, there could be
no motion of nodes, and these cross-roads of the skies would be less im-
portant and interesting than they now are.
It is admitted that the axes of rotation of all the planets and satellites,
except the earth, are fixed and stable, so that they change direction only
with their orbital planes and not 7m them, and it is supposed that the
earth alone tilts 7m its plane. It is admitted also that all these planes ex-
cept the earth’s have a constant warping or tilting motion westward, and
that their bodies tilt with them, and this causes these planes to cut through
any fixed plane further westward in each revolution, and the lines of their
nodes to recede on any such plane, and the ecliptic is taken as such a
one ; but it is supposed that a similar appearance is produced, relative to
the earth, by a tilting of the earth itself 7m its plane, marked by its equa-
tor on the ecliptic, and not by a tilting of its plane. If this be so, then
998
1869.] dod [Lowrie.
the earth has the same tilt 7 the moon’s plane also, and this would be a
further anomaly.
Possibly these differences of statement may be accounted for from th
fact, that, besides our ignorance of the sun’s motion, the recession of
nodes can have value for us only as the nodes are stations on the earth’s
orbital plane, and can be noted as crossings of this great highway; and,
of course, the ecliptic can be no measure of its own inclination, or revo-
lutions, or recession. ‘Certainly the ecliptic does appear to have a tilting
motion, completing a reyolution in 25,868 years, so that the sun, in that
time, will appear to pass over all the stars that are between the tropical
circles. And why should we treat this as only an apparent motion of the
earth’s orbital plane, while admitting that it is real in all other cases?
It may help us here if we take notice of a class of cases wherein
there is a real tilting of the axis of rotation of a body 7n its orbital plane.
They are all cases where a body moves in two planes at once ; as a planet
with a satellite, having an inclined orbit, where there is a conflict of two
forces, represented by the two planes, and an accommodation between
them. Here we assume that the earth, without the moon, would have no
tilt or change of direction of its axis 72 itsown plane. Butit is also in the
moon’s plane, and this has a tilting revolution round the earth in 19 years.
Then this relation of the earth and moon is analogous to their connection
by a lever, representing their mutual attraction in the line of the moon’s
nodes, the fulerum being their common centre of gravity. If the earth’s
axis had a fixed position on this lever, it would go with it, and thus have
a real tilt 72 its own plane equal to double the inclination of the moon’s
plane. But itis held by the greater force represented by its own piane
and its centre, so that this tilt is very small, called its nutation, having a
period of nineteen years, and being only another aspect of the revolution
of the moon’s nodes. It would perform an ellipse round the ideal pole
of the heavens; but, by its combination with the greater motion of the
earth’s pole by the recession of zts nodes, it becomes a series of 19-year
scollops in that ellipse. Here is a case and a cause of tilting in a plane,
which no doubt exists in all planets which have satellites, and even in the
sun itself, and I think that no other such a case is known to astronomy.
We know of no cosmical cause for this fixedness of axes of rotation ;
but, without it, we could have no science of astronomy, no measure of
time, no measure of direction or position beyond the earth itself; for
upon this depends, directly or indirectly, all our astronomical measures.
if the earth’s orbital plane tilts and revolves, and thus changes the direc-
tion of the earth’s axis, it is with so slow a movement as not to embarrass
the observations and calculations of a human lifetime, and scarcely those
of human history, but only to mark those immense periods by which
eternity is terraced off before and behind us. If this plane does thus
revolve, and if its axis is inclined to the axis of the earth, no matter what
may be the dip of its tilt, the poles of the two axes will revolve around
each other, and always maintain to each other the same angle of incli-
A, Wo S—= VOW XC
394
Lowrie. ] les [Nov. 19,
nation, unless there be some cause that affects the fixedness of one of
them. ;
We are to seek the cause of recession of nodes in a system so con-
structed and so operating, by the force of cosmical attraction, that this
very force will appear to be the cause, and that we may see its mode of
operation, if it be really there. To illustrate such a structure, we may
take any planet or satellite of the solar system ; for all alike have this
cosmical force and this inclination of orbital plane, and this recession of
nodes.
We take the moon in its revolution. Because of this inclination, one
half of its orbit is above and the other half below the plane of the earth’s
orbit. While the earth is sweeping around in its great orbit, it swings
the moon around it, as upon an epicycle of which the earth is the centre.
A proper conception of these two motions in relation to each other gives
us the direction of the central force which produces the moon’s motion.
Tt is never directed from a point fixed as the centre of the orbit, nor
from a straight line, constituted by a motion of such a point, but from a
centre always moving in a line curving eastwardly, and in a direction dif-
fering from that of the moon’s orbit according to the different inclinations
of the earth’s and the moon’s orbits. It is the very force which bears the
moon forward in space, and yet, by reason of the form of their connec-
tion, it is always\moving laterally and eastwardly out of the centre of the
moon’s plane, and tending also to push forward through and beyond the
plane, and thus it is all the while exerting its force in a sort of twisting of
the moon’s orbit into perpetual accommodation to the curve of the orbit
of its primary.
The result of this is, that no matter what. may be the position of the
moon’s plane, this force, always departing from a right line, constantly
draws the moon down or up through the plane of the earth’s orbit sooner
in each successive revolution; and this is equivalent to a westward warp-
ing or tilting motion of the moon’s plane, so that it cuts that of the earth
more and more westward in each revolution; and this would constitute a
constant recession of the nodes, even if there were no other causes of it ;
and it ought not to be overlooked.
If this is a correct reading of this force and its dependent motions,
which I submit to those who may consider the subject worth thinking
about, then the central force of every planét operates in precisely the
same form on its satellites, where their orbital planes are inclined, varied
only according to their degrees of inclination. And, of course, the sun
(assuming its motion to be as heretofore stated) operates in the same way
upon all the planets, so as to produce a recession of their nodes; and the
phenomenon of recession of nodes, even if not entirely normal, has a per-
fectly normal cause.
It follows also, that wherever we find a constant recession of the nodes
of a secondary body, we may naturally infer that its primary is itself re-
volving around some central bedy ; though it will be impossible to say that
1809.] x0 [Lowries
this product of the central force may not be entirely merged in the pro-
duct of some disturbing force.
Dr. Whewell regards the discovery of the precession of the equinoxes.
resulting from the attraction of the sun and moon on the earth’s equa-
torial protuberance, as a remarkable example of the consilience of induc-
tions; but surely this consilience is more impressive when we notice
that that form of attraction is enterely singular, not being known to exist
in any other, even analogous, case; whereas, the form here suggested ap-
plies to every case where there are revolving nodes; that it presents the
motion as a perfectly normal consequence of the central force of each
system or sub-system, operating diiectly upon its dependent body according
to the relation of its orbit; and that it recognizes a physical, along with
a formal, unity in the plan of the whole system, and satisfies the second
of Newton’s ‘‘Rules of philosophizing,”’ that ‘‘ Natural effects of the
same kind are to be referred to the same cause, so far as can be done.’’
The other theory has this difficulty to contend with: that we suppose all
planets to have equatorial protuberances, as an effect of rotation ; and, so
far as we know, all have inclined axes; and yet we do not attribute to
them precession of equinoxes and recession of nodes as two different
motions. Both exist, but only as different aspects of the same motion.
But the views here presented are not without serious difficulty in their
ulterior application. If the cause here suggested is true, then it seems
natural to seek some proportion in time between the revolutions of the
nodes and those of the central bodies on which they depend ; a proportion
modified by the differences of relation in space and time in which the
several secondaries stand to their primaries. I do not discover the law of
such a proportion, or even that it surely exists. If it were discovered it
would probably be of use in seeking the period and orbit of the sun’s revo-
lution.
So far as our knowledge goes at present, we find that it always requires
many revolutions of a planet or satellite for one revolution of its nodes,
and they differ very greatly. In one revolution of its nodes Mercury re-
volves in its orbit over 500,000 times ; Venus, 100,000; the earth, 25,000;
Mars, 27,000; Jupiter, near 7,000; Saturn, 2,200; and Uranus, 428. No
others revolve in so short a téme as those of the earth. Among the satel-
lites, the moon revolves 230 times for one revolution of its nodes; Jupi-
ter’s 2d satellite, 3,000; its 3d, 7,000; its 4th, 11,000 times.
And in all known eases the central body revolves more frequently than
the nodes of its dependent. Thus the earth revolves in its orbit near 19
times for one revolution of the moon’s nodes; Jupiter 25 times for once
of the nodes of its 2d satellite, 12 times for its 3d,. and 45 times for
its 4th satellite. All this would seem to indicate a period for the sun’s
revolution round its unknown centre, which would be a very small frac-
tion of any estimate of it that I have seen, founded on observations of
stellar parallaxes. I find no clue to the solution of this apparent anomaly;
I hope some other inquirer may.
996
Wood.] IS [Noy. 19,
ON THE MEDICAL ACTIVITY OF THE HEMP PLANT,
AS GROWN IN NORTH AMERICA.
By Dr. Horatio C. Woop, Jr., Pror. or Botany, UNIVERSITY OF
PENNSYLVANIA; SECRETARY OF THE COMMITTEE OF THE COLLEGE
OF PHYSICIANS OF PHILADELPHIA ON THE REVISION OF U. § PHAR-
MACOPEIA.
A prize essay, read before the Amer. Phil. Soc., Nov. 19, 1869.
Almost from time immemorial various preparations of the hemp plant
have been used in India for the production of a peculiar intoxication.
These, or allied preparations have also in modern times been largely used
in medicine. It has been thought by some that the hemp of India
is specifically distinct from the European plant, but there are really no
specific differences, the former differing from the latter only in minor par-
ticulars, such as size, the results of the modifying influences of soil
and climate. As the drug has become an important article of commerce,
attempts have been made to obtain the medicinal principle, a peculiar
resinoid body, from plants grown in Great Britain, by which it has been
determined that although the resin does exist in such plants, yet it is in
so small quantity, that they are not available for manufacturing pur-
poses. The summersof England appear to be too cool to enable the hemp
to elaborate its peculiar resin in any quantity. The world has, therefore,
been dependent upon India for its supplies of this widely used narcotic.
The plants with which the following experiments were made, were raised
in the vicinity of Lexington, Kentucky. They were male plants, which had
been grown for the purpose of fertilizing seeding female plants, and which
having fulfilled that office, were of no further value to the cultivator.
They were obtained for me, by R. B. Hamilton, Esq. of Lexington, to
whom my thanks are due for the trouble taken by him to aid my investi-
gation.
The first experiment was as follows: an ounce anda half of the powdered
leaves, were treated with hot alcohol, although not to exhaustion. The
tincture thus made was evaporated and an alcoholic extract obtained.
About 43 p. m., Sept. 28d, I took most of this extract, in a lump, which a
druggist aa to contain from 20 to 80 grains. No immediate symp-
toms were produced. About 7 Pp. M., a professional call was requested
and forgetting all about the hemp, I went out and saw my patient,
Whilst writing the prescription, | became perfectly oblivious to surround-
ing objects but went on writing, without any check to or deviation from
the ordinary series of mental acts, connected with the process, at least
that I am aware of. When the recipe was finished, I suddenly recollected
where I was, and looking up, saw my patient sitting quietly before me.
The conviction was irresistible, that I had sat thus many minutes, per-
haps hours, and directly, the idea fastened itself that the hemp had com-
menced to act, and had thrown me into a trance-like state of considerable
duration, during which I had been stupidly sitting before my wondering
patient.
I hastily arose and apologized for remaining so long, but was assured
6
1869.] 221 [Wood.
I had only been a very few minutes. About 7} p.m. I returned home. I
was by this time quite excited, and the feeling of hilarity now rapidly in-
creased. It was not a sensuous feeling, in the ordinary meaning of the
term; it was not merely an intellectual excitation, it was a sort of bien-
étre — the very opposite to malaise. It did not come from without ;
it was not connected with any passion or sense. It was simply a feeling
of inner joyousness; the heart seemed buoyant beyond all trouble; the
whole system felt as though all sense of fatigue were forever banished ;
the mind gladly ran riot, free constantly to leap from one idea to another,
apparently unbound from its ordinary laws. I was disposed to laugh ; to
make comie gestures—one very frequently recurrent fancy, was to imitate
with the arms the motions of a fiddler, and with the lips the tune he was
supposed to be playing. There was nothing like wild delirium, nor any
hallucinations that Iremember. At no time had I any visions, or at least
any that I can now eall to mind; but a person, who was with me at that
time, states that once I raised my head and exclaimed, ‘‘ Oh, the moun-
tains! the mountains!’’? Whilst I was performing the various antics,
already alluded to, I knew very well I was acting exceedingly foolishly
but could not control myself.
I think it was about 8 o’clock, when I began to have a feeling of numb-
ness in my limbs, also a sense of general uneasiness and unrest, and a fear
lest I had taken an overdose. I now constantly walked about the house,
my skin to myself was warm, in fact my whole surface felt flushed; my
mouth and throat were very dry ; my legs put ona strange, foreign feeling,
as though they were not a part of my body. I counted my pulse and
found it 120, quite full and strong. A foreboding, an undefined, horrible
fear, as of impending death, now commenced to creep over me ; in haste
I sent for Dr. H. Allen, and he being out, directly afterwards for Dr,
Thomas. The curious sensations in my limbs increased. My legs felt as
though they were waxen pillars beneath me. I remember feeling them
with my hand and finding them, as I thought at least, very firm, the
muscles all in a state of tonie contraction. About 8 o’clock, I began to
have marked ‘‘spells’’—periods when all connection seemed to be severed
between the external world and myself. I might be said to have been
unconscious during these times, in so far that I was oblivious to all external
objects, but on coming out of one, it was not a blank, dreamless void upon
which I looked back, a mere empty space, but rather a period of active
but aimless life. I donot think there was any connected thought in them ;
they seemed simply wild reveries, without any binding cord; each a
mere chaos of disjointed ideas. The mind seemed freed from all its ordi-
nary laws of association so that it passed from idea to idea, as it were,
perfectly at random.
The duration of these spells to me was very great, although they really
lasted but from a few seconds to a minute or two. Indeed I now entirely
lost my power of measuring time. Seconds seemed hours; minutes
seemed days; hours seemed infinite. Still I was perfectly conscious during
the intermissions between the paroxysms. I would look at my watch, and
then after an hour or two, as I thought, would look again and
228
Do
Wood.) [Novy. 19,
find that scarcely five minutes had elapsed. I would gaze at its face
in deep disgust, the minute hand seemingly motionless as though graven
in the face itself; the laggard second hand moving slowly, so slowly. It
appeared a hopeless task to watch during its whole infinite round of a min-
ute, and always would I give up in despair before the 60 seconds had
elapsed. Occasionally, when my mind was most lucid, there was in it a
sort of duplex action in regard to the duration of time. I would think
to myself it has been so long since a certain event, an hour for example,
since the doctor came, and then reason would say, no it has been only a
few minutes, your thoughts or feelings are caused by the hemp. Never-
theless I was not able to shake offthis sense of the almost indefinite prolonga-
tion of time, even fora minute. The paroxysms already alluded to, were not
accompanied with muscular relaxation. About quarter before 9 o’clock, L
was standing at the door, anxiously watching for the doctor, and when the
spells would come on I would remain standing, leaning slightly, perhaps,
against the doorway. After awhile, lsawaman approaching, whom I took
to be the doctor. The sounds of his steps told me he was walking very rap-
idly, and he was under a gas lamp, not more than one-fourth of a square dis-
tant, yet he appeared a vast distance away and a corresponding time ap-
proaching. This was the only occasion, in which I noticed an exaggeration
of distance ; in the room it was not perceptible. Myextremities now began
to grow cold and I went into the house. Idonot remember further, until I
was aroused by Dr. Thomas shaking or calling me. Then intellection
seemed pretty good. JI narrated what I had done and suffered, and told
the doctor my opinion was, that an emetic was indicated both to remove
any of the extract still remaining in my stomach and also to arouse the
nervous system. I further suggested our going into the office as more
suitable than the parlor, where we then were. There was at this time a
very marked sense of numbness in my limbs, and what the doctor said
was a hard pinch, produced no pain. When I attempted to walk up stairs
my legs seemed as though their lower halves were made of lead. After
this there were no new symptoms, only an intensifying of those already
mentioned. The periods of unconsciousness became at once longer and
more frequent, and during their absence intellection was more imper-
fect, although when thoroughly roused, I thought I reasoned and judged
clearly. The oppressive feeling of impending death became more intense.
It was horrible. Each paroxysm would seem to have been the longest I
had suffered: as I came out of it, a voice seemed constantly saying,
“vou are getting worse—your paroxysms are growing longerand deeper—
they will overmaster you—you will die.”’
A sense of personal antagonism between my will power and myself, as
affected by the drug, grew very strong. I felt asthough my only chance
was to struggle against these paroxysms; that I must constantly arouse
myself by an effort of will, and that effort was made with infinite toil and
pain. I felt as if some evil spirit had control of the whole of me, except
the will power, and was in determined conflict with that, the last citadel
of my being. I have never experienced anything like the fearful sense
of almost hopeless anguish and utter weariness which was upon me.
>) IO
1869. ] an [Wood.
Once or twice during a paroxysm, I had what might be called night-mare
sensations; I felt myself mounting upwards, expanding, dilating,
dissolving into the wide confines of space, overwhelmed by a horrible,
rending, unutterable despair. Then with tremendous effort, I seemed to
shake this off, and to start up with the shuddering thought, next time
you will not be able to throw this off, and what then! Under the influ-
ence of an emetic I vomited freely without nausea and without much
relief. About midnight, at the suggestion of the doctors, I went up
stairs to bed. My legs and feet seemed so heavy I could scarcely move
them, and it was as much as I could do to walk with help. I have no re-
collection, whatever, of being undressed, but am told I went immediately
to sleep. When I awoke early in the morning, my mind was at first clear,
but in a few minutes the paroxysms, similar to those of the evening, came
on again, and recurred at more or less brief intervals until late in the
afternoon. All of the day there was marked anesthesia of the skin.
At no time were there any aphrodisiac feelings produced. ‘There was
a marked increase of the urinary secretion. There were no after effects,
such as nausea, headache, or constipation of the bowels.
The following notes were kindly furnished by Dr. Thomas: ‘TI was
called at 83 Pp. m. to Dr. H. C. Wood, and was informed he had taken an
over-dose of extract-cannab. indic. I found him presenting at first glance,
the mental condition and excited manner of mild alcoholic intoxication.
His powers of ratiocination were but slightly impaired. The most promi-
nent psychological manifestation was a constant and overwhelming dread
of impending death, which no amount of assurance could relieve for more
than an instant; with this was combined an almost entire loss of the fac-
ulty of appreciating time—moments seeming to his disturbed conscious-
ness to be hours in length. He stood and walked without difficulty, and
his voice was natural in tone and accent. Pupils widely though not com-
pletely dilated ; pulse moderately full, and numbering 106 beats per min-
ute, increasing in frequency to 118 per minute within the following twenty
minutes and becoming decidedly weaker. The extremities were cool and
growing colder. ZinciSulph. was now ordered with the view of evacuating
the stomach of any of the drug which might remain unabsorbed, as well
as for any possible revulsive influence it might exert. At ten minutes after
9, when the emetic was obtained, the pulse was found to have increased in
frequency still farther (136) and to have proportionately decreased in vol-
ume. Within 15 minutes following, the feet meantime having been soaked
in hot mustard water, free emesis took place, and the pulse rapidly fell,
improving at the same time in quality. At 10.15 it was 104 per minute,
and it remained about the same for the succeeding hour. The warmth
of skin was at this time restored. The mental state varied but little
hroughout. At 11.15 I resigned the case to Dr. Allen.”’
The foregoing experiment proves that the Kentucky hemp does contain
an appreciable quantity of the resinous active principle or principles, but
it was merely tentative, and was not intended to determine the proportion-
ate amount.
In order to determine the proportion of extract obtainable, the follow-
ing experiment was performed: iy
Wood.] 239 [Nov. 19,
Six ounces of the dried leaves of male Kentucky hemp plants were
treated with hot alcohol and then exhausted with a little ether. The
tinctures thus obtained were mixed and evaporated. The extract thus
procured weighed 252 grains. One drachm of it was rubbed up with a
strong solution of the Carbonate of Soda to remove fatty matters, &c. It
lost nineteen grains or 82 per cent., very nearly one-third of its weight.
Six ounces of the leaves, therefore, yielded rather more than two and two-
thirds drachms of an extract, from which every thing soluble in an alka-
line solution had beenremoved. The method employed resembles that of
the Messrs. Smith of Edinburgh. They obtained from 6 to7 per cent. of
their purified extract from the plant grown in India. I obtained 4 to5 per
cent. of the extractive, and as the operation was on a small scale and con-
ducted by one totally unversed in practical pharmacy, there can be no
doubt that there was sufficient loss to bring up the proportion fully to 5 per
cent.; moreover the American leaves were probably not so thoroughly
dried as the Indian.
The therapeutic powers of this extract were not tested.
To test the matter further, I exhausted three ounces avoirdupois with
hot alcohol, and the resultant tincture was placed in the hands of Hance,
Griffith and Company, Manufacturing Chemists of this city.* Four-fifths
of this tincture were evaporated by them to the consistency of a syrup,
and to it was added ten times its bulk of water. The precipitate was
washed and dried. When given into my hands, it was a softish greenish,
adhesive resin. Of this I took # of a grain dissolved in a mixture of alco-
hol and ether. It produced marked cerebral disturbance amounting to a
mild intoxication.
These symptoms were similar to those heretofore detailed, but very
much milder. There were, however, no marked periods of unconscious-
ness, merely a feeling of hilarity and a total inability to fix the attention
except for a very short period and also some prolongation of time.
Of this same resinous extract, my friend, Car] Friih, a graduate of the
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, took one grain. He first felt the influ-
ence of if about supper time. His head felt as if some one was violently
compressing it and at the same time there was a feeling of hilarity, with
an uncontrollable desire to talk and laugh, so that those around him asked
him what had come over him.
At supper he was almost ravenous and ate so much that it was noticed
by others. Upon attempting to concentrate his thoughts upon any sub-
ject, he found it required a very painful effort. In attempting to com-
pound a prescription, he found it impossible to remember more than one
ingredient at a time, and even this was almost beyond his powers. In the
evening he went to a lecture at the College of Pharmacy. Although he
understood all that was said, yet he could not remember it a moment, and
at times would forget his surroundings and then suddenly wake up to find
himself sitting in the lecture room. Later in the evening he attended a
society-meeting, and afterwards went out with a fellow student, but has
no recollection of what was said or done. There was a good deal of pria-
#Now ILance, Brothers and White.
Oo
1869.] 251 [Wood.
pism during the night, and a state of venereal excitement was induced,
lasting several days. During the night, urine was passed very freely.
Before this, he had taken two grains of Herring’s extract with the re-
sult of producing similar symptoms, which were, however, no more intense
than those caused by the single grain of the American resin.
Messrs. Hance and Griffith prepared the resin from the remainder of the
hemp tincture, by first agitating with milk of lime, filtering, precipitating
by sulphuric acid, agitating with animal charcoal, again filtering, concen-
trating by evaporation, and precipitating the resin by the addition of twice
the bulk of water. The resin thus obtained was tested by my friend, Dr.
Richardson, in the Pennsylvania Hospital, by permission of Dr. Da Costa,
the attending physician. One-fourth of a grain of it was found to be suf-
ficient to produce decided therapeutic results ; in some cases acting very
pleasantly as a hypnotic and calmative; in others, causing evident sen-
sorial disturbance, but rather aggravating than alleviating the distress of
the patient.
Having at that time a lady under my care, subject to severe attacks of
neuralgia, I supplied her with some of the drug in + grain pills. Of these
she found one was always sufficient to induce a quiet sleep of some hours
duration, from which she generally awoke free from pain. After the
limited supply of this preparation was exhausted, I tried with her a sim-
ilarly prepared extract made from imported India hemp plants, but a grain
of this did not suffice to quiet the pain and induce sleep.
The above experiments are certainly sufficient to prove that the hemp
plant, as grown in Kentucky, contains a sufficient abundance of the active
principle, to be capable of yielding a supply to the pharmaceutist. If I
am correctly informed, the India plant is worth at wholesale prices, about
a dollar a pound in our market. The male seeding plants in Kentucky,
after they have shed their pollen, are worthless. It was with such plants
the experiments were instituted. A considerable supply of them might
be obtained, so Mr. Hamilton writes me, for little more than the expense of
gathering them, or if the demand should exceed the amount of such male
plants, the leaves of the female plants when ready to be cut for the fibre
might be obtained on the same terms.
A more important consideration than the mere monetary one, is the
probability that, when the plants were raised near home, a more uniform
product would be obtained.
There can be no doubt, that under certain circumstances cannabis in-
dica supplies a medical need, which no other drug will so exactly meet.
Yet, the extracts as kept in the shops, even when honestly made, vary so
indefinitely in strength, and indeed are so generally almost inert, that the
use of this narcotic has been largely abandoned in consequence. It is
very probable that this variation depends to a certain extent upon differ-
ences in age and modes of cultivation, &c., of the plant. If this be so,
the growth of the plant under the eye of the pharmaceutist will give him
the opportunity of learning the conditions best fitted for developing in it
the active principles.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—2D
929
Wood.] 232 [Nov. 19, 1269.
The U. 8. Pharmacopeia apparently recognizes the fact of the variance
of the hemp extracts of commerce and directs a purified extract. The pro-
cess of preparation given, consists simply of dissolving the crude extract in
alcohol and evaporating. Unfortunately this does not meet the difficulty,
since the solubility of the extract in alcohol is no certain measure of its
activity. There are many inert matters existing in the plant which are
soluble in alcohol, so that a fair amount of extract may be yielded by a
specimen which contains almost no resin. This may occur to a certain ex-
tent even if India hemp plant be the subject of the trial and is very cer-
tainly the case when plants from other localities are employed.
In order to throw some light on this subject the following experiment
was made: 100 grains of a fine looking extract made from India plants
wholly soluble in alcohol, were rubbed up with a solution of potash, dis-
solved in alcohol, passed through animal charcoal precipitated by a
strongly alkaline solution, filtered, and the resin carefully washed and
dried. The resultant weighed 68 grains. Even if we allow as much as
12 per cent. for waste, there was, therefore, present in the original extract
30 per cent. of inert matters, which corresponds very closely with the
amount of inert matter contained in the extract prepared by myself from
the American plant. That the matters removed by potash are inert I
proved in regard, at least to the American extract, by taking them in
considerable amount without any perceptible effects being induced. In
view of the above mentioned facts, it would seem advisable to replace in
the U. 8S. Pharmacopeia for 1870, the present Hvtractum cannabis purifi-
catum by a preparation to be called Resina Cannabis, and to be made by
precipitating the concentrated tincture, by water rendered strongly alka-
line by the presence of soda or potash.
Such a mode of preparing is essentially that originally published by the
Messrs. Smith of Edinburg. The resin, as obtained by himself in this
way, corresponds pretty closely with that described by the latter gentle-
men in their original paper. It is fawn colored, in very thin layers, but
when in mass, is blackish. Itis neutral to test paper, and is apparently, a
simple, active principle ; at least I have not been able to separate any or-
ganic principle from it. At one time, I strongly suspected the presence
in it of an alkaloid, because its action on myself was so similar to that of
the mydriatics.
In order to determine this point, a concentrated tincture was treated
with water acidulated with acetic acid, filtered,and to the clear solution thus
obtained an alkali was added, but no precipitate was afforded—neither did
tannic acid produce any. This experiment was repeated, sulphuric acid
being substituted for the acetic. The same negative result was obtained.
Again, a concentrated tincture was treated with freshly precipitated ox-
ide of lead, filtered, the lead removed by the hydro-sulphate of ammo-
nia and the water acidulated with sulphuric acid, was added. Upon
again filtering, the clear solution obtained, did not respond to any of the
tests for an alkaloid: dilute water of ammonia, filtered through the
lead, gave no precipitate with muriatic acid, showing the absence of an
insoluble organic acid.
Dee. 3, 1869.] 233 [Du Bois.
Stated Meeting, Dec. 3d, 1869.
Present, fifteen members.
Dr. Woop, President, in the Chair.
Letters of acknowledgment and envoy, and donations for the
Library, were received from the Swedish Bureau of Statistics,
Prussian Academy, Physical Society at Geneva, M. M. de
Mortillet and de Reftye, Captain Toynbee, the Linnean Society,
Franklin Institute, Editors of ‘Nature,’ Mr. Isaac Lea, Mr.
Dubois, Prof. Haldeman, and Mr. Worthen, of Illinois.
Mr. Du Bois exhibited to the Society, some specimens of silver coin»
which have just been struck at the Mint, in illustration of the plan sug-
gested in a pamphlet which hes on the table. There are three pieces of
the same devices, of 50, 25, and 10 cents. There are also two pieces of 50
ceuts, of various devices, with a view to afford a choice, in case the plan
should be adopted and legalized. The head of Liberty on one of these,
wearing a cap, is copied from the statue at the Capitol.
The dies were designed and executed by the present engraver of the
Mint, Mr. William Barber ; with the aid of the Hill Engraving Machine.
The main idea which lies at the root of the proposed plan, is, that gold
is, properly speaking, the only measure of market values; while sdlver
Should be used only as a subsidiary or fractional currency. It may, or it
may not, be of full weight, corresponding to the average comparison with
gold. If it is so, it is sure to be snatched away, exported, or buried,
whenever a suspension of specie payment occurs. If it be of reduced
weight, it will still circulate and perform its functions, although the gold
be missing. But at such reduced weight, it should be legally limited, as
to amount of issue; and there should also be a close limit of legal tender.
With these two safeguards, it would be equally current, whether gold
were at a premium, or at par, as compared with bank paper.
The measure of weight last concluded upon, in striking these specimens,
is 154 grains for the half dollar; the lesser pieces in proportion. This is
four-fifths of the weight of the present silver coins. It also agrees (very
closely) with ten grammes of French metrology. Further, it would be
220 new grains, if the proposed plan of decimalizing the avoirdupois
pound be accepted. And once more, it allows the Mint to buy silver for
this coinage, at any line of premium on gold under 30 per cent. as com-
pared with bank notes.
It would therefore, if legally adopted, be current immediately. Further
details will be found in the pamphlet referred to.
Mr. Du Bois also exhibited a medal just struck at the Mint, to celebrate
the union of the two oceans by Railway. On the obverse is the head of
President Grant, from an original design. It was deemed proper to indi-
cate under whose administration this great work was completed. _On the
reverse is a scene representing a train of cars passing from ocean to ocean,
Du Bois.] 234 [Dec. 3, 1869.
through mountainous ranges; with a legend from the Scripture, ‘“‘ Every
mountain shall be made low.”’
The medal was struck by order of the Director of the Mint, Goy. Pol-
lock, and the dies were made by Mr. Barber.
The opportunity is also taken to show a head of Rittenhouse, in wax,
executed by the same artist, from the bust in the Society’s hall. It is in-
tended to form the obverse of a medal, by reduction on the engraving
machine already spoken of.
Prof. Hayden explained the character of the MSS. Journal
of his recent explorations in the Rocky Mountains.
The Annual Report of the Treasurer was read.
The Annual Statement of the Trustees of the Building
Fund was read, and the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, Dec. 17th, 1869.
Present, fourteen members.
Dr. Woon, President, in the Chair.
Letters were read from Mr. H. A. Homes, of Albany, State Li-
brarian, from the Natural History Society at Newcastle upon
Tyne, and from Dr. F. V. Hayden, withdrawing his paper, on
account of its ensuing publication by the Department of the
Interior at Washington.
Donations for the Library were received from the London
Geological Society, the Boston N. H. Society, Mr. Homes of
the N. Y. State Library, the College of Pharmacy, Mr. David
Paul Brown, Mr. Hector Orr, Gen. A. A. Humphreys and the
Department of the Interior.
A letter was read from the Chairman of the Publication
Committee, Mr. James, relative to the publication of Dr.
Dewey’s Report on Carices. On motion of Nr. Fraley, the pa-
pers were recommitted to the original Committee, Mr. Durand,
Mr. James and Dr. Ruschenberger.
A communication was made by Mr. P. W. Sheafer of the fol-
lowing records of well borings in the Wilksbarre coal region:
935
Dee. 17, 1869.] 235 [Sheafer.
From P. W. Sheafer’s Note Book, Engineer of Mines, Pottsville, Pa.
Oxford Shaft near Hyde Park, Luzerne county, Pa.
180 ft. deep to the Diamond coal, which is about 7 thick.
At 33 ft. cut a 5’ coal through a gangway on which the shaft water is
sent to surface ; at 65 ft. cut a 6’ Coal.
Further down the Lackawanna is the crop of the 14 ft. Coal, which lies
below the Diamond about 80 ft. A small Coal bed divided by a seam of
rock lies between.
Audenried Shaft, near Wilkesbarre. From manuscript of Supt. Ken-
drich, April 5, 1862.
Surface.
16/ Sand and Loam.
56 =40/ Sand Stone Rock.
7) ile Slate.
80 =10/ Coal.
120 —40/ Slate.
1203— 3 Coal.
1605_—40/ Slate.
1663— 6/ Coal.
1763=10/ Fire Clay.
2261=50/ Slate.
228 = 14 Coal.
238 =10/ Fire Clay.
259 =21/ Mixed Sand Stone.
264 = d/ ' Slate.
S09) == by Coal.
BB Se! Fire Clay and Slate.
3828 =32/ Mixed Sand Stone.
300 = 7! Coal.
338 = 3/ Fire Clay.
395 =57/ Black Rock. \
400 = 5/ Coal.
415 =15/ Mixed Sand Stone.
Empire Shaft near Wilkesbarre, April 5, 1862, from Surveyor Allerbach’s
notes, who got it from Broderich, Supt.
From Surface to bottom of 10’ Vein Coal is 80’
66 ce qs! 66 134/
ce (73 5/ (75 99()/
ce ce 14/ be 300L/
April 5, 1862. Copy of Dundee Shaft, near Monticoke, Wyoming Valley,
from Section in Lentz & Co.’s Office, by P. W. Sheafer, E. M., from F.
Koerner. Dip 4° 8. H.
287 Surface.
Oy . BH Coal.
g/ 6//
6/ Fire Clay.
21! Sand Stone.
haefer. ]
10/
13/
6/
6//
3)
9/ G//
10/
G//
16/
Ail
(WY
vil
6/
4!
BI
4!
g/
10/
G/
9/
12’
Wily
9) 6//
14’
15/
UY Ol
897 6!
10”
5//
Ba (Ge
318/ 9/ Ql”
5/
16/
B/ Q””
6/
5) G//
ah (BY
1/ 6//
4
15/
20/
12/
440’ 08/7
This shaft was continued to a depth of 700 feet.
236 [Dec. 17,
Fire Clay.
Sand Stone and Slate mixed.
Slate.
Coal.
Slate.
Coal.
Slate.
Coal.
Slate.
Coal.
Slate.
Sand Stone.
Fire Clay.
Slate and Sand Stone.
Slate.
Sand Stone and Slate.
Fire Clay.
Slate and Fire Clay.
Sand Stone.
Fire Clay.
Slate and Sand Stone.
Slate, pump.
Coal.
Slate.
Sand Stone.
Fire Clay and Slate.
Sand Stone.
Coal.
Slate and Coal.
Slate.
Coal. Fossil Shells. No Vegetable impr.
Sand Stone.
Slate, Fire Clay, Benches of 8. Stone.
Sand Stone.
Soft Fire Clay.
Hard Fire Clay.
Sand Stone.
Coal.
Slate.
Dark colored Sand Stone.
Shells. Sand Stone.
Slate.
tific feature is the fossil shells at a depth of 318 feet.
Its remarkable scien-
ey,
1869. ] 23 ( [Wood
A communication from Dr. R. J. Roscoe, of Carlisle, Sco-
harie county, N. Y., to the Librarian, relative to certain sup-
posed fossils of high grade and great size found in the Lau-
rentian rocks of Essex county, New York, fragments of which
were brought by Dr. Le Conte, and deposited in the Museum
of the Academy of Natural Sciences, in Broad street, was
read and commented upon by the Librarian, who explained
that they were plications of alternate layers of metamorphosed
limestone and sandstone deposits; and that Dr. Leidy had
described similar, but much larger ones (one weighing per-
haps 20 tons), in the marble quarries near Attleborough, Penn.,
in a subsilurian group of perhaps the same age. ‘The sheets
of graphite covering the plicated layers prove, no doubt, the
organic origin of the cale-spar layers; but the present form
of the mass ought not to be taken as the original form of the
animal organism.
Dr. Geo. B. Wood communicated his experiments and views
on the revival of peach and other fruit trees, by the applica-
tion of potash to their roéts. A discussion followed, in which
Dr. Coates, Dr. Emerson, Prof. Trego, Judge Lowrie and Gen.
Tyndale joined.
f
Dr. G. B. Wood described a discovery which he believes that he has
made, and which, if verified by further experiments, will be of great value
to the agricultural interests of the country. Potash, combined with one
or more of the vegetable acids, is an essential ingredient in vegetables,
particularly in fruit, which, it is probable, cannot be produced without it.
Sometimes fruit-trees cease to bear, prematurely ; and, in relation to peach
trees, it is well-known that, in this vicinity, after producing a few crops,
they not only cease bearing, but perish themselves ina short time ; whereas
their natural life is 50 or 60 years or more. The fact seems to be that pot-
ash is wanting in the soil in sufficient abundance to allow the tree to
continue to bear fruit continuously. Dr. Wood believes that by supplying
potash to the tree, so that it shall reach the radicals, and be absorbed,
the deficiency may be supplied ; the fruit-bearing power is festored, and
the tree itself, if prematurely perishing, revived. He was led to this con-
clusion in the following way: Having a considerable number of peach
trees, which had entirely ceased to bear fruit, and were themselves obvi-
ously decaying, and believing, with most persons, that the cause lay in
the worms at the root of the tree, he put in operation a plan which he had
seen his father perform, more than fifty years since, of digging around
the base of the stem a hole four or five inches deep, scraping away all
the worms that could be found burrowing at the junction of the stem and
root, and filling the hollow thus made with fresh wood-ashes, recently
Wood.) 238 [Nov. 19,
from the fire, and of course retaining all their potash. The ashes were
used with the view of destroying the worms that might have escaped no-
tice. This was done in the autumn of 1868. In the following spring he
was himself astonished at the result. The trees appeared to have been
restored to all their early freshness and vigor. They put forth bright
green leaves, blossomed copiously, and bore a crop of fruit such as they
had never borne before ; many of the branches breaking down under
their load of peaches. In reflecting on these results, Dr. Wood came to
the conclusion that all this change could not possibly have been produced
by the destruction of a few worms ; and, besides, there were several of the
peach trees treated, in which no worms could be found. He was thus led
to the belief that the real cause of the revival of the trees was the ashes,
the potash of which, being dissolved by the rains, had descended along the
roots to their rootlets, and presented to them the very food for want of
which the trees were dying. He has, accordingly, had hundreds of va-
rious’ kinds of failing fruit trees treated in this way this fall, in the
expectation of an abundant harvest next year. Should he live till then,
he will inform the Society of the result. Should he not live, the experi-
ment will at least have been put on record.
In answer to an inquiry, Dr. Wood said that the soil was of all kinds,
sand, loam, and clay.
Dr. Coates remarked that trees at first grow slowly, and have but little
chance to get potash from the limited area which they occupy. For in-
stance, around the body of large trees there are seldom other growths.
Dr. Emerson gave his experience of peach growing. The peach,
brought from Persia, loves a mild climate, and suffers when brought
North, unless protected. When first brought to this country it grew luxuri-
antly, in all parts, well. Of late years, however, owing to the clearing
away of the forest, which afforded it the same kind of protection which,
in Northern Europe, was given it by glass, it has become limited to the soft
climate of the peninsula between the Delaware and Chesapeake. Bays,
where it has no disease and bearsabundantly. The ‘‘ Yellows,’’ however,
although looked upon asa disease spreading from tree to tree, is in fact
produced by colonies of a parasite, which propagates under favor of a low
constitutional condition of the tree, produced by the failure of the neces-
sary climatic protection. As to the nourishment of the tree, salts, espe-
pecially of potash, are very nutritive. But there is another element in
wood ash, phosphorus, which is the prime mover of all vegetable life. Dr.
Emerson described one of his unpublished experiments, with a peach
orchard, which yielded inferior fruit, but only as to color; otherwise the
fruit was as good as others. He gave a top dressing of 200 or 300 tbs.
of superphosphate to the acre, and the next year his peaches brought 10
or 20 cents more in the market. At a certain exhibition, some pears of a
very high color were displayed, which brought a very high price. Their
rearer had used dog dung in quantities, which lent additional force to
Dr. Emerson’s belief that phosphoric acid heightened the color of his
peaches.
Dr. Wood repeated that his experiment bore especially upon the mode
1869. ] 239 [Wood.,
of application of the potash. The spreading of potash over the surface
of the land produced no great result. But, when placed where the rain
water could carry it along the descending roots down to the rootlets, it is
immediately absorbed by the plant, and produces its effects.
Judge Lowrie said that he bought, in 1838, a wild place near Pittsburgh.
It was covered with forest trees and underbrush. He cleared away the
undergrowth and weeds. Within three years he discovered that all the wal-
nut and hickory trees were beginning to die, although in rich soil, and 4
or 5 feet in diameter, and some of them one hundred feet high. In the
course of two years none were left. The oaks, maples, lindens and elms
were not affected.
Prof. Trego said that in Bucks county, black walnut trees, planted
along the fences, grow and flourish well, and are not hurt by standing
quite alone as shade trees. He had placed wood ashes around the foot of
a fine pear tree, banking it up around the tree, but it had no effect. Peach
trees have many roots running horizontally, and the rootlets are near the
soil. To this Dr. Wood replied that, according to his observations, they
descend into the ground obliquely.
General Tyndale said that the finest peach grounds in the United States
are the highlands of Southeastern Tennessee ; the tops of mountain spurs
of the Cumberland plateau, around Chattanooga, above the conglomerates
of the Coal Measures and the cavernous limestones of the sub-carboni-
ferous, two thousand feet or more above sea-level, and many hundred
miles in the interior of the country.
The stated business of the meeting being in order, the Re-
port of the Financial Committee was read, and, on motion, the
appropriations, recommended therein for the ensuing year,
were passed, as follows:
al ala AO LeMeMO ATL AUN gs wretches uveyemctten oe is ced sul ha Saye wisleys ow Aes $700 00
palayoOteAssistamt Gomlibrariancc.co.scos aces ves cannes tee ease 560 00
AAT yAOLe SAMUEL OTe) a) sevice setae ee ald Mut eteluta leis SaeiER. gels MalSiess es . 100 00
PSU CLUTCHES QOKGN 8 cytes Cols sibieiyl Na cldcom ee Mele Me amie ge mi Shwe 6 ON obs. ale 150 00
SN OSCIN OOM too) TOMAS. ooccaccossugouecuudbuuuSD fae asia 50 00
Re tbyge =pen ses Ore Mil tatlamen) vert dk ieleie shoei stati aclsicecre el ie ilero 100 00
MT IBAC COU eyes staess atel sy atvt<io slain simon bre eiaicle ees ayereerevae ote aero arene 200 00
Imi SuRANCe. ACCOUNEI A. Me desc k se. Medea s Wee wes we Sele ten eee 160 00
Publication, in addition to the interest of the publication fund. 2,000 00
General expenses, other than the above, and including the
Commissions of the WMreasurer.c. as ss ove se ests ees 750 00
; Bat $4,570 00
Pending nominations, Nos. 648 to 648 were read.
Mr. Fraley moved that the subject of cleaning and varnish-
ing the portraits of the Presidents of the Society, be referred
to the Committee on the Hall, with power to act.
And the Society was adjourned.
A. P. S.— VOL. XI—2E
9)
Cope. ] 240 [Nov. 5,
SECOND ADDITION TO THE HISTORY OF THE FISHES OF THE
CRETACEOUS OF THE UNITED STATES.
By Epw. D. Core.
BERYX INSCULPTUS, Cope.
This species is established on a specimen obtained by Samuel Lock-
wood, Director of Public Schools for Monmouth county, N. J., from the
lower green sand-bed in the same county. A second specimen was found
by Jno. Meirs, in the dark clay marl, just below the upper green sand-
bed, at Hornerstown, Monmouth county. This one is in possession of
Prof. O. C. Marsh, of Yale College.
The species is stout, and covered with very large, thick scales. The
fins are not well preserved, but radii of all but the pectorals remain,
and are of stout proportions. The scapular arch and cranium are
strongly marked with narrow, elevated ridges, which form a reticulate
relief. The scales are large and narrowly exposed below the lateral line,
There are seven longitudinal series below this line, and not less than
two above ; there are twenty-three in the lateral line, and possibly a few
more, as the point of departure from the suprascapula is lost, and greater
part of the cranium broken away. The sculpture of the scales consists
of aseries of radiating ridges, whose interspaces are equal to them, and
whose extremities project as short acute points. These ridges are inter-
rupted at a short distance from the middle of the exposed surface, form-
ing irregular obtuse elevations, while the middle of the area is divided by
shallow grooves into irregular areas. The whole are sometimes crossed
by one or two shallow interrupted concentric grooves. The tubes of the
lateral line do not extend behind the middle of the exposed area, and are
acute, and with an areolate rugose surface. The depth of the body near
the middle is 3 in. 3 lin. below the lateralline ; at a short distance behind
this point, there is 1 in. 2 lin. above this line, if there are only the two
series of scales, visible in the specimen. The length of the species is 5
in. 7.5 lines to what is probably the posterior margin of the pectoral
arch. Depth of the caudal peduncle at the base of the fin 1 in. 1 1.
Length of a ventral ray 1 in. 7.5 lines, as far as traceable. The dorsal
and caudal rays are very stout ; a series of small smooth scales continues
the lateral line on the middle of the tail.
As compared with the Beryces of the European Cretaceous, B. radians
is at once. excluded on account of its small scales, and B. germanus, on
account of the granulation of the same, as described by Agassiz. The
B. levesiensis Mant. (B. ornatus Ag.) presents several series of acute
mucrones, instead of the single series of the present species, while in the
B. microcephalus Ag. the areolation of the middle area of the B. insculp-
tus is wanting, and a greater breadth of the scale is exposed. The B.
zippei, from Bohemia, is a much smaller species, and betrays no such
strong sculpture of the cranial bones.
This species has not been found in the upper green sand-bed of the
New Jersey cretaceous.
1869. ] 24 1 [Cope.
SPHAGEPG@A ACICULATA, gén. cf sp. nov.
Char. gen. This genus is represented by a slender, acute spine, which
may be referred either to a Pycnodont or Chimaeroid family. Itis nearly
straight and slender, and with a thin projecting anterior margin, which is
deeply notched from the tip to a short distance above the base, so as to
produce an acute dentition. There are no teeth behind, but two promi-
nent ridges separated by a deep groove. Sides of the spine longitudinally
grooved.
This spine may possibly be referable to a Plectognath fish. It resembles
the spine figured by Dixon (Geol. Sussex XXXII. 7) as belonging to Mi-
crodon nuchalis, a Pyenodont. Agassiz, in the Poisson Fossiles, does
not ascribe any such species of this family, and says that in Pycnodus
the dorsal spines are quite low.
Char. specif. General form much compressed, but the section of the
edentulons portion is as broad as deep. Sides with two elevated ridges,
of which the anterior only is continued to near the tip, and is gradually
broken into a series of tubercles near the base. Length 5.5 lines ; great-
est width .75 line. This delicate remnant was discovered by my friend
Thomas Kite, a naturalist of Cincinnati, Ohio, in the cretaceous green
sand of the upper bed at the pits of the Pemberton Mail Company, Bir-
mingham, N. J.
SPHYRAINA CARINATA, Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sct. Phila. 1868, 92.
Founded ona shed example of one of the long teeth, taken from the
matrix attached to the dorsal vertebre of the Elasmosaurus platyurus.
The tooth is not very different in outline from that of the 8. speciosa
Leidy, 7. ¢., sub-triangular, and no more than twice as long as wide at
the base. The anterior margin is the more oblique, and its smooth
face is margined by a faint line posteriorly, and is continued over the ex-
tremity, forming a short obtuse barb on the posterior face. The obtuse
face of the tooth behind, sculptured with six or eight deep grooves, which
are separated by acute ridges, which do not extend over more than half
the length of the tooth. Length a little less than six lines.
From the upper cretaceous of the neighborhood of Fort Wallace, Kan-
Sas.
ENCHODUS PRESSIDENS, Cope.
This species is similar in size to the E. ferox Morton (Leidy Pr. A. N.
Sci. 1855, 397) but differs in the form of the premaxillary bone, and the
large tooth which it supports. The basis of the latter is compressed at
the base transversely to the axis of the premaxillary bone, so that it has
a crescentic section, the concavity backwards. At the middle of the
tooth, the section is an equilateral triangle, with an angle (one cutting
edge) anteriorly, the inner angle rounded. The plane face of the tooth is
thus much reduced in width, and is narrower at the basis than at the
middle of the crown. There is moreover a longitudinal groove just in
front of the posterior (outer) cutting edge. There is another groove on
the other side of the same edge, on the posterior face, and another more
marked just inside the anterior cutting edge. In all these points it dif-
Cope.] 242 [Nov. 5,
fers from the E. ferox, where the section is lenticular, the base triangular
ovate, the outer face widening downwards and no grooves. In EH. pressi-
‘dens the base of the tooth projects well beyond the anterior margin of
the front of the premaxilliary, while in the HE. ferox the reverse is the
ease. Length of tooth 20.5 lines ; transverse width at base 6 lines; lon-
gitudinal do. 3.7 lines. Length premaxilla 31.8 lines. depth 15.5.
Two specimens from the cretaceous green sand of New Jersey.
PNEUMATOSTEUS, Cope.
This genus is established on a caudal vertebra of peculiar character,
It is opisthocoelian, and without trace of suture of either neuralor haemal
arches. The elements constituting the haemal arch appear to be dia-
pophyses ; they are divergent, and probably do not unite distally ; they are
directed more posteriorly than anteriorly. Their proximal boundary is
apparently indicated by an indistinct elevation, perhaps the position of
the original suture. The neural arch is split above by a deep median
anterior fissure, on each side of which the narrow zygapophyses diverge.
There is no zygantrum. The base of the broken neural spine is very
small, and is as long as wide; it may probably have had but little eleva-
tion.
The structure of the bone is exceeingly light, and the external osseous
layer very dense. In order to reduce the weight consistently with the
size, the lateral and inferior faces are excavated by deep concavities
terminating in pits. There are two on each side separated by a longitu-
dinal ridge-like septum, which is plane with the expanded rims of the
cup and ball. The superior pits are beneath the base of the neural spine,
and nearly meet under the floor of the neural canal. The inferior con-
cavity is very large, and extends from rim of cup to ball, and is divided
longitudinally by a thin laminar hypapophysis. The bases of the diapo-
physes are wide, and extend from the base of the ball, three-fourths the
distance on each side to the rim of the cup.
The form of the vertebra is compressed. The ball is more convex
transversely than vertically, and presents a slightly double convexity in
profile. This is produced by a slight transverse contraction at the in-
ferior fourth of the vertical diameter. The floor of the neural canal is
raised to the superior margin of the ball.
This vertebra resembles the fourth in advance of the first bearing
chevron bone in Lepidostues. It differs from it generically, solely in the
completeness of the neural arch abone, since it is longitudinally fissured
in the existing genus.
PNEUMATASTEUS NAHUNTICUS, Cope.
The specific characters of this fossil are as follows: The cup is a verti-
eal oval, slightly truncate below, and openly concave truncate above.
Its form is not unlike that seen in some of the Pythonomopha. The neu-
ral arch is much contracted transversely opposite the neural spine. The
surface of the bone is very smooth, except a few slight rugae near the rim
of the cup.
1869.] 243
[Cope.
Measurement.
In Lin
IDEIMNGHN OY COQOGRTNNG Go 6b ooo dog sdecdbondosDboOooR FE il 0
Width ‘ ‘¢ between lateral septa........... 7.1
IDET OLIN Os! OMT Nake Gas ean SRO MICOE CMM Rr mac OG Caras 8.4
AWattclits lng Scare wra nO teas nary eyes ofatns ogee nar ntear ena el tne iid eu)
IDSroLN OH! oN. eee oa PEO SOBA Hootie cums biccelbiG 8.5
Length base (?) pleurapophysis................... 6.8
BE SOS S SULA OPV SIS 5/4. elerckele) le eile eelcore No
Width neural canal (external, front)............... 5.2
ee ts cS) Guternal, belaimad))s = <2)... vote 2.8
The large cells are exposed by the fractures of portions of the bone.
The largest are at the posterior base of the haemal arch and at the sides
of the articular ball, one of the former 1.5 line in diameter. These meas-
urements indicate a gar of six feet in length, if of usual proportions.
The specimen on which this species is established was found by the
writer on a pile of miocene marl on the plantation of Nathan Edgerton,
in Wayne county, North Carolina. Its interstices are filled with a hard
clay matrix, similar to that which adheres to cetacean remains in the hard
stratum in the lower part of the miocene shell-bed of that region.
Whether it were originally transported from a cretaceous stratum, is not
readily ascertainable, as the porous and dense structure of the bone re-
ceives fractures rather than rounding from transportation, which cannot
be distinguished from those miocene specimens. The color is black.
Mus. Cope.
CROMMYODUS IRREGULARIS, Cope. Phacodus trregularis, Cope Proce.
Bost. Soc. N. Hist. 1869.
The name Phacodus having been given by Dixon to a genus of fishes
allied to Pycnodus, from the Tertiary of Sussex, England, the present
genus must receive a new name.
IsSCHYODUS LATERIGERUS, Cope sp. nov.
This speciesis of about the same size as the I. mirificus Leidy, and presents
marked characters. Its extremity is much prolonged, and more flattened
than in any other species from the United States. The outer and concave
side is elevated by the extent of the anterior exterior crests, which is also
remarkably prolonged beyond the dental area which it supports. Whenthe
two mandibular rami are in place, it follows from the above, that the me-
dian line of the beak is occupied by a deep concavity, which is walled in by
the high anterior outer crest. The posterior outer crest is also well de-
veloped, and is also prolonged acutely beyond the posterior dentinal area.
The latter is oval and very small, less than .33 the anterior. The ante-
rior is long and narrow ; its middle marks the anterior extremity of the
great inner area. The latter is large in all dimensions, and is undivided.
Below it is a slender intero-lateral column. The mandible is thoroughly
and regularly curved outwards and backwards. The external terminal
column is largely developed vertically.
This species approaches the I. smockii m. but is double the size, is
Cope.] 244 [Nov. 5, 1869.
more compressed and curved, and differs much in the small posterior
area, and very long anterior outer crest.
In. Lin.
Total length. mandible (restored)**-s.2....:°...--.6 6
Deptihyatiextremni tye eeei ee oreo 9
fo) URES CaMUOTIONVCLES bse wekiier terion @eceieese ce Riri 6
“o 56 Toosuenlor. 9. cocoa SORRY ROR CR dado Boe 5
idenoth) postenorloutersaredignes eierr cre] cee o006 7
‘¢ anterior as SGI Se aa ecah ohetenaena yee teye ax se gael 7.5
is rh or CO Nala, GUI aso obodcodGm 6
cee eITINe Aenea cree: Lae ety ct cl Reet eerste 110). 159
From the upper cretaceous green-sand bed at Hornerstown, N. J. Dis-
covered and presented to the writer by Juno. Meirs, proprietor of the ex-
cavations at that place.
IscHYODUS SOLIDULUS, Cope, sp. nov.
No distinct external crests, and no anterior outer dentinal area. The
posterior outer dentinal area is very small, and looks inwards from’
the gradual elevation of the outer superior margin. The inner area is
very large and undivided, and is accompanied on the inner margin by a
slender column, which issues in the posterior corner of the symphyseal
plane. The terminal area of the beak instead of having the usual narrow
oblique form, is the round extremity of a narrow column. Inner and
outer margins, anterior to the large area, of equal elevation, regularly
curved outwards without angulation.
In. Lin,
kenoth) (restored) perme BS fees ce ae a che seae eeetenatoone orate: 6.5
He to end inner area....... BA CeNaa eA tonatecene sano 9
He G6 GS TXORTSTOONE OWES doocodecagco0GN00000 10.5
oe of ay Bon Uhias Saute on Aten ovevere ieee : 2.5
fe ee IMMER. eihieleces Pevabake wavapae vets ip stersta 9
Depth at HR a iteet one i ceeienataties tect eet sees Aigteks 9.2
glare ada WOSEELION Lys eyarey spereiere a «tee Hse erced 2
Ss ie beaks cee iscnrc sane MEP LER reich: 3 4.5
This species is nearest the I. divaricatus m. It differs in many re-
spects, among which are the absence of anterior outer area, and of pro-
minence of the inner lip, and the great reduction of the terminal column.
Its lack of dental development allies it to the Leptomylus m. Size,
small.
From the same locality and donor as the I. laterigerus.
PRISTIS ATTENUATUS, Cope.
Tooth slender, width at base less than one-sixth length, thick and
straight. Posterior face straight, with a wide groove, anterior curved
backwards, obtuse with a faint median longitudinal groove. Posterior
face at the tip of the tooth, oblique. No striae.
Length 26.7 lines ; width 4.5 lines ; depth at base 3 lines.
This species is much more slender than the P. agassizii Gibbes, the only
species which resembles it. Found by Prof. W. C. Kerr, State Geolo-
gist of North Carolina, at Flower’s marl pit, Duplin Co., N. C.
ERRATA.
Page 100, Eighteenth line from the bottom, read ‘‘ proposed’’ for ‘ pre-
pared.”’
Page 167, twelfth line from the bottom, for ‘‘relations’’ read ‘dilata-
tions.”’
Page 168, eighteenth line from bottom, omit ‘been.”’
Page 168, seventh line from bottom, for ‘‘Esophus”’ read ‘ Eusophus.”’
Page 171, fifteenth line from bottom, for ‘‘miles’’ read ‘miles distant.”’
Page 188, line 15, omit ‘‘not.”’
Page 188, line 17, for ‘“‘though’’ read ‘“and.”’
Proc. Amer Phil. Sos. Vol. XI Plate WD.
‘Galera perdicida. 2Mtxophagus spelaeus. 3. Stereodectes tortus.
—4Tamias laevidens. 5 Sciurus panolius. 6. Tapirus haysw.
i
plan ES
Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. Vol-XI
Se pa a ne OE
a
Mala Cope
TIN
Amblyrhiza
Plate V6
Proc. Amer, Phil. Soc. Vol XI.
SE emeatiae
Seieaed reeds
data 2-3 Loxomylus longidens.
nd:
Anoplonassa fore
F
Lemertt.
imup,
“1
he
£5
6 Hemicaulodon effodiens.
to.
Lpw
1zZ@ nw
ov
1 Amblyrh
aLo7 SIQDISNDUD STENT)
G/L OGLE EM TG SIN LEET,
=
reat
calls
edi)
gO) LOGUPJIP wh yoy
ec
See fonreg oh Sere
%
ie
e
e mS CIAL EPLUT 'S NV 204L
Mer Es
ray Les mt
*
tx
A
er
él
(us
Rene!
1870.] 245 [ Winchell.
NOTICES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF FOSSILS, FROM THE MAR-
SHALL GROUP! OF THE WESTERN STATES, WITH NOTES
ON FOSSILS FROM OTHER FORMATIONS.
1 ALEXANDER WINCHELL, DIRECTOR OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF
MICHIGAN.
The following notices and descriptions were drawn up in March last,
but their publication has been delayed by pressing and unremitting en-
gagements, which continued, very unexpectedly, through the entire
Summer. |
These studies are based chiefly on specimens from Tennessee and Ohio.
The Tennessee specimens were submitted (with others) by Prof. James
M. Safford, about three years ago, and the conclusions have very recently
been announced in his Report on the Geology of that State. The Ohio
specimens consist of fossils communicated from time to time, during two
or three years past, by Rev. Herman Herzer, and of a series of fossils col-
lected by Prof. E. Andrews, along a section extending from the Blue
Limestone, near Cincinnati, along the Ohio river to the Coal Measures, !!8
and others collected in Central Ohio and western Pennsylvania.
In order that the references in the following pages may be made intel-
ligible, I subjoin the section communicated by Prof. Andrews:
Section along Ohio river from Adams to Lawrence counties, Ohio.
Coan MEASURES.
Measures embracing beds of Iron Ore........ BBG Reo ow cm tli
No. I. 4 Coal, ) 157“
} Underlying maenemnes, 252° TUS Gen Conon rote n st picts 5)
iio, ( Coarse-grained sandstone of Coal Measures, ) 9g «
; - 1 Clays and Iron Ore, SS PEI IS
io 3 f ‘“‘Sub-carboniferous Limestone” of Ky., overlying the ) 4G «6
"°-. “Knobs” of the Kentucky Reports, j
WAVERLY SERIES.
and other fucoids, and near the bottom, nodules of Kid-
[ Sandstones containing, above, marine plants, cawda-gallé
| ney Iron Ore. At the bottom is a mass of sandstone and
J
1
.
NO: 4s Iron Ore embracing, probably, the fossils of Sciotoville,
| ees BHI ess Soc ode econ oae sous Sassasioroncgaml ney ets Sood mils) GY
WStmvdletoneste stn mare Gc nie! Bai Me ear unre eed We
Fossiliferous ferruginous sandstone of Rockville, d
No. 5. 4 Sandstones with Fucoids, L277“
(s Shales containing the Goniatites described by Dr. Hildreth, §
( “City bedeer? outtnaboveblack:shaillew--)..-4 5. sau eee e- 4“
No.6 Waverly black shale. Fish-bed, Lingula subspatulata, Dis-
' | Cina canaxe Ganoiduscales: (Wey se ene areca see Maer ahOne:
Lower Waverly beds with Fucoids.................... eee tec
12Kor other papers by the author, on the Geology and Paleontology of this group, see “ First Bien-
nial Report” of the Geological Survey of Michigan, 1860; Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts [2] vol. xxxiii,
p. 352: ib. XXxv, p- 61; Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., Sept., 1862, p- 405; ib. Jan., 1863, p. 2; ib- July
1865; Pro. Amer. Phil. Soc-, No. 81, (vol. xi) 1869, p. 57: Geology of Tenn., 1869, pp. 364-5 and 440.
"3 This section was read in substance, at the Chicago meeting of the American Association, in
Aug., 1868.
Eso 1P5 So— VOSA
Winchell.] 246 [Jan. 4,
No. 7. ‘Ohio Black Shale, embracing beds of fire-clay and septaria, 320 ‘
y
INGES § Buff-colored limestone, arenaceous (‘‘Cliff Limestone’’)
“(with beds of lenticular Iron Ore near the bottom.
No. 9. Brown and light colored clays (Dr. Locke’s ‘‘ Marl’’).
No.10, § Middle or Flinty Limestone, underlaid by yellow clay con-
“taining thin layers of limestone.
No. 11. Blue Limestone.
The ‘‘ Waverly,’’ of Ohio, is regarded by Prof. Andrews, as extending
from the ‘‘Subcarboniferous Limestone (No. 3), to the ‘‘Ohio Black
Shale” (No. 7). The Chemung and Portage may be embraced in No. 6.
No. 7 is generally regarded as the equivalent of the ‘‘ Genesee Shale,”’
of New York.
No. 8 is found to contain the following Niagara species: Trematopora
tubulosa, Wall; Caryocrinus ornatus, Say ; Retepora aspero-striata, Hall ;
Obolus tmbricatus, n. sp.3'4 strophomena striata, Hall; S. rhomboidalis,
Wahl; S. Niagarensts, Win. & Mar.; Hemipronites subplanus, Con. sp.3"'5
AI. hemiaster, Win. & Mar.; Orihis elegantula, Dalm. sp.; Cornulites flexuo-
sus, Hall;"® Spirifira suleata, Hising, sp; Atrypa reticularis, Dalm. A. neé-
glecta, Wall; A.cuneata, Hall; Meristella nitida, Hall, Pentamerussp?; Plat-
yostoma Niagarense? Wall,7 Orthoceras sp?; Dalmania limulurus, Green
sp., Calymene Niagarensis, Wall.
No. 9 of Andrews’ section contains the following species, some of which
are known to belong to the Clinton group : Rusophycus clavatus and bilo-
batus, Hall; Henestella prisca, Hall, and Obolus imbricatus? n. sp.
It will be noticed that the characteristic fossils of the Waverly Group
are traced to near Shafer’s, on Oil Creek, Pa., at a locality said to be ‘200
to 300 feet below the coal,’’ where we find such species as Chonetes pul-
chella Win.; Lingula membranacea Win.; Hemipronites inequalis, Hall sp.;
Syringothyris typa, Win.; Spirifera Carteri, Hall; Discina Gallahert,
Win.; with others common to the Waverly and later formations. At
Kinzua, Pa., however, which is stated to be ‘‘800 or 400 feet below the
Coal Conglomerate,’’ we seem to have passed into the limits of another
fauna. Nota single species can be recognized as belonging to the Wa-
verly. On the contrary, Spirifera disjuncta (Phillips) Hall, a species of
the Chemung Group, of New York, is conspicuous and well determined.
Fragments of lamellibranchs which appear to belong to the Chemung
114 Shell small, nearly circular, with a slightly projecting beak in the ventral valve, false area very
small and inconspicuous, central median ridge distinct but delicate, becoming broader anteriorly,
and vanishing in front of the centre; a longitudinally oval scar on each side of the central ridge.
Surface marked. especially in the older shells, by numerous concentric imbricating lamellae of
growth. Transverse diameter 5-16 inch; length of ventral valve about the same. This is a smaller
species than O. Conradi, Wall, with a more lamellose exterior, and, so far as I have been able to ob-
serve, a different cardinal structure.
115 Several specimens, agreeing very well with the description and figures of New York speci-
mens, but apparently not the same as the Illinois specimens referred to this species. (Ill. Geol. hep
IIT, 349).
u6é The single specimen has the rings somewhat constricted below, instead *of regularly convex
asin C. arcuatus Con.
17 A carinated shell, more appressed laterally than the carinated varieties figured by Prof.
Hall.
9) low f
1870. 241 [Winchell.
species Avicula longispina and acanthoptera, Hall, are also abundant, as
wellas a Rhynchonella, which differs from any known Waverly species.
It seems, therefore, from these indications, that the line separating the
Chemung and Waverly, passes between these two horizons; and that we
have here positive paleontological and stratigraphical evidence of the su-
perposition of the Waverly: above the Chemung, as I have heretofore ar-
gued.118
The fossils from Tennessee identified with species of the age of the
Marshall (or Waverly) Group, will undoubtedly be regarded as possessing
considerable interest, as this is the first paleontological determination of
the extension of this group into that State. They are mostly embraced
in a thin deposit of dark, silicious, bituminous shales, emitting an agree-
able aromatic odor,!!§ and resembling in physical characters, the shales of
the Kinderhook Group, of Illinois. This resemblance suggests the belief
that the Hickman shales of Tennessee are a prolongation of the Kinder-
hook shales ; and that they will yet be traced along both sides of the Coal
Measures, from Indiana and Illinois across the western extremity of Ken-
tucky.120
ZAPHRENTIS Ipa? Win. (Proc. A. Nat. Sci., Phil., July, 1865). From
Hickman county, 'Tenn., and Sciotoville, Ohio, (See Andrews’ section).
The Tennessee specimens are without epitheca, and lack the profound
wrinkles of growth belonging to the types of this species, from Rockford,
Ind. They also enlarge upward somewhat more rapidly. The Ohio spe-
cimen is extremely similar to these.
TREMATOPORA? VESICULOSA, Win. (Proc. A. Nat. Sci., Phil., Jan.,
1863, p. 3). Several good specimens from Sciotoville, Ohio.
18 See especially Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., No. 81, p. 57, and Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., July, 1865,
p. 110. x
119 See further notices of these rocks, Geology of Tenn., chap. XT, sec. I.
120 Descriptions of these fossils are embraced in the late Report on Tennessee, in a paper em-
bodying notices of some fossils from the ‘‘Carboniferous Limestone,” of that State. As Prof. Saf-
ford has questioned the correctness of my identification of Spirifera Logani, I embrace this oppor-
tunity to state that I have reinvestigated the question and remain of the same persuasion as be-
fore, though I admit there is room for differences of opinion. I have five specimensof S. ambrex,
(to which Prof. Safford refers the specimens in question) from the typical locality, at Burlington,
Iowa. The Tennessee specimens differ from these as follows: They are larger, heavier and coarser
shells; the sinus is more deeply sunk, relatively broader, and more distinctly defined, and it is
greatly produced in front, while that of S. ibrex is scarcely at all produced; it embraces from 10
to 12 coste, while that of S. imbrex embraces only 6 or 8; the fold, instead of being obsolete, and
a mere undefined swell. is raised into a prominent, crest-like, acute ridge, especially toward the
front; the dorsal valve is flattened from the middle of the fold to the extremities; the area is not
flat, and is striated in both directions; the coste, besides being smaller, are less numerous, except
in very old specimens; they are crossed only by fine concentric striae, and remote irregular grooves,
instead of coarse, regular, imbricating striz raised into nodes on the crests of the coste, as is the
case with the surface of S. imbrex, when well preserved.
On the contrary, these specimens agree with S. Logan, especially in the foilowing distinctive
characters; “ Dorsal valve depressed toward the cardinal extremities, and broadly curving to the
base; mesial fold very prominent, extremely elevated and subangular in front, not defined at the
margins. Ventral valve very gibbous at the sides, marked by a broad, deep, undefined mesial sinus
which, in the middle of the shell, oceupies fully one-third of the width, sloping abruptly to the
cardinal extremities, and extremely produced and elevated in front, in a sub-triangular exten-
sion;” the area is concave, vertically and longitudinally striate.
The correct identification of these Tennessee specimens is important, as having a bearing on the
question of the equivalencies of the ‘ Silicious Group,” of Safford.
Winchell.] 248 [Jan. 4,
LINGULA SUBSPATULATA? M. & W. (Ill. Geol. Rep. III, 487, pl. 13, fig.
.1). From Tennessee, and No. 6, Rockville, Ohio. The single specimen
from Tennessee, showing the inside of (apparently) the ventral valve, is
not over one-third the length of the specimen figured in the Tlinois Re-
port; but it otherwise agrees with the description in outline, surface
markings, position of beak and faint radiating lines along the middle.
Lingula sub-spatulatau was described from the ‘‘ Black Slate,’’ of Union
county, Ill. At Vanceburg, Ky., and other localities on both sides of the
Ohio river, is a black shale embraced within the Waverly series, (see No.
6, Andrews’ section) which contains a small Lingula, not easily distin-
guishable from the Tennessee specimen. If the Ohio, Kentucky, and
Tennessee specimens are really identifiable with the Illinois species, it ap-
pears strange that the latter should be found in a geological position so
much lower. There seems to be occasion for the query, whether the Ili-
nois equivalent of the Vanceburg Shale has not become confounded with
the ‘Black Shale,’ by the disappearance of intervening beds; and also,
whether the entire mass of the ‘‘ Black Shale,’’ of southern Ohio, Indi-
ana and Illinois, does not, in fact, belong in a position considerably above
the Genesee Shale, as Verneuil, Owen and others long ago suggested.!#!
lam led to suspect that LZ. swb-spatulata, M. & W., is identical with my
L. inembranacea.'?2
LINGULA MEMBRANACEA, Win. (Proc. Acad. N.S., Phil., Jan., 1863).
From near Shafer’s, Penn.
DiscinA SAFFORDI, n. sp.
Shell rather small, outline nearly circular, but generaily a little flattened
posteriorly, and also on each of the postero-lateral boundaries. Upper
valve rather depressed conical], with the beak midway between the centre
and the posterior side; under surface presenting a faint but distinct
linear ridge extending anteriorly from the beak one-fourth the diameter of
the shell. Lower valve very depressed convex, with an apical pyriform
indentation having a blunt spur projecting from its broad anterior end ;
no perforation visible. Exterior of both valves ornamented with numer-
ous fine, unequal, coneentric striz ; interiors smooth, except the faint
vascular markings near the borders.
This curious species most resembles in general appearance, Discina Lo-
densts, from the Genesee Shale; but the pyriform indentation of the ven-
tral valve, the finer external striz and the inconspicuous foramen will
serve to distinguish it.
From dark bituminous Shales just above the ‘‘ Black Slate,’’ of Hick-
man county, Tennessee.
121 The “ Black Shale,” of northern Ohio, Ontario and Michigan, is undoubtedly the ‘t Genesee,”
as is proven both stratigraphically and paleontologically. (See Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., No. 8], p.
77, &C-)
122 T take occasion to remark that Gyroceras? Rochkfordensis, M. & W., (i. Rep. IIT, p. 459) from
Rockford, Ind., is identical with my Cyrtoceras Rochfordense, described in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
July, 1865.
D1
1870.] 249 [Winchell.
Discina CAapax? White (Proc. Bos. Soc. Nat. Hist.) From Black
Shale (Bed No. 6), Rockville, Ohio.
These specimens resemble D. Lodensis in size and markings. They
differ in the more prominent and more excentric beak of the dorsal valve.
The striz of D. Lodensts are also more regular and more sharply raised,
and it isa larger species. It is smaller and thinner than the types of D.
capaz, but I hesitate to pronounce it distinct.
DiscinaA GALLAHERI, Win. (Proc. A. N. 8., Phil., July, 1865). Col-
lected by Prof. Andrews, at Granville, Licking county, Ohio,—adherent
ona Spirifera; also, from near Shafer’s, Penn.
The Ohio specimens differ from D. Gallahert only in size—being one-
half the diameter, or less. The indentation of the dorsal valve is lenticu-
lar in outline, and extends nearly from the posterior margin to the centre
of the valve. Along the middle of the indentation on the inside is a rib-
bon-shaped impression, bounded by a sharp, elevated ridge on each side,
and divided by a similar, parallel ridge running along the middle of the
impression. Hach portion of this impression is marked by extremely del-
icate, raised, transverse lines, which would seem to indicate that the im-
pressions are not the foramen, but a portion of the shell. The foramen
may have been a delicate slit occupying the place of the median ridge di-
viding the two impressions. In D. Safford? the foramen appears to be
similarly wanting, and it may have been equally slit-like during life.
The Pennsylvania specimens are mere casts of the non-perforate valve,”
slightly oval in outline, with irregular, concentric wrinkles, a sub-central
beak elevated one-third the smaller diameter of the valve. One of the
three casts bears apparently the impressions of the ribs of some costate
shell, suggesting that this individual, like the Ohio specimens, may have
been parasitic. The larger of these casts are fourteen-sixteenths by eleven-
sixteenths of an inch in diameter.
PRoODUCTA CONCENTRICA, Hall (lowa Geol. Rep. 517, pl. vii, fig. 3;
10 Rep. N. Y. Regents, 180; see also, Winchell, Proc. A. N. 8., Phil.,
July, 1865, p. 115). From yellowish-brown calcareo-argillaceous beds,
and from calcareo-silicious shales of Tennessee. Also, from Sciotoville,
Ohio.
The Tennessee collection contains one specimen showing both valves,
one showing the ventral, and one both sides of the dorsal valve. Another
specimen exhibiting the exterior of a ventral valve, resembles the forms
named P. Shumardianus by Prof. Hall; but this name is probably ¢
synonym of P. concentrica.
PRODUCTA SEMIRETICULATA, Fleming.
Collected by Rev. H. Herzer, at Newark, Licking county, Ohio; by
Prof. E. Andrews, at Sciotoville (where it is abundant); from bed No. 5,
Rockville ; from a point 23 miles west of “Cincinnati Furnace,’’ Vinton
county, Ohio (in the upper Waverly); and in large and characteristic
specimens from near Shafer’s, on Oil Creek, Venango county, Penn.
PRopuCcTA COOPERENSIS? Swallow.
From bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
9 5
Winchell. ] 250 [Jan. 4,
There are several specimens of this form, and they differ from speci-
mens of P. Cooperensis from Burlington, Iowa, principally in a much
shallower ventral sinus and a larger size. In size, and in the peculiar ar-
rangement of the granulations of the inner surface, they resemble P. du-
plicostata, Win., but the costz are less developed, and there are fewer
spines distributed over the general surface. These forms resemble, not
a little, P. viminalis, Hall, from the Burlington Limestone, but the cos-
te are less pronounced, and the ventral valve enlarges less rapidly. This
is possibly the species which has sometimes been referred to P.Cora,
D’ Orb.
PRODUCTA GRACILIS? Win. (Proc. Acad. N. Sci., Phil., July, 1865.)
From bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
The numerous casts from this locality do not preserve the striations as
strongly as the types of this species; but they are too broad for P. par-
vula, and the ventral valve is not sufficiently produced. It is desirable
yet to make comparisons with specimens of P. minuta, Shum.
PRODUCTA MORBILLIANA, Win. (Phil. Proc., July, 1865, p. 113.) From
bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
Propucta ARcuUATA, Hall (lowa Rep. 518, pl. vii, fig. 4, a. b). Quite
abundant in bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio. Quite identical forms occur also
at Granville, O.
CHONETES MULTIOOSTA, Win. (Proc. A. N. 5., Phil., Jan., 1863, p. 5.)
In yellowish-brown caleareo-argillaceous beds and dark bituminous shales
in Hickman and Maury counties, Tennessee.
There are two dorsal valves in Prof. Safford’s collection. They agree
with this species, except that the striz are considerably more obscure
than even in the typical specimens ; and the external surface is minutely
granulated.
This species ranges from the base of the Yellow Sandstones, at Burling-
ton, Iowa, into the base of the Burlington Limestone.
CHONETES PULCHELLA, Win. (Proc. A. N. Sci., Phila., Sept., 1862.)
A single ventral valve occurs among the specimens from Tennessee. It
exposes only the inside, and hence the number of ribs cannot be satisfac-
torily ascertained. A slightly divergent spine appears at each extremity
of the hinge line.
Several clearly marked specimens from Newark, Ohio, occur in Prof.
Andrews’ collection. These exhibit, however, three or four hollow spines
each side of the beak.
Other specimens from near Shafer’s, on Oil Creek, Pa., are almost per-
fectly identical with these.
CHONETES Fiscuenrti, N. & P. (Jour. A. N. §., Phil., vol. 1). From dark
bituminous shales, Tennessee.
CHONETES GENICULATA? White (Proc. Bos. Soc. N. Hist. LX, 29). From
bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio.
The few imperfect specimens in the collection agree with forms oceur-
ring at Burlington, Iowa, in the Yellow Sandstones, and semetimes re-
ferred with doubt to C. geniculata. I suspect they may all prove to be @.
1870.] 201 [Winchell.
pulchella, Win. The type-specimens of C. gentculata are from Clarksville,
Mo., and, besides presenting the characteristic geniculation in the ventral
valve, appear to have a rather shorter hinge line than these specimens.
CHONETES ILLINOISENSIS, Worthen (Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci. I, 571).
Oceurs in bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio.
HEMIPRONITES INEQUALIS, Hall sp. (lo. Geol. Rep. 490, pl. ii, fig. 6,
a—e.) Collected by Rev. H. Herzer, at Newark, Ohio, and by Prof. An-
drews, at Granville. Collected, also, by the latter in Pennsylvania, near
Shafer’s.
HEMIPRONITES UMBRACULUM ? Schloth. (Die Petrefact. I, p. 256, and
WE jo, Of)
Collected by Rev. H. Herzer, at Newark, Ohio, and by Prof. Andrews,
in bed No. 4, at Sciotoville and bed No. 5, Rockville, and also, near
Shafer’s, Penn.
It may well be doubted whether the large specimens ranging through
the equivalents of the Marshall group, in the Western States, really be-
long to the foreign species to which they have generally been referred.
ORTHIS SUBELLIPTICA? W. & W. (Bos. Proc. VIII, 292.) From bed
No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio. A single imperfect specimen.
Orruis MicHELIni? L’ Eveillé.
From bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio; from Granville, Licking county;
from Vinton county; and also, from near Shafer’s, Penn.
The specimens from all these localities agree with each other and with
specimens commonly referred to O. Michelini. It is a form probably iden-
tical with that from Clarksville, Mo., referred to O. Vanuxemt, by Prof.
Hall. The smaller, flattened specimens approximate O. flava, Win., from
the Burlington Sandstone, while a large, transversely oval specimen
from Rockville, approaches O. resupinata, except in much smaller size.
In the considerable convexity of some of the dorsal valves (especially from
Shafer’s), and also in the cast of the muscular scars, they differ from 0.
impressa, Hall. If there are any permanent specific distinctions among
the widely extended American forms commonly referred to O. Michelini,
it will require extended and careful comparisons to make them out.
SPIRIFERA HIRTA? White & Whitfield.
The single specimen from silicious Shales, Tennessee, is considerably
larger than specimens from Burlington, Iowa, the typical locality, and
perhaps the area is a little more extended laterally.
SPIRIFERA EXTENUATA, Hall (Iowa Rep. 520, pl. vii, fig. 6). Collected
by Rev. H. Herzer and Prof. Andrews, at Newark, O.
SPIRIFERA WAVERLYENSIS, 0. Sp.
Shell semi-circular, without plications (on the cast). Ventral valve
with an elevated, nearly flat, transversely furrowed and vertically striated
area, reaching the whole length of the hinge-line, which is scarcely less
than the greatest width of the valve. The plane of the area forms a right
angle with the plane of the valve. Surface more rapidly convex near the
margin than between the beak and the middle ; lateral slopes, also, gent-
ly convex. Sinus deep, well defined, occupying nearly one-fourth the
”) E¢
Winchell.] i040 [Jan. 4,
width of the valve, slightly produced anteriorly. Dental lamelle extend-
ing three-fifths the length of the valve, not approximated at the rostral
extremity. Muscular scars striate. Surface of cast destitute of plica-
tions, but deeply marked toward the front by wrinkles of growth.
Transverse diameter, one and five-eighths inches ; antero-posterior di-
ameter, one inch; height of area, three-eighths of an inch.
This species is more completely destitute of plications than any other
in rocks of the same age; and this character, together with the length,
width and flatness of the area, renders it necessary to admit it as new.
SPIRIFERA CARTERI, Hall (S. Vernonensis, Swallow). Very abundant
in bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio ; rare in bed No. 5, Rockville. A single
specimen labelled Granville, is, probably (judging from the matrix), from
Sciotoville. Occurs also, near Shafer’s, Penn.
SPIRIFERA Marionensis, Shum. (Mo. Geol. Rep., Pt. ii, p. 203, pl. C.,
fig. 8, a—d.) Several specimens from bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio. These
specimens agree tolerably well with the description of this species, and
with specimens from Clarksville, Mo. This seems to be a species, how-
ever, which exhibits a tendency to graduate on the one hand, into S. di-
plicata, and on the other, into S. Carter? Young specimens exhibit a
well defined ventral sinus, with about two incipient plications; and having,
at this age, sharper dorso-lateral angles, they closely approximate S. bipli-
cata. Large specimens, on the contrary, can scarcely be distinguished
from 8. Cartert, save by the less pronounced sinus and fold.
There are, indeed, six species described from rocks of this age, which
need to be re-examined and compared, viz: S. Marionensis, Shum., 1855;
8. Cartert, Hall, 1857-8 ; 8. biplicata, Hall, 1858; S. Vernonensis, Swal-
low, 1860; S. Osagensis, Swal., 1860; and S. Missouriensis, Swal., 1860.
The three first are, perhaps, distinct species—possibly all the others.
SPIRIFERA SUBROTUNDATA, Hall (lowa Geol. Rep., p. 521). From
bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
On some of the casts no striations are certainly seen, except over a lim-
ited space one side of the beak.
SPIRIFERA BIPLICATA? Hall. A single imperfect specimen, from No.
4, Sciotoville, Ohio. See remarks above on S. Marionensis.
SPIRIFERINA SOLIDIROSTRIs, White (Bos. Jour. VII, 282). Collected
by Rev. H. Herzer, at Newark, Ohio, and by Prof. Andrews, from bed
No. 4, Sciotoville, and bed No. 5, Rockville.
SYRINGOTHYRIS TyPA, Win. (Proc. Acad. N. 8., Phil.) This species
occurs quite abundantly in Ohio. Mr. Herzer and Prof. Andrews have
furnished over a dozen specimens from Newark. In bed No. 4, Scioto-
ville, it forms, with Spirifera Carteri and several other species, the prin-
cipal mass of a highly ferruginous stratum of sandstone. It occurs
freely, also, near Shafer’s, in Pennsylvania.
From Newark specimens may be worked out good views of both valves,
and of the bifariously striated area. ‘Traces of the pseudo-deltidium may
also be seen, and it appears that the dental lamelle are very deep, but the
essential structure of the genus does not appear. There is one exceptional
D5
1870.] 293 {Winchell.
specimen, which may be a dorsal valve distorted by pressure exerted at
the hinge extremities. If undistorted, it belongs, evidently, to a distinct
species.
In many of the Sceiotoville specimens, the fissured tube and other de-
tails of the internal structure of the genus are distinctly shown, but there
is difficulty in isolating the specimens from the mass.
A specimen in Prof. Andrews’ collection from Newark, which has the
beak of the ventral valve somewhat less elevated than usual, and the area
considerably vaulted, presents on the cast of this valve generic (?) char-
acters which have not before been noticed. The whole width of the broad
sinus, in the middle of the valve, is occupied by a pair of very peculiar
occlusor scars, separated by the shallow impression of a low median ridge.
Each scar appears somewhat like the representation of the head of a sheaf
of wheat—the divergent and pendent heads of grain being turned toward
the extremities of the shell. The two scars together are an inch broad,
and of equal length. These characters reeur in a specimen from Shafer’s,
Pennsylvania.
I have some suspicion that Syringothyris typa is identical with Spirifera
capax, Hall. The principal distinction, so far as I observe, consists in
the lobular, anterior prolongation of the ventral sinus of the former. In
a specimen having a transverse diameter of 3} inches, and a height of
area of 12 inches, the ventral sinus projects three-fourths of an inch be-
yond the general front of the shell. All of my specimens present this char-
acter ; but it does not appear in the description and figures of S. capaa.
As this is a character which probably bears a relation to the age of the
shell, it may be that S. capaxv was described from immature specimens.
If so, this species should be known as Syringothyris capax.
SprrigERA HANNIBALENSIS, Swallow (St. Louis Trans. vol. I, p. 649).
Several good casts from bed No. 4, Sciotoville, some of which show both
valves. Impressions of the exterior are common, showing that this spe-
cies flourished to luxuriant dimensions. A pair of spines is preserved,
with a bit of smooth shell attached.
SPIRIGERA OniENsis, Win. (Proc. A. Nat. Sci., Phil., July, 1865, p.
118.) From bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
RHYNCHONELLA SAGERIANA, Win. (Proc. Acad. N. Sci., Phil., Sept.,
1862, p. 407.) Six specimens from dark bituminous. shales, Tennessee.
Also, from Newark, Ohio; bed No. 4, Sciotoville ; Granville (abundant, )
and from ‘Cincinnati Furnace,’’? Vinton county, where it is of frequent
occurrence.
This isa common and widely distributed species. I have heretofore
known it from remote parts of Michigan, and from Medina, Ashland,
Cuyahoga, Summit and Licking counties, Ohio.
RHYNCHONELLA Missouriensis, Shum. (Mo. Report II, 204.) From
bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
RHYNCHONELLA MARSHALLENSIS, Win. (Proc. A. N. §., Phil., Sept.,
1862.) From Granville, Licking county, Ohio.
INo 15 SE AVO)Ms 2810 —— Bio
By
Winchell.] 254 [Jan. 4,
CENTRONELLA ? FLORA, 0. Sp.
Shell broadly ovate, rather rectilinear along the cardinal slopes, broadly
and slightly sinmnate, or not, along the ventral commissure ; general form
of each valve a segment of a sphere. Surface of shell very finely and
sharply striate both longitudinally and concentrically.
Length, fifteen-sixteenths of an inch; breadth, fourteen-sixteenths ;
thickness of both valves seven-sixteenths.
This species is broader and less rostrate than (. Alle?, Win. (Proce. A.
N.S., Phil., July, 1865, p. 128,) and also less tumid around the margins,
besides being much more distinctly striate.
Though I am not positive of the generic relations of this species, it ap-
pears to be congeneric with C. Allei. These species are both ornamented
with beautiful terebratuloid punctations, and both exhibit the elongated
ribbon-like muscular markings on the ventral valve which also charae-
terize the well-determined species C. Julia. In one of the specimens re-
ferred (provisionally) to C'? Flora, there isa low, but elongated median
septum in the dorsal valve, from which, near the beak, proceeds, on each
side, a thin horizontal, longitudinal plate, reaching half the length of the
septum. In the ventral valve, the dental lamelle are feebly developed,
and, instead of reaching the inner surface of the valve, they curve toward
the median line and join each other, leaving a small space between the
transverse septum thus formed and the surface of the valve—being thus
a kind of shoe-lifter septum inverted,—or, more strictly, a trough-like plate,
as in Camarophoria, but not, like that, supported by a median vertical .
plate. It is worthy of consideration whether these distinctive characters
are not of generic importance. The structure noticed in this specimen
connects Pentumerus with Terebratula, as Camarophoria connects Penta-
merus with Rhynchonella. I veserve the subject for further study.
From bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
PERNOPECTEN ? COOPERENSIS, Shum. sp. (Mo. Geol. Rep., Pt. ii, p.
206, pl. C, 15.) Herzer’s collection, Newark, Ohio.
The single internal cast referred to this species is rather too narrow—
having about the form of P. limaformis. It is marked by about fifteen
coarse radiating grooves, with some traces of smaller intermediate ones.
Messrs. Meek and Worthen have expressed a strong suspicion (Il.
Geol. Rep. III, p. 454), that Pernopecten limeformis and P? Shumardian-
usare but varieties of Avicula Cooperensis, Shum. | embrace the opportu-
nity to correct the impression of these authors that the surface characters of
P. limeformis have not been seen ina perfect state of preservation. I have
impressions of exteriors of this species upon fine (almost lithographic)
stone, in which the most delicate characters are much more perfectly pre-
served than they generally are in fossils retaining the actual shell. Gutta
percha restorations from these moulds are perfectly destitute of fine ra-
diating striz. On the contrary, they exhibit very fine, sharp and regular
concentric striz, and obsolete traces of a few straggling, irregular, discon-
tinuous, broad folds or undulations. This species is also distinctly nar-
rower than the others. With little doubt, its validity should be admitted.
1870. ] <0 [ Winchell.
PHRNOPECTEN LIMATUS? Win. (Proc. A. N.S., P., July, 1860, p. 126.)
Newark, and bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
Like the other Ohio representatives of the species of this family, the
specimens of this species are considerably larger than the lowa types.
AVICULOPECTEN NEWARKENSIS, N. sp.
Dorso-ventral and antero-posterior diameters and length of hinge line as
the numbers, 14, 10 and 7. Left valve rather convex, its cardinal slopes
forming an angle of about 60°, and thus creating a sharper beak than is
usual in this genus. Anterior ear somewhat inflated, with about six
strong radiating strie, finer intermediate ones, and numerous fine decus-
sating strie. Posterior ear a little smaller, flat, its posterior boundary
nearly at right angles with the hinge. Beak scarcely exceeding the hinge.
Surface marked with numerous fine, unequal, slightly wavy, delicately
crenulated, radial striz.
Dorso-ventral diameter fourteen-sixteenths of an inch ; antero-posterior,
ten-sixteenths ; length of hinge line, seven-sixteenths.
The striz are of the size of those in A. tenutcostus, Win., but they are
less rigid, regular and uniform ; the shell is less circular, and the umbo
is more prominent.
AVICULOPECTEN CaroLi, Win. (Proc. A. N. 8., Phil., Jan., 1863, p. 9.)
From Newark, bed No. 4, Sciotoville, and from Granville, Ohio.
The specimens from Licking county are all right valves, and are much
flatter than typical specimens of the same valve.
AVICULOPECTEN OCCIDENTALIS, Win. (Proc. A. N. §., Phil., Jan., 1863,
p. ©.) From Newark, Licking county, Ohio. The largest specimen is
twice the size of the Jowa types. A right valve of the same size, from
Granville, shows also obsolete, irregular, radiating furrows around the
margin of the cast.
SANQUINOLITES NAIADIFORMIS, Nl. Sp.
Length two and a half times the height ; laterally flattened below the
umbo; dorsal and ventral margins parallel or nearly so—the ventral
sometimes with a broad shallow sinus extending upwards over the valves
and vanishing near the umbo; a distinct umbonal ridge flattening out
near the postero-ventral angle, at. which place the outline presents a
rounded angulation ; the postero-dorsal slope making, with the dorsum,
an angle of 45°.
Length, 2; inches; height, one and one-sixteenth inches ; thickness,
half an inch.
The above description is based on a specimen from Hillsdale, Michigan.
Mr. Herzer has sent a single specimen from Newark, Ohio, which agrees
with this ; but such is the state of preservation of lamellibranchs in this
formation, that there is extreme difficulty in ascertaining their generic
characters. Another specimen from Granville, Ohio, presents a still bet-
ter specific accordance.
SANGUINOLITES (CYPRICARDIA ?) SECURIS, DD. sp.
Outline of shell sub-oval, anteriorly indented by a small lunule, over
which hangs the small, incurved, approximated, sub-terminal beaks. <A.
very prominent, sub-acute ridge runs from the beaks posteriorly and but
D5
Winchell.] 256 [Jan. 4,
little below the level of the straight indented hinge line. The greatest
thickness of the shell is therefore near the flattened dorsal border. From
this ridge the lateral surfaces proceed with slight curvature to the ventral
margin, so that the united valves present a cuneate or somewhat axe-like
form.
Length, one inch; height, thirteen-sixteenths ; transverse diameter,
nine-sixteenths.
This species is less elongate than Cypricardia rigida, and has a round-
ed, instead of truncate posterior extremity ; the umbonal ridge, also, is
nearer the hinge margin.
Collected by Rev. H. Herzer, at Newark, Chio.
SANGUINOLITES MARSHALLENS!Is, Win.
Occurs in bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
ALLORISMA (SEDGWICKIA) HANNIBALENSIS, Shum. (Mo. Rep. p. 206).
Specimens from Newark, Ohio, agree better with the Burlington (lowa)
forms usually referred to this species, than with Dr. Shumard’s figure of
the type.
CYPRICARDIA (?) RIGIDA, W. & W. (Bos. Proe. VITT, 300.)
A single specimen from Newark, Chio, which does not show the ‘‘second
ridge’ between the main umbonal angle and the hinge, and which may
result from dorso-ventral compression.
LEDA BELLISTRIATA? Stephens (Am. Jour. Sci. [2] vol. XXV, p. 26.)
Five specimens from dark, bituminous Shales, Tennessee, are referred to
this species solely on account of external resemblances. They have the
peculiar form and sharp concentric furrows of the species. They are a
little over an inch in length, but do not, in this, exceed specimens from
Battle Creek, Michigan,—the typical locality. At the same time, no in-
dication of hinge-structure has been observed, and the shellseems to have
been thinner than usual for the species of this family. Should further
discovery demonstrate that these specimens do not belong to Leda, they
will perhaps fall into the genus Sedgwickia of McCoy ; but I do not con-
sider it allowable to propose a specific name to be based on discoveries of
some future investigator.
CoNOCARDIUM PULCHELLUM, White & Whit. (Proc. Bos. Soc. N. H.
VIII, 299.) From Newark, Ohio.
SOLEN SCALPRIFORMIS, Win. (Proc. Acad. N. §., Phil. Sep., 1862, p.
422.) From dark, bituminous shales, Tennessee. Like other species in
the same situation, the shell is thin and fragile. This probably resulted
from an insufficiency of calcareous matter in the waters which precipi-
tated the argillo-bituminous materials of the rock.
SOLEN QUADRANGULARIS, Win. (Proc. A. N.S., Phil. Jan., 1862.) A
fragment from Granville, Ohio.
PLATYCERAS HERZERI, n. sp.
Shell rather large, consisting of about two coils, which enlarge rapidly
near the apex, and gradually through the last half of the whorl ; laterally
compressed, and dorsally sub-angulated, except near the aperture ; irre-
gularly plicated longitudinally, and marked transversely by deeply waved,
oF 297 “
1870.] —) [Winchell].
lamellar striae of growth indicating a coarsely and unequally crenate
aperture.
Of this species two varieties may be recognized: (A) The typical form,
differing from P. paralium, W. & W., in its excentric apex ; (B) A form
less profoundly plicated—perhaps because younger specimens. These
forms I was at first inclined to regard as varieties of P. haliotoides, M. &
W., but I believe the departures are too extreme and the mutually-con-
curring specimens too numerous for specific identity with the NDlinois
forms.
The largest specimens, when resting on the aperture, are an inch in
height ; the transverse diameter of the aperture is five-sixteenths of an
inch, and the dorso-ventral diameter six-sixteenths.
Quite abundant at Newark, Chio.
PLATYCERAS HALIOTOIDES, M. &. W. (Ill. Geol. Rep. 458, pl. xiv, fig. 3).
From Newark, Ohio.
PLEUROTOMARIA HICKMANENSIS, Win. (Tenn. Geol. Rep).
Globose shells in an incomplete state of preservation, showing regularly
convex whorls ornamented with numerous delicately raised and finely
beaded revolving striae, and a well-defined band, without distinct carima.
The striz limiting the band are not beaded, but all the others, on both
sides, bear 50 to 60 granulations to the inch. The striz are quite unequal
in number and distribution, since they increase by implantation, with the
growth of the shell. The base of the shell is about an inch in diameter,
and seems to be perforated by a small umbilicus.
From dark, bituminous shales, Hickman county, Tennessee.
PLEUROTOMARIA vADosA, Hall (XIII. Rep. N. Y. Regents, p. 108.)
Numerous casts occur in bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio, which are quite
identical with casts from Michigan. Some imperfect moulds, larger than
the typical forms, occur also in bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio.
MURCHISONIA PROLIXA, W. & W. (Proc. Bos. Soc. N. H. VIII, 3038.)
Bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
MURCHISONIA QUADRICINCTA, Win. (Proc. Acad. N. §S., Phil. Jan.
1863, p. 19.) Bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
BELLEROPHON CYRTOLITES, Hall. (XIII. Rep. N. Y. Reg.)
A single imperfect specimen from Granville, Ohio.
CoONULARIA BYBLIS, White. (Proc. Bos. Soc. N. H., Feb. 1862, p. 22.)
From dark, bituminous shales, Hickman county, Tennessee.
I feel no doubt of the identity of this species. It possesses the same
small isolated eminences or granulations ranged in a line along the crests
of the ridges, which characterize well preserved specimens from Burling-
ton, Iowa. From 60 to 75 of these eminences may be counted in the space
of an inch.
Dr. White does not mention these granulations ; only stating, ‘spaces
between the ridges finely crenulate.’? Worn specimens develop a series
of transverse bars between the ridges, which undoubtedly correspond in
position with the granulations seen in unworn specimens. Compare with
this species, C. Gervillei @ Archiac et Vern., Mem. Foss. Rhenish Proy.
in Trans. Geol. Soc., Lond., vol. VJ, p. 351.
ZO
Winchell. ] 258 [Jan. 4,
Conunarra NEWBERRYI, Win. (Proc. A. N. 8., Phil. July, 1865, p.
130.) From bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio.
This shell was probably as large as C. byblds. It has the form of a
quadrangular pyramid compressed in the direction of two opposite angles.
It differs from C. byblis as follows :—Its form is much more distinetly
angulated ; the septa range from 17 to 44 to the inch, while in C. bydlis
they range from 56 to 128 to the inch ; it bears a deep V-shaped furrow
along each of the angles ; within this furrow the septa are deflected ab-
ruptly toward the base of the shell, so that they meet from opposite
sides at about a right angle ; the septa also sweep toward the base with a
gentle curve in their extension across the side of the pyramid, by which
their centres are about two intervals lower than the portions in the ridge
which bounds the angle-furrow. In C. byblis the septa-margins also trend
toward the base, but they are more nearly straight from angle to centre.
The septa, like those in C. byblis and many other species, are ornamented
along their margins by delicate granulations. The species appears to
have been at least three or four inches in length.
The septa toward the upper end become more direct, and | have little
doubt that it was the apical portion of this species from which C. New-
berryt was originally described.
ORTHOCERAS INDIANENSEH, Hall. CXIII. Rep. N. Y. Reg.) From New-
ark and from bed No. 4, Sciotoville, Ohio. One of the specimens from
the latter locality exhibits a broad constriction near the base of the outer
chamber. From Newark are also fragments of an Orthoceras having an
elliptic section and oblique septa.
Nautitus (TREMATODIScUS) TRIsULCATUS, M. G W. (Proc. A. N. S.,
Phil., 1860, p. 470.) From bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio.
GoNIATITES MARSHALLENSIS, Win.
From Newark, Ohio. Differs from G. Lyon, M. & W. G. Hyas,
Hall), in having the transverse section regularly curved instead of broad-
est near the umbilicus ; in having the first and second lateral lobes rounded
instead of acuminate ; in having an additional accessory lobe and saddle,
and in having the dorsal lobe broader and relatively longer.
GonIATITES SHUMARDIANUS, Win. (Am. Jour. Sci. [2] XXXIII, 364,
May, 1862.) From Newark, Ohio.
The specimens of this species, though fragmentary, exhibit nearly all
the specific characters.
To the description of G. Shumardianus originally given, may be added
the following characters, drawn from the Newark specimens: Accessory
lobe concealed, same form as the lateral one, but only one-third its size,
separated by a parallel-sided, circularly terminated saddle from a nar-
row, elongated, parallel-sided ventral lobe.
As the three species, G. Allei, Shumardianus aud propinguus, are
closely related in general aspect, their diagnostic characters may be here
given in stronger contrast.
G. Alled wants the dorsal lobe—unless we regard the two first-lateral
together with the dorsal saddle, as a bifid dorsal lobe—and has a closed
umbilicus.
1870.] we [Winchell,
G. Shumardianus has a simple dorsal lobe and an open umbilicus.
G. propinquus has a shorter and narrower dorsal lobe than G. Shumar-
dianus, with a closed umbilicus.
GONTATITES OHIENSIS, 1. Sp.
Compressed-globoid, deeply and broadly umbilicate. Dorsum rounded,
sides considerably and somewhat obliquely flattened, so as to give the
widest transverse section near the borders of the umbilicus, this diameter
being to the dorso-ventral as 4 to 3. Dorsal lobe oblong, parallel-sided,
obtuse, separated, by a broader and longer, obtusely rounded dorsal sad-
dle, from a subclavate, acute lateral lobe. which reaches half its length be-
hind the dorsal one. This lobe is followed by a very broad shallow saddle
having its apex turned obliquely toward the dorsum. Second lateral lobe
small, equilaterally triangular, situated on the brink of the umbilicus.
Greatest transverse diameter, fifteen-sixteenths of an inch ; dorso-ven-
tral diameter, twelve-sixteenths; diameter of umbilicus, seven-sixteenths.
Differs from G. Shumardianus in its parallel-sided, obtuse dorsal, and
linguiform, acuminate first lateral lobe ; also, in the oblique position of
the lateral saddle. ‘There is no species likely to be confounded with it
unless it be G. Andrewsi, which has the sides more convex, and differs
also in its acuminate-clavate dorsal lobe.
From Newark, Ohio. Collected by Rev. H. Herzer.
GONIATITES ANDREWSI, 0. sp.
Compressed-globoid; deeply, broadly and abruptly umbilicate. Rounded
on the sides, and more rapidly on the dorsum; greatest width close to the
umbilicus; transverse diameter to the dorso-ventral as 4 to 3. Dorsal
lobe long, clavate, acuminate, separated by a sub-clavate broadly rounded
saddle from the first lateral lobe, which is also clavate-acuminate, but a
little broader than the dorsal, and a trifle shorter. This is followed by a
very broad, obliquely situated saddle, having its dorsal side concave in
the middle, and its umbilical side gently convex. The whorls are marked
each by about four constrictions. In one specimen, which seems to pre-
serve a portion of the shell, it is seen to present somewhat uniform, close-
ly-set, transverse wrinkles in the region near the umbilicus. Casts of the
umbilicus retain the impression of every whorl to the very apex, and show
that this species attained seven or eight volutions, the later of which in-
creased in transverse diameter more rapidly than the earlier.
From Newark, Ohio. Collected by Rev. H. Herzer.
CYTHERE CRASSIMARGINATA, Win. (Proc. A. N. §., Phil., Sep.. 1862.)
From bed No. 5, Rockville, Ohio. Some of the specimens attain twice
the dimensions of the types of the species.
Puinuipsta MissourRIENstIs, Shum. sp.
From Newark, Ohio. Collected by Rev. H. Herzer.
All the known characters of the species are exhibited, except the gran-
ulations of the surface, which the state of preservation of the specimens
renders it impossible to detect.
PHILLIPSIA TENNESSEENSIS, Win. (Tenn. Geol. Rep. p. 445.)
Glabella prominent, indented by a small, round, depressed, postero-
lateral lobe, and isolated by a deep occipital furrow from a prominent
Winchell.] 260 [Jan. 4,
occipital ring, which extends, narrowing in width and curving backwards,
entirely across the border, fading out toward the short, acute genal angle.
Border concave, bounded by a prominent ridge, outside of which is a
linear groove limited peripherally by a sharply elevated, delicate, linear
margin. Surface of glabella, accessory lobe and neck-ring covered with
fine unequal granulations; a row of granules along the ridge of the border.
Pygidium broadly rounded, nearly twice as broad as long, apparently
depressed ; axis with 8 or 9 rings, tapering to the posterior end, which is
somewhat abruptly rounded off one-tenth of an inch from the extremity
of the pygidium; lateral lobes with 8 or 9 segments becoming obscure
posteriorly. Border about one-sixteenth of an inch broad, marked on
the under side by nine rigid,, sharply impressed parallel striz. Exterior
of the crest very finely and obscurely granulated. Length, about three-
eighths of an inch ; breadth, five-eighths.
Other characters of this species are unknown. It seems to approach
nearest to P. articulata, Hall sp. (XV. Rep. N. Y. Regents, p. 107.) From
the Waverly of Ohio; but is destitute of the anterior and middle furrows
of the glabella. Neither does the description of that species give the sur-
face characters, though comparison is made with Proeius Missouriensis,
Shum., from the lithograpic limestone of Missouri, which is a granulated
species. It differs from Proetus (Phillipsia) ellipticus, M. & W. CI.
Geol. Rep. III, 460), from the Kinderhook group, in the characters of the
cephalic border, in the absence of glabellar furrows, and in the border of
the pygidium.
From caleareo-argillaceous beds, of yellowish brown color, and from
caleareo silicious shales, Hickman and Maury counties, Tennessee.
PuHiniiesta Doris, Hall sp. (XIII. Rep. N. Y. Regents, p. 112, and
Winchell, Phil. Proc., July, 1865, p. 138.)
Several small pygidia occur in the collection from bed No. 5, Rockville,
Ohio.
PLEURODICTYUM PROBLEMATICUM, Goldf.
Well preserved specimens occur at Newark, Ohio. Collected by Rev.
H. Herzer.
MURCHISONIA sp?
A fragment nearly three inches long, consisting of four whorls—proba-
bly about one or two whorls wanting at the apex and an unknown por-
tion from the other end. The whorls are very oblique, the deeply im-
pressed suture making an angle of 40° or 45° with the axis of the shell.
The apical angle of the spire was not more than 18° to 25°. It most
nearly resembles M. quadricincta, Win., but it has quite a different ex-
pression, besides being much larger and haying more oblique whorls.
From near Shafer’s, Pennsylvania.
From Newark is a Sigillaria, and a Myalina too imperfect for identifi-
cation. Two or three species of Fenestellide occur at Sciotoville, Rock-
ville, and in Licking county. Three species of crinoidal stems exist in
Prof. Andrews’ collection, from Newark, Granville and Sciotoville. A
Sanguinolaria occurs at Sciotoville; and at Granville and Sciotoville is
an interesting compound coral with minute tubes, whose specific details
ave well exhibited, though its generic position is undetermined.
Jan. 7, 1870. ] 261 [Cope.
ON SOME ETHEOSTOMINE PERCH FROM TENNESSEE AND
NORTH CAROLINA.
By EH. D. Corn:
ETHEOSTOMA, Raf.
The species of this genus are nearly allied to each other. I gave a
synopsis of the three with which I was acquainted in 1866 (Trans. Amer.
Philos. Soc., p. 400), and now add characters of two other species. They
are to be compared with the E. peltatum, Stauffer, and E. maculatum,
Girard.
A Seales 7-3—52-5—8-12.
I. Head 4.5 to base of tail; cheeks scaled.
R. D. XIII1.12 A II.8 Muzzle obtuse, wide; maxillary. to line of
pupil; maxillary teeth nearly equal: a series of separate spots on the
sides behind scapula. E. NEVISENSE.
II. Head 3.6 to 4 times to origin caudal; cheeks naked.
R. D. XJ-XII.12-138 A II.9 Muzzle compressed acute; maxillary to
line of pupil; a larger series of maxillary teeth exteriorly ; a series of
eight spots on the sides connected by a band; eye near four times in head.
E.? MACULATUM, var.
“R. D. XIV.14 A I1.10 Maxillary to line of orbit.”’ Girard.
E. MACULATUM.
R. D. XUI.18 A.1.10 Maxillary to line of pupil. H. PELTATUM.
ETHEOSTOMA NEVISENSE, Cope.
Sp. nov.
This is an elongate fish, with muzzle obtuse in profile, as well as wide,
viewed from above; cheek, operculum and median dorsal line scaled ;
ventral line without spinous scales, one only present in the symphysis of
the ‘‘coracoids.”? Isthmus very narrow. Anal fin with base a little
shorter than second dorsal; the species may really be a Poecilichthys.
Scales 8—53—11. First dorsal moderately elevated ; second peculiar in
spinous ray, well separated from the first dorsal. Caudal fin slightly
forked.
Ground color above yellowish, crossed by nine dark chestnut quadrate
spots on the median line, which are wider than their interspaces, and are
connected at their ends by an undulate chestnut band. Below the latter
a similar longitudinal band on the anterior half of the body. Six quad-
rate black spots on the sides, with a small spot between each. A dark
band from end of muzzle to scapula; below it on operculum, a silver spot.
A black bar below eye. Belly white. Caudal and second dorsal dis-
tinetly, pectoral and ventral, faintly black barred. <A series of black spots
along middle of first dorsal.
Length 3 in. 25 lin. Diameter orbit 2.2 lines. Depth at first ray second
dorsal 4.8 lines ; at occipital region 4 lines.
This species, though near the next in general appearance, is very differ-
ent in details of structure, and J am not sure that it may not be referable
to the genus Poecilichthys. It is based on one specimen which was taken
Ne Ba|S:—ViOLe XI—_OH
Cope.] ; 262 [Jan. ,
in boisterous water at the falls of the Neuse River, 8 miles east of Raleigh,
North Carolina.
ETHEOSTOMA MACULATUM, Girard.
Putnam Bull. Mus. Compar. Zool. No. I Hadropterus maculatus, Gi-
rard, Proc Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil. 1855, 100.
My specimens differ from that described by Girard as expressed in the
table above, and they may be distinct. They differ among themselves
thus: In two specimens the radii are DX1I.13; in two XII.13, and in one
XII.12. The type of E. peltatum, Stauff., differs also; its anal radii
should be expressed 1.10, not II.9 as heretofore given. I am, therefore,
not sure whether it belongs to this genus.
Several specimens from the upper waters of the Catawba River.
ETHEOSTOMA BLENNIOIDES, Raf.
From the headwaters of the Cumberland River, Campbell co., Tenn.
CoTrToGaAstTER, Putn.
CoTTOGASTER AURANTIACUS, Cope.
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Philada. 1868, 211.
One specimen from the French Broad River in Madison co., N. Ca.,
measuring 4 inches, 8 lines in length, more than twice the size of the
types, and larger than any species of the group excepting Percina capro-
des. Colors, bright yellow and black in life.
PERcINA, Hald.
In this genus the median line of the abdomen and thorax is protected
by a series of enlarged spinous scales, as in Etheostoma. This is no doubt
a protection to the belly from the rocky and stony bottoms which the
animal haunts.
PERCINA CAPRODES, Raf.
Brom the South fork of the Cumberland River, Campbell co., Tenn.
PoxrciLicHtTHys, Agassiz.
I. Branchiostegal membranes distinct throughout their length.
Slender ; head attenuated, muzzle not decurved; depth 5.25 lines in
length to base caudal; first dorsal low, elongate RXII (XIII); scales
small 1. J. 55-62. Black with scattered crimson spots; fins crimson not
margined ; P. SANGUIFLUUS.
Stout, head short, muzzle abruptly decurved from orbits, latter large,
scarcely four times in head ; dorsal line plane, depth 4.5 times in length ;
first dorsal elevated R. X (XI-XII); scales larger 1. 1. 50-54. Black with
crimson spots in rows of three and four; fins crimson, yellow and black
margined. P. CAMURUS.
Stout, head acuminate, muzzle not much decurved, dorsal line much
arched, depth 4.5 in length; first dorsal elevated (X—XI) XII; scales
largest 1. 1. 43-47; eye small, nearly five lines in length of head. Light,
with narrow dark lines enclosing spaced quadrate red-brown spots ; below
orange ; head brown lined, fins crimson bordered. P. RUFILINEATUS.
Like the last but D.XY, scales smaller 1. 1. 58, and dorsal line not
263 [Cope.
1870.]
arched. Light, with dark olive vertical cross-bars, and a few scattered
crimson spots ; red spots on middle first dorsal, other fins unspotted.
P. VULNERATUS.
II. Branchiostegal membranes united across thoracic region.
Slender, cylindric; muzzle acuminate depressed ; orbit 4.5 times in
head ; depth 6.5 in length, D. VII small; P. very long, reaching the anal;
naked below anteriorly; cheeks and operculum scaled; transparent in
life, with dorsal and lateral spots. P. VITREUS.
POECILICHTHYS ZONALIS, Cope.
Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1868, p. 212, tab. 24, f. 1.
The vertical bands which are represented as brown in the above figure,
are a beautiful turquoise blue in life.
From a tributary of the French Broad River, Madison co., N. Ca,
POECILICHTHYS FLABELLATUS, Raf.
Putnam Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1. (Catonotus) Cope, 1. c, 218.
A very marked variety, perhaps species, represented by three specimens
from the upper waters of the Catawba River, N. Ca. Scales much larger
than in the types, 6—42—4—9-10 ; in the only adult there are but four ver-
tical cross-bars below the dorsal fins, (six to eight in the usual variety)
and the fin formula is much reduced, i. e. DVI-12 A 11.6. In a younger
specimen the D.VII-12 A II.8, and in a third, D.VIII-12 A 11.7.6. The
dorsal and lateral spots are more numerous than in the adult. Head in
the latter 3.5 times in length to caudal. In other respects this form is
like the type, except that in life the colors are paler.
POECILICHTHYS VITREUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This species is very unlike the others of the genus, having the cylindric
form of Percina and Pleurolepis ; it further resembles Pleurolepis pellu-
cidus in the transparency of its muscles, but is to be referred to another
genus on account of the reduction of its anal fin, and its complete scutel-
lation.
The head is remarkably acuminate, the profile gradually descending
and the under jaw received within the-upper ; the mouth is nearly termi-
nal, and the extremity of the maxillary bone reaches barely to the line of
the anterior margin of the orbit. Both cheeks and operculum are coy-
ered with large pectinated scales, the former as far as the preopercular
bone. Opercular spine rudimental, flat, as in some individuals of P, flab-
ellatus. The orbit is relatively small, its diameter being less than the
length of the muzzle in advance of it, and a half less than one-fourth the
length of the head. Depth of head at deepest point, one-half its length ;
its length 4.5 times in length of body to basis of caudal. The fins are
not largely developed, except the pectoral, which is very long and acu-
minate, reaching the line of the vent. Br. VI. D. VIJ-14. A II.9. Ven-
trals cuneiform, a little over half the length of the pectorals. Caudal
nearly equal or slightly concave. Scales 6.—56—7, counted from the ante-
rior ray of the second dorsal to the vent. On the anterior half of the dor-
Cope. ] 204 [Jan. 7,
P
sal region they are not continuously developed and are cycloid; a large
part of the most anterior portion is naked. ©n the anterior fourth the
ventral surface the scales are cycloid, not impricate, and below the pecto-
ral fins entirely absent. Other scales ctenoid. Caudal peduncle not deep
nor constricted.
Lines.
‘Wowaul Wem ctemocesssncnoonobepescasgndaadajac cose: 24
@prca wala. sees Geena vestenete eis bes aeceey eal otic Omen eee ene 3.6
Ofsbasisthiretidorsall aes ase ero neha) noe eae are 3.4
Of pectovalis Lie Shy hie aeons o sed orercacin easels Crackers eases ee ge 8.4
OP MAMA ZICH Scie crave eco Sanat shemromere Hee Ce as. he tena e eee 1.5
Width of body opposite first dorsal...................-. 2.3
In life this species is nearly colorless, and the myocommata and other
muscles are transparent. The viscera are perfectly visible, and in the
specimen taken, the two ovaries with all the eggs in an advanced stage of
development were seen with entire distinctness. There are seven imper-
fectly formed pale green blotches on the dorsal line, and a series of eight
or nine on the lateral line of a linear form, arranged longitudinally, and
of the same greenish tint. A few blackish specks between these, and
below the eye; a large spot on operculum and line on canthus rostralis.
Caudal fin faintly barred; other fins and lower surfaces immaculate ;
ventrals with white edge within.
One specimen taken in Walnut Creek, a tributary of the Neuse River,
in Wake co., N. Carolina, late in November.
From the advanced condition of the eggs they must be excluded either
in the Winter, or a very early Spring, for even that mild latitude. In its
transparency this fish resembles the Pleurolepis pellucidus, Agass. When
first taken its scales are entirely invisible, and it requires coagulation in
alcohol before they can be readily detected.
The vomerine teeth of this fish are very few in number, and the maxil-
Jaries and mandibulars are very abruptly incurved.
PoORCILICHTHYS SANGUIFLUUS, Cope.
Species nova.
Of the same form as the P. flabellatus ; i. e. elongate, with dorsal line
not elevated, and very deep caudal peduncle. Head flat acuminate, the
front descending very gradually, the mandible as gradually rising to its
extremity. Orbit rather large, diameter equal to that of muzzle, and one-
fourth length of head. Opercular spine well developed, the operculum
sealed, cheek naked. End of maxillary marking line of pupil. Teeth of
outer rows larger. Length head without spine, one-fourth total to basis
caudal. Fins generally, especially the caudal, short; latter slightly
rounded. First dorsal much elongate; first anal spine very large. In
four specimens the fin and scale formulae vary as follows: 1st, Br VI.
D.XIL-12. A IL-8; 2nd, D.XII-12. A II-9: 3rd, XII-13. A IL.95 4th,
DXNIII.12 A 11.9. Scales 9—54-62—10.
1870.] 269
[Cope.
Lines.
Movalislemo-Glipeecrat sree chelate sateen BSE aA Ones Loa 50 Gill
(OWEN auCER CLS Te clare biel toac ey CRE SER Iero ae eh reS i Cte dit oc eRN NSE tr 7
Ore GEICO EN Thins cls da ignens emoroeaemerctet chats Giant ces cea ciel Eeceecs eeaNeNS 4
TEGUON A os Sigages: AIS sienna eT UTTER perme sO aD ee ge Ca aCe eRe aca,
HB ASTSHLUES GHC OTS all pera eevee es waasce oleh reese seine siehehoean sue renee 5 ett
Depth at occiput
The coloration of this fish in life is very elegant, as follows: above black,
shading to dark olive below, and with a narrow, repand, leather colored
dorsal band; throat turquoise blue; sides and dorsal region marked with
small circular spots of bright crimson irregularly disposed, and in con-
siderable number. First dorsal uncolored, with a black spot at base an-
teriorly, and a dark shade through the middle. Second dorsal blood red,
without border; caudal with two large crimson spots confluent on the
middle line of the tail at the base, no border; pectoral and ventral not red
bordered. A female has the 2D. C. and A. black barred, and not crimson.
This lovely species is common in the head waters of the South Fork
Cumberland, in Tennessee.
® POECILICHTHYS CAMURUS, Cope.
Species nova.
This species is nearly allied. to the last. It is distinguished by many
characters, of which some have been pointed out in the synoptic table. It
is a stout, deep-bodied fish, not a slender one, and with the head as deep
as the body and suddenly decurved from the orbit to the muzzle. The
first dorsal is higher and shorter, though occasionally with the same num-
ber of radii. The scales are larger. In life the coloration though of the
same type, is constantly different, and the females differ from the males
as they do in the preceding and following species.
Maxillary bone opposite line of pupil; cheek extended, naked; opercu-
lum sealed, with a strong spine. Fins better developed than in P. sang-
uifluus. Formulae in five specimens; first, Br. VI D. X-13 A. II.8; 2nd,
D X-13 A II.9; 8rd, D. XI-18, A. II. 8; 4th, XI-14 A II. 8; 5th, DXII-12.
A II.8. Scales 7—52-4—8.
Lines.
NORM Nermelskoobsaccosuononbeoooonoe Sanaa eres 50 Gill
Otsheadmaneeee By ip ctiha guar Seat teass oe ON LES Reh the eek Moe eA ee
Ofecanidalfineerase Reta At nee Ads pu RS Rac eye Be AL are 4.
Oigpecbonally seeker tei tevececctetses cis) teases bl hauciah son crete nents 00 Oo
IBASTSHOMANSEACLORSAliersrertanteh orotate eateries ReneS eae 7.2
Depth of occiput..... persed a SSP ORM tera OR 402 SUCHEN cee 5
Npaniddletinstidorsales aasnencaee ee eee et er en RRO 5) Dees
In life the color is blackish to very dark olive, with an obscure dorsal
band of a paler shade; belly paler. Sides abundantly sprinkled with crim-
son spots, which are smaller than in the P. sanguifluus, and differ further
in being arranged in short longitudinal series of threcs and fours. First
dorsal with a black spot at base in front, and a crimson one on the margin
between the first and second radii. Second dorsal, caudal and anal, crim-
Cope. ] 266 [Jan. 7,
son bordered with yellow, which again is bordered with black on the edge
of the fin; the crimson is deepest just inside the yellow margin in all three.
The pectoral and ventral fins have a broad red margin. Thoracic region
turquoise.
This species, like the last, occurs abundantly in the head waters of the
Sumberland River, in Tennessee, in company with P. coeruleus, Hyosto-
ma, and Etheostoma blennioides.
The females of the first two present a different appearance, in their olive
colors, with dark vertical bars, and absence of red spots. Allof the above
species lie on the bottom, frequently beneath stones, with the head only
projecting on the lookout for prey. Ordinarily they lie motionless, except
occasionally inclining their position and exhibiting their gorgeous colors.
The effect of these is heightened by the crystal clearness of the waters of
the mountain streams, which reflect as well the beauty of a southern sky,
and the noble trees and flowering shrubs that border them in the rich
wilderness of the Cumberland range. Few more attractive spots to the
naturalist can be found, and among its natural treasures, these peculiar
little fishes are among the most curious. All the fishes of this group can
turn the head from side to side, and they frequently lie in a curved pgsi-
tion, or partially on one side of the body.
It is possible that one of the two species above described may be the
P. maculatus (Htheostoma, Kirtl. Nothonotus, Agass), but which, I have in
vain essayed to discover. It may be neither. The description of form
and colors apply best to the P. sanguifluus, but its dorsal fins are those of
P. camurus. If the statements ‘‘ operculum double spined”’ and ‘‘anal I-7”’
are correct, it is manifestly different, but I suspect they are errors.
The caudal peduncle is represented to be much more slender than in
our specimens, but this may also be inexact.
POECILICHTHYS VULNERATUS, Cope.
Species nova.
General fotm fusiform; body stout, depth 4.5 times in length to basis
caudal, peduncle very stout; dorsal line scarcely arched. Top of head
gently and regularly curved to end of muzzle, much as in P. sanguifluus,
Orbit four times in length of head to basis of opercular spine, equal length
of muzzle, cheek smooth, operculum scaled, with well developed spine.
Fin rayseD XIV. 18. A II 8. First dorsal large, not low, caudal truncate
rounded, anal small. Scales small 8—d38—9.
Lines
Motalwlemotherre miter errr sets esau eg: Sal etasteeereieies Pee 7-15)
Caudal eiineeenrircn nrc ecrr peel sie Bet aa Srareeteectsieepemreatt 3.8
Base first dorsal......... A NERS A SOM tue ahr 0) 6:00 “it
(Op Oreo ketone a an cme Oe teaI eM oman eMac bulG Scenes a6 Seo Oni)
IDE OU AG OGG, soblocsbccccn die aja badcatay a ctaacat aria teaeie epee 3.4
Mt posterior mamoim MEst (Orsay yer) slete neers etree 4.6
Color in life, light olive, with about eight vertical dark olive bars on the
side, which are interrupted above the lateral line. A few irregular crim-
son dots on the sides. Fins uniform transparent except the first dorsal
¢
-S70. ] 267 ! [Cope.
and caudal; the former has a median series of red spots; the latter is pale
orange, with a black margin; no fins cross-barred; D. 2, with a black
margin.
From Warm Springs Creek, a tributary of the French Broad River,
Madison co., N. Carolina.
This species is in general proportions intermediate between the P. ru-
filineatus and P. sanguifluus, but is in some points of coloration like the
P. camurus.. That it is not the female of P. rufilineatus is clear, though
its size is similar to the smaller individuals of the latter. The coloration
‘alone would indicate that it was a male.
POECILICHTHYS RUFILINEATUS, Cope.
Species nova.
Stout, the dorsal line elevated and descending regularly from the base
of the first dorsal ray to the end of the muzzle. Muzzle short, regularly
conic, about as long as the diameter of the orbit; latter smaller than in the
other species, 4.5 times in head. Maxillary to line of pupil. Cheeks
smooth, operculum scaly, with strong spine. Dorsal well developed; cau-
dal peduncle deep, caudal fin small truncate. Seales larger than in the
species above described; 6—41-7—7-8. Rays; 1st D. X. 12. A I1.8. 2nd,
D. XI. 12 A. 11.8; 3rd, XI. 12, 11.9; 4th, XI. 18, 11.8; Sth and 8th, XII.
12 OLS Goh) 2006 ie} JOE dn, DOs Wak IU)
Lines.
Menotheomthelarcestian isa vere ae eins ier roe co
Ofearse CONC rrsaer te annie iar there ee nents oy 3
Ofeneadvotel atten was. scosler yet en oe eee cet mere eae 6.4
Ofacauwel alehinemeyaiace ses ae rs Ze LIRR Ae ee soo 4b4l
Ofepectoralptinemern cro siramscwein esc cyerel: asc ele ore ete 6.4
Basis of first dorsal............ ates io i een aS mata a soo Bod
Depthratroccipubrsis an a5) oom eure oaiae ose re 50. ee)
At middle first dorsal........ PI kee Ee tea Let ied pe . 0.8
In males the color in life is pale olive for a ground above, with numer-
ous narrow longitudinal lines, each on the adjacent margins of the two
rows of scales. These include a number of quadrate spots of a mahogany
or brick red color, which alternate with each other, but are not regular in
position or number. Pectoral region turquoise blue, belly bright red
orange. Head with two longitudinal mahogany-colored bands, and a spot
of the same below the eye. Five red spots on each side of the head, on
operculum, preoperculum, suboperculum, and on each lip. Pectoral, ven-
tral, first and second dorsal and anal broadly crimson bordered, the last
with a narrow black margin. Caudal fin brownish, broadly vermillion
bordered, with a narrow black edging; two orange areas at the base. Anal
vermillion with yellow base and black margin on posterior half.
Females are more olive, and the spots are partially confluent into verti-
tical bars;—D. 2, C., and A. black barred. A male forms a variety with
the quadrate spots obsolete and the D. 2, C., and A. with yellow margin
inside the black.
This fish was abundantly seen in Warm Springs Creek, which flows into
Cope.] . 268 [Jan. 7,
the French Broad River, in Madison co., N. Ca. Hight specimens were
taken with some difficulty. The beauty of the species is scarcely exceeded
by any of the preceding;sif not so elegant, a male in summer attire is
more gaudy. They inhabit shallow, swift waters with rocky bottoms,
and take refuge under stones with great rapidity, whence much patience
is required to draw them.
The conic form of the head, small orbit and elevated dorsal region, char-
acterize this species among other points apart from coloration.
POECILICHTHYS COPRULEUS, Storer.
From the South Fork of the Cumberland, Tenn.
BoutEnosoma, Dekay.
Second dorsal larger than anal fin; vomerine teeth present; no series of
abdominal plates; two osseous anal radii; scales well developed; premax-
illary projectile, the labral dermal fold extended across the muzzle.
This genus is identical with Poecilichthys, excepting in the completion
of the labral fold, which in the latter genus ceases on each side of the
muzzle. The simple anal, formerly assigned as its character, I find to be-
long to one or two species which are so nearly allied to the type as to
preclude their generic separation.
Synopsis of Species:
I, Anal radii, II.
Caudal peduncle thick, not contracted; cheek scaleless; branchiostegal
membranes nearly distinct, spine rudimental; tail rounded; muzzle
blackish. B. EFFULGENS.
Caudal peduncle contracted, dorsal line not elevated; cheek scaleless;
branchiostegal membraiies well connected, spine developed; tail truncate;
crown and muzzle closely brown spotted above. B. MACULATICEPS.
II. Anal radii, I.
Caudal peduncle contracted, dorsal line not elevated; cheek scaled;
branchiostegal rays well connected, spine strong; tail truncate; crown and
muzzle unicolor. B. OLMSTEDI.
Caudal peduncle contracted, dorsal line not elevated; cheek smooth; D.
2 with 11-12 radii only; branchiostegal membranes connected, tail trun-
cate; back and top of head closely speckled with black. B. BREVIPINNE.
III. Anal osseous ray wanting.
Caudal peduncle contracted, dorsal line arched from the nape; cheek
? naked; branchiostegal rays entirely distinct, spine well developed; tail
truncate. B. AESOPUS.
The preceding definitions apply to considerable numbers of individuals
from remote localities; these may be species, for the range of variation is
very considerable, and such as is to be found nowhere else in a single
species. Should they be found to present intermediate forms in regions |
not. yet explored, they may be regarded as races, and as such, worthy of
note.
BOLEOSOMA EFFULGENS, Girard.
Arlina efflulgens, Girard, Proc, Ac. Nat. Sci., Phil., 1859, 64.
5
1870. ] 269 [Cope.
Char. Muzzle abruptly decurved, body elongate, slender; scales large.
Fins very much developed, elevated and prolonged D. IX. 13. A IT. 8.
Cheek and pectoral region smooth, operculum scaled, branchiostegal
membranes slightly connected. Muzzle and fins black.
Description. The mouth is horizontal, the premaxillary border below
the lower margin of the orbit; maxillary to pupil. Dorsal line a little ele-
vated above the occiput, greatest depth 6.25 times in length to origin cau-
dal; length of head 4.2 in some (spine omitted’. Opercular spine weak;
orbit 3.75 times in head, equal muzzle. Scales 5—40—6. Fins all elon-
gate; V 1.6, cuneiform, reaching the anal; P. 11, narrow, reaching beyond
the base of the anal. Anal spines weak, caudal very much rounded.
Lines
Motalelenothnpprertpac iter ieee cre re siete etter 28.3
Ofacanrclalletitn cepa wner a een ciel enee iam ea enowoy Pea citeeks ls 5
fea Ge ye is coated cares cise epexe eis Nouete kre are reaped teanenrevca Maas erekys ices 6
Ofsbasisitirst dorsaleiwe meas vay arracnars Sie ae reeesta ss 5.3
(QUE OCONEE W I Meine eae eects etal cnesaieiene ws Bites ERCn She a pias tele Het 46
De pthvofslinstvd ose se aes eccer seks eeeeye nates teh trae sue tenet ts 6
OMSeCOM gars cc. amen erases: PE REN Nee a 3.7
Ox lneee! te CEG ouimnsegaddotacounesuacd danaaaucamunads 3.2
Ofsbodyrataniddletinstidorsaleyemeseeen eer aar oe ee 4
The color of three specimens in alcohol is brown with traces of nine
spots on the side. Muzzle, chin and spot below the eye black. Fins black,
the second dorsal and caudal with whitish bars and specks.
Three specimens were taken in a tributary of Deep River, Guilford co.,
N. Ca., by my friend, Samuel C. Collins, Principal of the boarding school
at New Garden, N. Ca., and kindly sent me for determination.
BOLEOSOMA MACULATICEPS, Cope.
Sp. nov.
R. DIX. 13 A JI. 8. Head four times to basis of caudal fin; depth at
middle of first dorsal 6.5 times in same. Scales 5—41—10. Fins largely
developed. Orbit 3.75 times in head; opercular spine moderate.
Pale yellowish, with ill-defined series of dorsal and lateral spots and
many speckles between. Top of the nape, head and muzzle marked with
large brown spots. All the fins black barred.
Lines.
emi Ort laeay ees rer caste atest anaes Tae mien el eyenCetene iS foray See veel 26.8
FBG Choral eine see ce chet ia or ANOS SR Wine aor, see ce a 6
TASC BIG HANS CS) ED Ties setae ele we acl naa mS i enti ie aa a ae 3
This species is near the B. olmstedi, and may be only a variety. Its
clean cheek and double anal spines are characteristic, as well the mark-
ings of the head. Common in the upper waters of the Catawba River,
N. Carolina.
BoLEOSOMA OLMSTEDI, Storer,
et acctorum.
Not seen by me in Tennessee or North Carolina. The adult males of
A. P. §8.—VOL.. XI—6E
Cope. ] 270 [Jan. 7, 1870.
this species, as I have observed in Pennsylvania, are much larger, and
more darkly colored, especially about the head, than the females.
BoLEOSOMA BREVIPINNE, Cope.
B. olmstedi brevipinne, Cope, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci., 1868, 214.
The thick punctation of the dorsal region and nape, and crown and
muzzle, are color peculiarities of this form. The cheek is smooth. In B.
olmstedi it is scaled, though in badly preserved specimens they are occa-
sionally rubbed off.
Many specimens from tributaries of the Ohio, i. e. the Kiskiminitas and
Miami.
BoOLEOSOMA AESOPUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
The dorsal line descends regularly from the base of the first dorsal fin
to between the orbits, and then curves more abruptly to the mouth.
Mouth terminal; eye four times in head, once in advance of its front rim.
The dorsal line descends from the first dorsal fin, to a somewhat con-
tracted caudal peduncle. Dorsal fins much elevated, VII-14. Pectorals
a little elongate, not reaching vent, but little exceeding the very moderate
ventrals. A. 0.-10. Scales 5—47—8. Color light brown with six small
dark dorsal spots, and ten similar small spots on the lateralline. A black
bar round muzzle, and one below eye.
_ Lines
MotalWlem oth ape aeons < alse y coneees oli gece uch eee 26.6
Ost tails jesus a nner oese einen Paar Siete Ge amie seamen aws 4.3
Of pectoral tie selva Bereta y brayel ais sees dicks A cieet gee SIRS 5.2
Depthiathinsts dorsaleee ese aneeoner eer ee reece 4.6
JACEE IN AIDC ea voles en conts eseeps soa aie estcie carey te asus pola (s- rene nee eeetene 3.4
Oficaudallpedunclewsa.2 ak oe cue desecrate ae 2.3
The form of this fish is rather that of a Poecilichthys, while the absence
of spinous anal ray is peculiar to the present species. From the number
of rays, 10, in the anal, it is probable that the missing spinous ray is re-
presented by the first cartilaginous ray, and is not wanting. In general
it is so near to the B. olmstedi, as not to be removed from the genus.
Found in the Loyalsoc Creek, in the Allegheny region, in Lycoming co.,
Penna., by Aubrey H. Smith, of Philada.
Hyostoma, Agass.
Cope, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phil., 1868, 214.
HyosToMA CYMATOGRAMMUM, Abbott.
From the head of the Cumberland, Tenn., and French Broad River, N.
Ca. I consider H. blennioperca, Cope, 1. ¢., as only a variation of this
species.
, Hyostoma stmoTERuM, Cope.
Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phil:, 1868, 215.
From a tributary of the Clinch River, Tenn.
Jan. 7, 1870.) Pal [Cope.
ON SOME REPTILIA OF THE CRETACEOUS FORMATION OF
THE UNITED STATES.
POLY DECTES, Cope.
This genus is indicated by one, perhaps more teeth, which resembles in
some respects those of the Crocodilian genus Thecachampsa. Crown
of dense concentric dentinal layers, with small pulp cavity. Enamel with
two prominent ridges separating inner from outer aspects, but approxi-
mated on the inner face, which thus included, is but one-third the cireum-
ference of the tooth. Ridges extending from tip to near base of crown,
with a sulcus along the inner side of each. Crown acuminate, a little
swollen at the base and above the middle. Section circular.
POLYDECTES BITURGIDUS, Cope.
Crown a slender cone slightly curved near the base. Middle portion
constricted, its surface marked with narrow obscure facets. Onthe inner
face, a shallow groove within each of the bounding sulci, the two separ-
ated by an indistinct groove. The enamel is smooth and worn, and leaves
no traces of other sculpture.
Lines.
eno theoi ero wiley een er! crater ey atresia Sica 30
MiameteratHbaseroted own e ane ee een are 10
oe INTC OU ee oe a meter aces ate fale 6.
ne DID OVE OMe ode crane ete NE ee sere Meee ent Beke oh 6.5
From the marl pits of James King, Sampson co., N. Ca. Discovered
by Prof. W. C. Kerr, Director of the Geological Survey of North Carolina.
LriopoN CONGROPS, Cope.
Spec. noy.
This species is indicated by a posterior cervical vertebra which presents
so many characters, as to render its exclusion from the present work
scarcely proper. In size it bears some relation to the Mosasaurus minor,
Gibbes, but is still smaller, and is separated at once by the round instead
of depressed articular faces.
The posterior articular face is the round one; the anterior is slightly
depressed; and opposite the diapophyses and neural canal slightly flat-
tened, so as to give a slightly trilateral superior outline to the cup. It is
not excavated above as in the species of Clidastes. The hypapophysis is
broken, but its base is unusually long and wide. The infero-anterioz
limb of the short diapophysis descends to the edge of the cup, consider-
ably below its middle. The space it encloses with its superior ridge
which extends into the anterior zygapophysis, is reticulate striate. The
whole surface below is minutely striate; the stria become coarse as it ap-
proaches the ball. The latter is surrounded by a groove, and its margin
projects acutely beyond the adjacent surface of the centrum. The latter
is much contracted behind the ball, and the faces below the diapophyses
are concave. Bases of neurapophysis striate. Neural arch broken away
above. Neural caudal with an epapophysial ridge.
2 (2 [Jan. 7,
Cope. ]
i Lines.
Mengethy centrumimyt ato alll eerste et yeti 20.8
a eo WO WANING Be ecdeue ae Testor ais aalenaw cats 18
us ee SS DVT OOS s odo udegceogoeuoodoa 5.8
WadilwbaseahiypapophiysiSeernteeese rr eee ere ceae 5.5
Dep thgoalleaeeee Regie tise antes earls tev aa ie ey NA oa 10.4
WET GUETA S So ois ee NUN NRA re a aeka lip Meier ih in ya od Ay bs heen a ena 11
NOME AGLI Op ee SIeM I Chae wor nae ea econ petro ee er eR Ns Ba a 12.6
Dey ole ON vars he acesareies, Om ORS leer ceohic! 8 Ae MSM EY NUL SPEDE Totnes 5 iil.
Length base neurapophysis....... Rea uh in salt Ce eh aan ara 12.
In profile the ball has a very slight obliquity looking upwards. From
the Rotten Limestone of Alabama, discovered by E. R. Showalter, M. D.
LiopON VALIDUS, Cope.
Macrosaurus validus, Cope., Proc. Boston, 1869. Nectoportheus validus,
Cope, Proc. A. N. 8., Phil., 1868, p. 181; Leidy, Cretac. Rep. 74-75, Tab.
Vil, 19-20, Ili 1-2.
This species is represented by two cervical and four dorsal vertebrae of
one individual, and a large dorsal of another, in the museum of the
Academy; the former associated with numerous fragments—including
part of an os quadratum, from L. T. Germain, Burlington co., N. J. Two
dorsal vertebrae of a large individual in the museum of Rutger’s College,
several vertebrae with broken quadrate and other bones and teeth in my
private collection, from near Barnesboro, Gloucester co., N. J., and a
number of vertebrae in the collection of Prof. Marsh, of Yale College,
further establish its character.
The quadrate bone is highly peculiar as above pointed out. The poste-
rior descending hook of the proximal extremity is quite short, and is
marked by an obtuse ridge which passes forwards and disappears imme-
diately above the pit alongside the meatus. What especially characterizes
this species and genus, and allies it to Clidastes, is the presence of a
strong longitudinal angular ridge, which extends from the usual external
angle of the proximal extremity, (which becomes here a process,) separ-
ating the outer aspect of the quadratum into two entirely distinct planes;
one that of the meatus, the other that of the ala.
Two separate opisthotic bones accompany these remains, which were
mixed up with those of the M. depressus. The vertebrae of the two spe-
_ cies were easily separated. _'The quadrate bone also was identified by one
accompanying the vertebrae of M. validus, in my own collection. I could
not so readily assign the opisthotics to the proper species. I have assigned
them here, because their glenoid cavities apply much more readily to the
quadrate bone of the L. validus than of the M. depressus. As compared
with the same bones of two Mosasaurus dekayi, they present three
marked characteristics. First, they are relatively much shorter; second,
the distal anterior process which fits within the squamosal is much more
prolonged; third, the inferior of the two faces to which the squamosal is
applied, is a continuation of the general inferior plane of the bone; in M.
1870. ] 2 is [Cope.
mitchillii it is a different plane, like a rabbet. It may be added, that the
glenoid cavity is narrower and deeper.
Four teeth from Barnesboro, indicate marked characters. They are
much compressed as in L. mitchillii, and the posterior cutting edge is
weli developed and forms a narrowed extremity of an elliptic section.
The anterior ridge less developed. In three crowns there is no trace of
the unequal division by these edges, as in Mosasaurus sp. One probably
from the premaxilla is more abruptly recurved than the others, with base
rather expanded inwards. The distinguishing character of these teeth,
which separates it from L. mitchillii, is the abundant longitudinal fluting,
and striation of the enamel. The grooves are deeper and shallower,
coarser at the base; the striz are fine, continuous and rugose, These are
not seen in L. mitchillii. The general form of the crown is short, broad
at the base and well curved posteriorly and inwards.
Lines.
Elevation of crown and pedestal.........-.......-.-.- 21
oe sod Tu teins CULO MN is ren aeee Par gt tenianl cpa teu ett eae 16
Antero-posterior diameter do. at base................. 12
The lateral element of the atlas is represented from the inner side
in Fig. No. 3. The anterior termination of the inferior ala, and the
articular face for the centrum, are as in M. mitchillii. The inner articu-
lar face is divided by a vertical depression; the posterior, or that meeting
the odontoid process, is quite prominent and distinct. The anterior
facet for the occipital condyle, is transversely divided by a depression.
The form of the cervical vertebrae is so much like that of the Mosasau-
rus dekayi, as to be readily taken for those of a smallexample of that spe-
cies. The first dorsals, or those without hypapophysis, are more elongate
than in the latter, and the body is more contracted, so that the ball pre-
sents a projecting rim all round. This is readily knocked off in the rough
handling the specimens usually receive. The cup is also proportionately
expanded. Posterior dorsals where the diapophyses issue half from the
centrum, have the latter slightly depressed; where the diapophysis comes
three-fourths from the body, the articular faces are a broad transverse
ovate, well expanded on the margins, below which the surface is slightly
striate. In the longer or anterior dorsals, the rudiment of zygosphen and
zygantrum is well marked.
Unfortunately, no caudal vertebrae of this species have been preserved,
—so that I do not know their form. The posterior dorsals are so much
more depressed than in Liodon laevis that future discovery may justify
the generic separation of the genus Nectoportheus which I originally ap-
plied to this animal.
For the largest measurements I refer to Dr. Leidy’s Essay on Creta-
ceous Reptiles, where the description of the large specimens of Macrosau-
rus laevis belong to the present species, and have served in part as my
types.
ay) ae
Cope. ] ong i4 [Jan. 7. 1870.
The following are the proportions of the smaller individual, from L. T.
Germain:
In. Lines.
Length of centrum cervical (with ball).............. 34
Depthwballvot samen tka Neuen oe soles sala eoestane 18.5
Width ‘“ i eee nm Ven eda coh raat a nes ONE AAS 21
ene thvantenriondorsalseeeermee eae reer eee 34
TWai clitnere tna ce eer ores Clare ented teins ten ins Maegan 24
Proximal width outer face quadratum.............. 28
Length quadratum to lower edge pit...... ........ 20
(oF Vopisthoticn(seeydescripilon)). sass e ee eee 3 4
SP Outer mano dO \aninncpericsiec mde soe sie ait 3 4
This was a large and powerful reptile, and probably more elongate in
proportion to its bulk than the Mosasaurus, well deserving the name
Macrosaurus, which Owen has applied to an ally.
From the upper Greensand Bed of the New Jersey Cretaceous.
THECACHAMPSA, Cope.
The species of this genus have long simple hypapophyses. In ‘‘Synop-
sis Extinct Batrachia and Reptilia N. A.,’’ p. 63, the question as to the
presence or absence of truncate or split hypapophyses as in Holops, ete.,
was left undecided.
TAPHROSPHYS MOLOPS, Cope.
In a specimen of this species which I found in place in the bottom of
the green sand bed at Hornerstown, N. J., the lateral intersternal bones
were distinctly seen in place. They present a rounded interior out-
line, and apply to an equal extent of the hyo- and hyposternal
bones. They extend but one-third the distance to the median longitudinal
suture, and are much as in the existing genus Podocnemis. The speci-
men observed measures 10.5 inches in width between the inguinal notches.
TAPHROSAURUS, Cope.
Suborder Streptosauria. Neural arch not codssified with the centrum,
each neurapophysis attached in a rounded pit of the body.
This genus is proposed for the Plesiosaurus lockwoodii, Cope, Trans.
Amer. Phil. Soc., 1869, 40. Were it a true Sauropterygian, I would con-
tinue to regard it as a Plesiosaurus, but it is, ] have little doubt, one of
the same type as Cimoliasaurus, which it resembles, except in the pecu-
liar attachment of the neural arch. From the cretaceous clays of New
Jersey, the No. 1 of Meek and Hayden.
Stated Meeting, January Tth, 1870.
Present, fifteen members.
Mr. Frauey, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Prof. Marsh, of Yale College, was introduced and took his
seat.
A letter of envoy was received from the Central Physical
275
Observatory of Russia, requesting Vols. I-IX Trans. A. P.5.,
to complete its series, and Proc. Nos. 15, 62,73, 74, 78, ed seq.,
which request the Secretaries were instructed to grant.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Bu-
reau des Longitudes (xii. 3,) (81); Venetian Institute of
Sciences (77), and Leeds Philosophical Society.
Donations for the Library were received from the Institu-
tions at Milan and Venice, 8. S. Zantedeschi, Alianelli, and
Ghirardini of Padua, Naples, and Milan, the Russian C. P.
Observatory; the Academy at Berlin; Geographical Society
at Paris; London Chemical, Leeds Philosophical, and Dublin
Royal Societies; Dr. Haughton; Gard. G. Hubbard, of Cam-
bridge, Mass.; the Boston N. H. Society; Franklin Institute;
College of Physicians of Philadelphia, and the Librarian of
Congress.
The Librarian reported the purchase of seven volumes of
Comptes Rendus, (49, 50, 01, 62; 54, 56, 66,) for the Library.
A letter was received announcing the decease of Prof. A.
J. Krdmann, Director of the Geological Survey of Sweden, at
Stockholm, Dec. 1, aged 55.
A communication was read by the Secretary entitled,
“Notices and Descriptions of Fossils from the Marshall
Group of the Western States; with Notes on Fossils from
other Formations; by Alexander Winchell, Director of the
Geological Survey of Michigan.” (See page 240.)
On motion of Prof. Cresson, the paper and section were re-
ferred to the Secretaries, with power to take order.
Prof. Cope communicated for the Proceedings a Paper on
some Htheostomine Perch from Tennessee, and for the Trans-
actions,
A Paper entitled, ‘‘On some Reptilia of the Cretaceous
Formation of the United States,” which, on motion of Dr.
Horn, was referred to a committee, consisting of Mr. Lesley,
Dr. Horn, and Dr. Rushenberger. Prof. Cope illustrated this
paper by offering for the examination of the members present,
unique specimens of a sauroid, found in the U. 8. Armory
grounds at Springfield, and described by Dr. Hitchcock, the
true structure of which has but recently been made out, and
explains the pecuhar 8-shaped terminal impression so often
216
discovered among the foot-tracks of the Connecticut River
red sandstone. (See pages 261-71.)
Mr. Chase made some remarks about Solar and Electric
Light, in reference to recent experiments to determine the me-
chanical equivalent of terrestrial light.
The report of the Judges and Clerks of the Annual Elec-
tion was then read, declaring the following persons duly
elected: .
President.
George B. Wood.
Vice Presidents.
John C. Cresson,
Isaac Lea,
Frederick Fraley.
Secretaries.
Charles B. Trego,
K. Otis Kendall,
John L. LeConte,
Jo 1k, lbesley,
Curators.
Franklin Peale,
Khas Durand,
Joseph Carson.
Treasurer.
Charles B. Trego.
Counsellors.
Alfred L. Elwyn,
John Bell,
Benjamin H. Coates,
Benjamin V. Marsh.
211
Pending nominations Nos. 648 to 648 and new nominations
649, 650 were read.
Mr. Lesley was nominated for Librarian by Prof. Cresson,
and the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, January 21, 1870.
Present, seventeen members.
Pror. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Dr. Anderson, of Haverford, was introduced and took his
seat.
A letter of acknowledgment was received from the Russian
Observatory (78, 79, 80.)
‘A letter from M. Byline, one of the editors of the Rare
des Cours Scfnntaeaicy No. 17, rue de’l’école de Médicine,
requesting the Proceedings, was read, and the Secretaries di-
rected to place the Review on the list of correspondents.
Donations for the Library were received from M. Zante-
deschi, the Paris Geographical, and London Astronomical and
Meteorological Societies, the Montreal Natural History 5o-
ciety, New York Lyceum, Philadelphia Journal of Medicine,
and Numismatic Society, Mr. Stephen Colwell and Dr. Lea,
the Smithsonian Institution, Dr. Hayden and Prof. Kirkwood.
The Committte to which was referred the Paper of Prof.
Cope, for insertion at page 122 of the memoir now passing
through the press, reported, recommending its publication and
insertion at the place designated, and that so much of the
plate accompanying it as illustrates Megadactylus polyzelus,
be engraved and printed as an additional plate of the memoir.
On motion, the recommendation of the Committee was adopted
and the publication ordered.
Mr. Lesley referred to the accounts in the newspapers of the
special violence of the late tornado at Cave City in Kentucky,
and hoped that some accurate record would be made of the
exceptional phenomena alluded to therein.
Mr. Fraley added that a proposition had been made at the
A. P. $.—VOL. XI—7E .
278
recent meeting of the National Board of Trade in Richmond,
to obtain from Government an appropriation for a National
Telegraphic Storm Survey, and suggested the propriety of the
Society taking initiative steps to accomplish so desirable an
object.
Prof. Cope exhibited a molar tooth found in the Miocene of
New Jersey, with a characteristic development of tuberculous
processes on the crown. He exhibited fragments of the skele-
ton of a new species of tertiary whale found in N. Carolina;
and also some extraordinarily thin and flexible paper-like
plates of Itacolumite.
On motion of Mr. Fraley, Mr. Lesley was re-elected Librarian.
The Standing Committees were then individually nom1-
nated and elected as follows:
Finance—Mr. Fraley, Mr. J. F. James, Mr. Marsh.
Publication—Mr. Trego, Mr. EH. K. Price, Dr. Carson, Mr.
R. A. Tilghman, Mr. Lippincott.
Hali—Mr. Peale, Mr. S. W. Roberts, Gen. Tyndale.
Library——Dr. Bell, Dr. Coates, Mr. EH. K. Price, Rev. Dr.
Barnes, Rey. Dr. Krauth.
The reading of the list of surviving members was post-
poned on account of the lateness of the hour.
Pending nominations 643--648 were read, spoken to and
balloted for; and new nominations 649--655 were read.
On motion of Dr. Carson, it was
Resolved, That when Corrections, Improvements or Additions to Papers
(made subsequently to their presentation to the Society and the order for
their publication) involve a greater expense than has been estimated by
the Publication Committee, such corrections, improvements and altera-
tions be referred to the Society for approval.
The ballot boxes were then examined by the presiding offi-
cer, and the following persons were declared duly elected
members of the Society:
Prof. Oswald Seidensticker, of Philadelphia.
Mr. W. M. Tilghman, of Philadelphia.
Rey. HE. E. Hale, of Roxbury (Boston), Mass.
John Greenleaf Whittier, of Amesbury, Mass.
Mrs. Emma Seiler, of Philadelphia.
And the Society was adjourned.
219
Stated Meeting, February 4th, 1870.
Present, ten members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. W.
M. Tilghman, dated Philadelphia, 1114 Girard street, Jan.
25, and Mrs. Emma Seiler, dated Philadelphia, Feb. 1, 1870.
Letters acknowledging the receipt of Proc. No. 82, were re-
ceived from the Massachusetts, Rhode Island, New Jersey,
and Georgia Historical Societies, and from the Peabody In-
stitute in Baltimore.
The request of the Georgia Historical Society for a com-
plete set of Proceedings A. P. S. was granted.
A letter was received from Prof. Charles E. Anthon, of the
College of New York City, accompanying a donation for the
Library of 44 numbers of the New York Numismatic Society
Journal.
Donations for the Library were also received from the Rus-
sian Geographical, and Paris Ethnological Societies; Dublin
Observatory; Boston N. H. Society ; Amer. Antiquar. Society ;
Amer. Jour. S. and A.; Philadelphia Academy N.S.; Medical
News and Library; Maj..Gen. Humphreys, and the Chicago
College of Pharmacy.
The death of Horace Binney, Junr., at Philadelphia, on the
3d inst., aged 61 years, was announced by Mr. Fraley. On
motion of Prof. Kendall, Chas. J. Stillé, Esq., Provost of the
University, was appointed to prepare an Obituary notice of
the deceased.
The extraordinary mildness of the Winter was illustrated
by a fact communicated to the Secretary by Mr. Hector Orr,
who watched carefully for two minutes the evolutions of a bat
about the corners of Spruce and Third streets. Other mem-
bers present gave similar illustrations; as for example, ex-
panded blossoms gathered January 380th, in the open air:
peach trees in blossom at Lock Haven, Pa., &c.
Mr. Chase communicated additional edncHons from a study
of the rain fall tables of the Philadelphia Hospital. (See p. 311)
280
Dr. Brinton introduced to the attention of the Society a val-
uable contribution to the study of the Choctaw language, in
the form of a Grammar prepared by the venerable Missionary
Byington, recently deceased. His long and zealous labors
have resulted in the publication of a list of more than 75
works, including the Bible, in the Choctaw language. After
four revisions of his Grammar, he was at his death engaged
upon a fifth.
This manuscript, the fruit of 40 years’ labor, has been for-
warded to Dr. Brinton by Mr. Dana, Mr. Byington’s son-in-
law, and consists of portions of these five revisions, interlined,
and somewhat confused in the order of its subjects, but
thrown into two principal divisions, the first of which, on the
Orthography of the language, is written out; while the other,
on the Parts of Speech, will need to be carefully edited. Mrs.
Byington and the other heirs, present it to the Society on con-
dition that a committee be appointed to edit it, within a rea-
sonable time. Mr. Folsom, a Choctaw gentleman, will soon
be in Philadelphia, on a commission to publish the Laws of
the Indian Government, and has promised his aid in proof-
reading. The Grammar will probably make about 40 pages,
8vo., and require a few new types, obtainable at small ex-
pense. The Grammar will be of practical use in developing
the civilization of the Tribes, as the language is extremely
difficult. It has, moreover, peculiar claims to scientific at-
tention; for the Choctaw, Creek and Chickasaw are affiliated
dialects, spoken, at the time of the arrival of Europeans, by a
people spread over a great part of the United States. There
is no man now living capable of writing, or likely to attempt
the construction of a Grammar of either of them.
A committee consisting of Dr. Brinton, Mr. Lesley, and
Prof. Haldeman, of Columbia, Pa., were appointed to consider
and report upon the subject. 3
On motion of the Secretary, the University of Indiana was
placed on the list of corresponding societies to receive a com-
plete set of the Proceedings, in answer to a request from Prof.
Kirkwood.
281
On motion it was
Resolved, That the Secretaries be instructed to print with the next No.
of the Proceedings, a list of the surviving members of the Society, and a
request to all the members to send their proper addresses, and photo-
graphs for the Album.
Pending nominations Nos. 649 to 655 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, February 18th, 1870.
Present, six members.
Pror. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from John G.
Whittier, dated Amesbury, 4th 2d mo., 1870.
A letter enclosing a photograph for the album was received
from Daniel Wilson, dated Toronto, Univ. College, Canada,
eb 851870:
A letter acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings No. 82,
was received from the Hssex Institute, in Salem, Mass.
Donations for the Library were received from the Nicolai
Hauptsternwarte at St. Petersburg; the Norwegian Univer-
sity at Christiania; the Society at Throntheim; the Austrian
Academy and Geological Institute; the Gérlitz Society; the
Holland Academy and Natural History Society, and M. Hock;
Sig. Lombardini; the new Geological Committee of Italy, at
Florence; the Society of Physical and Natural Sciences at
Bordeaux; Paris Geographical Society; London Astronom-
ical Society and Society of Arts; Essex Institute; Dr. B. A.
Gould; Dr. S. A. Green, of Boston; Mr. H. A. Stone, of Provi-
dence; the Franklin Institute and School of Design for
Women, in Philade!phia; Col. W. W. H. Davis; the Ameri-
282
can Pharmaceutical Association ; the Hon. Secretary of War
of the United States; the U.S. Observatory, and the Chicago
Academy of Sciences.
For the Cabinet was received a medal of bronze from the
Batavian Society of Experimental Science, at Rotterdam, with
the design:
Truth, erect, leaning on a Thyrsus, wrapped around the staff of which
is the legend RERUM MAGISTRA: in her right hand, an anchor, pen-
dant; before her, a tripod and flame; behind her, an altar supporting a
pair of scales, and on its face the coat-of-arms of the Society; over her the
legend, CERTOS FERET EXPERIENTIA FRUCTUS; on the reverse, a ser-
pent with its tail in its mouth; outside of it, the circular legend in
MEMORIAM STEPHANI HOOGENDIJK FUNDATORIS MDCCLXIX—MDCCCLXIX; *
inside of it, the legend, sOCIETAS PHILOSOPHIA EXPERIMENTALIS BA-
TAVA ROTERODAMI CENTESIMUM NATALEM CELEBRANS.
Mr. Price remarked upon the uncommonly mild weather,
and reported a crowd of persons in Chestnut above 10th street,
about 24 P. M., collected to watch the flight of a bat, after
which it remained clinging to a wall. During the hour pre-
vious to the meeting, a thunder storm passed over the city,
and two houses were struck by the lightning.
Prof. Cope communicated descriptions of new cretaceous
fossils from North Carolina, &. (See p. 284.)
The minutes of the last meeting of the Board and Council
were read.
Pending nominations Nos. 649—653 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, March 4, 1870.
Present, eleven members.
Dr. Woop, President, in the Chair.
Prof. Seidensticker was introduced and took his seat.
A letter accepting membership was received from Charles
Darwin, dated Beckenham, Down, Kent, 8. E., Feb. 5th, 1870.
Letters of acknowledgment and of envoi were received from
the Georgia Historical Society, Savannah, Feb. 15th, and T.
A. Wylie, Librarian of the Indiana State University, Bloom-
ington, Feb. 16, 1870.
A letter requesting exchanges was received from Dr. Jeli-
nez, Director of the Imperial Central Meteorological Institute,
Secretary of the Austrian Meteorological Society, [K. K. Cen-
tralanstalt fiir Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus,] which
was on motion referred to the Secretaries, with power to place
that Institute on the list of correspondents to receive the Pro-
ceedings.
Donations for the Library were received from the Austrian
Novara Expedition; the R. Prussian Academy; the Montreal,
and Boston Natural History Societies; the American Oriental
Society; Prof. J. D. Dana; the Philada. Academy Natural
Sciences; the Maryland and Georgia Historical Societies, and
the Adjutant General of Maryland.
The Committee to which was referred the acceptance of
the Choctaw Grammar, prepared by the late Cyrus Byington,
reported in favor of its publication by the Society, on the
terms proposed by the heirs of the deceased missionary.
The President, Dr. Wood, made a communication on the
subject of the Indian skeleton found upon his cranberry lands
in Southern New Jersey.
He particularly called attention to the characters of the
cranium, the separate bones of which had been skillfully put
together by Prof. Leidy. The most striking peculiarity was
the extraordinary breadth of the cranium, which exceeded
that of most Huropean heads; and altogether the size of the
cranium was much greater than that of the head of the pres-
ent race of Indians. The cranium was compressed behind;
and the frontal bones had apparently been artificially some-
what flattened. Altogether, the head was very different from
that of the ordinary Indians, and probably belonged to a race
which had preceded that found here originally by Europeans.
From the apppearance of the skeleton, it was probably more
than 500 years old, perhaps 1,000. It was more changed than
that of the Mastodon recently discovered in the same neigh-
borhood, which, as Dr. Wood had been informed, was about
four feet below the surface.
284
A communication intended for the Proceedings, was re-
ceived from Prof. Kirkwood, of Indiana University, Bloom-
ington, Ind., entitled ‘‘On Certain Meteoric Rings.” (p. 299.)
A communication was made by Prof. Cope, “On Adocus,
a genus of Cretaceous Emydidee.” (See p. 295.)
A verbal communication was made by Mr. Chase, on the
subject of the Tides. After referring to the diametrically
opposite conclusions expressed by Astronomer Royal Airy,
and Prof. Challis, respecting the theoretical position of the
tidal ellipsoid, and the claim of each, that his views coincide
with those of Newton and La Place, Mr. Chase suggested,
that a practical solution of the difficulty may perhaps be found
by adopting the intermediate position, analogous to that of the -
barometic spheroid.
A communication intended for the Proceedings was pre-
sented by Dr. Brinton, entitled, ‘Contributions to a Gram-
mar of the Muskokee Language.” (See p. 301.)
Pending nominations Nos. 649 to 655 were iead and new
nomination No, 656. And the Society was adjourned.
VERBAL COMMUNICATION BY E. D. COPE, AT MEETING OF
THE A. PHIL. SOC., FEB. 18, 1870.
Prof. Cope made some observations on the extent of the order Pytho-
nomorpha as exhibited im cretaceous rocks of the United States. He
stated that he was acquainted with twenty-seven species of the group,
and that but three were enumerated in the last work on the subject. He
defined two new species of Mosasaurus from New Jersey. One of medium
size, was from the lower bed in Monmouth Co.; it had round articular
vertebral faces, and a peculiar cariniform angle from the pit on the out-
side of the os quadratum. It was named Mosasaurus fulciatus. Another
and larger species was described under the name of Mosasaurus oarthrus,
as of about the proportions of the M. giganteus of Meestricht, but with
depressed vertical centra like those of the M. depressus. The quadrate
bone differed from that of M. depressus and resembled that of M. dekayi.
From Cook’s middle marl bed (Cretaceous) of New Jersey.
He also alluded to the occurrence of the Rhinoceros, Dugons, etc., in
certain beds in New Jersey, as indicative of the existence of Indian types
at one time in this region. He added the genus Sus, at present unknown
in the New World, but characteristic of the Palzotropical region. He
said his knowledge of its existence depended on an imperfect posterior
inferior molar, found near Squankum by Dr. Samuel Lockwood. He
named the species Sus vagrans, and said it was near the size of the do-
mestic hog.
Rae
Cope.] 280 [March 4, 1870.
FOURTH CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTORY OF THE FAUNA
OF THE MIOCENE AND EOCENE PERIODS OF THE UNITED
STATES.
By E. D. CoPE.
ESCHRICHTIUS, Gray.
ESCHRICHTIUS POLYPORUS, Cope.
Species nova. ~
Character. Ramus mandibuli with coronoid process but little eleva-
ted ; form compressed with narrowed acute superior margin, which is
not flattened posteriorly. On its inner face a wide shallow groove, in
which the inner series of foramina lie. Foramina of outer series large,
numerous. Size large.
Description. This whale, from the form of the ramus mandibuli, is a
finner, and from the slightly developed coronoid process, allied to the
humpbacks. The coronoid, the anterior position of the dental foramen,
and the angular process, confirm these relationships. Whether it be a
Megaptera or Eschrichtius I am not prepared to state. Ear bullae of the
forms of both these genera occur in the strata in which the present
species was found, and future investigation must determine which are re-
ferable to the latter. Such a bulla of the form of and probably belonging
to, Megaptera, has been named Balaena mysticetotdes, by Emmons.
(North Carolina Geol. Survey Tab.)
The fragment which on the present species is based, is the proximal
two-fifths the left ramus mandibuli, with a considerable part of the con-
dyle. The direction of the shaft from a short distance anterior to the cor-
onoid process, is decurved. The inferior margin is slightly contracted be-
low the coronoid process and then for a short distance convex, and nar-
rowed into a ridge ; anteriorly it is most obtuse or convex transversely.
The inner face is plane at the coronoid process, the outer convex. An-
terior to this point the convexity is strong ; at the distal end of the frag-
ment, much less marked. .
The angular process has extended beyond the line of the condyle ; its
extremity is broken away. A wide groove separates it from the base of
the condyle on the inner face of the ramus. The surface of the condyle is
transverse to the plane of the ramus, and is strikingly elevated above the
portion of the ramus anterior to it, being as high as the tip of the coro-
noid process. A low knob projects on the inner face of the ramus beneath
its anterior part, and below the groove. The dental foramen is large, and
is overhung by the thin incurved superior margin of the ramus. Its an-
terior margin terminates just behind the posterior part of the base of the
coronoid process.
The pores of the inner series are small and numerous ; the last one is a
little anterior to the base of the coronoid process (34 lines). They are
situated in a wide shallow groove, which occupies a portion of the inner
face of the ramus below the upper edge. Their interspaces are not quite
equal; thus twenty lines separate two, and four are included in thirty-
A. P. §.—VOL. XI—8E.
Ae
Cope.] 286 [Mareh 4,
six lines. The foramina of the external series are more numerous than in
any of the other species from the Miocene of our Eastern States. Asin
others the last pairs are less spaced than the anterior. In a space ofsix
inches and twenty lines, there are six foramina, the third from behind
nine lines below the superior margin. Thirty-four lines separate the an-
terior pair ; twenty-two the posterior. The last foramen is about a half
an inch anterior to the plane of the last one of the inner side.
Feet. Lines.
Length of fragment.......... mie ceteetns cis witha se teuete at 42
Depth just behind coronoid...............-.-- 56
s¢ in front of coronoid........ en espr epee 66
‘¢ at fourth inner foramen........ See 62
Diameter ‘‘ oH SES aoa Perse Pe Se cas. Me
This ramus chiefly resembles that of Eschr. cephalus from Maryland.
It is less compressed, though crushed, and less attenuated on the upper
margin near coronoid process ; the coronoid process considerably smaller.
Outer series of pores more numerous and extending further back. Inner
in a marked groove, which is wanting in E. cephalus. Outer wall of
angular region more everted. Inferior wall of dental or mandibular canal
descending from margin of foramen in E. cephalus and ascending in E.
polyporus.
From the Miocene Marl of Edgecombe Co., North Carolina. Obtained
by the writer under the auspices of the North Carolina State Geological
Survey, under Prof. Wm. C. Kerr, Director.
Vertebree, which as to size and structure would accord with the present
species, are not uncommon in the same deposit ; their description is re-
served for a future occasion.
MESOTERAS, Cope.
Genus novum.
Character. Orbital process of frontal narrowed, exceedingly thick and
massive at the extremity. Posterior lumbars and anterior caudals with
short antero-posterior diameter. Premaxillary and maxillary bones de-
pressed, the latter thin, horizontal, narrow. Otic bulla compressed.
This genius is allied to Balaena in the form of its vertebrze, and to some
extent in that of its frontal bone. The flatness of the maxillary and pre-
maxillary is rather that of Balaenoptera. The extraordinary mass of the
superciliary portion of the frontal is peculiar to the species which forms
the type of the genus so far as known.
MESOTERAS KERRIANUS, Cope.
Species nova.
This species was discovered by Prof. Wm. C. Kerr, Director of the Geo-
logical Survey of North Carolina, in a bed of miocene marl, at a point
where it is cut by Quanky Creek, a tributary of the Roanoke river, in
Halifax county, North Carolina. <A portion of the cranium had been no-
ticed for some years projecting from the steep bank or wall of the small
canon of the creek, at about thirty feet below the surface of the ground.
1870.] 287 (Cope.
Prof. Kerr, with the aid of a number of men, dug from its bed and eleva-
ted to the surface of the ground a large fragment of the cranium, includ-
ing the greater part of the left maxillary and premaxillary bones, with a
large part of the frontal. A large fragment of the right ramus of the
mandible, an otic bulla, several lumbar and caudal vertebra, with several
broken ribs, were also obtained.
These remains indicate not only a species, but a genus new to science,
and the largest extinct Baleenoid yet discovered.
The principal mass includes from the posterior margin of the transverse
process of the frontal, to within four or five feet of the end of the muzzle.
The mass measures eleven feet six inches in length. The fragment of the
ramus mandibuli measures thirteen feet ; five feet are probably lost dis-
tally, and there is no trace of coronoid process at the point where it is
broken off proximally. The length of the restored cranium would not be
less than eighteen feet. This gives for the total length, estimating on the
basis of Megaptera, seventy-five to eighty feet.
The orbital process is nearly in line with the maxillary, probably in con-
sequence of pressure when lying in an oblique position. The whole cran-
ium has been injured from the same cause, and the matrix usually soft,
formed a solid investment of carbonate of lime from the carbonic acid
liberated during decomposition, which required several days’ labor to re-
move. The parietal, occipital, and other bones of the brain-case proper,
were not recovered.
Description. The upper surface of the muzzle is but little decurved an-
teriorily. A portion of its outer margin, at the posterior part, is pre-
served, so that its width is known. The maxillary forms a rather thin
lamina, and does not present any great median decurvature, as though the
vomer was not prominent below. Perhaps this peculiar flatness is partly
due to pressure, but the premazillary presents a similar character, which
is evidently normal. This element forms one margin of the mass, and the
question as to whether the exposed face were the outer of the right, or the
inner of the left bone, required some care for its solution. Anteriorly it
is three inches in depth, near the posterior extremity, two inches. The
greatest width near the middle, six inches. The marginnext the remain-
der of the mass, is rather the more elevated; the external somewhat
prominent and rounded. Beneath it a deep groove marks apparently the
exit of a foramen. A groove in the same line is seen at various points
throughout its length where exposed. This bone is thus much flatter
than in any of the Finner whales, and resembles more that of the right
whales. The outer face being nearly plane, it can scarcely be the vcme-
rine face, which is concave, especially so in Balena, for the accommoda-
tion of the cartilaginous axis. The foramina and grooves are equally
present in both these genera, on the external side; I therefore conclude
that the external side of the right premaxillary is the one exposed, ard
that the width of the muzzle includes the left premaxillary, and maxillary.
The suture between the latter is not distinct, owing to the presence of
longitudinal fractures. The width of the maxillary after the prcmaxillary
Cope.] 288 [March 4,
is deducted, is not great, and is intermediate between that seen in Bala-
ena and Megaptera. The right premaxillary may be traced for six feet
two inches. Behind it a portion of the superficies of the cranium slopes
towards the position formerly occupied as a blow hole.
The margin of the mazillary is horizontal, and rather thin. It becomes
thicker posteriorly where it has been crushed back on the lateral orbital
process of the frontal. Its acuminate extremity is seen lying on the
latter.
The orbital process of the frontal is remarkably massive, and might at
first be taken for the squamosal. Its posterior margin is free to within a
foot of the probable position of the blow holes. This fact, in connection
with its deep postero-inferior concavity in cross section, is conclusive as
to its relations. The form is not horizontally expanded as in Megaptera,
nor attenuated as in Balena, but has rather the proportions seen in Rein-
hardt’s figure of the young of Balena mysticetus. (Om Nordhvalen Pl.
III.) That is, it has subparallel anterior and posterior sides; the extremity
a little widened by the production backwards of the posterior portion.
The anterior portion also somewhat, though less, protuberant. The
whole extremity truncate and remarkably thickened. Thus it is nineteen
inches long, the anterior tuberosity seventeen inches deep, the posterior
twelve inches deep ; the inferior outline nearly straight. The orbital con-
cavity, which is continuous with the optic foramen, opens behind the pos-
terior tuberosity, and is defined exteriorly by the expanded posterior mar-
gin of the bone. Thus the great tuberosity which gives character to the
bone was above and in front of the eye. ,
The portion of the mandible preserved presents marked characters. The
inner face is slightly concave, or plane, the external strongly convex. The
inferior edge is narrowed, and the superior scarcely less so; the inner
face rounds a little to the former, and to a wide groove just below the lat-
ter. This groove is one inch wide near the middle of the ramus, and is
marked by a series of many small foramina. These are closer together in
the anterior, and regularly more widely spaced to the posterior portion.
Thus anteriorly they are 2.5 inches apart ; posteriorly four inches sepa-
rates them, and near the extremity of the series, six inches. I failed to
find any foramina on the external face of the ramus. It is difficult, how-
ever, to believe that they are totally absent; it may be that they
are confined to the anterior portion, which has not been preserved.
This peculiarity, if entirely established, marks the species as quite
distinct from any heretofore known from characters of the mandible.
The depth in this species, at the point where the foramina are four inches
apart, is fourteen inches.
There are some other pieces apparently belonging to the cranium, whose
exact positions I cannot now assign. One of these looks like a segment of
ramus of the lower jaw, but the convergence of the superior and inferior
outlines is too great. One face is plane-concave, the other convex flat-
tened, with oblique superior and inferior faces, the latter the widest.
Depth of plane, ten inches; do. exterior flattencd face, 7.75 inches. Depth
1870. ] 289 [Cope.
six inches from same point, 7.5 inches. The second uncertain fragment
is long and with parallel margins. The outer face is strongly convex ;
the inner, at one extremity concave, so that a section would be half a cres-
cent (the lower portion being lost). The inner face gradually becomes
convex, though not strongly so, and the long diameter is transverse, while
it is vertical at the anterior end. The former is seven inches ; the latter
eight inches. The fragment looks like the extremity of a premaxillary
bone, possibly a maxillary, but it is scarcely appropriate to the premaxil-
lary already described.
The periotic bones of the left side were preserved almost entire. The
bulla has the flat inferior face of the genus Balena, and the periotic pro-
cesses are exceedingly short, shorter even than those of the species of Bal-
zena (B. mysticetus and B. cisarctica). The external process is not longer
than the posterior, and is compressed and deeply grooved longitudinally
below. The posterior process is at right angles to the exterior, and as
broad as long. It bears a sublongitudinal ridge near the middle of its in-
ferior face ; anterior to it, separated by an interval a transverse ridge oc-
curs to which the edge of the thin lip of the bulla is attached. The an-
terior process contains the usual foramina, and is broader than long. The
superior face of these bones is quite rugose. The bulla is more flattened,
Z. €., has a shorter vertical diameter, than either that of Balena mystice-
tus or B. cisarctica. The circumference is not a sharp edge as in B. cis-
arctica, but is truncate and rugose, at the inner extremity most so. At
the external extremity the face gives way to a rounded edge. The infe-
rior face is coarsely impressed punctate, and has a curved depression inside
the anterior margin. The posterior margin is marked by the usual three
grooves with intervening enlargements. The general outline, viewed from
below is hexagonal, with the lengths of the sides as follows, beginning
with the longest; posterior, anterior, interior, postero and antero-exterior
equal, antero-interior very short. The bulla of B. cisarctica exhibit a
long posterior and long interior side, connected by an arched outline.
The vertebre are those of the genus Balena. The general form of the
centra of anterior lumbars and caudals, is abbreviated, especially the lat-
ter. The diapophyses of the former are thick at the base ; one of those
preserved may be a posterior dorsal, but the ends of the diapophyses are
not preserved. In a caudal with very short diapophyses, which are a little
nearer the basis of the chevrons than that of the neural arch, a small for-
amen penetrates the centrum from a point three inches above the base of
the diapophysis, and issues at a point 2.5 inches below it. The articular
faces are convex ; there is a small rugose centralarea, and an external an-
nular space with coarse concentric ridges.
Measurements.
Ft. Toa, Lin.
Length of fragment of O. maxillare to ex-
tremity which reposes on frontal........... 9 8
Width of same (with left premaxillary) at 42
INCHES MROMPCXELEMML Vee eee eile cle 16
Cope.] 290 [Mareh 4,
In. Lines.
Transverse diameter periotic bulla........... ; 5) 8.7
IL@maeminncbuolls 5 scooccsscsssacbdeodoss Say scnstae : 4 9.5
Nierticaleerasieiiee nhsitessvske Umea ee Be Gi neae eon 3 1.5
Length external periotic process............. : if 9.5
Me posterior ‘‘ Be Paisano : 2 2
Length centrum anterior lumbar No. 1........ 10.75
Vertical and transverse diameter do. each..... 12
Wadithineunalicanaley ett sete Fue ahah 5
Wene theca opliysisry criti prereset ae 17
Width do. at base..... sea reseaa eege ancy sslsysicuskateveens fi
G6) 66 06 TpOMCGNS, S66 00 ¢ Pate ucla Aas Hee j }
Length centrum lumbar No. 2............... 10.5
Both diameters of articular face............. : 18.
Whichiimemnalkcamalleymrise serene Saat re enone 5.5
‘¢ antero-posterior neural spine......... 5.
Length centrum of a caudal...... MHla clo aea 6.5
Diameter articular face, (vertical)........... : 14.
ae es (iransVverse)ma asec 14 6
se neural canal...... isto ey seu atest dates 1.5
ey IMtEL=CheVEOM OTOOVEC. =.) 15 elie O06 3
As compared with the described species, the characters of the Mesoteras
kerrianus are well marked. Thus the ear bone is totally different from
that of Eschrichtius cephalus and E. mysticetoides (Balana Emmons,
Leidy), and the mandibular ramus is not flattened above, as in E. priscus
and E.expansus. The paucity or absence of external foramina distinguish
it from the E. polyporus. Finally, E. leptocentrus presents generic char-
acters in its known cervical vertebree which will not probably be found in
the present whale. Though these vertebrae: of Mesoteras have not yet
been found, I anticipate that they will present more nearly the characters
of the genus Baleena, in accordance with the remainder of the structure.
Perhaps they will be like those of Palecetus of Seeley, and the two gen-
era may be found to be the same.
It has been known to geologists and others for some time, that a skele-
ton of some kind had been exposed by the erosive action of the waters of
a creek in Eastern North Carolina, and was to be seen lying in its bed
diagonally across it. The writer recently visited the spot, and found the
stream to be some fifty feet in width, containing water of from three to
five feet in depth. The direction and extent of the skeleton was indicated
by the proprietor, Jesse W. Parker, since the water concealed it from
view. It would appear to extend very nearly across the creek, and have
a length of 60 to 70 feet. Some of the vertebrae could be distinguished by
feeling with a rod. When the waters are low towards the end of the sum-
mer, its length is exposed, and it can be used as a foot log by the traveller.
On the bank near this skeleton were found portions of the skeleton of an
adult firmer whale of some thirty feet in length.
Prof. Kerr, Director of the survey, succeeded in obtaining one or two of
€
1870. ] 29 iL [Cope.
the lumbosacral vertebree of the specimen which is above noticed. These
were submitted to me at Raleigh. They belong to a right whale, or one
nearer to Balena than Balaenoptera. They are in fact identical in charac-
ter with those of the species Mesoteras kerrianus, and belong probably to
it. The following is a description of one of them from the posterior dor-
sal or anterior lumbar region.
Median line below, obtusely keeled, sides a little concave. Articular
face with a large median elevated area, which is coarsely obsoletely ru-
gose ; the marginal area exhibits fine concentric rugosities.
Measurements.
Inches
ILenweRIN COMAGLINs do55coosonGoceaedacc PERO RAO ooo 7
BY Asis OMadiapopliysiSe sae ives sleeker ters 4.5
Depth a COUNT Ue Divi eek ma ey als Pere Mae ee atc 3.20
ae AIR AOWUAKE WCD, oagcvccogodosoddcar nor Bee j 8.5
Width a Ce ee OM OO Ors eee Daa ; 9.
Thickness of epiphysis............... Asters ies Naor 70
The epiphyses are free and the individual is young.
A vertebra of similar character to, and rather larger size than any here
described, was obtained by the writer near Nahumta, Wayne Co., N. Ca.
The species would not appear to be rare.
This whale is named for Prof. Wm. C. Kerr, of Raleigh, who has vita-
lized the State survey, and is prosecuting it with advantage to all branches
of science that lie within its scope.
SUS, Limaens.
“e Sus ?sp.
Represented by the crown of an inferior posterior molar of an animal
not fully grown. Both extremities are broken off, but sufficient remains
to indicate the genus of the animal beyond doubt.
The two principal lateral and adjacent median tubercles of the tooth
present the characters of the same parts in the Sus scropha, and indicate
a species of about the same size. <A section of each lateral lobe is there-
fore slightly trifoliate, and the two inner ridges, whose sections constitute
the lobes, are transversely deeply wrinkled. The margins of the broader
outer lobes are also wrinkled, the wrinkles sometimes continued into shal-
low grooves on the outer face of the same. The convex outer face is
marked by delicate concentric linear grooves, the apex of the lobe being
the centre of the ares. The anterior and posterior median tubercles are
much the same as in S. seropha; in the former the crown is nearly three
times as wide as long, as in S. seropha. The posterior inedian tubercle
is sub-trilobed, and a little broader than long; surfaces of both tubercles
rugose plicate. A pair of shallow longitudinal grooves on. the outer face
of each lateral tubercle.
The inferior face of the crown presents a not uncommon peculiarty in
the isolation and deep conic form of the prolongations of the pulp cavity,
which correspond to the tubercles. In another specimen which I refer
to the S. scropha, these prolongations are connected by grooves which
enclose diamond-shaped interspaces.
Cope.] oy [Mareh
M. M.
Width crown at base, 0.0163
‘¢ between apices lateral tubercles, 007
Length, including median tubercles, 014
a anterior median tubercle, 003
Width os us a .008
This is one of the interesting discoveries made by Dr. Lockwood, of
Keyport, N. J., in the fossiliferous strata of his region. He obtained it
of a farmer, with a number of other fossils of the upper marl bed in Mon-
mouth Co., N. J. The farmer used the marl] of that stratum as manure,
and probably found the present specimen while digging it. The color of
the tooth is black like that of other Miocene and Eocene fossils of that
region, and though on application to a flame it shows the existence of a
small amount of carbonaceous organic matter, it does not give out the
odor perceived in the post-tertiary bones of New Jersey, when burned.
Recently, my friend, Oliver N. Bryan, sent me from Stafford Co., Vir-
ginia, a similar posterior molar from the inferior series of a hog. On con-
tact with a flame it evolves such an odor of organic matter, and combus-
tion leaves such distinct traces of carbon, that I am unwilling to consider
it a fossil. It is stained of a strong red color, which does not penetrate
far below the surface as does the black in the specimen above described.
Its posterior median tubercle is accompanied by a smaller tubercle on the
inner side; behind it an opposed pair of rudimental proportions follows,
and as the crown narrows to a sub-acute termination, a still lower median
tubercle finishes the series. The anterior extremity of the tooth is
broken away. In these unused crowns, the edges of the tubercles are
crenate, and the inner and median lobes and tubercles are coarsely plicate.
THINOTHERIUM, Cope.
Family Hippopotamide. Dentine thrown into transverse ridges on the
basal half of the second inferior incisor, otherwise probably as in Hexa-
protodon, or with three superior incisors at least.
This genus is indicated by a second inferior incisor of the right side.
It resembles that of the genus Hippopotamus, but differs in the annulate
character of the surface of the dentine of the proximal portion of the
fang. The worn exterior face near the extremity, indicates the friction
of the usual large second superior incisor, while a correspanding worn
surface on the opposite side of the extremity, indicates the presence of
the inner or third superior incisor characteristic of Hexaprotodon and not
found in Hippopotamus. The base of the fang exhibit the usual short pulp
cavity, and is compressed, not rounded, as in Hippopotamus and Choerop-
sis, as though there were an additional, or third inferior incisor also.
Apex of tooth narrowed obtuse.
Structure of dentine concentric.
THINOTHERIUM ANNULATUM, Cope.
Species nova.
Second inferior incisor slightly curved both outwards and upwards.
Section of basal half, a vertical oval; beyond the middle, at worn surfaces,
C
1870.] 293 [Cope.
quadrangular, with one angle upwards and the extero-inferior side con-
vex. This is occasioned by the presence of a third flattened side, besides
the two worn faces, at right angles with the interior worn face. It pre-
sents a short longitudinal groove, which may be abnormal. Extremity
narrowed, sub-round, obtuse. The direction of the outer worn surface is
outwards and backwards.
M. M.
Total length, 0.0543
Vertical diameter at base, .0117
Transverse ‘‘ ss 0075
eS ‘¢ near tip, 006
The color of the tooth is dark red, and it has not penetrated far into
the dentine. On application to a flame, a very faint odor of organic mat-
ter may be perceived, and a slight trace of carbon may be detected. The
surface is considerably worn, so that it cannot be determined whether
there was a coat of enamel originally or not. It was discovered in Staf-
ford Co., Virginia, at the same locality from which the molar of the hog
above deseribed, was procured. They have both been rolled, and are
both of a red color.
The Thinotherium annulatum was a small Hippopotamus-like animal,
about the size of the wild boar. As it was no doubt like its recent allies,
a shore-and-swamp-loving beast, I name it from 6: the shore, or Oys¢ov,
a wild animal.
The discovery of the Hippopotamus in America, by O. N. Bryan, and
the hog, by Dr. Lockwood, is of considerable interest. Neither types
have been heretofore known in either extinct or recent condition (except
as introduced), and are, therefore, not included in Leidy’s recent Synopsis
of Fossil Mammalia of North America, in the Journal Acad. Natl.
Sciences, Phila. De Castro, in an essay entitled, ‘‘ De la Existencia de
la grandes Mammiferos Fossiles en la Isla de Cuba,’’ Havana, 1865, states
that remains of Hippopotamus occur in the Island of Cuba, referring
them to an extinct species. Leidy remarks on this,* that they are proba-
bly recent, and cites examples of specimens used for making artificial
teeth by dentists, having been brought to him as fossils.
MYLIOBATIS, Cuvier.
MYLIOBATIS GLOTTOIDES, Cope.
Spee. nov.
Established on three specimens, one of which presents a series of eight
teeth very convex in longitudinal as well as transverse direction. On the
median line the teeth are suddenly swollen, forming together a broad obtuse
median ridge. The lateral portions on either side are each slightly convex,
and thin off to a margin which embraces but a single series of lateral teeth.
Each transverse tooth is nearly straight, the extremity slightly and ab-
ruptly curved backwards. Each tooth is both wider (longer) and deep-
er than in most of the described species. The worn surface forms a sub-
triangular concavity.
* Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., 1863, 179.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—9E
o
Cope.) 294 [March 4,
Lines.
Length of eight teeth over convexity.................- 41
sf OE SOULE HOON sancbdcccsgnega0d00000900000 6.3
ID Siouid OE WARCCIMIFING OL ClOso.0500000c400090500000000000 a
Width of same tooth (over convexity)................. 28
Laminar face obtusely angulate on the median line below.
This species is thick-toothed as in M. pachyodon and M. holmesii, but
they are not so clearly three-ribbed in section as this one. The M. rugosus
is somewhat similar, but is much wider, with more curvature of teeth
and double row of laterals.
From the marl, pits of the Freehold and Squankum Company, in the
Eocene bed at Farmingdale, Monmouth Co. N. J.
MYLIOBATIS RECTIDENS, Cope.
Represented by seven consecutive teeth extending from the concave trit-
urating surface, to the end of the series. There are two lateral series of
teeth on each side, of which several of those of the inner series at least are
wider than long. Those of the median series are entirely plane, and with
perfectly straight transverse sutures. The series is very slightly convex in
both directions.
Lines
DSR Oi SVE WESUM, 5 conc500ce50000000 000000059000 ° 38
Width ofeach median tooth: 2.3.2.2 5. ..-sesss- eo: 15
Depthvorvasodentimal layer ctr) \ eerie rine 4
This species is to be compared with the M. vicomicanus m. In it there
are twice as many (12) teeth in a series of the same length and width as
the present ; the median series are recurved at the extremities ; in this
one straight.
This species is from Harrisonville, N. J., from marl excavations which
are chiefly in the upper bed of Cretaceous green sand. The rusty color of
the specimen indicates that it came from the upper part of the excavation,
and therefore probably from a miocene stratum which Prof. Cook shows
frequently overlies the green sand proper.
COELORHY NCHUS, Ag.
COELORHYNCHUS ACUS, Cope.
Established on a portion of the muzzle of a fish similar in some re-
spects to the C. rectus, Ag., but smaller than it and much less than the
C. ornatus, Leidy, from the same locality. The fragment presents a single
median cavity, and externally nineteen ridges separated by narrow grooves ;
in the C. ornatus there are from thirty to forty in the same portion of the
length. Diameter 1.3 lines. From the Eocene Marl of Farmingdale,
Monmouth Co. N. J. I am indebted to A. J. Smith, Superintendent of the
pits, for this and other valuable specimens.
1870.] 298 [Cope.
ON ADOCUS, A GENUS OF CRETACEOUS EMYDID&.
By E. D. Core.
ADOCUS, Cope.
Proceed. Acad. Natl. Sciences, Phila., 1868, 235.
Character. Anterior and posterior lobes of the plastron abbreviated,
narrowed, and not emarginate. Eight paired sternal bones ; twelve ster-
nal scuta, the humerals extending anteriorly, the pectorals and gulars both
small. A series of plates—‘‘intermaginals’’ within the marginals, on the
sternal bridge. Rib heads, i. e. the capitula, wanting in the species whose
costals have been examined.
This genus was originally described with Hmys beatus Leidy from the
Cretaceous Green Sand of New Jersey as the type, and its primary char-
acter was regarded as the absence of the costal capitula. In the synopsis
of extinct reptilia of New Jersey, published in Prof. Cook’s Geological
Survey of that State, five species were numerated, as follows ; A. petresus,
Cope, 4. firmus, Leidy, A. beatus, Leidy, A. pravus, Leidy and A. agi-
lis, Cope. The two species first enumerated having subsequently been
found to possess well developed costal capitula, I referred them to Emys,
in the ‘‘Synopsis of extinct Batrachia and Reptilia of North America,”’ p.
126. Myspecimens of A. agilis being at the time very imperfect, it was
not described.
In the present essay I propose to point out its characters, as well as
those of the other species of the genus. Two species are added, the
whole number being then five. One of these is from the Cretaceous de-
posits of Wyoming, the others from New Jersey.
The plastron in this genus presents marked peculiarity. The great re-
duction of the anterior and posterior lobes gives it a form pointing to
that of Staurotypus. The anal scuta are of large size, and the humero-
abdominal scutal suture (in A. agilis) extends across just in advance of the
inguinal notch. The abdominal is the widest pair of scuta, in conse-
quence of the relatively great longitudinal extent of the bridge ; their an-
terior outline falls a little behind the axillary notch. The humeral scuta
have a remarkable anterior extent, so much so as to lead to the suspicion
that they were confluent with the pectorals, or perhaps wanting. In the
case of A. pectorulis, having only the hyosternal bones, I was induced to
think that they were really the pectorals, and that the abdominals were
the true humerals, as is seen in the genus Pleurosternum ; the posterior
position of the humerals in the latter being owing to the existence of an
additional pair of sternal bones. An examination of that structure in A.
agilis and A. wyomingensis, dispels this view, and shows that the true pec-
torals are much shortened, and have an anterior position, and that the
gulars are also small. and narrowed, the genus approaching Chelydra in
these respects.
The lateral series of abdominal marginals is seen in the existing genera
Macrochelys and Dermatemys. The affinity of Adocus is to the latter,
but the entire acuminate free lobes of the plastron, distinguish it well.
The lateral marginal scuta in A. agits, A. wyomingensisand A. pectoralis
Cope. ] 296 [Mareh 4,
are very distinct in our specimens, while I have seen it in only one of the
two or three in which the bridge is preserved in A. keatus. In A. pravus
I have not seen it, but the contracted entire xiphisternal elements pointed
out by Leidy are quite like those of A. beatus, to which it is indeed very
nearly allied.
The narrowed form of the posterior lobe is best seen in the specimen of
A. wyomingensis described by Leidy, and in aspecimen of A. beatus no-
ticed by me in Synopsis Batr. Rept. N. A. p. 129. I there state that it is
emarginate, an error consequent on a certain assymetry of the specimen,
and its fractured condition. In A. agilis it is apparently rather Letter
developed.
The form of the anterior lobe is easily seen to be narrowly reference to
my figure of A. pectoralis (Syn. Bat. Rept. N. A.) Tab. VII fig. 1), or
Leidy’s figure of A. pravus Cretac. Rept. N. Am. XIX fig. 1. Inthe
nearly perfect specimen of A. vyomingensis this portion is broken away,
but Leidy describes this portion of a specimen, which has the character of
the above species.
The species differ much in the relative stoutness of their shells, especial-
ly of the plastron. A pectoralis is the stoutest as well as the smallest ;
A. pravus and A. agilis are the thinnest, the latter the largest of the
genus. No portions can be certainly ascribed to the crania of this genus.
In specimens of A. agilis, A. pravus, and A. beatus, the longitudinal
median suture of the plastron presents much irregularity from the union
of the alternating bones across the point of meeting of four, by an oblique
portion of the suture.
Thickness of hyosternals less than four times in the transverse extent of
same ; intermarginals shorter; mesosternal prolonged posteriorly; smooth
below; small. A. PECTORALIS.
Thickness of hyosternals one-eighth transverse extent of same; above
with slightly impressed dots or delicate grooves, closely placed ; larger,
vertebral bones wider, A. BEATUS.
Sternum thick ; vertebral bones narrower ; carapace more coarsely lon-
gitudinally impressed grooved ; mesosternal deeply received ; lateral in-
termarginals elongate. A. VYOMINGENSIS.
Plastron quite thin ; mesosternal deeply received into hyosternals.
A. PRAVUS.
Plastron quite thin ; mesosternal occupying an open concavity of the
hyosternals; surface everywhere delicately impressed punctate and
grooved ; intermarginal scuta very long and narrow. A. AGILIS.
ADOCUS PECTORALIS, Cope.
Pleurosternum pectorale, Cope. Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1868, 236 ;
Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. XIV, 1869, 130; Tab. VII, fig. 1.
Indicated by a pair of perfect hyosternal bones from the upper Creta-
eous marl bed near Medford, Burlington Co, N. J.
ADOCUS BEATUS, Leidy.
Emys beatus, Cretaceous Reptiles, N. Amer. p. 107 Tab. XVIII, fig.
1-3. <Adocus beatus, Cope, Proc. A. N.8., Phila., 1868, 2385. Geologi-
cal survey, N. Jersey, App. C. p. 734.
1870. ] 29 ( [Cope.
Not uncommon. It is considerably less stout than the preceding. The
edges of the posterior lobe of the plastron are thinned out by an submarg:-
nal groove. Asin other Emydoids there is a marked concavity for each
pubic bone. The suture between the hyo- and hyposternal bones is less
interlocking than in A. agilis, and less fine than in A. pectoralis. J have
suggested that it may have possessed a slight mobility in life. Its face is
longitudinally grooved in the hyposternal, and a corresponding convexity
of the face of the hyosternal fits it. Ina specimen from Medford, N. J.,
the posterior lobe is 5 inches 9 lin. long, and 5 inches, 8 lin. wide at the
inguinal notches. Hyosternal of nearly equal thickness ; medially 7 lines.
ADOCUS VYOMENGENSIS, Leidy.
Eimys vyomingensis, Leidy, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1869, p. 66.
Baptemys wyomingensis, Leidy, loc. cit., 1870, January.
Best known from an almost complete specimen consolidated by the con-
tained mass of mineral. There are three intermarginal bones, of which
the middle one is more elongate than the others. There is a weak carina
on some of the posterior vertebral bones. The posterior marginal bones
are not revolute. The costal bones are delicately grooved in the length of
the carapace. The anterior extremity of the anterior sternal lobe is nar-
rowed, prominent, and truncate. Length of the whole animal about two
feet.
Found near Ft. Bridger, Wyoming Territory, by Dr. Van Carter.
The genus Baptemys to which this species is referred by Leidy, appears
to be the same as Adocus.
ADOCUS PRAVUS, Leidy.
Hmys pravus, Leidy. Proc. Aca. Nat’l. Sci., Phila., 1856, 303. Creta-
ceous Rept. U. 8. 108. Adocus pravus, Cope. Synopsis Batr. Rept. N.
Am. 129.
This species is as yet known only from the original specimens, in the
collection of the Geological Survey of New Jersey. The plastron is thin-
ner than in three preceding, and the hyosternals embrace the mesosternum
extensively. This distinguishes the species from A. agilis where the me-
sos‘e nal emargination i much wider than deep. Width of an'erior lobe
of sternum at epi-hyosternal suture, four inches.
Upper bed of Cretaceous Green sand, New Jersey.
ADOCUS AGILIS, Cope.
Geological Survey of New Jersey, App. C. p. 734.
Represented chiefly by an almost complete plastron from the excava-
tions of the West Jersey Marl Company, in the upper bed of the upper
Cretaceous Green Sand of New Jersey.
This specimen belonged to an individual of larger size than any hereto-
fore referred to the genus, and one characteristically ornamented by a
peculiar sculpture.
The extremities of both lobes are broken off ; the margin of the poster-
ior is thinned out, and carries an acuteness of edge to the inguinal notch
where the margin is quite thick. The outline of the caudal scuta is very
convex anteriorly ; that of the femorals is gently convex towards the
) )
[Cope. 298 [March 4, 1870.
front. The suture between the hypo- and xiphisternals is nearly transverse
below ; on the upper face it sends a process into the byposternals for-
wards, which is acuminate; the hyposternals send a marginal process
backwards beyond the line of the median suture, which is squarely trun-
cate ; its outer edge is the margin of the bone. The impressions of con-
tact of the pubes are well marked; they are strongly incurved, and are
not very different from those seen in Cistudo. The bridge of the plas-
tron is preserved, and furnishes attachment for three marginal bones ; per-
haps fractions of others also. The suture between the abdominal and
humeral scuta is convex backwards, and unites with an inner angle of the
anterior of the intermarginal series of the bridge. There are three in the.
latter series, all longer than broad, but the middle one relatively much
narrower than the others, as it is six times longer than wide, with paral-
lel sides. That anterior to it is more hexagonal and wider, presenting an
angle inwards for union with the suture between the abdominal and
humeral scuta.
About half the mesosternal bone is preserved. It is a transverse dia-
mond with truncate extremities. Its posterior angle is therefore very
open, but is not rounded. No suture bounding either humeral or gular
scuta is visible on it; the anterior angle is broken away. The anterior
portion of the episternal bone preserved has a regular convex outline, and
is quite thin.
The sculpture of the inferior surface is a slight imitation of that seen
in some species of Trionyx. It is closely shallow-punctate, or like small
rain-drop impressions. These are irregularly distributed on the anterior
part of the plastron, and on the posterior lobe in obliquely decussating
series.
Measurements.
M. M.
Width of plastron at bridge, : é : 0.2879
Length between mesosternum and xiphisternum, 0.21
Width posterior lobe at inguinal notch, . 3 0.1835
ey mesosternum, : : : A 0.091
Length ve . : . : 0.0695
‘« _ hyosternum medially, é : 6 0.09
Thickness re a : é : 0.012
GC a at marginal suture, . : 0.007
Length abdominal suture, . 5 : 0.1068
fie femoral oe : ; : 0.087
Length median intermarginal suture, . : 0.0825
Width bp se ue : : 0.015
Estimated-length plastron, : : 3 0.45
Oe ‘« carapace, . 5 : . 0.56
This species, the largest of the genus, is found in the upper green sand
bed of the upper Cretaceous of New Jersey. The specimen from which
the above description was taken, was found by my friend I. C. Voorhees,
in the pits of the New Jersey Marl Company, and by ule permission of
the latter submitted to the writer.
20¢
March 4, 1870. ] 299 [Kirkwood,
ON THE PERIODS OF CERTAIN METEORIC RINGS.
By DANIEL KiRKWOOD.
I. Tur Mereors or APRIL 20TH.
In the Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 1632, Dr. Weiss called attention
to the fact that the orbit of the first comet of 1861 very nearly intersects
that of the earth, in longitude 210°; the point passed by the latter at the
epoch of the April meteoric shower. <A relation between the meteors and
the comet, similar to that recently detected between the November me-
teors and the comet of 1866, was thus suggested as probable. Is this hy-
pothesis in harmony with facts? and if not, are our present data sufficient
for determining with any reasonable probability, the true period of the
April meteors ?
DATES OF THE APRIL SHOWER.—Professor Newton selects the follow-
ing from Quetelet’s Catalogue as belonging to this period :*
il, B. C. 687, 4, A.D. 1098, °4 75, and 76
2. as 15, 5. G6 USB}
3. AV DE 5825 6. OS © sibeX0 3
PERIOD OF THE Frrst CoMET OF 1861.—The elements of this body
were computed by Oppolzer, who assigned it a period of 415 y.4. Now
while it is true that the interval from B. C.. 687 to A. D. 1803, is very
nearly equal to 6 periods of 415 years, the slightest examination will show
that this period does not harmonise with any of the intermediate dates.
This fact, then, without further discussion, seems fatal to the hypothesis
that the period of the meteors is nearly equal to that of the comet.
What is the probable period of the ring?—The showers of 1093—6 and
1122—8 at once suggest a period of from 26 to 30 years. The nodal pas-
sage of the densest portion of the ring at the former epoch may be placed
any where between 1093 and 1096, and that of the latter, in either 1122 or
1123. The entire interval from B. C. 687 to A. D. 1803 is 2490 years, or
88 periods of 28 Y.295 each ; and the known dates are all satisfied by the
following scheme :
18, Ge 687 to B. C. 15....672.000 years=24 periods of 18,000y each.
a Iles WO) ANs IDE BROOD 8S = Bil 28.429 “
Je ID5 Was es COCR Allo pil aleh © Cals eee Bsa) 6
** 1098.714 to ‘1122.148....28.429 < la 28.429 <
* 1122.143 to SOB, o Os iny 8S = Bel 96 Pasparoy) OS
These coincidences indicate a period of about 281} years, corresponding
to an ellipse whose major axis is 18.59. Hence the distance of the aphe-
lion is very nearly equal to the mean distance of Uranus. It will also be
observed that the time of revolution, which seems to have been somewhat
lengthened about the Christian era, was previously one-third of the period
of Uranus.
I
I
II. Tue Mereors or DEcEMBER 11TH—13TH.
In the catalogue of Quetelet we find the four following extraordinary
displays which belong undoubtedly to this period. Observations made in
*Silliman’s Journal for July, 1863.
¢ Herrick assigned a value of 27 years. See Silliman’s Journal for April, 1841, p. 365.
i
Kirkwood. ] 300 March 4, 1870.
England, 1862, indicate alsoa more than ordinary number of meteors at the
December epoch in that year.
1. A. C.901. ‘‘The whole hemisphere was filled with those meteors
called falling stars, the ninth of Dhu'lhajja, (288th year of the Hegira)
from midnight till morning, to the great surprise of the beholders, in
Egypt.’’—Modern part of the Universal History, 8vo. Vol. 2, p. 281. Lond.
1780. The date of this phenomenon corresponds to the December epoch,
A. D. 901.
930. ‘*‘Averse remarquable d’étoiles filantes en Chine.”’
2.
3. 1571. ‘¢Onvit a Zurich ‘du feu tomber du ciel’ ”’.
4, 1830, 1833, and 1886. The maximum seems to have occurred in 1883,
when as many as ten meteors were seen simultaneously. ‘‘ Dans la nuit du
11 au 12 décembre, on vit, 4 Parme une grande quantité d’étoiles filantes de
différentes grandeurs, qui se dirigeaient presque toutes avec une grande
vitesse vers le SSE. A 10 heures et +, entre les seules constellations du
Bélier et du Taureau, on en compta environ une dizaine.”’
5. (Doubtful.) 1861, 1862, and 1863. Maximum probably in 1862. The me-
teors at this return were far frombeing comparable in numbers with the
ancient displays. The shower, however, was distinctly observed. R. P.
Grey, Esq., of Manchester, England, says the period for December 10th—
12th was, in 1862, ‘‘exceedingly well defined.’’*
These dates indicate a period of about 294 years. Thus: :
901) to, 980025). 1 period of 29.000 years.
930 to 1571..... 22 periods of 29.136 years.
LoTAKCOUS33E 9 periods of 29.111 years.
1833 to 1862..... 1 period of 29.000 years. _
TI. Tse Mererors oF Octoser 15TH—21sr.
The showers of the following years (see Quetelet’s Catalogue). belong to
this epoch :
1. 288. ‘‘ Apparition en Chine.”’
2. 1436 and 1439. In each year a remarkable apparition was observed
in China.
3. 1748. (Quoted from Herrick, in Silliman’s Journal for April, 1841.)
“A clear night, great shooting of stars between 9 and 10 o’clock, all shot
from 8S. W. to N. E. [Qu. N. E. toS. W.?] One like a comet in the
meridian very large, and like fire, with a long broad train after it, which
lasted several minutes; after that was a train like a row of thick small
stars for twenty minutes together, which dipt N.”
4. 1798. <‘‘Brandés marque, &4 Goettingue, un grand nombre d’étoiles
filantes dans les observations simultanées qu’ il fait avec Benzenberg.”’
These dates indicate a period of about 275 years :
288 to 1439...... 42 periods of 27.405 years each.
1489 to 1743...... 11 se 27,636 ce
743 to 1798...... 2 te 27.500 ee
If these periods are correct, it isa remarkable coincidence that the aphe
lion distances of the metoric rings of April 18th—20th, October 15th—21st,
November 14th, and December 11th—13th, as well as those of the comets
18631, and 1867 I, are all nearly equal to the mean distance of Uranus.
*Silli nin’s Journal for May, 1863, p. 461.
March 4, 1870.] 301 [Brinton.
CONTRIBUTIONS TO A GRAMMAR OF THE MUSKOKEE LAN-
GUAGE.
By D. G. Brinton, M. D.
1. Historical notes on the language, its dialects, affinities, and litera-
ture.
2. The Alphabet.
3. Remarks on Buckner’s ‘‘ Maskwke Grammar.”’
4. The Muskokee verb.
.5. Specimen of the language.
I. HuisroricaL Nores.
The Muskokees, (este muskékee, or muskokvl/ke), or, as they were called
by the English settlers, the Creeks, when first known to Europeans, occu-
pied most of the territory now embraced in the states of Georgia, Ala-
bama, and Florida. They were divided into a number of towns, each goy-
erned by a civil ruler, the mekko or king, and a war-chief, and all subject
to one potentate, in whose family the supreme power was hereditary in
the female line.
Their geographical position brought them early into contact with the
white race, and many Muskokee names are preserved in the ancient Span-
ish narratives. Most of these, when given the Spanish pronunciation, are
still intelligible to the natives, and some of the town names are those of
towns (7. ¢., bands), still in existence. The narratives of De Soto’s expe-
dition (1539-40) contain many such, and the town of Tocobaga, mention-
ed by Hernando d’ Escalante Fontanedo,! who was wrecked on the coast of
Florida in 1552, is still found among the Creeks in the Indian territory.
The latter writer lived several years among the natives, and gives a word
or two of their language. One of these, se-le-tega, which he translates ‘‘run
to the look-out,’’ I repeated, with the Spanish pronunciation, to Mr. 8S.
W. Perryman, Speaker of the House of Warriors of the Creek Nation, an
educated and intelligent native, without informing him of its alleged
meaning. He at once translated it ‘‘run thither,’’ the look-out being
probably intimated by a gesture. Other Muskokee words given by Fon-
tanedo are : Otapali, properly oti palin, ten islands ; and Tampa, properly
timpe, near to it.
In the year 1570, Juan de la Vandera, a Spanish officer at the post of
St. Helena, north of the Savannah river, sent a detachment inland to
seek the town of Coosa, mentioned in such extravagant terms by the sur-
vivors of De Soto’s expedition. The report of this exploration has been
published by Mr. Buckingham Smith in his ‘‘Colleccion de Documentos
sobre la Florida.”’ It contains the names of a number of native villages.
These I read to Mr. Perryman, who promptly identified several of them,
as Ahoya, two-going ; Ara-uchi, a place where a tree named ara grows ;
Gwataro, properly coahtari, dry cane; Issa, deer; Satapo, properly satape,
persimmon tree ; Solameco, properly solv mekko, buzzard king ; Tasqui-
1 Memoir of Hernando d@’ Escalante Fontanedo. Translated by Buckingham Smith, Washington,
1854.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—10E
Brinton. J 302 [March 4,
qui, a town still in existence ; Coosa, the Cherokee name of the Creek na-
tion.
The missionary labors of the Spanish Jesuit and Dominican ecclesias-
tics were in all probability partially among the Creeks, especially those of
Father Juan Rogel.2 We know that vocabularies and grammars were
prepared by these devoted men, all remnants of which, so far as they re-
late to the Muskokee tongue, are lost.
I must not overlook one extremely valuable linguistic memorial brought
to light by Mr. Buckingham Smith. It isa letter written in the Apala-
che dialect of Florida in the year 1688, and republished by Mr. Smith in
facsimile. The word Apalache, in Choctaw Apvlvchi (v=a short), means
to help, helping, or helpers, and Apalachic’ ola, apvlvchokla, is allies, literal-
ly, helping people. An examination of the letter shows that it is in a dia-
lect closely akin to the modern Hitchitee, which is one of the branches of
the Muskokee.
The Muskokee has several dialects, the most important of which are
the Main Creek, or Muskokee proper, and the Hitchitee. These two dif-
fer so much that a native accustomed only to the one cannot understand
the other. The words are largely the same, and when they differ, usually
correspond in the number of their sylables. It is inaccent, terminations,
permutation of consonants, and change in quantity of the vowels, that
most of the variations seem to consist. Between these two, the Alibama
and Coésady dialects intervene, both partaking more closely of Hitchitee
than of Main Creek. The Seminole language of Florida is not distinct
from the Main Creek, as has sooften beenstated ; not more, Mr. Perryman
informs me, than the English of New England differs from that spoken in
the southern states. There are, however, Seminoles who speak Hitchitee,
and others Mikasuke, a dialect akin to Hitchitee.
The latter, in what it differs from Main Creek, approaches the Chika-
saw, which is a dialect of Choctaw? The difference between Hitchitee
and Choctaw is not greater than between Hitchitee and Muskokee. This
whole group of tongues, which has been denominated the CHamra-Mus-
KOKEE group, does not show greater diversity among its members, than
the Romanic group of Aryantongues. Thisaffinityis often of advantage
in studying their grammatical structure, as I shall have occasion to point
out, relying for the Choctaw on the unpublished ‘‘ Grammar of the Choc-
taw Language,’ of the late Rev. Cyrus Byington, which extremely valua-
ble work has been in my hands.
The Muskokee was probably reduced to writing the first of any of the
2The people among whom Roger [Rogel] and Villareal now [1566] began their mission, were evi-
dently a branch of the Creeks.”—Shea, Hist. of the Cath. Missions among the Ind. Tribes of the U.S., p.
57. The later labors of Father Rogel, on the ‘“‘ Rio Dulce,” were not among the Cherokees, as Shea
supposes, (p.59,) but still with the Creeks, as appears evident on examining Rogel’s original letters,
contained in the rare work of Alcazar, Chrono-historia de la Comp. de Jesus en la Provincia de Toledo,
I published a translation of these letters in The Historical Magazine, Novy., 1861, p. 327.
3 For specimens of Mikasuke and Hitchitee, see The Historical Magazine, Aug. 1866, p. 239. The
latter is also called Chelokee. The geographical names Okee-chobee, Okee finokee, etc., are Hitch-
itee, and not Main Creek.
4 The Choctaws and Chikasaws can readily understand each other.
1870. 303
[Brinton.
aboriginal tongues northof Mexico. In 1562, René Laudonniere, coasting
among the sea-islands between the mouths of the Savannah and St. John
rivers, collected a vocabulary, which unfortunately he did not think of
sufficient interest to insert in his narrative.> Father Rogel applied himself
with success both to the words and structure of the tongue,® but his man-
uscripts are not known to be in existence. Consequently, the earliest
specimens of Muskokee proper, except the few words given by Fontanedo,
date after the settlement of the colony of Georgia by the English. The
Moravian missionaries who settled at Ebenezer, near Savannah, attempted
to study the language in order to use it in converting the natives. Their
success was poor, though they collected a number of words. In writing
them they used the Greek alphabet, as better adapted-to express the na-
tive sounds. Hence we find in their reports such strangely familiar-look-
ing words, as tucza fire, properly tvtke, doce sun properly hasse, 6:4) _
UTAYE. shoe, ete.7 The use of the accents in their vocabularies is one ad_
vantage over the modern alphabet. I believe, however, no translation
was ever published in this character, and the missionaries soon became
discouraged in their proselytizing efforts.
- The first printed books in Muskokee, which I have been able to find, were
published in 1835. One of them is a translation of the Gospel of John, by
the Rev. John Davis ; the other a duodecimo tract of 35 pages, entitled :
A short sermon : also hymns, in the Muskokee or Creek language, by
Rey. John Fleming, missionary of the American Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions (Boston, 1835).
Since that date a number of religious and educational works have ap-
peared, the titles of some of which in my possession I add:
Nakeokv Setempohetv. Introduction to the shorter Catechism, trans-
lated into the Creek language by Rev. R. M. Loughridge, A. M., and Rev.
David Winslett. Second edition, revised andimproved. Presbyterian Board
of Publication, Phila., 1858, 12 mo., pp. 34.
Nakcokv es Kerretv Enhyteceskv. Muskokee or Creek First Reader,
by W. A. Robertson, A. M., and David Winslett. Second edition. New
York, 1867, 12 mo., p. 48.
Nakcoky esyvhiketv. Muskokee Hymns, collected and revised by Rev.
R. M. Loughridge, A. M., and Rev. David Winslett, interpreter. Fourth
edition, revised and enlarged by Rev. W.S. Robertson, New York, 1868,
12 mo., pp., 221.
Cesus oh uyares. I will go to Jesus. Translated into Creek by Thos.
Perryman and Mrs. A. E. W. Robertson, Tullahassee Mission, American
Tract Society, no date : 12 mo., pp., 23.
A Grammar of the Maskwkee or Creek Language, to which are prefixed
lessons in spelling, reading, and defining. By H. F. Buckner, a mission-
° He says: “mettant par escrit les termes et locutions indiénnes, jé pouvois entendre la plus
grande part de leur discours.” Hist. Notable de la Floride, p. 29.
6 He says: “Insix monthsI was able to speak and preach init.” Letter of 9th Dec., 1570. These
early students, to take them at their word, must have had more linguistic talent than our genera-
tion is favored with.
7 Urisperger, Nachrichen, Anno 1734.
Brinton. ] 304 [March 4,
ary under the patronage of the Domestic and Indian mission board of the
Southern Baptist Convention. Assisted by his interpreter, G. Herrod,
superintendent of public instruction, mecco Creek nation, etc. Published
by the Domestic and Indian mission board of the Southern Baptist Con-
vention, Marion, Alabama, 1860, 8 vo. pp. 139.
Messrs. Buckner and Herrod also published a translation of the Gospel
of John, and Mrs. Robertson, a translation of a tract on the Sabbath. The
Laws ofthe Nation and various other works have likewise appeared. The Na-
tion, I may here state, numbers about 14,000 souls, and about one-half of
the male population can read, soit isof considerable importance that the
structure of the language be ascertained.
Il. THE ALPHABET.
The need of a uniform alphabet for American tongues is nowhere more
vividly shown than in Muskokee. More than one-half of the limited lit-
erature I have above mentioned is unintelligible to educated natives on ac-
count of the discordant alphabets used. Not less than jive different ones
have been devised. That now generally adopted and certainly best adapt-
ed for practical utility to the Nation, is based upon the English sounds of
the letters. It was agreed to by many interpreters and chiefs at the Old
Agency, in 1858, and has been introduced in all printed works since, ex-
cept those of Messrs. Buckner and Herrod. It contains thirteen conso-
nants, and six vowels. The vowel sound of a in fate, the sound th, and the
consonants b, c, d, g, j, r, g, Vv, X, and z, are wanting, although in the
Hitchitee dialects the b occurs. The remaining consonants are given their
English values, and the letters r and c are introduced to represent sounds
not in our tongue. The r is an aspirated 1, slightly guttural, quite simi-
lar to the Welsh ll. The c is pronounced tch, soft, as in wretch. The w
is always surd, as in we, weak. The vowels are:
a the Italian or Spanish a.
e as in mé.
i as in pine.
oO as in note.
u as in wood, or rule.
v represents the neutral vowel, and is really 4 short. No accents are
used, although both accents and signs of quantity should be employed to
express the language correctly. Nonasals are provided for, although very .
soft nasals do occur, and are represented in Mr. Fleming’s alphabet by
diacritical marks, and in that of Mr. Buckner by the Spanish n following
the vowel.
The absence of sonant letters and of decided nasals is the chief differ-
ence between this and the Choctaw alphabet, and explains much of the
apparent diversity between the two tongues. Thus the Choctaw sinti,
snake, becomes in Muskokee ceto, the sonant being changed to its surd,
and the nasal dropped ; Ch. shakba, arm, shortens the first vowel to v, and
permutes the labial, becoming Mus. svkpa; and again Ch. iubi becomes
Mus. hufi, thigh.
1870.] 305 [Brinton.
Mr. Fleming gives two sounds toa, one as in father, the other as in wash;
e as a in paper; i as ee in meet; ai asi in pine; and represents the r by hl,
Of course this materially alters his orthography.
Mr. Buckner makes use of the Agency alphabet, with these changes : ch
for c; ias in pin; ii asi in pine; uas in rule; 0 as in not; the Greek
for o as in go; @ as oo in took, foot. These changes, he claims, are nec-
cessary to represent the language accurately, but both the natives.and the
missionaries have told me this isamistake. There is really no such sound
in Muskokee as 0 in not, and Buckner’s error arose from the shortening
effect of k after the sound of a, as in rakko, great. Furthermore, the dis-
tinction he draws between 6 and u is imaginary, as he himself half con-
fesses ina note to p. 22 of his Grammar. As his work is the only at-
tempt ever made to display the grammatical structure of the language, it
will be a service to philology to point out several serious errors into which
he has been betrayed. Jam enabled to do this from information furnish-
ed me by Mrs. A. E. W. Robertson, of the Tallahasse mission, who is ex-
cellent authority on the language, and from the unpublished manuscripts
of the late Rev. Cyrus Byington, from which I have drawn that which re-
lates to the Choctaw.
Ill. Remarks on BuckNner’s “‘MAsSK@KEE GRAMMAR.”
Nouns. The author (p. 52) remarks that common nouns are not varied on ac-
count of number ; and that namesof people are pluralized by the suffix vlki.
Therule should be that most nouns denoting an agent form their plural by
adding lke, as pasv a sweeper, plural pasvlke; some others indicate the plu-
ral by adding take, which also forms the plural of pronouns, and in writing
it is important to distinguish which word is pluralized, as the position of the
suffix is in both cases the same; thus, ce wvnv take, your (pl.) sister, but
ce wvnvtake, your sisters.
The declension of the noun is given by Buckner under three headings,
the first form, the nominative case, and the objective case. The first
form always ends in a vowel, the nom. case in t, the objective inn. The
possessive case, he says, is formed by prefixing the possessive pronoun to
the thing possessed. Mrs. Robertson divides the cases into nominative,
possessive, objective, relative, and vocative. The nominative ends in
t, but with ‘‘ continual exceptions,’’ not for euphonic but for grammatical
reasons still obscure. The possessive case is the simple form of the noun,
but requires the possessive pronoun after it, as it did in old English, e. g.
** John his hat.’”? The declensions given are as follows :
BUCKNER. Mrs. ROBERTSON.
1st form Cane John
Nom. Canet Canet
Object, Canen Canen
Possessive Cane
Relative Canen
Vocative Cane. ‘
Cane em eslafky, John his knife.
J think that any attempt to give paradigms of Muskokee nouns in this
Brinton.] 306 [March 4,
manner will be incorrect. Those ‘‘ continual exceptions”’ will still remain
obscure. Weare so inveterately accustomed to the declensions of the
Aryan tongues, and to case-endings, that we think every language must
have them. Such is not the case. None of the Chahta-Muskokee tongues
have anything of the kind. They express the relations of words in a sen-
tence by a complicated but strictly regular system of particles or elemen-
tary sounds, each sound, when combined, retaining its original significance,
which are called ‘‘ post-positive particles’ or ‘‘article-pronouns.’’ These
are divided into two classes, the definite and the distinctive, and are sub-
ject to numerous changes. They can be used with all parts of speech, and
supply the place of case-endings, and modal terminations. The Muskokee
terminal series t, it, et, vt, corresponds to the Choctaw at, vt, et; the ob-
jective and relative forms are the Choctaw nasals a and 0; and the pos-
sessive form is the same in both tongues; e. g. Choc. Chan in chuka, John
his house. There is still wanting an analysis of the Muskokee article-
pronoun, and no grammar of the language can be drawn up correctly till
this is done.
Adjectives. On the comparison of adjectives Mr. Buckner says (p. 68) :
‘‘The comparative degree is formed by prefixing sin to the positive,
and the superlative is formed by prefixing ri to the comparative, as
cvmpe, sweet; sincvmpe, sweeter ; risincvmpe, sweetest.’’? In fact, both
these latter are in the comparative degree ; sin is the particle es, govern-
ing a pronoun in the relative, and the expression should read es en evmpe,
sweeter than it ; the r or er prefixed to the es, simply expresses a stronger
comparison, as eres en cvmpe, still better than it. The superlative is
formed not by a prefix, but by the suffix mahat, in the nominative, and
mahan in the oblique cases, as cvmpe mahat, sweetest.
Mr. Buckner’s rule for the plural of adjectives is: ‘* Adjectives of two
syllables form their plural by inserting the contracted form of the first syl-
lable between the two syllables of the singular,’’ as tvphe, wide, pl. tvp-
tvhe. This rule is very incomplete. There are in Musokee two classes
of adjectives, the first closing the root with a single consonant, the second
with a double consonant, or with two consonants. The first form their
plural by adding vke to the root, as here, good, pl. hervke, cate, red,
pl. catvke, lane, pl. lanvke. The second class form their plural by inserting
the first two letters of the root between the two closing consonants, as hvlwe,
pl. holhvwe, lvwke, pl. lvwlvke, svfke, pl. svfsvke, lowveke, pl. lowve-
loke. Many of this class transpose the consonants, apparently for the sake of
euphony ; as kocukne, pl. kocuncoke, cvfekne, pl. evfenevke. Some of
them also form their plural as those of the first-class; as yekce, pl. yekevke,
afvcke, pl. afvckvke. Some in both classes insert ho before the terminal con-
sonant; as hiye, pl. hihoye, holwvke, pl. holwvhoke; evpvkke, pl. evpvkhoke.
Lekwe, rotten, has two plurals, one, lekhowe, applied to animal matter,
the other, leklewe, to vegetable matter. .
There is also a dual of adjectives, which Buckner does not mention. It
is not frequently used ; cvfekne, pl. cvfencvke, dual evfenevkvke ; yekee,
strong, pl. yekevke, dual, yekevkvke. These occur only in the second
person.
1870.) 307
[Brinton.
Throughout Mr. Buckner’s work his division of words is faulty, and
adds much to the difficulty of the language. He is much too positive in
his views, and his translations are frequently far from literal. His Gram-
mar cannot be relied upon as a safe guide in any sense, and while he is de-
serving of much credit for his industry in collecting material, the arrange-
ment of and the deductions from that material must be condemned.
IV. THe MuskokEE VERB.
The congugation of a verb in an American language is a prodigious task.
In analysing the Muskokee verb I shall avoid as many complications as
possible, and speak only of active verbs, in their first transitions (when
the object is presumed to be always in the third person and the singular
number), in their first form, and affirmative signification.
Roots. Muskokee verbs have two roots. The first is formed by drop-
ping the termination etv of the infinitive mood, as nvfketv, to strike, root
nvfk, kicetv, totell, root kic. Thesecond rootis formed by inserting h before
the final consonant of the first root, if there is but one consonant ; and by
inserting i between the two final consonants if they are two ; and if they
are the same, the latter is changed into y ; ¢é. g.
kicetv 1st root kic 2nd root kihe
letketv letk ‘letik
vkhottetv vkhott vkhotiy
merretyv merr meriy
Moods. The ordinary form of the Infinitive ends inetv. The sign of
the subjunctive is the particle omat, added after the tense sign. It corres-
ponds to, and is probably derived from, the Choctaw subjunctive particle
kmvt. The Imperative has a future as well asa present form, correspond-
ing in this with most other American languages, and not a rare exception
as Buckner thinks.
Tenses. The imperfect tense has not less than five forms. The first re-
fers to something which has transpired to-day, the second to what trans-
pired yesterday, the third to an occurrence usually only a few weeks ago,
or, as we would say, ‘‘lately,’’ the fourth to an action or event long since
completed, but within the memory of the speaker, while the fifth imper-
fect, called the indefinite or historic tense, refers to transactions of which
the subject of the verb has no personal knowledge, nor is directly con-
nected with.
The future tenses are the simple, the compound, and the progressive fu-
tures. The progressive futures are formed by adding to the first and second
roots the termination vran, and subjoining the tense signs of either past,
present, or future tenses. They express the idea of being about to, or having
been about to, perform an action, and when formed from the fifth imperfect,
convey the sense of obligation or necessity. It willthus be seen that both
in formation and signification they present a striking analogy to the first
and second periphrastic. conjugations—those from the participles in rus
and dus—in Latin.
All the above tenses are formed from the first root of the verb. The
perfect tense, is formed as in Latin, from the second root, by adding to it
the terminations of the present.
Brinton.] 308 [March 4,
The tense-signs are as follows :
Present, es, the e dropped in the first person singular, and
lengthened in the first person plural.
Imperfect, first, is
second, vnks
third, emytes, emvtvs, or emyts, the e dropped in the first
person singular.
fourth, vntvs
fifth, vtes
Future, simple, vres, the v dropped in first sing.
compound, tares, used after the fifth imperfect with its finals
dropped, ¢. g. nvfkvyvte tares.
progressive, vran added to the root.
Perfect, is, to second root, thei shortened to v when it
comes before y.
Persons. The persons are indicated by inseparable personal pronouns
between the root and the tense sign. They vary in the different tenses
according to the following table: Sing. 1st pers. 2nd, Pl. Ist 2nd 3d
Present, and third imp., i etsk e atsk ak
First, second, fourth, and fifth imp. vy etsk ey atsk ak
Simple future, a etsk ey atsk vk
The third singular is wanting.
There is a dual form of the verb when two persons or things are spoken
of,—an objective dual, ina sense. It isformed by prefixing torkor (proba-
bly a corruption of the Choctaw tuklo, two) and making changes in the first
syllable of the root, according to rules with which Iam not acquainted.
The pronouns remain in the singular form, as letkis I run, torkorkis we
two run. %,
Negative form. The negative form of the verb is made by inserting the
negative particle ak (Choctaw, ik), after the root, which latter may under-
go euphonic changes, e. g. kicis, I say, kicakis, I do not say.
It was my intention to give a complete paradigm of the active, affirma-
tive, simple verb, in the first transition, but as I am not able to exhibit
this satisfactorily at present, I shall omit it. I shall therefore conclude
this article by a partial analysis of a specimen sentence in the language,
and a comparison of it with the same in Choctaw, thus showing the af-
finities of these tongues.
V. SPECIMEN SENTENCE.
Acts. ch. xv, verse 11:
And when the people saw what Paul had done, they lifted up their
voices, saying in the speech of Lycaonia: The gods are come down to us
in the likeness of men.
In Muskokee: i
Momen estet, nake Pal momecaten hecakof em opunvky-en-haken
kvwvpa kvtes, Likeonv em punvky ofvn, Hesake tvmese este omvket
ye pun hvtvpeces, mahaket.
309 [Brinton.
1870.]
Translation.
Momen, and, the conjunctive particle with the terminal n, which throws
the clause into the oblique case or sense.
estet, the people, compounded of este and the definite article-pronoun
nominative t, literally, people the.
nake, the thing, or things.
Pal momeceaten, that Paul had done.
hecakof, when they saw.
em, their.
opunvky, word; en, its; haken, sound.
kvwvpakvtes, they lifted up, fifth imperfect.
Likeonv em punvkv ofvn, Lycaonia its language in.
Hesaketvmese, gods, from hesakety, life, and emese, source or font,
““ source of life.” This is the word commonly employed by the mission-
aries for God. Col. Hawkins, in his Sketch of the Creek Country, spells
it E-sau-ge-tuh E-mis-see. Mr. Perryman tells me that it is probably
a word coined by the English, and not of native origin.
este omvket, men resembling.
ye, hither, pum, to us; hvtvpeces, have descended; makaket, saying.
In Choctaw (the nasals in italics):
Mihma okla hash ot, Pal vt nana yvmihinchi na pisa mvt, Laikeonia
anumpa ho okla anumpulit chitoli hosh, Chitokaka vhleha yvt hatak o
chiyuhmit aka mintit ayvt hvpim vivshke ; ahanchi tok.
Translation.
Mihma, and, with the definite oblique termination.
okla, people, hash ot, pronoun of renewed mention definite, the afore-
said ones, they.
Pal vt, Paul he; nana, the responsive pronoun definite; the thing which,
what.
yvmihinchi, he had done.
na—myt, when, pisa, they saw.
Laikeonia anumpa ho, Lycaonian speech the, ho is the distinctive article
pronoun in the oblique case.
okla anumpulit hosh, the people, the aforesaid ones (hosh) spoke; chitoli,
loudly.
Chitokaka, gods, vhlehay vt, they indeed, article pronoun definite.
hatak 0 to men, distinctive and oblique, chiyuhmit, resembling.
aka, below, mintit, coming toward, ayvt, here, ‘‘coming toward this place
below.”’
hupim, to us; vlvshke, have come, from ula, to come.
ahanchi tok, they said. The particle tok throws the verbs into the re-
mote imperfect tense.
The strong similarity in the construction of the two languages is very
evident from these specimens.
A. P: S —VOL. xXI.—11h
310
Stated Meeting, March 18, 1870.
Present, eleven members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from Mrs.
Mary Somerville, dated Naples, Feb. 14, 1870.
Letters of envoy were received from the Royal Academies
at Munich, (Dec. 1,) and Vienna, (Aug. 20,) from the R. So-
ciety of Zoology at Amsterdam, (Dec. 9,) and the Society at
Giessen, Sept. 2, 1869.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Soci-
eties at Giessen, (77-80), Gottingen, (78-80), Bremen, (73-80),
Prof. Bunsen, (78, 79), Historical Acad. at Madrid, (XIII. 1,
List, Cat. I, 71, 72, 77), R. Academy at Amsterdam (78-80),
R, Library, Hague, (78-80), Observatory at Prague (78-80).
A circular letter respecting the celebration of its 25th an-
niversary festival, on the 27th of March (April 8th), was re-
ceived from the Society at Riga.
A. letter was read from Captain C. F. Hall, dated Wash-
ington, D. C., March 12, 1870, enclosing a petition to Con-
gress, in favor of his proposed Third Arctic Exploring Expe-
dition. The petition was laid upon the table for the signature
of the members and others.
Donations for the library were received from the Societies
at Moscow, Emden, Frankfurt, Lille, Bordeaux, Montreal and
Madison: from the Berlin Academy; Paris Geographical
Society; Royal Institution of G. Britain, London; Chemical
and Antiquarian Societies; Greenwich Observatory; Dublin
Geological Society; Dr. Haughton; the American Antiquarian
Society; New York Lyceum; Dr. Geo. B. Wood; and the
Peabody Institute.
A Cireular from the Smithsonian Institute announced an-
other transmission of correspondence for the 20th April; all
envoys to be in Washington by the 1dth.
Prof. Cope communicated the results of his examinations of
the locality, two miles S. W. from Woodbury, where from
30 to 60 skeletons, some of them women and others children,
dll
were lately exhumed, and the greater part broken up, and
spread upon compost heaps. Dr. Leidy has recovered one
pretty complete skull, which he exhibited before the Aca-
demy of Natural Sciences, at its last meeting, and expressed
a decided opinion in favor of its Huropean origin. Professor
Cope’s opinion was equally confident, that the remains were
those of no aboriginal Indian race. Professor Trego sug-
gested that they belonged to that early Finnish or Swedish
Colony, which attempted a settlement on the banks of the
Delaware, a short while previous to the arrival of the Hol-
landers and Quakers, under William Penn. The bodies were
all taken from a shallow trench, not more than 8 feet wide
by 16 long; they had been laid in two tiers or stages, one
above the other, and there was no relic, ornament, tool, wea-
pon, or fragment of clothing, to suggest relationship to any
age or race; and no appearance of a tumulus.
Prof. Cope exhibited three large photographic pictures of
figures of the human foot incised in upper cretaceous red
sandstone, near Topeka, thought by western men to be fossil
impressions. The shadows in the photographic copies
showed plainly the nature of the marks, for the ball of the
great toe was an elevation, instead of a depression, and the
cutting was carried round the ends of the intervals between
the toes. A discussion of the use of the foot in aboriginal
picture writing followed.
Dr. Carson recalled the exhibition of a sculptured rock,
showing rivers and game, a sort of guide map, taken from
the Susquehanna River banks, by Prof. Walter R. Johnson,
at the Academy of Nat. Sciences or Historical Society, about
1836 or 1837, and expressed his desire that it should be re
covered for use, in comparison with later discoveries.
Dr. Brinton being questioned as to the amount of credence
to be given to Baron De Waldeck’s alleged Elephant or Mas-
todon figures, supposed to be recognisable among the hiero-
glyphics of Mexico, rephed that he had had the opportunity
of examining M. Charancy’s photographs, and agreed with
the latter, that no such figures could be made out from the
dl2
original designs, but that the figures in question were symbol-
ically compounded of man and serpent, and appear as such in
MSS. recently published by the French government.
Mr. Lesley instanced the mammoth, etched on a plate of
ivory, found in a cave in France, to clear away any serious im-
probability from the way of supposing a like physical remin-
iscence of the Mastodon in this country. He referred, also, to
the fact, that the Ancient Kgyptian B was graphically repre-
sented by the human leg, A by the arm, T’ by the hand, and that
what is called the comb, may have been meant for the foot-
mark. In the earliest stage of human life the foot and the
foot-print were of superior importance to the hand and its
work. But in the second stage of aboriginal life, the hand
took precedency of the foot, as symbol of force and skill, com-
bining thought with feeling, the reasoning power with the
instinct. It soon entered into the synod of symbolic gods, with
its fingers, and obtained a special worship for its hand-print.
Dr. Coates related the origin of the Arabic cyphers on the
hypothesis, that they were constructed by posturing with the
hands and fingers, singly and in combination.
Pending nominations 649—656 were read.
The following communication was read:
Office of the Commissioners of Fairmount Park, No. 2248. Fifth Street,
Philadelphia, March 12th, 1870.
At a meeting of the Commissioners of the Park, held this day, the fol-
lowing preamble and resolutions were adopted :
WHEREAS, The American Philosophical Society has made a communi-
cation to this Commission, proposing that the name of André Francois
Michaux, who travelled long in this country, and described our Oaks and
forest trees, in a work of great merit and splendor, should have his name,
and that of his father (who had, by like travel and study, rendered ser-
vice to science), honored in the Fairmount Park, in a manner to be a me-
morial to their devotions, and to promote the objects which had occupied
their lives, and has proposed, after the death of the widow of André Fran-
cois Michaux, to devote the interest or income of six thousand dollars be-
queathed by him to said Society, to be expended in execution of the trust
of his will in the said Park, for the purpose following. Therefore,
Resolved, That there shall be a grove of Oaks in the Fairmount Park
forever to bear the name of ‘‘ The Michaux Grove,’’ in which, if practi-
cable, shall grow two oaks of every kind that will endure the climate.
Resolved, That any surplus of revenue received by the Commission from
Jan. 7, 1870.] 313 (Chase.
the Michaux Fund, after satisfying the requirements of the preceding
resolution, shall be devoted to the cultivation of Oaks of every variety ca-
pable of cultivation in our climate, in the Park nursery, which Oaks, to
the extent of two of each kind cultivated, be hereafter distributed to
other Public Parks in the United States, under proper regulations to be
hereafter prescribed.
Attest, Davip F. Foury, See. Park Commission.
On motion of Mr. Price, it was then
Resolved, That this Society do agree to the terms contained in the pre-
amble and resolutions of the Fainmount Park Commissioners, adopted on
the 12th day of March, 1870, in the expectation and confidence that the
planting of the Michaux Grove of Oaks may be soon commenced, so that
the Grove shall early become one of the attractions of the Park.
And the Society was adjourned.
COMPARISON OF MECHANICAL EQUIVALENTS.
By Pruiny EARLE CHASE.
Read January 7, 1870.
The comparison of different mechanical equivalents will open a new
field for investigation, which may prove to be fertile in valuable results.
For example, recent determinations, by the different methods of Thom-
sen and Farmer, fix the mechanical equivalent of light, in a wax candle
burning 1263 grains per hour, at 13.1 foot-pounds per minute, the equiva-
lent of 1 grain being 6.215 foot-pounds. According to Dulong, the heat
evolved, during the combustion of 1 grain of olive oil in oxygen, is suffi-
cient to heat 9862 grains of water 1° C. According to Favre and Silber-
mann, 1 grain of oil of turpentine, burned in oxygen, would heat 10,852
grains of water 1° C.
It may therefore be presumed that the total heat given out by the com-
bustion of 1 grain of wax, is about sufficient to raise 10,000 grains of
water 1° C., or 18,000 gr. 1° F. This represents a mechanical equivalence
of (18,000 « 772 + 7000 =) 1985.143 foot-pounds, which is 319.5 times as
great as the corresponding equivalent of the light given out during the
combustion.
Tyndall, in his lecture on Radiation, states that the visible rays of the
electric light contain about one-tenth of the total radiated heat. The re-
lative luminous intensity of an electric lamp would therefore appear to be
about 32 times as great as that of the wax candle. This ratio so nearly
resembles that of solar to terrestrial superficial attraction, and the con-
nection of electric and magnetic currents with solar radiation is so evi-
dent, that additional experiments, to furnish materials for a great variety
of similar comparisons, seem desirable. While it is possible that the re-
semblance, in the present instance, may be accidental, the numerous
harmonies between the manifestations of cosmical and moecular forces,
render it at least equally possible that it may have a weighty significance.
314 [Feb. 4,
Chase. ]
MONTHLY VARIATIONS OF RAINFALL AT PHILADELPHIA.
By Puiny EARLE CHASE.
Read Feb. 4, 1870.
The following Tables may be of service in the study of secular rainfall.
The Normals, in Table II. were computed from the observations of seven
successive years, in the same manner as those in my previous discussions.
I. Montaiy RAINFALL AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR FORTY-FIVE YEARS.
Jan. Feb. Mar. Apl. May. June. Jul. Aug. Sep. Oct. Nov. Dec.
1825 84 3.26 4.63 ey ae BH) AS RD PBL NS SLB
1826 2 SOF CO mma Si 19 4.65 3.68 2.75 2.00 O.co) le comele2s
1827 2.86 3.55 1.23 2:85 2:50 2.09 2.97 5.75 “9 5.91 4.76 3.26
1828 2:05) 2375 3:35 3.82) S49 2.69 5.33 15. 4562 139 6.71 26
1829 Bye 9 Shy 7 Oeey( EEC. OS GUE aU iy CL SOM | ORB) BEG) ital
1830 1.63 2:06" “4.11 1.82 3.75 5.99 4.07 Bis | 124853 4.31 5:35 518
1831 Gy eel Be yO) Oe BL Zhai GLB) - GEG} chal Test} a)
1832 cuits) OLE. IN) ets} A) debi) as) Le) LG) OE)
1833 3.97 1.24 2.22 S710) 15!S8)) 9.5328) 453539) 3:82) sl O05 meee Simao
1834 2.49 2.22 2.02 2.83 3.52 3.99 4.35 62 3.57 3.29 3.01 2.33
1835 Zio ARB 3283) 94233) 199 G27) 16255) 22505) 2563) An 22 S519 26S
1836 TEG2 os 2299) Mel) aoe ene2 20a) meio) yu2.O ele 97) tale 82 umd! D9 me oro+mmmotolle
1837 2.50 3.58 3.76 2.83 485 2.838 5.89 4.06 228 66 3.23 2.55
1838 2.20 2.19 3.17 3.59 3.58 660 2.388 2.78 9.52 4.90 3.35 1.04
1839 5.04 3.42 1.50 1.51 6.07 3.92 2.52 464 2.92 2.83 3.10 6,26
1840 1.84 3.01 2.63 683 2.69 5.95 4.54 5.55 2.50 5.73 2.49 3.65
1841 7.84 1.389 5.82 646 3.27 3,11 3.28 9.10 1.90 3.20 4.22 5.92
1842 136 4596 «2184 531586) BY) 80) 3.79) a7) 8549) 8566
1845 144 254 441 4.72 2.04 1.69 4.54 9.25 4.86 3.22 415 4.04
1844 405 1.45 4.43 135 3.09 3.35 528 2.40 4.03 5.02 2.95 2.75
1545 3.76 4.74 2.42 2.58 1.60 3.72 2.76 7.30 2.16 2.53 2.50 3.96
1846 463 3.38 460 2.11 3.44 3380 4.60 4,27 20 244 7.97 3.44
1847 4.73 4.57 4.70 9 1.57 3.30 276 318 807 3.00 2.84 5.78
1848 2.08 1.44 2.76 1.54 4.90 4.48 3.28 1.71 1.81 3.74 2.384 5.01
1849 308s | PASI Wh aloaey SRE) PAD PRY GE alee 5.59 2.60 5.84
1850 4.77 287 4.75 2.66 6.50 2.03 5.97 833 7.738 109 332 4.51
1851 1.23 3.11 3.47 4.56 482 3.44 252 2.56 1.13 3.02 3.36 2.27
1852 2.01 2.71 4.27 644 3.03 4.03 4.06 4.40 1.29 2.27 6.05 5,17
1853 1.85 4.44 2.46 3.83 5.17 1.10 6.30 3.09 4.46 3.47 2.32 2.17
1854 2.33 4.20 1.62 7.75 693 2.39 3.02 84 3.80 1.55 2.83 2.91
1855 2.34 2:35 1.68 2:05 2:96 7.95 6.40 2:79 4:00 411 2:04 5.42
1856 ANA Le 2a 2235 ee S-Ole 260) ee 99 ema oll sn: 00) ssi: O13 0 ne 2 Ommmmcros
1857 3.53 it) tds} G7) oS Te BAL we) IS AG) a
1858 259 229 1.09 464 501 4.50 1.35 4.94 1.49 1.84 5.61 4.50
1859 6.67 3.66 6.98 5.61 2.25 601 4.07 4.74 7.68 3.138 3.82 3.49
1860 3.22) 2.75 1-42) 3280 3.82) 288 99 840 2.85 4.52 613 3.31
1861 5.24 2.07 3.92 3.71 6.64 3.88 2.56 3.14 440 3.80 4:87 2.09
1862 479 4.64 3.55 4.16 2.31 6.97 2.46 93 3.98 4.77 4.79 1.65
1863 4.72 468 5.88 7.01 4.51 4.25 GOL 1.45 88 2.46 2.70 4.63
1854 1.70 das) ul SS) a) Beier 7G) ISP} GB) ile!
1855 Beil mayse) ZU cRy el Zr RY aR IS HOG} GSI (Ol
1866 Bebe GsOlliay 2215 ame 93) e465 a 2596 222) ) S21 O fla ey meyer)
1867 W710) WBE89) DAG eam SI 723255 1t0 2) 2239) 5/82) tel 2) meas 2 e230 sie oa eS
1868 3.62 2.52 3.36 5.44 7.00 4.37 3.51 2.67 8.91 74 5.28 3.60
1859 4.298 4.66 5.30 2.12 4.24 5.58 2.89 128 3.25 6.32 3.73 5.91
1870. |
Il. Montuiy NorMALS OF RAINFALL AT PHILADELPHIA,
June.
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1855
1857
1855
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
Jan.
2.94
3.47
3.91
4,28
4,28
3.86
3.62
3.94
4.19
3.87
3.51
3.64
3.99
3.91
3.28
2.91
3.23
3.84
4.05
3.61
2.88
2.49
2.42
2.28
2.06
2.08
2.41
2.92
3.41
3.72
4.05
4,4]
4,62
4.66
4 45
3.92
3.33
3.00
2.87
2.93
Feb.
3.06
2.95
2.69
2.41
2.17
2.00
2.03
2.34
2.70
2.92
2.94
2.86
2.77
2.75
2.80
2.81
2.95
3.36
3.58
3.30
2.81
2.61
2.74
2.99
3.33
3.58
3.81
2,53
1.81
1.70
2.17
2.66
2.92
3.19
3.47
3.93
3.74
4.36
4.74
4,42
Mar.
3.06
3.18
3.24
2.95
2.53
2.36
2.50
2.72
2.87
2.89
2.78
2.80
3.22
377
4.01
3.98
3.89
3.80
3.92
4.07
4.21
4.37
4.34
4.00
3.42
2.74
2.16
1392)
1.94
2.22
2.84
3.40
3.59
3.68
4,20
4,75
4,78
4.34
4,02
4.08
Apl.
3.66
3.74
3.65
3.39
2.90
2.56
2.81
3.28
3.41
3.24
3.28
3.93
4.96
5.52
5.10
May.
2.73
2.96
3.01
3.39
4.07
4.31
3.76
3.13
3.18
3.75
4.23
4.25
4.01
3.89
3.74
3.29
2.78
2.54
2.67
3.11
3.71
4.30
4.78
4-77
4.65
4,82
4,76
4,29
4.04
4.17
4,14
3.99
4.11
4,39 .
4,65
5.41
6.33
6.64
6.48
6.33
31115)
3.25
3.74
4,01
3.79
3.64
4.07
4.89
5.50
5.56
5.26
5.04
4.89
4.49
3.80
3.11
2.84
3.01
3.30
3.46
3.47
3.29
2.96
2.84
2.93
2.92
2.99
3.61
4,45
§.00
5.26
5,22
4,82
4,48
4.59
4,74
4,41
4.01
4.33
5.39
6.24
Jul.
4.21
4.34
4.12
3.81
ile
4.04
4.55
4.78
4.56
4.07
Befa7/
3.50
4.26
5.64
6.53
6.14
5.00
4.10
3.65
3.42
3.44
3.72
3.97
4.09
4.31
4,58
4,54
4.09
3.45
2.93
2.66
2.47
2.36
2.61
3.31
3.89
3.81
3.26
2.84
2.80
Aug.
3.66
3 87
4.36
4.71
4.36
3.33
2.33
2.07
2.48
3.10
3.79
4,74
5.79
6.42
6.41
6.02
5.57
5.09
4,43
3.91
4,26
5,22
5.51
4.77
3.71
2.92
2.78
3.64
4.99
5.80
5.838
5.71
5.16
3.86
2.46
1.93
2.41
3.81
5.73
6.61
Table I. indicates the following probabilities:
1. Of a change of weather (from a preceding wet month, or season, to
a dry one, or vice versa).
In September,
“¢ November,
“ January,
“¢ April,
Sep.
2.69
3.03
3.28
3.36
3.26
3.17
3.05
2.83
3.05
3.98
4.66
4.16
3.02
2.41
2.66
3.16
In Autumn,
[Chase.
FoR 40 YEARS.
Oct.
3.41
3.18
3.64
4.44
Nov.
4.86
4.75
4.03
3.20
2.67
2.61
2.84
3.09
3.23
3.26
3.20
5.15
3.25
3.50
3.66
3.61
3.67
4.08
4.34
3.89
3.16
2.94
4.64
4,99
4,84
4.34
5.84
3.59
3.26
3.12
3.41
Dec.
1.88
2.26
2.91
3.50
3.97
4.01
3.56
3,09
2.86
2.83
3.20
3.95
4.53
4.58
4.23
3.80
3.58
3.75
4,25
4.83
5.13
4,94
4,37
3.84
3.52
3.41
3.57
3.94
4,27
4.41
4,23
3.72
3.08
2.74
3.04
3.89
4,57
4.55
4.02
3.73
8
5)
2. Of a continuance of the weather of the preceding month or season.
In January,
** February,
“* October,
“¢ December,
In Winter,
“¢ Summer,
“¢ Spring,
9
14
lowed by a dry Summer (June to October, inclusive), and vice versa, is
very curious.
316
Stated Meeting, April 1st, 1870.
Present, eleven members.
Pror. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Letters accepting membership were received from Carl Fr.
Naumann, dated Leipsic, 13th February, 1870; George Ritter
Von Frauenfeld, Wien, 5th March, 1870; Prof. Dr. F. V.
Hochstetter, Wien, 2d March, 1870; Louis Gruner, Prof.
Min. Keole des Mines, Paris, 6th March, and Edward Everett
Hale, dated Boston, March 21, 1870.
Donations for the Library were received from the London
Astronomical Society; M. Theodore Wechniaakof, of Paris;
the Boston 8. N. H.; the Cambridge Museum of Comparative
ZLoology; Mr. J. H. Trumbull, of Hartford, Dr. 5S. D. Gross, of
Philadelphia, the Franklin Institute, the Episcopal Hospital,
and the Editors of Nature.
Prof. Cope exhibited fossil fishes in black shale from Dr.
Hayden’s collections of 1869; from Railroad cuttings, in the
Green River Country, Rocky Mountains, belonging to the salt
water family of the Clupeide, and the brackish water family
of the Cyprinodentide, for two of which he proposed the
names, Lithichthys pusillus and Cyprinodon levatus. These
make the first appearance in America, of genera known to be
fossilin the rocks of Mount Lebanon. (See Proceedings below.)
Dr. Hayden described the large collections which he made
in that region, and deposited at Washington. The shales are
charged with bituminous matter, and exhibit multitudes of
small fish, insects, freshwater-plant stems, nuts, and among
other things, a true feather, as determined by Mr. Marsh, of
New Haven; probably not a bird’s feather, but belonging to
some form of Archzeopteryx.
A discussion took place respecting the law of storms as set
forth in a recent memoir by M. Prestel. :
Pending nominations Nos. 649 to 656, and new nominations
Nos. 607, 658, were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
S317
Febrnary 4, 1870.] {[Brinton.
GRAMMAR OF THE CHOCTAW LANGUAGE.
PREPARED BY THE REVEREND Cyrus ByYINGTON, AND EDITED BY
Dr. BRINTON.
Read before the American Philosophical Society, Heb. 4, 1870.
INTRODUCTION.
The Choctaw, or properly Chahta nation, numbers at present about
17,000 souls, 4,500 of whom are Chickasaws. When first known to
Europeans these allied peoples occupied the territory on the Jeft bank
of the Mississippi, almost from the Ohio river to the Gulf. They be-
long to the great CHAHTA-MUSKOKEE family, which, in early days,
controlled the whole country from the Mississippi to the Atlantic,
and from the Gulf shore to the Apalachians.
The Choctaws have always been quick to adopt the instruction of
their civilized neighbors, and at present have about seventy schools
with nearly two thousand pupils on their reservation.! During the
French occupation of Louisiana, in the early part of the last century,
efforts were made by the Roman Catholic missionaries to convert
them, but without success.2 In 1818, Protestant missionaries were
sent among them, who effected a permanent impression upon them,
and were mainly instrumental in bringing about their present highly
ereditable condition, Their evil habits were reformed, they were
instructed in agriculture, and their language was reduced to writing,
In the latter, the alphabet suggested by the Hon. John Pickering, in
his essay ‘‘On a uniform orthography of the languages of the Indians
of North America,’’ was employed. The first book printed was a
spelling book, by the American Tract Society, in 1825. Since that
time, besides a large number of tracts, almanacs, hymn books, and
educational works, the whole of the New Testament and most of the
Old Testament have been printed in the language, by the American
Bible Society, New York city, after faithful translations by the Rev,
Cyrus Byington and the Rey. A. Wright, assisted by educated natives, ®
These can readily be obtained, and will be found of great service in
elucidating the grammatical structure of the language, as it is for
the first time explained in the present work by the hands of the REv,
Cyrus BYINGTON,
This eminent scholar and missionary, whose name is inseparably
connected with the later history of the Choctaw nation, was born at
Stockbridge, Berkshire county, Massachusetts, March 11, 1793. He
1 Report of the Commissioner of Indian Affairs, for 1869, p. 37. .
2Shea, History of Catholic Missions in the United States, p, 441.
3 In comparing the translation of the Four Gospels, second edition, 1845 (Boston, printed for the
A. B. C. F. M.), with the second edition of the New Testament by the American Bible Society (New
York, 1854), I find a number of slight differences, especially in the use of the neutral vowel v.
A. P. S —VOL. xI.—12E
Brinton. ] 3 18 {February 4,
was one of nine children, and his parents were in humble cireum-
stances, but industrious and respected. His father was at one time
a tanner, and subsequently a small farmer. Necessarily, therefore,
his early education was limited.
When a well grown lad he was taken into the family of Mr. Joseph
Woodbridge, of his native town, from whom he received some instruc-
tion in Latin and Greek, and with whom he afterward read law. In
1814 he was admitted to the bar, and practiced a few years with suc-
cess in Stockbridge and Sheffield, Mass.
His father though a moral was not a religious man, and it seems to
have been only after he reached manhood that Mr. Byington became,
as he expressed it, ‘‘a subject of divine grace.’’? He then resolved to
forsake the bar and devote himself to missionary life. With this
object in view he entered the theological school at Andover, Mass.,
where he studied Hebrew and theology, and was licensed to preach,
September, 1819. At this time he hoped to go to the Armenians in
Turkey. But Providence had prepared for him another and an even
more laborious field.
For about a year he preached in various churches in Massachusetts,
awaiting some opportunity for missionary labor. ‘Toward the close
of the summer of 1819, a company of twenty or twenty-five persons
left Hampshire county, Mass., under the direction of the American
Board of Missions, to go by land to the Choctaw nation, then resident
in Mississippi. They passed through Stockbridge, in September, and
were provided with a letter from the Board, asking Mr. Byington to
take charge of them, and pilot them to their destination. He was
ready at a few hours’ notice.
The company journeyed by land to Pittsburgh, where they procured
flat boats, and floated down the Ohio and Mississippi to a point near
the mouth of the Yalobusha river, whence a land journey of two hun-
dred miles brought them to their destination.
Thus commenced Mr. Byington’s missionary life among the Choc-
taws. It continued for nearly fifty years, and resulted, with the
blessing of Providence and the assistance of some devoted co-work-
ers in the Nation, especially the Rev. A. Wright and the Rey. Cy-
rus Kingsbury, in redeeming the nation from drunkenness, ignor-
ance and immorality, to sobriety, godliness, and civilization. There
are no lives which in the eyes of the philanthropist are more worthy of
admiration, or more deserving of record than those of such men, who
not only rescue thousands of individuals from spiritual and physical
degradation, but preserve with enlightened care the only memorials
of whole nations.
For throughout his missionary life Mr. Byington appreciated the
value which a knowledge of the language and traditions of the Choc-
taws would have to scholars. From his arrival among them, there-
1870.] 3 1 9 (Brinton,
fore, he devoted assiduous labor to their language with a view to com-
prehend its extremely difficult construction, and to render it availa-
ble for the missionary and philological student. The first draft of
his Grammar was completed in 1834. It was written and re-written,
until at the time of his death, which occurred at Belpre, Ohio,
December 31st, 1868, he was at work upon the seventh revisal. This
had proceeded as far as the close of Part I. This much, therefore, of
the Grammar is almost precisely as the author left it.
- Part Il. commencing with the Article-Pronouns, I have arranged
from the manuscripts of the fifth and sixth revisals, deposited in the
library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia, by the
family of the author.
In undertaking this task I have throughout adhered closely to the
language and arrangement of the original, even where a different
nomenclature and an altered arrangement suggested themselves, as in
better accordance with modern philological views. It is, I think, -
more proper to maintain strict fidelity to the forms chosen by so
thorough a Choctaw scholar as the Rev. Mr. Byington, in the expla-
nation of so difficult a tongue, than to run any risk of misrepresent-
ing his views by adopting a more modern phraseology.
Mr. Byington’s own views of what he had accomplished deserve
recording. In his diary under date March 11, 1864 (his birthday), he
writes :
‘“The last year I revised the Choctaw Grammar, going over the
ground twice. The last effort I hope is my best, and will be of use to
learners of Choctaw, and to Choctaw scholars in schools, but it needs
further revision, and then to be well transcribed. J. commit these
efforts in my old age to the Lord. I have enjoyed these labours very
much. The pleasure of happily resolving difficulties in these studies,
and of success in the work, is gratifying, and reviving to the mind.”’
In 1867 he wrote:
‘*This work can be much improved hereafter by other hands. It
may be compared to the first survey and making of a road in a new
country.”
In spite of these deficiencies, of which no doubt the author was
more distinctly aware than any one else, his Grammar remains one of
the most valuable, original, and instructive of any ever written of an
American language. It is the result of nigh half a century of con-
centrated study, and we may well doubt if ever again a person will
be found who will combine the time, the opportunities, and the
ability to make an equal analysis of the language.
Mr. Byington also prepared a Choctaw dictionary, containing about
15,000 words, which remains in manuscript, in the possession of his
family.
Brinton.} 320) {February 4,
In commencing the study of Choctaw, those accustomed only to English
and cognate languages will discover many peculiarities. Some of them
are as follows :
1. The want of the verb ‘*‘to be’’ as a declinable word.
2. The want of personal pronouns in the third persons, singular and
plural.
3. The want of a plural form in many nouns, verbs and adjectives.
4. The irregular manner in which the plural is made.
5. The want of a passive voice in some verbs, and its irregular forma-
tion.
6. The order of words in a clause or sentence.
7. The use of pre-positive particles, or prefixes.
8. The use of post-positive particles, or suffixes.
9. The use of fragmentary pronouns, simple and compound.
10. The repetition of pronouns.
11. The numerous ground-forms of the verbs, arising from internal
changes in the primary root.
12. The negative forms of verbs, adjectives, and fragmentary pronouns.
13. The causative forms of verbs.
14. The internal changes in the causative forms.
15. The uniformity of grammatical forms and structure.
16. The extent to which the rough aspirate h sapplies the want of the
verb of existence.
17. The difficulties in resolving and translating the article-pronouns.
PART FIRST.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
1. THE ALPHABET.
Consonants. vowels, diphthongs, nasals, and aspirates are used.
5 ? foes ?
Letters. Names and values.
Aa a or ah, a bread, as in father.
Vv 4 short, as a in vial, or u in sun.
Bb be
Ch ch che
Ke a long, as in made, or e in there.
Estey fe
Hh he
HI hil hle
X
1870. J 321 (Brinton.
in e as iin marine, and short as i in pin.
Kk ke
Ll le
Mm me
Nn ne
Oo o as in note.
Pp pe
Ss se
Sh sh she
Uu oo as in took, or u as in full.
Ww we
Yy ye.
Nasals: 2, 9, u, i.
2. REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET.
The vowel v has heretofore been called ti short. But the Choctaws
give it the sound of 4 short, and when lengthened it passes into a long ;
as, vbi, to kill; abi, to kill.
Hi], hl, is an aspirated 1, when at the beginning of a syllable ; when it
closes a syllable, it is lh; as, hlibata, a buckskin thong; tulhko, buck-
skin leather.
H, h, has two sounds, one a smooth aspirate, as in hina, a road ; the
other rough, as in tahli, to finish.
K, k, has two sounds, one sharp, as in oka, water; the other rough, as
in the article-pronoun okvt, oke. In order to express the sound fully, the
latter might be spelled okhvt, okhe.
The vowels have the continental sounds.
The diphthongs are: ai, pronounced as iin pine; and au, as ow in now.
3. THE NASALS.
These are not represented by independent letters, but by a line drawn
under the vowels, thus: a, i, 0, u, pronounced ang, ing, ong, ung, with
slight variations depending upon the next succeeding consonant.
v nasalized, passes into a.
e 66 66 66 To
ai oe Mg ‘** ay, as falaiya, to be long, falaya, being long.
Ay ce OF ‘* aw, as laua, to be many, lawa, being many.
The nasal sounds increase the distinctive power of the words in which
they occur. For instance, the article-pronouns a definite and © distinc-
tive are made more definite and distinctive by the nasal mark. This is
also true of adverbs of affirmation and negation ; verbs and adverbs take
the nasals as intensives ; a, yes it is; ha, no it is not; keyu, no it is not;
chito, large ; chito, being large, the large one. The nasal sound implies
emphasis, and distinctiveness by comparison.
4. SOUNDS WANTING.
The consonants c¢, d, g, j, q, ', Vv, X, and z, are absent in Choctaw.
Double consonants, such as br, dr, tl, bt, nt, st, are of difficult articula-
Brinton. ] 322 [February 4,
tion to the natives. When such sounds occur in proper names, as in the
Bible, they substitute others, as follows: for c soft they use s, as Cyrus,
Sailas; for c hard, k, as Canaan, Kenan; for ch hard, k, as Enoch, Enak;
for d, 1, as David, Lewi; or else t, as Daniel, Taniel or Tanili; for g soft
and for j, ch, as Gentile, Chentail, Jew, Chu; for g, ko or ku, as queen,
kuwin, or kowin; for r, 1, as Rachel, Lechel, but at the end of a syllable
it is dropped, as Peter, Peta; for v, f or w, as Levi, Lefai, David, Lewi ;
for x, ks, as Exodus, Eksotus ; for z, s, as Zaccheus, Sakevs. When
two consonants come together, a short vowel is sometimes inserted, or
one is prefixed: as, wheat, wohet; Andrew, Antilu ; bridle, bilitel;
Stephen, Istifin; Reid, Olit.
5. CONTRACTIONS.
Contractions by the elision of vowels or consonants are frequent in both
simple and compound words and phrases. A few examples are given:
chuka ay ont antah, for onvt antah, he goes to and stays at the house.
anont aya, for anolit ayah, he goes along and tells it.
bot vbi, for bolit vbih, he beats and kills.
chukachvfa, for chuka achvfa, a family.
chukfushe, for chukti ushi, a lamb.
issakshup, for issi hakshup, a deer skin.
siaknip, for sa haknip, my body.
6. CONSONANT CHANGES.
The following change of the consonants may take place : ch may change
tosh: ochiah, she draws water ; oshtiah, she goes to draw water ; tanchi,
corn, tashishi, corn-fodder. Sh may change to t, as in the article-pro-
noun osh, ot. K and t, and] and m, are interchangeable in a few words:
as ikhana to ithana, to know ; oktvni to ottvni, to appear ; omba to oma,
to rain ; yukpa changes to yuppa, to be pleased.
7%. VOWEL CHANGES.
a shortened becomes v, as chumpa, to buy, chumpvt iah, he goes to
buy.
é shortened becomes i, as emah, imah, he gives.
0 shortened becomes u, as tok, tuk, it was, hommah it is red, hummah
it is reddish.
v lengthened becomes a.
i lengthened becomes e, as pisah, pesah, he sees.
ti lengthened becomes o.
o in holissoh becomes i in hollisichih, he writes.
a in momah becomes i in mominchih.
8. NASAL CHANGES.
Exact rules for these changes are not easily given. The nasals a, i, 0,
u, stand before the consonants f, h, hl, k, n, s, sh, w, and y; as i fuli, his
switch ; i hollisso, his book ; i kana, his friend ; i wak, his cow ; i yuka,
his prisoner. The nasal marks are changed to the letter m before the
diphthongs, the vowels, and the consonants b, m, and p; and to the letter
1870.] ve [Brinton.
n before ch, lh, 1, and t; but to these rules there are exceptions ; as, imi
shilombish, his spirit ; i ponaklo, to inquire of him; nan anoli, an in-
former; nan illi, death. The position of the organs of speech preparatory
to the utterance of the succeeding letter causes a change in the nasal
sound ; as, i wak, his cow; im issuba, his horse ; in chuka, his house.
9. DOUBLED CONSONANTS.
Consonants are doubled in the intensive form of verbs and adjectives ;
as,
alota, to be full. vilota, to be quite full.
anoa, to be reported. vnnoa, to be commonly reported.
anumpa, to be spoken. vynnumpa, to be much spoken.
himak, now. himmak, hereafter, after all.
pila, thither. pilla, away there.
kvnia, gone. kynnia, really gone. 0
When the consonant y is doubled, the first one is transformed into i ;
as,
hoyo, to look for. hoiya, to look for earnestly.
ayukpa, to be glad of. aiyukpa, to be very glad of.
ayohmi, to do so there. aiyohmi, to do so really.
10. SYLLABIFICATION.
Syllables usually terminate in a vowel sound, but may end with a con-
sonant. When two simple consonants occur in the same word, the first
ends one syllable and the second commences the succeeding one 3 as,
bvnna, to want; tohbi, to be white. The double consonants ch, sh, hl,
and lh, are inseparable. The long vowels have their full sound in all ac-
cented syllables, except the vowel i, which is occasionally short, as in sipsi,
a poplar, ilh, to die. In words of two or more syllables the accented sy!-
lable takes a consonant, which is heard in both syllables; as, hina, a word,
pronounced hinna. In some words the consonant is doubled ; as, illi, to
die ; putta, all. Ina few instances the mark / has been used to indicate
emphasis and the imperative mood; as, Luke X. 37, i nukhaklo tok a/, he
that showed mercy on him.
11. ACCENT.
In words of two or more syllables the penult is accented ; as, kan/chi,
to sell; ano/li, to relate. In words of four or more syllables there is a
secondary accent on the second syllable before the penult ; as, po/hlomo/li,
to double them up; anum/pohon‘li, to keep talking. There is another
accent which falls on the final syllable of such words as in English are
followed by marks of punctuation, from the comma to the period. It is
called the pause accent. Consonants take the accent merely, while final
vowels take the rough aspirate h suffixed.
12. DIVISION OF WORDS.
Allsimple words are written separately. There are, however, words
compounded with prefixes, suffixes, and inseparable pronouns, which are
written as one. But to avoid confusion, whenever it is possible, the ele-
ments of each clause are written and printed separately.
324 [February 4,
Brinton. }
13. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN A SENTENCE.
The connective.
The subject and its modifications.
The object and its modifications.
The verb or predicate, with its modifications.
Time when comes both before and after the subject.
Time how long is similarly placed, and also at the close of the sen-
tence ; Luke I. 24; IV. 20.
6. Instrument and means, with modifications, precede the verb.
7. Adjectives follow nouns.
8. Adverbs follow verbs, adjectives, and adverbs.
9. Infinitives precede the word on which they depend.
10. The place where, comes next after the time when.
11. The imperative follows the noun which is its object ; Luke I. 3, 9.
12. The predicate is often at or near the close of the sentence. See
Mat. V. 1—12 verses.
2
k= 62
ot
PART SECOND.
GRAMMATICAL FORMS AND INFLECTIONS.
_ PARTS OF SPEECH.
There are in Choctaw nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely :
Article-pronouns, or post-positive particles.
Pronouns, or substitutes.
Verbs.
Prepositions, or pre-positive particles.
Nouns, or names.
Adjectives, or attributes.
Adverbs, or modifiers.
Conjunctions, or connectives.
Se) BD SIE 1G be ONE
Interjections, or exclamations.
CHAPTER I.
THE ARTICLE-PRONOUNS.
$1. This is the most difficult part of Choctaw Grammar. The want of
separate words corresponding to the English articles, of the personal pro-
nouns in the third persons singular and plural, the relative pronouns
single and double, and the copulas, is much felt by Americans in studying
this language. The article-pronouns are used to supply these wants in a
great variety of ways. They do not always admit of a translation. They
often merely indicate the case of a word or clause. An accurate and full
explanation of them is not attempted. Only a few leading remarks and
rules are presented.
§ 2. The use of the article-pronouns is for definite and distinctive speci-
fication, limitation, emphasis, and prominence, and to show the connection
and relation which one word, paragraph, or clause bears to another.
1870.] 325 (Brinton.
§ 8. They are placed after nouns and pronouns with their attributes,
after verbs, adverbs, and their attributes, after prepositions and conjunc-
tions. They are definite, distinctive, and contradistinctive, subjective,
objective, and copulative. A part of speech can take more than one at
a time.
$4, They may be translated by (1) the articles a, an, the, (2) the adjec-
tive pronouns one, ones, some, (3) the personal pronouns he, she, it, they,
in the nominative case, and him, her, it, them, in the oblique case, (4) the
relatives who, which, what, that, in the nominative case, and whom, which,
what, that in the oblique case, (5) by the double relatives he who, she
who, that which, and they who, (6) and by the one who, the ones who,
and the ones whom. Often they are not to be translated in English.
§ 5. The primary or ground forms of the article-pronouns are a definite,
and © distinctive. They are used (1) as articles, (2) as personal pronouns
in the third persons singular and plural, (3) as relative pronouns, single
and double, in both numbers, (4) as adjective pronouns, (95) as copulas.
§ 6. a is definite, and when used as an article is much like the English
article the, though it is also translated by a, or an. @ is distinctive, and
corresponds to the indefinite @ or an in English, or to the adjective pro-
nouns one, ones, some. @ implies certain knowledge, while @ ignores
other objects and does not make certain the objects it specifies otherwise
than that they belong to one species or kind. © is emphatic. Both are
used for specification, emphasis, and case.!
§ 7. In the oblique case nouns are sometimes found without either of
them. And when they are used, they may be rendered by either of the
articles, or as mentioned above.
§ 8. The article-pronouns have (1) variations, and (2) modifications.
§ 9. @ DEFINITE.
a may be varied by becoming vV, e, or i.
It is modified by suffixing various letters, which alter its signification,
thus :
1 Definite and Distinctive. — These two forms of speech run through the whole language, and
modify not only article-pronouns, nouns, verbs, and conjunctions, but even clauses and sentences.
Mr. Byington explains the double plural of the personal pronoun of the first person, common to
nearly all American languages, and generally known as the exclusive plural (excluding the second
person) and inclusive plural (including the second person, with or without the third person), the
former as definite, the latter as distinctive. These plurals, he says, ‘correspond to a definite and
© distinctive;” and of the separable personal pronouns, vno and sia, he says, “‘the difference be
tween them is similar to that between a and o.” The distinctive expresses in its broadest sense
the signification of the word or clause, but lends an emphasis which distinguishes it from any word
or clause of allied purport; the definite defines or limits the signification to some specific, known
word, individual, or act. Vno, I, distinctive, begins a sentence, the speaker being as yet vague;
but as soon as the speaker is defined by a verb, adjective, or other qualifying word, the pronoun
changes to sia, I, definite. Vhli, definite, edge, limit, to be the edge or limit of anything, to bound
it; this signification is extended in the distinctive form ahli, to be the whole of anything, hence
to be true, truth.
A. P. 8 —VOL. XI.—13E
Brinton.] 326
[February 4,
It adds t, to form the nominative case, at, vt, et, My,
a nasal sound, to form the oblique case, 4, i
h, to form an affirmative (predicate acdniren ah, it is the;
h, and varies to e, to form an affirmative (predicate absolute),
eh, it is;
k, to form a determinate definite, ak, the, that; and kvt, ket,
kit;
sh, to form a renewed mention definite, ash, vsh, the said, the
same;
mo, to form a renewed mention distinctive, amo, vmo, the ones.
It prefixes m in mvt, ma, mak, to express a simultaneous, or concomi-
tant object or act, the too; e.g. Luke XVI. 25, Svso ma! Son! (@. e.
thou, too, my son).
§ 10. @ DISTINCTIVE.
© is modified in a similar manner.
It adds sh, t, or cha, to form the nominative, osh, ot, ocha;
a nasal to form the oblique case, 0, ona;
h, to form an affirmative (predicate distinctive), oh, that is so;
k, to form a determinate distinctive. ok, that one is so;
sh, to form a renewed mention distinctive, osh, the said ones;
mo, to form a renewed mention concomitant, omo, the said
ones, too;
kb, to form an optative, okb, oh, that it were so;
km, to form a conditional, okm, if it were so;
keh, to form an affirmative contradistinctive, okeh, it is so and
not otherwise;
t, cha, and na, to form connectives.
$11. The definite and the distinctive are both used separately after one
subject, and then the definite follows the noun, and the distinctive its
modification. Thus John III. 1, Hatak vt Falisi yosh, a man who wasa
Pharisee ; Luke X. 39, itibapishi hvt Meli hohchifo hosh, a sister whose
name was Mary. The distinctive may also be used first, and the definite
follow the modification ; Luke XI. 27, ikfoka yvt yammak osh, the womb
that.
§ 12. These two article-pronouns and their modifications combine with
each other to form the third class, the CONTRADISTINCTIVES.
§ 13. THE CONTRADISTINCTIVES.
The definite @ in combination with the distinctive 0:
at, et, vt, take o to form a contradistinctive a, to, eto, uto, nom. case.
a in the oblique case changes to an and takes 0, ano, vno.
ak takes o to make the determinate contradistinctive, ako.
mak takes o to make a simultaneous or successive contradistinctive,
mako.
myt in the nominative case takes o to form a contradistinctive, mvto.
ma in the oblique case becomes man, and takes 0, mano.
ak becomes ok in ak ok, for intensity of specification.
mak takes ok in mak ok, for the same reason.
1870.] 327
(Brinton.
a takes mo to form a definite and indeclinable renewed mention in
recent past time, as Luke XVI. 13, achvfa kamo, the one.
The distinctive 0 in combination with the definite a :
ok takes vt in okyt, nom. case, contradistinctive.
ok takes a in oka, oblique case.
ok takes ah in okah, a distinctive and definite predicate.
ok takes eh in okeh, a distinctive and absolute predicate.
ok takes ato, vta, in okvta, nom. and okanto.
ok takes ano or yno in okvno, oblique case.
‘ok takes ak in okak, to double the definitive force of the pronoun.
ok ak takes the pronoun o in okakosh, okako, as a strong definite and
concessive, Mark XY. 31.
o takes mo in omo, renewed mention in the remote past tense, inde-
clinable.
$14. The following table presents the values and significations of the
article-pronouns and their modifying particles, in a brief and compre-
hensive manner :
a, V, €, i, definite, implying knowledge of the thing, act or individual
named ; as, wak a, the cow, not a or some cow.
0, distinctive, generic, implying kind and ignoring other objects, but
not rendering the thing, act, or individual certain. It does not specify
particular objects, but merely distinguishes them ; as, wak 0, a cow, not
a horse.
ch, connective, and.
h, predicative or affirmative, the sign of existence.
k, determinate or demonstrative, that, the.
kb, optative, wishing it were so, oh that ; definite ; the distinctive form
is okb.
km, suppositive, conditional, or contingent, if, when, provided ; definite ;
the distinctive form is okm.
m, successive, simultaneous, compellative, when, then, also, too, oh.
mo, renewed mention distinctive, the same, the said; omo, remotely
past ; amo, recently past.
sh, renewed mention definite of recent past time.
shkeh, definite affirmation, it is.
okeh, distinctive affirmation, it is so and not otherwise.
t, connective, continuative, definite ; a copula, and.
y, euphonic.
a, 0, i, nasals, objectives and copulas.
In order that these modifications may be more perfectly understood,
some further explanations of the most important of them are added.
§ 15. Ih predicative, or affirmative. The verb of existence, to be, does
not occur in Choctaw, and this particle supplies its place. It is suffixed
to nouns, pronouns, infinitives, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunc-
tions, and article-pronouns, which end in a vowel, to form a proposition ;
Brinton.] 328 [February 4,
when they end in a consonant, the consonant receives an accent called the
substantive verb accent. Examples:
vila, a child. vilah, it is a child.
vno, I. vnoh, it is I.
takchi, to tie. takchih, he ties.
kvllo, strong. kvlloh, he is strong.
fehna, very. fehnah, it is very.
anukaka, within. anukakah, it is within.
minti, come. mintih, it is come.
mihma, and. mihmah, and it is.
a, the. ah, it is the.
0, a, one. oh, it is a, it is one.
he, will, shall. heh, it will be, it shall be.
hatak, man. hatak’, it is a man.
chukvsh, heart. chukvsh/’, it is the heart.
tuk, tok, was, has en. tuk’, tok’, it was, it has been.
This particle is not subject to any change for person, number, or gender.
Its place is at the end of a proposition. In such expressions as kullo
fehnah, he is very strong, the h is removed from kulloh, he is strong, to
the end of the sentence. When used with a verb and article-pronoun. it
is in printing often prefixed to the latter, instead of beiug suffixed to the
former, where it properly belongs; as, achi bokeh, for achih okeh, he
there says.
$16. Kk determinate. This particle limits with precision the word to
which it is joined,—just that much, no more, no less, and no other. Like
h, it is a suffix, although it is often written asa prefix of the following
word. Thus, ilvppvt achukma kvt yuammak 0 ishahli hokeh, this in good-
ness is better than that, should be ilvppvt achukmak vt yummak o i
shahlih oke. The particle k is also used as a prefix to a vowel in the past
and future tenses of verbs in the negative forms, where it has reference to
the verb, in order to limit it in this form; as, ik kvllo ke tuk, which
should be written, ik kvllok etuk. In renewed mention in remote past
time, k is changed to ch, as chash, chamo, for kash, kamo; and in some
instances h and k are interchangeable, as nachi yim mikvt or nachi yim
mihvt, thy faith.
$17. m successive, simultaneous, compellative. This is a prefix, never
a suffix, of a. It may be translated after nouns by, the also, the too; and
after verbs by when, then, when then, then when. Examples: iyi ma,
the feet too; vmoshi mvto, as for my uncle, he too; aki mvno, as for my
father, him also. As a compellative it is prefixed to ah; miko mah, a.
king. It is prefixed to ak to make a definite expression that something is
just now gone before, or will next follow, or is now passing; as, ia lih mak
okeh, I am going now.
$18. The form shkeh. The absolute article-pronoun termination
shkeh is definite, and follows verbs, adjectives, and adverbs in the present
and future tenses, and the pronouns sia, chia, I, thou, ete.
ia lish keh, I go, absolutely, present tense, I am going, I am off.
ia lash keh, I shall go, I will go, let me go, let me off.
1870.] 329 (Brinton.
The distinctive form is seen in ia li hok eh, I go instead of doing some-
thing else ; ia lish, I go, and k that, eh, it is; ia la chi shk eh, go I will
and that it is; ia lashke, indefinite and remote future for ia la heshke.
$19. The conditional forms Kmn definite, and @Kmn distinctive.
The definite conditional is formed from k determinate and suffix of a
word, and m a successive and prefix of a, kma. Luke XII. 538; ia lih, I
go; ia lik, a determinate act; ia lik ma, when I go then..
The distinctive conditional is made by the pronoun o before k in okm;
ia li hokma, if I go, suppose I go; km and okm take the definite a with
its modifications.
§ 20. The optative forms kb definite and oKb distinctive. These par-
ticles form the optative mood, by prefixing the infinitive of the verb.
§ 21. Y is used as a prefix to mand o. It is euphonic after the vowels
a, i, 0, and before a and 0; vila yvt, villa yosh, ushi yvt, in place of vila vt
vila osh, vshi vt.
§ 22. The definite article-pronoun of comparison or contrast. This is
used to specify objects either as inferior or superior to others when placed
in contrast, corresponding to the phrases ‘‘how much more,’ ‘“‘how much
less,’’ especially with definite and pointed emphasis. The simple form is
het in the nominative, and hi in the oblique case. But these are not in
use. The compound forms only are used.
Nom. case, ak het, mak het, okak het.
Oblique case, ak hi, mak hi, okak hi.
Contradistinctive form.
Nom. case, ak heto, mak heto, okak heto.
Oblique case, ak heno, mak heno, okak heno.
Conditional form.
Nom. case, k mak het Oblique case, k mak hi
- ok mak het ok mak hi
k mak heto k mak heno
ok mak heto. ok mak heno.
Examples of the use of these pronouns where a contrast is expressed
may be found in John III. 20, hokakheto, Mat. XXIII. 26, yokakheto, 1
John Y. 9, 2 Cor. III. 8, 9, Luke X. 35, John VIII. 4.
§ 22. GENERAL TABLE OF DECLENSIONS OF THE ARTICLE-PRONOUNS.
The definite:
Nom. case, at, vt, et, it.
Oblique case, q, i, i.
The distinctive:
Nom. case, osh, ot, ocha.
Oblique case, 0, 0, ona.
_ The contradistinctive:
Nom. case, ato, vto, eto, heto, anto, atoha.
Oblique case, ano, yno, eno, heno, ano, anoha.
Or in one table:
Nom. case, at, vt, et, it, het; osh, ot, ocha; ato, vto, eto, heto; anto, atoha.
Oblique case, a, g, i, i, hi; 0, 0, ona; ano, vno, eno, heno; ano, anoha.
Brinton.] 330
[February 4,
$ 24. TRANSLATION OF THE ARTICLE-PRONOUNS, AND THEIR
MODIFICATIONS.
a definite. When a immediately follows a noun it may generally
be translated by the article, or else omitted. When any verb is under-
. stood in connection with a noun, @ should be translated by a relative pro-
noun; as, Atvm ak osh hatak moma i tikba hatok, Adam he was of all men
the first of them he was; Adam the one who of all men was the first.
When a modifying word or words follow the noun, the particle comes last;
as, miko vt mintih, the king comes; miko 9, pisah, the king he sees (regem
videt); miko chito vt mintih, the great king comes; miko chito a pisah, he
sees the great king. The particle follows pronouns and designates their
cases, vno vt, I; vno a, me.
§ 25. @ distinctive. When it follows nouns it denotes them as un-
known; nvni chaha yo, a mountain; the particular mountain is not known,
but it is made a distinctive object, a mountain and not a plain, or other
place. The difference between @ and © may be seen in Mat. XVII. 1,
and 9, nynih chaha yo, a mountain; nvnih chaha ya, the mountain. It has
an emphatic and prominent meaning in such sentences as Gal. IV. 2, Pal
sia hosh, I, Paul; Acts VIII. 20, Chihowa yosh nan ima ya, the gift of
God; Acts V. 4, hatak 0, men. Like a, it is rendered by the personal pro-
nouns in both cases and numbers, he, she, it, they, him, her, it, them,
and by the relative and double pronouns. It has a contradistinctive sense
in such expressions as Mat. XXY. 3, bila yano, as for the oil, in distinction
from the lamps. It is used after verbs, and with some conjunctions, to
render a distinct reason for an action; as, Luke XI. 37, ont chukowa cha,
impa chi hosh )binili tok, he came in and sat down for to eat. It hasa
oncessive sense when combined with the particles ok ak; as, yohmic
hokak o, although it is so.
Sometimes the article-pronouns are used to translate the articles a
and the, and sometimes they are used in Choctaw where the articles do
not occur in English. Some examples from Mark I. will illustrate this.
The beginning, vmmonak vt; the gospel, vbanumpa; the son of Jehovah,
Chihowa ushi; the way, ataya ya; the river of Jordan, Chatan okhina yako; _
John, Chanvt; Jordan, Chatan ako; Jesus, Chisvs vt; a girdle, yskofvchi
yo; water, oka yo; the water, oka ya; a voice, anumpa hvt; the angels,
enchel vhleha hosh; the sea, ok hota; the ship, peni ash; fishers of men,
hatak hokli yo; the unclean spirit, shilombish okpulo ash osh; the unclean
spirits, shilombish okpulo hak.
Matth. XV. 38: Mihma okla impa tuk vt, ohoyo vila aiena hokvto asha
ho, hatak 4000 ushta tok;.And they that did eat were 4000 men, beside
women and children. Here vt makes those who ate definite, while ho
makes the women and children distinctive and objective.
Acts IX. 6. nanta hak o katiohmila hi a? What wilt thou have me do?
is definite; but, Acts XXII. 10: nanta ko katiohmi la chi ho? is distine-
tive.
1870. ]
[S)
331
[Brinton.
S 26. TABLE OF TRANSLATIONS OF THE ARTICLE—PRONOUNS.
1. Nominative'case, as articles;
. Definite, at vt, et, it, a, the.
. Distinctive, osh, ot, ocha. a, an, the one.
2. Nom. case, as personal pronouns;
1. Definite, at, vt, et, it, he, she, it, they.
vo
one,
. Distinctive, osh, ot, ocha, he, she, it, they.
3. Nom. case, as relative pronouns;
Definite, at, vt, et, it, who, which, what, that.
4. Nom. case, as double pronouns;
some one, some who.
5. Renewed mention;
1. Definite, ash, the, the said, the aforesaid.
(os)
alle
they
. Distinctive, ok, ak, osh, the one, any one who.
6. Contradistinctive;
. Definite, at, vt, et, it, he who, she who, that which, they who.
. Distinctive, osh, ot, ocha, the one who, some who, the ones who, any
Distinctive, compound, ato, vto, eto, he as for, she as for, it as for,
as for (he as for him, etc).
2. Definite compound, okvto, they which, such as they. See Luke VII.
25, XII. 4.
7. Definite distinctives;
ak osh, he the one who, she the one who, it the one which, they the
ones
ok
who, they who and not others.
8. Distinctive definite;
vt, he, she, it, they particularly.
9. Renewed mention distinctive;
ash, osh, the said he, the said slie, the said they. Luke VII. 20, hatak
ash ot.
rw)
. Definite, a,
10. Conditional;
. Definite, kmvt, if the, when the, if he, if she.
. Distinctive, okmvt, if it were he then, etc.
. Contradistinctive, okmvto, if then as for him, ete.
11. Oblique case, as articles;
i, a, an, the.
. Distinctive, 0, ona, a, the, any, some.
12. Oblique case, as personal pronouns;
. Definite, a, i, him, her, it, them.
. Distinctive, 0, ona, him, her, it, them.
13. Relative pronouns;
Definite, a, i, whom, which, what.
14. Double pronouns;
. Definite, a, i, him whom, her whom, those whom.
. Distinctive, 0, ona, the one whom.
15. Renewed mention;
ash, the said. Luke VII. 19, Chan ash ot.
Brinton.] 332 [February 4,
16. Definite and distinctive;
ok ak 0, the one whom, any one whom.
17. Contradistinctives;
ano, vno, eno, as for him, her, it, them.
kyno, myno, okyno.
18. Definite distinctive;
ak o, the one whom, he whom, those whom and not others. ak ok,
Luke VIII. 12.
19. Distinctive definite;
aka, him, her, them.
20. Renewed mention distinctive;
ash 0, the said.
21. Conditional;
Definite, kma, if him, if her, if it, if them. Luke XII. 53.
Distinctive, okma, if so.
Definite, kmvno, if him, etc., what then.
Distinctive, okmvno, if so what then.
21. Comparative forms;
1. Nom. ak het, particularly he, she, it, you, I, or they.
2. Oblique, ak hi, particularly him, her, it, you, me, or them.
22. Predicative form;
1. Definite, ah, eh, he is, she is, it is, they are.
2. Distinctive, oh.
1. Definite and final, shkeh, it is.
2. Distinctive and final, okeh, it is so and in no other way.
23. Ancient and sonorous forms;
wrwre
ocha, hocha, yocha. ona, hona, yona.
katoha. kanoha.
okakanto. okakano.
okakocha. 2 akakona.
These were formerly used by the orators at the public assemblies, but
are now almost obsolete.!
The compound forms often admit of both the articles, the pronouns,
and the relatives, in their translation; alam okash, he the one who;
nukhaklo vkleha yokvto, the last word being composed of y euphonic, o
distinctive, k demonstrative, a definite (varied to v), t connective, and o
final, and is in form a contra-distinctive, ‘‘the merciful, they who are so,
as for them, they.”’ ‘
§ 27. Position of the article-pronouns. The article and personal pro-
nouns generally follow nouns and their attributes. The relatives follow
pronouns, verbs and their attributes; vno vt, I who, ia li tuk vt, I who
went I, Svso ilvppvt illi tuk osh, falamvt okchaya hoke, Luke XV. 24.
1 In former times there was a well known solemn style which abounded in sonorous words. One
part of a sentence was nicely balanced by another, and in delivery a chanting or metrical intonation
was used. At the close of each paragraph the orator would invite the people to listen, who would
in turn indicate approval by crying out yymmah! It is that! (or ‘‘ that’s so”); and viphesa! It is
right! The most frequent peculiarity of the style was the lengthened pronominal suffixes, as for
instance, Nanta hocha? What isit? Nanahona, something. (Byington MSS).
339 [Brinton.
1870. ]
The article-pronouns are moveable, and may be transferred from the
logical to the grammatical subject, in order that they may retain their
character as suffixes.
In the tenses, the article-pronouns may either precede the particle by
which the tense is indicated, as, a tok, etok, itok, achi, or follow it, as, a-
tuk a, a tok a, achika, a tuk o, a tok o (literally, a, he; tok, past tense
particle, did; 0, it; he did it); anta la chi hatuk oke, Luke XIX. 5, I must
abide; hlypi sabvnnah a tuk, salt I wanted it was, it was salt that I wanted,
h predicative, a a relative pronoun.
§ 28. Change of case. A peculiarity in the use of the article-pronoun
with nouns is that the nominative case changes to the oblique case when
another subject is introduced. For example, Matthew XIII. 4, Atuk osh
hokchi ma na nihi kanimi kvt hina lapalika yo kaha tok; atuk o hushi
puta kvt ant vpvt tahli tok. Here osh, nom. he (the sower), is changed to
ma, oblique, before na nihi kanimi kvt, another subject (some of the seed);
and this latter nominative becomes atuk 0, oblique, before the next sub-
ject, hushi puta kvt, (the fowls).
§ 29. USE OF THE ARTICLE-PRONOUN WITH NOUNS.
In connection with nouns, the article-pronouns indicate case, and may
thus be regarded as forming a sort of declension. For example:
hatak, man, men.
Nom. case. Oblique case.
hatak okvt, the man, as a man. hatak amo, the said, the same man.
hatak okvto, the man, asforthe man. hatak oka, as a man, a man.
hatak okmvto, when the men they. hatak okvno, the men they.
hatak ash osh, men the said. hhatak okmvno, if men then.
peni, a boat, boats.
peni vt, the boat, a boat.
peni 0, a boat, some boat.
peni mvt, the boat also, a boat too, or also.
peni vto, peni anto, as for the boat, contradistinctive.
peni mvto, as for the boat, also, then.
peni amo, the said boat.
peni osh, a boat, one boat, the boats, some boats.
peni a tuk, peni ya tok, the boat which was.
peni a chi, the boat which will be.
peni a hinla,* the boat which can be.
Example: Luke XVII. 32, Lat tekchi a tok a hvsh ithaiyanashke, she
who was the wife of Lot, her remember.
§ 30. TABULAR LIST OF ARTICLE-PRONOUNS.!
Definite forms. Distinctive forms.
Subjective. Objective. Subjective. Objective.
at, vt, et, it, ish a, i osh (0)
vto, ato ano, vno okvt oka
1 Subjective and Objective,—These expressions are used by Mr. Byington rather in their logical than
their grammatical sense, and must be so understood in this Table. The list here givenis evidently
not complete, but it is accurately copied from his latest revision.
A. P. §.—VOL. xI.—14E
Brinton. ] Bd
[February 4,
Definite forms.. « — | Distinctive forms.
Subjective. Objective. | Subjective. Objective.
mvt ma § okmvt okma
myvto myno | okbat okbeh
ak, mak, okbato okbano
kmyt kma omo omo
kmyto kmak
kbat kba
cha na
amo amo
lish lil |
Neither subjective nor objective.
h | ok
eh | ok ak
akok okm
mak | okmak
km okvmo, okamo
| ochosh.
Finals, or verb substantive forms.
h, eh,
shkeh hokeh
ah oh
CHAPTE SRT:
PRONOUNS.
§ 1. The pronouns are divided into two classes, separable and insepara-
ble.. Separable pronouns are independent words. Inseparable pronouns
are fragmentary words, and are all prefixed to other words, except li, I,
which is suffixed.
I. SEPARABLE PRONOUNS.
$2. These are of four classes, 1, distinctive personal; 2 2, Eleisatine per-
sonal; 3, possessive; 4, personal-and-possessive.
1. The distinctive, or emphatic personal.
Simple form. With h predicative.
vno, I, me, mine. vnoh, it is I, it is mine.
chishno, thou, thee, thine. chishnoh, it is thou, thine.
pishno, we, us, our (def). pishnoh, it is we, ours.
hvppishno, we, us, our (dis). hypishnoh, it is we, ours.
hvchishno, you, yours. hvehishnoh, it is you, yours.
$ 3. These pronouns are used in the nominative, oblique, and possessive
cases for all genders, without change of form. Their case is shown by the
article-pronouns, which they take for specification, emphasis, and case.
1870.] 339 [Brinton.
They are prominent, generally standing at the beginning of a sentence
without an antecedent, and are repeated by the inseparable pronouns
which follow in the same clause or sentence. They are nasalized with
some of the article-pronouns; as, vno vto, vnonto, as for me; vno ak osh,
I the one who, but vnak osh, I being the one who.
Note.—The first person plural has two forms. The first is the definite
or exclusive plural, and does not include all who are present, but only a
fixed number. The second is the distinctive or inclusive plural, and em-
braces the speaker and all who are present, but ignores all others. All
personal and possessive pronouns have this double plural.!
2. The definite Personal.
Simple form. With h predicative.
sia, I, me. siah, I am.
chia, thou, thee. chiah, thou art.
pia, we, (def.) us. piah, we are.
hypia, we, (dis.) us. hvpiah, we are.
hvchia, you. hvchiah, you are.
These pronouns generally have an antecedent, either a noun, or the dis-
tinctive personal pronoun, or both. They may be in the nominative or
oblique case, which is denoted by the article-pronoun which follows them.
§ 4. The personal pronouns in the third person, singular and plural, are
wanting. They are supplied by a gesture, or by other pronouns; as,
ilvppa, this; yymma, that; ilap, he, she, it, his, her, its; mih, he, she, it,
they, the same, the said; okla, people. When no pronoun is expressed,
the third person is understood.
§ 5. Examples of the use of the definite and distinctive personal pro-
nouns: Acts X. 26, vno ak kia hatak sia akinli hoke, J am also a man;
Mat. XIV. 27, vno ash sia hoke, it is 7; Luke XVIII. 18, nan ashvchi sia
hoka, for 1 am a sinner; Exodus XX. 2, vno ak osh Chin Chitokaka Chi-
howah sia hosh Echip yakni a chi kokchi li tuk oke, I am the Lord
thy God which have brought the out of the land of Egypt, vno I distince-
tive, sia I definite.
1T have here retained Mr. Byington’s definition, but I have no doubt the Choctaw double plural
is similar to that of other American tongues. The first plural, definite or exclusive, excludes the
second person; the second, distinctive or inclusive plural, includes the second person, and may or
may not,include the third person. Thus the Indians in speaking to the whites, would say pishno,
we (excluding the hearers), but to those of their own nation, hvpishno (including the hearers),
The terms exclusive and inclusive to designate this distinction were, I think, first introduced by
Father Holguin, in his Grammatica y Arte Nveva dela Lengva Qquichua (Ciudad de los Reyes, 1607),
and he calls attention to the fact that when used with verbs, the distinction refers to the action
of the verb: ‘“‘mas no se toma con verbos, por razon del pronombre, como aqui [where the pro-
nouns are independent], sinv por la significacion del verbo, si es en todos o no ygual, 0 si se excluyen
de laaccion del verbo, 0 de su significacion, aquellos con quien se habla” (fol. 12 recto). In the
Grammar of the Dakota Language p. 9,the Rev. Mr. Riggs defines the inclusive as a dual (I and
thou), the correctness of which I doubt, as it may also mean I and you, or We and you. Equally
erroneous is Mr. Du Ponceau’s comparison of the exclusive plural with nous autres,in French
(Langues Sauvages de V Amerique du Nord,p. 155), because nous autres does not necessarily exclude the
hearers.
Brinton.] 336 [February 4,
6. The possessive.
Simple form. With h predicative.
vmmi, mine. vmmih, it is mine.
chimmi, thine. chimmih. it is thine.
immi, his, hers. immih, it is his, hers.
pimmi, ours (def). pimmih, it is ours.
hvpimmi, ours (dis). hvypimmih, it is ours.
hvchimmi, yours. hvchimmih, it is yours.
immi, theirs. immih, it is theirs.
The reciprocal forms of this pronoun are: ittimmi, each other’s; ittimmih,
they are each other’s, singular and plural.
§ 7. Personal-and-possessive pronouns.
Simple form. With h predicative.
Definite, ilap, { he, she, it, and apah
ilapa ; his, hers, its, his own, ilapah
Distinctive, ilapo | they, theirs, their own. ilapoh
it is his, hers, its, theirs,
etc.
The first and second persons are formed by prefixing inseparable per-
sonal pronouns; thus:
salap, I myself, me myself.
chilap, thou thyself, thee thyself.
pilap, we, us, ourselves (def).
hvpilap, we, us, ourselves (dis).
hvehilap, you yourselves.
And to these again the inseparable possessive pronouns may be suffixed;
thus:
Def. ilapi, ilapim, ilapin, his own, her own, their own.
Dis. ilapoi, ilapoim, ilapoin, his own, etc.
Examples: Mark I. 34, ilapa okla ithana hatuk 0, because they knew
him; Mat. X. 32, vno ak kia ilapa, I also him; John XIII. 3, ilap ak o
ibbak a, his hands.
§ 8. The separable pronouns are the same for all genders, as are also all
other pronouns, nouns, and verbs. They take the article-pronouns for the
purpose of specification, emphasis and case. They can all take the inten-
sive pronoun inli, self; ¢. g.: vno inli, I myself too; sia hak inli, ilap ak
inli, ete.
II INSEPARABLE PRONOUNS.
$9. These are of seven classes, 1, subjective-personal, 2, objective-per-
sonal, 8, objective-possessive, 4, reflexive, 5, reciprocal personal, 6, recip-
rocral possessive, 7, the marriage or sacred pronoun. They are always
prefixed (except li, I,) to the words with which they are in concord, and
are never used alone.
§ 10 The subjective-personal.
Affirmative form. Negative form.
li (a suffix, ) I. ak, I not.
ish, is, thou, chik, thou not.
1870.] 301 [Brinton.
Affirmative form. Negative form.
e, il, we (def). ik, he, she, it not.
eho, iloh, we (dis). ke, kil, we not.
hvsh, hvs, you. heloh, kiloh, we not.
hychik, you not.
ik, they not.
E and eho stand before consonants, il and iloh before vowels. The
third persons are wanting in the affirmative form. Li is the only one of
the subjective personals that takes the article-pronouns.
$11. These pronouns are used in the nominative case with transitive,
intransitive, neuter, and passive verbs. When used with neuter and
passive verbs they imply an active state, signification, being, or condition.
Examples:
Transitive verbs, tackchi, to tie.
takchih, he ties it (h predicative).
takchihlh, I tie it.
ish takchih, thou tiest it.
Intransitive verbs, nowa, to walk.
, nowa lih, I walk.
Neuter verbs, nusi, to sleep.
nuse lih, I sleep.
Passive verbs, holitopa, to be honored.
holitopalih, I get honor.
When these pronouns are used with neuter and passive verbs, the sub-
ject of the proposition is active.
These pronouns are rendered as possessives by changing the verbs to
nouns; as, apehlichi, to rule there; apelichi lih, I rule there; apelichi li,
my kingdom; ish apelichi, thy kingdom; it aiashvchi, our sins; itti bapishi
li Sal mah, my brother Saul (from itti bapishi, to suck the breast together).
g 12. The objective personal.
Affirmative form. Negative form.
S, Sa, Sv, Sai, si, I, me, my. iks, ik sa, ik sv, ik sai, ik so, not me.
chi, ch, thou, thee, thy. ik chi, ik ch, not thee.
wanting 4 ik, not him, not her.
pi, p, we, us our (def). ik pi, ik p, not us.
hypi, hvp, we us our (dis). ik hvpi, ik hyp, not us.
hvchi, hvch, you, your. ik hvchi, ik hvch, not you.
wanting ik, not them.
§ 138. These forms are used where by the pronoun no action is implied.
They are not in the nominative case, although in common conversation
they are thus translated. They should be treated as in the oblique case.
They are used as subjective, objective, or possessive pronouns, and are pre-
fixed to transitive, passive, and neuter verbs, to those nouns which pertain
to one’s person, to the various members, and to near family relatives.
Examples:
Transitive verbs: chi pesah, he sees thee.
hychi hakloh, he hears you.
Brinton.] 3 38
[February 4,
Passive verbs: chi tallakechih, bound thee it is.
Neuter verbs: chi abekah, thee sick be.
chi achukmah, thee good be.
sa yonhah, me fever be.
Names of members, and relatives: sa nushkoboh, my head, me head, it is.
sa chukvsh’, it is my heart.
svsoh, it is my son.
satekchih, it is my wife.
svpvfv, my dog, it is my family dog.
sabaiyih, it is my nephew.
subbitek’, it is my niece.
The h predicative, or its accent ’, will be observed at the end of these
sentences.
§ 14. The objective possessive.
Affirmative form.
a, am, vm, vmi, an, sa, sam, sum, sumi, san, my, of me, to me, for me,
from me, &e.
chi, chim, chimi, chin, of thee, ete.
i, im, imi, in, of him, her, it.
pi, pim, pimi, pin, of our (def).
hvpi, hvpim, hvpimi, hvpin, of our (dis).
“hvehi, hvchim, hvehimi, hvchin, of your.
i, im, imi, in. of their.
Negative form.
ik sa, iksam, iksvm, ik san, not of me, not to me, not for me.
ik chi, ikchim, ikchin, not of the, etc. °
ik i, ik im, ikin, not of him, her, it, ete.
ik pi, ikpim, ikpin, not of us.
ik hvpi, ikhvpim, ikhvpin, not of us.
ik hochi, ikhvchim, ikhvchin, not of you.
ik i, ikim, ikin, not of them.
$15. This class of pronouns is used where there is an acquisition and
possession, but not an implied ownership as a part of the thing spoken of."
Thus; a shapo, my hat (French, chapeau); vmissuba, my horse; an chuka,
my house, are things acquired and possessed; but sanushkobo, my head;
svbbak, my hand; are integral parts of my person. A few nouns relating
to the person take the possessive pronouns; as, vmiskonata foni, my col-
lar-bone; vm uksak foni, my ankle bone.
$16. These pronouns are prefixed to nouns and verbs, transitive, in-
transitive, passive, and neuter. Before nouns they may be translated, of
him, of her, in the singular, and of them in the plural; as, Chan in chuka,
John of him house, John’s house; Chan micha Chemis in chuka, John
and James’s house, or houses, for them, of them, ete.
Before transitive and intransitive verbs they may be rendered by to, for,
1 An analogous difference occurs in construction in the Algonkin dialects: “ Les étrés qui tiennent
leur maniére d’étre du Créateur, prennent la marque du possessif. Les étres qui tiennent leur
maniére d’étre de ’homme ne le prennent pas.” Etudes Philologiques sur quelques Langues Sau-
vages de V Amerique, p. 44.
«
1870.] 339 [Brinton.
from, or of him, of her, of them; as, in chumpah, he buys for or from him,
her, or them; i kanchih, he sells to him, or for him, or them; im ia lih, I
go for him, imonah, she goes to him; pim vlah, he comes to us, or for us.
Before passive and neuter verbs they may be translated by of him, for
him, to him; or, by I, thou, he. Examples:
Passive verbs, intvllakchih, she is bound for him.
i boa, it is beaten for him.
im patafah, it is plowed for him.
- Neuter verbs, i kulloh, he is hard to him.
im achukmah, he, she, it is good to him,
im puttah, they are all for him, all his.
in tonlah, it lies for him.
im ashah, they sit for him.
im ahobah, it seems to him.
$17. The reflexive.
This is ille, ill, he himself, she herself, etc. It is used where the subject
and object are the same. Example:
ille takchi, to tie himself or herself.
Affirmative forms.
ille takchih lih, I tie myself.
ish ille takehih, thou tiest thyself.
ille takchih, he ties himself, she, it, ete.
il ille takchih, we tie ourselves (def).
iloh ille takchih, we tie ourselves (dis).
hvsh ille takchih, you tie yourselves.
ille takchih, they tie themselves.
Negative forms.
ak ille takchoh, I do not tie myself.
chik ille takchoh, thou dost not tie thyself.
ik ille takchoh, he, she, does not tie himself, herself.
kil ille takchoh, \ we do not tie ourselves.
kiloh ille takchoh,
hvchik ille takchoh, you do not tie yourselves.
ik ille takchoh, : they do not tie themselves.
§ 18. The reciprocal-personal.
This is itti, itt; the former before a consonant, the latter before a vowel.
They are used where the subject and object both being either in the nom-
inative or oblique case mutually act on each other; as, itti takchih, to tie
each other together. Hxamples:
itti takchilih, I tie him together with me.
ish itti takchih, thou tiest him together with thyself.
itti takehih, he, she, it, they tie each other together.
il itti takchih, we tie each other together, (def).
iloh itti takchih, (dis).
hvsh itti takchih, you tie each other together.
itti halvllih, they pull each other.
srinton.] 340)
[February 4,
§ 19. Reciprocal possessive.
This is itti, ittim, ittin, of, to, for, from each other; as, itti halvlli, they
pull from or against each other. Both these and the preceding class,
unite with the subjective personal inseparable pronouns.
§ 20. The marriage or sacred pronoun.
This is ho before consonants, oh before vowels. It is used in the first,
second, and third persons singular, and the second and third persons
plural, as a substitute for son-in-law, father-in-law, mother-in-law, their
brothers, sisters, and cousins. It has no variation to express number,
case, or gender. ’ It is limited in use to the persons whose relationship is
created by marriage; except the husband and wife. It is going out of use,
as well as the ancient usages about marriage, especially that which re-
quired the mother-in-law and son-in-law to avoid each other. The use of
this pronoun may be compared to the emphatic he or she, with which the
master or mistress of the house is sometimes referred to in English; as,
when he comes back, meaning father, or husband. The father says to his
son-in-law, vmissuba ik hopeso, has he not seen my horse? oh ia lih, I
went with him; ho mintilih, I come with him, or her; oh ant ik sapeso ka
hinlah? will he not come to see me?
§ 21. Combinations of the six classes of inseparable pronouns with the
verb pisa, or pesa, to see.
1. The subjective and objective personal.
Affirmative form.
chi pesa lih,
pisa lih,
hvchi pesa lih,
pisa lih,
issa pesah,
ish pisah,
ish pi pesah,
ish pisah,
sa pesah,
chi pesah,
pisah,
pi pesah,
hvchi pesah,
pisah,
e chi pesah,
e pisah,
eho pisah,
e hvchi pesah,
e hohychi pisah,
e pisah,
hvs sa pesah,
hvsh pisah,
hvsh pi pesah,
T see thee,
I see him, her, or it,
I see you,
I see them,
thou seest me,
thou seest him, her, it,
thou seest us,
thou seest them,
he sees me,
he sees thee,
he sees him, her, it,
he sees us,
he or she sees thee,
he or she sees them,
we see thee,
we see him, her, it,
we see ourselvés (dis.),
we see you,
we (all present) see you,
we see them,
ye see me,
ye see him, her, it,
ye see us,
Negative form.
ak chi pesoh,
ak pesoh,
ak hychi pesoh,
ak pesoh,
chik sa pesoh,
chik pesoh,
chik pi pesoh,
chik pesoh;
ik sa pesoh,
ik chi pesoh,
ik pesoh,
ik pi pesoh,
ik hychi pesoh,
ik pesoh,
ke chi peso,
ke pesoh,
ke ho pesoh,
ke hvchi pesoh,
ke hohvchi pesoh,
ke pesoh,
hychik sa pesoh,
hychik pesoh,
hvchik pi pesoh,
341
1870. ]
Affirmative form.
hysh pisah,
sa pesah,
chi pesah,
ye see them,
they see me,
they see thee,
(Brinton.
Negative form.
hvchik pesoh,
ik sa pesoh,
ik chi pesoh,
ik pesoh,
ik pi pesoh,
ik hvchi pesoh,
ik pesoh.
pisah, they see him, her, it,
pi pesah, they see us,
hvchi pesah, they see you,
pisah, they see them,
2. Subjective personal and reflexive.
Affirmative.
I see myself,
thou seest thyself,
he, etc., sees himself,
we see ourselves (def.),
we see ourselves (dis. ),
you see yourselves,
they see themselves,
ille pis alib,
ish ille pisah,
ille pisah,
il ille pisah,
eloh ille pisah,
hysh ille pisah,
ille pisah,
Negative.
ak ille pesoh,
chik ille pesoh,
ik ille pesoh,
kil ille pesoh,
kiloh, ille pesoh,
hvck ille pesoh,
ik ille pesoh.
Ille occasionally takes qa locative and drops e; as, illahobachi, to make
like to himself.
3. Subjective, objective, and reciprocal-
Affirmative.
chitti pesa lih,
itti pesa lih,
hysh itti pesa lih,
I see thee and thou seest me,
I see him and he sees me,
I see you and you see me,
itti pesa lih,
is svtti pesah,
ish itti pesah,
ish pitti pesah,
ish itti pesah,
svtti pesah,
chitti pesah,
itti pesah,
pitti pesah,
hvchitti pesah,
itti pesah,
e chitti pesah,
il itti pesah,
iloh itti pesah,
e hvchitti pesah,
il itti pesah,
hvs sitti pesah,
hvsh itti pesah,
hysh pitti pesah,
hvsh itti pesah,
svtti pesah,
I see them, etc.,
personal.
Negative.
ak chitti pesoh,
ak itti pesoh,
ak hvchitti pesoh,
ak itti pesoh,
thou seest me and I see thee, chik svtti pesoh,
thou seest him and he sees thee, chik itti pesoh,
thou seest us and we see thee, chik pitti pesoh,
thou seest them and they see thee, chik itti pesoh,
he sees me and I see him, ik svtti pesoh,
he sees thee and thou seest him, ik chitti pesoh,
he sees him, her, and she, he, sees
him,
he sees us‘and we see him,
he sees you and you see him,
he sees them and they see him,
we see thee and thou seest us,
we see him and he sees us,
we see one another,
we see you and you see us,
we see them and they see us,
you see me and I see you,
you see him and he sees you,
you see us and we see you,
you see them and they see you,
they see me and I see them,
ik itti pesoh,
ik pitti pesoh,
ik hvchitti pesoh,
ik itti pesoh,
ke chitti pesoh,
kil itti pesoh,
kiloh itti pesoh,
ke hvchitti pesoh,
kil itti pesoh,
hvchik svtti pesoh,
nychik itti pesoh,
hvchik pitti pesoh,
hvchik itti pesoh,
ik svtti pesoh,
A. P. 8.—VOL. XI.—15E
Brinton.] 342
[February 4,
Affirmative. Negative.
they see thee and thou seest them, ik chitti pesoh,
they see him and he sees them, _ ik itti pesoh,
they see us and we see them, ik pitti pesoh,
they see you and ye see them, hvchik itti pesoh,
they see one another, ik itti pesoh.
chitti pesah,
itti pesah,
pitti pesah,
hvchitti pesah,
itti pesah,
4, The possessive-objective, in combination with the subjective-personal
and objective personal.
Affirmative. Negative.
chi pisa lih, I see for thee, of thine, &c., ak chi pesoh lih,
i pisa lih, I see for him, her, ak i pesoh lih,
hvchi pisa lih, I see for you, akhvchi pesoh lih,
i pisa lih, I see for them, aki pesoh lih,
is sa pisah, thou seest for me, of mine, chik sa pesoh,
ishi pisah, for him, chik i pesoh,
ish pi pisah, for us, chik pi pesoh,
ish i pisah, for than, chik i pesoh,
a pisah, he sees for me, or of mine, ik sa pesoh,
chi pisah, for thee, ik chi pesoh,
i pisah, for him, ik i pesoh,
pi pisah, for us, ik pi pesoh,
hvchi pisah, for you, hvchik pesoh,
i pisah, for them, ik i pesoh,
e chi pisab, we see for thee, of thine, ke chi pesoh,
il i pisah, him, kil i pesoh,
iloh i pisah, ourselves, kiloh i pesoh,
e hvchi pisah, ourselves, ke hychi pesoh,
eho hvchi pisah, you, ke hohvchi pesoh,
il i pisah, them, kil i pesoh,
hvs sa pisah,
hyshi i pisah,
hvshpi pisah, us,
hvsh i pisah, _them,
you see for me, of mine, hvchik sg pesoh,
him, hvchik i pesoh,
hvchik pi pesoh,
hvchik i pesoh. -
The third plural, is the same as the third singular.
The possessive is sometimes found before the reflexives ille and ill, and
sometimes after them; as, im ill anoli, to confess oneself to him; illi
nutakvchi, to humble oneself before him; im ille haiakvchi lih, I shew
_ myself to him.
Combinations with the reciprocal pronouns are formed in the following
manners:
chitti pisa lih,
itti pisa lih,
hvchitti pisa lih,
svtti pisah,
echitti pisah,
hvs sitti pisah,
I see for you (or of yours)with you.
him, her, them.
you, etc.
he sees for me together with me.
we see for thee together with thee.
you see for me together with me, etc.
1870.] 343
(Brinton.
When two possessives are prefixed to a verb, one is subjective and one
objective; as,
vm i nukhakloh, he pities him for me.
chim i nukhakloh, thee.
im i nukhakloh, him, her, or them.
pim i nukhakloh, us.
hvpim i nukhakloh, us.
hvchim i nukhakloh, you.
_ The negative is ik sum i, ik chim i, ik im i, ete.
The following form is a combination of the subjective personal, pos-
sessive, and reciprocal possessive:
ish im itti nukhaklobh, you have pity on each other for him.
il im itti nukhakloh, we have pity on each other for him.
hvsh im itti nukhakloh, fs a Gb
§ 22. Relative pronouns. The article-pronouns supply the place of the
relative pronouns, which are not found in Choctaw. This use of the
article-pronouns will be seen in the following examples:
Nom. case. Oblique case.
Alvm vt, Adam he who, Alvm a, Adam him, whom.
If vt, Eve she, who, If a, Eve her, whom.
lukfi vt, clay it, lukfi a, clay it.
Alvm ak osh, Adam, he who, Alvm ako, Adam, him whom.
If ak osh, Eve, she who, If ak 9, Eve, her whom.
§ 23. Interrogative and responsive pronouns. The interrogative pro-
nouns kvta, nanta, katima, who?, which?, what?, have two forms, one for
interrogation, the other for response. They both take the article-pronouns,
like the other separable pronouns, to indicate case. Examples:
interrog. kvta hosh ik bi? Who made it? (osh or hosh is the subjective
or nominative suffix).
respons. kvyna hosh ik bituk. Some one made it.
interrog. nanta hosh minti? What is coming?
respons. nana hosh mintih. Something is coming.
interrog. katimak osh achukma? Which of them is good?
respons. kanima kia achukmah. Any one of them is good.
interrog. katimampo hosh ia chi ho? Which (of the two) will go?
respons. kanimampo hosh ia hinlah. Hither of them will go.
interrog. katima hosh bvnna? Which of them (all) want it?
respons. kanimik vt bynnah. Several of them want it.
Oblique case. kvta ho ish pisa tuk 0? Whom did you see?
nanta ho chibunnah? What do you want?
katimak 0 ish chumpa tuk 0? Which did you buy?
A definite interrogative ends in an aspirate, as, chi bvnnah? Do you
want it? A distinctive interrogative ends in a nasal, as, chi bunng?
These pronouns may also be subjective, as, nanta hosh yohma wah, noth-
ing could do it; nanta hakosh yohma wa, no one could do it.
Brinton.] 344 [February 4,
§ 24. Demonstrative pronouns. These are used to supply the want of
a personal pronoun in the third person singular and plural. They are:
ilvppa, this, these, he, she, it, they (near).
yvmma, that, those, he, she, it, they (remote).
Their plural is sometimes formed by adding the word putta, all. They
take the article-pronouns, and are declined by it. Examples: Gen. XIV.
20, yymmak ak, who; Gen. IV. 2, yymmak okvt, which; Luke XVI. 27,
yvymmak oka, him; Luke XVI. 28, yymmak mvt, they also; 29, yymmak
0, them.
§ 25. There are other words used as pronouns, some if not all of which
can be also used as verbs and adjectives. They are:
chvfa, one, a certain one, the one, the other.
achofona, any.
achvfaiyuka, each one.
achafoa, some, a few.
aiyuka, each, every.
bika, each, same, both, fellow, Mark IX. 33.
inla, other, another.
inli, self, itself. —
itatuklo, both, two together.
luna, many.
kanimona, some, several, from kanimi to amount to, and ona some.
kanimusi, a few.
mih, he, she, it, the same, the identical one, they.
mika, each.
moma, all.
okla, a people, they; used to form the plural of nouns.
okluha, all, the entire crowd, number, or quantity.
puta, all, each and every one; used to form the plural of nouns.
vhleha, all collectively, of persons only.
DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
.
1st personal singular.
Nom., I, sia; vno; li.
Oblique, me, S, Sa, SV, Sai, Si; vno.
Possessive, mine, sa, sam, svm, svmi, san; vmmi; vno.
1st person plural.
Definite form. Distinctive form.
Nom., we, pia; pishno; e, il. hipia; hvpishno; eho, iloh.
Oblique, us, pi, p; pishno. hvpi, hyp; hvpishno.
Poss., our, ours, pi, pim, pimi, pin; pimmi. hvpi, hvpim, hvpimi, hvpin;
hypimmi.
2nd person singular.
Nom., thou, chia; chishno.
Oblique, thee, chi, ch; chishno.
Poss., thy, thine, chi, chim, chimi, chin; chimmi.
1870. ] B45 {Brinton.
2nd person plural.
Nom., you, hvehia; hvchishno.
Oblique, you, hveh, hvchi; hvchishno.
Possessive, your, yours, hvchi, hvchim, hvchimi, hvchin; hvchimmi.
CHAPTER III.
VERBS.
§ 1. There are six classes of verbs in Choctaw, the transitive, intransi-
tive, passive, possessive, attributive, and personal.
§ 2. The passive verb is made by an internal change of the transitive;
but this rarely takes place except in verbs where the transitive effects a
visible change in the object acted on. Thus, takchi, to tie; tvllakchi, to
be tied; sa tvllakchi, I am bound; but pisa, to see; sa pisa, he sees me,
not I am seen. The passive is formed so variously that rules are not
attempted. The following examples will illustrate this: hofahli, to abash,
passive, hofahya; okpvni, to abuse, pas. okpvlo; atokoli, to aim, pas.
atokoa ; atokoli, to appoint, pas. ulhtoka; okchali, to awake, pas. okcha,
siteli, to bind, pas. sita; hopi, to bury, pas. hollohpi; akvlli, to cobble,
pas. ulhvta; ikbi, to build, toba, to be built; hukmi, to burn, holukmi, to
be burned; chanli, to chop, chaya, to be chopped; bohli, to beat, boa, to
be beaten; bvshli, to carve, bvsha, to be carved. Some passives are made
by prefixing lh, a locative and intensive particle from vhli, it may be, to
the active; as, tohno, to hire, ilhotno, to be hired; ipeta, to feed, ilhpita, to
be fed; apoa, to give in marriage, passive, vlhpoba; abeha, to enter a
place, passive, vlhbiha.
§ 3. The possessive verb is formed by prefixing the inseparable posses-
sive pronouns to other verbs. Thus, ihikiah, he has him standing; iman-
tah, he has him staying; intalaiah, he has it standing (like water ina
vessel); imachukmah, he has, good, there is good for him; intobah, he has
it made; imokpuloh, he has evil, he is evil.
§ 4. The attributive verbs affirm attributes or qualities, and are often
used as adjectives and adverbs; as, kullo, to be strong; sa kulloh, I am
strong; achukma, to be good; sa achukmah, Iam good. The possessive
pronouns are affixed to these verbs, as vm achukmah, I have a good one;
a falaiah, I have a long one, or it is long for me.
§ 5. The personal verbs take the objective inseparable pronouns; as,
sa lakshah, I perspire; svllih, I die; sanusih, I sleep; saiokchayah, I live;
sa hoitah, I vomit. When the act is involuntary, sometimes a change in
the form of the verb occurs; as, hoeta lih, I vomit it up; hotilhko lih, I
cough; habishko lih, I sneeze; fiopa lih, I breathe.
§ 6. All verbs end in the infinitive in i, a, or 0. They all have an
affirmative and negative form in all moods and tenses. This is made by
Brinton.] 346 [February 4;
means of the negative prefix ik, and by changing the terminal vowel to
0 when it is i or a; when it is 0, it undergoes no change. Thus, anta, to
stay; ik anto, not to stay; minti, to come; ik minto, not to come; ik
ishko, not to drink.
Both forms take the inseparable pronouns as prefixes, and the article-
pronouns as suffixes, but both classes of pronouns are written separately,
as far as may be. Thus, chi pisa lik vt, thee see I who, I who see thee.
§ 7. The modes. There are six modes, the infinitive, indicative, poten-
tial, subjunctive, optative, and imperative.
§ 8. THE INFINITIVE MODE.
This is the root or ground form of the verb, from which the other
modes are formed by suffixes. It can be used as a noun, or in an adverbial
sense, takchi, to tie, a tier, the act of tying; hvllot takchi, to tie strongly.
It takes the inseparable pronouns and the prepositions as prefixes, and the
article-pronouns, and particles of tense as suffixes. Examples: chi takchi,
to tie thee; chin takchi, to tie for thee; ille takchi, to tie himself; itti
takchi, to tie each other; iti takchi, to tie them to each other; a takchi, —
to tie at; on takchi, to tie on; isht takchi, to tie with; ant takchi, to come
and tie; ont takchi, to go and tie; et takchi, to tie hither; pit takchi, to
tie thither; takchi a, to tie him to the; takchi ma, to tie simultaneously;
takchi ho, to tie distinctive; takchi tuk, takchi tok, to have tied; takcha
chi, takcha he, to tie in the future; takcha chin tuk, to be about to have
tied; takchi tuk achi, to have been about to tie.
The English infinitive is sometimes translated by the indicative: as Mat.
V. 17, okpvni la hi osh aya li tuk keyu; amba aighlichilg he mak a tok, I
am not come to destroy but to fulfil; sometimes the English indicative is
translated by the infinitive; as Mat. XI. 30, vm ikonla abana ya il abanali
ka im ylhpiesa, to put on himself my yoke is easy for him.
The negative form is made by the prefix ik, and the change of the last
vowel to o, and corresponds to the English prefixes dis, un, in, ete.; as,
iktakcho, not to tie, to untie; haklo, to hear, ikhaklo, not to hear.
$9. Modifications of the verb. There are numerous modifications of
the ground form or infinitive mode of verbs, each of which forms a new in-
finitive from which other modifications may arise. Some of the modifica-
tions are by internal changes, others by adding a particle. They are:
1. The definite form, takchi, to tie.
2. The distinctive form, takchi, to be tying the while; implying continu-
ance, prominence, and comparison.
3. The intensive form. This is made in various ways:
1. By an increase of emphasis on the accented syllable of a word; as,
tékbah, to be so bad; takchi to te.
2. By lengthening the vowel sound in the accented syllable; as, chito,
to be large, cheto, to be quite large; patvssa, to be flat, patassa, to be
quite flat.
3. By inserting a syllable; as, taiyakchi, to tie; chieto, to be decidedly
large.
1870. ] 347 (Brinton.
4. By prefixing the diphthong ai to words beginning with a vowel; as,
ahli, to be true, aiahli, to be really true; sometimes i is prefixed, as 1iksho,
to be none indeed.
5. By prefixing a to words beginning with a consonant; as bilia, to be
forever, abilia, to be forevermore.
6. By doubling a consonant in the accented syllable; as, alota, to be
full; allota, to be brimful; kvnia, to be gone, kvnnia, to be gone off.
7. By inserting a consonant in the final syllable; as, chukva, to go in,
chukowa, to go in boldly; ihoa, to call him, i howa.
8. By prefixing ai and inserting another vowel; as, ulhpisa to be right,
aiulhpiesa, to be just right.
9. By uniting two verbs; as, ishkottahli, to drink all up; vbitkanchi, to
massacre.
4. The frequentative or iterative form; tahakchi, to keep tying.
5. The instantaneous or quick form, by the insertion of h in the ac-
cented syllable; as, tahkchi, to tie quickly; vbi, to kill; ahbi, to kill
quickly; also the form ahahbi; kvnia, to go away, hvninihya, to vanish.
6. The form for a sudden and single act; as shalvlli, to slide, shalakli, to
slip; halvlli, to hold, halakli, to catch hold of.
7. The diminitive form in neuter and attributive verbs; as, chito, to be
large, chihto, to be largish; hopaki, to be far off, hopahki, to be rather
far off; lakna, to be yellow, lahakna, to be yellowish.
8. The repetitive form, to continue an action in one place and one Man-
ner; as, binili, to sit, binininli, to rise up and sit down again; tonoli, to
roll, tonononli, to roll back and forth.
9. The causal forms, 1, by suffixing chi; as, takchichi, to make him tie;
ikbichi, to make him do or make, Mat. V. 32; 2, by suffixing chechi; as,
ishko, to drink, ishkochechi, to make to drink, to drench; 3, by suffixing
chi and prefixing a, locative; as, atakchichi, to tie it to something; 4, by
suffixing li; as, achukmali, to make good; lvshpali, to make hot, to heat.
Of these suffixes, chi denotes the causing of the action signified by the
primitive verb; as, kvllochi, to harden, from kvllo, to be hard; kolichi, to
eause to break, from koli, to break; chechi suffixed to a verb denotes the
causing by its own subject of the performance of the action signified by
the verb by another subject on an object expressed or understood; as, vno
vt vila ya ikhish a, ishkochechi li tuk, I the child him the medicine it did
cause him to drink; nafoka ya fohkvchechi lih, I made him put his clothes
on himself; chi with a, locative, signifies that two different things are
acted upon together, as Mat. XIII. 25, onush ash haiyukpulo yo ant a
hokchichi cha, kynia tok, he came and sowed tares among the wheat, not
wheat with wheat but tares with wheat; akakushi yo shuka nipi a aiau-
vshlichih, she fries (causes to fry) eggs with pork.
The suffix kachi, kechi, kvechi, is added to many verbs slightly altering
their sense; as, winali, to shake, winakvchi, to be shaken; basasua, to have
stripes, bassasu kvchi, to be striped like a rattlesnake; malvtha, to lighten,
348
Brinton.] [February 4,
malvthakvchi, to flash once; bichota, to bend, bichotakvchi, to bend and
spring once.
Note.—Verbs may have all the above forms, but the number of verbs
found in all these forms are small.
Example, takchi, to tie, infinitives.
Active:
Definite takchi, to tie.
Distinctive takchi, to be tying.
Intensive taiyakchi, to tie firmly.
Frequentative tahakchi, to keep tying.
Speedy tahkchi, to tie instantly.
Passive:
Definite tvllakchi, to be tied.
Distinctive tallakchi, to be the one being tied.
Intensive talaiyakchi, to be tied fast, or at length.
Frequentative talaiyahakchi, to be often tied.
Speedy talahkechi, to be instantly tied.
§ 10. INDICATIVE MODE.
This is formed from the infinitive by prefixing and suffixing the per-
sonal pronouns, and suffixing the tense particles for past and future time.
1. Present tense,
takehih,
ish takehih,
takchi lih.
hysh takehih,
e takchih,
eho takchih,
indefinite, with subjective personal pronouns.
he, she, or it ties, or they tie, him, her, it, or them.
thou tiest him, her, it, or them.
I tie, ete.
ye tie, etc.
we tie, etc. (def).
we tie, etc. (dis).
2. Pres. tense, definite, with subj. pers. pronouns.
takechishkeh,
third sing. and pl.
To this the pronouns are added as in the indefinite.
3. Pres. tense, distinctive, with subj. pers. pronouns.
takchih okeh,
third sing. and pl.
To this the pronouns are added as above.
4, Pres. tense, with objective pers. pronouns.
chi takehi lih,
takchi lih,
hvyehi takchi lih,
I tie thee. :
I tie him, her, it, or them.
I tie you.
5. Pres. tense, with possessive pronouns.
in takchi lih,
chin takchi lih,
hvchin takchi lih,
in takehih,
chin takchih,
an takchih,
hvchin takchih,
pin takchih,
hvpin takchi,
I tie for him, her, it, them.
I tie for thee.
I tie for you.
he ties for him, her, it, them.
‘¢ for thee.
for me.
for you.
for us.
for us.
1870. ] 349
(Brinton.
Past tenses. There are two past tenses, signified by the particles tuk
and tok; tuk is used for the immediate and definite past, tok for the re-
mote and indefinite past. They may be combined to form the relative or
pluperfect past; as, tuk a tuk, tuk a tok, tokatuk. The particle a in
these expressions is an article-pronoun, and should be rendered thus: he,
she, it was.
Past tense definite.
takchi tuk, he, she, it, they tied, did tie, have tied.
ish takechi tuk, thou OS
- takehi li tuk, ity
hvsh takche tuk, you.
e takche tuk, we.
eho takche tuk, we, etc.
Past tense distinctive.
This is formed by the article-pronoun, okeh.
takchi tuk okeh, he, etc., tied, did tie, has tied.
Another form of the past tense is made by a nasal sound in the fina
vowel, as, takchi, chamo.
Future tense.
There are two forms of the future, made by the addition of chi for the
immediate, and he, or hi, for the remote and indefinite future. The dis-
tinctive future is made by suffixing okeh to chi and he; as, chi okeh, hi
okeh.
The suffix ashkeh is used for the definite, absolute, or imperative future.
The past and future are combined to form a relative future; as, tuk a
chi, tuk a he, tuk ashke, was to tie; also chin tuk, chin tok, he tuk, hitok,
will have, shall have, would have, should have.
$11. POTENTIAL MODE.
This is formed from the infinitive by suffixing the articles hinla, may,
can, and pulla, must, will.
Present tense (but with reference to future time).
Indefinite takcha hinlah, he, etc., may or can tie.
Definite takcha hinlvshhe, he, ete., may or can tie.
Distinctive takcha hinla hokeh, he, ete., may or can tie.
Indefinite takchi pullah, he, etc., must or will tie.
Definite takchi pullvschkeh, he, ete., must or will tie.
Distinctive takchi pulla hokeh, he, ete., must or will tie.
The past tenses are formed like those in the indicative mode, the tense
signs being suffixed to hinla and pulla; as, takchi la hinla tuk, I may or
might have tied.
§ 12. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
This is formed from the infinitive by suffixing km for the definite and
okm for the distinctive. The m takes the definite article-pronoun a in all
its forms.
Note.—km, if, when, whether, is compounded of k, a suffix, definitive
of the idea contained in the verb; as. takchik, he ties, at that, in that, or
A. P. §S.—VOL XI.—16E
/
Brinton. ] 3900
[February 4,
just that; and of m, simultaneous or successive, affirming or supposing
something in relation to the idea limited or bounded by k, then, when, at
the same time or place; takchi km, when he ties then.
This suffix can be added to the other modes in all their tenses; as, in-
finitive, takchi kma, if to tie him, when to tie him; indicative, takchi
kmah, if or when he ties him; potential, takcha hinla kmah, if he can tie
him.
Present tense.
takchikmvt, definite subjective, if he, ete., tie, then he.
takchikmah, definite objective, gs
takehihokmvt, distinctive subjective, ne
takchihokmah, distinctive objective, os
The past and future tenses are inflected with the personal pronouns as
in the indicative, except the forms which end ineh. These are always final,
and admit of no suffix nor inflections.
In the past tenses, tuk and tok, the k in kmvt, kmah, ete., is dropped,
that in the tense particle taking its place. In the remote future, he, the
distinctive form is not he okmah, but hokmah.
The distinctive form okm expresses a condition or supposition with
more emphasis, and implies a greater degree of uncertainty than km; as,
infinitive, takchi hokma, to tie him, if so; indicative, takchi li hokmah, I
tie him, if so it be; takchi la hinla hokmah, I tie him if it can be so.
Examples: Romans XII. 20, chin tvnvp vt hohchvfo hokma; if thine
enemy hunger; John XVI. 7, vno vt ia li keyu hokmvno, if I go not away;
same verse, amba ia li hokmyvto, but if I do go away; Mat. IX. 12, amba
abeka yok mak oh chatuk oke, but they (distinctive) who are sick; Luke
XVI. 30, im ona hokmyno, if one went unto them, then; Mat. XI. 15,
haksobish vt ihinlikmvt, if he have ears, definite; John XIX. 12, ishi hotofi
hokmy, if thou lettest him go, distinctive; Phillip II. 1, asha hokma, if
there be, a suppositive form; I. Cor. XIII. 8, nan ithana yokmé, whether
there be knowledge, a suspensive form.
§ 13. OPTATIVE MODE.
This is formed from the infinitive by suffixing kb definite and okb dis-
tinctive. The particle b takes the article-pronoun @ in its definite and
contradistinctive forms, babato, babano, and © distinctive and emphatic
as a prefix, in distinctives and contradistinctives.
takchikbat, definite subjective, oh ! that he, etc., would tie
it, then he.
takchikbah, definite objective, 36
takchikbato, contradistinctive subjective, ee
takchikbano, contradistinctive objective, GE
takchihokbat, distinctive subjective, oh! that he, ete., would tie,
even he, then he.
takchihokbah, distinctive objective,
takchihokbato, contradistinctive subjective, ne
takchihokbano, contradistinctive objective,
1870.] 301 { Brinton.
Examples:
Subjective form: shukbo chumpak bato, oh! that he would buy a blanket,
(and take it home and wear it, etc).
Objective form: shukbo chumpak bano, oh! that he would buy a blanket,
(then others might buy).
Contradistinctive subjective:
shukbo chumpa hokbato, oh! that he would buy a blanket, (instead of
borrowing one), and do something else, wear it, etc.
- Contradistinctive objective:
shukbo chumpa hokbano, oh! that he would buy a blanket, then others
would come and buy, or do something else.
Luke XIX. 42, nana isht chi ai yukpa he ai ulhpiesa ka ish ithaiyna
tokokbato, if thou hadst known, or, oh! that thou hadst known; even
thou,then thou, etc. Ialihokbat, I wish I could go and I (do something) ;
iali hokbah, I wish I could go and he (do something).
The persons, tenses, and numbers correspond with those in the indica-
tive mode.
$14. IMPERATIVE MODE.
Affirmative:
ik takchih, let him, her, it, or them tie.
takchih, tie thou.
ak takchih, let me tie.
hvsh takechih, ye tie, tie ye (def).
ho takehi, ye tie, tie ye (dis).
ohiah, go ye (dis).
ke takchi, let us tie (def).
keho takchi, let us tie (dis).
kiliah, let us go (def).
kilohiah, let us go (dis).
takchashkeh, let him, her, or them tie.
The particle ashkeh is suffixed to the infinitive in the last word to ex-
press an imperative in the shape of a wish.
The imperative negative is formed by changing the terminal vowel of
the verb into 0, and suffixing the particle kia;, or particles of negation may
be used, such as na, wa, heto, he, keyu.
Examples:
ik takcho kiah, do not let him tie.
ish takehi nah, don’t you tie him.
ish takcha wah, you will not tie him.
ish takcha heto, you shall not tie him.
ish takcho he keyu, you shall not tie him.
Double negatives may be used, not, not no; as:
ak takcho ki nah;
ak takcho ka wah;
ak tokcha ka he keyuh.
Compare Luke VII. 39, ik akostinincho ka heto, he would not have
not known, 7. e., he would have known.
Brinton.]J 302
[February 4,
§ 15. IRREGULAR VERBS.
The irregular verbs are: vbi, to kill; vmo, to trim, to mow; vla, to ar-
rive; vpa, to eat; ia, to go. The vowel v in these verbs is dropped ina
part of the persons in both numbers; thus:
Affirmative form.
vpah, he, ete., eats, 7. €., of one article of food. vbih, he kills.
ishpah, thou eatest. ish bih, thou killest.
vpalih, _ I eat. ube lih, I kill.
hvshpah, you eat. hvsh bih, you kill.
epah, we eat (def). ebih, we kill.
iloh vpah, we eat (dis). iloh vbih, we kill.
Negative form.
ik poh, he does not eat. ik boh.
chik poh, thou chik boh.
ak poh, I - ak boh.
hvchik poh, you hvchik boh.
ke poh, we (def). ke boh.
kiloh poh, we (dis). kiloh aboh.
In the frequentative form of these verbs, the pronouns in the second
person singular and plural are modified thus: ahanla, ihishla, sing.,
ahashlah, pl.
la, to go.
Affirmative form. Negative form.
iah, he goes, ik aiyuh.
ish iah, thou goest, chik aiyuh.
ialih, I go, ak aiyuh.
hysh iah, you go, hvchik aiyuh.
il iah, we go, kil aiyuh.
iloh ia, we go, kiloh aiyuh.
iksho, to be none, may be a negative form of vsha or asha.
It is conjugated:
ikshoh, he is not, there is none.
ikchikshoh, thou art not.
iksakshoh, I am not, ete.
and:
ik im ikshoh, he has not, there is none for him, ete.
Keyu, not to be, has no modifications except h predicative, and the
causatives chi and kechi; as, keyuchi, to make it nothing ; keyukechi,
keyukma, if not, or. Kia, although, is perhaps an imperative form of ia,
to go, ikiah, let him orit go. It has no variation except to take h pre-
dicative, kiah, although it be.
§ 16. It will be seen that verbs have usually but one form for both singu-
lar and plural numbers. Some verbs, however, have a plural, made by an
internal change; as, hikah, it flies; helih, they fly; binilih, he sits; binohli,
1870.] 393
[Brinton.
they sit; talahlih, he sets it up; talohlih, he sets them up; kopoli, to bite,
plural, kobli; kanchi, to sell, plural, kampila; bohli, to lay down, plural,
kapulli; tifi, to pluck up. plural, tehli; malleli, to run, plural, yihlepa.
Some verbs have this plural form only; as, ilhkolih, they move off; pehlichi,
he rules them; chiyah, they sit. Some have the singular number only; as,
issoh, he strikes once.
Some few verbs are dual; as, tihlaiah, they two run; ittonachih, they
two go there together.
. The inseparable pronouns determine the number of the verb in the first
and second persons. The third person singular and plural has no personal
pronoun; okla is sometimes used as a singular, dual, and plural pronoun;
as, anumpulit okla tok, they two spake.
Note.—By a verb in the plural is meant plurality either in the subject
or object; as, wak pelichih, he or they drive cattle, and wak a chuffichi,
they drive a cow. Here pelichih is in the plural number, and chuffichi in
the singular.
CHAPTER IV.
PREPOSITIONS.
§ 1. There are few words in Choctaw that correspond to the English
prepositions. The article-pronouns to some extent supply this want.
Some verbs involve a preposition in their meaning; as, ona, to go to; vba,
to arrive at; bokyupi, to bathe in the creek; husa, to fire at. The in-
separable possessive pronouns i, im, in, involve a preposition, to him, for
him, of him, from him, against him; so also do the reciprocal possessives,
itti, ittim, ittin, to each other, for each other, etc.
The preposition, to, in the infinitive is contained in the simple form of
the verb; takchi, to tie. The preposition of, showing the genitive or pos-
sessive case is understood; iti hishi, leaf of a tree. When one of the
nouns expresses ownership in the other, the inseparable possessive pronoun
is used; as, vila i holisso, the child its book.
§ 2. As the Choctaw is deficient in single words expressing space and
time, it uses in place of them prepositive particles of definite significations.
These are:
1. Locatives.
They are: a, before consonants; ai, before vowels, and before y. This
means the place for, in which, at which, from which, to which, where,
there, then; as, afoha, to rest at or in a place, a time for resting; aminti,
to come from; ahikia, to stand in; aianta, to stay at or in; ai impa, to eat
at or there; ai illi, to die in a (room, ete.), or at (noon, night, ete. ); aianuk
filli, to think of; aiahni, to long for; ayukfa, to rejoice at.
Brinton.] 304 [February 4,
0, om, on. This is a more definite locative than a, ai, and may be trans-
lated by on or upon; as, onbinili, to sit on; ontalali, to ride on; oyihlepa»
to rush upon; ontalali, to set on or upon.
2. Distinctives:
Et, anet, here, hither, to this place; et is the simple form, anet the in-
tensive; et is from the verb echi, to reach, hand, or hold this way, to pass
in this direction, intensive form anechi. These particles are transitive
verbs, and are connected by the letter t with other verbs. Echi has the
form of a causative verb, ishtishko a echih, pass the cup hither. Ex-
amples: et kanchi, to cast it this way; et anoli, to report hither; et anuk
filli, to think this way; awethikia, to stand this way, toward the speaker.
Pit, thither. This is a subjective directive (made so by the t). It is
from the verb pila, to send off, or throw, from the speaker to some other
point. Examples: pit kanchi, to throw that way; pitanoli, to report it
thither; pit anukfilli, to think of thither; pit hikia, to stand or lean that way.
3. Instrumental: :
Isht, with. This is derived from the verb ishi, to take, with t distinct
tive and continuative. Its literal meaning is often lost in the many uses
it has as a prefix. Examples: ishtabeka, to be sick with; ishtanowa, to
walk with; ishtan umpuli, to talk of; ishtanuk filli, to think about; isht-
holitopa, to take it and be rich.
4. Of motion.
Ant, from ayvt, means motion hither, to a place; as, ant anta, to come
and stay.
Ont, from onvt, means motion thither toa place; as, ont anta, to go and
stay.
5. Social.
Iba, with, in company with, awaya, to go with, awant, to bring with.
Examples: ibatoksvli, to work with; ibapisa, to see with, a school-mate;
itanowa, to travel together, a fellow-traveler; awantanta, to stay with;
awantia to go with, awaya, to marry, fem. 7. ¢., she married him; itawaya,
he marries her, or they marry.
6. The war or fire particle:
This is ito, before a consonaut; it, before a vowel. This particle implies
mutuality of action between the fire and what is put on it, or between
those who kindle fires in a hostile manner against each other. Examples:
oti, to kindle a fire; itoti, to fire each other; itotia, to go to war; itotaya,
to wage war by fires. It is used in the New Testament, Mat. VII. 50, tvli
a bila luak chito ka pit ito—ashacha he, to cast them into the furnace of
fire. This particle ito may help us to understand how wars were formerly
waged by fire rather than by weapons, these being very imperfect in con-
struction, while fire was always at hand.
§ 3. These particles have various combinations with each other; as, aio,
aiom, ai on, ont ai, ant ai, ont isht, ant isht, isht 0, ete., but as they are
written separately, they can be readily understood. Examples: ont ai isht
ia, go and of it take and go; isht im ai achukma hokeh, they take and in
them have pleasure, it is so; ishtai 0 holissochi, to write on it therewith.
1870. } 399
[Brinton,
CHUA Ns
NOUNS.
$1. In Choctaw there is no grammatical difference between common
and proper, animate and inanimate, concrete and abstract nouns. They
have no internal changes nor inflections to denote number, gender, or case.
These accidents are supplied by additional words, or are left unexpressed.
~$2. Numprer.—Nouns are presumed to be in that number which is most
natural to them. If the number is required to be specified, numerals,
numeral adjectives, pronouns, or verbs are subjoined. Examples: wak, a
cow, cows; wak achofa, one cow; wak tuklo, two cows; wak lawa, many
cows; wak moma, all the cows; wak vmmi, my cow or my cows; hatak vt
antah, a man stays; hatak vt ashah, men are staying; wak vt tihlaiah, the
two cows run.
§ 3. GENDER.—A few nouns only have names in the masculine and
feminine gender; as, hatak, aman; ohoyo, a woman; nakni, a male; tek,
afemale. When gender is emphatic, these words, nakni, and tek, are sub-
joined; as, vila nakni, a boy; vila tek, a girl; issinakni, a buck; issi tek,
a doe.
§ 4. Casze.—All nouns take article-pronouns for specification, emphasis,
and case. The subjective relation of a noun to a verb is indicated by the
article-pronouns in the nominative case ; the objective relation by the
article-pronouns in the oblique case. A noun, however, is often used by
itself, without the article-pronoun, and may then be either in the nomina-
tive or oblique case, the connective alone deciding which, though usually.
it is oblique. Examples: hatak vt mintih, man he comes; hatak mintiah,
man comes, or men come; hatak vt pisah, a man sees, or men see; hatak
a pisah, man him (or men them) he sees.
$ 5..The nominative and oblique independent. This occurs when two
nouns or pronouns are in a subjective or objective relation to the same
verb. In this case the first is emphatic or independent; as, hatak okvto i
nitak vt hvshvk ak o chiyuhmi hokeh, man as for, he for him, days they,
grass, that which is, like they are, so it is.
hatak achvfa hosh ushi vt in tuklo tok,
man a certain he sons they tohim two so it was.
In these sentences, hatak okyto and hatak achvfa hosh, are in the
nominative case, and nitak vt and ushi vt, are also in the nominative case.
So in the oblique case:
hvchishno ma, isht hvchi, mihacha he,
you indeed, you, it shall not be judged to, or you, you shall
not be judged.
$ 6. The possessive or genitive sense.
Possession may be shown by simple position; as, iti hishi, tree leaf, the
tree’s leaf; hatak kvllo, man strength, the man’s strength, a man of
Brinton.] 396 [February 4,
strength; Chahta okla, the Choctaw nation, miko ibbak, king hand, the
king’s hand.
| Where there is an acquired possession, the inseparable possessive pro-
nouns i, im, in, are inserted between two nouns; as, Chan in chuka, John
‘his house. It is probable that the method of indicating possession by
position arose from an elision of this pronoun, as this method is most fre-
quent in names of the human body and its members, of near relatives, in
nominative and oblique independent nouns, and generally in such as are
obviously integral parts of each other, or by nature closely connected.
Examples: miko ibbak, the king (his) hand; miko ushe, the king (his)
son; iti vni, a tree (its) fruit; iti hakshup, a tree, its bark; wak pishuk-
chi, a cow (her) milk.
Names of time take the possessive pronoun; as, i nitak, his day or days,
which might also be regarded as i dative, to him, for him, as in wak i
kanchi, he sells a cow to him or for him.
§ 7. The objective (accusative and ablative) sense.
This is made by article-pronouns subjoined to nouns; as, hatak a, man
him, man whom, man that. In forming the ablative of time, place, cause,
the verb, not the noun, takes the preposition ; as, hatak vt a hikiah, the
man stands in a place; isht ikbih, he makes it with. The vocative can
be indicated by the particle mah; as, miko mah, O king.!
§ 8. Classes of nouns.
The nouns are either primitive or derived. The former cannot be traced
to any root; such are, oka, water; tvli, a stone; hatak, a man; ibbak, the
hand; the latter are derived from verbs, adjectives, other nouns, etc.
§ 9. Derived nouns.
The following examples will show the derivation of nouns:
From transitive verbs:
chanli, to chop, chanli, a chopper, the act of chopping.
bvshli, to saw, a sawyer, the act of sawing.
From intransitive verbs:
nowa, to walk, a walk, the act of walking.
pisa, to see, a seer, a sight.
From passive verbs:
talakchi, to be bound, a bundle.
holitopa, to be honored, honor.
kynia, to be lost, the loss, the act of losing.
1In one portion of his manuscript Mr. Byington propounds the following query: ‘Cannot all
Choctaw nouns be treated as verbs? The root may be considered as in the infinitive mood; as,
hatak, to be aman; hatak/, itis aman; hatak okmvt,ifaman.” Prof. H. Steinthal, on the con-
trary, thinks that the peculiar formation of American tongues makes nouns, but no real verbs. He
says of the Aztec: ‘das Mexikanische in seinem Ansatze zur Wortbildung Nomina gebildet hat,
aber keine wahrhaften Verba” (Charakteristik des Sprachbaues, 8.218). The author of Etudes philolo-
giques sur quelques Langues Sauvages de? Amerique, p.38, says: ‘Les noms algonquins ne se déclinent
point, ils se conjuguent.” Prof. Steinthal, however, is right. The primitive expressions in these
languages are concrete, not abstract,—nouns, therefore, not verbs.
1870. ] 307 [Brinton.
From neuter verbs:
kvllo, to be strong, strength.
ahli, to be true, truth.
From verbs with the locative particle a or ai:
achanli, a chopping place.
impa, to eat, aiimpa, a table.
apisa, a looking glass.
abvsha, a saw-pit, from bvsha, to be sawn.
From verbs with the particle isht instrumental:
isht bvsha, a saw.
isht talakchi, a band.
From verbs with the particle na or nanta:
nakanchi, a seller, from kanchi, to sell.
nanithana, a pupil, from ithana, to learn.
From verbs with the definitive particle ka or kakah:
falamaka, the return, from falama, to return.
chukbika, a corner, from chukbi, to be a corner.
lapalika, the side, from lapali, to be the side of.
chitokaka, the Great One, God, from chito, to be great.
From the verb ahpi, to be first in time:
achafahpi, the first one.
ishahpi, the first taken.
tofahpi, to first of summer, the spring.
hushtolahpi, the first of winter, the autumn.
vttahpi, the first-born.
With ushi, a son, to make a diminutive:
bokushi, a brook, lit., son of a creek.
hinushi, a path, from hina, a road.
ibbakushi, the fingers, from ibbak, the hand.
iyushi, the toes, from iyi, the foot.
With vpi, a stalk, stem, trunk of a tree, main channel of a river, etc:
iyvpi, the leg.
bissvpi, a briar, bramble.
hatakvypi humma, a red man, an Indian.
From the union of two nouns:
bila pvla, lamp-oil.
hvpi oka, brine, salt water.
iti hishi, leaf, leaves.
nishkin okchi, tears.
From the union of three nouns:
chukfi hishi shapo, a wool hat, sheep-hair-hat.
wak hakshup shukcha, a saddle-bag, cow-skin-bag.
From a noun and an adjective:
bota tohbi, flour, white-flour.
hvpi champvlli, sugar, salt-sweet.
A. PB. §.—VOL XI.—17E
Brinton. |] 308
[February 4,
From two nouns and an adjective:
issuba haksobish falaia, a mule, horse-ears-long.
From a noun and a verb:
iti bvshli, a tree-sawyer.
shapo ikbi, a hat-maker.
shulush ikbi, a shoemaker.
From two words connected by an article-pronoun:
kanchit aya, a peddler, one that sells and goes.
mvllit kvnia, a runaway, one that runs and is gone.
From two nouns and a verb:
bila pvla ikbi, a lamp maker.
lukfi ampo ikbi, a potter.!
Other combinations are also in use.
10. Abstract nouns.
These are usually formed from neuter verbs ; as, kvllo, to be strong,
strength; achukma, to be good, goodness; ahli (distinctive form of vhli,
edge, end, point, limit), to be true, truth.
The translators of the New Testament rarely, however, use these words
alone, but combine others with them.
For example:
- Nnayimmi, faith, I. Cor. XIII. 13.
nannihullo, love.
nanisht i hullo, love.
nanithana, knowledge, 2 Pet. 1, 5.
ishtaivlbi, redemption.
isht aholitopa, glory, Mat. VI. 13.
Often circumlocutions are used; as,
nan-isht hvsh il a nanaiya, your peace, lit., the thing by which you
have peace in yourselves, Luke X. 6.
The suffix nana or nan gives an intensive signification; as,
nanihullochi, accursed thing, Joshua VII. 13.
§ 11. Proper nouns, and terms of relationship.
These take the article-pronouns, and are construed like common nouns.
Some proper nouns are simple, others compound. Chahta, Mvskoki,
Chalaki, Wishashi, Shawvno, are simple, uncompounded names. Bulban-
cha, the Choctaw name of New Orleans, is compounded of bvlbaha asha,
where there is bvlbaha, unintelligible talking in different languages, as in
Babel of old.
Apalachicola, apelvchi okla, helping people, allies.
Pensacola, pashokla, hairy people.
Pascagoula, pvskokla, bread people.
Tombigbee, itomikbi, box makers.
Bok humma, Red river.
Boktuklo, river two, applied to a creek the channel of which is divided
by an island.
1 A number of words have been adopted from the English, and a few from French and Spanish.
They all suffer some change. Thus, katus,acat; shapo, chapeau; wak, vaca (Sp-); enchil, angel.
i
18$70.] 309 (Brinton.
The terms of relationship are numerous, and differ materially in applica-
tion from those used in the English tongue; as will be seen in the follow-
ing list:
I. Kinship by blood.
1. In the male line.
omafo, my grandfather, the father of my father or of my mother, their
fathers, brothers, and male cousins.
aki, my father, his brothers, his male cousins, his uncles and nephews,
their brothers and male cousins.
omoshi, my maternal uncle, his brothers and male cousins.
akni, the eldest among brothers, and male cousins.
ushi, a son, svso, my son, son of the father, father’s brothers, male
cousins, son of the mother, her sisters and female cousins, son of the
father’s sister (said by this father’s son)..
sabaiyt, my nephew, a son of my sister or her female cousin.
sapok nakni, my male grandchild, my sister’s male grandchildren, my
brother’s children (said by an aunt).
ittibapishi, brother, literally those who suck together, a general name for
brothers and male cousins.
ommonnti, my elder brother or cousin.
sa nak fish, my younger brother or cousin.
i nak fi, her brother, spoken by a woman.
2. In the female line.
voppoknt, my grandmother, her sisters, female cousins and their mothers.
hoshke, my mother, her sisters, and female cousins.
ahukni, my aunt, her sisters and female cousins.
aknt, the eldest child among sisters and female cousins.
oshetik, or svsotek, my daughter, the daughter of my sisters or female
cousins, the child of my father’s sister, her sister or her cousin.
sapoktek, my granddaughter, my sister’s grandchildren, the female child
of a brother’s sister.
itte bapishi, sisters, female cousins, common gender.
ommonni, my eldest sister or cousin.
sanak fish, my younger sister or cousin.
antek, my sister or female cousin, said by a man.
IJ. Kinship by marriage.
hatak, husband, literally, her man.
tekchi, wife, tm ohoyo, his woman.
soppochi, my father-in-law, said by the man.
suppochi, ohoyo, my mother-in-law, said by the man.
omovfa, my father-in-law, said by the woman.
oppokni, my mother-in-law, said by the woman.
sayup, my son-in-law.
sapok, my daughter-in-law.
omalakusi, my brother-in-law, brother of my wife.
omalak, my brother-in-law, husband of my sister.
omafo, my uncle, the husband of my aunt.
omalakust ohoyo, my sister-in-law, sister of my wife.
Brinton.] 360
[February 4,
sahaiya, my sister-in-law, wife of my brother, also wife of my uncle, or
of my nephew.
uppo, my sister-in-law.
sapok, my sister-in-law.
oshke, the wife of my father’s brother.
haloka, a family name for son-in-law, father-in-law, and mother-in law.
While formerly the kinsmen (¢ksa) and the peoples (okla) had specific
names, the family hadnone.! The names of individuals were significant of
some trait or quality. Some of the masculine names mean Come and kill,
Stand and kill, Kill all, Kill and go; some of the feminine names signify
Giver, Bringer, She who loops up her hair, Take water and give him. In
times of war brave men received titles, such as Red bird, Red knife, Red
owl, ete.
The individual name is sacred, and is never used in common conversa-
tion; the name of relationship, my brother, my cousin, is used instead.
The wife speaks of her husband as vila iki, the children’s father.
The ancient law of marriage was that no man could choose a wife in his
own tksa. Hence the matter of clan relationship became one of great im-
portance, and upon itthe terms of relationship in general were based. In
common salutations, the husband addressed his wife’s clan as vm okla mah,
my people, but his own clan as vm ai okla mah, inserting the locative
particle ai, with an emphatic sense.
Parents usually refer to their offspring as vila, the child, or children.
There are no words, such as great-grand-father, great-grand-son, etc.,
to express relationship in the same line beyond grandfather and grandson.
All ancestors and descendants more remote than these are called indis-
criminately by these terms.
§ 12. Termination of nouns.
Nouns may end with the vowels a, i, 0, u, and with the consonants f, h,
k, 1, n, p, s, and sh; fakit, a turkey, the only noun ending in t, is probably
a borrowed word. Those which end with a consonant take the article-
pronouns which begin with a vowel sound; as, at, vt, osh, ot, ocha, a, 0,
ona, or with the euphonic y; as, yvt, yosh, yocha, ya.
CHAPTER VI.
ADJECTIVES.
D
§ 1. The words used as adjectives, or attributes of nouns, are in reality
verbs. All the classes of verbs are used to modify nouns, but the attribu-
tive neuter verb is that most frequently employed. When subjoined to
1The Choctaws were formally divided into two iksa, and three ‘“‘fires’ or districts. The latter
were: Okla falaia, the long people; ahepvt okla, potatoe-eating people; okla hannali, six peoples.
The iksa lived promiscuously throughout the nation and their establishment was attributed to
sacred authority. This information I owe to Col. P. P. Pitchlynn, a thorough native Choctaw
scholar, who has kindly read the proof of Mr. Byington’s Grammar with me.
‘
1870. ] 361 [Brinton.
nouns as adjectives, the verbs drop the inseparable and article-pronouns
which belong to verbs alone, but continue to be modified by the internal
changes of the verb.
§ 2. The adjective follows the noun it qualifies, and the article pronouns
subjoined to nouns are removed and placed after the adjective. Thus,
hatak vt mintih, a man is coming; hatak achukma yvt mintih, a good man
is coming. The adjective agrees with its noun in number and case.
§ 3. Affirmative and negative forms.
Adjectives are changed from the affirmative to the negative forms as
verbs are. Thus, hatak kvllo, a strong man; hatak ikhvllo, a man not
strong; ghli, true; ikahlo, not true. A noun with its adjective may be
conjugated like a verb through the modes and tenses in the affirmative
and negative forms.
§ 4. Number.
Adjectives have a singular and plural number. The plural is formep
from the singular by internal changes, and by the addition of other words.
Examples:
Singular. Plural.
achukma, good, hochukma.
chito, large, hochito.
falaia, long, hofaloha.
falvsa, long and slender, falvspoa.
pvtha, wide, hopvtka.
ibakchufanli, tapering, ibakchufashli.
ibakhatanli, bald faced, ibakhatashli.
ibakpishanli, round and pointed, ibakpashashli.
ibaktasanli, starved in the face, ibaktasashli.
yushkotoli, short, yushkotushli.
yushbonoli, curly haired, yushbonushli.
yushtololi, short, yushtolushli.
okchvmali, green, okchymashili.
§ 5. Comparison.
The degrees of comparison are much more numerous Aner § in English.
They are expressed either by internal changes, or by the addition of other
words. Example: achukma, good.
Descending graduation.
achukma ik ono, not good enough.
achukma ik lawo, less good.
achukma momakg ik lawo, less good than all.
achukma iklawokit taha, completely less good than all.
Positive degrees.
achukma, good.
achokma, goodish.
achuhkma, good emphatically.
Brinton.] 362 [February 4,
achoyukma, good in an increased degree.
achukma, good distinctly compared with others.
achohukma, good and growing better.
Comparative degree.
achukma i shahli, better.
Superlative degree.
achukma moma i shahli, best.
achukma kvt i shaht tahli, best, he completes it, subjective.
achukma kvt i shaht taha, best, it is completed, objective.
The last two expressions are attempts to translate the English superla-
tive, and are not natural to the language. They are rarely heard.
Diminutives.
iskitini, small, iskitvnisi, smallish.
okpulo, bad, okpulosi, baddish.
kanomi, few, kanomusi, fewish.
Sometimes it is expressed by a kind of lisp; as for ikchito, not large,
say iksito.
§ 6. Numerals.
These are all parsed like verbs, but are here called adjectives, in accord-
ance with custom.
Cardinal. Ordinal.
1. achvfa. tikba.
2, tuklo. atukla, or hittukla.
3. tukchina. atuchina, or hittuchina.
4. ushta. aiushta, or isht aiushta.
5. tahlapi. ishttahlapi.
6. hannali. isht hannali.
7. untuklo. isht untulo.
8. untuchina. . isht untuchina.
9. chakali. isht chakali.
19. pokoli. isht pokoli.
11. auahchvfa.
12. auahtuklo.
13. auahtuchina.
14. auahushta.
15. auahtahlapi.
16. auahhannali.
17. auahuntuklo.
18. auahuntuchina.
19. auah chakali.
20. pokoli tuklo.
30. pokoli tuchina.
100. tahlepa achvfa.
1000. tahlepa sipokni.
The word auah means with, akucha, out of, over. There are no words
for portions less than one half.
1870.] 363
{ Brinton,
CHAPTER VII.
ADVERBS.
§ 1. Adverbs in Choctaw are verbs as well as adverbs. hey are either
primitive or derived. The former are single words, such as beka, always;
bano, only; illa, merely; tokba, very much; ahli, certainly; pulla, surely.
§ 2. Derived adverbs are formed in various ways. When two verbs
have a connective between them, the first of them may serve merely to
qualify the second and must then be rendered adverbially, though both
may be parsed as verbs; as, achukmalit hvsh hoyashke, do ye search dili-
gently, Mat. II. 8.
Adverbs of place are formed from the demonstrative pronouns ilvppa,
here; yymma, there. These take some of the article-pronouns; ilvppakinli,
right here; yymmakinli, right there.
Adverbs of number are derived from the numerals; as, ushta ha, four
times; ai ushtaha, at the fourth time.
Adverbs of time past are derived from the definite article-pronoun ash,
renewed mention; as, mish ash, day before yesterday; hopakik ash, long
since, long ago.
Adverbs modify each other; fehna chohmi, somewhat very; fehna pulla,
surely very. The degree of modification is varied after the manner of ad-
jectives, by emphasis, by prolonging the sound of a word, or by inserting
asyllable; as, fehna, fiena; cheki, chehki; chiki, chehika.
Diminutives are formed by adding si; as, olatomasi from olatoma, this
way, on this side of; bilikasi from bilika, close by.
§ 3. Interrogatives. These are definite and distinctive. The distinctive
calls for a definite answer; katima ish ia hoh cho? where are you going ?
anchuka ia lih, I am going to my house.
In speaking an interrogative tone is used, and to increase the strength
of the interrogation the final syllable ends with a nasal sound; antg? is he
staying ? minti? is he coming? As there is no predicate in such inter-
rogations, the verbal h finalis dropped. There is a milder interrogative
where the nasal sound is dropped, and the h predicative is suffixed; as,
yohmik ah? is it thus? yobatuh ah? could it be? Interrogatives with
the nasal are distinctive; without the nasal they are definite.
An interrogative in the negative demands an affirmative reply ; as,
yvmmak keyu? is it not that ?=it is that.
The principal interrogative adverbs are katima? or mvto? where?
nanta? what? katiohmi? how? cho? an interrogative particle. Ex-
amples:
Katima ishia ha ? Where did you go? (definite. )
Katima ishia ho ? Where did you go? (distinctive. )
§ 4. Adverbs take the article-pronouns, and some inseparable pronouns;
as, sa tikba, before me (in place); an tikba, before me (in time). When
they follow verbs, the article-pronouns of the verbs are removed, and
placed after the adverbs.
Brinton.) 364
[February 4,
§$ 5. Examples of Choctaw adverbs.
Yes, yea, yau, ah, i, ome.
Nay, not, no, keyu, ahgh, ha, heto, awa, (haia, Chikasaw).
-Much, laua, fehna, apakna.
Little, kanomusi, iskitine, chvbihasi.
Once, himona, himonaha.
Twice, hitukla, hituklaha.
Thrice, hituchina, hituchinaha.
First, vmmona, tickba.
Secondly, ont atukla.
Thirdly, ont atuchina.
Now, himak, himo.
Then, yvmma.
To-day, himak nitak.
To-morrow, onna.
Yesterday, pilashash.
Upward, vba pila, vbema, vba imma.
Downward, oka pila, akema, ak imma, aket.
Beyond, mish sha.
Soon, cheki.
Enough, vilpesa.
Perhaps, chishba, yobaka.
Truly, ahli (from vhli, the limit). .
Hither, anet.
This side of, ola.
Toward, pila.
Merely, peh.
CHAPTER VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
$1. Conjunctions connect words, sentences, clauses and paragraphs,
and commence and close sentences. They are definite and distinctive.
Definite conjunctions usually end with t, vt, or a; as, mihmvt, mihma,
and. The distinctives end with osh or 0; as, mihi osh, mihio. Some are
both definite and distinctive ; as, okvt, oka, where ok, a demonstrative
distinctive, is combined with vt and a definite.
§ 2. They take some of the article-pronouns to exhibit the nominative
and oblique cases; as, mihmvt, nom. case, and he, mihma, oblique case,
and him ; mih is used as a personal pronoun in the third person singular.
Mihmvt is literally ‘‘he then he ;’’ mihma, ‘‘he then him ;”’ mihmvt con-
tains the verb of existence (h predicative) and the subjective copula ;
mihma likewise contains the verb of existence, and solves the subjective
copula, and thus it acts on the subject—the subjective copula being solved.
1870.] 369 [Brinton.
a new subject with its copula takes its place. This conjunction may
be translated by any of the personal pronouns in the third person.
§ 8. The conjunction in the nominative case connects two or more sub-
jects to one verb; as, Acts IJ. 8—11, where mikmyvt and micha connect
the names of several nations with eho haiyak loshke.
When there is one subject and two or more predicates, the subject is
connected with all the predicates; as, Luke XY. 13, where the connective
is suffixed to the predicates as a copula.
But when another subject and predicate following the first are connected
with it, the conjunction is in the oblique case. This change of case gives
notice of the succeeding subject and predicate; as, Mat. I. 2: Eblaham vt
Aisak a tobachi tok; atuko Aisak vt Chekob a tobachi tok; here, atuko is
in the oblique case, and connects the two prepositions, and shows two dif-
ferent subjects. If it were atuk osh instead of atuko it would make Abra-
ham a subject of the second preposition. The genealogy of the Saviour in
Luke III., illustrates the same usage. The conjunction mihma is there
used, ‘‘and he,”’ the subject of the next verb. This change in the con-
junction does not change the subject to the object. It gives notice of
another subject, and connects them both by mihma. The copulais solved,
and the way opened for another subject to take it. Thus, in Luke XYII.
10: achvfa kok osh Falisi okma, achvfa kyto publikan a tok ; okma is in
the oblique case. These instances exhibit the difference between a con-
junction in the nominative and oblique cases,
§ 4. Conjunctions are divided into the following classes:
1. Copulatives ; definite subjective, and, then, t, cha, micha, mihmvt,
mikmvt, yohmi cha, yumohmi cha, yohmi mvt,
yumohmi mvt.
definite objective, na, mina, mihma, mikma.
distinctive, mih ho, mih hosh.
2. Distinctives; or, if not, unless, except, but, keyukmvt, keyu hokmyt,
amba, ikshokmvt, keyukma,
3. Concessives ; although, nevertheless, be it so, admit it. They con-
cede something which has been said. They are kia
and amba. The distinctive article-pronouns osh, 0,
and oh, often precede kia, as akohkia, okako kia.
4. Adversatives; but, yet, notwithstanding, amba, kia; atuk ak a, but,
Luke XIX. 14.
5. Causals; therefore, for, because, as, so as, okvt, yohmi hosh, yohmi
kokvt, yomohmi hosh, yomohmih hoh, yomohmi hokah.
6. Ilatives ; therefore, wherefore, on account of, yomohmi hokvt, yo-
mohmi hokah.
7. Finals; because, for, hokvt, hokah, yohmi hokvt, yohmi hokah.
8. Conditionals ; if, lest, when, then, provided, kmvt, kma (def.), okmvt,
okma, (dis).
A. P. S.—VOL x1.—18E
Brinton.] 366 [February 4,
9. Suspensives ; whether, whether or, km4 (def.), okmé, (dis.), ish toh-
bichikmaé; ish lusachikma, whether white or black,
Mat. V. 36.
Examples of conjunctions:
Again, anonti, anowa, himmakma, himakona.
Also, aiena, itatuklo, mvt, ma, akinli.
Although, kia, okako, okakosh.
And, cha, na, micha, mina, mihmvt, mihma, mikmvt, mikma.
Because, hokvt, hoka, hatukosh.
Besides, aiena, micha, mikmyt, mikma.
But, amba, kia.
Except, keyukma, akcho.
Sinee, hatukosh, hatuko.
Therefore, yvmohmikmvt, yymohmika, yymohmihokvt.
Unless, keyukmyt, keyuhokmvt.
(0) 5.0 cal Mp ig DL
INTERJECTIONS.
§ 1. The Interjections may be divided into two classes, the subjective
and the objective.
§ 2. The subjective interjections.
Theseare produced by a sudden ebullition of feeling and merely manifest
the state of the speaker’s mind, as akshukeh ! oh ! on account of pain from
water or cold; akshupeh ! oh ! when the pain is from fire; ulleh! for any
severe pain; ikikeh ! when in distress of mind or body.
§ 3. The objective interjections.
These are employed to excite the attention of the party addressed;
intah !, ok !, okintah !, well! now! used for defiance or banter; yak eh !
look here !, yak okeh, thanks to you; yokokeh, in lamentation ; omeh !
omishkeh ! to call attention, Give ear! There are interjections for times
of sport, of mourning, of war, victory and defeat. Some are common to
Loth sexes, some used by only one.
$4. Interjections chiefly used by men.
Ahah, no! stop! take heed !
Pullashkeh, God forbid !
Auohmeh, ah indeed !
Hahah, oh!
Han, oh! what !
Humpheh, oh! in anger, defiance, or pain.
Ok, well! now! as, I dare you!
Okintah, well, come on, I dare you.
Omeh, to invite the attention of hearers.
Omishkeh, the same in more solemn style.
Yakoh ! yakih !, a shout by the warner to the ball-players.
1870. ]
36 il [Brinton.
Interjections chiefly used by women.
Aiena, alas, wo is me.
Aiyenaheh, alas, wo, uttered at funerals.
Ehwah, fie ! begone, in reproach or disgust.
Aiheh, oho! half infun and half in earnest.
Wehkah, quit ! don’t !
Kaihoh, oh! in fear.
Interjections common to both sexes.
Ok hob, no! no! quit! in anger.
Akshukeh, oh dear ! it hurts me !
Okshupeh, oh! it burns!
Ehah, woe, woe !
Hai, in disappointment.
Hok, oh!
Hush, alas !
Hushha, alas !
Ikkikeh, alas ! pity !
Intah, well, now, come, enough !
Issah, guit ! be off! stop!
Mah, look there now, sign of vocative.
Makhalokah, “let it be so to him,’’ in centempt.
Mishia, begone !
Okkvnno, indeed !
Okokkoh, oh dear! alas!
Stated Meeting, April 15, 1870.
Present, ten members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Donations were announced from the Acclimatisation So-
ciety of Paris; the Editors of Nature; the Commissioners of
Emigration of the State of New York; Prof. Réhrig, of the
Cornell University; the Hssex Institute; Dr. Newberry; the
Phila. Acad. Nat. Sciences; Journal of Med. Sciences, and
Franklin Institute, and the U. 8. Secretary of the Treasury.
Prof. Cope exhibited and described vertebrae and other
parts of a new species of Botlosaurus, found in the upper beds
368
of the Cretaceous Green Sand of Burlington Co., N. J., and
showed how it differed from B. Harlani.
Prof. Hayden exhibited photographs of fossil fishes, from
the Green River locality described at the last meeting, and
described a new process of picture printing, from which a
great improvement in the representations of natural objects
may be expected; he also showed sketches of Gelogical sec-
tions of the Rocky Mountain rocks.
Dr. Brinton described the peculiar mode adopted by Mr.
Charency for interpreting some curious inscriptions newly
discovered at Pelenque.
The Society then proceeded to ballot for members, nomina-
tions Nos. 601, 602, 654 and 650, being postponed for the
present.
When, the ballot boxes were examined by the presiding |
officer, the following persons were declared duly elected mem-
bers of the Society:
Major R.S. Williamson, U. 8. Engineers.
Hon. J. D. Cox, of Washington, D. C.
Prof. Charles H. Hitchcock, of New York City.
Mr. Edmund Quincy, of Dedham, Mass.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, May 6, 1870.
Present, twenty-five members.
Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. J. D.
Cox, dated Department of the Interior, Washington, April
26; Mr. Edmund Quincy, dated Dedham, Mass., April 20;
and Mr. C. H. Hitchcock, dated Hanover, N. H., April 29,
1870.
Photographs of Prof. F. L. O. Rohrig, Cornell University,
Ithaca, N. Y., and Dr. Horn, of Philadelphia, were received
for the album.
369
Letters acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings and an-
nouncing transmissions, were read.
Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Academies and Societies at St. Petersburgh, Munich, Goéttin-
gen, Copenhagen and Edinburgh; the Society at Marburg;
the Geological Society at Berlin; Geographical Society at
Paris, and Astronomical Society at London; the Institutes at
Salem, Philadelphia, and Baltimore; the New Jersey and
Pennsylvania Historical Societies; the State Geologist of
New Jersey; Dr. Ruschenberger, Hon. W. D. Kelley, Mr. C.
H. Hunt, Genl. Abbott, and the Public School Commissioners
in St. Louis.
The death of a late member of the Society, Mr. Franklin
Peale, of Philadelphia, on Thursday morning, May 5, aged 74,
was announced by Mr. Robert Patterson, who, on motion of
Mr. Fraley, was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of
the deceased.
The Secretary communicated, as from the author, the sec-
ond part of a Memoir on the Geological Position, Characters
and Equivalencies of the Marshall Group, by Prof. Alex.
Winchell, Part I. of which was published in the Proceedings,
IN@, Sl
The Secretary gave the following account of beads from
Indian graves on the Susquehanna River, now in the posses-
sion of Prof. S. 8. Haldeman, of Columbia, Pa.
A bead found in an Indian grave near Bainbridge, Lancas-
ter Co., Pa., in making the Pennsylvania Canal, about the yéar
1832. The bead is spherical, but made out of a section of a
cylinder, or group of four concentric cylinders, the outer one
blue, the middle one red, between these a thin one of white,
and the fourth also white, forming an innermost thin lining
to the red and a coating to the siphunele or string-hole
through the centre. The end section of the three inner eylin-
ders is star-shaped, or, more properly, corrugated very regu-
larly in 13 waves, lke a watch pinion of 18 cogs. The
white shining through the blue produces a banded appear-
ance of the surface of the bead, the bands being alternately
deep blue and hght blue. No doubt the blue cylinder was
corrugated on the outside surface, also, and then pressed or
rolled smooth. ‘The diameter of the bead across the string-
3710
hole is 3; 1n., and its length } inch. Its general appear-
ance can be known from that of the objects figured on Plate,
p» WI Proceedings Amer. Iiuillos;Soc., “Decl 0; le02 Mes:
pecially Fig. 3.
With this bead others were found, made of segments of
blue glass cylinders about yo inch diameter, and about half an
inch long; others of Venetian red color, of the same diame-
ter, but an inch or an inch anda half long. See similar figures
in Schooleraft. Also, a string of very small copper beads,
above 7; of an inch large, every way, made of bits of flat cop-
per wire coiled to receive a string.
Dr. Allen presented for publication in the Transactions, a
paper “On some of the effects of age as observed in the
osseous system,” with three plates, which was referred toa
committee consisting of Dr. Ruschenberger, Dr. Leidy and
Prof. Lesley.
Prof. Cope presented a paper entitled, ‘Observations on
the Fishes of the Tertiary Shales of Green River, Wyoming,”
collected by Dr. Hayden. (See Proceedings, page 380.)
Dr. Hayden presented for publication three papers, de-
scriptive of certain elaborately drawn and colored sections of
rocks exposed in the cuttings of the Union Pacific Railroad.
(See Procecdings, about page 419.)
Professor Cope exhibited and discussed a new Dycynodont
cranium from the Trias of South Africa, and compared it
with some evidently Dycynodont tusks from the Triassic
rocks of the Phoenixville tunnel, on the Reading Railroad,
thirty miles northwest of Philadelphia, which he exhibited to
sustain his remarks. (See Proceedings, about page 418.)
Mr. James returned to the custody of the Society, the MSS.
of Pursh’s Botanical Journal, loaned to him for publication in
1869; and, with the MSS., presented to the Library of the So-
ciety a copy of the published Journal, with MSS. notes of his
own interleaved.
Mr. James returned, also, certain mosses, loaned to him from
the Muhlenberg Herbarium, for comparison.
Pending nominations Nos. 651 to 609 were read, and the
Society was adjourned.
Provost C. J. Stillé then read an obituary notice of the late
Mr. Horace Binney, Jun. (See Proceedings, page 3/1.)
May 6, 1870. 371 (Stille.
OBITUARY NOTICE OF HORACE BINNEY, Jr.,
Read before the American Philosophical Society,
By CHARLES J. STILLE.
It is not often that the judgment of a man’s life and character by
the world agrees with that of his intimate friends. By the world,
success in life is too often measured by results which strike most for-
cibly the popular imagination ;—it means a large fortune, a brilliant
professional reputation, opportunities eagerly sought and adroitly
tuken advantage of, for gaining prominent public positions. To his
friends on the other hand, a man may be most endeared and best re-
membered by qualities of which the world knows nothing, or at best
knows them only as they are seen in the perfect symmetry of his life.
Happy is the memory of him who, dying, forces the world to forsake
for once the false standards by which it commonly judges character,
and extorts from it an involuntary homage to what is real and true
in human life. I think that the career of our late friend and col-
league, Mr. Binney, is an illustration of this rare coincidence between
the opinion of the world, and that of a man’s inner circle of friends.
Here was a man who won none of the great prizes of life as the
world counts them, who was not a successful politician, who never
aspired to high official position, or gained great professional reputa-
tion, who had none of the arts which please the multitude, who was
simply a man of warm sympathies, and generous culture, striving to
do his duty in the fear of God in that station of life in which his lot
had been cast, a simple-hearted, modest Christian gentieman,—and
yet when he dies, a voice comes to us made up of many voices, pro-
claiming that his conception of life was a just one, and that such a
life is worthy of our affectionate commemoration.
HorACcE BINNEY, JUNIOR, was born in Philadelphia, on the 21st of
January, 1809. He was the eldest son of the Honorable Horace Bin-
ney, and one of the many blessings of his life was, that during the
whole of it he felt himself supported by the wise counsel, the sure
guidance, and the lofty example of such a Father. The influence of
Fathers upon their children is, I fear, declining in this age and coun-
try, but in this case the deep yet discriminating affection of the
Father for the son, and the profound filial reverence of that son to-
wards the Father, forms a picture as attractive and suggestive, as
unhappily in our experience it is rare. Such a relationship between
two such men continued for threescore years, could not be without
an important influence on both. By the younger, at least, it was felt
as a power which he never referred to, except to speak of it with grati-
tude, as having happily controlled the whole course of his life.
Stillé.] 372 [May 6,
As a boy, Mr. Binney was of a serious and thoughtful turn. His
love of study, and his exquisite moral sense were developed simul-
taneously, and they soon became blended in that perfect harmony
which formed the great charm of his character in his maturer years.
He was somewhat shy and retiring in his disposition, and possibly a
constitution never very robust, may have unfitted him for those boyish
sports for the keenest enjoyment of which high animal spirits are
essential. His studies began in the school of Mr. James Ross, and
under the training of that most accomplished teacher he gained great
proficiency in the Greek and Latin Classics. In this school, among
his friends and associates, were the late Professor Henry Reed, Charles
Chauncey, a young man of great promise, cut off in early manhood,
and the Rev. Dr. Hare—and they remained his friends until death
divided them. ‘‘ He was remarkable among his school-mates’’ says
the last survivor of these companions, ‘‘for the qualities which dis-
tinguished him in after life. He was to an unusual degree just, regu-
lar and industrious. I have no remembrance of his having ever
missed a lesson or incurred a censure.’’
Mr. Binney entered the Freshman class in Yale College, in the au-
tumn of 1824, in his sixteenth year. Although he was with one ex-
ception, the youngest member of a class nearly one hundred strong,
his attainments in the classics were far beyond those required by the
College rules for admission. This proficiency gave him of course a
great advantage at the start, and was no doubt one cause of his high
standing in his class. I well remember years afterwards at Yale a
tradition, that Mr. Binney’s class was one of the most brilliant which
had ever passed through that College, and in this class he carried off
the highest honors. Those who know what is meant at Yale by that
distinction, can best estimate not merely the attainments, but the
force of character required in a boy of twenty years of age to reach
it. His friends at College, like his friends at school, seem to have
been chosen from those whose subsequent career proves his early dis-
criminating judgment of character. J need mention only the names
of two of our most eminent colleagues, Mr. Justice Strong, and Dr.
Barnard, President of Columbia College, who were his class-mates,
and his life-long friends, in illustration of what I have said.
Perhaps however, the most powerful influence in moulding his
character at this period of his life, came from a source outside the
College. During the four years of his residence there. not a day
passed in which a letter was not written by the Father to the son, or
by the son to the Father. Such a correspondence could never have
been maintained without that profound mutual confidence in each
other which was a striking characteristic of both. It had too the
inestimable advantage of making the Father and the son better
known to each other, and one of its results was, that the Father who
1870. ] 313 [Stillé.
had been the most careful and judicious of parents while his boy was
at College, regarded him from the time he left it to the day of his
death, as a younger brother rather than a son.
It is not to be supposed that because Mr. Binney attained the high-
est College honors, he had no time or inclination for studies beyond
the ordinary curriculum. Although a firm believer to the last, in the
simply disciplinary value of a thorough study of the Classics and the
Mathematics, he never had the folly to suppose that four of the most
precious years of his life were to be given merely to training his in-
tellect, without storing his mind with knowledge, or cultivating his
taste. His study of languages, and especially of Greek, led him into
a far wider field than that embraced by an accurate knowledge of
their grammar and their idioms. His proficiency was such that he
was able to do that which few young men at College ever do, to re-
gard the ancient languages principally as the vehicles of the litera-
ture of the people who spoke them. He was thus led to study in the
best way, the civilization of the free states of antiquity. No one had
a finer appreciation of what modern culture owes to Greek models.
He himself was thoroughly imbued with their spirit, and their influ-
ence was conspicuous in liberalising his views and directing his stud-
ies all through life.
There can be, I suppose, little doubt that Mr. Binney’s strong reli-
gious nature inclined him after he left College to adopt as a profes-
sion, that of the Sacred Ministry. That he acted wisely in not fol-
lowing this inclination, no one who now looks back upon his career
can doubt. Mr. Binney’s life as a layman was a living epistle of all
virtues, a daily exhibition in the midst of no ordinary trials and du-
ties, of purity, goodness, faith and truth, and it is not to be doubted
that the silent influence of such a life upon those around him was as
powerful and as healthful as if he had been the most brilliant profes-
sional teacher of those Divine truths, the fruits of which were so con-
spicuous in his daily walk and conversation. There is no warrant
for the statement which has been made, that he wished to devote
himself to the Ministry, and that he was persuaded by his Father
to study Law. His Father, no doubt wished and recommended it,
but his intervention was confined to pointing out the priceless value
of the life of a truly religious layman in the world, and more par-
ticularly that among such religious men in England, were to be found
several of her most eminent Judges and Lawyers. No one, indeed,
who knows how solemn a thing duty always was with Mr. Binney,
and how absolute was the confidence which his Father reposed in
him, can doubt that the decision when arrived at, was the result of
his own free and deliberate choice.
Mr. Binney’s career as a Lawyer was not a striking or brilliant
one. He studied his profession, as he did everything he undertook,
A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—19E
Stillé.] 374 [May 6,
thoroughly and conscientiously, and his well-trained mind, and habits
of industry, made him a master of the great principles of the science:
But he was never intended for a professional athlete. He had none
of the abundant self-assertion, the eager watching of opportunity
for advancement, or the disposition to regard litigation as a game,
the chief interest of which lies in the chances of success of those who
conduct it, which are so characteristic of one class of Lawyers,
while he had not those extraordinary gifts which make the fame of
the truly great Lawyer, like that of the great Historian, one of the
rarest of intellectual distinctions. He was however without doubt,
one of those who do most to secure for the Profession the confidence
of the Public. His nature abhorred all the arts of low cunning and
chicanery, or rather with a certain noble simplicity, he seemed scarce-
ly aware of their existence, and he lived in a moral atmosphere so
pure, that it inspired every one who approached him with implicit
trust and confidence. Hence in that large class of cases (much lar-
ger than is commonly supposed), in which the moral qualities of the
man are quite as important to the interests of the client as the pro-
fessional skill of the lawyer, he found abundant occupation. He was
eminently a safe counsellor, accurate and thorough, and perfect mas-
ter of any case which had been confided to him. I have been assured
by one of the most eminent living Jurists, that there are at least two
cases in our Reports in which Mr. Binney’s printed arguments have
always seemed to him models of Professional skill, showing on his
part perfect familiarity with some of the most intricate and difficult
questions of the Law.
Mr. Binney’s extreme modesty, and his utter aversion to display
or ostentation of any kind, confined his reputation as a scholar chief-
ly within the limits of those who knew him well. To his friends he
seemed always a man of genuine scholarly instincts, loving the famil-
iar intercourse of the wise, the true, and the good of all ages, as a
means of enriching and invigorating his own nature. His memory
abounded with passages from his favorite Latin authors, and he
studied Greek literature, and especially the Greek Scriptures in a
thoroughly critical spirit. I have often heard him refer to certain
expressions in the original, the peculiar significance of which he
thought had been lost in the translation. He talked often of St.
Paul as one of the finest specimens of Greek culture, and nothing
could be more instructive than to listen to his analysis of the speech
before Agrippa, and of its points of resemblance to the most cele-
brated productions of the Greek orators. He referred frequently to
the connexion between Greek culture, and the spread of Christianity,
and to the providential combination for that purpose at the time of
its Advent, of the Jewish or Monotheistic idea of the Deity, of the
Greek conception of the dignity of man, and of the universal Roman
1870.) 370 [Stiilé.
sway. He was fond of the study of history, but its chief interest to
him, was as a record of the dealings of God with his creatures, and
of the influence of the Church as a divinely organized institution in
the world. His familiarity with ancient literature and ancient his-
tory never tempted him as it has done so many scholars in our day, to
make it the basis of a destructive criticism which would leave us no
Divine revelation, and no personal God. If he abstained, it was not
from indifference, nor from a fear of the consequences, but because
no man ever had a clearer intellectual perception than himself, of
the boundaries between the domain of faith and that of reason.
The classical spirit with which Mr. Binney was imbued, formed
the basis of all his canons of taste and criticism. He had learned
at least one thing from the Greeks which so many are apt to forget,
and that was the value of simplicity and truth in style. He had
a great dislike for everything that was exaggerated, abnormal, or
simply pretentious. Like Plato, he sought the beautiful by striving
to find the true, and any picture in which truth and reality were sac-
rificed to effect failed to make the intended impression upon him.
He thought that the ancient Poets and Dramatists pourtrayed most
truly human emotions and passions, because their descriptions were
at least consistent and natural, and because they did not present to
us as real human beings, those literary monsters of modern times,—
““the names linked with one virtue and a thousand crimes.’’ He had
the keenest perception of what was of real value, either in the form
or in the substance of the writings of others. He especially disliked
that mode of presenting or discussing a subject which was simply
rhetorical, passionate, or sensational. Such a style offended equally
his moral, and his esthetic principles. It was not true because it was
one-sided, and there was no beauty to him in anything which was
not true. I have always regarded Mr. Binney as one of the best illus-
trations I have ever met with, of the practical value of classical stud-
ies, and I may mention here that during his long service as a Trustee
of the Protestant Episcopal Academy,—extending over a period of
nearly forty years,—and as a Trustee of the University, he was un-
ceasing in his efforts to uphold their dignity, and in insisting upon
their value in every scheme of liberal culture.!
1The following anecdote will illustrate Mr. Binney’s familiarity with Greek style.
Mr. Richard Henry Wilde, once a member of Congress from Georgia, and an accomplished scho-
lar, had written some beautiful verses beginning, ‘‘ My life is like the summer rose, &c.,” which
being published in the newspapers, became widely known. Some time after, Mr. Wilde was sur-
prised to find in a Georgia newspaper, a Greek Ode purporting to have been written by Alczus, an
early Eolian poet of somewhat obscure fame, and it was claimed that Mr. Wilde’s verses were simply
a translation of this Ode, the ideas in both being almost identical. As Mr. Wilde had never heard
of Alczus, he was much puzzled to account for this resemblance of the two poems, At the sug-
gestion of a friend, the Greek Ode was sent to Mr. Binney for examination and criticism. He at
once, much to the relief of Mr. Wilde, pronounced it a forgery, pointing out wherein its style dif-
fered from that of classical Greek. It turned out afterwards that the Ode in question had been
written by an Oxford scholar on a wager that no one in that University was sufficiently familiar
with the style of the early Greek poets, to detect the counterfeit. To carry out this scheme, he hat
translated Mr. Wilde’s verses into Greek.
Stillé.] 376 [May 6,
It is not to be inferred from what has been said, that Mr. Binney
led the life of a secluded student, for he felt the deepest interest in
the great movements which were going on around him, yet it is also
true that he had no ambition to occupy a prominent position in public
life. The arts of the politician were abhorrent to every instinct of
his nature, and he felt, as we all do, that by these arts success is chief-
ly gained in a public career. He was one of that class, who, obsery-
ing quietly the current of human affairs, are not disposed to make
vain efforts to check its course until it threatens to sap the founda-
tions of society, and those who have hitherto guided it lie panic-
stricken and helpless. Such men form the true reserve force of a
nation ; never seen, almost never thought of in days when all is
smooth and prosperous, they are the only guides who are trusted in
the crisis of danger. Mr. Binney was a typical man of this class.
He was forced into public life when earnest men sought to purify our
Municipal Government, or when the suppression of riot and blood-
shed in his native city, required him to assume the singularly uncon-
genial duties of a Captain of a Volunteer Company.
In his religious opinions, Mr. Binney was a conservative Church-
man. He had deeply studied the organization and claims of the
Christian Church, and was strongly convinced of the rightfulness
of its authority as a Divine agency in this world. With a most de-
vout and earnest spirit, he strove through this means to uphold a high
standard of Christian life and duty. He revered the memory of the
Saints and Martyrs of that Church. The virtues which distinguished
them—child-like faith, humility, self denial, and. an earnest love of
the weak and the lowly—were those which found in him the fullest
recognition and sympathy. His moral instincts and his mental cul-
ture were here also in perfect harmony, and his enthusiasm for Saint-
ly George Herbert, and his familiarity with Keble’s Christian Year,
which he could repeat from beginning to end, were due, not merely
to his appreciation of the literary merits of those Poets, but also to
their praise of those virtues which it had been his life-long concern
to cultivate.
Mr. Binney’s peculiar views concerning the Church and its func-
tions, modified his opinions upon many important questions, especial-
ly in regard to those great movements of moral reform by which the
present age is so strongly characterized. With an ardent desire that
“men should grow purer and happier, his sober and serious judgment
made him very slow in adopting any one of the plausible schemes
by which it was proposed to accomplish that desirable object. He
was no humanitarian. He had very little hope for the future of the
race outside the influence of Christian faith and duty. He saw too
much of the disturbing passions of mankind to believe that true pro-
gress could be made inany other way. In all his work for his fellow-
1870.] 317 (Stille.
men he was guided by a principle far deeper and more enduring than
a vague sentiment of philanthropy, and that was, obedience to a
duty divinely commanded. Hence his zeal had all the characteristics
of duty,—courage, constancy and self-denial-—-and none of the weak-
nesses attendant upon mere passionate impulse.
How completely Mr. Binney’s whole life was the outgrowth of this
principle of duty was shown by his conduct during the war. He
had no favorite theories to establish, no passions to gratify by the
subjugation of the Southern people. Moreover, he was one of those
who, while he deplored most deeply the evils of slavery, felt himself
bound by the force of positive law to abstain from interfering with
it where it existed. Yet when a gigantic conspiracy to overturn the
government of the country revealed itself, he regarded it with almost
judicial calmness, and he prepared to resist it, as he would have per-
formed any other high duty with all the manly earnestness of his na-
ture. Shocked and indignant, no doubt, he was:
‘* Neque enim siluisse licebat,
Cum passos, meerens indigna, Columbia crines
Et pectus lacerum et stillantia lumina monstrat.”’
Yet he never lost his balance: he went about his work with a sober
enthusiasm which was deep-rooted in conscientious conviction. He
never doubted or wavered, nor weakly desponded, but keeping his eye
steadily on the end in view, he gave himself and all that he had to
the support of the government. Nothing was more suggestive than the
sight of this quiet, undemonstrative gentleman, in active sympathy
with the country in danger. Of all the many schemes devised here
to give popular aid to the authorities during the war, he was a most
zealous promoter. He was one of the founders of the Union League
of this City, an agency in the successful prosecution of the war, the
value of which I do not think it easy to over-estimate. He was never
unduly excited by our successes, or depressed by our reverses, and I
do not think that I ever saw him more moved during the war, than
when on a public occasion here, he expressed his satisfaction that
he was at last permitted to give free play to his convictions concerning
slavery, and to aid with a clear conscience in its destruction.
Mr. Binney’s services during the war were not confined, as is well
known, to a hearty support of the policy of the government. His
active sympathy soon embraced those who were called upon to defend
the country at the risk of their lives. He sought every opportunity
to promote their health, comfort and efficiency. He helped to build
up that great monument of American civilization, the United States
Sanitary Commission, and he is entitled to a full share of whatever
honor may be due to those who organized and carried on the grandest
and most efficient system of voluntary relief to the sick and wounded
of an Army known in History since wars began on earth.
Stillé.] 378 [May 6,
He was elected on the thirtieth of July, 1861, by the gentlemen ap-
pointed by the President of the United States, a ‘‘Commission of
Inquiry and Advice in respect of the Sanitary Interests of the United
States Forces,’’ a member of that body. His duties in this position
were all engrossing. To do properly the work which the Commission
had undertaken to do, which was nothing less than an attempt to
supplement by the full measure of popular sympathy the deficiencies
of the government service in the care of the suffering of the Army,
required something more than mere devotion and zeal. If the whole
project was not to end by increasing the very evils it sought to
remedy, there was need of the utmost judgment, prudence and intelli-
gence on the part of those who managed its affairs, in order to secure
the harmonious co-operation of the army officials. In shaping and
directing the policy of the Commission to this end, Mr. Binney was
always conspicuous. On many occasions during its sessions in Wash-
ington, I was impressed with his sound and well-considered views, not
merely in regard to the general objects of the Commission, but as to
the best methods of securing them. His judgment was always so
sure and calm, his counsel so wise and patriotic, that he soon gained
the fullest confidence of his colleagues, many of whom were among
the foremost men in the country.
But Mr. Binney’s care for the sick and the suffering of the Army
during the war, did not end with this general supervision of the
means to be taken to improve their condition. One of the methods
adopted by the Sanitary Commission to organize popular sympathy on
the widest basis, was the establishment of branch or tributary asso-
ciations in different parts of the country. In pursuance of this plan,
Mr. Binney was instructed to organize in December, 1861, such an
association in this City. By his zeal and personal influence, he
gathered round him many of our prominent citizens, who desired to
aid in this great scheme of Army relief. Of this body, called the
‘‘ Philadelphia Associates,’ Mr. Binney was Chairman during the
war, and by means of its labors, more than a million and a half of
dollars were contributed in aid of the purposes for which the Com-
mission was established. It is impossible, it seems to me, to recall
the vast proportions which this work assumed without admiration,
wonder and gratitude. Under Mr. Binney’s wise and earnest leader-
ship, it collected vast supplies from the homes of the country, and
distributed them to the suffering of the Army, it supplemented the
needs of the Military Hospitals, local and general, —it was foremost in
relieving the miseries of battle-fields; it established a Hospital Direc-
tory, by means of which the condition of the suffering soldier, in
any Military Hospital, might become speedily known to his friends,
and it maintained a Bureau for the purpose of collecting the soldiers,
claims on the government without charge to him. To carry on this
1870.) 319
[Stillé.
great scheme, it secured large contributions from our citizens, and as
its crowning work, it organized the Great Central Fair in 1864—an
enduring memorial, not merely of the patriotism and mercy of the
people of Philadelphia, but also a wonderful proof of their perfect
trust that their vast benefactions would be wisely administered by
Mr. Binney, and the gentlemen associated with him.
It has sometimes been said that the war and its duties, brought into
active excercise qualities in many men which had lain dormant all their
lives, and of the existence of which they themselves had hardly been
conscious. But in Mr. Binney’s case, the war only offered an oppor-
tunity for an exhibition on a wider sphere of virtues, which had been
his essential characteristics through life. He had courage, for in-
stance,—not mere coolness in the midst of danger, although he pos-
sessed that to an eminent degree,—but a much loftier quality, which
the French call the courage of one’s opinions. His convictions were
intensely strong, and when once formed, no power on earth would
move him. Out of every conviction grew a duty, which soon brought
forth fruit in an appropriate act. No one who knew Mr. Binney,
could doubt his perfect readiness to maintain opinions so formed,
with the courage and constancy of a martyr. And yet there was
at all times in him, such true modesty, and a manner so unassum-
ing, and almost shrinking, that to many the real strength of his na-
ture lay hidden. His largeness of view, and his innate sense of cour-
tesy, preserved him from the slightest taint of arrogance when he
differed from others. Certainly, no opinions were held by Mr. Bin-
ney more strongly or clearly, than those concerning the nature and
the functions of the Church, and yet I have seen him in the most in-
timate personal relations with representatives of almost every type
of thought on this subject, except his own, at all times most zealous-
ly co-operating with them in the performance of duties demanded by
a common Christianity.
As Mr. Binney was earnest and constant in his devotion to any
cause the success of which he had at heart, so he was enthusiastic in
his attachment to those whom he honored with his friendship. This
is a trait of his character which I think is little understood. Few
suspected what a fount of generous affection and tenderness lay hid-
den under that quiet and undemonstrative exterior. When he once
trusted a man, he seemed to give himself up wholly to him. The
only instances which I can recall, in which his usually calm judgment
was disturbed, arose from this intense desire to serve his friends. On
one occasion I had urged him to support for an important position a
gentleman in whose success I felt a deep interest. After listen-
ing patiently to what I had tosay, he suddenly exclaimed: ‘‘Do not
press me, do you know that Dr. (the opposing candidate), once
saved my life??? Then again, he was led to feel that one of his friends
Sullé.] 380 [May 6, 1870.
had done some service to the country by his writings at a critical
period of the war. From that hour his heart warmed towards that
friend: he gave him his fullest confidence, he spoke in the most un-
measured terms of the value of his services, and whatever influence
he could command, was thenceforth exerted to secure for him posts
of trust and honor. And this is the man, with a heart as simple as
a child’s, and as tender as a woman’s, ae was thought cold ET for-
mal by anaes who did not know him.
Mr. Binney never fully recovered from the effects of an illness
through which he passed about ten years ago. Within a few weeks
of his death, a disease of the heart was rapidly developed, and he
was snatched away from his family and friends with startling sud-
deness, on the third of February, 1870. He left a widow, the daughter
of the late William Johnson, Esquire, of New York, the eminent
Reporter, and the muimiase friend of Chancellor Kent, and seven
children.
His life seems to me to have been in its Se beauty almost
an ideal one. It was nurtured and strengthened by the two great
principles out of which all true excellence springs, Trust in God, and
Devotion to Duty :
“Thus it flowed
From its mysterious urn a sacred stream,
In whose calm depths the beautiful and pure
Alone are mirror’d ; which, though shapes of ill
May hover round its surface, glides in light,
And takes no shadow from them.”’
OBSERVATIONS ON THE FISHES OF THE TERTIARY SHALES
OF GREEN RIVER, WYOMING TERRITORY.
By Pror. E. D. Cope.
Physoclysti.
ASINEOPS, Cope, gen. nov.
FAM. SQUAMIPENNES. Branchiostegal radii, seven; ventral radii I. 6—7.
Opercular and other cranial bones unarmed; scales cycloid. Spinous and
cartilaginous dorsal fins continuous; caudal rounded; anal with two spines.
Lateral line distinct, not interrupted. Operculum with regularly convex
posterior border. Teeth coarsely villiform, without canines. Both spinous
and soft portions of dorsal and anal fins moderately scaly.
This well marked genus is established on the remains of fifteen indi-
viduals, in various states of preservation, so that the characters undis-
tinguishable in one, can be discovered in another. Thus the lateral line is
preserved in one only, and the teeth in another. Janone can I be entirely
sure that I see the vomer.
The scales are preserved in many specimens, and I cannot find a ctenoid
margin in any, nor any radiating sculpture, but delicate concentric ridges
continued round the central point proximally, distally forming parabolic
Cope.] 381 [May 6, 1870.
curves, the less median not completed but interrupted by the margin of
the scale. Near the margin all the ridges become gently zig-zagged.
There is no depression between the two portions of the dorsal fin, though
the cartilagius portion is the more elevated. Laid backwards, the latter
is in line with the extremity of the anal, and both extend beyond the basis
of the caudal.
The close affinities of this genus are difficult to determine with entire
satisfaction. In its smooth cranial bones and united dorsals it is like the
genera Apsilus Cuv. Val. of the Atlantic, and Micropterus Lac. of the fresh
waters of North America. Its numerous ventral radii, agreeing with
those of the Berycide (or Agassiz’ section Holocentri in Poiss. Fossiles)
separate it entirely from the above genera. The absence of the emarigina-
tion of the operculum, also distinguishes it from Micropterus. Its affini-
ties are, however, entirely remote from the Berycide. The genus to which
it stands in nearest relationship, is Pygzeus, of Agassiz, which he refers to
the Cheetodontide, and which, if so referred, will intervene between the
typical forms of the family, and the aberrant Toxotes. The only char-
acter by which I distinguish it from Pygeus, is the presence of one or two
additional ventral radii, the number in the latter genus being I. 5. Nine
species of that genus are described in the Poissons Fossiles all from
Monte Bolca, and the existence of the present near ally, suggests a deter-
mination of the age of the Green River beds, which the other species do
not furnish. This would be upper Eocene.
ASINEOPS SQUAMIFRONS, Cope, sp. nov.
General form is sub-oblong, the greatest depth just behind the head,
and contained two and a half times in the length exclusive of caudal fin.
Radii D. VIII, 14; A. II, 9; C. 14; V.I, 7; P. 211 218. Scales 5—?30—10,
vertical line counted a little behind the ventral fins. The line of the ex-
tremities of the second dorsal and anal fins, marks the basal third of the
caudal fin. The dorsal spines are sub-cylindric, slightly curved, and of
nearly equal length; the length equals the depth of the body at the middle
of the second dorsal fin.
The external series of villiform teeth are stout of their kind, conic, and
a little incurved. I cannot see the pharyngeal bones or teeth.
The number of vertebre which extends between the caudal fin and the
superior margin of the operculum, where one or more are concealed, is
twenty-five, of which fifteen are of the caudal portion (in two I can only
count fourteen).
The mouth is directed obliquely downwards and is rather large; the
mandible, when closed, does not project beyond the premaxillary border.
The maxillary, where preserved, is narrow distally, and does not project
beyond the posterior line of the orbit. The latter is rather small, and
though not well defined in any specimen, is not more than one-eighth the
length of the head, and 1.5 to, 1.75 times inside of muzzle. The margins
of all the opercular bones are entire and smooth. The interoperculum is
narrow, and lies obliquely upwards, narrowing the operculum. The
A. P. S.—VOL. XI.—20E
Cope.] 382 [May 6,
greatest width of the latter is more than two-thirds its depth. The pelvic
supports of the ventral fins are slender, and about half the length of the
fin. The pectoral fins are not elongate.
The scales extend over the top of the head to or beyond the orbits.
They also extend out on the ramus of the under jaw. Those of the fins
are quite small; they extend to a considerable distance on the unpaired
and on the caudal fins.
Total length of the largest specimen................ 0.19
Do. No. 2, smaller example (with caudal)............ 0.12
eng throtneadtoted Onesie neeaien eae terete ec 0.044
Depth of do. posteriorly about...................... 0.036
Length base spinous dorsal......................-.-- 0.0265
OG WOSTETLOL Me sacral rats eres yesh chaneveruaceerste ek: 0.017
a OpPercullu meyer tasers irre cree kolvrene rate caro 0.0125
2) maxillary jboneraboutir..1-)-tmi or aides trarr 0.0145
Depth No. 3, at base 1st dorsal.................-..-- 0.045
eg SO ie hee amas Stab yao cuams nce cect ce 0.0325
Length basis anal=basis caudal..................---. 0.0162
6 CHO M NI R ome ONT One eae Oe OO CEES 0.0384
Tertiary strata of Green River, Wyoming; Dr. F. V. Hayden, Coll. Mus.
Smithsonian.
‘ CLUPEA HUMILIS, Leidy.
Proc. Acad. Nat’l Sciences, 1856, 256.
Vertebrie 34. Depth 23 to 22 lines in length exclus caudal fin (23 times,
Leidy). Seales large; 1. transverse 11-12.
A very abundant species in the shales.
CLUPEA PUSILLA, Cope.
Greatest depth contained four times in the total length, or 3.5 times to
basis of caudal fin. Length of head 3.2 to basis caudal;—this measure-
ment may require revision, as the end of the muzzle is slightly injured.
Orbit large, contained twice in length of head behind it. Middle of dorsal
near the middle of length, and about over the origins of the ventrals. D.
II. 11, V. 7%. Pectorals extending half way to ventrals. Vertebree 29-380,
dorsals 19-80. Ventral keeled ribs18. Anal fin lost. Caudal peduncle slen-
der, caudal fin deeply furcate. Length M. 044; greatest depth M. 011.
The present species is about half the size of the last, and of consider-
ably less proportionate depth.
CYPRINODON LEVATUS, Cope.
Anterior margin anal fin commencing a little behind opposite the pos-
terior margin of the dorsal. Vertebre 10. 14. I. Radii D. 8, A. II. 8, V.
8. Caudal fin deeply furcate; first anal ray strong.
General form elongate, the greatest depth contained three times in the
length between the scapular arch and the basis of the caudal fin. Scales
preserved, small; seven longitudinal series above, and seven below the
vertebral column, probably two rows concealed by it. The caudal peduncle
is rather contracted for the genus, Length from scapular arch to extrem-
ity of caudal M. 0335; depth at origin dorsal fin M. 008.
1870. } 383
[Cope.
There are portions of five individuals on the slab of slate, but none pre-
sent a clear cranium. This slab represents that portion of the stratum
which is highly carbonaceous, portions of it thrown into the fire burn
freely. Dr. Hayden, who has brought numerous specimens from this
locality, informs me that the laminz exhibit great numbers of these little
fishes. No doubt the carbonaceous character of the shales is due to the
decomposition of their bodies. The character of the species, as well as
nature of the deposit, and mode of preservation, remind one strongly of
the Cyprinodon meyeri, of Agassiz, from the neighborhood of Frankfort a.
M. That species differs especially in presenting 18 Anal radii.
Some of the specimens above described were obtained and preserved for
scientific study, by David B. Collier, formally United States District At-
torney for the Territory of Wyoming.
From a Tertiary deposit on the upper waters of Green River, Wyoming
Territory, from a laminated calcareous rock similar in color and appear-
ance to the clay beds of Mount Lebanon and Mount Bolea. The first in-
dication of the existence of this deposit was brought by Dr. Jno. Evans,
who obtained from it a Clupeoid, which was described by Dr. Leidy, as
Clupea humilis (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1856, p. 256). One of the
blocks contains the remains of two small shoals of the fry, probably of
Clupea humilis, which were caught suddenly by a slide or fall of calea-
reous mud, and entombed for the observation of future students. They
must have been taken unwares, since they lie with their heads all in one
direction as they swam in close bodies. One or two may have had a mo-
ment’s warning of the catastrophe, as they have turned a little aside, but
they are the exceptions. The fry are from one-half to three-quarters of
an inch long and upwards.
True herring, or those with teeth, are chiefly marine, but they run into
fresh waters and deposit their spawn in the Spring of the year, and then
return to salt waters. The young run down to the sea in Autumn and
remain there till old enough to spawn. The size of the fry of the Rocky
Mountain herring indicates that they had not long left the spawning
ground, while the abundance of adults suggests they were not far from
salt water, their native element. To believe, then, that the locality from
which the specimens were taken was neither far from fresh, nor far from
salt waters, is reasonable; and this points to a tide, or brackish inlet or
river. Lastly, the species of Cyprinodon inhabit also, tide and brackish
waters. Most of the species of the family, as well as of the genus, are in-
habitants of fresh water; but they generally, especially the Cyprinodons
proper, prefer still and muddy localities, and often occur in water really
salt. This habitat distinguishes them especially from Cyprinidae (Min-
nows and Suckers) and Pike.
The material which composes the shales indicates quiet water, and not
such as is usually selected by herring for spawning in; while the abund-
ance of adult Clupeas indicate the proximity of salt water.
This is far from a satisfactory demonstration of the nature of the water
which deposited this mass of shales, but is the best that can be obtained
with such a meagre representation of species.
Cope.] 384 [May 6, 1870.
As to geological age, the indications are rather more satisfactory. The
genus Clupea ranges from the upper Eocene upwards, being abundant in
the slates of Lebanon and Monta Bolca, while Cyprinodon has been found
in neither, but first appears in the Middle or Lower Miocene in Europe.
The Asineops resemble very closely, and I believe essentially, the Pygeaus
of Agassiz, of Eocene age, from Monta Bolca. The peculiarities pre-
sented by the genus found by Dr. Hayden, are of such small significance
as to lead me to doubt the beds in question being of later than Eocene
age; though the evidence rests chiefly on this single, new and peculiar
genus.
The position of these fishes, 7000 feet above the level of the sea, fur-
nishes another illustration of the extent of elevations of regions once con-
nected with the ocean, and the comparatively late period of Geologic time
at which, in this case, this elevation took place.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTICE OF A NEW CHIMRID FROM NEW JERSEY.
LEPTOMYLUS COOKII, Cope.
Indicated by a right inferior maxillary bone, of one-fourth the size of
that indicating the Leptomylus densus. In general form the ramus re-
sembles that of Ischyodus divaricatus, the posterior portion being curved
outwards from the symphyseal. The latter region is much compressed
and moderately prolonged, the inner face quite concave ; posteriorly the
outer face is also slightly concave. There is a single external crest, which
is obtuse, and descends gradually to the plane of the beak, and presents
no dentinal area. A single small oval area represents the internal, so large
in Ischyodus. It lies along the inner margin. This margin is much
thickened, and rolled over inwards ; symphyseal face very narrow. The
extremity of the beak is broken away, and the section shows that there is
no inferior plate-like column, which produces the terminal area in most
species of Ischyodus, but a round column, which issues on the upper sur-
face of the beak, behind the apex.
Lines
Depth at posterior margin outer crest................- 25.4
ee ‘“* anterior base a OG zic. ate datccirstiatc) Ransuae eee 15.
ae ‘ end terminal column..............-. BE ARS ns 6.8
Width ofsinner area coo sath Seicatede clos Aenea 2.
TET RE ie apa thts PEALE ae SC er chet NM RRS Pigs Sicha tt a 10.6
“ eoomiddlecoss ealeanisrss cio s sient es silensces poe erensnetts ‘54
The apical dentinal column of this species distinguishes it from the L.
densus, Cope, where no such column exists. It may be noted that at the
posterior fractured section of the jaw, the apical column is seen, while in-
ternal dental area is not, the latter occupying only a pocket, not a column.
This species approximates Ischyodus solidulus in the apical column,
which has the same form in both. The two dentinal faces the latter pos-
sesses, are those of true Ischyodus.
From the upper marl bed of the Cretaceous of New Jersey, from near Mt.
Holly. Dedicated to Prof. Geo. H. Cook, under whose auspices the pale-
ontological interests of the State survey have been extended.
Winchell. ] 389 [May 6, 1870.
Stated Meeting, May 20, 1870.
Present, ten members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair.
A letter accepting membership was received from Maj. R.
HK. Williamson, dated San Francisco, May 10th, 1870.
A letter respecting the Byington MSS. was received from
Prof. Jos. Henry, Sec’y Smithsonian Institute, Washington,
D. C., May 16th.
Donations for the Library were received from the Academies
at Turin, Berlin and Boston; the Annales des Mines, and
Nature; the R. Astronomical Society: Essex Institute; Bos-
ton Pubhe Library; Silliman’s Journal; American Museum
of Natural History in New York, and Dr. Wm. Dunean, of
Savannah.
The death of Dr. Jas. Y. Simpson, of Edinburgh, was an-
nounced by the Secretary.
ON THE GEOLOGICAL AGE AND EQUIVALENTS OF THE
MARSHALL GROUP.
By Pror. A. WINCHELL,
DIRECTOR OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF MICHIGAN..
Part II.!12
IV. PReEsENT STATE OF OUR PALEONTOLOGICAL KNOWLEDGE.
I come now to the most important and most interesting branch of this
investigation. In order that others may be placed in full possession of all
112 For Part I of this paper, see Proceedings American Philosophical Society, vol xi-, p, 57 (March
5,1869). Both Parts of the paper were presented to the Chicago meeting of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, August 11, 1868. It was not offered for publication in
the Proceedings in consequence of its length. It was reported, however, in the Chicago news-
papers, and the chief points were briefly-stated in the American Naturalist for October, 1868, p- 445.
Part I. was published in these ‘‘ Proceedings” without alteration; and Part IT., as here presented,
is unchanged, except in the omission of some detailed lists of fossils, and in the addition of a few
remarks based on late discoveries in Tennessee and Pennsylvania, and which have been made
public in these Proceedings, vol. xi., p. 245, etc.
Winchell. ] 386 [May 6,
the data upon which my forthcoming conclusions are to rest, I introduce
here a complete list of the fossils of the Marshall Group, and its supposed
equivalents in other States. As introductory to this, however, and as
tending to exclude from consideration the series of shales which I have
designated the Huron group, I offer a few remarks upon the paleontology
of these strata as far as investigated.
The following is a complete catalogue of the fossils thus far deter-
mined :
Orthoceras Barquianum. Win. Rhynchonella Huronensis, Win.
Spirifera subattenuata, Hall. Orthis Vanuxemi, Hall.
ve medialis, Hall. ‘- erenistria ? Phil.
a Huronensis, Win. ‘© Towensis ? Hall.
es pharovicina, Win. Chonetes setigera ? Hall.
us insolita, Win. Cardinia complanata, Win.
Retzia polypleura, Win. Leptodomus clavatus, Win.
Merista Houghtoni, Win. Solen priscus, Win.
Pleurotomaria Huronensis, Win. Orthoceras gracilius, Win.
Goniatites Whitei, Win.
Four of the foregoing species I have identified, more or less doubtfully,
with species from the Hamilton group. These are Sptrifera subattenuata,
S. medials, Orthis Vanuxemi, and O. Iowensis. A species very similar
to O. Vanuxemi exists, however, in the Waverly series of Ohio, and in
strata of the same age in Illinois and Missouri. Chonetes setigera (?) of
the list, ranges in New York from the Marcellus shale to the Genesee.
Leptodomus clavatus closely resembles a Grammysia, a genus ranging
from the Corniferous to the Chemung. The equivalencies of these rocks
are not very precisely indicated from the paleontological data. That the
formation is newer than the Genesee shale is demonstrated by its observed
superposition. The paleontological evidence indicates, at least, that the
fauna is older than that of the Marshall group; and this is all that is
necessary. If this group of rocks is proven by stratigraphical superposi-
tion to be newer than the Genesee, it belongs either to the horizon of the
Portage and: Chemung, or to that of the Marshall. If its stratigraphical
position, its lithological characters and its fossil remains indicate equally
that it is not to be embraced in the same group with the Marshall, no
alternative remains. The Huron group, above the Black Shale, must cor-
respond to the Portage and Chemung, or to some portion of them.
The question is now narrowed down to this :—Having discovered a rep-
resentative of the Portage and Chemung groups in the Huron shales
and their equivalents, in Michigan and Ohio, ought we to unite with
these shales the Marshall sandstones and their equivalents, and thus em-
brace these also in the zone of the Portage and Chemung ?
I have furnished lithological and stratigraphical indications that this
ought not to be done. Let us examine the paleontological evidence.
1870. ] B87 {Winchell.
CATALOGUE OF THE KNOWN FOSSILS OF THE MARSHALL GROUP AND
ITS SUPPOSED EQUIVALENTS IN THE UNITED STATES.'"
Zvi]. al jee
1a /Slglea=\ol28
NAMES. References. SIS S/S/6 slisise
NAMES SCAT Pa
Spirophyton crassum, Hall xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 88 pate i
Dictyophyton Newberryi, Hall xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 87 re
as Redtieldi, Hall xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 88 is
Lepidodendron corrugatum, Daw. Qr. Jour. Geol. Soe. xviii. s
Pl. xii., fig. 10.
ae sp? a k
Sigillaria sp? Proc. A. P. Soc., xii., 260 «
Syringodendron gracile, Daw. Qr. Jour. Geol. Soc., xviii. 4
Pl. xii., fig. 12.
Lycopodites gracilis, Shum. sp. Mo. Rep. IT., 208, Pl. A,11 oi *
Rhachiopteris striata, Daw. Qr. Jour. Geol. Soc. xviii. ;
Cyclopteris ? Marshallensis, Win. MS. te al
Nullipora obtexta, White Bos. Proe., ix., 33 ie
Lophophyllum calceola, W. & W. Bos. Proc., viii., 305 a
Zaphrentis elliptica, White Bos. Proce., ix., 31 Bilas
v8 aeutus. W. & W. Bos. Proe., viil., 306 ol lig
era Ida, Win. Phil. Pr., July, 1865, p. 111 cle! |2| rene
Sphenopoterium enorme, M. & W. /|Phil. Pr., Oct., 1860, p. 448 =
Conopterium efftusum, Win. Phil. Pr., July 1865, p. 111 a
Syringopora Harveyi, White Bos. Proe., ix., 32 ee
Alveolites vermicularis, McCoy Brit. Cal. Fos., lst Fase. 69
Mo. Rep. viii., 218 te
Favosites divergens, W. &. W. Bos. Proe., viii., 306
“* (2?) maneus, Win. Phil. Pr., a uly, 1865, p.112 x -
Leptopora typa, Win. Phil. Pr., Jan., 1863, p. 3 3
Trematopora (2) vesiculosa, Win. Phil. Pr., Jan., 1863, p. 3 * a
: eS (?) fragilis, Win. Phil. Pr., Jan., 1863, p. 3
Synbathocrinus Oweni, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 111 *
Pentremites Roemeri, Shum. Mo. Rep., II., 186 A x
be sp? A
? Onychocrinus exculptus, Ly. & Cas. |Amer. Jour. [2] xxix., 78 *
Platycrinus graphicus, Hall Pamph. 11 Nov. 1863 ; xvii Ky.
Reg. Rep., 54 *
se contritus, Hall POLE cra oue Waiae OHH * my
be sp 2 . 4 (
Actinocrinus Indianensis, Ly.& Cas. |Am. Jour.Sci. [2] xxix.,75 ee |
et pistilliformis, M. & W. |Phil. Pr., Aug. 1865; Ill. ie
Rep., II1., 151 i
st Coreyi, Ly. & Cas. Am. Jour. Sei. [2] xxix.,76 3
Be Helice, Hall Pamph.11 Nov.1863 ; xvii.
Reg. Rep., 53 te
i viminalis, Hall Se aR Ne “64 ef |
i Daphne, Hall : ss “ i nO 2 w Ve
a sp? s ry apey
Bursaecrinus Meekianus, Shum. Mo. Rep., II., 188’ Bs |
Cyathocrinus decadactylus, Ly.& Cas |Am. Jour.Sci. [2] xxix.,73 ‘z |
ee hexadactylus, Ly. & Cas. a x Se mats
Poteriocrinus crineus, Hall Pamph.11 Nov.1863 ; xvii.
' Reg. Rep., 56 to
os Pleias, Hall af fe oO eT OY Ze
a Corycia, Hall ef ig ns OY us
Forbesiocrinus communis, Hall Ke a Sy OC * N.Y
ss lobatus, var. tardus, Hall fe “t ne Oo fa) a
a Kellogi, Hall 3 ue i SOO *
Scaphiocrinus (Poteriocrinus) Age, |
all k oe oe e ce 57 *
66 73 Lyriope, Hall be 66 be O58 *
ng subearinatus, Hall ie se oe ES ee
tt subtortuosus, Hall fe of st co) bd
Zeacrinus paternus, Hall se +t ie 6) tH
Ts Merope, Hall 13 6c 6c 3 *
Lepidechinus rarispinus, Hall xx. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 295 ibe Pa.
13 This Catalogue is little more than a list of references to the original descriptions. There is
undoubtedly a large amount of synonymy involved, but extended investigation will be required
to eliminate it satisfactorily. The Catalogue, in its present form, will be found useful, it is hoped,
to all occupied with researches in rocks of this age.
Winchell.]
NAMES.
388
References.
Fenestella rhombifera, Phil.
sp?
Lingula membranacea, Win.
6
ce
iad
Melie, Hall
Cuyahoga, Hall
?subspatulata, M. & W.
Discina capax, White
66
be
66
Producta arcuata, |
be
=D. Newberryi, Hall
Gallaheri, Win.
patellaris, Win.
Saffordi, Win.
Hall
concentvri Hea Hall
Cora, @’O
Coca romals Swal.
crenulata, Shum.
curtirostra, Win.
dolorosa, Win.
duplicostata, Win.
gracilis, Win.
leevicostata, White
minuta, Shum.
morbilliana, Win.
Murchisoniana, de Kon.
Newberryi, Hall
?= P. semireticulata, Flem.
parvula, Win.
pyxidata, Hall
semireticulata, (Flem.)
de Kon.
‘Shumardiana, Hall
subaculeata, Murch.
Strophalosia ? nummularis, Win.
Chonetes Fischeri, Nor. &
be
66
66
“ce
se
oe
66
oe
66
Prat.
Fenieulala, White
Ilinoisensis, Worthen
= C Logani, Hall, (not Nor.
& Prat.)
Logani, Nor. & Prat.
mesoloba, Nor. & Prat.
Michiganensis, Stevens
multicosta, Win.
ornata, Shum.
pulchell la, Win.
Shumardiana, de Kon.
Strophomena rhomboidalis, Wahl.
? Strophodonta arctostriata, Hall
Hemipronites pre Hall, sp
inflatus, W. & Ww
lens, White
oe
bs
Orthis flava, Win.
Michelini, L’ Evéillé, sp.
Missouriensis, Swal.
occasus, Hall
resupinata, Phil.
subelliptica, W. & W.
Swallovi, ? Hall
Thiemei, White
? “ Vanuxemi, Hall
Spirifera biplicata, Hall
camerata, Morton
Carteri, Hall
= 8. Vernonensis, Swal.
centronota, Win.
Cooperensis, Swal.
6b
66
4c
? umbraculum, (V. B.)
Mo. Rep., 218
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.3)
xvi. Rep. N. BY Reg., 24
Mil. Rep. IL, 437
Bos. lou ix., 30, (1862)
xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg,, 30,
(1863. )
Phil. _Pr. July, 1865, p. 112
Jan., 1863, p. 4
Tenn Rep. , 1869, p. 443; {
Proc. A. Soc. xii. ,248
\lowa Rep., 518
x. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 180
|Pal. Voy. en Amer.mer.55
St. Louis Trans., I., 640
Mo. Rep., 218
Phil. Proc. July,1865,p.114
be oe be 114
rele
112
be oe
66 oe
Bos. Jour., vii., 230
Mo. Rep., 218
Phil. Proc., July 1865,p.113
} Genus Prod. Pl. Xvi., 3
Mo. Rep., 218
x. Rep. N. XG Reg., 180
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 4
Iowa Rep. Part ITI. p. 498
Monogr. Gen. Prod., P33
Iowa Rep. Part II. p. 498
Bull Geol. Soe., xi., 255
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 4
Phil. Jour., III., 25
Bos. Proce., ‘ix., 29
St. Louis Trans., L., 571
Iowa Rep. Part II., p. 598
Phil. Jour., III., 30, Pl.
IL, fig. 12
Phil. Jour., IIL. 5 37
Am. Jour.Sci. [2] xxv. 262
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.5
Mo. Rep., II., 202
Phil. Proe. , Sept. 1862, 410
Monogr. Ire. part. p. 192
Act. Soe. Upsal., ITI, 65
N.Y. Rep. [Vth Dist. +, 266
Towa Geol. Rep., I., 490
Bos. Proe., viii., "993
Bos. Proe., ix., 28
Anim. Foss., 399
Phil. Proe.,J uly 1865, p.117
Mem. Geol. Soe., pene
St. Louis Trans., Be 530
xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg. a 111
Pal. Foss., Cornwall, 67
Bos. Proc., viii., 292
Iowa Rep. Part I., 597
Bos. Jour., vii., 231
x. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 135
Iowa Rep., 519
Am.Jour. Sei. [1]xxix.150
x. Rep. N. Y. Reg.170(1858)
Phil. Proc., July mee D. 118
St. Louis Trans. le
Ill. Rep., ae nts
* Ok
*OK OK KOK OK Ok
OKO ok
*
Ill.
Towa.
Mo.
Ind.
* OK ROK
Ok ok ok Ok
*
*
[May 6,
* %* |
Tenn
Tenn
Pa.
Tenn
Pa.
389
1870.] [Winchell.
(aliaee AA
NAMES. References. 5 ic is\5 =| 2 26s
eS] io
Spiritera Cooperensis, Swal. i
== S8. semiplicatus, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 111 x
Tee sos cuspidata, Sow. (not Hall) |Min. Conch., III., 42
se extenuata, Hall Towa Rep., 520 ‘ae se
‘ Grimesi, Hall ‘Iowa Rep., 604 *
ee hirta, W. & W. ‘Bos. Proc.., viii., 293 es x Tenn
re latior, Swal. St. Louis Trans., II., 86 i
te lineata, Phil. Geol. Yorks., I1., 219 =
e Marionensis, Shum. Mo. Rep., I1., 203 *
?= 8S. Vernonensis, Swal. ; F
sf Missouriensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I,, 643 |
hee mucronata, Con. Ann. Rep. N.Y. 1841, p.54 x
Hall: N.Y.Rep.1Vth Dist!
= Osagensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 641 a
? = S. Carteri, Hall Veale
oe peculiaris, Shum. Mo. Rep., I., 202 | Sil eihi
BS Sillana, Win. Phil. Proc. , July 1865,p.119 |
FY 215 striata, Sow. Min. Conch., II., 125 I. Fa
es subrotundata, Hall Towa Rep. Part IL., 521 i ts
te Taneyensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 645 =
as texta, Hall x. Rep. N.Y. Reg., 169 | |?
“ Waverlyensis, Win. Proce. A. P. Soe., xii., 251 eo n
“ (Cyrtia) Hannibalensis, Swal. |St. Louis Trans., I., 648 |
Cyrtia acutirostris, Shum. ae Rep., I1., 204 e *
5 sp? be
Syringothyris typa, Win. Phil. Proe., Jan.1863, p. 7 ey Qi) eo Pa.
ut Halli, Win. Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863, p.8| | * sales
CG capax, Hall, sp. Towa Rep. Part IT., 520 we
Spiriferina binacuta, Win. Phil. Proce., July 1865, p.120 a
oe Clarkesvillensis, Win. Phil. Proc.,J uly 1855, p.119} *
sf solidirostris, White Bos. Jour., vii., 232 ze te
Spirigera biloba, Win. Phil. Proc. July 1855,p.119 be
x corpulenta, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 6 it
Ue crassicardinalis, Swal. Bos. Jour., vii., 229 Ld
ce Hannibalensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 649 a BW ice
i Missouriensis, Win. Phil. Proc.,J uly 1865, p.117 2 i
of Ohiensis, Win. i oe Tks ae
G8 Prouti, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 649 eRe
Nucleospira Barrisi, White Bos. Jour., vii., 227 i
Retzia Osagensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 653 te
‘* (2) Popeana, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 654 jell
“* - sexplicata, W. & W. Bos. Proc.. viii., 294 %
** (Acambona?) altirostris, White |Bos. Proc., ix., 28
Atrypa sp? Mo. Rep., 218 ; iy
Amboceelia sp? e
oe (Spirifera?) minuta, White |Bos. Proc., ix., 26 oe =
Pentamerus Salinensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 652 *
é lenticularis, W. & W. Bos. Proe., viii., 295 ty
Rhynchonella Barquensis, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep.1862, p.408
f cameritera, Win. en s He AOS
a caput-testudinis, White |Bos. Proc., ix., 23 i
6 Cooperensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep., II., 204 alle
ss gregaria. Shum. 53
a heteropsis, Win. Phil. Proc.,.July 1865,p.121 * *
“ Hubbardi, Win. es Sep. 1862, p. 407) * | *| *
Marshallensis, Win, a 408) | *|*
ef Missouriensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep,, II.. 204; Tl.
Rep., 11.153 ; Ib., IIT. 450 # |e) % | % |e
fe obscuroplicata, Shum. |Mo. Rep., 218 *
ih occidentalis, Shum. we 218 *
a opposita, W. & W. Bos. Proc., viii., 294 oe
tf persinuata, Win. Phil. Proc., July 1865,p.121 es
“f pustulosa, White Bos. Jour., vii., 226 * us
ie Sageriana, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1862,p.407) | *| * Tenn
£¢ subcireularis, Win. *S oe ** 408 *
os ? tetraptyx, Win. re July 1865, 120 *,
oS unica, Win. e ef lo, a
ee Whitei, Win. se Sep. 1862, 407) | *
“* (Retzia?) micropleura, Win. te July 1865, 122 *
“ (Eatonia) obsolescens, Hall |xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 111 *
Centronella Alleji, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865,p.123 s Sh oo
ee Flora, Win. Pr. Am. Phil. Soe., xii.,254! oy
A. P. §,—VOL. XI.—21E
Winchell.]
390
NAMES.
References.
Centronella Julia, Win.
Terebratula Burlingtonensis, White
ie fusiformis, Murch. & VY.
Ostrea patercula, Win.
Pterinea cardinata, Win.
tf erenistriata, Win.
=Cardiopsis crenistriata, Win
spinalata, Win.
strigosa, W. & W.
% undulata, M. & W.
Whitei. Win.
AV iculopecten Caroli, Win.
circulus, Shum., sp.
duplicatus, Hall
gradocostatus, White
Newarkensis, Win.
W.
bb
oe
oe
9 bs
nodocostatus, W.&
occidentalis, Win.
tenuicostatus, Win.
Pernopecten limeeformis, Win.
= Aviculopecten limeformis,
W. & W. |
limatus, Win.
Shumardanus, Win.
st ? (Amusium) Cooper ensis,
um.
Microdon reservatus. Hall
Posidonomya ambigua, Win.
mesambonata, Win.
te Romingeri, Win.
+ Whiteana, Win.
Dexiobia Whitei, Win.
=Cardiomor rpha ovata, Hall
+C. parvirostris, White
Halli, Win.
Pinna (?) Marshallensis,. Win.
Mytilus elongatus, Shum
“ fibristriatus, W. & W.
= Mytilarca fibristriata, Hall
occidentalis, W. & W.
= Mytilarca occidentalis, Hall
Whitfieldanus, Win.
= Mytilarca fibr istriata, Hall
Myalina imbricaria, Win.
at Iowensis, Win.
Michiganensis, Win.
pterinizformis, Win.
rara,!!4* Win.
=M. aviculoides, Win.
Orthonota phaselia, Win.
at rectidorsalis, Win.
‘: ventricosa, W. & W.
Sanguinolites amygdalinus, Win.
oe
oe
be
= Modiomorpha (?)amygdalina,
Hall
/Kolus, Hall
borealis, Win.
concentrica, Win.
=Cardinia concentrica, Win.
ne eylindricus, Win.
we ? flavius, Hall
ee Towensis, Win.
oo ? jejunus, Win.
ce Marshallensis Win.
ie naiadiformis, Win.
strigatus, Win.
sulciferus, Win.
unioniformis, Win.
tt valyulus, Hall
«| Mich. N.
|Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1862,p.405
Bos. Jour., vii., 228
\Geol. Russ., p. 65
Phil. Proc. , July 1865, p.124|
Jini Proce. Sep. 1862,p.412
Jt uly 1865, p. 124)
Sep. 1862, p. 417
J uly 1865, p. 124)
Bos. Proce.,
Ill. Rep.. iL, 456
Phil. _Proce., Jan. 1863
Mo. Rep., 1., 206
INEDYS Rep., 264
‘Bos. Proe., ix., 31
Proc. A. P. Soc. Jan. 1870,)
xii., 255)
Bos. Proc., viii., 296 |
Phil. Proe., J an. 1863, De 5
2
July 1865, p.126}
‘Bos. Proce., Vili, 295
Phil. Pr oc. July 1865 Oe |
Til. Rep., III, 453)
Mo. Rep., IT., 206
Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.33
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.10
ee Sep. 1862 , D- an
74 eH
Jan. 1863, p. 11
Towa Rep., part 2, p. 522
Bos. Proce., ix., p. 31
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.11
“ Juiy 1865, p. 126
Mo. Rep., 218
Bos. Proce., viii., 296
Prelim. Notice ;part2, p.24
Bos. Proc., viil., 297
Prelim.N otice, part 2,p.24
Phil. Proc. ,Sep. 1862, p.413
Prelim. Notice,part 2,p. 24
Phil. Proe., Sep. 1862,p.412
“6 July 1865, p. 127
Sep. 1862, p. 411
oe
ce
p. 9
“e
eo oe
66
oe
Proc. A.P. Soc. (hoe loco)
Phil. Proc.Sep. 1862, p. 412
il Jan. 1863, p. 12
Sep. 1862, p. 412
Bos. Proce., viil., 297
Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 13
“ce
E retin Notice Dae Lae
Phil. Proe.,Sep. 1862, p.415
oH July 1865, p. 128
oe Sep. 1862, p. 413
Jan. 1863, p. 13
Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.47
Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863, p. i
ce Sep. 1862, p. AB
Proc. A. P. Soe. , Xii., 255
Phil. Proc., July 1865 5, )-127
ts Jan. 1863, p. 14
SG Sep. 1862, p. 414
Pralmeioanen 2,p.46
oe
412)
*
*
| Mich, S.
Ed
*
Ti.
Towa.
* ak ok 9k ok
ARK ais tk
[May 6,
A yi
$28
sien
NO
ra
%
*IN. Y
%
*
*
14 The original name (J, aviculoides) is preoccupied by Meek & Hayden, for a Permian species.
391
1870.] (Winchell,
A tee eile lige] S _ 5 ge
AMES fer , S\Srel\S Slela'sa
NAMES. References Ze65 aie a5s
Sanguinolites (Cypricar dia ?) Chou- 5
teauensis,Swal.sp. |St. Louis Trans., I., 96 li
eS ‘“ ryigida,W.&W.sp. |Bos. Proc., viii., 300 * w
jes Se rhombea, Hall |N. Y. Rep., p. 291 N. Y.
Oe * securis, Win. ‘Proc. A. P. Soe., xii., 255 *
re (Cypricardia) ventricosa,
Hall. sp. |xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 110 Ed lle Ale
Allorisma Hannibalensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep. I1., 206 a? PIN ONG
= Gramnysia Hannibalensis, Hall Preiim. Notice, pt. 2, p. 62 Alli b
Edmondia equimarginalis, Win. Phil. Proc. Sep. 1862, p.413 cll ASG WG
wy binumbonata, Win. th fie 414) 1*| | les
wv Burlingtonensis, W.& W. |Bos. Proc., viil., 301 % | :
ss contracta, Win. | Phil. Proc.,July 1865,p.110 Weal TEN WM
= Cypricar dia contr acta, Hall N.Y. Rep. 1Vth Dist. p.292
=Hdinondia? bicar inatd, Win Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, 2D 18
=Sanguinolites rigida, Hall |Prelim. Notice, part 2 2, p.
44, (1870) ,
ae elliptica, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.13 Zn
ie Marionensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 654 Lene
be nitida, Win. ‘Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.12 es
“ nuptialis, Win. i ie 12 Vie
te strigillata, Win. uae? = 12 a
Modiomorpha hyalea, Hall Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.79 %
Car diomor pha Julia, Win. Phil. Proe.,Sep. 1862,p.416 i
modiolaris, Win. fe s 416} |\*
fe sulcata, de Kon. Anim. Foss., 109 ig
ee triangularis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 655 Wee
uC trigonalis, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863. p.15 i
B= O! rhomboidea, Hall \lowa Rep., part 2, p. 523
Pholadella Newberryi, Hall Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.65 ts
Area arguta, de Kon. Anim. Foss., p. 116 %
‘© Missouriensis, Shum. Mo. Rep., 218 aie?
‘* “modesta, Win. |Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863, p.15 a Pike
ee sp? \Mo. Rep., 218 ee
Macrodon cochlearis, Win. Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863, p.16 <
ovatus, Hall ‘Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.15 “2
‘© parvus, W. & W. Bos. Proe., viii., 299 wy és
Ctenodonta bellaluta, Win. Phil. Proc. ai uly 1865,p.128 Biislo MY
=Nucula bellatula Hall N.Y. Rep. 1Vth Dist. sp. 196
id hians, Win. Phil. Proc. July 1865. »p-128 ¥
=Nucula hians, Hall xili. Rep. N.Y. Reg.,p. 110 i
He Houghtoni, Win. Phil. Proc.,J uly 1865,p.128 a
= Nucula Houghtoni, Stev. |Am.Jour.Sci. [2] xxv.,262
ie Hubbardi, Win. |Phil. Proe.Sep. 1862,p.417 ;
July 1865, p. 128] | *|*
?=Nuculites sulcatina, Con. |Phil. Jour., viii., p. 250
es Iowensis, Win. Phil. Proc. J uly 1865p. 128) |% 3
=Nucula Towensis, W.& W.| ( Bos. Proc., viii., 298;
2 Wry. Phil. Proc., Sept.
: 1862, p. 418
ee microdonta, Win. ‘Phil. Proc. oat 1863p. 16 zs
ee sectoralis, Win. Sep. 1862, p. 418] * | * | *
2= Nuculitesmactroides,Con Phil. Jour., vii., p. 249
se Stella, Win. 'Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.419) * | * | *
Nuculana (Leda) bellistriata, Ste- |Am.Jour.Sci. [2] xxv.,261
vens, sp.| WIN. Phil. Proc., Sep.
1862, p. 419) |* Tenn
te * Barrisi. W. & W., sp. Bos. Proc., viii., 298 % oe
=Paleaneilo Barrisi, Hall | Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.11
** (Leda) dens-mammillata, !
Stevens, sp. |Am.Jour.Sci. [2] xxv.,261 ws
ab ** “nuculeformis, Ste-
vens, sp. se ee | PSI *
se ‘* pandorzformis, Ste-
vens, sp. ss ee OSI 2
ts *« saccata, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.16 ws
Paleaneilo attenuata, Hall Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.12 *
Conocardium bovipedale, Win. Phil. Proc., Sep. 1862,p.419) | *
et Napoleonense, Win. ce a 419 @
te yulchellum, W. & W. |Bos. Proc., viii., 299 te es
ie omingeri, Win. Ms. os
Isocardia ? Jenne, Win. |Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863,p.17 ee
392
Winchell.] [May 6
Zlw| . ti Hn
: Allele lslolee
NAMES. References. So S/S\E\R/5ES ES
| SIS |A IT 16 = Oz,
z= Bel
|
Cardiopsis jejuna, Win. Phil. Proce. Sep. 1862,p. ae * ei
ee megambonata, Win, Se 417
ze radiata, M.& W. oe Oct. 1860: Tl. Plies
Rep., II., 157
= Megambonia Lyoni, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. eg. D. 110 5
Cypricar della quadrata, W. & W. Bos. Proc., viii., 300
Barquensis, Win. MSS 2
Cardinia occidentalis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 655 2
Sanguinolaria leptogaster, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.18 | ,
rostrata, Win. u July 18€5, p.129 s
He sectoralis, Win. st Sep. 1862p. 422) | 2
a septentiionalis, Win. ie ee 421) |~
a similis, Win. Hs COM NI
Anatina Leda, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg. p.110 : 5
Solen Missouriensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., 1., 655 salle :
* quadrangulars, Win. Eee: 1862,p.422| | = Tenn
i ee ee Win. a ‘ 422) | * =) neni
Conularia Byblis, White Bos. Proce., 22 =
ee multicostata, M. & W. Phil. Proc. ee 1865,p.252 Bi
~ Newberryi, Win. Jan. 1865, p. 130 Bi
se Whitei, M. & W. a Dee. 1865, p.263 eA
oe spe Mo. Rep., 218
Bellerophon arquensis, Win. Phil. ieee Sep. 1862, 427 Bs |)
bilabiatus, W. & W. Bos. Proc. “3 Vill, , 304
a cyrtolites, Hall xiii. Rep.N.Y. Reg., 107:
Win. Phil. Proce. Sep. 1862) ||. |e |x =
p. 426; I. Rep. I., 160 o
ts galericulatus, Win. Phil. Proce. soe. 1862 D. 426) |. a
oe lineolatus, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., NO Is
a Michiganensis, Win. Phil. Proc. Sep. 1862,p. Aiea les
a nautiloides. Win. 427 j
cS panneus, Whito Bos. Proc., ix., 21 x
06 perelegans, W. & W. ag vili., 304 i *
‘ rugosisculis, Win. Phil. Proe.,fep. 1862 »p-425 5
ff scriptiferus, White Bos. Proce. J a0
6 vinewlatus, W. & W. a 304 a bi
ss Whittleseyi, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865, p.130 j
Porcellia crassinoda, W. & W. Bos. Proce., vili., 303 %
re nodosa, Hall Iowa Rep. Sup. to Vol. I,p. i
4:1). Rep. III., 458 ay
66 obliquinoda, White ‘Bos. Proc., vat *
at rectinoda, Win. Phil. Proce. aa Ree p.18 ey
Pugiuneulus? (Theca) acwleatus,Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. RB , 107 * te
Dentalium grandzvum, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863. ,p.18 %
?) Barquense, Win. on Sep. 1862, p. 425
Metoptoma undata, Win. Ora 5 uly 1865, p. 131 %
Platycer as eequilater ale, Hall Iowa Rep., Supp. to
bivolve, W. & W. Bos. Proe., viii., 302 * a
ne corniforme, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863, p.18 "
ee haliotoides, M. & W. ee 1866, p. 264; Dl.
Rep., TIl., 458 3
ne Herzeri, Win. Proc. A.P.S0c.,Jan., isto, ip
p. 256 ;
or paralium, W. & W. \Bos. Proe., vili., 302 us Aes
ee vomerium, Win. ‘Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.19 * %
ad (Orthonychia) subplicatum, 1866, p. 265; U1.
M. & W. Rep., TIL, 457 x,
Pleurotomaria exieta, Win. sf Sep. 1862, Dp. 424) | *
Hickmanensis, Win. |Proc.A. P. Soc.,xii.p. 257 Tenn
i humilis, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1£62,p.424| | *
ca Mississippiensis, W.&W. | Bos. Proc., viii. 302) *
Ob (2). mitigata, Hall xiii. Rep N. Y. Ree., 108 ‘a
“ quince uesulcata, Win. Phil. Proc. .July 1865 ent 131 si
cg rota, Win. us Jan. 1863, p. 19) |. *
Of Stella, Win. sf Sep. 1862, p. 424) |* ;
o tectoria, Win. 06 Jan. 1863, p. 19 x
ve vadosa, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg., 108
Win. Phil. Proc., Sep. L
1862, p. 423) | *|*|*
ed Whitei, Win. Phil. Proce. Sep. 1862,p.428 *
Murchisonia (Pleurotomari ia ?) limi-
taris, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg. p.108) =
393
1870.] (Winchell.
4] 5] | fa| (88
NAMES References. SSB ERE Es
‘ gs = O|F SIF OB
| *
Murchisonia neglecta, Win. | Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p. 20 A ms
prolixa, W. & W. \Bos. Proe., vili., p. 303 4
a quadricineta, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. "1863, p. a % A
ut (2) Shumardiana, Win. Pa
ig sp? Proc. A. P. Soe., xii, 280 al ling ye
Straparollus Ammon, W. & W. ‘Bos. Proce., viil., 301 oe
sis depressus, Hall,sp. |N. Y. Rep. [Vth Dist., | p.
(not H#. depressus, Sby. )) 291 ma
es Barrisi, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.20 a
ue cyclostomus, Hall, sp. Iowa Rep., Part 2, p. 516
ty lens, Hall, sp. xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg. 109;| alle “
Ti). Rep., II., 159 alee
os macromphalus, Win. | Phil. Proce Jal. 1863, p.20) ie A
ie obtusus, Hall, sp. \lowa ane > Pp. 623 TH ss
nf spirorbis, Hall, sp. xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg. p. 107 x
we sp? Mo. Rep., 218 4
Phanerotinus paradoxus, Win. (Phil. Proe., J an. 1863,p- 21) ee
Holopea conica, Win. 21) é
He subconica, Win. 9 te 21 a
Machrochilus pinguis, Win. oe a 21| ia
Loxonema oligospiva, Win. sf i 22 i
oC turritiformis, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 109, %
Chemnitzia tenuiineata, Shum. Mo. Rep., I., p. 20 A
Holopella mira, Win. Phil. Pioe. Jan. 1868, pe i
Naticopsis depressus, Win. | 2 5
» Orthoceras arcuatellum, Sand b. Verstein. 165, Taf. xix.
Amer. Jour. Sci., on
SSOmG, Bia) |)
‘* — Chemungense, Swal. ‘St. Louis Trans., I., 660 %
ee clinocameratum, Win. |Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxili. |
356) * L
a heterocinetum, Win. Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.28 fe
“© Indianense, Hall ixiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 107 |
WIN. Alm. Jour. £Ci. [21],
ORT SAY | a ee
+ Lathropianum, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiii.
357 us
ss Marshallense, Win. of be OO BS *
oe multicinetum, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1862.p.421 a
a occidentale, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] cece
oe reticulatum, Phil. Geol. Yorks., IT., 238
WIN. Am. Jour. Sci.[2],
XXxiii, 257 a
ss robustum, Win. . Am. Jour. Sci. [2], Xxxiil.
300) | |
U0 vittatum (?) Sand b. Verstein. 165, Taf. xx., 9;
Win. Am. Jour.Sci. 27
: XXxili, 355) | *
st Wohitei, Win. Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.22 *
ce sp. ‘Mo. Rep., 218 *
Gomphoceras sp? *
oo mB Mo. Rep., 218 *
ce oe oe 218 *
Nautilus (Trematodiscus), altidor-
salis, Win. Phil. _Proe., 1862, p. 429 ce
e “ digonus, M. &W. Oct. 1860, p.470 ;
; i Ill. Rep., IL, 163 a3 | x
ee ‘¢ discoidalis, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2], xxiii.
360, * 2
sf ‘¢ ingentior, Win. ge Ob Oc 6 *
re ‘* Meekianus, :
Win. ce oe COO G1) *
ne ve planidorsalis,
Win. 66 oe 66 BFS *%
cS “ striatulus, Win. | eC 06 66 Qag) | x
ee ‘¢ strigatus, Win. | Phil. Proc., 1862;p. 426 cy
Ot ‘* subsulcatus, — (Geol. Yorks. ; Il. » 233
Phil.| Win: Am. Jour. Sci.
; ; Xxxiii., 361 *
oe “* trigonus, Win. |Am. Jour. Sci. [2], xxxiii.)
| 308] |/*
394
Winchell. [May 6
Aral || jal (a8
TAME re 3 Sls 26 Slelosa
NAMES. References Iets ER ae 5s
Fla
Nautilus (Trematodiscus) trisulcatus, | Phil. Proc. Oct. 1860,p.470;
M. & W.| Ib. Jan. 1861; ae 3 aie
eo, LOZ ‘
ue (Gyroceras?) gracile, Hall,sp xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 105 * x
ee sp? Mo. Rep., 218 Fi
Phragmoceras expansum, Win. Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.28
Cyrtoceras Rockfordense, Win. se July 1865,p.1382 24
= WN. (Cryptoceras) "Rock ford-
ense, M. & W. tt mats 275
= Gyroceras Rockfordense,
M. & W./Ill. Rep., II1., 459
2 oe tesselatum, de Kon. ‘Anim. Foss., 529
Fs unicorne, Win. |Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863,p.23 3 E
sp?
Gyroceras Burlingtonense, Owen Rep. Wis., &e., p. 581 e
Goniatites Allei, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] Xxxili.,
363; Sketches of Crea-
tion, p. 116, fig. 50
ue Andrewsi, Win. |Proe. Am. Phil. Soe. xii.259 *
ts Holmesi, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 659 %
te Houghtoni, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] es
36%
He Ixion, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 100 a
2? =G. rotatorius, de Kon.
re Lyoni, M. & W. Phil. Proc. Oct. 1860, p.471 rat |
=(G. Hyas, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg.,102
we Marshallensis, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiil.
862] * *
oe Morganensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 659 *
He Ohiensis, Win. Proc. A.P. Soce., xii.,259 a
ue opimus, W. & W. Bos. Proce. vili., 305 alia
Me Osagensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 659 *
i Oweni, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 100 %
Sf propinquus, Win. Am.Jour.Sei., [2] Sout
B68
or PueInecus, Win. tt WG Se toGO
ce Romingeri, Win. Phil. Proc. ,Sep. 1862,p. 427
ee Shumardianus, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiii.,
363) * *
Proetus (Phillipsia?) auriculatus,
Hall |xv. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 107 *
ee tt ellipticus, Phil. Pe oc. Dec. 1865 5p. 2673
M. & W. Ill. Rep., I11., 460 “3
#8 rs Missouriensis,
Shum. |Mo. Rep., IT., 196 ae a
ue Hr Swallovi,Shum. 0 ee OG) *
Phillipsia Doris, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865,p. 133 BP || 23
=Proetus "Dor is, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg., 112
Us insignis, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863,p.24 ee
iar Ne Maramecensis, Shum. Mo. Rep., I1., 199 * we
Win. Phil. Proc., Jan.
1863, p. 24
£6 Rockfordensis, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865,p.133 w
st Tennesseensis, Win. Tenn. Rep. 1869, p. 445;
Proc. A. P. Soce., xii., 259 Tenn
tt sp? Mo. Rep., 218 *
Cythere crassimarginata, Win. Phil. Proe, ha 1862,p.429 *
Helodus biformis, Newb. & Wor. Ill. Rep., Vt os
“placenta, Newb. & Wor. 0
Gyracanthus Alleni, ewe: *
Orodus multicarinatus, N. & W. 3 62 % ;
Pleurodictyum problematicum, WIN.: Proc. A. P. Soc. ;
Goldf. xii., 260 oy
Nore.—In the foregoing table, * Bos. Jour.” =
‘Iowa Rep.,” *' Mo. Rep.,” “N.Y.
Proceedings of same; “ Ill. Rep.,’
Journal Boston Soc.
Nat. FHist.;
Rep.,” “ Tenn. Rep.,-
** Bos. Proc.” =
= Ge-
ological Reports of OS Iowa, Missouri, New York IVth ‘District, acs Tennessee, respectively §
*Pamph.”
= Journal Neadeniy
“* Mich. N.” and ‘‘ Mich.
ot Natural Sciences, Philadelphia; Seoul,
to Annual Report Regents of University,
Trans.” =Transactions Acad. Sciences, St.
Proc.
State N.
Louis.
—Northern and Southern outcrops ot Mar shall group;
Pamphlet issued Noy. deat Eaten Xvii. Reg. Rep., p.50; * Phil. Jour,
— Proceedings of same;
liminary Notice, &e., Preparatory for the Paleontology of NEY
Reg.”
* Prelin.. Notice” = Pre-
“Kep. N.
>on condition of State ‘Cabinets
Appendix
St. Louis
QX¢
1870. ] 395 [Winchell.
From the foregoing catalogue, it appears that the total number of de-
termined species, from rocks of the period under consideration, is, at
present, 416. These are distributed in groups as follows :
Plants, = = - 9 Poreellia, = - - 4
Corals (Polypi), = 13. Gasteropoda, - = 48
Crinoidea, &e., = - - 27 Cephalopoda, = - 46
Fenestella, - - 1 Trilobites, - -
Brachiopoda, - - 124 Ostracoids, = Siac
Lamellibranchiata, - 116 Fishes, = = - 4
Bellerophon, = - 13 Pleurodictyum, = eid
Total, = - = © = 416
The number of species known, but not identified, is 20.
The identified species have been collected in eleven detached districts
or States, which have yielded, severally, the following numbers :
Il IN@wiew MMOURHN, poconooDouooCoGDaGoOCKO 23
Bo SOMMER MMNGlUIGEI. Gos goavessocnoboooomoKe 93
eee OMI Oster eee sualay as seca oes er Scheu evn Los TT ee eloene DNS 139
dake BAYOU TYE heuer rat ens coves ee elie RENE Be co aI oO A US ER 45
TMD THINS ras sion 5 AOI el le BARE ois Gy Ceo a ne owen 27
GOW iar er nea eee Peer 160
EON TTSSO Uasissttore ieee peg Econ ts Ml tanei vise (oc) n elary MAUIMIE Sh De a
ob GOMANCATs cosoncscooosooodoud ssirahalanndcey essere 2
OM MENITESSCO hate Moe scr ores cca Soe eostey eledete a tiae wae aes 13
OPIN G Wi oO teat ae kicgs svar elecets disc a Eta ahaa 9
Lal ERG ri Sayles acy ss) epet <p hie seen ouorceialalsans etree acai sg 9
NotalndentiticatiOnsess seer ecoee ceo ee 597
From this it appears there have been 181 identifications of species in
two or more of the above regions. A further analysis of the geographi-
cal distribution of these species will set in a strong light the paleonto-
logical affinities of the several regions.
It might be admitted at once that the outcrop at Pt. aux Barques
(‘‘Northern Michigan’’) is of the same geological age as the typical for-
mation in Southern Michigan ; but as Messrs. Houghton and Hubbard !!%
have separated the two series of outcrops as different formations, I de-
sire to introduce the paleontological discussion, by setting at rest all con-
troversy respecting the synchronism of the strata in the two Michigan
districts. The following species occur in both regions :
Producta concentrica, Ctenodonta sectoralis,
Rhynchonella Hubbardi, oS Stella,
Mytilus Whitfieldanus, Goniatites Marshallensis.
Sanguinolites borealis,
With 30 per cent. of the known species of the Pt. aux Barques sand-
stones identifiable with fossils from the Marshall sandstones, and with a
no See Part I. of this paper, p, 59.
Winchell.] 396 [May 6,
stratigraphical and lithological conformity in the two series of sandstones
(besides Goniatites Owent, common to Northern Michigan and Indiana,
Chonetes Illinotsensis, common to Northern Michigan, Ohio, Indiana and
Towa; Cardiopsis megambonata, common to Northern Michigan and Iowa,
and Goniatites Shumardanus, common to Northern Michigan and Ohio),
I think their geological equivalency can never hereafter be called in
question.
In conducting the paleontological branch of the discussion of equivalen-
cies among the western districts, it would be appropriate to cite here the lists
of species identified in two or more of these districts. As this, however,
would considerably extend the limits of this paper, and these lists are readily
deducible from the ‘‘ Catalogue ’’ given, I present only the summaries.
In doing this, I shall count the two Michigan districts as one, and shall
also omit Kentucky, since I feel some uncertainty about the geological
position of the two species recorded from that State.
Species common to Michigan and Ohio, 20
Hs a os Indiana, 9
“6 ve “ Illinois, 1
OY ue fe Towa, 13
a4 at 4 Missouri, 3
OG oe 86 Tennessee, 4
we sh Ohio and Indiana, 12
ae uf ve Illinois, 10
uf es a Iowa, 51
cs a si Missouri, 16
a me us Tennessee, 4
aig a Indiana and Illinois, 5
3 ce 6“ Towa, "
GG a os Missouri, 5
es oy a Tennessee, 2
ug ee Illinois and Iowa, 10
Sb Hi ue Missouri, 14
es ‘te Iowa and Missouri, 13
ts ee He Tennessee, 5
ae ae three States, 32
e s four a 10
66 66 five 66 2
Should we unite Producta Shumardana and P. pyxidata with P. con-
centrica, the latter species would be known in seven different Western
States, besides the Pt. aux Barques region.
With such an extended network of identifications, and with long lists
of representative species which I forbear to cite, I believe it will be ad-
mitted that the several formations brought under comparison must have
been accumulated in one geological period. Let it now be distinctly stated
what are the formations which are thus synchronized. They are as fol-
lows :
ew
~
1870. 3) { [Winehell,
1. The Marshall Group of Michigan.
2. The Gritstone and Waverly series of Ohio, down to the Chocolate
Shales.
3. The Goniatite Limestone of southern Indiana, and its equivalent
sandstone in northern Indiana.
4. The Kinderhook Group of Illinois.
5. The Yellow Sandstone series of Iowa, at least down to the bluish
sandy shales.
6. The series known in Missouri asthe Chouteau Limestone, the Ver-
' micular Sandstone and Shale, and the Lithographic Limestone.
7. The Silico-bituminous Shales at the base of the Silicious Group of
Tennessee.
For the sake of brevity and convenience I shall hereafter employ the term
Marshall Group as the general designation for this formation in the West-
ern States.
Let us next consider what are the paleontological relations subsisting
between the Marshall Group and the Chemung and Portage and older for-
mations of New York.
Professor Hall !!Shas described from Summit County, Ohio, a crinoid
under the name of Forbestocrinus communis, which, he states, cannot be
distinguished from a single specimen from the Chemung of Chatauque
County, N. Y. At the same time he states that this species combines
some of the characters of two types occurring in the Carboniferous Lime-
stone. Another species, Horbesiocrinus lobatus, presents characters which
he regards as constituting a variety (Var. tardus) of a species from the
Hamilton Group!!7. <A third species from the same locality, he regards
as closely related to Poteriocrinus diffusus, of the Hamilton Group, though
distinctly differing. At the same time Professor Hall notes no less than
seven species from this locality which exhibit distinct affinities with spe-
cies from the Burlington Limestone. We have in this assemblage of cri-
noids, therefore, two species identified with species from rocks which I
regard as older than the Marshall, while nine species, including the two
identified, sustain intimate relations with the fauna of the Carboniferous
system, which Professor Hall assumes to be entirely above the zone of the
Chemung.
The only other species from the Marshall Group which stand referred to
strata as old as the Chemung are the following :
1. Strophomena arctostriata Hall, from Hobbieville, N. Y.,—doubtfully
recognized at Cuyahoga Falls, Ohio.
2. Orthis Vanueemt, Hall, which if not identical with O. Michelin
I Evéillé, a carboniferous species, is so closely related as to show that
the type of O. Michelini began to exist during the Hamilton period.
A species perhaps identical, has been described from Iowaas 0. Swallow,
Hall; and O. flava, Win. from the same locality, belongs to the same
group of forms.
116 xvii, Rep. N. Y. Regents, p. 50.
we The analogue of this is F. Giddingi, of the Carboniferous Limestone. Hall, xv. Rep. N. Y. Reg.
A. PP. S—VOL. XI.—22E
QO
Winchell. ] B98 [May 6,
3. Orthis resupinata de Kon. ranges from the Devonian into the Carbon-
iferous system both in Europe and America.
A. Orthis Thiemei, White, from Iowa, is reported by Professor Hall as
identified in the Chemung of New York.
5. Chonetes Logani Nor, and Prat, is also reported by Professor Hall
occurring in the Tully Limestone. I have heretofore expressed my dis-
sent from this identification.!48 I pronounced the New York species dis-
tinet before being informed of its geological position or locality. It pre-
sents a series of concentric rugosities or wrinkles which extend both across
the ribs and the intervals between the ribs, while in C. Zogani the rugosi-
ties are feebler, and are confined to the crests of the ribs.
6. Strophomena rhomboidalis, Wahl, has a range even greater than that
of O. resupinata.
7. Spirifera mucronata Con., found in the Chemung of Steuben County,
N. Y., was doubtfully identified in Missouri. Not having seen the Mis-
souri specimens, I would be strongly inclined to suspect that they belong
rather to S. eatenuata, or some related species.
8. Ctenodonta bellatula, Hall, sp. of the Hamilton group of New York,
has also been doubtfully identified in Missouri.
A few additional species had been provisionally repo:ted identical with
Chemung forms, but as already stated, a direct compa ‘ison of the species
suspected to be identical has induced me to abandon the identification in
every instance. We have then no unquestioned identifications with species
from rocks as old as the Chemung, except in the case of Orthis resupinata
and Strophomena rhomboidalis, and perhaps Orihis Thiemei. It is fair to
presume that the forms of Strophomena rhomboidalis, occurring as high as
the Marshall group, will yet be distinguished from the Silurian forms by
appreciable characters, as has been done recently in respect to the forms
of Atrypa reticularis..9 The different expression of the Marshall forms
has already been remarked. This species, so abundant in the Marshall
period, existed in the Lower Silurian, and appearsto have attained its cul-
mination in the Upper Silurian. There is an improbability that the same
species, after having once undergone a decline, should attain a second cul-
mination in seas swarming with species and types of a much later period.
I think it will be admitted that the paleenotological correspondence be-
tween the Marshall and the Chemung strata is extremely meagre. We
know four hundred and fifteen species from the strata of the Marshall
period, of which 138 come from Ohio, a State almost in continuity with
the State of New York. We know probably 100 or 150 species from the
Chemung of New York; and yet we are able to identify scarcely a single
characteristic species with the types of the Marshall group. This state of
the facts looks very unfavorable to the attempt to parallelize the Marshall
and Chemung.
I proceed now to point out the specific facts bearing upon the relation
subsisting between the Marshall fauna and that of formations in Western
18 Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci. Phil. July, 1865, p 116.
9 Whitfield: observations on the internal appendages of the genus Atrypa, 1866-
QYOQC
1870. } 399 (Winchell.
New York, which are newer than the characteristic Chemung. I have
already stated that Professor Hall indicates the existence in Western New
York, of three conglomerates which he regards as coming in consecutively
above the typical Chemung. I have also stated that, the consecutive ar-
rangement is not established by any observed superposition. On anexami-
nation of the fossils of the so-called carboniferous conglomerate preserved
in Professor Hall’s magnificent cabinet, I at once identified the following
Marshall species :
Straparollus Ammon, White.!2°
Cypricardia contracta, Hall=(Edmondia bicarinata Win. )
Edmondia equimarginalis, Win.
Allorisma Hannibalensis, Shum.
Straparollus Ammon is from Towa, though an undistinguishable form
occurs in the coal measures of Lasalle, Iinois. Cypricardia contracta is
also from Burlington, while Hdmondia equimarginalis is known in Michi-
gan, Ohio and Lowa, and has a European analogue in Cardina robusta of J.
de C. Sowerby ; and Allorisma Hannibalensis is known in Michigan,
Ohio,!21 Iowa and Missouri. The whole number of species in the cabinet
from this conglomerate did not amount, if I remember rightly, to more
than eight, and here were four of them immediately and conclusively iden-
tifiable. Here is a percentage of identifications forty or fifty times as great
as we have been able to make with fossils of Chemung age. It seems to
me that we are within the limits of truth when we assert that the paleon-
tological evidence points much more strongly to a synchronism between the
Marshall group and this conglomerate, than between the Marshall and the
Chemung.
When next I turned my attention to an examination of specimens from
the reputed Chemung conglomerate, I remarked its lithological similarity
to the former. and was able also to recognize among the fossils the fol-
lowing species identified in the other conglomerate :
Edmondia equimarginalis,
Allorisma Hannibalensis.
Out of a very limited number of fossils in these two conglomerates, here
were two completely identical. But for their reputed dissimilarity in age,
any paleontologist would feel inclined to pronounce them synchronous.
Biding the opportunity to make a re-examination of the grounds upon
which Professor Hall has separated these two conglomerates ; and holding
paleontological induction as always subordinate to stratigraphical demon-
stration, I shall provisionally regard as one the two conglomerates under
consideration.
The so-called Chemung conglomerate rests upon typical Chemung strata.
The outliers of the Catskill group in Western New York also rest, when-
120 This was described by Hall as Euomphalus depressus, but as this name had been preoccupied
by Sowerby, the name of White will take precedence.
121This and some others of the species identified in this paper from Ohio have very recently been
sent rom Licking County by Rev. H. Herzer. P.S.—Others have been sent by Prof. EH. Andrews,
See. Proc. A. P. Soc. xii, 245,
Winchell. J 400 [May 6,
ever seen, upon Chemung strata, and so do the outliers of the so-called
Carboniferous conglomerate. Not only are the three similarly superposed,
but they agree in presenting sometimes a conglomeritic character, and
sometimes the character of a sandstone with oblique lamination. The
carboniferous conglomerate near Panama, in Chatauque County, affords
a fine building stone, and is quarried there for that purpose. Finally, I
desire to recall the fact that the Marshall sandstone in the vicinity of Pt.aux
Barques assumes a decidedly conglomeritic character, and presents the
appearance of the conglomerate at Cuyahoga Falls in Ohio, with which the
earlier Michigan geologists were inclined to identify it. I ought also to
mention the fact that Cypricardia Catskillensis, figured and described by
Vanuxem,!2? presents close analogies with two species from the Marshall
group, Sanguinolites unioniformis and 8S. naiadiformis.
For these reasons, I shall, for the present, regard the three conglomer-
ates in Western New York, with the associated strata, as belonging to-
gether in the horizon of the Catskill group.
I ought to cite here the results of some investigations which I have more
recently made upon a collection of fossils from the sandstones of Venango
County, Pennsylvania.!?8 At a point near Shafer’s, on Oil Creek, the
following characteristic fossils of the Marshall group were recognized in
April, 1869, and the results communicated to Professor HE. Andrews, to
whom I was indebted for the specimens.
Lingula membranacea, Hemipronites umbraculum.
Discina Gallaheri. Orthis Michelini.
Producta semireticulata, Spirifera Carteri.
Chonetes pulchella. Syringothyris typa.
Hemipronites inequalis.
This locality was reported by Prof. Andrews to be ‘200 to 300 feet
below the coal.’’ Hvery identifiable specimen belonged to the Marshall
group. Judging from these data, there can be no doubt that this group
extends into western Pennsylvania,
At Kinzua, however, not far from Shafer’s, at a point thought by Prof.
Andrews to be a hundred feet lower, geologically, quite a different fauna
presented itself. Not a single Marshall species could be identitied; while
Spirifera disjuncta (Phillips) Hall, and fragments of lamelli branches which
seemed to belong to Avicula longispina and acanthoptera Hall, proclaimed
the horizon of the Chemung.
Since the recognition of the Marshall sandstones in northwestern Penn-
sylvania,!24 it becomes much easier to admit the evidence which I have
already adduced in proof of their existence in southwestern New York.
The physical character of these sandstones so closely resembles that of
the Chemung rocks that the line of demarkation between them had not
122Geol. Rep. Dish. N. Y., p. 186.
123 Proc. Amer, Phil. Soc., Jan. 4th, 1870.
124 Professor Hall, in xx Rep. N. Y, Reg. p. 295, reports also Lepidechinus rarispinus from Mead-
ville, Pa., and Licking County, Ohio. He argues from this a parallelism which I will not contest,
but the fact establishes no affinity with the Chemung.
401 (Winchell,
1870. ]
heretofore been recognized in that part of the country. Further east,
however, where they become lithologically differentiated from the Che-
mung, they had long since been assigned a distinct position, both in Penn-
sylvania and New York.
V. Tuer FAUNA OF THE MARSHALL GROUP PRESENTS A CARBONIFEROUS
ASPECT.
I proceed in the next place to prove, on paleontological grounds, that
the Marshall group possesses close affinities with the carboniferous system.
These affinities are manifested in the presence of species identical with
recognized carboniferous fossils of America and Europe ; in the presence
of species which may be regarded as the precursors or analogues of recog-
nized carboniferous fossils, and in the dominance of generic and sub-gen-
eric types which attain their culmination during the carboniferous age.
1. Species identified with fossils from the carboniferous rocks of Amer-
ica ;
Producta semireticulata Flem. Coal measures.
of Cora @’ Orb. GG GG
Chonetes Illinoisensis Wor.
(=C. Logani Hall). Burlington Limestone.
** multicosta Win. be “<
“* mesoloba N&P. Coal measures.
Hemipronites umbraculum Von Buch. 66 66
Orthis Swallowi Hall, Burlington Limestone.
Spirifera lineata ? Phil. Coal measures.
“g Grimesi Hall. Burlington Limestone.
ue camerata Morton. Coal measures.
Nuculana bellistriata Stev. sp. Coal measures.
Phillipsia Maramecensis? Shum. Warsaw Limestone.
2. Species which extend up into the base of the Burlington Limestone
at Burlington, Iowa :
Syringopora Harveyi White. Restricted.
Trematopora? vesiculosa Win. se
a fragilis Win.
Syringothyris typa Win. Restricted.
Pentamerus lenticularis W&W:
Aviculopecten Caroli Win.
Pernopecten limatus Win. Restricted.
Ctenodonta microdonta Win.
Platyceras corniforme Win.
Pleurotomaria rota Win.
Orthoceras Indianense, Hall.
Gk heterocinctum, Win.
The species marked ‘‘restricted’’? do not occur below the base of the
Burlington Limestone at Burlington, but they are included here because
the fauna proper of the Burlington Limestone begins above the narrow
; / ¢
Winchell. ] 402 [May 6,
Syringothyris typa, more-
[It is
basal zone containing the Marshall species.
over, is believed to occur in the Kinderhook group of Illinois.
now known aiso from Ohio and Pennsylvania. ]
3. Species identified with fossils from the Carboniferous rocks of Europe:
Produecta semireticulata Flem.
ee Cora @ Orb.
Hemipronites unbracutum VY. Buch. Nautilus subsuleatus Phil.
Orthis Michelini L’ Evé.
us resupinata de Kon.
Spirifera lineata? Phil.
Orthoceras reticulatum Phil.
Cyrtoceras tesselatum de Kon.
4. Fossils whose analogues recur in the recognized carboniferous rocks
of America:
Platyerinus contritus.
Actinocrinus Helice.
se pistilliformis.
oe viminalis.
Poteriocrinus Corycia.
Forbesiocrinus lobatus Var.tardus.
Scaphiocrinus subcarinatus.
86 subtortuosus.
Zeacrinus paternus.
Lepidechinus rarispinus.
Producta arcuata.
Producta Newberryi.
ue morbilliana.
Chonetes multicosta.
Orthis Vanuxemi?
ec flava.
Spirifera hirta.
a Cooperensis.
Spiriferina Olarksvillensis,
Spirigera Missouriensis.
Pernopecten Shumardanus.
Myalina lowensis.
Edmondia Burlingtonensis.
Sanguinolites Chouteauensis.
Ctenodonta Stella.
Conocardium pulchellum.
Cypricardella quadrata.
Bellerophon perelegans.
Dentalium grandevum.
Platyceras paralium.
Straparollus Ammon.
Macrocheilus pinguis.
Analogues.
Platycrinus Burlingtonensis.
Actinocrinus unicornis.
( Actinocrinus pyriformis.
( Actinocrinus pistillus.
“ Whitei.
Poteriocrinus cauliculus.
Forbesiocrinus Giddingi.
Scaphiocrinus caripatus.
( of tortuosus.
U es carinatus.
Zeacrinus scoparius.
Lepidechinus imbricatus.
Producta semireticulata.
Producta semireticulata.
ss Rogersi.
Chonetes Logani.
Orthis Michelini.
66 ce
Spirifera pseudolineata.
ih lineata.
Spiriferina subtexta.
Spirigera subtilita.
Pecten aviculatus.
Myalina angulata.
Edmondia radiata.
Cypricardia transversa. —
Nucula ventricosa.
Conocardium carinatum.
Cypricardella subelliptica.
Bellerophon cancellatus.
Dentalium venustum.
Platyceras acutirostre.
Euomphalus Spergenensis
Macrocheilus primigenius.
’
S
403
1370. ]
5. Fossils whose analogues recur
Hurope:
Producta areuata,
oY morbilliana.
Orthis flava.
Rhynchonella Sageriana.
Rhynchonella Whitei.
ae subeireularis.
at persinuata.
ug ? tetraptyx.
a Missouriensis.
Pterinea spinalata.
Pernopecten limeformis.
Posidonomya Romingeri.
a mesambonata.
Mytilus Whitfieldanus.
Myalina Michiganensis.
‘¢ imbricaria.
Edmondia nitida.
ee zquimarginalis.
oe binumbonata.
Sanguinolites concentrica.
Cardiomorpha modiolaris.
uo Julia.
Areca modesta.
Conocardium pulchellum.
Bellerophon vinculatus.
us rugosiusculus.
galericulatus.
Pleurotomaria humilis.
Straparollus Ammon.
Straparollus macromphalus.
Orthoceras Indianense.
OG robustum.
“6 multicinctum.
(5
Nautilus trisulcatus.
a digonus.
gs planidorsalis.
a trigonus We.
Cyrtoceras Rockfordense.
Goniatites Oweni.
& Ixion.
a Marshallensis.
gs Lyoni.
oy pygmeeus.
s Romingeri.
[ Winchell.
in the Carboniferous rocks of
Producta semireticulata.
te punctata,
Orthis Michelini.
R. pleurodon Var. Devreuxiana.
Rhynchonella radialis.
bé (a9
ge pleurodon.
Spirifer Buchianus. [mis.
Rhynchonella pugnax & renifor-
Avieula lunuiata.
Peeten dissimilis.
Posidonomya vetusta.
be 66
Modiola lingualis.
Myalina virgula.
“¢ lamellosa.
KEdmondia unioniformis.
Cardinia robusta.
Kdmondia sealaris.
Cardinia tellinaria.
Cardiomorpha livida.
of Puzosiana.
Area arguta.
Condocardium aliforme.
Bellerophon bicarenus.
<i decussatus.
es Urei.
Pleurotomaria helicinoides.
Euomphalus levis.
Euomphalus levis.
Orthoceras cinctum.
a giganteum.
ae cinetum.
§ Nautilus sulcatus.
(rs Edwardsianus, &e.
oe ee
oe ed
ce ée
Cyrtoceras cyclostomum.
Goniatites princeps.
if rotatorius.
OG mixolobus &e.
ée ears
66 striolatus.
St rotatorious.
Winchell. 404 [May 6,
6. Generic and sub-generic types of a carboniferous character. ‘The
most important genera possessing a paleontological value in this discus-
sion are the following :
Actinocrinus. Edmondia.
Producta . Sanguinolites.
Aviculo pecten. Jardiomorpha.
Mytilus. Nautilus.
Myalina. Phillipsia.
The genus Actinocrinus begins its existence in the upper Silurian, but
attains only a feeble development until we reach the lower carboniferous.
It seems to reach its culmination in the Burlington Limestone. Accord-
ing toa table drawn up by Dr. B. F. Shumard'® in 1865, this genus is
represented by two species in the Niagara group, 2 inthe Corniferous ; 6
in the Hamilton; 3 in the Chemung; 115 in the Burlington Limestone 5
29 in the Archimedes Limestone, and 2in the Kaskaskia Limestone. Later
investigations render it necessary to change these figures without materi-
ally altering their ratios. It is emphatically a Carboniferous genus. Of
this genus seven or eight species are known in the Marshall group; and
they also belong to those peculiar types which characterize the Carbonif-
erous limestone (Compare for instance A. pistilliformis).
The genus Producta, in its sub-generic forms, has a similar history. It
begins in the lower Devonian and culminates in the Lower Carboniferous.
Professor Hall describes 11 species from the Chemung group of New York.
IT am acquainted with 20 species (including one Strophalosia?), from the
Marshall group. De Koninek describes 28 species from the carbonifer-
ous rocks of Belgium. D’Orbigny enumerates 63 known species of Pro-
ducta,!26 of which one is Silurian, 4 are Devonian, and 49 are Carbonif-
erous. Bronn enumerates!27 45 species as certainly discriminated, of which
37 belong certainly to the Mountain Limestone,and only two occur in rocks
as old as the Devonian.
Of the genus Spiriferina we have three species in the Marshall group.
No species have ever been recognized in rocks as old as the Devonian.
The genus Aviculopecten is emphatically a Carboniferous type, and
was so regarded by McCoy when first proposed. In his descriptions
of British Paleozoic Fossils, he enumerates 18 species of the genus, 15 of
which belong to the Carboniferous system, and 3 tothe Old Red Sandstone.
Nine species are reported from the Carboniferous rocks of Illinois. From
the Marshall group Iam acquainted with 12 species (including 4 species
of Pernopecten not heretofore separated from Aviculopecten). It is true
the Chemung contains also several species; but as the type is not known
to descend lower, the presence of these species in the Chemung unites
125 A catalogue of the Palaeozoic Fossils of North America I, Echinodermata.
126 Prodrome de Paléontologie.
27 Index Paleontologicus.
1870. ] ADDS { Winehell.
with the presence of Producta and various forms of Jand vegetation, in
imparting to that group, to this extent, a Carboniferous aspect.!?8
The genus Mytilus, of which we know four species in the Marshall group,
is decidedly one whose history runs through later geological times. Of
203 species enumerated by D’Crbieny, only 12 are recognized as occur-
ring in rocks older than the Carboniferous, and it is probable that some of
these belong to Modiolopsis and Orthonota or allied genera.
The genus Myalina was established by De Koninck exclusively to re-
ceive three species from the upper part of the Coal measures of Belgium.
McCoy discovered none below the Permian system. In this country the
genus is restricted to the limits of the Carboniferous system, attaining its
maximum development in the Coal measures. Of this Carboniferous ge-
nus the Marshall group affords at least 5 species.
_Edmondia, also founded for the reception of Carboniferous forms, has
not been certainly traced downwards into the limits of the Devonian sys-
tem. De Koninck gives two species, both from the Coal measures; Mc
Coy, in the work cited, describes 10, all of which occur in the Carbonif-
erous Limestone. The Marshall group has afforded 9 species which have
been referred to this genus.
Sanguinolites of McCoy afforded its proposer 14 species, of which 11
occur in the Carboniferous strata, and 8 in rocks of older date. In the
Marshall group we recognize 19 species of this genus, including 5 belong-
ing to the type of Cypricardia.
The genus Oardiomorpha is, in the Old World, confined exclusively to
the Carboniferous System, from which De Koninck describes 13 Belgian
species, and McCoy 3 British species. We have described 5 species from
the Marshall group, and know of none from the Chemung.
Nine species of trilobites have been described from the Marshall group,
all of which probably belong to the Carboniferous genus PAillipsia,
though five of them were referred to Proétus by their original describers.
Of the latter five, Proétus ellipticus, M. & W. was thought by the authors to
be probably a Phillipsia. ProétusSwallowi, Shum. is regarded as the near-
est analogue of this, and the latter is hence probably also a Phillipsia,
This species, moreover, does not present the posterior termination of the
great suture required by Proétus. Proétus Doris, Hall, was described
from pygidia, and of course its generic relations are not demonstrated. I
have since discovered from the same locality, several complete cephalic
shields which present the distinctive marks of Phillipsia, so far as they
have been pointed out. All the Carboniferous trilobites of Europe and
America belong to this genus and its sub-genus Grifithides. Though Bar-
rande inclines to recognize Phillipsia sparingly in the upper Silurian and
Devonian, we are still compelled to regard it as an eminently Carbonifer-
ous type.
123 As has been already intimated several Carboniferous typ2s began their existence as early as
the Hamilton and even the Corniferous period. Several of the Fenestellide from the Hamilton
rocks of Michigan were identified by Dr. H. A. Prout with species in the Carboniferous Lime-
stone. His work upon these fossils was incomplete at his death, and has never been pub-
lished.
A. P. §,—VOL. XI.—23E
Winchell, | 406 [May 6
Of Nautili we are acquainted with 13 species from the Marshall group.
Of these, 11 or 12 belong to the section characterized by longitudinal fur-
rows and angulations and an open umbilicus, for which Messrs. Meek and
Worthen have proposed the sub-generie name Trematodiscus.
Remarks similar to the foregoing could be offered in reference to the
geological affinities of various other genera represented in the Marshall
group—as Platycrinus, Forbestocrinus, Zeacrinus, Pterinea, Posidonomya,
Pinna, Macrodon, Solenand certain forms of Spirifera, Bellerophon, Or-
thoceras and Gontatites.
Such are the leading characteristics of the fauna of the Marshall group
which indicate its affinities with the Carboniferous system of Europe and
America.!29 To sum up: we find 12 species identified with fossils from the
Carboniferous rocks of America; 12 species which extend from the Mar-
shall strata upwards into the base of the Burlington Limestone at a point
where the two formations rest in juxtaposition; 9 species identified with
fossils from the Carboniferous rocks of Europe; 32 species whose ana-
logues recur in the higher Carboniferous rocks of America; 44 species whose
analogues recur in the Carboniferous rocks of Europe; 10 generic or sub-
generic forms largely represented, which characterize pre-eminently the
Carboniferous system, besides numerous other genera and species whose
affinities point rather to Carboniferous than to other strata.
Two years ago, (Aug. 1866,) during the meeting of the American Asso-
ciation at Buffalo, a discussion incidentally arose as to the paleontological
relations of the Marshall group, in which on the one hand, it was claimed
that it presented ‘‘a Carboniferous aspect;’’? while on the other hand the
question was asked, ‘‘ what is meant by a Carboniferous aspect?’’ and the
remark was added: ‘‘T don’t know what you call a Carboniferous aspect.”
I turn now to the citation of facts, of which Ihave just presented a sum-
mary, and reply: ‘‘ That is what I mean by a Carboniferous aspect.”’
To answer this question in other words, let me quote the language of a
distinguished American paleontologist.!2° ‘‘ We have a right to contend,
therefore, for the existence of the Carboniferous system at any point
where we can find a continuation of the genera Pentremites, Productus,
Goniatites, (Oyrtoceras, Discites) Nautilus and the ganoid fishes.'3! I con-
tend that this is the legitimate conclusion, or else the Carboniferous system
is subordinate to the Devonian.’’ That is in principle exactly what I
contend for. It was in that school, too, that I received my teaching.
VI. Tae FAUNA OF THE CHEMUNG GROUP PRESENTS A DEVONIAN As-
PECT.
In the further prosecution of this discussion it would be appropriate to
129The strata of the Marshall group probably correspond to the “yellow sandstone” of Ireland
and the Westphalian schists lying at the base of the Carboniferous system.
130 Hall: Foster & Whitney’s Rep. Lake Sup. Land Dist IT, 308.
131 May we not say that the Devonian is distinguished from the Silurian by the advent of these and
other types, while the Carboniferous is characterized by their great expansion ?—this being indi-
cated by the great multiplication of species, the increased richness of ornamentation, the extrava-
gant development of certain features, and sometimes by unusual bulk. Carboniferous types in the
Devonian Age were, in asense, prophetic faunas, or ‘ colonies”—to employ a phrase from Barrande,
used in reference tothe Primordial Zoneof the environs of Prague.
1870.] 407 [ Winchell,
enter upon an examination of the paleontological affinities of the Che-
mung group, with which it has been thought this Carboniferous assem-
blage of strata can be synchronized. I shall content myself, however, with
three remarks. 1. The fauna of the Chemung group embraces numerous
generic forms, some for the first time introduced, which were des-
tined to undergo their full expansion and find their closest analogues in the
Carboniferous Age. 2. It embraces some generic and many specific forms
which lingered from early Devonian times, and which do not pass the up-
per limits of this group. 38. The balance of affinities is universally ad-
mitted to be with the Devonian system, so that the attempt to establish
that proposition would be superfluous.
VII. Can THE MARSHALL AND CHEMUNG BE SYNCHRONIZED?
Ever since Cuvier first enunciated the doctrine of successive faunas in
the past history of the world, geologists have held that paleontological
characters stand next in importance and reliability to observed superpo-
sition in the determination of the synchronism or sequence of formations.
Pictet!®2 lays down the following principles for our guidance in the use of
fossils:
“1, In all countries which have been studied to the present time, the
geological faunas succeed each other in the same order.’’
“*2. Contemporaneous formations, or those formed at the same epoch,
contain identical fossils.”’
“3. Reciproecally, formations which contain identical fossils are contem-
poraneous.”’
Professor Agassiz, '% in writing of the ‘‘ succession of animals and plants
in geological time,’’ says: ‘‘I cannot refrain from expressing my wonder
at the puerility of the discussions in which some geologists allow them-
selves still to indulge, in the face of such a vast amount of well-digested
facts as our science now possesses. They have hardly yet learned to see
that there exists a definite order in the succession of these innumerable
extinct beings, &c.”’
‘One result stands now unquestioned; the existence during each geolo-
gical era of an assemblage of animals and plants differing essentially for
each period. And by period 1 mean those minor sub-divisions in the suc-
cessive sets or beds of rocks which constitute the stratified crust of our
globe, the number of which is daily increasing as our investigations be-
come more extensive and more precise.’’!5! ;
Professor Hall,!%° in attempting to establish the distinctness of the two
groups, Portage and Chemung, uses these words: ‘‘ When we apply the test
of organic remains, we find an equally, or even more strongly marked differ-
ence in the two groups; and, upon this alone, a distinction between the
two should be made.’? In reporting upon the result of his examination
132 Paléontologie, I. p 100.
133 Contributions to the Natural History of the U. §,, vol. 1, p. 93-
134 Tb. p. 96.
13 Geolog. Rep. 1Vth Dist. N- Y.. p. 229.
Winehell.] 408 [May 6,
of western formations in 1841, he states:!8° ‘‘ This examination westward
also afforded a good opportunity of testing the value of fossil characters,
when applied to the same strata extending over wide tracts of country,
and the results will be seen, as we proceed, to have been mostly satisfac-
tory.’ On another occasion he used the following words:!%7 *‘ Every step
in this research tends to convince us that the succession of strata, when
clearly shown, furnishes conclusive proofs of the existence of a regular
sequence among the earlier organisms; Finally, in 1850, he employed
this explicit and pertinent language:!38 ‘‘ In distant and disconnected lo-
calities we are compelled to base our opinions of the equivalency of beds
upon the organic remains which they contain.”
Such citations could be made almost without limit, but it scarcely seems
necessary to proceed. Every paleontological research proceeds upon the
assumption of the truths of the fundamental principles which these ex-
tracts enunciate. On paleontological grounds Professor Hall undertook
the identification of the western formations; on such grounds he asserted
the Spergen Hill limestone to belong to the age of the Warsaw limestone ;
on such grounds Mr. Billings identified the Lower Helderberg group in
Maine; on such grounds Barrande divides his Promodial Zone into dis-
tinct stages which he attempts to identify in other parts of the world;
on such grounds Barrande confidently asserted, without even haying
placed foot upon American soil, that certain Trilobites described by Profes-
sor Hall from the town of Georgia, in Vermont, belonged to a much low-
er, stratigraphical position than had been assigned to them; and thus,
while sitting in his study at Paris, confidently and successfully rectified the
mistakes of field geologists in America working amongst the hills of
-northern New England.
It is evident that if we proceed according to the established principles
of paleontological science, we shall be obliged to deny the contempora-
neous origin of the rocks of the Marshalland Chemung groups. We shall
be induced to leave the Chemung within the limits of the Devonian sys-
tem where it has been placed by the nearly unanimous judgment of pale-
ontologists; and to admit the Marshall group within the boundaries of
the Carboniferous system according to the present nearly unanimous judg-
ment of western geologists;!89 according to the opinions of the eminent
European geologists who have investigated the question, and according
also to views which were at one time shadowed forth by the present prin-
cipal opponent of such views. De Verneuil!?° in alluding to certain rep-
resentatives of the Marshall group, says: ‘‘ As it [the Devonian system in
New York] is principally composed of Schists and argillaceous sandstones —
which, as we have said, are lost and disappear in the West, it thence re-
sults that in the States of Ohio, Indiana and Kentucky, it is reduced to
136 Trans. Asssoc. Amer. Geol. p. 263.
137 Paleont. N. Y., vol. I. Introd. p. xxxu1.
138 Foster and Whitney’s Rep. Lake Sup. Land Dis. If. p. 286.
139 See the references made in the 2d section of this paper.
140 See Amer. Jour. Soc. [2] v- 370.
A()C
1570.4 409 (Winchell.
the Black Schists which represent the Genesee Slate, and to a calcareous
band which represents at once the Corniferous and Onondaga limestones
and the Hamilton group of the State of New York.”
In his comments upon this paper of de Verneuil, from which I just
quoted, Professor Fall himself says:'! ‘““We know that between the Chemung
group and the great Carboniferous Limestone of the West and southwest,
there is an extensive formation of yellow sandstones and green shales and
sandstones’’—and, for the sake of enforcing a view which he then held,
that even the Chemung strata ought to go into the Carboniferous system,
he adds, ‘‘charged with fossils having a close analogy with those of the
groups below.”’ Still further in his tabular arrangement appended to his
elaborate discussion on the ‘‘ Parellelism of the Paleozoic Deposits of the
United States and Europe, !42 he places the ‘‘ Yellow sandstones and green
shales of Ohio,’’ not only above the Chemung, but above the shales and
sandstones of the Catskill mountains.”’
In the presence of such facts and such testimony as have been cited, it
becomes a question of curious interest upon what grounds the geological
equivalency of the Chemung and Marshall can still be maintained. In a
paper presented before the National Academy last summer (1867) at Hart-
ford, and repeated before the American Association at Burlington, it was
held that the Devonian fauna of the Chemung in its western: extension
becomes replaced by the Carboniferous fauna of the Marshall simply
through the influence of local conditions. Geographical variations were
pointed out in the nature of the deposits and the accompanying faunas,
of the Trenton, Hudson River, Niagara and Hamilton groups, and it was
maintained that the paleontological contrast between the Chemung and
the Marshall is something of the same kind, and possessing no different
significance. These views at Hartford, were endorsed by the high autho-
rity of Professor Agassiz. |
The same views had been previously recorded by Professor Hall in the
Fourth Volume of the Paleontology of New York, as follows: ‘‘ We
have every reason to believe that, in those sedimentary formations be-
tween the Hamilton group and the Coal measures in the east, and between
the same group and the Burlington (Carboniferous) limestone in the west,
the Devonian aspect of the fauna, on the one hand, and the Carboniferous
aspect on the other, are due, in a great degree, to geographical and phys-
ical conditions, and not to difference of age or chronological sequence of
the beds containing the fossils.”
Again, in a pamphlet ‘‘ Notice’’'4* of this volume, in alluding to the
contrast between the faunas of the Chemung and Marshall groups, he
uses these remarkable words :—‘‘T’he distinction between Devonian and
Carboniferous faunas ts based as often upon geographical as chronological
relations.”
141 Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] v. 368, Note.
142 Foster and Whitney Rep. L. Sup. Land Dis. IJ, Chap. xviii.
M3 pp. 252-257. See Notice of this volume, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., May, 1866, p. 246; also,
Pamphlet, 1867.
Mt Notice of [Vth volume Pal. N. Y.,1867, p. 5.
Winchell.] 4 10 [May 6,
It seems to me that the doctrine asserting the influence of geographical
and other physical conditions, is being carried entirely too far. Thatthe or-
ganic beings which populated the earth in past ages must have been distrib-
uted in each period, in faunas geographically restricted, under laws identical
with those which now determine the distribution of animals and plants, is
a doctrine which every reflecting paleontologist has either asserted or im-
plied.145 It would be puerile, indeed, to attempt to draw a stratigraphical
induction from paleontological data, without keeping in view the known
laws of faunal circumscription. But it is a new and an unprecedented
procedure for a geologist to attribute to physical conditions the char-
acteristics which the common consent of all paleontologists has assigned
to faunas which lived in different ages of the world. This is to recede to
‘the platform of De Maillet and Lamarck ; it is to yield the determination
of the organic facies of a geological period to the chances of physical con-
ditions, instead of the domination of an intelligent method of sequence
and adaptation; it is to surrender the grand procession of organic forms
through past time, to the moulding and determinative influence of the
secular changes of the physical worid; it is to turn our backs upon posi-
tions which have been so ably and so successfully defended by our great
adopted naturalist; it is to drown the key-note of the celebrated ‘‘ Essay
on Classification ’’ in the discord of transmutationism and materialism.
The following extract is from the celebrated paper of de Verneuil, to
which allusion has so often been made :'46 ‘‘ We have endeavored to prove
that the first traces of organic life in countries the most remote, appear
under forms nearly alike, at the base of the Silurian System; and that the
same types, often the same species, are successively, and in parallel order,
developed through the entire series of the paleozoic beds. If we have
not succeeded in lifting the vail which still hides from us the cause of this
grand phenomenon, perhaps, at least, our observations have demonstrated
the insufficiency of those causes by which certain authors seek to explain it.
They prove, in effect, that the phenomenon itself is independent of the in-
fluences which the depths of seas exercise upon the distribution of animals,
for if, in certain countries, the Siluriau deposits prove a deep sea, they
have, on the contrary, in the State of New York, a littoral character.
They prove, in fine, that, in its general character, it is equally indepen-
dent of the upheavings which have affected the surface of the globe ; for,
from the eastern frontier of Russia even to Missouri—distant from, or
near the lines of dislocation—in the horizontal beds as well as those which
are disturbed, the law according to which it isaccomplished appears to be
uniform.’’ ‘* We do not pretend to say that the differences of depth in
the seas had not already an influence upon the distribution of animals; it
is to this circumstance, on the contrary, that we attribute the more or less
local faunze which we often discover in the paleozoic formation. But
these local faunwe always afford some species which connect them with the
145 See, with multitudes of others, the works of Lyell, Sharpe, Salter, de Verneuil, d’Orbigny,
Pictet, and especially of Barrande and Agassiz.
M6 See Amer. Jour. Sci. [2], vii. 51,
1870.] 41 1 [Winchell],
epoch to which they belong. They are the exceptions, which do not derange
the general symmetry.”
Let us now examine, for a moment, the circumstances which afford a
shadow of plausibility to the extraordinary dogma of the parallelism of
the Chemung and Marshall groups. It is alleged first, that the fauna of
the Chemung assumes gradually a less Devonian and more Carboniferous
aspect, when traced westward within the limits of the Stateof New York,
and that it is possible that the characters of the Marshall group would be
reached in the prolongation of the Chemung through the Western States.
This allegation must be considered in the light of the fact, that a great
thickness and geographical extent of strata in eastern New York, which
were, a few years since, regarded as belonging to the Catskill group, are
now pronounced by Professor Hall and Col. Jewett to be realty a part of
the Chemung; and that strata which were formerly regarded as Chemung
belong really to the Hamilton. Restoring to the Hamilton that which is
its own, it cannot be otherwise than that the Chemung strata of eastern
New York should present a more modern aspect than was once supposed.
But let it be granted that even yet the Chemung presents a more Carbon-
iferous aspect in western than eastern New York, it is not yet a Carbon-
iferous fauna ; it retains numerous Devonian types ; is does not embrace
a trio of species, if it does a single one, which reappear in central and
eastern Ohio. All this is unprecedented in formations of the same age,
at points but one or two hundred miles removed from each other.
In the next place, some local difference in the nature of the sediments
is admitted to exist. The rocks of the Marshall group, both in Ohio and
Michigan, embrace a bed which is somewhat calcareous ; in southern In-
diana they are known only by an aluminous limestone ; in Illinois and
Missouri they are, to a considerable extent, calcareous and argillaceous.
On the other hand, it is notorious that the great mass of the Marshall
group consists of olive, reddish and yellowish sandstones, and shaly sand-
stones, which can scarcely be distinguished from the strata of the Che-
mung. The rocks are. identical, and so far as we have the means of
judging, the physical conditions under which the sediments were accumu-
lated, must have been extremely similar. We discern none of those
changed conditions which are always present on the occurrence of a local
fauna. And yet the two faunas are more distinet than those of the Por-
tage and Hamilton—yastly more distinct than those of the Hudson River
and Trenton groups. Such pretensions are not set up in reference to any
other formation. Lingula prima, of the Potsdam group, is recognized in
the coarse sandstones of New York and Minnesota, and the fine alumi-
nous shales of Alabama. The western prolongation of the Hudson River
group is stocked with the same Rhynchonella tncerebescens, Orthis lynx,
Strophomena alternata and Chetetes lycoperdon, as the typical strata of
eastern New York. The various physical conditions under which we find
the Niagara group, present us uniformly with Canyocrinus ornatus, Ha-
lysites cutenularia, Favosites Gothlandica, Athyris nitida, Spiriferu radiata,
Winchell.] 412 [May 6,
&e. So the Corniferous limestone holds several species which never fail
to declare its identity; and the Hamilton group is traced by persistent and
unmistakeable paleontological characters over an area two thousand
miles in. breadth—from eastern New York to the Rocky Mountains, and
from Central Kentucky to the valley of Mackenzie’s river. It is incredi-
ble that the fauna of the Chemung sandstones, without visible change in
physical conditions, should have undergone a total transmutation in a dis-
tance less than 200 miles. Were the lithological characters of the Che-
mung and Marshall remarkably distinct, we should expect a marked va-
riation in the faunas, even if contemporaneous. But we should still
have detected a few identical species, and a strong correspondence in
dominant ideas—as the Edmondias, Aviculopectens and Producti, of the
Chouteau limestone, are identical with the same genera and species of the
Marshall sandstone. In some portion of the hundreds of thousands of
square miles over which the Marshall strata have been‘extended, would
have existed physical conditions sufficiently similar to those of New York,
to have permitted the introduction of a few of the types which are domi-
nant at the Hast.
The facts which I have already pointed out demonstrate that there was
a time when the fauna of Ohio and Michigan had a representation in New
York and Pennsylvania. Fossils even from Iowa and Missouri—fossils
from fine, and even from calcareous strata—have been identified in west-
ern New York, identified, too, in conglomeritic deposits. It is even true,
as de Verneuil asserts, that there is a law, however inscrutable, which
stamps a common and recognizable impress upon faunas of the same age,
however diverse the physical conditions under which they subsist.
The doctrine of faunal collocations of organic beings is founded in
Nature, and has been made a specialty by one whose name commands
universal respect. We must apply this doctrine to the distribution of
extinct animals. It seems tome, however, there is a possibility of using
this doctrine as ‘‘a hobby,’’ and of carrying it to unwarranted limits.
Thinking has its fashions no less than architecture and dress. Another
fashion of our times is to reunite varieties and species of organic remains,
which have been discriminated often with much study and great utility.
It is the fashion just now to concede a wide range to the variability of
species. Boththese fashions tend to a relaxation of the rigor of the limits
which we had set to the influence of external agencies. It seems to me
that the true philosophy leads to the practice of a judicious conserva-
tism in reference to the long-accepted canons of paleontological science.
For these reasons I cannot, at present, consent to the parallelizing of
the Chemung and Marshall groups.
VIII. PARALLELISM OF THE CATSKILL AND MARSHALL.
If the Chemung be not the eastern representative of the Marshall,
where, it may be asked, does that representative exist? It would be no
reply to the argument which I have presented, if no representation of the
Marshall were yet discovered east of Ohio. The case would not be with-
1870.] 413 (Winchell.
out parallel. The St. Peter’s Sandstone, the Galena Limestone, the
Mountain Limestone, the Laramie Limestone, are all without distinct rep-
resentation at the east. 'The Medina Sandstone, the Oriskany Sandstone,
the Schoharie Grit, and the Marcellus Shale, are without distinct repre-
sentation at the west. But it seems to me that, for the Marshall group,
we haye discovered a probable representative in the Catskill group of New
York. The lithological and paleontological facts which favor this identi-
fication have already been pointed out. If this identification be correct,
it will appear that the Catskill group is not to be regarded as thinning
and partially disappearing, in central and western New York, in conse-
quence of an original lack of sediments, but in consequence of subsequent
denudation upon a scale of vast magnitude.
But it may be pronounced a fatal objection to this method of paralell-
izing, that the Catskill is regarded by the New York geologists, and by
others, as the American representative of the Old Red Sandstone, which
is generally admitted to be Devonian. In reply to this, I offer two sug-
gestions. First, it is not the universal opinion of European geologists
that the Old Red Sandstone, as restricted to Scottish deposits along the
flanks of the Grampians, and upon the southern borders of the Moray
Firth, is properly classed with Devonian strata. The North Devon strata,
to which the term Old Red Sandstone has been extended, are thought by
some to hold a lower position. The Scottish Old Red Sandstone may be,
in part, at least, of Carboniferous age. Secondly, the identification of
the Catskill with the Old Red, rests upon the similarity of a few scales of
fishes, especially of a supposed Holoptychius. But fish remains are quite
abundant in the Marshall group, and some of them of types similar to
those of the Old Red. Dr. Newberry has described three species from
Illinois. Moreover, the Molluscous fauna presents numerous affiliations
with the fauna of the Old Red, as delineated in Murchison’s Silurian Sys-.
tem ; and this resemblance, in fact, was the first cireumstance which
turned my attention to the equivalency proposed in this paper. Among
Marshall fossils which I have noted as having near analogues in the Old
Red of Scotland, are the following:
ANALOGUES.
Ctenodonta Iowensis, W. & W. Cucullza antiqua, Sow.
Isocardia ? Jenne, Win. Goniophora cymbeeformis.
Murchisonia quadricincta, Win. Turritella obsoleta.
Holopella mira, Win. “f gregaria.
Finally. it may be observed, that, whether the Catskill be synchronized
with the Old Red or not, it holds a position above all the typical Devonian
rocks of Europe and America. Professor Hall'7 long ago stated that
‘‘after the change which takes place at the termination of the Hudson
River group, there is, perhaps, nowhere else in the Paleozoic series so
complete a change in the lithological and Paleozoic features of the strata
as at the termination of the Chemung group. Over a considerable extent
7 Amer. Jour. Sci., [2] v. 367, Note.
A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—24E
Winchell. } +14
in New York and Pennsylvania, the Chemung
group is succeeded by a coarse sandstone or con-
glomerate, which lies at the base of the Red sand-
stone. This change is equally great with that
which took place at the production of the Oneida
conglomerate, and the mass forms a distinct topo-
graphical feature in the southern part of New
York, and in parts of Pennsylvania. At the same
time, all the peculiar organic forms of the Che-
mung group have become extinct. » » x When
we undertake to mark the limits between systems,
at points where it is difficult to decide them either
from lithological or organic characters, (as in the
separation of Devonian and Silurian,) it seems to
us very proper to give more importance to such a
remarkable line of separation as that indicated at
the base of the red sandstone. . » » The
relations between the red sandstone and the Car-
boniferous system appear to be scarcely known at
all; or whether there may, or not, be a more
intimate relation between this mass and the suc-
ceeding gray sandstones, has never been shown.”’
M. deVerneuil, '** while admitting it incontestible
that the Catskill group ‘‘is upon the same horizon
as the Old Red Sandstone of Scotland and Wales,”’
concludes, with emphasis, that the study of the
New York strata has resulted in ‘‘ proving that
the Old Red Sandstone, in America, is more recent
than the schists and limestones which represent
the deposits of the Eifel, the Hartz and of Devon-
shire.”’
In accordance with the views set forth in the |
foregoing paper, I append the following table of
geological equivalents. The Table, as originally
presented to the American Association, was pub-
lished in the ‘‘ Geology of Tennessee,”’ pp. 364-5.
As here given, it is slightly modified, in the Ten-
nessee column, to adapt it to late discoveries al-
ready announced. In the Michigan column, I
have merged the ‘‘ Black shale” with the ‘* Huron
group,’ in accordance with views long entertained
(see especially, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., No. 81).
That this shale occupies a position beneath the
Hamilton will not, I think, be longer maintained. |
Whether it be wholly Genesee, or wholly Portage,
or the. representative of both, it is certainly a
lower constituent of a group of argillaceous strata,
which is one mass, physically, and which, in 1861, |
I was induced to designate as the ‘‘ Huron Group,”
in consequence of its extensive outcropping around
the shores of Lake Huron, between Detroit and
Pt. aux Barques.
148 See Amer. Jour. Sci., [2] v.. pp. 367, 369.
[May 6
| ac op)
= BD | SF
pete =n Ka
S Pe gi
2
=) oS)
2) 3
=}
ee —
aa ae
— ~~
= @&.
es oF
S S
3 5
2 |
ler}
Hoof | .
=) ~.
5 sya 2
= [ess §
> Sos —
g ao Sas
EI5S S
Q “R35 Ss
ae a =
ach es) ao i
= 5 ==
| =. iS 32
= an se
> th aS
° AE Tir ay
= 5 CS
= oS
= :
3 © %
: i
= &
£ sr
=| eS
=] ic)
= Exe
S ep
= >
=
lop) me)
a ®
—— e OM:
Ss ee
= S
= x
S w
z =
D =
= @
ao
&
=
=
=
=
3
= |
ler}
= ie
=
| Ss
i} —
=
=e
S
fe)
5
Q
Lar]
cs
= ©
i= fe)
= la
o R
5 =
=
op) —
re ®
— ito
= >
a °
i=) ian
| ct PD
5 =
a =
ir? ®
|
an
—~ 2010
— ~~
2 CSF
aurkod
Sot a=
IZPOEaeo
OSD Sho)
\8F n° Oo
ae
|= fos
I= S3e
=
dg
(Winchell,
415
1870. ]
‘ TABLE OF GEOLOGICAL EQUIVALENTS.
NEW YORK. | ONTARIO. ) MICHIGAN. | OHIO. NDIANA. | ILLINOIS. IOWA. MISSOURI. | KENTUCKY. , TENNESSEE.
(Wanting?) | (Wanting) |ParmaCongl.' Jonglom’ate. Conglom’ate. \Conglom’ate. ? ? \Conglom’ate. Conglom’ate.
Tanti TR tee Percvate | False Coal | False Coal False Coal False Coal
Wanting Wanting Wantin ¢ 2 os ¢ ‘ ‘ SNA eee ‘ S
( g) | ( une) a g) Meas. ‘ Meas. j ? Meas. Meas.
| | (Wanting) |KaskaskiaLi. Kaskaskia L. ? |Kaskaskia L.| Kaskaskia L.
St. Louis Lim. St. Louis Lim. |St. Louis Lim. St. Louis Lim. St.Louis Lim.| ‘St.Louis L.
| canoer | Warsaw Lim.| Warsaw Lim.| Warsaw Lim.|Warsaw Lim. a Warsaw L.
ous Limest. [ee ae eae
G | a A = q x = a . = a = . Pa
(Wanting) | (Wanting) oer (Wanting) | Keokuk Keokuk Lim. Keokuk Lim.’ Keokuk Lim.’ Keokuk Lim.) |Keokuk L.
Michigan | Limestone. |
Salt Gr. Gray Lin. a
Brown Sh. S
| Iknobstones Anobstones
| im u | ree ae ae = Kes} eo
| | ? Burlington L. Burlington L.' Burlington L. ne |2 ?
Upper part of | | | i ;
Catskill Gr. | Chouteau =
i Saree Rockford Limestone R
including c OG) estone, | ( Probably
f AICS aver A z St. = _ , y Sa -| Ver ar \ aera Taletls § sys 8
“Carbonifer- | (wanting?) | Marshall Waverly Se-| I inest Kinderhook vellow Sand-|Vermicular | ganz silicius| | Silicious
pus” Conolo- B: Group. - EL _ ane vi stone Sandst. and, ; shales
ous” Conglo ] eet : Group. ‘ : shale not yet Shales.
ranvage ad in part. | Williamsport! Series. Shale wareiyaal
merate and eee i 1) a observed.)
“Chemung” Gritstone. Lithographic
conglomer’ te | Limestone.
Se EEE ee eee 2 | eee ee he Se
Huron Group |
Chemung Gr.} Micaceous
Schists and
: he Flags. Perhaps :
PortageGr, |“Portage Lower partof pricn Shate |Atzillaceous é
Shales. : Chocolate | (Wanting) | (Wanting) | Yellow Sand- Peers men eds. (Wanting)
Argillace- 'Shale Series, | | stone series.
ous Shale.
EUROPE. |
MillstoneGrit
»
:
Mountain
Limest.
Old RedSand.
(Scotland. )
Yellow Sand.
(Treland. )
Westphalian
Schists.
Cypridinen-
schiefer,
Winchell.] 416 [May 6,
IX. Toe Name.
Should the equivalencies of the rocks under consideration be finally
adjusted in the manner which I have indicated, it will be important to
select a designation for the group in accordance with the recognized can-
ons of geological nomenclature. In that case, it will scarcely be permis-
sible to employ the term ‘‘ Catskill Group,’’ since the principal mass of
the rocks which are made the type of that group is now known to belong
to the Chemung; and the name would be amisnomer. A similar objec-
tion rests against the use of the term ‘‘Waverly.’’ This term, as I have
already intimated, has been used in different senses; and by all parties,
from Professor Briggs down, has been employed to embrace, at least in
central and southern Ohio (the typical region), either the entire series of
strata between the Conglomerate and the ‘‘ Black Shale,”’ or, at least, the
lower portion of that series. It is necessary to apply a term to the exclu-
sion of the ‘‘Chocolate Series” of Ohio, underlying the, fossiliferous sand-
stones of the Waverly series. The first geographical designation which
was employed in this restricted sense was ‘‘ Marshall Group,” first em-
ployed and published by me in December, 1860, and afterwards introduced
in my Geological Report, advance copies of which were distributed in
August, 1861.
APPENDIX.
REFERENCES TO PUBLICATIONS ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE ROCKS UNDER
CONSIDERATION.
1836. Hildreth: Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xxix., pp. 138, 186; Pl. 1,
26, 28.
1838. Houghton: First Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Mich., p. 3.
‘¢ Briggs: First Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, p. 79.
‘¢ Foster: Second Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, p. 105.
18839. Houghton: Second Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Mich, p. 28.
1840. Hubbard: Mich. Geol. Rep., p. 87.
1841. Hubbard: Mich. Geol. Rep., p. 182, &c.
1842. Hall: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlii., p. 51.
‘Hall: Jour. Bos. Soc. Nat. Hist., v., p. 1.
‘‘ Conrad: Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil.; viii., 249.
‘¢ Hall: Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol., p. 269.
‘* Vanuxem: Final Rep. Geol. N. Y. [Id Dist.
1843. Hall: Final Rep. Vth Dist. N. Y.
1846. Hall: Paleont. N. Y., vol. I., Introd., p. 16.
1847. Yandell and Shumard: Contributions to the Geology of Ky., p. 16.
“* De Verneuil: Bull. Soc. Geol. France, ser. II1., Tome iv, p. 648 (Am.
Jour. Sci. [2] v., 176, 350; and vii. 45, 218.)
1848. Sharpe: Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lond., vol. iv, 151.
1848-9. Murray: Canad. Geol. Rep., p. 24.
ALT
1870. i [Winchell.
1850. Hall: Foster & Whitney’s Rep. L. Sup. L. Dist., II., p. 285.
1850-1. Murray: Canad. Geol. Rep., p. 29.
1851. Christy: Proc. Amer. Assoc, v. 76.
‘¢ Whittlesey. Ib., 207.
1852. Owen (D.D.): Geol. Rep. Wis., Min.. and Ind., pp. 92, 95, and Map.
1853. Marcou: Geol. Map of U. 8., Explanation and Text, p. 33.
1855. Swallow: Mo. Geol. Rep., I., 101.
“ Marcou: Geol. Karte der Verin. Staaten, Peterm. Mittheil, p. 149.
‘¢ Shumard (B. F.): Mo. Geol. Rep., Il., 137, 185.
_ “© Meek: Mo. Geol. Rep., I1., 218.
‘¢ Norwood & Pratten: Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. [2] III., 254.
1856, Owen (D. D.): Ky. Geol. Rep., I., 89.
‘¢ Safford: Geol. Reconn. Tenn., 158.
‘¢ Murray: Can. Geol. Rep., 1853-6, p. 129.
1858. Stevens: Am. Jour. Sci., [2] xxv., 262.
‘¢ Marcou: Geology of North America, &c., Zurich.
‘¢ Hall: Io. Geol. Rep. [1] 88, and [11] 517.
‘¢ Owen (D. D.): Geol. Recon. Ark., I., 87, &e., 135.
1859. Newberry: Ohio Agricultural Rep. 1859, Pamphlet on the Rock Oils
of Ohio, p. 6.
1860. White: Jour. Bos. Soc. N. Hist., vii., 209, Sep.
“¢ Lyon: Trans. St. Louis Acad. Nat. Sci., I., 620.
‘© Worthen: Ib., 571.
‘¢ Swallow: Ib., 635.
‘¢ Meek and Worthen: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.; Sep., p. 447.
‘¢ Winchell: Detroit Tribune, Dec. 11 (Summary of Results of Mich.
Surv.)
*¢ Winchell: Chicago Tribune, Dec. (Lecture before Chicago Academy
of Sciences, on Excursion to Ann Arbor.)
1861. Winchell: Mich. Geol. Rep., Aug. (Advance sheets. )
‘¢ “Meek and Worthen: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxii.; 167 (Sep).
PO) JelENNG sable Javeyo, INlo SUs daverszog OXty:
1862. White and Whitfield: Proc. Bos. Soc.; viii., 289 (Feb).
‘¢ White: Proc. Bos. Soc., ix., 8 (Apr).
‘¢ Swallow: Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci., I1., 81 (Apr).
‘¢ Winchell: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiii., 352 (May).
“¢ Winchell: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., Sep., 405.
“¢ Hall: Canadian Nat., vii., 877 (Nov).
““; Hall: xv. Rep: N. Y. Regents, 107 (Nov).
«Jewett: xv. Rep. N. Y. Regents, 198; and Amer. Jour. Sci., [2],
xxxly., 418.
‘¢ Hall: xv. Rep. N. Y. Regents, 81.
‘¢ Dawson: Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lond., xviii.
‘¢ Owen (R.): Ind. Geol. Rep., 92, 108, &e.
1863. Winchell: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., Jan., p. 3.
‘¢ Winchell: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxv., 61.
‘¢ Logan: Geol. Can., 387, 404.
‘* Hall: Pamphlet; Republished in xvii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 1865, p. 50.
y Q)
Winchell. ] 418 [May 6, 1870.
1864. Hall: xvi. Rep. N. Y. Regents, pp. 92, 107, Note.
66
Winchell: The Oil Region of Michigan (Repub. Amer. Jour. Sci.,
May, 1865, xxxix., 350).
1865. Winchell: Proc. Phil. Acad. Sci., July, 109.
oe
Meek: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., Dec., 275.
Meek and Worthen: Ib., 245.
. Winchell: Amer. Jour. Sci., xli., 177 (March).
Winchell: The Grand Traverse Region, p. 49.
Newberry: Prospectus Neff Petroleum Co.
Winchell: Prospectus Neff Petroleum Co., p. 7 (June).
Meek and Worthen: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phil., 251.
Worthen: Rep. Geol. Surv. UL, I., 108.
Meek and Worthen: Ib., Ii., 62, 77, 80, 145.
Hall: Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 246 (in advance of Pal. N. Y.,vol.iv).
Logan: Atlas to accompany Geology of Canada, 1863.
. Davidson (Thos.): Geological Magazine; vol. iv., July.
5 > b) )
Carpenter (W. B.): Annals and Magazine of Natural History, July.
Meek: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xliii., 407.
Hall: Notice of Volume IV., Paleontology of New York.
1868. Hall: xx. Report N.Y. Regents, p. 295, pl. ix., fig. 10.
(79
6
Sey
Winchell: Proc. Amer. Assoc., Abstract in Chicago papers, Aug.12,
and ‘‘American Naturalist,’’? Oct., p. 445.
Meek and Worthen: Geol. Survey of Illinois, vol. III., p. 450; and
also the Geology of the Counties.
). Safford: Geology of Tennessee, pp. 341, 439.
Winchell: In Geol. of Tenn., pp. 364-5, 442-6.
Winchell: Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xi., pp. 57-83.
Newberry: Proc. Amer. Assoc. Salem Meeting, Relations of Ohio
Geology to that of adjoining States.
. Hall: Preliminary Notice, &c., Preparatory for Palentology of New
York (received Jan).
Winchell: Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xii., pp. 245-261 (read Jan.
Ath).
Newberry: Geological Survey of Ohio, its Progress in 1869. An
Address before the Legislature (received 15 April).
1B) Jey TR yve ID AN,
IN PART J. OF THIS PAPER.
7. Contents, v. for ‘analogies,’ read ‘‘analogues.”
57. eS ix., for ‘‘ Their names,” read ‘The Name.”
64. Sixth line from top, for ‘“‘“Gryroceras,” read ** Gyroceras.”
66. Tenth line from top, for ‘‘ Hudson,” read ‘** Huron.”
69. Note ‘‘70,” line 3, for ‘‘ authority,” read ‘‘ authorities.”
72. Seventh line from top, for ‘‘ correction,’ read ‘* conviction.”
72. Note “83,” line 3. for ‘‘ he previously,” read “‘ he had previously.”
78. Note ‘'104,” line 2, for “ geological,” read ‘* geographical.”
80. Note ‘‘108,”’ line 3, for ‘‘announcement,”’ read “announcements.”
2. Twenty-seventh line from top, for ‘‘ phenomenon,” read ‘‘ phenomena.”
eral minor errors will, perhaps, be apparent to the reader.
Q
Cope.]} 4] d [ May 6, 1870.
REMARKS BY Epwarp D. Corn, at Meerine May 6rn, 1870.
Prof. E. D. Cope exhibited the nearly perfect cranium of a Dicynodont
Reptile from the Cape Colony, South Africa, which he regarded as differ-
ent from those deseribed by Owen and Huxley.
The application of the cutting edges of the mandible to those of the
upper jaw, was nearly horizontal instead of vertical, as im some marine
Chelonia, on which account he regarded it as representing a genus distinct
from Ptychognathus, with which it was otherwise identical. This was
named Lystrosaurus.
It was nearest the Ptychognathus latifrons, Owen, but differed in having
narrowed, sublongitudinal orbits, with immense protuberances in front of
them, a very narrow front anterior to, or below these, with two parallel
wide sulci on each side, and a much wider occiput and interorbitalregion.
The middle of the cutting margin of the premaxillary was prolonged into
a short beak. The front from the orbital protuberances, and the direction
of the tusks, both nearly vertical. The following measurements are
given:
In. Lines.
Length cranium (greatest), o )
Width occiput, 8
‘s intertemporal space, 1 10.5
es interorbital i 3 7
as between supraorbital protuberances, 4 8
iG anterior to orbits, 2 3
of across middle of alveole of tusks, 3
er “* —internasal space, 1 8
<i *¢ temporal fossa, 3 1.5
Length of a 2 1.5
oY from hindmost part of skull to orbit, 3 3
a from fore part of orbit to border of premaxillary, 4 9
Long diameter of orbit, 2 3
re “* nostril, 11
The species was named JLystrosaurus frontosus. The specimen be-
longed to the private collection of Dr. E. R. Beadle of this city.
Portions of several large teeth or tusks enclosed in the Triassic shales
and sandstones of Phcenixville, Pa., were exhibited, probably belonging
to Dicynodont reptiles. They represented specimens of much larger size
than that of the L. frontosus.
Hayden. ] 420) [May 6,
SECTIONS OF STRATA BELONGING TO THE ‘‘ BEAR RIVER GROUP,’’ NEAR
Berar RIveR Crry, WyomMInG TERRITORY.
By F. V. Hayprn, M. D.
Read May 6, 1870.
During my explorations along the line of the Union Pacific Railroad,
last autumn, my attention was attracted by two’ of the most remarkable
artificial cuts or excavations that I have ever seenin the West. They are
located about a mile west of Bear River City, or nearly 950 miles west of
Omaha. No such exhibitions of the strata can be found in the country,
formed by natural causes. Usually the rocks of the modern formations
are composed of such soft materials that they have readily decomposed on
the surface, covering it with a considerable thickness of debris, thus con-
cealing, in many instances, not only the true character of the underlying
rocks, but also many of the details of the stratification.
At my request, Mr. H. R. Durkee, an excellent civil engineer, residing
at Bear River City, made a careful survey of the cuts, and noted the char-
acter of each layer, with its thickness in feet and inches. Some of the
layers are so crowded with fresh water shells that they seem almost made
up of them. A list of them is given in Mr. Meek’s Catalogue.
Upon the surrounding hills, among the debris rock from these beds, the
fossil shells are so abundant that they may be gathered by the bushel, like
nuts in autumn, in a fine state of preservation. The strata are all re-
garded as of lower Tertiary age, and belong to what ! have denominated
the Bear River Group. All the beds in this vicinity are very much dis-
turbed, holding a nearly vertical position, or inclining at a high angle. I
desire to call the attention of scientific men to these sections as they
travel along this portion of the road, and for that reason I regard them
of some value. I shall hereafter work up the geology of this district
more in detail, and simply wish to make a record of these facts at the
present time.
COMMENCING AT THE HASTERN EXTREMITY OF THE CorT.
No. Description. Feet. In.
1. Clay, Greyish, Black, contains fragments of sandstone, 10
2. Limestone, Blue, 2
3. Clay, Greyish-black, 6
4, Clay, Brown, hard, and in large fragments, il
O, Clan, Tikes 8 a small se 1
6. Limestone, Blue, Fossiliferous, 1 6
7. Clay, Greyish-black, 1 2
8. Sandstone, Fragmentary, 2
9. Clay shale, Grey, 1
10. Clay, Greyish-black, very compact, 1
11. Clay shale, Black, 10
12. Marl, shells in fragments, 8
13. Clay shale, Black, 6
14. Limestone, much shattered, and in angular pieces, 2
DO WO W WW
O DO -3 GS or
eo o9 oD CO
Ot ye CO
H wo eo OO oO
SODAS
© +
421
Description.
. Clay shale, Black,
. Limestone, angular fragments,
. Clay shale, Brown,
. Limestone, slightly fossiliferous,
. Gypseous Earth, contains crystals of Selenite,
. White Marl, shells fragmentary,
‘1. Limestone, very fossiliferous,
22. Clay shale, Black,
. Limestone, very fossiliferous,
. Clay shale, Brown,
. Sandstone, Fragmentary,
. Clay shale, Grey-black,
. Gypseous earth, layer of crystals of Selenite on H. side,
. Clay shale, contains streak of coal and Gypseous earth,
. Gypseous earth, contains streaks of brown bituminous
shale,
. Clay shale, Brown, very hard,
oe Black, Bituminous,
. Marl, Grey,
Limestone,
. Clay, full of fossils,
. Clay shale, Grey,
oe Blue,
. Sand. Yellow,
. Clay shale, Grey,
ee ‘¢ Bituminous,
. Limestone, Fossiliferous,
. Clay shale and marl, Fossiliferous, less foss. on W. side,
2. Bituminous shale, contains streaks black coal,
3. Clay shale, Blue,
. Gypseous Earth,
. Clay shale, Blue,
. Marl,
. Clay shale, Blue,
. Marl, Yellowish-white,
. Sandstone, Fossiliferous,
. Clay shale, Blue,
- Sandstone, Fragmentary,
52.
. Limestone, very fossiliferous,
54.
. Bands, Black, bituminous shale and marl,
. Marl,
y. Slaty shale, Black,
. Limestone, very fossiliferous,
Clay shale, Blue and Yellow,
Clay, full of fossils,
A. P. S.—VOL. XI.—25E
[ Hayden.
Feet.
(on
In.
10
6
WO OS Ww ot & ®
ew oo
PR Bk O & © ©
mb & oo
=)
WDWIA wa
Hayden. ] 422
No.
59.
60.
. Clay shale, Black,
96.
. Clay shale, Black,
. Gypseous earth, Yellow,
. Limestone,
100.
101.
102.
108.
Description.
Slaty shale, Grey,
Shale, full of fossils,
“ Yellowish-brown,
a Blue,
. Coal and yellow shale in streaks,
5. Limestone, very fossiliferous,
. Marl,
. Limestone, slightly foss., fossils fragmentary,
Nodular clay and shells, streaks bituminous shale on W.
side,
. Marl, Yellow, hard,
. Marl, Black, soft,
1. Clay shale, Black bituminous,
. Gypseous earth, yellow and white,
. Marl, hard,
ve soft,
. Clay shale, Grey,
. Clay and shale in bands,
. Marl,
78. Gypseous earth, Yellow,
79. Marl,
. Clay shale, Black and Blue, in bands,
. Clay, stony, Grey,
. Gypseous earth, Yellow,
. Limestone, fossiliferous, fossils small,
. Gypseous earth, white,
. Clay, stony, Bluish-gray,
3. Clay shale, Black,
. Limestone fossiliferous,
. Clay shale, Black,
89.
. Marly clay, Black,
. Marl, Light grey,
. Clay shale, ‘‘
Limestone,
nt Black,
of Grey,
ot Black,
Gypseous earth, Yellow,
Clay shale, Blue,
Limestone.
Clay shale, Blue,
Limestone,
H> vo wo eS Re
ix)
pt
v9
[May 6,
In.
rx
Sa cS @
oo
for)
et
LFWWHWAO FP PK WO KW DOW @®
w
(Sv)
S> Nile
Cc wm
1£70.] 423
No. : Description.
104. Marl, Grey,
105. Shale, Black,
106. Sandstone,
107. Marl,
108. Shale, Black,
109. Marl,
110. Shale, Bituminous,
111. Marl,
‘112. Limestone,
118, Marl,
114. Limestone,
115. Marl,
116. Shale, Black,
117. Coal and Shale,
118. Limestone,
118. Marl,
120. Limestone,
121. Marl,
122. Clay shale, variegated (Purple, Yellow, &c.)
128. Limestone, slightly fossiliferous,
124. Gypseous earth,
125. Limestone, slightly fossiliferous,
136. Marl, Bluish-black, hard,
127. Coal,
128. Gypseous earth,
129. Coal,
130. Limestone,
131. Marl and coal,
132. Limestone,
133. Shale, Bituminous, Blacix,
134. Marl, hard,
135. Shale, Black,
136. Marl.
137. Shale,
138. Limestone, very fossiliferous,
139. Clay shale, Blue, full of fossils,
140. Shale, Bituminous, Yellow and Black,
141. Limestone,
142. Shale, Slaty, Black,
AB ence Brown, full of fossils,
144. ‘ Blue,
145. Mari,
146. Gypseous earth,
147. Limestone, compact, streaks of a and coal, which run
out,
148. Shale, Slaty,
[Hayden.
Feet. In.
6
2
34
3
4
2
1
2
8
5
6
1
1
2
11
6
10
1 6
9
3
6
4
2
a
4
3
ze
1
2
(a
10
t
1
2
1
4
1
3
2 6
6
3
7
3
1
3 6
1 2
A ey
Hayden.1 . 424 [May 6,
No. Description. Réetaela
149. Bituminous shale and Brown coal, 8
150. Limestone, a
151. Clay shale, contains scales of white Gypseous earth, 1 10
152. Marl, hard, 3
158. Shale, fossiliferous, 2
154. Clay, hard, fossiliferous, 8
155. Clay shale, Black, 14
156. Clay, hard, fossiliferous, 4
157. Marl, Grey, 6
1582 so eeeblack, 2
159. Gypseous earth, White, 8
160. Clay, hard, 8
161. Marl, 1
162. Coal, Brown, 6
168. Clay, 2
164. Limestone, 3
165. Gypseous earth and shale, 2
166. Limestone, * 1 6
167. Sandstone, Yellow, 2
168. Limestone, 1
169. Gypseous earth and shale, 8
170. Limestone, 1
171. Clay shale, 3
172. Bituminous shale, 4
173. Limestone, 2
From No. 173 to western end of cut (which is made up of the reversed
strata, but not in regular order, some seem to be pinched out).
ORDER OF STRATA HEXPosED IN Rai~RoAD Curt No. 2.
(FROM EAST TO WEST.)
No Feet
1. Drift, steel colored, 15
2. Sandstone, White, 12
3 i Yellow, containing fragments, No. 2, 1.5
4. Shale, arenaceous, Brown, 9.5,
5. Sandstone, coarse, yellow, in layers, 1
6 sg fine, O8 in thin layers, 1.5
7 od coarse, containing irregular streaks of brown shale,
which contains coal in fragments, 2.5
8. of fine, white, 18
oO, “ brown, contains brown marks resembling bark and
branches, 20
10. we Steel grey, contains streaks of No. 9, 40
11. Shale, Black, and sandstone, steel grey, 1
12. Sandstone, Fine, white, 4
13. a in thin layers of variegated colors, 6
14, oe in broad ‘* ee a1
-
1870. ] 425 [Meek and Hayden.
Ne. Feet.
15. Sandstone, steel grey, 12
16. as in thin layers of variegated colors, i)
17. ie steel grey, in layers (contains streaks of coarser yel-
low in layers), Bi3)
18. Shale, Brown, 2
19. Sandstone, Yellow, 6
20. Shale, Brown, 1
21. Sandstone, Steel grey, 40
22. ge White, 6
23. Sandstone, Grey, 4
24. Shale, earthy, Black, 1
25. Gypseous earth, Yellow, 5
26. Shale, Black, 9)
27. Sandstone, contains shells in fragments, 15
28. Shale, Brown, 1
29. Clay, marly, 1.5
30. Sandstone, Yellow, 30
31. Shales and clays, earthy, 20
32. Shale, Brown,
38. Sandstone and Gypseous earth, 20
34. Shale, Bituminous, 1
35. Gypseous earth, 3
386. Sandstone, yellow, 10
Ste «white, 8
38. Marl, contains shells, 6
39. Gypseous earth, 2
To end of Cut, Shale, clay, and arenaceous Gypseous earth, 60
Length of cut, 440 feet.
A PRELIMINARY LisT oF FossiILs, COLLECTED BY Dr. HAYDEN in Coi1o-
RADO, New MExiIcoO AND CALIFORNIA, WITH BRIEF DESCRIPTIONS
OF A FEW OF THE NEw SPECIES.
By F. B. Mrrx.
Ltead before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1870.
SILURIAN SPECIES.
Camp Creek Canon, Volorado City.
1. Orthis Coloradoensis. Meek.
A small, compressed, nearly equivalve, subsemicircul species, much
widest on the hinge line, which is sometimes abruptly produced into late-
ral auricles. Dorsal valve less convex than the other, and haying a shal-
low, rather wide, mesial sinus, rapidly narrowing to the beak, which does
not project beyond the hinge line. Ventral valve depressed convex, with
cardinal area rather low, fiat, inclined backward, and sharply defined to
Hayden.] 426 [May 6,
the lateral extremities; beak not incurved. Surface of both valves orna-
mented with sharply defined, slightly curved, unequal radiating plica-
tions, and finer unequal strize, which, on the central regions of the valves,
are more or less gathered into five or six fascicles, the middle one of which
corresponds to the sinus in the other valve.
In its surface markings and sinuous dorsal valve, this species is much
like a form from the upper Lingula-flags of Wales, referred by Mr. David-
son, doubtfully, to O. lenticularis, Wahlenberg. It is much more ex-
tended on the hinge line, however, and has the radiating coste and striz
more strongly defined on the central region, and more nearly obsolete on
each side. From its affinities, it seems to be a Lower Silurian species, but
as no other fossils were found with it, its exact age may be somewhat
doubtful. Itis unlike any Devonian or Carboniferous form known to me.
Crater’s Falls.
2. Merista? (andetermined).
3. Ophileta complanata, Vanuxem, or a very closely allied species.
4. Bucanella nana, Meek.
Very small, and much like Bucania trilobatus, Hall, but much smaller,
with proportionally larger umbilicus, and its three or four volutions increas-
ing less rapidly in breadth, both transversely and in the direction of the
plane of the shell; while its middle lobe is proportionally narrower, and
embraced by each succeeding turn.
As these little shells want the remarkable expansion of the aperture
characterising Bucania, and show no traces of the mesial dorsal band, cor-
responding to a dorsal sinus in the lip; as in Bellerophon, they seem to me
to belong to an undescribed genus, for which I would propose the name
Bucanella.
5. Plewrotomaria? or Raphistoma. Merely indeterminable lenticular
casts.
6. Hndoceras. Small undt. sp.
CARBONIFEROUS SPECIES.
Moleen Station.
/
Fusulina cylindrica, Fischer ?
Syringopora (undetermined).
Campophyllum, like C. torquiuwm, Owen, sp. ~From the Upper Coal
Measure, along the Missouri, at Rock Bluff, and near there in Ne-
braska and Lowa.
Chaetetes (andt. massive sp).
Productus Nebrascensis, Owen.
Spirifer (Martinia) like S. planoconverus, Shumard. °
Bellerophon ?; a rude cast ; may be a Nautilus or Goniatite, as it is not
in a condition to show septa, if any exist.
GS) ke) I=
otk
.
st oS
Sangre de Christo Pass, South Colorado.
8. Productus semireticulatus, Mart. (sp. )
9. Productus punctatus, Martin, sp.
10. Athyris swbtilita, Hall (sp).
1870. ] 427 [Hayden.
Pecos Church, New Mexico.
11. Fragments crinoid columns.
12: “ Spiriferina.
13. Spirifer cameratus, Morton (fragments).
14. Productus. Fragments, like P. semiretuculatus.
Near Pecos R. N. M., Aug. 6, 1869.
15. Fenestella and Polypora. Fragments.
16. Athyris subtilita, Hall?
17. Aviculopecten (undt).
18. Aviculopecten occidentalis. Shumard.
19. Aviculopecten carbonarius, Stevens ?
20. Myalina Swallovi, McChesney.
21. Myalina subquadrata, Shumard.
22. Myalina perattenuata, M. & H.
23. Pleurophorus? (andetermined).
Ten miles South of Kosylowiski, New Mexico.
24. Henestella (undt).
20. Athyris subtilita, Hall.
26. Spiriferina Kentuckensts, Shumard.
27. Myalina Swallowt, McChesney.
28. Myalina (undetermined).
29. Avicula (fragments).
30. Pleurophorus angulatus, M. & W.
dl. Plewrotomaria ? (large cast).
Mora Creek, New Mexico.
32. Crinoid columns.
33. Productus nodosus, Newberry.
34. Athyris subtilita, Hall, sp.
35. Spiriferina Kentuckensis, Shumard.
36. Spirifer Rocky-montana, Marcou.
37. Spirifer comeratus, Morton.
Mora River, (1st ser. Card.)
38. Polypora, Fenestella, &c.
39. Synocladia (Septopora) Cestriensis, Prout, sp.(—=S. biserialis. Swallow. )
40. Productus semireticulatus, Mart. (may be, in part, var. of P. cosiatus),
41. Productus nodosus, Newb.
42. Athyris subtilita, Hall (sp).
43. Spiriferina Kentuckensis, Shumard.
44. Sptrifer cameratus, Morton.
45. Orthoceras (fragment).
Hot Springs, Salinas Creek, (Sept. 3d).
46. Campophyllum?
47. Crinoid columns.
48. Chetetes, undetermined; both massive and ramose.
49. Productus longispinus, Sow. (var. Wabashensis, N. & P.)
50. Productus nodosus, Newb.
A+)
Hayden.] 4.28 [May 6,
Santa Fe, New Mexico.
51. Hemipronites crassus, M. & H.
52. Productus longispinus, Sow.
58. Productus semireticulatus, Martin, sp.
54. Productus nodosus, Newb.
55. Productus, (undetermined, 2 or more sp.)
56. Productus Nebrascensis, Owen.
57, Orthis (undetermined).
58. Chonetes (undetermined).
59. Athyris subtilita, Hall (sp).
60. Spirifer cameratus, Morton.
61. Spirtifer Rocky-montana, Marcou.
62. Spiriferina Kentuckensis, Shumard.
Morav. City, Weben Mt.
63. Productus semireteculatus, Martin, sp.
Salt Lake.
64. Campophyllum. Mere fragments in hard, bluish-gray limestone.
Novre.—It is worthy of note that, although some of the species mentioned in the foregoing list
of Carboniferous fossils, are forms known to be common to the Lower Carboniferous and the Coal
Measures of the Western States, they are all, with one or two exceptions, so far as they have
been identified, forms common in the Coal-measures of Illinois, lowa, Kansas and Nebraska;
while not a single one of them is identical with any of the species peculiar to the Carboniferous
limestone series below the horizon of the Millstone-grit in the Western States, though about 14
of them seem to be peculiar to the Coal-measures there.
JURASSIC SPECIES.
Salinas Creek.—Hot Springs.
1. Cardinia? (undetermined). Q Very poorspecimens, not showing hinge.
- Look like some Jurassic forms, but only
2. Pholadomya (undt). § referred provisionally to that epoch.
Between Sacramento and Summit Station.
3. Undt. bivalve.
4, ‘ wnivalves, 2 forms.
5. Ammonites Nevadensis, Gabb.
These fragments belong to the group of discoid Liasic species, with
keeled and bisulcated periphery, and numerous very slender whorls, all
exposed on each side, and crossed by nearly or quite straight, simple,
smooth, regularly arranged costee. They belong to one or the other of Mr.
Hyatt’s genera—Discoceras, Arnioceras, or Ophioceras. Very probably of
Liasic age.
Weber Canon.
6. Bivalves. Mere undeterminabdle casts, in a matrix like that of beds in
the west, of Jurassic age.
Camo. (C. L. Morcham.)
7. Belemnites densus, M. & H.
1870.]
CDONnaAakwwHe
pt be
e+ ©
. Inoceramus problematicus, Schlot. (sp.)
. Inoceramus (undt. large gibbous distorted sp.)
. Ammonites (undt.) “2 or3
. Inoceramus problematicus, Schlot. (sp). Cret No. 3.
ce
429 [Hayden-
CRETACEOUS SPECIES.
Fountain Oreek, Colorado City, Colorado.
. Inoceramus Candt. sp.) Cret. No. 4
. Baculites compressus, Say.
. Buculites ovatus, Say.
. Scaphites Cheyennensis, Owen.
. Scaphites nodosus, Owen.
. Scaphites Conradi, Morton.!
(a3
ce
Ammonites placenta, De Kay.?
cw Ee oy
Ostrea congesta, Conrad.
Miser Station, U. P. R. R., Oct. 19th,
. Inoceramus (andt.) Cret. No. 4.
. Baculites ovatus, Say.
66
Near Canon City.
. Bivalve Candt. sp.) Cret. No. 4
. Bacuities ovatus, Say.
66
Medicine Bow Station.
. Inoceramus (undt). Large sp. No. 4 Cret.
Missicn Station, N. P. R. R.
. Inoceramus (andt. sp). Cret. No. 4.
. Ammonites (undt).
Caprina (undt).
Between Denver and Cheyenne.
. Inoceramus (large undt. sp).
Six miles east of Como Station, U. P. kh. R.
. Inoceramus (undt. sp).
Valley of Fountain Creek, Colorado.
. Anisomyon (andt. sp). No. 4 Cret.
Red. Between Hard Scrabble and St. Charles.
ce
Ostrea congesta, Conrad.
Medicine Bow River.
. Inoceramus fragilis, Hall and Meek. No. 2 Cret.
. Scaphites Warrenana, M. & W. a ras
Ammonties serrato-carinatus, Meek. Cret. No. 2.
Shell attaining a rather large size ; discoid, with periphery provided
with a very narrow, prominent, serrated mesial keel, including the siph-
uncle. Volutions increasing rather gradually in size, somewhat com-
1 T propose for the group of Scaphites, of which this may be regarded as the type, the sub-
generic name, Discoscaphites.
2This may be regarded as the type of a group, for which I propose the name Placentocerus.
A. P. S-—VOL. XI.—26E
Hayden.] 430 [May 6,
pressed laterally, and a little excavated, without being distinctly chan-
neled on each side of the ventral keel; inner ones but slightly embraced
by each succeeding turn, and consequently well exposed in the wide umbili-
cus. Surface ornamented with numerous unequal cost, some of the larger
of which bear a small, somewhat pinched node near the umbilicus, and two
closely approximated small nodes around the ventro-lateral margins,
where they all curve very strongly forward as they pass upon the periph-
ery; Spaces between each two of the large nodose cost, occupied by from
one to about three smaller ones. Septa unknown.
Although undoubtedly a Cretaceous species, this shell would rather
nearly resemble A. spinulatus, Brug., from the Lias, as illustrated by
d’Orbigny, if that species had from one to three smaller coste between
each two of its ribs, and its serrated keel more prominent. Our shell also
differs in the presence of a small node near the umbilicus, on each of the
larger cost. It is nota true Ammonite, according to the latest classifica-
tion of the Ammonitide.
Fort Bascom.
28. Gryphea navia, Conrad. Cret. No. 2 or 3.
Dodson’s Ranche.
29. Inoceramus problematicus, Schloth. (sp.) Cret. No. 2.
30. Cucullea, and other undt. bivalves. Me Se
31. Anchura, undt. ee “
Como—(C. L. Morchom).
32. Baculites ovatus, Say.
Near Coalville, in high hill, and near base of same.
33. Ostrea (undt. sp.)
34. Modiola Pedernalis, Reemn.
30. Nuculana.
36. Pleurotomaria ? ?
TERTIARY SPECIES.
Associated with Coal-bed, Bear River City.
1. Ostrea soleniscus, Meek.
Attaining a length of near one foot, and very narrow, or not more than
from one to two inches in breadth ; almost perfectly straight, excepting
the immediate beaks, which usually curve a little to the left ; sides nearly
straight and parallel. Upper valve flat ; lower moderately concave, and
like a little trough. Surface of both valves without radiating striz or
coste, or strong concentric markings. May be Cretaceous.
Limestone-hill, Bear River.
2. Unio vetustus, Meek.
3. Unio belliplicatus, Meek.
Differs from the last in having the posterior dorsal region marked with
about six to eight strong, regular, oblique plications, which begin very
small and crowded, just in front of the beaks, and radiate backward and
downward nearly to the posterior and postero-basal margins.
1870.] 431 [St. John.
4. Corbula (Azara) pyriformis, Meek.
5. ¢ if sf var. concentrica, Meek.
6. S se Hngelmanni, Meek.
7. Cyrena (Corbicula) Durkee, Meek.
Shell attaining a moderately large size ; subtrigonalin outline, thick and
strong, gibbous in the central and umbonal regions, and cuneate postero-
ventrally ; posterior side sloping above, and narrowly rounded below ;
beaks rather elevated, pointed, and curving inward and forward, so as
nearly to touch each other; posterior dorsal region much inflected from
the beaks down the slope nearly to the extremity of the valves, so as to
give the posterior umbonal slopes a prominently rounded appearance.
Surface with moderately distinct marks of growth.
Very closely allied to C. antiqua, Ferr., and C. Forbesi, Desh., from
Lignite Lower Eocene beds of the Paris Basin, but differs from both in
the details of the hinge, its lateral teeth being nearly or quite smooth, and
like the cardinal teeth, differing in other respects.
Named in honor of Mr. H. R. Durkee, who sent large collections of the
species to the Smithsonian Institution, from Wyoming.
8. Tiara humerosa, Meek.
Hik Station, Cent. Pac. R. R., beyond Salt Lake.
9. Spherium (two or more species, in highly bituminous shale).
Fort Bridger; Wyoming (McCarter).
Unio Haydeni, Meek.
Melaniu ( Gontobasis?) Simpsont, Meek.
Viviparus (two or more undt. species).
Planorbis spectabiles, Meek.
Cypris (undt.) In Oolitic ? matrix.
DESCRIPTIONS OF FOSSIL FISHES, FROM THE UPPER COAL
MEASURES OF NEBRASKA.
By Orestes Sr. Jonn.
Read by Dr. F. V. Hayden, before the American Philosophical Society,
May 6, 1870.
GrENus CLADODUS, Agassiz.
CLADODUS MORTIFER, N. and W.
Reference.—Newherry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. II, p. 22; Pl. I
fig. 5.
In the collection there are fragments of three individuals of the above
species—two showing the base with portions of the crown, and one pre-
serving about a third of the lower portion of the median cusp of a very
large specimen. There can be no doubt that the teeth before me are re-
ferable to the above species; but as they exhibit characters not shown in
the imperfect specimen figured and described by Messrs. Newberry and
Worthen, a short description of the Nebraska teeth is here appended.
6 9)
Hayden.] 43 A [May 6,
Description.—The base of the tooth is semi-elliptical in outline, ob-
tusely angular behind, with low protuberances rising at the angles upon
the superior inner margin, the outer margin interrupted by a broad, shal-
low sinus, at either angle of which, immediately beneath the smaller
lateral denticles, an obtuse node projects downward, similar to those upon
the upper opposite side of the root, the presence of which would seem to
have been designed to lend additional strength to the muscular attach-
ment of the tooth upon its cartilaginous support; median cone cervical,
regularly tapering, recurved, inequally compressed, with acute lateral
edges; strize sharp, interrupted, separated by wide plane spaces, less nu-
merous upon the strongly compressed anterior face, and confined to the
lower half of the cusp; lateral denticles two upon either side, strong, with
sharp cutting edges, and strong sharp strice or ridges.
Breadth of base twice its length, and equal to the entire height of the
tooth.
This species, so far as we at present know, is restricted to the Upper
Coal Measures. The single type specimen from which the species was
originally described, was found in the Upper Coal strata near Springfield,
Illinois; and in the prosecution of the geological survey of lowa, Dr.
White has brought to light the same species from the Upper Coal Mea-
sures of the southwestern portion of the State. Ihave also found this
species in the same formation at Manhattan, Kansas.
Compared with other species, the present one is probably more closely
related to C. mirabilis, Agassiz, from the mountain limestone, Ireland,
than with any other with which I am acquainted. It differs, however,
in being less robust, and more symmetrical in its general proportions.
Formation and Locality:—Upper Coal Measures, bed 6, Nebraska
City section, Nebraska.
Genus DIPLODUS, Agassiz.
DIPLODUS COMPRESSUs, Newb.
Reference.—Newberry, Geol. Illinois, Vol. IJ, p. 60; Pl. IV, fig. 2.
The single specimen Diplodus in the collection is probably referable to:
the form described by Dr. Newberry, under the name D. compressus.
Description.—The tooth is of medium size; base slightly narrower than
long, broadly rounded in front, and terminating in an obtuse point be-
hind, under surface slightly raised in the middle, anterior extremity pro-
duced into a large obtuse tubercle projecting slightly outward and down-
ward, with a flattened, sharply defined, obovate pad-like projection upon
the upper surface of the posterior extremity, marked upon either side by
a shallow groove terminating above in a little pit, and which is entirely
separated from the bases of the crown cusps,—in this latter respect, as
Dr. Newberry has remarked, offering marked contrast to D. gibbosus,
Agassiz, from the mountain limestone of Europe; cusps three, median
one rudimentary, slender, compressed, with finely crenulated lateral edges,
base well defined from the general surface and terminating in a slight
protuberance in the osseous root in front; the apices of the lateral cusps
43 (2)
1870.] vv [Hayden.
are broken away in the specimen before me; they are strongly compressed,
smooth, with sharp, beautifully annulated cutting edges, unequally di-
vergent; left one—viewed from before—most inclined from a vertical line
and broadest at base; transverse section of both lenticular.
In the collection of the State Geological Survey there is a tooth from
the Upper Coal Measures of southwestern Iowa, which is doubtless spe-
cifically identical with the Nebraska specimen, though possessing some
slight differences. In the lowa specimen the base has, as in the above
described tooth, a lozenge-shaped outline, its posterior extremity is more
abruptly truncated, and the pad-like elevation surmounting its surface is
ellipitical with its longer axis transverse to the root—in other respects the
same as the Nebraska tooth; viewed in front, the right lateral cone is the
strongest and most inclined laterally, and the bases on the anterior face
are swelled out, producing an angular ridge or buttress, which, however,
is lost both in the crown above and in the root below. These two individ-
uals are the only ones I have had opportunity to examine, and comparing
them with the excellent description and figures of D. latus, Newb., I can-
not doubt but that they are distinct from that species. The present spe-
cies is described from the Coal Measures of Ohio and southwestern
Indiana, the latter locality holding a stratigraphical position probably be-
low the Nebraska horizon.
Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures.
Genus PETALODUS, Agassiz.-
PETALODUS DESTRUCTOR, N. and W.
Reference.—Newberry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. II, p. 35; Pl.
Il, figs. 1-3.
The collection contains a large, almost perfect specimen of the above
species, which presents the following characters:
Description.—The crown is sharp, compressed, gradually thickening
toward the base; crest more or less gently arched from the lateral extremi-
ties, obtusely acuminate at the apex, and distinctly striated for the space
of a line or less, below which the striz are lost in the dense enamel-like
coating which covers both faces of the crown; posterior face of crown
rhombic, outline of base similar to that of crest, and bordered by five
strongly marked imbricating folds, which are conspicuously arched down-
wards in the middle and more or less deflected at the lateral extremities;
anterior face broadly rhomboidal, basal fold consisting of four or five ob-
scurely marked imbrications, gently curved downwards in the middle and
again at the lateral extremities; the upper edges of the imbricating folds
are minutely crenulated; root broad, compressed at the edges, rapidly
tapering from the lateral shoulders, and terminating in a blunt rounded
point. Upon much worn surfaces the croy'n is finely punctate.
Inches
meno th enecarlyescea eres as eco Seats ave pre
Greatest breadth of crown, about......:........... » Loo
Height of anterior face of crown,.......... aNeab Areibih 95
lei sinilor pPosteniorsaceynast esas eee Rote ARGS 1.28
Breadth of root across the lateral shoulders, about... 1.1
434 [May 6,
Hayden. |
This species bears a striking resemblance to Petalodus acwminatus,
Agassiz, from the mountain limestone of Europe; but, at the same time,
it possesses characters which readily distinguish it from that species. The
present species differs mainly in the more tapering root, the coronal band
upon the inner face is more strongly curved downwards in the middle,
and the crown is relatively higher. This species was originally described
from the Upper Coal Measures of central Illinois. I have seen a fine
specimen of the same species in the collections of the Museum at Cam-
bridge, from similar horizons in southwestern Indiaia, and also from the
Upper Coal Measures of central Iowa.
Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures.
Genus PERIPRISTIS, Agassiz (ms).
Gen. char.—Teeth small or of medium size, possessing the general char-
acteristics of the Petalodonts. Crown compressed, acuminate, serrate,
more or less curved laterally; extremities on the inner face connected by
a raised transverse shoulder, in which the crown terminates below and
which gives rise to a more or less profound. coronal cavity, Root well de-
veloped, entire, as in Petulodus. The surfaces of the crown and coronal
cavity are covered by a dense and highly polished layer of ganoine, which
forms an imbricated band at the base.
The above generic designation was suggested by Prof. Agassiz, for the
reception of a group of peculiar teeth, of which we have at least two rep-
resentative species—that of P. semicircularis being regarded as the type.
These forms certainly possess features which are widely at variance to the
typical species of the genus Ctenoptychius, as represented by CO. apicalis,
Agassiz; and in their description of the following species, Messrs. New-
berry and Worthen have also referred to the remarkable characters which
distinguish it from the typical species of Ctenoptychius. ‘The central cor-
onal cavity and the prominent transverse ridge in which the root is ter-
minated above on the posterior aspect, are peculiarities which do not
appear in any of the numerous other genera comprised in the groups of
Petalodonts.
The genus is Carboniferous, ranging from the Subearboniferous to the
Upper Coal Measures inclusive.
PERIPRISTIS SEMICIRCULARIS.
Ref. and Syn.—Ctenoptychius semicircularis, Newberry and Worthen,
Geol. Illinois, Vol. IJ, p. 72; Pl. 1V, Figs. 18, 18a, 18b.
Description.—Tooth small, broadly obovate in outline, crown much
compressed and strongly curved laterally, giving the crest a semicircular
outline viewed from above; cutting edge divided into seven to hine denti-
culations, the median lobe strangest, lateral ones gradually decreasing in
size toward the lateral extremities, where they are scarcely relieved from
the edge; the calcigerous tubes slightly diverge on nearing the edge, pro-
ducing a minute radiated striation of the denticulations like that observed
in the even crest of Petalodus, and when the crown is much worn the
surface is finely punctate; outer face of crown very low in proportion to
or
1870. 439 [ Hayden,
its breadth, base sharply beveled, coronal band narrow, imbrications very
obscure or obsolete, gently descending in the middle and slightly curved
downward at the lateral extremities; upon the posterior face the base of
the crown is defined by a conspicuous transverse ridge, which unites the
lateral extremities, and gives origin to a deep central coronal cavity; the
enamel-like coating lines the walls of the cavity, and spreading over the
gently and regularly downward arched transverse shoulder, it forms a thin
coronal band with one or two faint imbrications upon its external inflexed
border. The root is nearly as wide and much thicker than the crown,
tapering rapidly and rounded at its extremity; anterior side convex or
ridged, posterior face slightly concave transversely, both surfaces more or
roughened.
Inches.
Greatest length,......... LS CRED Boao ep eB mae haregees oo8 aut
Greatest breadth at the lateral angles of the crown,..... .72
Height of crown upon its anterior face,................ .382
Depth of the coronal cavity from the apex of the median
denticulation, about............. AH cares aioe 45
And from the transverse shoulder, about..... Site au Biolo eeu
The collection contains a perfect individual of the above described spe-
cies, from Bellvue, Nebraska, imbedded in a matrix of limestone, but ex-
hibiting the entire posterior aspect of the tooth without a blemish; and I
owe to the kindness of Mr. J. Sterling Morton, of Nebraska City, another
equally perfect specimen, obtained from a shaft excavation near the City,
which shows the anterior face of the tooth. IJ think there can be no ques-
tion as to their specific identity with the form described by Messrs. New-
berry and Worthen, from the Upper Coal Measures of Illinois.
J am acquainted with but a single other form to which this species
seems to be closely related, and that is from the mountain limestone of
Yorkshire, England. Specimens of the latter species are in the extensive
collections of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Cambridge. The
English specimens are, however, markedly specifically distinct from the
American; they are less curved laterally, and possess some sharp, thick
serrations on either side of the median cusp; the crown is relatively
higher, and the coronal band on the outer face is more deeply arched
downward in the middle, is wider and more distinctly imbricated; the
coronal cavity of the inner face is shallower, and the transverse shoulder
less prominent. Iam not aware that the English species is described.
Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures.
Genus CHOMATODUS, Agassiz.
CHOMATODUS ARCUATUS, N. sp.
A fragment of limestone from Bennet’s mill, near Nebraska City, pre-
serves the impression of a tooth of the genus Chomatodus, which seems
to be distinct from all the species of this genus heretofore described from
the Coal Measures and Subcarboniferous. The impression presents almost
the entire figure of the anterior face, from which the following description
is given:
,
Hayden. } 436 [May 6,
Deseription.—Tooth large, laterally elongated, moderately thick (?), ex-
tremities rounded; crown slightly arching from the lateral angles and
curved laterally, anterior face slightly convex vertically and rounded at
the crest, which was probably more or less obtuse; the anterior face of
the crown was apparently undulated along its crest, the obscure sulci may
have reached half the distance from the crest toward the base, and at the
median line a very shallow depression, about as high as it is wide at the
base, reaches upward about two-thirds the height of the crown, and seem
to interrupt the continuity of the basal folds, which, however, may not be
persistent or of specific importance; basal band narrow, linear, with two
or three imbricated folds, and parallel with the base of the root; surface
coarsely punctate. Root nearly as wide as the crown, its anterior face
deeply channeled by an angular transverse furrow, with a low ridge tra-
versing the lower portion from one extremity to the other, below which
it is beveled to the outer basal edge.
Inches.
Greatest breadth, about........ apap Ree eats Ne, Bop Weel le(XU)
JElEN@IMG, So50 booos easel SAE MERias ce aiteers ote TH Rot Lae Ge hts 50
Greatest height of anterior crown face,.........-..- 6) ott
In outline the above species bears a somewhat marked resemblance to
C. loriformis, N. and W., from the Keokuk limestone; but it differs from
that form in having the anterior face of the crown relatively higher, its
crest undulated and less parallel, and its bow-shaped outline viewed from
above, as well as in the more vertical concavity of the outer aspect of the
root. Itis not improbable that the basal angle of the posterior crown
face was quite prominent, and the vertical coneavity of that face of the
crown must have been considerable, judging from the arched character
of the opposite face, and in this respect somewhat resembling C. cinctus,
Agassiz, though the present species is not acuminate, the coronal band
not nearly as wide as in that species, and the tooth is not as thick and
massive.
Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures, Bennet’s mill, near Nebraska
City.
GENUS XYSTRODUS, Agassiz (Ms.)
XYSTRODUS? OCCIDENTALIS, nN. sp.
The collection affords an interesting little Deltoid tooth, which, I be-
lieve, has not been heretofore described. Unfortunately, the specimen is
quite imperfect, and, although its specific characters permit of deserip-
tion, its generic affinity remains somewhat in doubt.
Description.—Terminal tooth small, subtrigonal in outline, little nar-
rower than long, but slightly inrolled, flattened or gently depressed above;
the straight side is abruptly beveled, and from its edge the crown gently
inclines to the opposite oblique margin, which is very slightly raised; the
border extremity is thickened, forming a well defined continuous mar-
ginal border, which rapidly descends upon the inner side and gently slopes
into the shallow depressed space in front; toward the terminal extremity
1870.] 437 [HWayden.
the tooth becomes exceedingly thin, and in the specimen before me the
pointed end and outer margin are broken away. The superior surface is
coarsely punctate, as is also the straight articular margin. Distance be-
tween the angles of the broader extremities .35 inch.
The tooth above described possesses some characters which seem to
connect it more closely with Xystrodus, Agassiz, (MS.) than with any
other genus with which I am acquainted. Its general depressed tritu-
rating surface, and but slightly convoluted terminal extremity, are strongly
suggestive of this relation. The genus Xystrodus was established by
Prof. Agassiz, for the reception of Cochliodus striatus and two or more
other European species from the mountain limestone.
Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures.
DELTODUS? ANGULARIS, N. and W.
Ref.—Newberry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. II, p. 97; Pl. TX, Fig. 1.
Description.—Terminal tooth small, obliquely triangular in outline,
thick, but slightly inrolled; the broader extremity has a sigmoidal curva-
ture terminating in an acute point at the oblique posterior extremity;
straight side forming an angle of about 55° with the oblique margin, ab-
ruptly truncated, with a narrow sulcus about the middle of the beveled
articular face extending from the inner angle to the pointed end, below
which the tooth apparently expands into a thin narrow border similar to
that upon the opposite side; the articular margin is bordered by a promi-
nent flattened ridge which occupies about one-third the surface of the
crown and gradually narrowing as it approaches the terminal point; a
sharp, narrow keel rises from the oblique margin, rapidly converging and
decreasing in prominence toward the apical end, and separated from the
broad, flattened prominence of the straight margin by an equally broad,
deep, angular furrow; along the oblique side the tooth was slightly ex-
panded into a thin marginal border. The crown surface is beautifully
granulo-punctate, the broader extremity very faintly marked by longitu-
dinal sigmoid lines of growth, and the broad mesial depression is traversed
by very obscure undulations parallel with the oblique keel. Under sur-
face longitudinally undulated, smooth.
Length of tooth along the straight margin, about .52 inch.; greatest
distance between the acute and obtuse angles of the broader extremity,
48 inch.
The collection affords but a single example of this handsome form. The
specimen before me has a remarkable resemblance to the posterior teeth
of Deltoptychius Agassiz (M3.), founded upon Cochliodus acutus, of the
Irish mountain limestone, but we do not at present possess the materials
fully to demonstrate this identity. The Nebraska tooth, however, is evi-
dently identical with the form described by Messrs. Newberry and Wor-
then, from stratigraphically corresponding horizons in Illinois; and Dr.
White has discovered the same, or a very closely allied species, in the
Upper Coal Measures of southwestern Iowa.
Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures.
As 2, vO, Yo — Brin
Hayden. | 438 [May 20,
Stated Meeting, May 20, 1870,
Continued from page 380.
The following communication, descriptive of the recent
hail storm of the 8th inst., was received from Mr. Hector Orr,
of Philadelphia. Mr. Trego, Prof. Cresson, Dr. Coates, and
Dr. Horn described the storm as they saw it, and Judge Low-
rie compared its features with those of the great hail storm
at Pittsburg, which he saw Sep. 380, 1850.
PHILADELPHIA, May 17, 1870.
To the Secretary of the Amer. Phil. Soc.
Srr:—I have not seen any scientific account of the late fierce hail storm
of the 8th inst. in print. I noticed the following points of fact counected
with it.
The moon entered her first quarter at 10.34’ A. M. that day. Wind
from sunrise onward was brisk from N. E. till noon; a light sewd flying
quite low, some two points divergent from the surface current, and a
heavy upper stratum of cloud coming nearly from the South. Towards
noon the upper clouds showed signs of condensation, and by 2 P. Ms, the
various currents seemed to converge over the city. At this time the sun
and moon made nearly equal angles on either side of our meridian, both
planets being also well advanced towards the zenith. Rain began to fall
about 2.10’, the wind then passing across the pole from N. E. to N. W.
For several minutes previous to the fall and at its commencement, the
electrical discharges were violent and frequent.
The halting of the clouds directly over head happened within that pe-
riod of the day in which the sun develops the most heat, and the artificial
warmth always present over such a surface as that of the built-up part of
Philadelphia, joined to the solar influence, seemed to me sufficient to drive
the vapor suddenly upward almost perpendicularly. The concentration,
congelation and precipitation, were thus all embraced in a period of thirty
minutes.
The demolition of glass shows the wind to have come from the N. W.
until the storm reached the line of Sixth street, when it became West, and
thus continued to the Delaware. The original breeze entirely spent itself
during the fall, for during the last seconds of it the tendency of the stones
was slightly from the 8. E.—the storm centering itself on the’ city plot.
Yours, Very Respectfully,
HECTOR ORR.
Dr. Genth communicated a new discovery of rhodium gold
in San Domingo, and the results of recent examinations of
Q(
1570.] 439
[Genth.
dirt excavated in Philadelphia, holding silicate jems indica-
tive of the presence of gold.
Dr. Genth stated that, according to Del Rio, an alloy of gold and rho-
dium is found in Mexico, which contains from 34 to 43 per cent. of the
latter metal. This discovery has never been confirmed, and there is per-
haps no mineralogist living who ever has seen it. Some experiments
which he has lately made with residues from San Domingo gold leave very
little doubt as to the existence of this very interesting substance. Prof.
Gabb sent a lot of gold from San Domingo to Dr. Horn, from which the
latter dissolved the gold by aqua regia, and placed the very minute residue
into his hands! This consisted of scales of Iridosmine, a dull, yellowish
substance, in microscopic rounded and angular grains, and a silicate which
under the microscope appeared to be topaz. One of the yellowish grains,
on being flattened out in an agate mortar, assumed metallic lustre and a
pale yellow color. It was almost insoluble in aqua regia, but by treating
it for several days with a large excess of this solvent, it was finally brought
into solution. A. trace of chloride of ammonium was added, and the whole
evaporated to dryness and sufficiently heated to reduce the gold. Mixed
with this were microscopic reddish crystals, which were dissolved in boil-
ing water, filtered, the filtrate evaporated to dryness, and the residue
slightly heated, by which it ‘assumed a reddish brown color. On being
fused with bisulphate of potash it gave a slightly rose-colored mass, solu-
ble in water, and precipitated yellow by ammonia. From these reactions
there seems to be no doubt that the yellowish grains are rhodium-gold.
Dr. Horn states that the gold received from Prof. Gabb came from the
South side of the Island, and contained about 95 per cent. of gold. Dr.
Genth remarked that some of the gold from the North side is of a pecu-
liar nature; that several years ago a lot had been sold in this city and
New York to jewellers, who stated that they could not work it, as it con-
tained a substance unknown to them. It is very probable that this was
also rhodium-gold.
Dr. Genth communicated the result of panning sand and gravel of the
Delaware River, dug from a cellar at 106 Arch street. After removing
quartz and other light substances, a considerable quantity of heavy black
sand remained, which contained a little magnetite, but a large quantity
of titaniferous iron (menaccanite). These were treated and dissolved
with chlorhydric and sulphurie acid, which left the silicates clean enough
for further examination. These consisted principally of very brilliant
but microscopic zircons, some garnets and a few yellowish green grains
of the appearance of chrysolite. The observed mineral generally accom-
pany gold, but not a particle of the latter could be found. This negative
result, however, does not prove its absence, because the quantity of the
sands washed was not large and they did not come from the bed rock,
where they are always far richer.
Prof. Cope exhibited a portion of the dorsal spine of a
Michaux Legacy. ]
440) [May 20,
shark of the genus Asteracanthus of Agassiz, from New Jersey,
the first on record from the United States.* He regarded it
as confirmatory of his theory respecting the existence of beds
of Jurassic age in that State, though probably of small extent.
Prof. Cope made some observations on the genus Labides-
thes, Cope, which he had discovered in the Clinch River, E.
Tennessee; he said it was an Atherinid, having considerable
resemblance to the Cyprinodont genus Belonesox, having a
prolonged premaxillary beak.
Pending nominations Nos. 651 to 659 were read.
The Committee on the Michaux Legacy reported through
Mr. Price, that a site for the Oak Grove had been selected.
The Committee on the Michaux Legacy have the satisfaction to report,
that in pursuance of the arrangement made between this Society and the
Fairmount Park Commissioners, the latter have lost no time in selecting
a site for the Grove, in a central portion of the Park westward of the
Schuylkill, on the Landsdowne drive. It was selected with a view to
suitableness, in furnishing the kinds of soil required by oaks, both up-
land and low land; dry and moist. There were found already growing,
stately oaks of a century’s growth, to form at once an impressive scene of
shade and sunlight, to become more dense in foliage as the trees recently
planted and soon to be planted, shall grow and expand their shade. There
have been planted such additions to the previous varieties as could be had
neat this city. The annexed report of John C. Cresson, the Chief En-
gineer of the Fairmount Park, shows that seventeen different kinds of
oaks are now in the Michaux Grove; and the Park Commission have au-
thorized the importation from France of all other species that will live in
this climate; a resource to us for the grove, largely enriched by the scien-
tific labors and zeal of the Messieurs Michaux, who made known to the
world the great variety of oaks that were native to this country.
PHILADELPHIA, May 18th, 1870.
Hon. EH. K. Price,
Chairman of Committee on Michaux Legacy.
DEAR Str:—Under the arrangements made for carrying into effect the
Will of the late F. A. Michaux, a grove of oak trees, named the Michaux
Grove, has been established in Fairmount Park.
* In the Proceedings of the Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., No. 1, for Jan.-April, 1870, at page 13, there
subsequently appeared the report of a communication on Asterocanthus iderius, made by Dr.
Leidy, at a meeting held March 22, 1870.
1870. ] Aer [Michaux Legucy.
It now contains one hundred trees of the following species:
Quercus alba. Quer. fastigiata viridis. | Q. palustris.
Q. bicolor. Q. Fulhamensis. Q. phellos.
Q. cerris. | Q. laurifolia. (. prinus acuminata.
Q. coccinea. | Q. Leana. Q. robur.
Q. falcata. | Q. macrocarpa. Q. tinctoria.
Q. fastigiata. | Q. nigra.
In pursuance of authority given by the Park Commission, all other
species of Oaks that will live in this climate are to be imported from
abroad, chiefly from the nurseries of France.
Very Respectfully,
JNO. C. CRESSON,
Chief Engineer.
The following resolution was then passed :
Resolved, That Myr. Durand be respectfully requested to make known to
the widow of the late André Francois Michaux what has been done by
this Society, and the City of Philadelphia, through the Fairmount Park
Commissioners, towards the carrying out the views of this lover of sylvan
culture and benefactor of science, and towards holding his name in honor
before the American People and Scientific World.
The resignation of Dr. Wood from the Presidency of the
Society, on account of age and ill health, was presented by
Prof. Cresson. When, on motion of Dr. Rushenberger, it was
Resolved, That the Secretaries be requested to address a letter to Dr.
Wood, requesting him to withdraw his resignation, hoping that he will
consent to remain with us as President of the Society.
Mr. Fraley informed the Society that Provost Stillé had
been requested to deliver his obituary notice of Mr. Binney,
Jun., before an audience of the Union League. On motion of
Prof. Cresson, seconded by Dr. Coates, the MSS. was placed
at the disposal of the author.
And the Society was adjourned.
)
442 [June 17,
Stated Meeting, June 17, 1870.
Present 10 members.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice President, in the Chair.
Photographs for the Album were received from Prof. H. A.
Newton, of Yale, and Dr. Jarvis of Dorchester.
A letter announcing the decease of Madame Michaux was
read, and on motion, the following resolution was adopted
without debate.
Resolved, That M. Carlier be requested to have prepared the proper
procuration or Letter of Attorney from this Society to himself, to dispose
of the rentes or public loans standing in the name of this Society, being
the investment of the Michaux legacy, and to make deposit of the pro-
ceeds as the Society may hereafter direct; and also to instruct us as to
the manner of executing the procuration. ;
A letter withdrawing his resignation was received from the
President, Dr. Wood.
Donations for the Library were received from the Museum
at Beunos Ayres; the Carlo Alberto Observatory; Berlin
Academy; London Society of Antiquaries; Essex Institute ;
B. N. H.S. Edmund Quincy, of Dedham; the Albany State
Library; N. Y. Lyceum; Phil: Acad. of N. Sciences; Frank-
lin Institute; Medical News; Mr. Hector Orr; Dr. Brinton ;
the U.S. War Department, and the Editors of Nature.
Prof. Joseph Henry returned, by request of the late Mrs.
Bache, the MSS. correspondence of Prof. A. D. Bache relating
to the Society.
Dr. Brinton returned to the custody of the Society Dr. By-
ington’s MSS. Choctaw Grammar.
Prof. Frazer offered for publication in the Transactions a
chart exhibiting all the metallurgical processes now employed
at Friberg, in Germany, with descriptive text by Persifer
Frazer, Jun., which was referred to a Committee consisting of
Dr. Genth, Prof. Lesley and Dr. Bridges.
Prof. Cope communicated for publication in the Proceedings
a paper entitled: A partial synopsis of the Ichthyology of
North Carolina, (see next number of Proceedings) which was
referred to the Secretaries.
9
. 1870.] 445 [Genth.
Dr. Genth made some remarks upon a new meteorite from
North Curolina, which he desired to be considered prelimi-
nary to a description and full analysis of the same. Prof:
Kerr had forwarded photographs of the mass.
Dr. Genth showed also, specimens of metallic lead and me-
tallic iron from Gold tailings on Camp Creek, Montana Terri-
tory. The place, circumstances, absence of all meteoric indi-
‘cations, and presence of gold in the lead, support the view
that we have here a genuine discovery of lead and iron ina
state of nature.
Dr. Genth showed photographs of a new meteoric iron, weighing about
twenty pounds, which was found on a small mount in Rockingham Co.,
N. C.; he made some preliminary remarks on a fragment of the same,
which he received from Prof. W. C. Kerr, State Geologist of N.C. The
iron is coated with a crust of hydrated sesquioxide of iron. A polished
portion of it, after etching with dilute nitric acid, developed the Widmann-
staedtean figures, and showed a very remarkable structure of the iron. It
is composed of three different kinds of iron; one portion of it is quite
homogeneous, and has a very fine granular structure ; if, however, the
light is reflected in different directions it shows a peculiar glistening, and,
very faintly, lines intersecting at angles of about 60° and 120° ; this same
iron runs into bands of not over 0.5™™ diameter, which, at another por-
tion of the iron, intersect at angles of about 60. The space between the
bands is filled with an iron presenting a reticulated structure. Dissemi-
nated throughout the homogeneous iron are crystals of rhabdite, but few
only show a regular arrangement. A preliminary analysis gave :
Wir OMe Pc ieee reeves aah oaais as 90.41 per cent.
INiekela(Colvallit) terre ee Sho a semi ae
COP Pere. fae heart es wees 0.11 2
ISRO ep ermretamiarccdoiio maces A Oy. 86 )
INickell(Cobalo merece eee OFB are Ges eos phide: Insoluble
in chlorhydric acid.
JPNOS MINGUS, cocoacsoscodsesea Odense: )
traces of a quartz-like mineral.
A sulphide of iron of a pale, brass yellow color, and great hardness—
probably pyrite is mixed with the iron. Dr. Genth intends to give a fuller
account of this interesting meteorite at a future day.
Dr. Genth also showed specimens of native tron and native lead from
the bed-rock of gold-placers, and covered with about six feet of gravel, at
Camp Creek, Montana Territory, which have been discovered there by
Mr. P. Knabe, who kindly communicated them.
The native iron is found in small, angular fragments, but slightly
coated with rust; the largest which he has seen is about 0.5 inch in
length. Etching with dilute nitric acid does not develop any Widmann-
staedtean figures, but a finely granular structure. Mr. Knabe examined
444 [June 17,
Cope. ]
it for nickel and cobalt with negative results. Associated with the iron
is native lead, in irregularly shaped rounded and flattened pieces, from
the size of a pin’s head to about 0.5 inch in diameter. The lead is coated
with a crystalline crust of massicot, of a sulphur yellow to reddish yellow
color ; some pieces also show very brilliant but microscopic crystals, which
may be cerussite. Acetic acid dissolves this massicot, and leaves the
metallic lead, which then shows its crystalline structure. A small piece,
on dissolving it in nitric acid, left an appreciable quantity of gold, but the
solution contained no silver.
Prof. Cope made some observations on the Reptilia of the
Triassic formations of the Atlantic region of the United
States. He observed that thirteen species had been described
and referred to ten genera. None of these had been referred
by their describers to their appropriate orders, and he had
undertaken an investigation of them, having for its object
such reference, as well as the determination of the closer
affinities.
Three of the species he proved to be Dinosauria. He had already as-
signed Megadactylus and Bathygnathus to this division, and would now
add Clepsysaurus, Lea, from evidence derived from an ischium discovered
among the original remains. It resembled that of Megadactylus.
Of the remaining ten species, he was satisfied that those referred to
Paleosaurus by Emmons, as well as the Compsosaurus and Eurydorus,
were founded on posterior teeth of Belodonts. He also said that nothing
was to be found in the descriptions of Rhytidodon, Emmons, and Omo-
saurus, Leidy, to distinguish them from Belodon, to which genus he was
inclined to refer the remains which had fallen under his observation.
Thus, three species were certainly to be distinguished from the ten, viz:
Belodon carolinensis, Emm., (Rhytidodon, Emm., ? Centemodon sulcatus,
Lea); Belodon priseus, Leidy, (Palwosaurus carolinensis, Emm., ? Comp-
sosuurus priscus, Leidy, Clepsysaurus pennsyloanicus in part, Emmons);
Belodon leaii, Emmons, (Clepsyswurus, Lea). The above were not as-
serted to belong to the same genus without doubt, but that evidence to
distinguish them was yet wanting. He added a fourth species, discovered
by Chas. M. Wheatley, in the Triassic tracks of Phcenixville, Pennsyl-
vania, which was apparently distinct from the above, and of larger size.
The remains preserved were dorsal, lumbar and caudal vertebra, with
costal and abdominal ribs; left femur and fibula nearly perfect; portion of
pelvis; ungueal and chevron bones, etc. The femur measured thirteen
inches in length, and the lumbar vertebra exhibited slender cylindric
diapophyses, which bore ribs to the sacrum. This reptile was named
Belodon lepturus, and was estimated to have attained a length of about
twelve feet.
Eleven of the thirteen species being thus disposed of, there remained
fre
1870. 445 [Cope.
the Dicynodon rosmarus, Cope, and Rhabdopelix longispinis, Cope. The
latter he had formerly suspected to be a Pterosaurian, but he thought it
more likely that it would turn out to be a Rhynchocephalian reptile.
Ile called attention to four remarkable vertebre from the Cretaceous
green sand of New Jersey, which were characterized by the possession of
enormous pneumatic foramina. The articular extremities of the extremi-
ties were rugose, and with scarcely any dense layer, so that they probably
belonged to an immature animal, and were to be referred to the sacral or
lumbar regions. If they belonged to the latter, they indicated a codssifi-
cation similar to that seen in many birds. That they were not dorsals
is indicated by the lack of capitular articulations. The pneumatic foram-
ina occupied half of the centrum along its middle, leaving abutments fore
and aft, for the support of the neural arch, which was lost in each one.
There were no diapophyses. The neural canal presented a deepening and
compression at the middle of the centrum, and a rising and expansion
near the articulations. Centra much compressed medially, as well as
contracted upwards; articular extremity subtriangular, with rounded
angles and notch for neural canal one-third its vertical diameter. Can-
cellous tissue, coarse, but much finer than in Lielaps ; the dense layer thin.
The total length of the four, is seventeen and a half inches, the shortest
measuring four ; the other three, four and a half inches in length. The
complete number of six would have measured six inches in length.
These vertebree had been described as the sacrals of a young Hadro-
saurus by Leidy (Cretaceous Reptiles, U. 5., p. 100), but there are several
reasons for dissenting from this conclusion. The pneumatic foramina of
the sacral nerves, which, however, in known Reptiles and Birds, issue
between the neural arches, not beneath them, not only in the sacral, but in
the lumbar and other vertebrae. The reasons for questioning their perti-
nence to Hadrosaurus were, first: the genus Megadactylus presents
similar large pneumatic foramina, and they occur in both the caudal and
lumbar vertebre ; the lumbar and caudal vertebrae of two species of
Hadrosaurus are known, and do not present any pneumatic foramina
whatever, which would scarcely be the case were the present vertebre
sacrals of Hadrosaurus. Second: they form too long a series for the
known ilium of Hadrosaurus. From the approximation of the facets for
the sacral diapophyses in the type specimens of H. foulkei, it would ap-
pear that those vertebre had somewhat the shortened form of the caudals.
Yet the present animal appears to be a young one. Third: the structure
is-in several respects more Megalosaurian than Iguanodontine. Thus the
alternate enlargement and contraction of the neural canal is seen in Paleo-
saurus and Clepsysaurus ; the neural arches appear to have alternated
above the articulations of the centra. The pneumatic foramina exist in
Leelaps, but of reduced dimensions.
In respect to the presence of the foramina just mentioned, there is a
resemblance to the Ornithopsis hulkei, recently discovered by Seeley,
though here the comparison ends. In that form the cancellous texture
of the centrum is extremely open and light, and composed ‘‘of enormous
A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—T3£
Cope.] 446 [June 17,
honeycomb-like cells of irregular polygonal form—for the most part long
in the direction of the length of the centrum, and divided by exceedingly
thin and compact films of bone,’’ ete. The structure in the subject of
the above description is spongy and light, but much closer. Leelaps offers
a much closer resemblance to Ornithopsis in its exceedingly coarse struc-
ture; while in Megadactylus, lumbar vertebre appear to be absolutely
hollow. ;
Had Dr. Seeley been acquainted with these genera, he would
probably have referred Ornithopsis to the Goniopod Dinosauria, rather
than to the Ornithosauria. Prof. Cope added that he had already (Aug.
1869, ) published the view that the bone described previously as a quad-
ratum of Iguanodon, (the type of Seeley’s Ornithopsis), was evidently not
2 cranial bone, and that he had always supposed it to.be a vertebra.
The reptile represented by the above vertebrae was named Pnewmato
arthrus peloreus; the possibility of its being found to be Ornithotarsus
being entertained, though the near resemblance of the bones to those of
a tortoise could not be overlooked. The specimens were discovered by
Dr. John H. Slack, in Monmouth Co., N. J.
Prof. Cope exhibited also seven Australian skulls and one
Maori skull, probably the first seen here.
Pending nominations, Nos. 651 to 659 were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, July 15, 1870.
Present, four members.
Dr. GENTH in the Chair.
Letters of envoi were received from various correspond-
ents.
Letters of acknowledgement for the receipt of No. 83 were
received from the Essex and Smithsonian Institutes, Massa-
chusetts, New York, New Jersey, and Georgia Historical So-
cieties, Cambridge Museum, and New York Lyceum; Nos.
77 to 80, R. Danish Society; 77 and XIII. 2, Zool. Bot. Soe.,
Vienna; 78—80, Physical Society, Berlin; 76—80, Nassau,
N. H. Association.
Donations for the Library were received from the Acade-
mies at St. Petersburgh, Berlin, and San Francisco; the Insti-
1870. ] ALT
tutes at Salem, Albany, Philadelphia, Baltimore and Wash-
ington; the Societies at Kénigsberg, Vienna (Zool. Bot. and
Anthropological), Leipsig (P. Jablon. and R. Saxon), Gorlitz,
Berlin (Geological, Physical and Horticultural,) Bremen,
Wiesbaden, Bonn, Strasbourg, Bordeaux, London (R. Astro-
nomical and Chemical), and Leeds; the Observatories at Mu-
nich, Montsouris and Oxford; the Universities at Licge; the
Museums at Salisbury and Cambridge, Mass.; the Italian Geo-
logical Commission; MM. Manjini and Denra; American
Medical Journal; Messrs. Elihu Thompson and A. Gebow ; the
International Exposition Commission at Washington, and the
editors of ‘“ NaturE;” and the Chinese Recorder at Foo-
chow. .
The death of Sir James Clark, of London, aged 82, was
announced by the Secretary:
The committee to which was referred the Chart of Frei-
berg processes, by Percifer Frazer, Jr., reported in favor of
its publication in the’ Transactions, which was so ordered.
Prof. Cope communicated for the Proceedings, a Register of
Meteorological Observations made at Bois Chéne, near Port
au Prince, Hayti, by Prof. A. Ackerman, Phys. Sciences
National Museum.
Communications respecting the Michaux Legacy, and
respecting Mr. Peale’s Cabinet of Antiquities, were made to
the meeting.
Nominations Nos. 651, 652, 654, 655 were postponed.
The ballot boxes being examined by the presiding officer,
the following persons were declared duly elected members of
the Society:
Dr. C. W. Boekh, of Christiana, Norway.
Dr. Wm. Pepper,of Philadelphia.
Rd. E. R. Beadle, of Philadelphia.
And the Society was adjourned.
June 7, 1870.] 448 [Cope.
A PARTIAL SYNOPSIS OF THE FISHES OF THE FRESH
WATERS OF NORTH CAROLINA.
By Epw. D. Corr. A.M.
Read before the Amer. Philosophical Society, June %, 1870.
The material on which the present investigation is based was, for the
most part, procured by the writer during the autumn of 1869. A journey
from the Cumberland Mountains of Tennessee to the ocean, offered
opportunity for making collections in the waters of five hydrographic
basins, viz. : those of the Cumberland, Tennessee, Catawba, Yadkin and
Neuse. The streams of the Tennessee examined were the Clinch and
French Broad ; the former in a tributary called Coal Creek, in Anderson
Co., Tenn.; the latter at various points, both in the mountainous part of
its course, and in the elevated and flat valley of Henderson Co., where it
takes its rise. A small seine with fine meshes, kindly lent me by the ad-
ministration of the Smithsonian Institution, was used in the smaller
streams; and fishermen’s apparatuses, especially weir traps, furnished
most of the species inhabiting the river channels. Passing many of the
latter at the time of year when the migratory fishes were descending, the
writer was able to examine and procure them in great numbers. The
opportunity of seeing fishes in life, it is believed, is no small aid to their
proper specific determination. ;
ACANTHOPTERYGII.
PERCA, Linn.
1. PERCA FLAVESCENS, Cuv.
Neuse River.
j ROCCUS, Gill.
2. Roccus LINEATUS, Bloch.
Neuse River.
STIZOSTEDIUM, Raf.
8. STIZOSTEDIUM AMERICANUM, C. Y.
This is the largest Percoid of the Western waters, occasionally attain-
ing a weight of 35 lbs.: no specimen of more than 10 lb. came under my
observation. It loves the most boisterous and rapid streams, ascending
them to near their sources, having much the manners, and haunting the
same waters as the trout, but of much more voracious habits. Its swift-
ness enables it to take the black perch (Micopterus fasciatus) with ease,
though that fish is, after it, much the most powerful swimmer of the
rivers it inhabits. I took two from the stomach of a Lucioperca of eight
pounds, one of which weighed 24 lbs. Suckers are used as bait in taking
them by hook ; but the mode in which large specimens are most readily
taken is by shooting. When the Lucioperca has gorged himself, he seeks ~
some shallow bayou, and lies inasluggish state, digesting his meal. Then
449 [June 7,
Cope. ]
the gun-fisherman, concealed in a tree close by, makes sure of him. It is
the most valued food-fish of the French Broad, the flesh being very tender
as well as rich.
Without the opercular armature of the Percae, its chief defence is in
its numerous and powerful canine teeth, with which it makes serious
wounds on the hands of the unwary fisherman. The common name on the
French Broad is ‘‘Jack.”’
4, STIZOSTEDIUM SALMONEUM, Raf.
This fine species was described to me as an inhabitant of the French
Broad, though I did not see it. As elsewhere, it is called Salmon. <A
species of this genus occurs also in the Neuse.
ETHEOSTOMA, Raf.
5. ETHEOSTOMA NEVISENSE, Cope.
Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1870, p. 261.
Turbulent waters of the Neuse River.
6. ETHEOSTOMA MACULATUM, Girard.
Putnam Bell. Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, No. I. Cope. Proc. Am.
Phil. Soc., 1870, 262. Hadropterus maculatus, Girard. Proc. A. N. §,
Phil., 1859, 100.
- Abundant in the rapid waters of Buck Creek, which empties into the Ca-
tawba, in Marion Co., N. Ca.
HYPOHOMUS, Cope.
Cottogaster, Cope, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. 1869, 210, not of
Putnam.
The name Cottogaster, my friend Prof. Putnam informs me, was ap-
plied to species of the type of Boleosoma. It is, therefore, inapplicable
to the C. aurantiacus, to which I apply the above generic name. The
characters of the genus have been pointed out as above cited. They are
those of Etheostoma, excepting the median ventral series of shields, which
are here wanting.
7. HyPoHOMUS AURANTIACUS, Cope.
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 211.
One specimen from the French Broad River, in. Madison Co., North
Carolina, measuring 4 inches 8 lines in length, more than twice the size
of the types, and larger than any species of the Etheostomine group, ex-
cepting Percina caprodes. Color in life bright yellow, with a black lateral
band, and a few brown spots on each side of the dorsal fin.
POECILICTHYS, Agass.
8. POECILICHTHYS VITREUS, Cope.
Proceed. Am. Phil. Soc. 1870, 253.
This species is quite translucent in life. The only specimen taken was
1870. ] 450
(Cope.
adult, and exhibited ovaries well filled with well developed ova. Seven
green dorsal spots, and eight or nine linear spots on the sides, of the same
color.
Walnut Creek, a tributary of the Neuse River.
9. POECILICTHYS FLABELLATUS, Raf.
Cope, Jour. A. N. Sci., Phil., 1868, 213. Catonotus, Agass., Putn.
Bull. M. C. Zool., I.
Var. Cope, Proc. Am. Phil. Soce., 1870, 263.
From the Catawba River.
10. PokCILICHTHYS VULNERATUS, Cope.
Proceed. Am. Phil. Soc., 1870, 266.
A beautiful species from the Warm Springs Creek, Madison Co., N. Ca.,
a tributary of the French Broad River.
11. PoECILICHTHYS RUFILINEATUS, Cope.
Loe. cit., 267.
Abundant in the same localities as the last, and one of the most ornate
species of the genus.
12. PoECILICHTHYS ZONALIS, Cope.
Jour. Acad. Nat: Sci., Phil., 1868, 212, Tab. xxiv., f. 1.
French Broad River.
: BOLEOSOMA, DeKay. —
Cope, Proc. A. P. Soc., 1870, 268.
18. BoLEOSOMA EFFULGENS, Girard.
Cope, l.c. Arlina offulgens, Girard. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil.,
1859, 64.
Deep River, Guilford Co., North Carolina, from Samuel C, Collins.
14. BoLEOSOMA MACULATICEPS, Cope.
Proc. A. P. Soe., 1870, 269.
Upper waters of the Catawba River.
HYOSTOMA, Agass.
Cope, Jour. A. N. Sei., Phil., 1868, 214
15. HyostomMa CyMATOGRAMMUM, Abbott.
French Broad River.
MICROPTERUS, Lace.
Grystes, Cuy. Val.
16. Mrcroprerus FascratTus, DeKay.
Apparently not found east of the great Water Shed: I only obtained
it in the state in the French Broad. Also from the Clinch and the Cum-
berland.
451 [June 7,
Cope.]
17. MicrorprERUS NIGRICANS, Cuv.
The green bass is abundant in all the rivers of the State. I have it from
the Neuse, Yadkin, Catawba, upper and lower French Broad, and from
the Clinch in Tennessee. Specimens from the Neuse and from near Nor-
folk, Virginia, six in number, differ from those of the other rivers, in
having a deeper body, and generally longer and more prominent man-
dible. The depth enters the length 2.75 times ; in the more western forms
always 3.25 times ; in the former it is greater than the length of the head,
in the latter it is considerably less. Other differences are not discoverable
and I regard it as a marked variety only.
POMOXYS, Raf., Agass.
18. PomMoxys HEXACANTHUS, C. V.
Neuse River.
Numerous specimens of this species and the Pomoxys storerius from
Leavenworth, on the Missouri River, from Saml. H. Edge.
CENTRARCHUS, ©. V.
19. CENTRARCHUS IRIDEUS, Cuv., Val.
Vol. III., p. 89, Holbrook Ichth. 8. Ca., 18, Tab. III., fig. 1.
From the Neuse River. A specimen presenting an additional dorsal
and anal ray, as compared with the description of Cuvier and Valenci-
ennes ; but Holbrook adds one to the anal spines, thus agreeing with
anal formula D. xii., 14, A. viii., 15. Of a brilliant pea green in life,
without ocellus on second dorsal, as described by the above authors. Soft
dorsal and anal; with narrow, blackish bars. Not probably specifically
distinct from specimens in Mus. A. N. Sci., from South Carolina.
AMBLOPLITES, Raf., Agass.
20. AMBLOPLITES RUPESTRIS, Raf.
Centrarchus wneus, Cuv. Val.
Abundant in the French Broad and head of Cumberland ; none found
east of the Alleghenies.
CHA NOBRYTTUS, Gill.
This genus, for which I have reserved the above name, is equally allied
to Lepomis and Amobloplites. It agrees with the first in its entire and
rather produced operculum, and three anal spines, but differs materially
in possessing the additional maxillary bone of the latter, Centrarchus, Po-
moxys, etc. Gill defined it in consequence of its palatine and lingual den-
tition, characters which exhibit various grades of imperfection to entire
extinction in the typical Lepomes. Hence, in my view of fresh water
fishes from the Allegheny region of southwest Virginia, I united Lepomis,
Bryttus, and Chenobryttus. I now discover the importance of the
presence or absence of the additional maxillary bone, which, with the
is A5Y
1870.] 452 [Cope.
emargination of the operculum previously pointed out, enables me to
define the genera more satisfactorily than my predecessors. Thus they
may be arranged in four groups.
I. Operculum emarginate ; a supernumerary maxillary bone :—Microp-
terus, Ambloplites, Pomoxys, Centrarchus, Acantharchus, Enneacanthus
(?) Hemioplites.
Il. Opereulum emarginated; no supernumerary maxillary :— Meso-
gonistius.
III. Operculum entire, produced ; an additional bone attached to the
maxillary:—Chenobryttus.
TV. Operculum as last ; no ‘supernumerary maxillary :— Lepomis,
Pomotis.
21. CHHNOBRYTTUS GILLII, Cope.
Lepomis gitlit, Cope. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1868, 225.
This species is exceedingly common in all the streams of North Caro-
lina east of the Allegheny Mountains. It does not occur in the French
Broad. All the specimens have clouded markings on the sides, which in
the young, are broad, distinct olive-brown cross-bands, which embrace
pale spots, giving a chain-like pattern. Fins blackish, cross-barred ; four
brown bands radiating backwards from orbit. Iris bright red. The spe-
cies is rarely seen more than five inches long, and prefers rather still waters.
It bites the hook very readily, and is called the red-eyed bream on the
Catawba.
The (0. mineopas, Cope, possesses the additional maxillary, and I have
no doubt the C. melanops (Gill’s type), andthe C. charybdis, Cope, though
I have not been able to verify it on the latter.
ENNEACANTHUS, Gill.
Jour. A. N. Sci. Phil, 1868, 218.
22. ENNEACANTHUS GUTTATUS, Morris.
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1858, p. 3.
Abundant in the Neuse River in still water, as in Virginia and New
Jersey.
LEPOMIS, Raf.
93. Lepomis ruBRIcAuDA, Holbr.
This marked species, the southern representative of the ZL. appendix
is very common in the hydrographic basins of the Catawba, Yadkin and
Neuse. In life the second dorsal and caudal fins are red, and there isa bay
spot at the base of each scale forming interrupted stripes. Flap of oper-
culum black, the continuation of a dark shade from the preoperculum,
which is bordered above and below by a blueband ; two blue lines on
operculum below the latter.
24. LerpomIs MEGALOTIS, Raf.
LL. incisor Cuv. Val.
From the upper waters of the French broad.
1870. ] £53 BOOP:
There are several species allied to the present, which may be distin-
guished, as follows :
Scales 4—35—11.
Dorsal spines short, longest equal muzzle and orbit to pupil ; mucous
cavities small ; eye four times in head with long flap, which is black,
red bordered below and behind ; anal spine reaching base last anal ray.
LL. PELTASTES.
Seales 5-7—364A7—2-I4.
- Spines of dorsal shorter, equalling muzzle and half orbit ; third spine
of anal not reaching base of last anal ray ; ear flap long, blue edged be-
low ; pectoral scales large; a spot on second dorsal. L. MEGALOTIS.
Spines ete., as above ; pectoral scales small, no spot on second dorsal.
L. c. 41—4. L. NITIDUS.
Spines longer than the above, dorsal equal muzzle and orbit .5 or head ;
anal reaching base last ray ; opercular flap very small not lighter mar
gined ; spot on second dorsal.
L. ¢. 36—9. L. NOTATUS.
Spines longest, more than muzzle and orbit ; anal extending beyond
last anal ray ; ear flap very short, not light margined ; spot on second
dorsal. lL. sPECIOsus*
Eye .83 of head; scales 7—47; spines long, equal muzzle and orbit ;
anal ray extending beyond base last anal; opercular flap very small ; spot
on second dorsal. L. PURPURESCENS.
Lepomis nitidus, Wirtland.:
LL. megalotis, var. B. Cope Journ. A. N. Sci., Phila., 1865, p. 220.
Common in Coal Creek a tributary of the Clinch River ; not seen in
North Carolina.
25. Lepomis NoTaTus, Agass.
Amer. Journ. Sci. Arts, XVII, 302.
This species is allied to the L. ardesiacus, Cope (1. ¢., p. 222), but its
scales are larger, there being but 36—9 on the lateral line, and 13 below
it, while there are 45, with 17 below, in the latter. The eye is also larger,
entering the head only three times, while it is measured four times by the
same in on L. ardestacus of the same size.
The general form is elongate oval, the front of dorsal region steep, the
muzzle conic and not obtuse. Eye large and round, its diameter measur-
ing muzzle and half itself, and .2 more than interorbital width : R. D. X.
11, A. III. 10, Depth 2.33 times in length to end of lateral line. Four
rows scales on cheek ; no palatine teeth. Scales above lateral line, five
large series and one small one. Length 3.5 inches. Color uniform green-
ish brown, below yellowish ; no band. No red on the very small opercular
spot. Fins not cross-barred
Very abundant in the upper French Broad River, North Carolina, and
the tributaries of the Clinch, East Tennessee.
*LEPOMIS SPECIOSUS, Girard. Z. heros Girard. L. longispini:, Cope, Journ. A. N. Sci., 1868, 220:
from Texas.
A. P. 8.—VOL. XI.—74n
aA
Cope.] 454 [June 7,
This is probably Agassiz species as above, but the orange on the opercu-
lar flap scarcely extends posterior to the black spot, and is easily lost
sight of in spirits.
26. LEPOMIS PURPURESCENS, Cope.
Species nova.
This is an elevated compressed fish, with very small or rudimental
opecular flap, like the L. notatus, L. ardesiacus and L. nephelus. It is
similar to the first, and different from the L. ardesiacus in its large eye,
which enters the head scarcely three times, and the interorbital width .75
times, but agrees with the latter in its small numerous scales. Thus
there are six rows of equal scales above the lateral line, and one small one,
and 47 on the lateral line and 13 below it; (in the Z. ardesiacus there are
17 below it.) Depth 2.25 to 2.33 in length (exclus. caudal fin.) The
spinous rays of this fish are nearly as long as in the JL. speciosus. The
caudal fin is longer than usual, equalling at least, the head. Length of
latter, three times in length of body + head. Six rows scales on the cheek.
Length three inches. Mucous cavities small. 2
Color in life a pale silvery lilac, darkest in four or five vertical shades
across the sides, which disappear in alcohol. Fins unicolor except dark
shades on middle of anal, and second dorsal and edge of caudal, with a
black spot at lower posterior portion of second dorsal.
Abundant in a tributary of the Yadkin River in Roane County, North
Carolina.
Lepomis peltastes, Cope.
A deep stout species of small size, distinguished for its large scales, short
spines and bright color; mucous caverns small. Hye large, equal muzzle,
four times in length of head with long opercular flap, just equal interorbital
width. Head with flap 2.5 times in length; depth 2.1 times in same. Cau-
dal fin and peduncle considerably more than one-third the length. Longest
dorsal spine equal from end muzzle to middle of pupil; longest anal
reaching base last anal ray.
Five rows scales on cheek, three large and two small rows above lateral
line ; those of middle of sides larger than those on lower part. The pro-
tile is regularly descending to end of muzzle; frout but little concave.
Radii D. X. 11. A. III. 10. Length three inches.
Color above golden brown, sides and belly golden, top of head blackish.
Large black opercular spot, red margined below and behind. I dorsal fin
blackish, II D. blackish at base orange above, anal similar, caudal blackish,
ventrals more or less black. The pectoral fins do not quite reach the
base of the anal fin.
This sp2cies is from the Huron River, Michigan, whence it was procured
through the kindness of my friend Prof. Alexander Winchell, Ann Arbor,
Michigan. Its relationships are to the ZL. oculatus, Cope, but in that
species the eye is smaller, and the tail and peduncle are .33 of the length.
In LZ. anagaullinus the mucous caverns are much larger.
1870.] 455 [Cope.
POMOTIS, Cuvier.
27. PomMorTIs MACULATUS, Mitchill.
Morone Mitchill, P. vulgaris, Holbr.
From all the rivers of North Carolina east of the Allegheny Range.
Identical with specimens from Pennsylvania and Michigan.
URANIDEA, Dekay.
28. URANIDEA CAROLINA, Gill.
Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. His., 1861. 41.
Abundant in the French Broad River in Madison County, North Caro-
lina.
APHREDODIRUS, Lesueur.
29. APHREDODIRUS SAYANUS, Gilliam.
Journ. A. N. Sci., Phila., IV, 81, pl. III; Dekay, N. Y. Fauna, Fishes
p. 35, pl. xxi., fis. 62.
Abundant in sluggish waters tributary to the Neuse River in Wake
County, North Carolina.
LABIDESTHES, Cope.
Fam. Atherinide. Premaxillary bones prolonged anteriorly into a roof-
shaped beak of elongate form, moderately projectile; reaching posteriorly
to the line of the orbit: its teeth in several series. Mandible as long as
the muzzle. No palatine teeth.
This genus differs from Chirostoma (Atherinopsis, Blkr.) in the
duck-like muzzle, which is almost exactly like that of the Belonesow beli-
zanus, though shorter. Like it, the premaxillaries are not codssified,
and are separated on the superior surface by a groove between the
median portions. The general characters remind one so of Belonesox, as
to strengthen the belief in the close relationship existing between Atheri-
ride and Cyprinodontide, though the form is Acanthopterygian, and the
latter Malacopterygian.
Labidesthes sicculus, Cope.
Chirostoma sicculum, Cope. Proc. Acad. Nat Sci., Phila., 1865, p. 81.
Form slender, the depth contained in the length (without caudal fin)
seven times; the length of the
head 4.33 times in the same.
The eye is large and round,
contained 3.6 times in the head,
1.5 times in the length of the
muzzle and once in the inter-
orbital space. The top of the
head and muzzle are plane, the
latter convex transversely, and
not exceeded by the extremity
of the mandible. Front with
a median ridge. A distinct ? mucous pore aboyz each orbit. The teeth
Cope.] 456 [June 7,
are elongate, slender and simple. The premaxillaries are a little projectile 5
extremity of maxillary acuminate. The first dorsal commences at a point
mid-way between the basis of the tail and the anterior margin of the orbit,
or opposite the 8-4th anal radii. The second dorsal commences above a
point a little in front of the middle of the anal. Radii D. IV. 10; A. I.
22-8; V. I. 5; P. 12. The scales are small, in 14 longitudinal, and 75
transverse series.
In life this fish is translucent, with a silver band on each side, which
covers one scale and two halves, and is lead-edged above. The dorsal re-
gion and top of head are dusted minutely with black. Operculum and
cheek silvery.
M.
Wemothy eevee crocs teie ad sitter aGarips eee Nees sites Rye ye .. 0.074
Of head ac Gates we Lae cee fe Avamaenet ie ilacie Degen pater Mpa pctas 0.015
Of pectoral fin,..... ie SIMs PP Diba ra Wee Le ey aM ter cnet 0.011
BAserotraiall serra sy ks myer ate ee eee ace bets ieotes melee sputter aeeeae 0.018
Width head behind,........... GSN teas Gidlnrmara dio 6 0.006
This little fish I took in great abundance in Coal Creek, a tributary of
the Clinch, in East Tennessee. It was very abundant, and easily caught
in rather sluggish water. The stream named passing through a limestone
region, is liable to partial desiccation in the Autumn, and in several pools,
thus formed, I obtained this species.
In the original description 1 gave D. V., which should probably be as
here stated, D. LV.
MALACOPTERYGIL.
FUNDULUS, Lac.
30. FUNDULUS CATENATUS, Storer.
Cope, Journ. A. N. Sci., Phil., 1868, Tab. xxiv., fig. 2.
Clinch River, abundant.
HAPLOCHILUS, McClelland.
I refer the following species to this genus, without going into its syn-
onymy, following the arrangement given by Giinther in the Catalogue of
the British Museum. In consideration of the peculiar views of this au-
thor respecting specific and generic characters, I consider this a tempo-
rary arrangement, to be rectified by a more thorough analysis of the
subject at some future time.*
*Fundulus nisorius, Cope, Sp. nov.
Stout; head four times in length to basis caudal; orbit four times in length of head, and twice
in inter-orbital width. Depth 3.75 times in length. Aual fin commencing about opposite the
middle of the dorsal. Cheek scaly, operculum smooth. Scales of body in. 36 transverse, and 12
longitudinal series. Radii D. 12, A.10 or 11, extending more than half way from basis of first ray
to basis caudal. Length of female, four inches, Color uniform light brown, yellowish below.
Most of the specimens of this species (seven) are females, and in them the oviducts are pro-
longed in a tube to near the extremity of the first ray of the anal fin. Several have many well
developed eggs in the former. Small, faintly cross-banded specimens, perhaps males. do not pre-
=
1870.] 4571 [Cope.
31. HAPLOCHILUS MELANOPS, Cope.
Sp. nov.
First dorsal ray opposite middle of anal. Scales in. 31 transverse, and
9 longitudinal series. Radii D. 1.6, A. 1.8, V. 6. Head 3.66 times in
length, exclusive of caudal fin; eye 8 times in head, 1.6 times in inter-
orbital width. Dorsal and anal fins each short, each measuring less than
half the distance from their first ray to the basis of the caudal fin. Cau-
dal narrowed, rounded.
Above, yellowish brown, scales darker edged, a few longitudinal lines
ou some dorsals; in some specimens, a median brown dorsal line. Dorsal
and caudal fins each with a row of black dots across the middle, and one
near the margin. Belly golden. Length 1.5 inches, the largest size. A
blue-black spot below the eye in most specimens.
Very abundant in still waters of the Neuse basin, Wake Co., N. Ca.
ESOX, Linn.
32. Esox Arrinis, Holbrook.
Ichth. S. Carolina, 198, Pl. xxviii., fig. 1.
This species is near to but distinct from the #. reticulatus of the North.
In life it is of a bright light emerald green, with dark reticulations.
Common in the Neuse River.
33. Esox RAVENELI, Holbrook.
Ichthyology South Carolina, p. 201, Pl. xxvii., fig. 2.
Length from muzzle to pectoral equalling length from pectoral to ven-
tral tin; latter space embracing 87 transverse series of scales. From end
muzzle to orbit less than from orbit to opercular border. Br. XIII. D II.
12. Brown above with brown cross-bars; edge of dorsal and caudal
fins red. :
This species is near H. americanus, but has a relatively longer head.
Size and color similar. From the Catawba River, N. Ca.
SEMOTILUS, Rafinesque.
Putnam, Cope.
34. SEMOTILUS CORPORALIS, Mitchill.
From the French Broad, Catawba, Yadkin, Deep, and Neuse Rivers.
CERATICHTHYS, Baird.
Four species of this genus were observed, of which two are new to
Zoology. They both belong to
Sect. II., mouth more or less inferior, small; teeth 4-4 or 4. 1.—1. 4;
size small.
Depth less than length head; last dorsal ray more than half first; muz-
zle narrow, beards long; small; C. LABROSUS.
sent this character. There are no pseudo-branchiae. From Gaboon, W. Africa. P-.B. DuChaillu.
It may be stated in this connection that the genus called Lycocyprinus by Peters, for Haplochi-
oid fishes with pseudobranchix, was previously named Epiplatys by Gill. The type of the latter
(E. sexfasciatus, (1862) from Gaboon, is different from the E. (L.) sexfasciatus (1864), the type of
Peters. The latter may, therefore, take the name of EZ, infrafasciatus (1865), which Gunther gave
the same species, subsequent to Peters.
Cope. ] 458 [June 7,
Depth equal length head; last dorsal ray less than half first; muzzle
broad, beards small; : C. HYPSINOTUS.
3). CERATICHTHYS LABROSUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This is a peculiar species of slender proportions. The top of the head
is gently decurved to a muzzle which scarcely overhangs the thick, pro-
jectile upper maxillary arch. The mouth is entirely horizontal, and the ex-
tremity of the maxillary bone attains the line of the orbit. The latter
enters the length of the head 3.75 times, and is just exceeded by the inter-
orbital width. The head enters length to origin caudal from 4 to 4.5
times. Front arched in transverse section. Depth 5.5 times in length.
The dorsal line is nearly plane, and the elevation of the first dorsal rays
is contained twice in the length from its base to the anterior rim of the
pupil: it stands over origin of ventral. Scales large 6—34-5—4. Radii
IDs 3" ANS Sh
Lines
NOU lems soccoboodcn0ase $00.56 SeaIK a prota ed cto 29.5
OW GEmNGEUGHNs codancosocnoeo0cs ETE He pert ae Se sioc ecole
(QUE TIVS Eyer nemelera aise ume estore pes Lau nesta ae EN Ae ee a TO
Teeth 4. 1 i, 4b
This fish is silvery from the middle of the sides downwards. In some
specimens there are numerous blackish scales above the lateral line, which
are arranged so as to form indistinct cross-bars in life; in other specimens
the color is quite transparent, indicating two varieties. The latter are
frequently a little more slender than the former.
The beards of this species are relatively longer than in any other spe-
cies of the genus. ‘The prominent lips remind one of Phenacobius. The
species is not uncommon on the bottom in clear and rapid creeks which
flow into the upper waters of the Catawba River, in Macdowell and Burke
Counties, N. Ca.
36. CERATICHTHYS HYPSINOTUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This little species has a stout robust form. The head and muzzle are
broad and flat; the muzzle is not prominent; the mouth is inferior and
horizontal; the maxillary just reaches the line of the orbit. The form is
characterized in the genus by the gradual elevation of the dorsal line to
the base of the first ray of the dorsal fin, and its rather abrupt descent:
from that point. The base of this fin is thus oblique and the distal out-
line is vertical; the posterior ray being less than half as long as the ante-
terior. This produces a characteristic appearance. The head is short
and enters the length 3.75 times, equalling the depth. Body compressed.
Orbit 3.5 times in length head, and once in inter-orbital space. Lips, es-
pecially inferior, thin; beards small. Scales, 4-6 38-41——_3. Teeth
4, 1——1. 4. Dorsal fin originating a little in advance of above ventrals;
8. A. smaller than dorsal, 8.
Tiines
Terr ty ih) MAM Ooi sc tyawe, stated ale liege eReateds iehs Hens eee aerate 33.6
CRMGEN TNs 6456 Sa epee pal Settee te HA oh eile vici Mesoy clap eecer eat 6.5
Depthieavircncpsmeracrtrecersre ares een lit ldicmucineaene ss cis +t)
Width head behind orbits. . Spon D pee Hooon ons ou> BN PRIA)
1870.] 459 [Cope.
Color in life silvery, with a double series of black specks along the lat-
eral line, and a lateral band of dusted blackish; a dark line round
muzzle between orbits. Membrane of dorsal fin often shaded with
blackish.
Common in creeks heading the Catawba R., in Macdowell Co., N. Ca.,
or tributary to the Yadkin River in Roane Co., in the same State.
37. CERATICHTYHS HYALINUS, Cope.
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., 1868, 226.
From the French Broad and Clinch Rivers in North Carolina and Ten-
nessee; not found east of the Alleghenies.
38. CERATICHTHYS BIGUTTATUS, Kirtl.
Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1866, 356.
Found in the rivers of East Tennessee and North Carolina, from the
heads of the Cumberland, to, and including, the Neuse.
ARGYREUS, Heckel.
39. ARGYREUS LUNATUS, Cope.
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1864, 278. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1868, 228, Tab.
23, fig. 3.
Common in the tributaries of the French Broad and Holston Rivers, in
North Carolina and Tennessee. The absence of any species of this genus
in the rivers of North Carolinaeast of the Alleghenies is a peculiar feature.
They no doubt occur in the Roanoke, as I have taken A. atronasus from
that river in Virginia.
HYPSILEPIS, Baird.
40. HypsILEPIS COCCOGENIS, Cope.
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1867, 160.
Common in the French Broad and Clinch Rivers. Not found in the
Beech Fork of the head of the Cumberland.
41. Hypstmpis cornutus, Mitch.
Var. frontalis, Agass., Cope, 1. ¢., 158.
Abundant in Coal Creek, a tributary of the Clinch River in Tennessee:
Var. cornutus, Cope, 1. c. From the Neuse River.
42. HyPpsILEPIS ANALOSTANUS, Girard.
Cope, 1. c., p. 161.
Found in abundance in the Catawba River, but nowliere in the tribu-
taries of the Tennessee or Cumberland. Found in the Neuse River.
453. HyPpsiLEPIs GALACTURUS, Cope.
Loe. cit., 160.
Most common in all the tributaries of the French Broad, Clinch and
Cumberland. It does not occur east of the Alleghenies.
Cope. ] 460 [June 7,
Hypsilepis ardens, Cope.
Loe. cit., p. 163.
Abundant in the headwaters of the south fork of the Cumberland River
in Tennessee. In my examination of the Virginia streams, I did not find
it in any western water, but only in the Roanoke and James Rivers.
HYBOPSIS, Agass.
Cope. Transac. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1866, 379.
Group A.
44, HyBopsis AMARUS, Girard.
Proceed Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1856, 210. Hybopsis phaénna, Cope,
lL. c. 1864, 279.
Specimens from the Catawba River all have a relatively longer head
than typical examples from the Potomac; former 4 times in length to
basis caudal fin ; latter 4.5 times. They have also teeth 4.1—1.4, in place
of 4.2—2.4; the three inferior of the outer row obtuse, without hook, the
superior one only with masticatory face. Both varieties may really be-
long to the H. hudsonius, as indicated in Monograph Cyprinidz Penn-
sylvania.
Coie @© wie 18}.
Hybopsis longiceps, Cope.
Journal Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 231.
Abundant in the head waters of the Cumberland River, and Coal Creek,
a branch of the Clinch River, Tennessee. Originally found in the Roanoke
and James Rivers, Virginia.
45. HyBOPSIS SPECTRUNCULUS, Cope.
Loc. Cit. 231.
From the tributaries of the French Broad in the high valley of Hend-
erson County, North Carolina.
GRouP BB.
Teeth + 4. 4 + ; mouth horizontal, lower jaw received beneath upper.
4¢. Hysopsts NIVEUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
Char. Head 4.5 in length ; depth 5 times in the same ; eye 3. 3 in head,
6
equal muzzle. Scales 38-40: anal 1. 8. White, a black spot on dorsal fin
»
v
behind.
Description. This is a regularly fusiform fish, the dorsal region more
arched than the ventral. Head conic, muzzle obtuse, not projecting,
mouth nearly terminal; preorbital large, longer than deep. Occipital
region arched, its breadth at superior extremity of operculum equal from
end muzzle to middle pupil. Muzzle about equal orbit, preorbital bone
elongate ; end of maxillary extending to opposite anterior rim of orbit.
1370.] 46] [Cope.
Mouth slightly oblique downward, mandible included ; isthmus medium.
Fins D. I. 8, A. I. 8; the osseous dorsal ray separated from the first
cartaliginous by a narrow membrane, and originating above the ventrals.
Posterior ray 3-5 length of the anterior.
Length 31.3 lines ; of caudal 5.8 lines ; to basis dorsal 12.9 lines. From
basis to apex pectorals 4.1 lines ; same to basis ventrals 13 1.
Color in life very pale, sides and below silvery ; a blackish spot at basis
caudal, and a large dark spot at upper posterior part of dorsal fin.
Common in the upper waters of the Catawba River, North Carolina.
Cri, © wip 1D).
(3-8
Teeth 4.1—1.4 ; lateral line little decurved ; scales °°: muzzle short ob-
3
tuse ; interorbital region wider ; depth 5; head 4 times in length. A. I. 8.
H. CHLOROCEPHALUS.
(
Teeth 4.2—2.4; lateral line much decurved ; scales 3!; muzzle acumi-
2
nate, interorbital space narrower; depth 5.5, head 4 times in length.
AES: H. CHILITICUS.
47. HyBopsis CHLOROCEPHALUS, Cope.
Spec. nov. ;
This small species is rather stout and has a deep caudal peduncle. The
head is broad with large orbit, descending muzzle, and descending mouth,
orbit in head three times, diameter exceeding length of muzzle. End of
maxillary extending beyond line of orbit; premaxillary margin barely
reaching plane of lower margin of pupil. Interorbital width much more
than length of muzzle. Lateral line moderately decurved. Dorsal fin
above ventrals, elevated: R. J. 8, A. I. 8.
Length (total) 27 lines ; to origin dorsal 11.9 lines ; to basis caudal 21.6
lines. Everywhere, except on belly and below orbits, thickly dusted
with blackish, especially gathered into a lateral band which terminates in
a basal caudal spot. Fins unspotted, in life a metallic green line on the
vertebral line, and one from the upper angle of each operculum to caudal,
visible in several lights; below the latter, dark crimson; dorsal and
caudal fins, operculum and cheek with end of nose, all crimson. Part of
operculum, properculum, postfrontal region and top of head metallic
green.
This surpassingly beautiful fish is abundant in the clear waters which
it inhabits, viz: the tributaries of the Catawba River.
This species may be compared with H. rubricroceus and H. plum-
beolus as its nearest allies. The former has a relatively larger head, and
more slender caudal peduncle, A. 1. 9. The latter is much shorter and
deeper fish ; its depth enters the length 4.6 times ; the eyes the head only
2.79 times.
As PR SVG, Sh 3))o
*)
[Cope. 462 [June 7,
48. HyBOBSIS CHILITICUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This species is an ally of the last ; it has amore clupeoid aspect, seen in
strongly decurved lateral line and more acuminate muzzle. Head broad
behind occiput, convex, interorbital width less than length of muzzle, orbit
3 times in head, exceeding length of muzzle; maxillary extending beyond
its anterior rim. Teeth 4.2—2.4. Dorsal small, originating above vent-
rals, R. 1. 8, A. 1. 8. Line of premaxillary margin opposite middle of
pupil.
Length 24.4 lines ; to basis dorsal 12.41. to basis caudal 24.41. Length
pectoral from base 5 ; from same base to do. ventrals 5.7 lines.
In life pure silver white to the dorsal line ; the dorsal scales brown
edged ; a vermillion band through anal fin and one through dorsal ; the
lips vermillion all round the mouth.
This species is as beautiful as the H. chlorocephalus ; if not as rich, its
tints are much more transparent. Common in the tributaries of the Yad-
kin River, in Roane County, North Carolina.
HEMITREMIA, Cope.
Genus novum.
Char. Dentition 5—4, with marked masticatory surface. Alimentary
canal short, with the usual two flexures. The lateral line one-half want-
ing, and generally imperfect. First (osseous) dorsal ray adherent. Pre-
maxillary projectile.
This genus is Hybopsis with teeth 5—4, and undeveloped lateral line.
perhaps it will be necessary in future to refer H. heterodon and H.
bifrenatus to it.
Hemitremia vittata, Cope.
This is a stout species with very short head and obtuse muzzle. The
latter is rounded horizontally from the orbits. The mouth is short and
oblique ; the end of the maxillary does not reach the orbit. Diameter of
orbit equal muzzle, 3.5 in head; 1.33 times in interorbital width. Length
head 4.2 times to base caudal; depth 4.5 in same isthmus rather wider.
The first dorsal ray originates alittle behind above the ventrals; scales
6
3: Radii D. 1.8; A. E. 7. Length to basis caudal 24.4 lines. Do to
+
basis dorsal 13.2 lines ; length pectoral 4.2.
The specimen is alcoholic, and I do not know the colors in life. There
is aconspicuous dark shade along the median lateral line, and a pale band
above it ; above this the whole dorsal region is of a dark color.
This species is from the tributaries of the Holston River, near Knox-
ville, Tennessee, and was procured by my friend, Prof. Harrison Allen,
who submitted the specimen to me for examination.
PHOTOGENIS, Cope.
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1867, 163.
1870. ] 465 [Cope.
49. PHOTOGENIS LEUCOPS, Cope.
, I
Var. @2¢¢a. Depth into length to basis caudal fin 6.5 to 7 times ; head
6-7
in same 4.5 times; scales 3 abundant in the French Broad River.
5
Var. aaaac Depth into length 5 times; length head into same 4 times;
5-6
scales 38: color silvery, a double row of black specks on lateralline. Very
abundant in the head waters of the Catawba River. This fish, when taken
from the water, always sustains a rupture of some of the branches of the
ophthalmic artery by which blood is suffused beneath the cornea. The
altered condition of pressure on transfer to arare medium, is no doubt the
cause.
Also from the Neuse River, near Raleigh.
50. PHOTOGENIS TELESCOPUS, Cope.
Loe. Cit. 165.
Very abundant in the French Broad River ; a variety with large eye in
a tributary of the Clinch.
51. PHOTOGENIS LEUCIODUS, Cope.
Loe. Cit. 165.
Abundant in the waters of the tributaries of the French Broad River.
52. PHOTOGENIS PYRRHOMELAS, Cope.
Spec. nova.
This species is in most characters related to the Hypsilepides, and it
combines remarkably the characters of the H. cornutus, H. analostanus,
and H. diplemia. Thus it has the head of the first, the form, with
milky paired, and black spotted dorsal of the second, and the long anal of
the third. As the teeth are without masticatory surface, I refer it for
the present to this genus.
The extremity of the muzzle descends obliquely to the mouth, which is
itself oblique, the end of the maxillary descending to a line from the an-
terior margin of the orbit. The mandibular and premaxillary margins
are in the same vertical line when the mouth is closed. The diameter of
the eye ball enters the length of the head 3.6 times, and 1.25 times in
interorbital width. Length of head four times in length, depth about the
same. The body is therefore rather deep and compressed. Teeth sharp,
hooked, 4.1—1.4. Radii D. J. 8, A. I. 10. VY. 8. The extremities of the
pectorals barely reach the ventrals, and the ventrals attain the anal.
6
Scales3i-4; most of them with narrow exposed surfaces, as in typical
Hypsilepis. Total length 401.; to orbit, 2.81.; to origin dorsal fin 16.51.;
to origin caudal 382.71.
In coloration this isagain one of the finest of our Cyprinide. Specimens
taken in autumn were steel blue above, the scales darker edged ; the belly
silver. The muzzle and upper lip to the end of the maxillary, are vermil-
464 [June 7,
Cope. ]
lion ; also, the iris above and below the orbit. The dorsal fin has a large
black spot on the posterior half; the fin is anteriorly vermillion. The
tail has a rather broad black posterior margin, and a wide vermillion
crescent following it into the points of the fin ; base of the fin pale. Anal
and ventral fins with miiky pigment.
Small horny tubercles appear on the upper surface of the head in spring,
as in the species of Hypsilepis.
In this case I have assigned this species to its genus in accordance with
its technical characters, but it is probable that it will be necessary to
change the arrangement at some future time, —when the structure of these
fishes is better known.
The P. pyrrhomelas is the most abundant fish in the tributaries of the
upper Catawba River, North Carolina.
ALBURNELLUS, Girard.
Several species of this genus were obtained, and may be compared with
others already known, as follows:
I. Ventral fins extending beyond dorsal, reaching anal.
Scales 5—36—2 ; dorsal much elevated. A. 8. A. ALTIPINNIS.
II. Ventrals extending to opposite last dorsal ray ; not to anal.
a. Seales above lateral line 5—6.
f. Seales large, lateral line 83.
Orbit large. A. MEGALOPS.
' §/3. Seales smaller, 1. 1. 838—40.
Scales ° ; head smaller, body stouter. A. 8, eye smaller. A. AMABILIS.
Scales 5 ; head larger, body slender. A. 10, eye larger.
A.. JACULUS.
Scales, etc., as last ; eye much larger. A. ARGE.
aa. Seales above 1. 1. 7.
i
Scales 44; slender. <A. 11. A. MATUTINUS.
3
aaa. Seales above 1. 1. 9.
Rather stout. A. UMBRATILIS.
III. Ventrals only extending to line of middle of dorsal.
6
Head 4.5 in length ; scales *9- A, MICROPTERYX.
vo
53. ALBURNELLUS ALTIPINNIS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This species is much less elongate than such typical forms of the genus
as A. jaculus, ete. The head is short, but not wide. Orbit very large,
diameter exceeding muzzle, entering length of head 2.75 times, one-third
greater than the interorbital width. Head 4.33 times in length to basis of
caudal, depth five times in same. Anterior dorsal radii unusually pro-
longed for the genus, equal just half distance from the base to end of muz-
zie. D. 1.8. A. I. 9. The pectorals do not quite reach the base of the
1870. 465
[Cope.
ventrals. Total length 26 lines; to basis of dorsal 11 lines; to basis
caudal 21 lines.
Color white, a broad lateral silver band punctulated with strong black
dots. A black band across operculum to orbit, and black spot on pre-
orbital bone. Top of head to origin premaxillaries black shaded.
Two marked bony ridges connected with the system of mucous tubes,
diverge from the apices of the premaxillary bones to the epiotic region
on each side enclosing an urceolate interspace.
From the Yadkin River, Roane County, North Carolina.
d4. ALBURNELLUS MATUTINUS, Cope.
A compact slender species with smallscales. Orbit large, contained 3.5
times in length of head, and scarcely larger than length of muzzle, equal
also interorbital width. Length of head contained 4.25 times in total less
caudal fin, depth six times in same. Length of first dorsal ray just .33
distance from its base to end of muzzle. Pectorals considerably short of
ventrals, ventrals short of anal. R. A. J. 11. Twenty-five rows of scales
across dorsal line in front of dorsal fin.
Length 82 lines ; to basis dorsal 14.4 lines ; to basis caudal 26 lines.
Above olivaceous, edges of scales brown shaded; lateral band plumbeous ;
sides and below silvery, a dark spot at base of caudal fin. End of muzzle
and chin bright rufous.
From the Neuse River, in Wake County, North Carolina. The first
species of the genus found in Atlantic waters.
55. ALBURNELLUS MICROPTERYX, Cope.
Journal Ac. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 233.
Several specimens of this species were taken in Coal Creek, a tributary
of the Clinch River, Tennessee, and preserve exactly the characters by
which this species was originally distinguished from A. jaculus m.
CLINOSTOMUS, Girard.
56. CLINOSTOMUS AFFINIS, Girard.
Jour. A. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 228.
Very abundant in the waters of the Catawba and Yadkin.
STILBE, Dekay.
57. STILBE AMERICANA, Linn.
Common in still and sluggish water of the Catawba, Yadkin and Neuse
Basins.
HYBOGNATHUS, Agass.
The species of this genus are few, and have a wide distribution. Those
known to the writer are distinguished as follows :
I. Suborbital bones broad, short ; speculum on postfrontal region large.
Scales {; eye small, one-sixth of head, twice in muzzle AUN
Hi. PLACITUS.
466
Cope.] [June °,
Scales 5-39 2, eve 4.25 to 4.5, less than length muzzle; head wide, en-
tering length 4.66 times; A. 8. H. NUCHALIS.
II. Suborbital bones long, slender; speculum on postfrontal region
little marked.
Scales 6—88—4 ; head 4.75 times in length, wide; eye large 3 times
in head, larger than length muzzle; A. 7.
H. O8SMERINUS.*
Scales 5-6——36 3-4 head narrow 4.25 times in length; eye large,
diameter exceeding muzzle, 8.3 timesin head; A. 8.
H. ARGYRITIS.
508. HyBoGNATHUS ARGYRITIS, Girard.
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1856, 182. U.S. Pac. R. R. Surv., vol-
X, Tab.
This species was described by Dr. Girard, from specimens obtained by
the U. 8. Explorations for the Pacific Railroad route, from the Milk and
Arkansas Rivers. It appears to be very abundant in the Catawba River,
North Carolina. Specimens from it cannot be distinguished from those
from the Arkansas in the Museum of the Smithsonian Institution.
CAMPOSTOMA, Agass.
59. CAMPOSTOMA ANOMALUM, Raf.
Rutilus Raf., Campostoma, Agass.
From the Cumberland, Clinch and French Broad Rivers, west of the
Alleghenies and the Catawba River east of them.
CATOSTOMID 4.
Prof. Gill proposed to distinguish this group from the Cyprinidz asa
family (in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1861, p. 8), basing the latter
on the peculiar characters of the pharyngeal bones and teeth. This
course has not been followed by subsequent writers, and the character
assigned does not appear to me to warrant the proposed separation. I find,
however, that while the premaxillary bone completes the superior arch of
the mouth in the Cryprinide, in the Catostomide, those bones form but a
slight portion of the same, the maxillary bones entering into it extensively
on each side. This feature is evidently of importance sufficient to define
the family, and I therefore adopt it as left by Prof. Gill.
*ITYBOGNATHUS OSMERINUS, Cope spec. nov.
The characters of this species are expressed in the above table. Itis very near the H. argyritis
Gir., but has a materially shorter head and smaller anal fin. The head is relatively wider. The
preorbital bone is about as long as deep. ‘The mandible very attenuate, and with a slight
symphysealtubercle. End of maxillary not beyond line of posterior nares. Orbit large. D.1. 8, A.
1.7. (H. regius has II—9 A., according to Girard.) otal length 31.2 lines; of head51.; to basis
dorsal 12.51.; to basis caudal 12.71. Pectorals and ventrals very short; first articulated dorsal ray
6 lines long. A broad silver lateral band; bright olive above it. pale below it: no black spot on
basis caudal. Speculum on postfrontal region small and little visible.
‘ais species is abundant in the Raritan River, New Jersey, in early spring ascending the river
with the smelt (Osmerus). Discovered by my friend, Dr. Chas, C. Abbott, of Trenton, who is
investigating the ichthyology of New Jersey,
1870.] 467 [Cope.
PLACOPHARYNX, Cope.
Genus novum.
Allied to Ptychostomus, Ag. The pharyngeal teeth much reduced in
number, only seven on the proximal half of the bone, cylindric in form,
with a broad truncate triturating surface. These play against a broad
crescentic chitin-like shield on the posterior roof of the pharyngeal cavity.
Three divisions of the vesica natatoria.
With a great superficial resemblance to Plychostomus, the masticatory
apparatus is different from that of any Catostomoid form known to me, and
combines peculiarities observed in forms of true Cyprinids. The chitin-
like shield is found in some of the latter ; it is represented in Catostomus,
Ptychostomus and Carpiodes, by ® narrow and very thin pellicle of the
same material, frequently interrupted on the middle line.
I know as yet but one species of the genus.
Placopharyne carinatus, Cope.
Species nova.
The physignomy and proportions of this sucker are those of the
Pt. erythrurus or the ‘“‘red horse’’ of the Western Rivers.
The lips are large and plicate, the anterior pendent like that of the P.
collapsus, the posterior full like that of Pt.
cervinus. Muzzle vertically truncate. Length
of head in that of body four times ; depth of
body in same 38.66 times ; scales 6—41—5. Radii
DXA, Vi. 9. A. 7 Hree margin of dorsal
straight, not elevated anteriorly. Occipital
region more elevated medially than in Pt. ery-
thrurus, superior ridges well marked, with a
special addition characteristic of this species,
and of none other with which I am acquainted.
This is a median longitudinal frontal ridge, ex-
tending from the fontanelle to between the
nasal ridges. Only the posterior extremity of
this ridge appears in some Ptychostomi. Orbit
longitudinally oval, 4.5 times in length of head,
twice in interorbital width. Type, fourteen
inches in length.
Color in alcohol like that of other species, uniform straw or whitish
silvery.
The pharyngeal bones of this species are much stouter than those of
other species of its own and greater size, ¢.g., Pt. aureolus of eighteen
inches, where they are comparatively slight. The exteroposterior ala is
twice as wide as the body inside the teeth is deep, and but for its short
base and narrowed tip would do for that of a Semotilus. But while there
are seven broad teeth without heel or cusp on the basal half, there are at
least forty on the distal half, they becoming more compressed and _ finally
like those of other allied genera. There are fourteen with truncate ex-
468 [June 7,
Cope.]
tremities. The pharyngeal plate has narrow horns directed upwards and
forwards, and is thickened medially. Itis placed immediately in advance
of the opening of the oesophagus. I have but one specimen of this curious
species, which I obtained at Lafayette, on the Wabash River, in Indiana.
CATOSTOMUS, Lesueur.
60. CatTostomus TERES, Mitchill.
Cyprinus teres, Mitch. Catostomus teres, C. communis and C. bostoniensis,
Les.
Common in all the rivers of the State and on both sides of the Allegheny
water-shed.
61. CATOSTOMUS NIGRICANS, Les.
C. planiceps, Cuv. Val.
Common in the Clinch, Cumberland and French Broad Rivers.
An especially western species, and abundant, where it occurs.
62. MOXOSTOMA, Rafinesque.
Moxostoma oBLONGUM, Mitch.
Catostomus tuberculatus and vittatus, Lesueur. Labeo oblongus, Dekay.
In North Carolina, as in Pennsylvania, this species is confined to the
sea-board streams. I only found it in the Neuse.
PTYCHOSTOMUS, Agass.
Amer. Journ. Sci., Arts XIX. 88. Teretulus, Raf. Cope emend. Journ.
Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 285.
The species of this genus are found in the United States, South of New
York and Hast of the Rocky Mountains, including the waters of the great
lakes. They are especially numerous in the rivers of North Carolina,
which flow into the Atlantic, and constitute one of the peculiarities of
that shed of the Allegheny range, as distinguished from the streams of the
western slope in Tennessee, where a smaller number of species is found.
Wherever Ptychostomi occur they are abundant in individuals.
The development of the lips furnishes important diagnostic indications
in this genus. In those most nearly allied to Moxostoma, the inferior lip
resembles that of that genus, in being narrower, and deeply incised,
emarginate posteriorly forming a figure V with the apex forwards; at
the same time the superior lip is very thin, and often narrow. Such
species are shorter, and tend to a large development of dorsal fin. Others
of this type are more elongate. The more typical forms have a large
inferior lip, which is general'y produced posteriorly to a square trans-
verse margin. Most of these are more elongate species than the last
group. Some species of both are distinguished by their very prominent
conic muzzle, and minute inferior mouth, reminding one of the Carpiodes.
Tn one species the surface of the lips is pappillose instead of plicate. In
some species the mouth is very projectile, in others scarcely so at all.
1870.] 469 [Cope.
Rafinesque proposed a genus Teretulus on the characteristic peculiarity
of nine ventral radii, belonging to most of the species of this genus. He,
however, included species of two other genera. On this account Agassiz,
in rearranging the suckers, imposed on it the name standing at the head
of this article, regarding the plicate lips as a primary character. I think
Rafinesque’s name is to be rejected, owing to its ill application ; the more
as I find two species in which there are ten ventral radii. I adopt that of
Agassiz, though I showed, when describing the Pt. cervinus, that the
tricellular natatory bladder is a more distinctive feature. This becomes
the more obvious now that I have found a species where the lips are
turbercular instead of plicate.
The following scheme will render the identification of the species more
simple.
A. Lips pappillose, inferior A shaped.
Head elongate, muzzle truncate. P. PAPPILLOSUS.
AA. Lips plicate.
a. Inferior lips infolded, A shaped.
f. Oblong species ; head one-fourth the length.
Hye large; D. XVI; form compressed. P. VELATUS.
Eye smaller ; D. XV ; compressed. P. COLLAPSUS.
Hye smaller; D. XII; subcylindric. P. PIDIENSIS.
23. Fusiform species ; head one-fifth the length.
Muzzle conic ; mouth minute inferior. P. COREGONUS.
a¢. Inferior lips narrow, crescentic.
Head one-fifth length, muzzle sub-conic. P. ALBUS.
Head long, truncate, 4+; fins white. P. THALASSINUS.
aaa. Inferior lips well developed, truncate posteriorly.
f. Compressed species.
7- Head 4, 4.5 in length.
0. Dorsal radii XII.
Stout, elevated ; muzzle short, fins crimson. P. ROBUSTUS.
00. Dorsal radii XIII.
e. Ventral radii IX.
Head longer, occipital region flat, muzzle truncate, eye smaller 4.5;
scales 5—42—4 ; scales white. P. ERYTHRURUS.
Head shorter ; occipital region convex ; muzzle projecting, mouth in-
ferior, eye larger 3.5 in head ; scales black at base.
P. MACROLEPIDOTUS.
Head elongate, convex with ridges above occiput; eye 4.5 in head ;
muzzle prominent, mouth inferior ; scales white. P. LACHRYMALIs.
=. Ventral radii X.
Head 4 times; muzzle conic. P. DUQUESNEI.
000. Dorsal radii (XVII) XVIII.
‘Bye small; depth 3.25, head 4.3 times in length.”’
P. CARPIO.
Ks By Sh |vOw, Yor ails!
Cope.] 470
[June 7,
77- Head five times in length ; occipital region strongly convex:
0. Ventral radii IX.
D. XIII. muzzle little prominent, dorsal truncate.
P. AUREOLUS.
D. XII. Muzzle projecting ; lips large. P. CRASSILABRIS.
00. Ventral radii X.
D. XIII. Muzzle projecting, mouth inferior. D. free border deeply
incised. P. BREVICEPS.
000. Ventral radii unknown.
D. XIV. Muzzle produced convex, mouth very small, back elevated.
P. CONUS.
£3. Cylindric species.
D.XI, XII. Head one-fifth length ; sides lined.
P. CERVINUS.
63. PrycHOSTOMUS PAPPILLOSUS, Cope.
Species nova.
Body deeper than thick, the dorsal outline not at all elevated. Head
elongate not more than one-fourth the length to base of caudal, the orbit
_ small and bordering the frontal plane. Preorbital region most elongate
in the genus ; muzzle truncate in profile ; the upper lip hanging free, the
lower deeply incised behind so as to be A shaped, and with the upper, finely
granular, not plicate. The muzzle very projectile, more so than in any
species of the genus. The top of the cranium is everywhere plane. Dorsal
fin truneate, with XII radii. Scales large, about as in P. coLLAPsus,
Cope, i. e. 6—42—5.
Color everywhere a silvery white, except some blackish shades at the
bases of the scales of the dorsal region. The fins, unlike those in most
other species, are pure white in life. They obtain one foot in length, and
do not exceed one pound in weight.
This species is quite abundant in the Catawba and Yadkin Rivers, in
North Carolina, and is highly valued by the inhabitants as an article of
food. It is regarded as the best of the Catostomi for this purpose. It is
less frequently caught on a hook than some other species, but in the
autumn they come on the weirs in considerable numbers; from these I
procured many specimens. The fishermen call it the ‘‘Shiner.”’ Its char-
acters are very constant, and not likely to be confounded with those of any
of the known Ptychostomi.
Ptychostomus velatus, Cope.
Species nova.
This is a stout species, with a short head, large eye, and more than
usually elongate dorsal fin. Scales 5-6 42 5; head scarcely 4 times
in length ; superior plane nearly flat ; orbit 3.75 times in length of head ;
1.5 times in interorbital width. D. XVI. with straight superior margin ;
V. IX. Upper lip pendent. Dorsal outline arched to the first dorsal ray
greatest depth 3.2 lines in length (exclus. caudal). Total length 11
inches.
i
1870.]) 471 [Cope.
The color of this species I cannot give, as I have not seen it in life ; in
spirits it is uniform silvery, the dorsal fin dusky.
I know this fish from two specimens which I caught in the Youghi-
ogheny River, in Western Pennsylvania.
64. PryCHOSTOMUS COLLAPSUS, Cope.
Species nova.
This very abundant fish is in the form of its lips similar to the last. It
is stout and short, the head not entering the length (exclus. caudal) quite
four times. The dorsal line is somewhat elevated to the first ray of the
dorsal fin, the depth entering the length 3.5 times. The eye is smaller
than in the P. velatus, entering the length of the head 4.75 and 5 times,
and the interorbital width 1.75 times. Top of head plane; muzzle
moderately prominent, intermediate between P. erythrurus and Pt. conus
in this respect, being more compressed than in the last. Mouth small,
little projectile, superior lip pendent. D 15, V. 9. Thoracic region with
small scales.
The specimens of this species from most of the North Carolina Rivers
are rosy on the sides, the larger, light golden ; the inferior fins all orange.
The specimens from which the above description is taken are small, only
a foot long, but I have seen several specimens in the Catawba River, of
three and four pounds in weight.
It occurs in the Neuse, Yadkin and Catawba Rivers, in North Carolina,
the Clinch River in Tennessee, and I have a specimen from the Wabash
River, in Indiana, and three others without locality, but probably from
the Western States or Great Lakes. In the Yadkin and Catawba Rivers
it is immensely numerous, and is caught on weir traps in the spring and
autumn in quantities, and used as food by the inhabitants. It is not as
good a fish as the P. pappillosus and P. robusius, but is not at all to be
rejected.
There seemed to be a larger number of smaller specimens in the Yadkin
than the Catawba Rivers at the time of my visit. The specimens from
the Neuse have the muzzle a little more prominent. Some specimens
from the Yadkin possess only XIII and XIV D. rays.
65. PryCHOSTOMUS PIDIENSIS, Cope.
Species nova.
‘A smaller species than either of the preceding, of more cylindric and
less compressed form. The dorsal fin is shorter, containing only XII rays.
Head elongate, about four and a half times in length exclusive of cauda,
fin. Muzzle not conic, but truncate. Scales similar to those of the last spe-
cies. Length about ten inches.
Color light brownish yellow, fins light red.
This fish resembles at first, the Pé. cervinus, both in color, form and
size. I obtained a few specimens from the traps in the Yadkin River, at
the plantation of John Kuntz, and did not see it in any other river.
I took a variety in a tributary stream, characterized by a longitudinal
black spot at the base of each scale, giving a handsome longitudinal
ler 5
Cope. ] 4 (2 [June 7,
striation. (A similar variety of Hypsilepis analostanus (q.v-) was taken in
the same stream.) Scales 6—44—5. V.IX. A. VII. Head flat above ;
eye 4 times in head, 1.5 times in interorbital breadth. Dorsal and caudal
fins black edged.
66. PrycHosToMUS COREGONUS, Cope.
Spectes nova.
This fish is very easily distinguished by its very small head, with conic
muzzle, and elevated arched back, combined with a small size, and other
characters.
The head enters the length not less than five times, and is much arched
in transverse section posteriorly above. The diameter of the eye is large,
entering the head between three and four times ; the muzzle is regularly
conic, and projects far beyond the mouth. The latter is remarkable for
its small size, and lack of projectility; in ordinary individuals it would
about admit a pea. The upper lip is not pendent below the front of the
muzzle. The shape is broadly fusiform, the dorsal line rising to tke fin.
It is, nevertheless, more compressed than the species already deseribed. D.
XIV constantly.
The ground color is silvery, the scales shaded with leaden above, and
with black pigment at their bases, giving a dusky hue to the whole, as is
not seen in the species already described, except the P. pappillosus. Belly
and inferior fins pure white, lacking the red and orange of many others.
This fish never exceeds a foot in length, and is very abundant in the
Catawba and Yadkin Rivers. It is caught with the preceding two species
and is used for food, but is the least valued of all the species. Itis called
at Morganton, ‘‘blue mullet.”’
67. PrycHosTOMUS ALBUS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This large species has the small head of the last, without the small
mouth and many of its ether peculiarities. The head enters the length not
less than five times ; muzzle is prominent, but the mouth is less inferior
than in Pt. coregonus. The eye, in a specimen sixteen inches long, is
relatively larger than in P. collupsus, and about as in Pt. coregonus. ‘The
muzzle is less prominent than in the last named fish, but more so than in
Pt. collapsus. 'The mouth is of ordinary size, but the upper lip does not
form a free projecting rim as in the latter. The under lip is a narrow
crescent following the boundary of the mandible, not folding so as to meet
on the middle line as in the species already described.
Dorsal outline a little elevated, rays XIV.
Colors very light ; the inferior fins white. In size this species isone of the
largest, reaching four pounds and over. It is much valued by the people
living in the neighborhood of the Catawba River, North Carolina, as an
article of food. They call it the ‘“‘White Mullet.”’ Ihave not seen it in
the Yadkin or any other river.
68. PryCHOSTOMUS THALASSINUS, Cope.
Spectes nova.
This fish approaches the Pt. collapsue, Cope, inmany respects. The head
Arr E
1870.] 473 [Cope.
is elongate, about one-fourth the length (exclusive of caudal fin), and is
plane above. The muzzle is not very prominent, nor the mouth smaller
than usual in the genus. The lower lip is quite different from that of
Pt. collapsus in its narrow crescentic form. The eye is similar in size to
that of that species. The dorsal line is elevated ; dorsal radii XTV—XY.
Color sea green above, white below; fins white. Reaches four or five
pounds, and still greater weight.
It may be that this fish is a form of the P. collapsus, but the different
‘mouth and coloration seem to separate it. Its whole proportions differ .
from those of P. albus. I have only observed it in the Yadkin River,
where it is abundant, and used for food.
69. PrycHOsTOMUS ROBUSTUS, Cope.
Species nova.
With this species we commence the most numerously represented sec-
tion of the genus,in which the inferior lip is large and full, entirely covering
the space between the rami of the mandible, and having a transverse or
convex posterior margin. In this it resembles the true Catostomi, and
diverges from the type of Carpiodes, etc.
In P. robustus, we have a species, stout in all its proportions, and with
marked coloration; with the gibbous or elevated dorsal outline of P.
coregonus, it combines the short body of the Pt. collapsus. The head is
short and deep, the muzzle not prominent, truncate in profile. Eye be-
tween four or five times in leneth of head. Dorsal fin short with straight
superior margin, radii XII. Scales as in P. collapsus.
Color smoky or clouded above, mingled with golden reflections ; sides
similar, below yellowish. Dorsal, caudal and anal fins dark crimson. Size
large. J examined one of six pounds weight.
This species is distinguished by its form and color, from all the others
inhabiting the Yadkin. I did not see it in any other river area. It is
highly valued for the table by the people living near the river. With the
P. thulassinus and T. erythrurus var, it is taken in spring-nets. These
nets are attached by four corners and suspended to the extremity of a
lever whose fulerum, as high as a man’s head, is on the river bank. Bait
is thrown on it, and when the fishes congregate, the land end of the lever
being suddenly depressed, the suckers do not escape. If fishing were con-
fined to this mode, and the autumn weirs not made too tight, an abund-
ant supply of food from the rivers might be promised the State of North
Carolina for future time. But unfortunately, too many of the people
with the improvidence characteristic of ignorance, erect traps, for the pur-
pose of taking the fishes as they ascend the rivers in the spring to deposit
their spawn. Cart loads have thus often been caught at once, so that the
supply is at the present time reduced one half in many of the principal
rivers of the State. The repopulation of a river is a very different matter
from its preservation, and involves much time, attention and expense. It
would be far cheaper for the State of North Carolina to enact laws pre-
servative of this important product of her waters, similar to those in force
‘ load
Cope.] 4 i4 (June 7,
in many of our older States. The execution of such laws is, however, the
important point, and the destruction by officers, of the spring traps and
weirs in the Neuse, Cape Fear, Yadkin and Catawba Rivers, every spring,
at the time of running of the fishes, would allow of the escape of immense
numbers of them, before the traps could be repaired.
70. PYTYCHOSTOMUS ERYTHURUS, Raf.
Ichthyologia Ohiensis, p. 59. Ptychostomus duquesnet, Agass part. Am.
Journ. Sci. Arts., XIX 90. Cope Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 236.
This species is probably the most widely distributed, as well as one of
the largest of the genus.
The form is somewhat compressed, but the dorsal line is not much
arched ; the head is of medium size, entering the length 4.5 to 4.66 times.
The end of the muzzle is nearly vertical in profile. The lips are full, the
posterior truncate or openly emarginate posteriorly ; the plicate coarse.
Eye 4.5 times in length ; 1.66 lines in interorbital width. Depth of body
three and two-thirds times in length (exclus. caudal.) Top of head nearly
plane. Scales 5 42 4. Radii D. XIII, V. 9., dorsal with straight
superior outline. Color silvery, rosy and gray above ; dorsal caudal and
anal fins orange.
The above description is taken from one of several specimens from the
Yonghiogheny River, in Western Pennsylvania. I have procured other
and similar individuals from the Holston and French Broad Rivers, in
Tennessee. It is, as Rafinesque observes, a most abundant sucker in all
the rivers tributary to the Mississippi from the East, and is that which is
known every where as ‘‘red horse.’’? It is the common fish-food of the
people, sharing the distinction with the ‘blue cat,’’ Ichthaclurus coeru-
lescens. It reaches as large a size as any species of the genus, and I have
seen them.of six and eight pounds. The largest I have heard of, was
caught in the French Broad, and weighed twelve.
With various authors, I have formerly regarded it as the Pt. duquesnet
of Leseuer, but I suspect it to be distinct, as already indicated by Rafines-
que. The characters of the latter are pointed out below.
A species resembling the present, as well as the Pt. robustus, bears the
name of ‘‘red-horse,’’ in the country of North Carolina, east of the
mountains, but whether the same or not, the present inaccessibility of
my specimens prevents me from deciding. A specimen from the Catawba
of seven Jb. weight had a relatively larger head, and was otherwise stouter
than the above described. D. 1.12; scales 6—43—5. The fish is common
in that river, and equally so in the Yadkin. Those from the latter have
D. XII ; muzzle not prominent ; head and body rather elongate ; shaded
with yellow, particularly on sides of head ; fins orange. It will be observed
that the eastern fish agree in having D. 12 soft rays.
71. PrycHosTOMUS LACHYRMALIS, Cope.
Spec. Nov.
This species is quite near the last, and may at some future day be shown
to be only a local variety of it, but in this case Pt. macrolepidotus must
s/s
1870.] 4 (oO [Cope.
follow also. Its characters are very similar; our specimen differs in its
more numerous scale series, a point in which the Pt. erythrurus agrees
with all the other species with scarce an exception. I do not know of
any genus where the number of scales is so similar in all the species, as
in Ptychostomus. Scales 7—46—5, in a larger specimen, in a smaller they
are 6—44—5. The cranium, however, presents us with the oblique super-
opercular region and elevated vertex with a ridge on each side, as in the
Pt. macrolepidotus. The premaxillary spines and nasal cartilage also pro-
-Jects, leaving quite a depression across the muzzle in front of the nares,
a feature not seen in Pt. erythrurus, and lessmarked in Pt. macrolepidotus.
The mouth is quite inferior, but is large and the lips large and thick.
The inferior has a slightly concave posterior margin, and the median pos-
terior fissure is stronger than the others. The orbit is smaller than in
Pt. macrolepidotus, and enters the interorbital space twice. Depth 3.75
times in length. The dorsal outline is gently arched, and reaches its high-
est point a little in advance of the dorsal fin. The latter has the superior
outline but little concave, rays XI1 in the iarger, XIII in the smaller; V.9.
The scales of this species are as in Pt. erythrurus, not black at base; a
trace is seen in the smaller specimen. This mark is seen in Pt. marcro-
lepidotus and Pt. crassilabris, the latter also from the Neuse river. The
fins are white.
This species reaches a length of eighteen inches. One like it is sold in
the market of the city of Newbern, N. C., with a second species much
resembling the Pé. crassilabris, but whether identical or not, I cannot be
sure, aS my specimens were lost.
Ptychostomus macroiepidotus. Lesueur.
Agassiz in Sillim. Amer. Journ. Sci., Arts XIX. 89. Catostomus macro-
lepidotus, Les. Journ. Acad. Natl. Sciences J, 1817, 94 Tab.
Fusiform compressed, the depth entering the length 33 times ; the head
short, contracted anteriorly, the occipital region elevated, very convex
transversely. Length of head 4.6 to 4.5 times in length ; orbit large,
diameter 4 to 4 3 times in length of head, and twice in interorbital width.
Seales 5—45—35, radii D. XIII; V. 9. ‘The lips are well developed, and
the posterior is transverse posteriorly.
The length of the specimen described is about a foot. The color in
life including fins, is white, yellow shaded above.
Ten specimens have been compared, all from Pennsylvania and Dela-
ware. Of five from the Conestoga Creek, a tributary of the Susquehanna,
two have the parietal, median frontal, and nasal bony ridges very promi-
nent, while in two they are almost without trace. In the former the
dorsal radii are XIII, in the latter XII. I cannot discover the sexes of
these specimens as they have been eviscerated. In the other five there are
several with weak crests, but none with XII D. rays.
In a large specimen from the Wabash River, the only departure from
the typical form is the more emarginate inferior lip.
This species is especially abundant in the comparatively sluggish streams
476 [June ,
Cope.]
of Maryland and Delaware, and is but little valued for market. It is no
doubt the species deseribed first by Lesueur, as it is the only one of the
genus seen in the Philadelphia market. I did not meet with it in North
Carolina.
Ptychostomus duquesnet, Lesueur.
A specimen of this fish from near Pittsburg, Lesueur’s original locality
suggests the correctness of the opinion of Rafinesque, that his Pé. eryth-
rurus is a different species. The characters are seen in the 10 ventral
radii, and the considerably more prominent muzzle, with correspondingly
inferior mouth. The scales are also smaller 7—48—7, (to front of ven-
tral). Dorsal fin little incised above, R. XIII. Length of head 4.6 in
that of head and body; orbit four times in head 1.75 times in interorbital
space. Cranial crests moderate, the parietal region elevated as in P%.
macrolepidotus, not so plave as in Pt. erythrurus. Depth 33 in length.
Lips moderately developed. Dentitionasin Pt. erythrurus. The coloration
in spirits is quite like that of other species, except that the dorsal region
is a dark steel bluish, which the other species do not exhibit. Scaies
without black spot at base.
Length of a moderate specimen from the Youghiogheny River, Penn-
sylvania, one foot.
Kirtland’s description i» Proc. Boston Sei. Nat. Hist. V 268, leaves it
somewhat uncertain as to whether this species or the Pt. erythrurus was
before him ; his figures resembles the present fish. I should not be sur-
prised to find that his female ‘‘red-horse ’’ described as so different from
the male, was our Pé. collapsus.
Ptychostomus carpio, C. Y.
This species differs from its near allies in the more numerous dorsal radii,
etc. The form appears to be that of Pt. erythrurus. Its habitat is given
by the French authors, as Lake Superior, and Giinther adds St. Lawrence
River and Lake Erie. J have not seen it. The lip characters separate it
from Pt. velatus. ,
Ptychostomus oneida. Dekay.
Geological survey, New York, III, 189.
This species is also similar in general proportions to the Pi. erythrurus,
but has, according to Dekay, more numerous scales and a much smaller
eye. Dekay says: seventeen longitudinal rows of scales counted at dorsal
fin. Head and body 10 in. ; tail 2.; head 2.5 (one-fourth) ; eye., 4 inch
(one-sixth head). Radi D. XIII; V. 9. He does not describe the lips.
Oneida Lake.
Ptychostomus aureolus. Les.
Agass. 1. c. 89. Catostomus aureolus. Lesueur J. A. N. Sci. Phila. I,
95 Tab.
With this species we enter a series characterized by the relatively small
size the head bears to the body, and consequent apparent elevation of the
latter. The head enters the length exclusive ot the caudal fin, five times.
1870.] 477 [Cope.
This species resembles the Pt. imacroleptdotus Les., more than it does
the Pé. erythrurus, but the proportionate size of the head is less. In a
specimen 8 inches long, the scales are 6—49—4; radii D. XIII, V. IX.
The supraoccipital region is much elevated and convex, the interorbital
region convex, but without keel. The muzzle is prominent, and separated
on the upper surface by a deep transverse depression. The mouth is but
little overpassed by the muzzle, and is large. The lipsare rather narrow.
byes five times in length, 2.5 times in interorbital breadth of head.
I do not recollect the colors of this sucker in life ; Lesueur states the
fish to be orange above, bases of scales darker ; inferior fins red.
A single specimen from Saginaw Bay, Lake Huron, has furnished me
with means of comparison. It agrees exactly with Lesueur’s account
of it. The basis of the scales of some dorsal series are blackish. The
species is supposed to be confined to the Great Lakes.
Ptychostomus sucurtt. Rich.
Catostomus sueurti, Richardson Fr. Journ. 1823, 772. Fauna Boreali
Americana ITI, 118.
This species appears to me to be very near the last, and agrees with it
in proportions of head to body, of depth, fin radii, squamation, etc. He
says, however, that the muzzle projects an inch beyond the mouth, in a
specimen nineteen inches long, which is certainly not the case in the
species last described. Hence I suspect it to be distinct, and that it will
be found to possess other characters when re-examined. Gunther, (Ca-
tal. Brit. Mus.) refers it to the C. macrolepidotus, to which it is evi-
dently nearly allied.
From the Fur countries, British North America.
72. PYTYCHOSTOMUS CRASSILABRIS, Cope.
Species nova.
This sucker is near the Pt. aureolus, but has a more contracted conic
muzzle, and smaller mouth; it is also a flatter and more clupeiform fish.
Supra-occipital region elevated, convex; orbit 4.2 in length of head, 2
times in interorbital width. Depth 8.75 times in length. Scales large,
5—44—5. D. XII; V. 9. Length of specimen described, one foot.
Color in life silver, above with a smoky shading, and the scales black at
the bases. Dorsal fin blackish, inferior fins white. Top of head blackish;
a black band from occiput to pectoral fin.
The lips of this species are thick, the lower truncate, but the mouth is
very small. In these features it is between P. conus and P. aureolus.
The dorsal fin in the specimen described is elevated in front, the basis
being only .75 the first soft ray, in length. The margin is deeply con-
cave. The fewer dorsal radii, as well as the less prominent muzzle, dis-
tinguish it from Pt. conus.
From the Neuse River, near Ruleigh, N. Ca.
A. Po S:-—VOl. XT.—32n
478
[Cope {June 7,
Ptychostomus breviceps, Cope.
Species nova.
An elongate species with small head, and very convex occipital region,
characterized by the presence of X ventral radii.
Depth .25 the length; orbit 3.75 in head, 1.75 in interorbital width.
Cranial ridges not strong. Basis of dorsal five-sixths the anterior height,
radii XIII; free margin deeply concave. Body compressed, dorsal line
very narrow. Scales 6—45—5. Muzzle short conic, projecting beyond
mouth. Latter small, lips short, the posterior well developed, not emar-
ginate.
Color white, yellowish below; seales above with a little black at their
bases.
Length of specimen examined, ten inches.
This fish belongs to the basin of the Ohio. J have a specimen from the
Yonghiogheny. The number of the ventral radii is very constant in this
genus, but if the increased number should prove to be accidental, the gen-
eral characters of this fish would approximate it to Pt. aureolus.
A peculiarity of the type specimen consists in an additional ray in the
anal fin—eight instead of seven in the other species, and the alteration of
the third and fifth to perfectly simple, unbranched rays, scarcely attain-
ing the edge of the fin. This may be abnormal.
73. PrycHostomus conus, Cope.
Spectes nova.
This fish represents the P. coregonus in the section of the genus with
fully developed lips.
Form flat, with elevated dorsal line, and small conic head. D. radii
always XIV. Hye large, mouth exceedingly small, far overpassed by the
conic muzzle. The superior regions are smoky and the scales with black
bases; below, with the inferior fins, white. Dorsal fin dusky.
The lips of this species are smaller than in Pt. crassilabris, though the
inferior is similarly truncate behind. The muzzle is much more conic and
produced than in that fish. The dorsal radii are more numerous.
Numerous specimens from the Yadkin River, North Carolina, where it
is taken in large numbers with Pt. collapsus, Pt. robusius, etc., but is of
less value than they.
74. PTYCHOSTOMUS CERVINUS, Cope.
Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. 1868, 235, Tab. iii, fig. 4.
This species constitutes a well marked section of the genus, character-
ized by a cylindric form, the transverse diameter of the body being equal
to the vertical. Before describing this species in detail, I may premise
that I have found no little difficulty in attempting to identify the Pt. me-
lanops, Raf., of Dr. Kirtland’s fishes of the Ohio. The figure resembles
the Pt. crussilabris very closely, but the description of ‘body full, eylin-
dric,’’ will not allow of the identification. Should the fin formula of Pt.
breviceps be abnormal, the compressed body and lack of spots point to
specific diversity. I had thought ‘the present species intended, but the
1870.] aeTd [Cope.
figure given by Kirtland precludes the idea, for the P. cervinus is in form
much like the Catostomus nigricans, and has a much less elevated dorsal
region than the Pf. melanops. It differs also in the form of the dorsal fin,
which in that species displays XI XII D. radii instead of XIII. For the
present, therefore, I introduce the Pé. melanops by name only.
Head of Pi. cervinus one-fifth the length, as broad as deep, plane above.
Muzzle truneate, low in profile, lips large, the superior pendent. The
inferior lip thick, more produced than in any other species, and with a
median longitudinal fissure, the plicee are more or less broken up. Body
sub-eylindric, scales large. Dorsal short, radii XII, margin straight.
Atove yellowish brown, below yellow; fins not red. The dark of the
upper surfaces often forming broad transverse shades. After death the
colors above become a dark emerald green. This fish never exceeds a foot
in length, and rarely attains that size. It exists in great numbers in the
Catawba River, but I did not meet with it in the Yadkin or elsewhere.
It has a peculiar habit of leaping from the water, whence the fishermen
eall it ‘‘jumping mullet.’? It is but little valued as food, though many
specimens are caught on the weirs.
Also from the Roanoke River in North Carolina and Virginia, and the
James in Virginia.
Giinther again confounds this species, so well known to the fishermen
of the Southern rivers, with the Pt. duquesnei.
JARPIODES, Ratinesque.
Agassiz, Am. J. Sci. Arts, XIV, 74, 1865.
The species of this genus are extensively distributed in the fresh waters
of North America, east of the Rocky Mountains. I am not acquainted
with any from the Atlantic streams to the eastward of the Delaware,
though they may exist, while they are found in the Great Lakes and the
tributaries of the St. Lawrence. Agassiz defined this genus as above,
and indicated four species, one described by Lesueur, one by Rafinesque,
and two by himself. Ihave not seen specimens from the Eastern waters
of North Carolina, though they no doubt exist, while they are also abun-
dant in the French Broad and other tributaries of the Tennessee. My
specimens of those from the latter being lost, I give an account of other
species known to me. I add five to the four already known.
I. Anterior rays of the dorsal fin very much elevated and attenuated,
exceeding or equalling the length of its basis.
a The muzzle very abruptly obtse.
Anterior suborbital much deeper than long ; anterior margin upper lip
below orbit. C. DIFFORMIS.
Anterior suborbital similar; upper lip before nares; eye 4.6 times in
head. C. CUTISANSERINUS.
Anterior suborbital sub-triangular, longer than deep; upper lips before
nares; eye 3.6 times in head. C. SELENE.
ag ‘The muzzle conic, projecting.
Size medium, back elevated.
a
VELIFER.
Cope. | 480)
[June 7,
II. Anterior rays shorter, measuring the anterior half or a little more
of the base of the dorsal; (muzzle conic or projecting).
D. XXIV. A. VII. Depth 2% in length; head 4.8 in same; back
much elevated, anterior dorsal rays measure to the 15th ray.
C. GRAYI.
D. XXVIII, V. X. A. VII. Depth 2.5 in length; head 4.25 in smae;
scales 8-5; short, stout; long dorsal rays measure to 22 ray.
C. THOMPSONI.
D. XXVI-VII, V. X. Depth 3 times in length, head 3.5 times; muz-
zle elongate conic; eye median, large; anterior D. rays not thickened,
nearly as long as base of fin. C. BISON.
D. XXVII to XXX; A VIII; scales 6-5; oblong, long dorsals to 22 ray
in adults; depth 2.7 in length, eye small anterior. C. CYPRINUS.
D. XXX A. VII; anterior dorsal rays thickened, osseous, short, reach-
ing 16th ray; head small, 4.5 to 5 times in length; eye small anterior;
fusiform, depth 3 times in length. C. NUMMIFER.
In the number of the radii of the ventral and anal fins, the species are
not always entirely constant; thus in one, @. bison there are VI, in
another VII anals. In C. cyprinus some have 1X and others X ventrals.
In young examples of the species just named, the long anterior dorsal
rays are longer than in the adult, but not so much so as to be confounded
with the long rayed species of section one. The margins of the scales in
this genus and Bubalichthys are serrate, their structure thicker than in
the Ptychostomi.
Gill has adopted the genera of the Catostomi as left by Agassiz, while
Giinther rejects most of them. Moxostoma, Ptychostomus and Catosto-
mus I regard as distinct genera of the typical form, to which I add Pla-
copharynx. Of those with finer and more numerous pharyngeal teeth,
Cycleptus is distinct in its completely ossified cranium, as I have pointed
out in an essay on the Cyprinide of Pennsylvania. Bubalichthys is well
characterized by the form of its pharyngeal bones, as shown by Agassiz.
The remaining Rafinesquian genera, Carpiodes and Ichthiobus are but
doubtfully distinct from one another. Carpiodes is the older name, with
which Sclerognathus, Cuv., Val., may be associated as a synonyme.
Carpiodes difformis, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This species has a remarkably obtuse muzzle, which with the large eye,
almost gives it the appearance presented by monstrous perch and carp
where the premaxillary bones are atrophied. Viewing the top of the
head from a position opposite a point mid-way between the dorsal fin and
end of the muzzle, the spine of the premaxillary bone is not visible. In
the C. selene these spines are very distinctly prominent, in the C. cutisan-
serinus slightly so.
The dorsal outline of this fish is arched, elevated to the anterior dorsal
radii, and then regularly descending. The long dorsal rays extended,
reach to beyond the origin of the caudal. Lateral line nearly straight,
1870. 4 I
ioe
[Cope.
scales 6 35——4. The end of the pectoral is in line with the origin of
the first dorsal ray. Radii, D. XXIV, A. VIII, V. IX.
The head is very obtuse and has a very large eye, beyond whose ante-
rior rim the extremity of the nasals project but a little way. The spines
of the premaxillaries project upwards and forwards, but not so far.as the
line of the nasals, and fail by .25 inch of reaching the line of the inferior
rim of the orbits. The anterior edge of the mandible is in line with the
anterior rim of the orbit, and the end of the thin upper lip reaches the
line of the anterior rim of the pupil.
The diameter of the eye enters the length of the head 3.6 times, and
the length of the head the total (exclus. caudal) 4.22 times. Opercle
radiate-ridged. Supraoccipital region much elevated, with lateral ridges.
Anterior suborbital trapezoid, deeper than long. The size of this species
is medium; average length, one foot. The color is uniform brownish
golden.
From the Wabash River in Indiana.
Carpiodes cutisanserinus, Cope.
Species novu.
This species is near the last, but present various distinctive features.
These may be summed up as follows:
The dorsal fin originates mid-way between end of muzzle and basis of
caudal fin—considerably nearer end of muzzle in (. difformis. The eye
is smaller, 4.5 times in length of head. The spines of the premaxillaries
project considerably in advance of the line of the nasal bones, and reach
the line of the lower rim of the orbit. The upper lip is much in advance
of the orbit, and the end of the same barely reaches the line of the ante-
rior rim of the latter. Scales 7—87—5. Anterior suborbital bone vertical
ovate.
The lips are minutely tuberculate. Operculum and suboperculum ru-
gose, former radiate. Long rays of dorsal and anal extending a little be-
yond the basis of the caudal fin. Head four times in length head and
body. Depth 2.6in the same, Length, a foot; color silvery. Ina male
in spring, the muzzle and front are covered with closely set small papil-
lose corneous excrescences. Radii D.XXVI, V. X, A. VIII.
From the Kiskiminitas River, Western Pennsylvania.
Carptodes selene, Cope.
Species nova.
Anterior dorsal outline steeply elevated, also the supraoccipital region,
vortex convex above middle of orbit, concave above anterior rim of same,
as in the two preceding species. The present fish is intermediate in many
ways between the two last, and adds characters of its own. Thus the
anterior suborbital bone is longer than in either, longer than high, and
narrowed posteriorly. The orbit is large asin C. difformis, entering the
length of the head 3.6 times, while the muzzle is more elongate than in
either. The head is narrowed vertically ; the spines of the premaxillaries
extend beyond the nasal crests, but do not quite reach the plane of the
Cope.] 482 [June 7,
lower limbs of the orbit. The premaxillary border is far in advance of the
orbit, and the extremity of the maxillary attains the anterior rim of the
orbit. Dorsal and caudal radii extended, reach the basis of the caudal ;
the origin of the first is equidistant between the latter point and the end
of the muzzle. Rays; D. XXVI; VY. 10.-A. VIII. Seales 7—87—9.
Color silvery white. Length, a foot. Three specimens of this were taken
in the Root River, Michigan, in all probability, though the label which
accompanied them has disappeared.
Carpiodes velifer, Rafinesque.
Catostomus, Sp.? Lesueur Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. I 110. @.
velifer Raf. Ichth. Chiensis 56 Sclerognathus cyprimus ‘‘Val.’’ Wirtland
Fishes of the Ohio. Proc. Bos. N. H. Soc. V. 275 Tab. XXII fig. 2 not
of Valenciennes.
I have referred my specimens to this species chiefly on the strength of
the figure and description of Prof. Kirtland, and from the fact that Lesueur
regarded it asso near the @. eyprinus, which he would not have done with
the C. cutisanserinus of the Ohio before him. I had two specimens of
the present.fish, one of them from the Wabash.
It has a shorter dorsal fin than the preceding, having but XXII rays,
of which the anterior two are exceedingly elongate. The prominence of
the muzzle is the most distinctive feature ; it is conic, the spines of the
premaxillaries projecting at an angel of 45° to beyond the nasal crests,
and the extremity not reaching the line of the lower rim of the orbit.
The extremity of the mandible extends to the nares. Eye 4.25 in length
of head. Head 3.75 in length; depth 2.4in the same. Scales as in the
last species. Second suborbital long. as deep, trapezoidal. Origin of dor-
sal .2 nearer end of muzzle than basis of caudal. Length of type speci-
men ten inches.
Rafinesque says that this species is called skip-jack, from its habit
of throwing itself from the water, and sailor, from its elevated dorsal fin
which appears above the surface of the water. The first mentioned name
is also applied to a clupeoid of the same streams, the Pomolobus chrysoch-
loris. Raf. Kirtland says the present species is not much valued as food.
Carpiodes grayt, Cope.
Spec. nov.
{n this fish we have the form and proportions of the last group, with
the shortened dorsal radii of the sueceeding forms.
The origin of the first dorsal radii is nearer the end of the muzzle than
the origin of the caudal by one-fourthof its basis. This embraces XXLV
radii. Anal radii just to base of caudal. Orbit .25 the length of the head ;
interorbital width 1 3-5 the former. Occipital region elevated; muzzle
much prolonged conic, mouth posterior, asin C. velifer. In general this
species is quite near the latter ; the number of scales is the same, andthe
proportions quite similar. The orbit is not so elevated, and the long dorsal
radii about half as long as those of that species. Length of type eight
29
1870. ] 483 [Cope.
inches. Locality not well ascertained, but as it accompanied species of
Bubalichthys, it is probably from one of the western States.
Dedicated to my friend, Dr. John Edw. Gray, for many years the ener-
getic director of the zoological department of British Museum.
Carpiodes thompsont, Agass.
Amer. Journ. Sci. Arts, XIX 75. Catostomus cyprinus Thompson,
Nat. Hist. Vermont. Scelerognathus cyprinus pas \irtland, Fishes of
Ohio, Proc. Bost. N. H. Soc. V. 275.
This is perhaps the handsomest species of the genus, and is distinguished
by its steut form, numerous narrowly exposed scales, and little elevated
dorsal fin. The eye is small, entering the length of the head 5.2 times,
and 2.2 times the interorbital width. The muzzle is more elongate, but
not so conic as in the two species last described, and projects far beyond
the nasal crests, having an obliquely truncate profile. Hence the end of
symphysis mandibuli is much in advance of the line of the nares, and the
rim of the upper lip just reaches the line of the orbit.
Dorsal line much arched, origin of first dorsal radii midway between
end of muzzle and origin of tail. Scales 8—41—6. V. 10, A. VII. Oper-
ceulum flat, slightly ridged. Length averaging a foot. Color silvery, with
a greenish golden band along the middle of each of the series of scales
near the dorsal region, producing longitudinal golden bands.
Specimens from Lake George and Saginaw Bay, Lake Huron.
. Carpiodes bison, Agass.
Amer. Journ. Sci. Arts, XVII, 356.
The original description of this species is rather too brief to allow of a
perfectly satisfactory deteimination of my specimens. These are from the
Wabash, in Tennessee ; those described by Prof. Agassiz are from the
Osage, in Missouri.
This species has the general form of the buffalo fish, but has not so
clevated a dorsal outline. Jt is therefore, much less elevated than the
Carpiodes above described. It is especially characterized by the elongate
form of the muzzle, in which it exceeds any other species of the genus.
The profile descends obliquely posteriorly from the end of the muzzle to
the mouth, and the end of the mandible is but little in advance of the
nares, while the canthus is in line with the anterior limb of the orbit.
The lips are well developed for the genus, and delicately longitudinally
plicate. The eye is large, the middle line of the cranium falling withinits
posterior rim ; in other species it falls posterior to this point. Its diame-
ter enters the.length of the head 4.5 times, and the interorbital width,
twice. Scales 7—40—5. Pectoral fin barely reaching line of anterior
dorsal ray. Caudal fureate half its length.
In general proportions this fish is a gocd deal like the European carp.
The occipital region is elevated and narrowly convex. The long dorsal
ray is almost as well developed as in tke species of group first, extending
Cope.] 484 [June 7,
nearly to the end of the fin in one specimen .75 the distance in another.
Color, brownish golden. Length, one foot.
75. CARPIODES CYPRINUS, Lesueur.
Catostomus do., Lesueur, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. I, 91, Tab. Car-
piodes, Agassiz, 1. c. Giinther, Cat. Brit. Mus. VII, 24. Carpiodes vacea,
Agass., l. ¢.
This is another elongate species with shorter dorsal radii, and rather
large scales. In six small specimens there are 7 rows above the lateral
line, and in two young and one adult, six. Length of head 3? times in
length same and body; eye sinall, .25 times in interorbital width, nearly
six times in head in adult of a foot in length, 4.5 times in young of five
inches. Muzzle quite prominent, but obtuse. Front scarcely concave
between orbits or in front of nasals, (thus differing from most of the other
species). End of mandible extending beyond line of nares. Lips faintly
plicate. Supraoccipital region elevated, little ridged. Anterior dorsal
rays midway between origin of caudal and end of muzzle. Color silvery,
dorsal fin black, paired fins white-margined.
Common in the tributaries of the Chesapeake and Potomac, rare in
those of the Delaware in Pennsylvania.
C. damalis, Gird., from the Platte R., is very near this species.
Carpiodes nummifer, Cope.
Spectes nova.
The largest species of the genus, from the Wabash River, Indiana.
The detailed characters have been given in the synopsis of the species.
The form is characterized by elongation, and the small proportions of the
head. The body is compressed, and the dorsal line elevated to the first
dorsal ray, which is considerably nearer the end of the muzzle than the
origin of the caudal fin. Its rays are more numerous and the anterior
shorter than in any other species here enumerated. The bony and first
cartilaginous rays are stonter than in any other species, the latter presents
no segmentation on the surface for the basal half.
The orbits are more anterior than in other low-finned Carpiodes, the
middle line of the cranium falling .25 inch behind the orbit in a specimen
of 20 inches length. Diameter 4.6 in head, nearly twice in interorbital
width. Scales 7—36—5. Muzzle short, rather obtuse but projecting
much beyond mouth. Symphysis mandibuli extending to nares.
Color of scales an olive silver or nickel color, whence the name nummi-
fer, money-bearer. Sides of head yellow. Length 18 and twenty-four
inches at least. Wabash River, Indiana; three specimens.
NOTURUS, Rafinesque.
76. NotuRuUs MARGINATUS, Baird.
From the Catawba and Yadkin rivers.
1870. 485 [Cope.
AMIURUS, Raf., Gill.
This genus is by far the most numerously represented by species
umong the Siluroids of the United States. Twenty-five are known to the
writer, and several others have been described which are not satisfactorily
distinguished. Besides the United States, China is included in the range
of the genus. In North America they are a most noticeable feature of the
ichthyological fauna of the Eastern Coast Streams, abounding there in
individuals and species, far more than in the tributaries of the Mississippi,
where Ictalurus is the prevailing form. The tributaries of the Great
Lakes furnish another resort for them, and the rivers of Texas, according
to Girard, alsoabound in them. This distribution in relation to Ictalurss
is to be found in the fact that they are lovers of mud and sluggish waters,
while the latter genus prefers running streams and rivers.
The species of Amiurus fall into four sections as follows:
I. Caudal fin rounded or truncate when spread open.
A The anal radii few, 17-22.
g. Body slender, depth 1-8 length.
Anal radii 17; eye rather large. A. PLATYCEPHALUS.
ag. Body stouter; depth 1-5 or less length.
f& Lower jaw longer than upper.
Anal radii 20, its basis 5.5—6. times in Jength; head narrowed anteriorly,
body not shortened. A. DEKAYI.
A. 22, head broad, body short. A, JALURUS.
23 Upper jaw equal or exceeding lower.
* Anal radii 17. A. PULLUS.
** Anal radii 19-22.
+ Ventral radii 8,
Head width 4.5 to 4.6 times in length; diameter eye 4.5 times between
orbits; depth 3.75 in length, beards rather short, humeral process smooth.
A, NEBULOSUS.
Width head four times in length, depth 3.65 times; eyes 4.5 between
erbits; colors light; beards as above. A. CATULUS.
Width head 4 times in length; eye 4; other characters as above; colors
dark. A. CATULUS, Var.*
++ Ventral radii 7.
Hye larger, 3.75 times into interorbital width; head narrowed, width
4.66 times in length; black. A. MISPILLIENSIS.
AA The anal fin longer, the radii 24-8.
To this group belong A. cupreus, Raf., A. cupreoides, Gird., A. atra-
rius, DeK., A. catus, Linn, A. nigricans, Les., A. caenosus, Rich’n, A.
felinus and A. antoniensis of Girard.
If. Caudal fin furcate or strongly emarginate.
A Anal fin with few radii, (19—22).
a Caudal fin merely emarginate.
* T refer a specimen whica I took at Poughkeepsie on the Hudson River, to this.syecies,
A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—33E
486 [June 7,
[Cope
Head less than one-fourth length. A. 20 ; eye 4.5 times between orbits ;
dorsal nearer adipose fin than muzzle. A. CONFINIS.
Head as above; orbit 4 times between orbits; A. 23; dorsal nearer
muzzle than adipose fin. A. HOYI.
ag, Caudal fureate.
Width of head from 4.6 times in length; eye large, 5 to 5 times in inter-
orbital space ; barbels long; caudal fin deeply forked.
; A. LYNX.
Head very wide, width 3.6 times in length; eye six times between
orbits, barbels very short, caudal not deeply fureate.
A. LOPHIUS.
AA Anal fin large ; radii 24.5.
Caudal emarginate ; pectoral spine not denticulate ; barbels reaching
gill opening ; head wide as long. A. BOREALIS.
Candal deeply furcate ; head narrow, pectoral spine dentate, barbels to
end of humeral process. A. NIVEIVENTER. ~_
Of other species of the genus, I have omitted A. puma Gird. A. natalis
Les., and A. felis Agass, all belonging to section I, owing to the imper-
fections in the descriptions. A. albidus Lesueur, is, I think, founded on
adults of A. nebulosus Les. A. obesws Gill of which I have examined
numerous specimens from Minnesota, two fromthe Miami, Ohio, and one
from the Kiskiminitas River, in West Pennsylvania, I cannot distinguish
from A. catulus Girard (U.S. Pac. R. R. Rept. X). Of species adopted,
A. catulus Girard, may be found eventually to be varieties of A. nebu-
losus. The A. mispilliensis, A. lophius and A. niveiventris, are now de-
scribed for the first time.
77. AMIURUS PLATYCEPHALUS, Girard.
Proe. Ae. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, 160.
This well marked species approaches nearer the genus Hopladelus than
any other Amiurus in its elongate, flattened body and head, and in the
large number (11) of its branchiostegal radii. It abounds in the Catawba
and Yadkin Rivers, where it is justly valved as an article of food.
Amiurus mispilliensis, Cope.
Spec. nov:
This species is related to the common A. nebulosus, but has a narrow
muzzle, larger eyes and a ventral ray less than any other species of the
section. Width of head 4.66 times in length; eye 3,25 times between
orbits, maxillary beard extending beyond base of pectoral fins. Pectoral
spine dentate, dorsalspine smooth. DI. 6; V.1.6; A. 21. Above entirely
black ; below, white anterior to anal fin. The mental barbels blackish. The
maxillary barbels extend to beyond base of pectoral fin, and the mentals
to the branchiostegal margin. Entire length 8 in.; depth 1 in. 8 lines.
I took this specimen in the Mispillion Creek, a sluggish stream in the
southern part of the State of Delaware. It doubtless occurs in similar
streams in ‘the Peninsula,”’
1870.] 487
[Cope,
78. AMIURUS LyYNx,* Girard.
This is a variable species in the size of the orbits and width of the head.
In the younger of six inches in length, the diameter of the former is con-
tained in the interorbital space three times; in specimens of 9.5 inches
four times; up to this size the width of the head enters the length with-
out the caudal 4.5 times. Between this size and eleven inches the width
of the head varies from 4.5 to four times; the orbit being one-fifth the
frontal width in those of larger size. This is the greatest relative width
of head I have seen in this species. The upper jaw always projects below
the upper, the humeral process is always rugose and swollen proximally,
and the maxillary barbels pale edged below.
The younger forms described, are the Jctalurus kevinskii of Stauffer,
(Mombert’s History of Lancaster County, Pa., 1869, 578). The following
description applies to such.
It has the narrow head, large eye and fureate tail of Jctalurus. The
dorsal spine is nearly smooth, otherrays6; A. 22; V. 8; C. Vi—17— VII.
The depth enters the length times. The largest specimen of this spe-
cies I have seen does not exceed eight inches in length. The color above
is a lively brown, sometimes tinged with purple; sides silvery, belly silver
white.
The larger form with relatively smaller eye is [. macaskey?, Stauffer, of
the same work, The same form I took in the Mispillion Creek, Dela-
ware. It differs from old examples of the latter in its more slender form,
the width of the head entering the length 4.66 times between orbits ; bar-
bels and color as in A. lynz. Specimens intermediate in character be-
tween this and the wider-headed form served as Girard’s types. They
were from the Potomac. Two specimens in my possession from that river
have the with head 4.25 times in length, eye 4—4.5 times between orbits ;
long maxillary, short mental barbels; dorsal nearly equidistant between
muzzle and adipose ; humeral process swollen, rugose.
One specimen from the Susquehanna exhibits the width of the head
one-fourth the length, as above mentioned. This renders the distinction
of Girard’s A. vulpeculus, questionable, since the only essential charac-
ters he mentions are the following:
Head 4 times ; orbit +; caudal 6.5 times in length, dorsal nearer muzzle
than adipose fin.
I have seen many specimens of this cat-fish from the Conestoga Creek,
from the Susquehanna, and from the Delaware, in Pennsylvania. .
Some specimens which I obtained at Newberne, on the Neuse River,
were lost, but I suspect them to have been this species. Asit is common
in the James River, it probably occurs also in the Roanoke.
Amiurus lophius, Cope.
Species nova.
This, perhaps the largest species of the genus, is distinguished by the
* In Origin of Genera, 43, I state that the Gronias nigrilabris Cope resembles the Amiurus lynx most
closely among the Amiuri. This isan error; the comparison should be made with 4. nevulosus,
from which the form of the anal fin, short barbels, etc., distinguish it.
Cope. | 488
[June 7,
greater width of its head, and the gape of the mouth, together with the
decided but shallow fureation of the caudal fin. The barbels are consid-
erably shorter than in any other species of the fork-tailed section.
Head and dorsal region very flat, the width of the former contained 3.5
times in the length of the body and head, and the length of the same en-
tering the same three times. The depth at the first dorsal ray, enters the
same 5.4 times. That ray is exactly intermediate between the end of the
muzzle and the posterior margin of the base of the adipose, having thus
a more posterior position than in A. lynx, where it measures the middle
of a line terminating at the anterior base of that fin. The free extremity
of the adipose is in line with the same of the anal. Radii D I. 6; A. IL.
19; V. 8. The eye is small, its long diameter entering the length of the
head, measured on the middle line above, seven times, and six times in
interorbital space. Pectoral spine weakly; dorsal not, serrate. Humeral
process strongly rugose to near extremity.
_ Maxillary barbel reaching two-thirds to three-fourths the distance from
its base to the upper part of the branchial slit, the outer only half way to
the branchiostegal margin, the inner three-fourths the length of the outer.
The extremity of the muzzle is regularly rounded, the upper jaw project-
ing a little beyond the upper. Branchiostegal rays nine. Total length
eighteen inches; length dorsal spine 18 lin.; do. pectoral spine 18 lin.; do.
basis of anal 35 lin.; width of head 53 1.
Color above brown; lower surfaces, including lower lip, (yellow or)
white in aleohol; mental beards white.
This species is nearest the A. lynx, Girard, which inhabits the same
rivers, but is readily distinguished as above pointed out, and in addition-
ally, by the shorter barbels and lower body. In the width of its gape it
exceeds any other North American cat-fish, and will allow of a remote
comparison with Lophius in this respect.
T obtained three specimens in the Washington, D. C. market, which came
from the lower course of the Potomac river. It occurs in the other tribu-
taries of the Chesapeake Bay, and I think I have seen it in the market of
Baltimore. J have not yet observed it in Philadelphia. In the former
cities it is deservedly esteemed for the table, and is more valuable than
the A. lynw and A. nebulosus, on account of its superior size.
The last named fish is sold in Philadelphia and neighborhood. It often
attains a foot in length. I cannot distinguish the Pim. albidus, Lesucur,
Pale and piebald varieties of the fish occur.
79. AMIURUS NIVEIVENTRIS, Cope.
Spec. nov.
This fish presents a great contrast to the last, resembling in fact the
Ictalurus cwrulescens, Raf., in its slender proportions.
Width of head 4.75 times in length, exclusive of caudal fin. Orbit nearly
four times into interorbital width. Depth 5.22 in length as above. Dor-
sal spine three inches from end muzzle, 3.5 inches from origin adipose fin;
its posterior margin with a concealed serration, Pectoral spine strongly
489
1870. [Cope.
serrate. MRadii D I. 6; A. 24; V. 8. Maxillary barbel to near end of hu-
meral process; latter very rugose to near extremity. Outer mental barbel
to branchiostegal margin. Br. rays ix.
Color above blackish, sides silvery leaden blue; below, including margin
of upper lip and outer margin of maxillary barbels, pure white. Fins
edged with dusky. Length of specimens 8.5 inches.
From the Neuse River, N. Ca.
In this species, as in all the fork-tailed Amiuri here described, the lower
lobe of the caudal fin is wider than the superior. The young of these
species, at least in and A. lynx, are much more silvery than the adult, as
is the case with some of the Ictaluri.
In concluding my observations on this genus, I may add that I took A,
cupreus in the Clinch River, in Tennessec.
ICTALURUS, Raf.
Gill emend.
80. ICTALURUS CGSRULESCENS, Raf.
This species abounds in the French Broad and other tributaries of the
Tennessee, as it does in those of the Ohio. It is everywhere much used
as food, though in my estimation inferior to the large Amiuri of the East,
for though the flesh is whiter, it is drier.
SALMO, Linn.
81. SALMO FONTINALIS, Mitch.
_ This species is found in the rapid streams in which the tributaries of
the Tennessee and Catawba Rivers head, in the highest tracts of the Alle-
gheny Mountain Region. I only took them in one of the heads of the
French Broad, where the size was much inferior to that of trout from
similar localities in Pennsylvania. The experience of other fishermen in
this respect was similar to my own. According to Dr. Hardy, a natural-
ist long resident in Asheville, well known to the old generation of stu-
dents South and North, this fish occurs in the headwaters of the Chatta-
hoochee, on the south slope of the Alleghenies, in Georgia. This is the
first authentic instance of its occurreice in any water flowing directly into
the Gulf of Mexico, with which I have met. From the habits of the spe-
cies it is hardly to be looked for in any other of the Gulf streams eastward
of the Mississippi. According to Dr. Peck, of Mossy Creek, Tennessee,
it is not found in the Cumberland Mountains. I did not find it there in
the heads of the Cumberland or Clinch.
OSMERUS, Artedi.
Although I am not informed as to the oceurrence of any species of this
genus on the coast or in the rivers of North Carolina, I introduce it here
for the purpose of illustrating some species which haye been placed in my
hands by my friend, Dr. Chas. C. Abbott, of Trenton, N. J. These were
procured and forwarded to him at his request, by Chas. G. Atkins, the
efficient Commissioner of Fisheries of the State of Maine, whose authority
Cope.] 49) [June 7,
is here given for the notes on their habits and places of abode, appended.
Interest attaches to the fact that the greater part of the fishes are derived
from the fresh waters of that State, and that species of this genus, lke
those of the other Salmonoid genera, Coregonus and Salmo, are proven to
have a lacustrine distribution in the northern part of the United States.
Land-locked Osmeri occur in the lakes of Norway. According to Pro-
fessor Esmark of Christiana, they are found in Lake Mjosen, which is 500
feet above the sea, and discharges into it by a stream which has a very
high fall; also in Nors Vandsjé, near the town of Moss, and in the Stink-
sild.
I find three species among our lake smelt, as follows:
Eye large, one-third length of head; head short, 4.25 times in length;
scales, 1. long. 66; 1. transv. 10. 0. SPECTRUM.
Eye smaller, 4.5 times in head; head shorter, 4.75 in total; scales
smaller, 1. long. 68; 1. transv. 16. 0. ABBOTTII.
Hye 4—4.25; head 4, longer; scales, 1. long. 60-7; 1. transv. 13 (14).
QO. VIRIDESCENS.,
Osmerus spectrum, Cope.
Species nova, smelt of Wilton.
Established on two specimens sent from the above locality in Franklin
Co., Maine. Form slender, the head short, with remarkably large eye,
and short mouth and maxillary bones. Mandible prominent when closed,
as in O. viridescens, the end of the maxillary bone not extending beyond
the line of the middle of the pupil. Both the length of the muzzle and
the interorbital width are considerably less than the diameter of the orbit.
The form of the body is more slender than in the O. viridescens, the depth
entering the length without caudal fin, 8.53 times. Radii D. 10. A. 1. 15.
V.8. The pectorals extend # the distance to the base of the ventrals.
Length of a medium sized specimen, 3 in. 6 lin. Seales in about as many
transverse, but several fewer longitudinal series than in the other species.
Color probably translucent in life, a silver band along the upper part of
the sides. Side of head and operculum silver. Top of head, middle dor-
sal line and caudal fin so thickly punctate with black as to be colored.
Wilton Pond is near the head of the south-west branch of the Kennebec
River in S$. W. Maine. The characteristics of this species, according to
Commissioner Atkins, are seen in specimens of larger size than those here
described, which were taken in breeding condition,
Osmerus abbottit, Cope.
Species novu.
This fish is in general characters more like the O. yiridescens than the
last; it is similar in the size of the orbit and posterior prolongation of the
maxillary bone, but the scales are more numerous and the head is shorter.
Like the last, it is considerably smaller than the common smelt.
The depth enters the length without caudal fin, seven times ; the head
the same, 4.75 times. The orbit is less than the length of the muzzle,
and scarcely equal to the interorbital width. The maxillary is delicately
1870.] 49 I [Cope.
toothed, and reaches the line of the posterior margin of the pupil. The
pectoral measures half the distance to the base of the ventral. There
are five specimens of this fish, which measure about four inches in length,
and they are stated in the accompanying notes to be of medium size. The
colors, like those of O. spectrum, are darker than those of O. viridescens,
in spirits. The median line above is dusted with black, and the lateral
seales, in several specimens, bordered with the same. Fins blackish, es-
pecially the base of the caudal. From Cobessicontic Lake, in Kennebec
Co., in Southwest Maine.
According to Commissioner Atkins, this species spawns immediately
after the ice disappears, and instead of running into swift brooks, like the
varieties of O. viridescens, hereinafter described, lays its eggs on the bor-
ders of meadows. The specimens described were taken in breeding con-
dition at the breeding season.
As I owe the opportunity of describing these interesting Osmeri to
my friend Dr. C. C. Abbott, I dedicate the present species to him.
Osmerus viridescens, Mitchill.
‘Osmerus sergeanti, Norris. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1868, 93 :
loc. cit., 1861, March.
Two localities furnish specimens of land-locked smelt, which I can only
distinguish from those of salt water by color. The first from Lake Mes-
salonskee, Kennebec Co., have a yellowish color on the sides, and black
dorsal line, top of head, chin, and edges of lateral scales. The specimen is
14 inches long, said to be of medium size, therefore exceeding the average
of the O. viridescens seen in Philadelphia market, and considerably larger
than the O. abbotti and O. spectrum. They are called the Belgrade
smelt.
Commissioner Atkins states that between the 10th and 20th of April,
while the lakes are still covered with ice, this fish runs up into the brooks
and lays its eggs by night, the eggs adhering to grass and stones. The
spawning is complete always before the ice breaks up in the lakes. The
temperature of the brooks is from 32° to 40° Fahr.
The second locality is Cochnewagn Pond, Kennebec Co. Specimens of
‘‘medium size’’ are smaller than the sea smelt from the mouth of the
Kennebec, and larger than those of O. abbottit7. They are generally simi-
lar to the last variety. These the notes state, breed later by 25 days than
the last; that is, 12 or 15 days after the ice disappears, the temperature of
the water being 48° to 45°.
The breeding season of the O. abbottii intervenes between those of the
above varieties,
Commissioner Atkins says that the majority of the lakes of Maine con-
tain smelt of some kind, and that he frequently finds smelt in the stomachs
of trout from these lakes.
ANGUILLA, L.
Species not identified; very abundant in all the Atlantic waters of North
Carolina (82),
Cope.) 492 {June 7,
GANOIDEA.
Lepidosteus osseus, L., occurs in the Yadkin and other eastern rivers of
the State, and probably Z. huronensis in the French Broad, as I have
specimens of it from near Dandridge, E. Tennessee. Polyodon foliwm
(Spatularia) ascends the same river to near Asheville, N. Ca. Various
species of Accipenser abound in the Atlantic rivers, while descriptions of
a fish called ‘‘ Black fish ”’ or ‘“‘ Brindle fish,’’ found in the Neuse River,
3 lod
induce me to believe that Amiéa occurs there (83-7).
ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION.
The table appended, shows readily the characteristics of the faunwe of
the four rivers of the State examined, though many species are no doubt
omitted from each, certainly nearly all the larger ones, which I had not
facilities for procuring.
The differences between the ichthyologies of the streams on opposite
sides of the Allegheny shed, are rather greater in this State than in Vir-
ginia; the mountains here constituting a much more important LoDo.
erapiical feature, both as to elevation and number of ranges.
The following points distinguish tne two kinds of waters:
The western presents greater abundance of Percoids allied to Etheos-
toma, of Uranidea, and is the exclusive range of Ambloplites, Micropterus
fasciatus, and Polyodon.
On the East, the Catawba and Yadkin are peculiar in their poverty in
Etheostomine Perch, and the absence of the forms just named, while the
extraordinary development of Catostomide, and abundance of Amiurus,
Anguilla, and Esox, strike at once the naturalist who travels and collects
from one to the other. The Neuse adds to these peculiarities a greater
affinity to the more northern streams of Maryland and New Jersey, in the
occurrence of Enneacanthus, Aphredodirus, Moxostoma, and Hybopsis
amarus. Its pike and Centrarchus are of the South Carolina type.
After a similar invéstigation of the rivers heading on opposite sides of
the Alleghenies of 8. W. Virginia, I came to the following conclusions:
‘Ty. That after deducting species generally distributed, certain re-
main which occur in streams separated by high ranges of mountains.
Ii. That the distribution of species is not regulated by community or
difference of outlet, rivers having diverse discharges having sometimes
more in common than those having the same destination.
As regards the first, the present investigations are confirmatory.
While nearly all the Percids, Cyprinidee, and Catostomidz, and all the
Siluride of the French Broad River, differ from those of the East, we
have the following common to both sides of the range:
Peecilichthys flabellatus.
Micropterus nigricans.
Photogenis leucops.
Compostoma anomalum;
All species of pretty wide distribution, A peculiarity of distribution is
1870. ] 493 [Cope.
the occurrence of the Photogenis leucops, confined in Pennsylvania to the
heads of the Ohio, and in Virginia to the Kanawha, not only in the Ca-
tawba, but in the Neuse. In further illustration, I append a list of spe-
cies from the South Fork of the Cumberland, in the Cumberland Moun-
tain region, near Kentucky.
Micropterus fasciatus. Semotilus corporalis. 4
Ambloplites rupestris. Ceratichthys biguttatus.
Lepomis nitidus. Hypsilepis cocogenis.
Percina caprodes. oh galacturus.
Etheostoma blennioides. rs ardens.
Peecilichthys coeruleus. Alburnellus micropteryx.
a camurus. Hybopsis longiceps.
a sanguifluus. Photogenis telescopus
Hyostoma cymatogrammum. Campostoma anomalum.
uC simoterum,
Ptychostomus erythrurus.
Catostomus nigricans. Twenty-one species.
Although separated from the waters of the French Broad by the high-
est ranges of the Cumberland Mountains, and flowing to the North, while
the former flow to the South, there is no important difference between
their fish inhabitants observable. The difference as compared with the
case of the Catawba River, has reference in part to the difference in ele-
vation of the mountain ranges separating them. Those of North Carolina
rise to 6740 ft., while according to Prof. Safford, the highest point of the
Cumberland is only 3000 feet.
Two curious points in the above list may be observed, viz: the occur-
rence of Hypsilepis ardens, and Hybopsis longiceps; species which I only
found in the James and Roanoke in Virginia, and not in the Western
waters, and which, while they occur in the Cumberland (the H. longiceps
in the Clinch also) I did not find in the State of North Carolina!
Mimetic Anaiogy. A curious case of this occurred to me in three
species of fishes which I took in a small tributary of the Yadkin River, in
Roane Co., N. Ca. Among several others there were varieties of the
widely distributed species, Cheenobryttus gillii, Hypsilepis analostanus,
and Ptychostomus pidiensis, (each representing a different family) which
differ from the typical form of each in the;same manner, viz: in having
the back and upper part of the sides with longitudinal black lines, pro-
duced by a line along the middle of each scale. This peculiarity I have
not observed in these species from any other locality. Until I had exam-
ined them I thought them new species.
The only other species presenting such marking in the Yadkin River,
is the large perch, the Roccus lineatus. According to the theory of Na-
tural Selection, a resemblance to this well-armed species might be of ad-
vantage to the much weaker species in question, yet the same species co-
exist in other rivers without presenting the same mimicry.
A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—34n
(June 7,
494
Cope.]
“‘STLIVULY 4 SISC@OGAH
“SHUYISO[VUR
*SnJUU.100 SstdepIsdAy
“suIvIMSIG SAYIYOVIID
‘sT[VIOd. 100 SNITOULIS
"BUBILIOWY OQ [TS
*TTTOUOAVI
‘SIUNJe XOST
‘snuvdes snalpoperyd y
‘snAv[NOVUL SHOWOg
“epnevoliqna stuodeT
“shyvqyyns snyyuBovouug |
TILES snqqyAaqouxyO|
|
SNOPLIL SHIPIIV.AYUID}
“snyjuvovxey SAXOULOT
‘SUBOLIGIU SI.IO}CO.LOTAL
‘scoot YINIVUL VULOSOD[OG
"SHOITA SAUQYST[LOIO
|
|
|
|
|
“QSUOSIAOU VULOJSOVTIT |
“SUODSOAVY VOLO |
|
-asna nT
“SNOTITIM[o SISdoq AH
“‘SHUVISOTVUY SIdoTISCAP,
‘snjoutsdAy
‘snyvyINnsiq SAYIYOY.ABO
‘sI[B1od109 Ssn{youtasg
“CUVOTIOUB Oq[NS
“SHLYVTMOVUL SOMO
susosoindind stwodaT
‘epneoliqni stuodey
IT[[LS SNIWAIqouURYyD
“SUVOLISIU SL.IOICOIOIAL
‘sdoolvNovul VULOSOITOg
“ULY PDA
“sn[vydooo.0[yo
‘SNOATU
‘Snaivule sisdod AH
‘gnurysoreur sidopisdApy
ssnjoutsdAy
‘SNSO.IQR]
‘sngvyynsiq SAITO v.19D
‘sI[Rtod.100 sn{yowses
‘VUVILIOWB IQ (1S
“SI[VUTJUOJ OWTLVS
“TITOUIABL
‘SIUDJV XOST
“SnyL[NOVUT SIOULOT
‘epneoliqni sruodeT
“INTTLS sngqqyArqouxeyoO
“SUVOLISIU Sn.104dO0.10TL
“SdootyeNoVUL VUTOSOSTOG
“IVA
‘snyvyjeqey SAYOT[I000g
“UINYLNOVUL VULOISOOTIA
“pganmwyg
‘sn[nounajoods sisdoqAy
“IVA ‘SNINUAOD
‘SILINJOVIVS
‘S19300000 SIdoTIsdAH
“sngvuny sAUIYOLUIyy
“SNUITVAY,
‘snqvqynsiq sATIIYIYVAIO
‘sI[Btod.1od Sn{TJOULes
“SI[VUTJUOT OUITES
‘Bulporva vaplueig
UOpo[quIy
*snjyvjou
‘sHOTesoul sIULOdeT
“SLISodn.t Soy[dolqury
“SUVOLLSIU
‘SNIVIOSV] SIL.IOICO.LOT AL
UN.T9} OWS
UMUNUBASOIVULAD VULOJSOAP,
“snyvoul[yni
‘snqV.ou[nA
‘snyvlloqey.
_ _ ‘slyeuoz sAyyyorpIov0g
‘snovyuvine snjoyodsAy
“UMOTOWYS
UMUBOLIOULIY UNTpd}soz4S
‘DDOLY YOUINT
[Cope.
495
1870.]
‘soloods Zé,
‘shaysopidea'T
“CIULY 3
*IOSUId LOW
‘eyINSsuVy
*IOJUDATOATU SHAINIUY
“UINSUO[GO VULOJSOXOT|T
‘snsdv][oo snwoysoyosy
*SI[VUAIYOV]
‘SLIQU[ISSVIO SHULOISOYOAIY
*S0.10] SNUIOJSOICD
"SNUIINIVUL sno Ly
‘sdoone] SIueso}0Ug
*soloods 17
‘shosso snoysopideyT
‘losuedIo0y
‘eT Nsuy
“SNIVUISIVU SN.ANION
‘snyeydeoA}vrd snantury
‘snsor[ided
‘snsdv[oo
‘SISuUOIpId
‘snuo03a.100
‘SNUIISSRVYY
‘snysnqo.
*SnUOd SNUIOJSOYOAI
‘So.1aq SNUIOISOTLO
‘sIUIY SNUTOISOUTIO
"SIUUTd ITY snToung Ty
‘soloeds cg
OZAUIOIIOT
‘snoysopideT
“ens y
“SHIVUISAVUL SN.NJON
snyeydooAqvld snaniwey
‘snsoyided
‘snsdv[[0o
‘snuos0100
‘snq[e
i
|
|
‘SNUIATO0 SNUIOISOYOAIG
*S9.104 SNUIOISOIVO
TUMRULOUR vULOJsOdUIRD
‘STAASIV snyyeusoqAFy|
‘SIUIJY SNULOISOULTO
‘sppoumoy.tsd
*sdoona] sttiad0joug
‘so1oeds J¢
“sIsuduOINY sneysoptde'T
unto} WopoAToOg
*SLIVAT[O SH[Ope[doH,
'SUdDSO[NAD) SNANTVYIYOT
‘ds ‘sopordivp
‘SHAMNAYGAIO SNULOJSOYOAIT
SUVOLISTU
‘S0.107 SNULOISOIVD
UINTVUOUV VUOJSOdWIRO
*xA1OICOIOLUL SNIPOMANQTV 2
‘snporondy
‘sndoose[oy
‘sdoone] sIues0}04 gd
496
Stated Meeting, August 19, 1870,
. Present, four members.
Vice President, Prof. J. C. CREsSoN, in the Chair.
A letter of acknowledgement was received from the Royal
Society of London.
Donations for the Library were received from the Societies
at Moscow, Offenbach, Bonn, Strasboure, Lausanne, Salem
and Worcester; the Academies at St. Petersburg, Copen-
hagen, Vienna, and Chicago; the Observatory at St. Peters-
burg; the Geological Societies at Vienna, Berlin and Flor-
ence; the Hospital at Rome; the Royal and Zoological So-
cieties in London; the Royal Society in Dublin; the Oriental
Society, and Yale College at New Haven; the Franklin
Institute, and Medical News at Philadelphia; the Freedmen’s
Bureau and Howard University ; Herr Diimichen of Berlin ;
Sig. Dora d’Istréa of Athens; Dr. Andrews of Chicago, and
Mr. Edmund Quincy of Boston.
The death of Mr. Samuel V. Merrick, a member of the
Society, was announced by Prof. Trego, as having occurred at
Philadelphia on the 18th inst., in the 70th year of his age.
On motion, Dr. D. R. Goodwin was requested to prepare an
obituary notice of the deceased.
The death of Sir James Copeland, M. D., a member of the
Society, was announced as havine taken place in London,
July 14, in the 77th year of his age. Dr. Pepper was ap-
pointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased.
Prof. Cope communicated a paper entitled “ Kighth Contri-
bution to the Herpetology of Tropical America.” (See Pro-
ceedings, below.)
Prof. Cope communicated a paper entitled ‘‘ Contribution
to the Ichthyology of the Marafion.” \See Proceedings below.)
Prof. Cope communicated certain statements concerning
Liodon perlatus, Cope; and the results of his studies of
the Crania of the orders of Reptilia and Batrachia recent and
extinct.
/; lowh
August 19, 1870. as) ( [Cope.
Prof. Cope stated that he had been acquainted for some time with a
Mososauroid reptile from the white rotten limestone of Alabama, and had
formerly thought it to be the Mososaurus brumbyi, of Gibbes. He was
satisfied of the error of this determination, and as the hemal arches of the
caudal vertebrze were not co-ossified, he referred it to the genus Liodon,
under the name of LZ. perlatus. A dorsal vertebra had been already de-
scribed in the Synopsis of Extinct Batrachia and Reptilia of North
America, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1869, 198.
Prof. Cope communicated some results of his studies of the structure of
the crania of the orders of Reptilia and Batrachia, recent and extinct.
He explained the characters of the Ichthyopterygia as follows :
The quadratojugal present (squamosal of Owen, Anatomy of the Ver-
tebrata); postorbital (of Owen) present.. The sqwamosal (supratemporal
of Owen) extending over the inner side of the parieto-squamosal arch so
as to conceal the parietal portion of it, to the anterior part of the tem-
poral fossa, and in contact with its fellow of the other side. It sends
down a columella to the pterygoid. It extends also for a remarkable
distance downwards behind the osquadratum. ?Opisthotic present. A dis-
tinct element exists behind the quadratum, which he thought might be the
suprastapedial, otherwise called the incus, or hyomandibular, according
to Huxley. The pterygoid prolonged backwards and expanded, in contact
with the basi-occipital, and extending from it to the quadratum. The pos-
terior pair of elements of the superior face of the cranium being deter-
mined to be squamosals, the interpretation of the anterior elements be-
comes simple. The rhombic element with fontanelle is parietal (frontal
of Owen Anatomy of Vertebrata), and the preceding pair are the frontals
(nasals, Owen). The true nasals were shown to lie at the proximal end
of the nares.
The structure of the suspensorial region in the Anomodont, Lystro-
saurus, was next pointed out. In this order there is no quadratojugal
arch, and the zygomatic arch contains a very small postorbital. The
squamosal has an extraordinary development, and extends on the parieto-
quadrate arch, and on the inner side of the temporal fossa on each side of
the parietal. The parietal is not so far concealed as in Ichthysaurus, but
its posterior-lateral process may be seen wedged in between the squamosal
and the thin, plate-like opisthotic, which lies external to the supraoccipi-
tal on each side. The opisthotic is the parietal of Owen, and the parietal
branch of the squamosal is the mastoid of the same author.
This branch in Ichthyosaurus and Lystrosaurus is continuous with the
zygomatic portion of the bone, though another element might have been
originally codssified with it. The posterior portion of the squamosal is
prolonged remarkably, it is applied to the posterior face of the quad-
ratum, and extends to its articular extremity. The guadratumis a small
bone of a plate-like form, in contact with the squamosal above and the
? proétic inwardly and anteriorly. Swprastapedial not distinguished. The
parietal branch of the squamosal sends down a columella to the pterygoid.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—3)E
Cope.] 498 [ August 19, 1870.
The proétic is a distinct though small bone, below and in front of the
squamosal. The presphenoid is plate like, and much as in the Croc-
odilia.
Prof. Cope thought that the Anomodontia, one of the earliest (Triassic)
types of Reptilia are one of the best examples of a generalized group
among the vertebrata. Thus the structure of the posterior part of the
Cranium is largely that of Ichthyopterygia, and partially that of Lacer-
tilia; of the oral parts of the cranium, the prodtic and mandible, of
Testudinata. The vertebral characters are partly those of Ichthyoptery-
gia, and the sacrum and rib articulations those of Dinosauria. The pe-
culiar presphenoid is characteristic of Crocodilia, and the osseous inter-
orbital septum, of the Rhynchocephalia.
The position of the posterior plate of the squamosal in Ichthyopterygia
and Anomodontia seemed conclusive as the homology of that element with
the bone covering the cartilaginous quadratum in Batrachia Anura, and
the osseous quadratum in Urodela and Dipnoi, called tympanique by
Cuvier, and temporo-mastoidean by Dugés. This bone had been already
homologized with the preoperculum of Teleostei by Huxley, and it is
thought thatits present determination in the Reptilia established the serial
homology of the preoperculum of the fish with the squamosal plate of
the mammal.
Prof. Kirkwood communicated a paper “On the Mass of
the Asteroids between Mars and Jupiter.” (See Proceedings
below.)
Prof. Cresson described the thunder storm of the 4th inst.
at the Belmont Water Works.
And the Society was adjourned.
On the MAss of ASTEROIDS between MARS and JUPITER. By PRo-
FESSOR DANIEL Kirkwoop, Bloomington, Indiana.
According to Leverrier, the total mass of the ring of minor planets does
not exceed ith of the earth’s mass, or ;5'55th of that of Jupiter. So great
a disproportion between two adjacent planets is without a parallel. Is
the fact susceptible of a probable explanation ?
Were the sun transformed into a gaseous spheroid with an equatorial
radius equal to the diameter of the earth’s orbit, a large number of the
known asteroids would, in perihelio, plunge into the solar mass and be
reunited with it. Now this, in all probability, is precisely what occurred
soon after the abandonment of the asteroid zone, while the solar nebula
was in the process of condensation. The powerful mass of Jupiter would
produce great eccentricity in parts, at least, of the primitive ring. Large
portions of its matter, or a considerable number of minor planets in a
state of vapor, may thus have been precipitated upon the sun before the
latter had contracted within their perihelion distance. The small mass
of Mars may perhaps be accounted for on the same hypothesis.
July 15, 1870. ] 499 [Ackerman,
A REGISTER of METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS made at
BOIS CHENE, near Port-au-Prince, Hayti. By Pror. A. ACKERMAN,
National Museum.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, July 15, 1870.)
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
All the meteorological observations have been made at ‘‘Bois Chéne,”’
S.E. from the harbor of the Capital, at an elevation of 52 meters above
the mean level of the sea, with the exclusion of those comprised between
the 19th May, 1866, to the 17th November, 1867, which have been made
at ‘‘Lalue,”’? suburb E of the Capital, country seat of General Lamothe,
elevation 57 meters*
The rain-guage used is that of Babinet; its surface of reception is four
square-decimeters, so that a centilitre of water represents { millimeter
of rain in elevation. No building, trees or other obstacles influenced
the quantity of received rain, and in order to avoid a correction for evap-
oration, the water was measured after every rain, except what fell at
night, which was registered before sunrise, and without having applied a
correction. Elevation of the funnel above ground 38 feet.
The diurnal rain comprises that which fell between 6 0 clock A. M. and
6 o’clock P. M., and nocturnal rain that which was received in the re-
maining twelve hours.
As to the division adopted for the electric phenomena of the atmos-
phere, the first column reproduces the number of days during which it
thundered, and lightning was perceived; however, one phenomenon may
have been independent of the other, for example: the thunder was heard in
the morning, and the lightning seen in the evening of the same day; this
day is noted in the first column. In order to diminish a sort of want of
precision in this first column, the last column represents the days of
‘‘orages’’+ which passed above town or its near environs, notwithstanding
they have already been counted in the first column. The number of days
during which thunder alone was heard, or lightning only perceived, form
the successive columns and can only be considered as minima, for the
phenomena may have escaped observation, principally lightning at night.
There are days during which thundering lasts for hours, and others
when lightnings are so numerous in the evenings as to amount from 30 to
80 in a minute of time, and so for several hours. Particulars about light-
nines, on colors, numbers, bifurcations, multiple divisions, distances
ascending and descending, &ec., &e., have been published in the Moniteur
Officiel of the Republic.
Relative to temperature, the thermometers are standard instruments,
from the best makers in Paris, divided on the stem into 4 centigrades, so
that a tenth of a degree is easily estimated; from time to time the varia-
tion of zero-point was verified and the correction applied to the obser-
vations.
* “Talue” and “Bois Chéne” are situated about a mile from the sea shore, and both stations near
together, about ? part of a mile asunder.
} Thunder storm and rain.
Ackerman. | 500 [July 15,
The instruments have no frame, and are freely suspended without be-
ing shaken by the wind. The absolute minimum is given by a Ruther-
ford spirit therm., and the absolute maximum by Negretti & Zambra’s
mercurial therm., both Salleron’s construction at Paris.
The hourly observations of temperature are performed by ‘‘ Breguet’s
thermometrographe horaire No. 6,’? [See Arago, not. scientif. vol. V,
628-632, and Desains: physique, vol. I, page 247; or Daguin: phys.
vol. II, page 546, etc.] This instrument having an arbitrary scale, it was
compared with a standard therm. in two constant temperatures, and fur-
ther checked by numerous simultaneous observations. Breguet’s No. 6
acts in the most satisfactory manner, but is much more sensible than
other thermometers, so that for the comparisons the instruments were
read at a distance with the aid of a cathetometer, and further all the cares
taken to obtain correctness, ete.
The exposure of all the instruments is as follows:
A square room of 14 feet a side, has openings towards the four cardinal
points, a covered gallery on the South side, is without ceiling, covered
with shingles, so that the air circulates freely day or night, from what-
ever direction the wind is blowing.
On the North side is the window furnished with latticed blinds, painted
white, nearly of the same form as prescribed in the ‘‘ Directions for
meteorol. observ.’’ Smithsonian Institution 1860, fig. 2. Elevation of
thermometers above ground 10 feet.
The mean daily temperature (and consequently the mean monthly and
annual) are the results of the 24 registered hourly observations. The
given factor is the co-efficient by which the difference between the abso-
lute maximum and minimum is to be multiplied, and the product added
to the minimum, in order to obtain the same mean daily temperature as
given by Breguet’s hourly thermometrograph.
About ten personal observ. were made daily, with free thermom.,
psychrom., barometer, winds, clouds, &c., &c., besides the reading of the
maxim and minim and the said thermometrograph, thermometer exposed
to the sun, to nocturnal radiation, etc.
The second decimal of Fahrenheit degrees does not occur in observa-
tion, and is either the result of the mean addition or produced by the re-
duction of Centigrades into Fahrenheit degrees.
The barometers, Fortin’s, had been compared with the barometer at
the astron. observatory in Paris, and the makers had given the correction,
a constant, for every one. Further, the observations were corrected for
capillarity, the column reduced to the temperature of zero degree (82°
Fahrenheit) and reduced to the mean level of the sea by the formula of
Jamin, Cours de physique de l’école polytechnique, vol. I, end of page
263.
r 2 H
X = 18405" (1 + 0.002552. cos 2 L) [1 + a 7 108, 05
1000 h
H « h being reduced to 0° C. X being known the value of H gave the
pressure on the level of the sea.
1870. ] 50 1 (Ackerman.
Meteorological Station of Port aw Prince.
Extracted from the Registers.
I. Rary anp ELEcTRICAL PHENOMENA.
Number of
thunderstorms
Rain expressed in millim. Number of days of observed. over the
town or its
1863 a environs.
‘= || thunder & |thund’r) lightn’g
total. |diurnal) nocturnal] = || lightning. | alone. | alone, | total.! nocturnal
Aug. 82.50} 47.50 35.00) 18 2 ® 1 >@ 1 1
Sept. 128.00) 16.25 111.75) 17 17 0 2 3 2
Oct. 257.00! 85.00 172.00) 23 2 0 1 1 1
Nov. 91.50) 27.25 64.25] 13 1 0 1 1 1
Dee. 18.50) inappr. 18.50! 6 0 0 0 0 0
f 577.50| 176.00 401.50| 72 22 0 4 6 5
1864.
Jan. 0.75) inappr. 0.75) 2 0 0 0 0 0
Feb. 123575 eel oto0) 108.25) 14. 3 1 2 0 0
March.} 110.75 0.00 110.75! 11 0 0 0 0 0
April. 212.00 0.00 212.00) 15 2 1 2 2 2
May. 260.75} 183.00 127.75} 17 5 1 1 1 i
June. 59.50 1.50 58.00, 7 5 8 0 2 1
uly. 108.75} 45.25 63.50; 14 8 6 0 3 2
Aug. 223.50} 152.50 71.00 19 15 1 0 6 5
Sept. 164.25} 11.50 152.75) 13 20 2 0 9 1
Oct. 170.75) 48.00 122.75] 13 1 1 0 0 0
Nov. 61.00} 17.00 44.00, 13 2 0 0 2 2
Dec. 45.50) 10.50 39.00) 7 2 0 0 1 1
1541.25] 434.75 1106.50 145 || 63 21 5 26 15
1865.
Jan. 20.40 4.00 16.40) 5 0 0 0 0 0
Feb. 13.00 0.00 13.00) 5 0 0 0 0 0
March 77.75 0.00 77.10) 12 0 0 0 0 0
April. 193.50 8.00 185.50) 19 2 1 0 0 0
May. 451.25) 157.75 293.50! 24 17 4 0 4 2
June. 74.75 44,25 30.50) 14 8 8 1 3 3
July. 103.00) 38.00 65.00, 10 7 2 0 4 3
Aug. 129.00) 54.00 75.00) 15 9 3 1 3 1
Sept 298.25) 131.75 166.50, 20 11 8 1 3 1
Oct 151.50) 46.25 105.25; 22 13 3 1 3 2
Noy. 158.50) 14.50 144.00; 9 4 2 4 1 1
Dec. 28.00 0.00 28.00) 2 0 i 1 | © 0
1698.90) 498.50! 1200.40 157 71 32 9 1 20 13
Ackerman. | 9) 0 2 [July 15,
II. Ramin AND ELECTRICAL PHENOMENA.—Continued.
Number of
thunderstorms
Rain expressed in millim.; Number of days of observed. over the
4 town or its
1866. | eel environs.
f = || thunder & |thund’y) lightn’g
total. diurnal) nocturnal 4 || lightning. | alone. | alone. |! total. nocturnal
Jan. T2502 100 46.25) 9 2 1 0 2 2,
Feb. 75.50} 12.00 63.50) 12. | 2 2 1 1 1
March.| 149.25 5.00 144.25) 11 0 0 0 0 0
April. 362.25 inappr. 362.25) 22 | 8 2 aft 3 2
May. 226.50} 57.00 169.50} 18 13 ult 1 7 5
June. 146.00} 27.25) 118.75) 17 || 13 8 1 3 3
July. 150.50; 96.0} 54.00) 15 | 13 10 1 6 2
Aug. 125.50 8.75 116.75} 18 || 16 4 0 7 i
Sept. 131.50} 37.50 94.00) 20 |; 20 3 3 6 5
Oct. 110.00} 39.00 71.00; 20 7 4 1 4 4
Nov. 25°50 ie 83.20 42.25) 11 il 0 0 0 0
Dec. 56.25 Inappr. 56.25} 6 0 0 il { 0 0
1716.00) 377.25) 1338.75|179 || 95 Bis) 10 39 31
1867.
Jan. 51.25 0.00 51.25) 4 0 (| 0 0 0
Feb. 26.75 5.00). 21.75) 9 2 0 0 1 0
March. 22.75 2.00 PAS) 1 1 1 0 0
April. | 199.50) 14.75 184.75| 13 || 6 0 0 0 0
May. 322.7 60.00 262.75| 17 || 13 2 2 5 3
June. 177.00} 28.25 148.75) 17 11 7 0 2 1
July. 54.25} 41.50 12.75) 9 13 1 4 2 0
Aug. 138-75) 47.25) 91.50) 15 15 8 0 4° 4
Sept. 2ATD a 2Ss25 24.50) 7 14 1 6 2 2
Oct. 126.75 3.75 123.00) 12 ali 3 iL 2 2
Noy. 63.25) 19.50 43.75) 15 1 2 3 2 1
Dec. 41.50 0.00 41.50) 3 0 0 il 0 0
1277.25| 250.25) 1027.00)119 99 25 18 20 13
1868.
Jan. 0.50 0.25 0.25) 2 0 0 1 0 0
Feb. 143.25 225 142.00) 17 Mi 0 3 il i
March. 86.75} 10.00 76.75) 15. 1 0 0 0 0
April. 102.00} 47.00 55.00) 15 4 0 0 0 0
May. 817.50} 115.00 202.50} 25 | 17 4 1 6 5
June. 52.00} 47.75 4/25) 14 6 10 0 i 1
July. 42.75| 14.00 28.75) 13 14 2 12 5 2
Aug. 129.50} 43.50 86.00} 13 18 3 5 7 6
Sept. 282.00) 151.00 131.00} 24 21 4 0 16 12
Oct. 118.00} 13.75 104.25} 14 10 5 3 1 1
Nov. 117.75} = 29.00 88.75} 17 8 1 2 3 2
Dec. 3.00} 20.00} 23.00) 10 () 0 1 | @ 0
1435.00! 492.50 942.50:179 106 { 99 28 | 40 30
F()\2
1870.] 503 f Ackerman.
Ill. Rarn anp EvLEctTrRicAL PHENOMENA— Continued.
Number of
Rain expressed in millim. Number of days of observed. thunder-
storms over
1869. 5 _ the town or
f B thunder &|thund’r) lightn’g pes he DNit ons:
total. |diurnal, poctunD al G lightning.| alone. | alone. || total |nocturnal
Jan. 26.75) 15. 00) 11. 75| 9 | 1 0 0 0 0
Feb. 141.00) 7.50) 133 pO 12 | 2 0 1 1 1
March. | 108.75] 5.50) 10325| 14 || 1 1 | O nal
April. 123.25 inap. | | 5 1 0 0 0
May. 826.25) 105.00 15 ao 0) a 5
June. 139.25, 64.50) 18 4 i |. @ 4
July. 97.50| 48.50) 21 5 Olea tees 1
Aug. 265.50 158.25 21 7 0 | 10 3
Sept. 267.25) 31.25) 19 5 2 (ard 6
Oct. 151. 50) 25.09 17 4 4 6 6
Nov. 28. 75| 6.00 4 1 3 0 0
Dee. 6.00} 1.00 0 0 1 | 0 0
ee 4 eS ———————
1681.45, 467.50 1214.25) 170 124 31 12 48 27
eeceraal| Sate —|—= Sasa (aaa Days of electric
| a b ce jphenom. aybic.
1864 1541.25) 434. 75) 1106.50) 145) 63 21 5 26 15 89
1865 1698.90, 498.50) 1200.40) 157 71 32 9 21 13 112
1866 1716.00) 377.25} 1338.75] 179 95 3 10 39 3L 140
1867 1277.25} 250, 25 1027.00) 119) 99 25 18 20 13 142
1868 1435. 000) 492.50} 942.50} 179}| 106 29 28 40 30 163
1869 | 1681.45] 467.50) 1214.25| 170|| 124 31 12 48 27 167
The remarkable increase of days of electric phenomena is not yet accounted for.
Nothing has been changed in the mode of observing, or hours of observing, and all are
personal observations. I may add, that for the last four years agriculture has been ne-
glected in the mountains surrounding the town.
Mean value of a rainy day in millim.
1863. | 1864. 1865. 1866. 1867. 1868. 1869.
January. 0.37 4.08 §.36 12.81 0.25 2.97
February, 8.35 2.60 6.30 2.98 8.43 11.75
March, 10.07 6.48 13.57 4.55 5.78 GUL
April, ae 10.08 16.47 15.35 6.80 7.25
May, 15.34 18.80 12.58 18.98 12 70 18.12
June, 8.50 5.34 8.56 10.41 Syl 11.60
July, Well 10.30 10.03 |- 6.03 3.29 6.10
August, 6.35 11.76 8.60 6.97 9.25 9.96 12.06
September, 7.53 12.63 14.90 6.57 7.53 aloes) 12.15
October, 11.17 13.13 6.90 5.50 10.56 8.43 8.42
November, 7.00 4.70 17.60 11.40 4.21 6.93 4.11
December, 3.08 6.50 14.00 9,25 13.83 4.30 | 2.00
(July 15,
504
Ackerman. ]
00°86
G66
GOP
00°08
00°98
00°SS
00°C
00°GhE
00°0F
00°F
006
002
“UUTTTTTAL
‘SINOY, FZ
u
U pur p
U
u
U
U
u pur p
U puv p
u
U
U
U
‘Jou 10
woNeINd, jeuMid
OS'LT
OS'ST
00°C9
00°SS
GLOF
00°08
00°F
00°C9
00°8S
00°89
00°26
GL0
“UTTUAL
“SINOY F
UIUE O&T
“JOU 10
U
uoleandg, [Vung
&%
its
‘Vd.
00°8
OG'LT
00°88
GL LE
00°C&
“OUT OAL
U
U
u
u
“UTUL Ze p
y ~-40u 10
uolneing) [RUMI
ayrq
‘loquieadeq
“I9QUIOAON
*19Q0J9Q
‘requieydeg
Asnsny
‘Aine
‘oun
“AVI
Tdy
‘TOIL
“AIVNAG IT
‘AIVNUB LE
“G98T
FOBT
“698T
"E981 “ISQDAY AO IS] AHL AONIS HINO] AUTAWY AO AVC ANIVY SOW AHL
05
1>7U.]
{Aekerman.
00 F
GL FL
00°C
O0'GL
00 Fé
00°06
00°09
OO FEL
00°09
GLY
00 29
0G L
“WITTE
*SOUOJS|IVY, PUB ULBY x
u
Uu
u
u
uN p
u
p
“Jou 10
UgVIMNg [Wang
S
wD
=)
T
1G
Go19
00°F9
00° LF
00' TT
00°ST
00°LG
00°96
00°ST
00°88
| GZ'0
| “CUT ET EAL
uw
|
‘UIUL 0G | UD
“UIUL OZ ~P
“ULUL GG u
‘ulm ee |p
UI OZT) Ul
‘UIU GOT] ou
1
UU CE | OU
UU GET) ou
YP
| JOU 10 |
U4VvIndg, [.Wmid)
8I
0IV
GLE
GG
00°91
GL'se
S61
Goes
0G'IS
09°GL
0S°eL
00°8S
00°S1
00°81
“WUTTTTAL
“Ule GéT| Pp
Uy p
Uu
‘you 10
UOHVInG [Wand
i
ize
00°66
GL'98
GLTG
00°96
| G'S
00°8F
09°99
0S°9S
j CULLTEIAT
0€ 1S
0¢ UE
UT
UZ
"WOE “UF
UIUL GOT
“UTU 0
uy p
u
“u
u
U
u
“JOU 10
WONVMNG [,WIMId
|
‘Taqutoood,
‘TOQUIOAON
‘I9qopO
‘raquta}deag
‘snsny
‘Arup
‘oun
“AVIA
‘Lady
‘YOAV IAL
‘LIVIA OT
‘AIVNUBE
“6981
“8981
“LO8L
“998T
‘panunyuog—eggy ‘LSANAY dO LST AHL AONIS HLNOJ{ AUMAG AO AVG ANIVY LSOP AH,
5B
Gr
Xe ——e),
S-—ViOlie
A P.
[July 15,
Ackerman. }
06: 1G GEG 09:06 «=| O06 L¢ 9T'88 F8°o9 0€ 92 09°0S CL 81 GE 06 GL'6G 00°98 86°19 0G CL OT
86 586 66°91 08°06 88°19 GL98 08°69 PLL OL9G WEL 98°06 9149 81°98 PF 69 88°91 “AON.
00°LZ OL°0G 08°96 08°69 89°06 86°69 0808 OF SS G69L 06°66 08°69 88°88 96°TL C684 ‘WO
00 LG Tr6L 08°96 08°69 - 0S 6 98°CL 86°18 V8 FG 8.8L $9 F6 08°69 F106 96°TL 16°64 “qdoy
FOLGE FE 0G OL 16 OTOL 9G°66 Go'Gh 69°18 08 °8Z 06°8T TG 86 PP 69 8P G6 89°C) COS “OuV
06°L2 86°61 90°86 91 OL 99°66 89'S OV'I8 80°86 FOL 9T'L6 80°69 81°68 PL GL 96°08 “ATUL
$9 9G GL'8L ; 00°6 96°89 E16 09'S LE°08 68'9G 00ST 06°S6 80°69 GE06 GS OL 06 08 “oun?
F8 TG OLLL P86 00°89 88°88 SL TL 99°64 FOS OF LT OF 16 96°89 00°98 FS°89 GL6L “ART
CLLG 9L-0G 96 °S6 F919 89°06 6G'0L GG6L || GEC OLLL 09°68 8§ 99 $948 FS°89 OULL Thy
7G '06 FE0S 00°S6 91°49 TZ 68 06°89 O9LL j| 08.86 0G 9L 88°88 80°09 GUS8 66°99 F6PL YOAV
9166 FOG F016 88°19 08°L8 9G°99 0°92 86°96 9€ SL 96°68 89°69 F998 81°89 00 LA “Qo,
09°US 08°6L 0S°C6 06°6S G8 "G8 60°99 80°S2 0G TS POLL F&§ 88 F8 9G GOS 86°99 66 FL ULL
EERO! pear (ol (e) ae io} {e) (e) _o fe] Om = xe) me) {e) ie) (eo)
“LOST “‘O98T
91°SG 00°81 88°88 G 00°98 00°89 OL! | \ G9°G) LTGE
SL1G e'CT PLO6 96°89 00°98 OL OL CP Lh CFL) “AON
SOL PO'16 $9°$9 TE"88 96°LL 88°64 GF 08 490
PL 91 F919 FS 88 O09 TL 68°84 FL 18 4aog
OF LL 08°69 F016 89'S F618 18°08 “ONY
F831 FG [Lh GLGO 89°6L OLS 98°18 “AID?
Fe) fo) ° ) 0 ° 84°18 09°18 “OUN(?
G66L PSL), “AVTT
96°8L GE"Sh TWady
06°LL 68°91 “TOIe VL
9G°C), 86°C “Qo
| SP LL PL GL Ue
| ° | | | )
“pander “pgydue | UEXvVU | “UULEUTUE | WUTEXRUE | “WUT | Ky yQUoUL \|-p gudure paTdure | “WIxXBUt | “ULLUEUU eee “ATYQUOUL
jo jo Jo jo
ouayxXy |) uUroy | ysousip | gsomory ———————————]| vo] |)oWolxg| Uvey | ISOs | ysoMoy | ———]| uvofy
uUvouwlt ATYQUOTL uvoul ATYIUOTL
“GOST \ “POST
“HUN LVUA INS,
[Ackerman.
1870. ]
F6°GL ‘TaquaNa(
GSS, ‘savoA 9 JO [VNUUY UVOTL gery), “TOC LUDAON
) 06°64 “LdQOWO
a — 01°08 *roquuaydas
6964 698T 69°18 “4Snou vy
(08°84 SO8T 06°18 AVL fs
F684 L981. O06 TS ‘oun
OL 8h 998T Cr'6L ‘AVANT
00°64 GOST 60°64 “Udy
1G°8h POST C8 9h ‘TOLVTAL
a Ze), *KIVNAQAT
10°94 *AIVNULS?
ae seks. pert = Se ee a le)
“MINLVUAdIWNG J, TIVONNY NVGJ ‘SUVAA 9 AO “UAHA Y, ATHINOJN NVA
960 OF TS OF 16 Fr'09 Sew 18°99 6G°G), 96% GF'0G 98°06 OL'T9 96°18 PL99 68°C) DIL.
1G 19°81 OF 16 F079 10°88 9f 69 6L8L 88°66 G8°LL OF 16 6g 19 GL°98 06°89 1694 “AON.
89°GS 80°LL OF 16 61°89 69°88 Goth 90°08 FOES 80°6L 066 96°69 FS"$8 GS"6L WO
CL TG COLT FL66 69°69 ¢8°68 66°1L 96°08 00°LZ 8 LL F9'F6 F919 90°68 “WAdS
SSS €6°8T 06°66 68°19 SP'06 OST 19°08 89°TS 09°TZ OF O00 61°89 G8 T6 “ony
F606 68°TE FE 86 00°89 F566 G9 TL F918 9008 6961 OF 00L FE'0L 96 G6 “AU?
81°06 OIG FG'86 9F 19 86°66 PL GL OF 8 PS 6% OL°0Z 90°86 61°89 BPG “oun f*
96°06 Gs 61 OL°L6 F499 LO'16 69°TL 69°18 0° LZ 09'1Z OL F6 OLL9 96°68 96'8) “AVITAL
91°63 FP 6L F9°S6 86°99 16°06 LLOL 68°18 PLIs FIGS FF 96 06°99 6S 06 81°89 Thay
80°86 TV LL 0§ G6 CG P9 6498 86°69 LOLL 08°86 GL8L OF 16 09°%9 96°98 FILO “YOAV
666 IL0@ F8 G6 0G"E9 IL'88 00°89 8G°Lh 90°08 OL°0G 08 6 Pa'CY 96°18 99°99 G “qo
FOE PLS OF 16 96°6S 6988 86°99 09°9L 6196 91 66 06°66 POG OL'88 F6°P9 9791 “URL?
fo} (o) i fo} fo} fe) fo} (oe) fe) {e) fo} (9) fo} (0) (e)
“paydue | “pyiydure) -wirxeur | curr | texeur | cupuytr | “Augmour |p armdure pPAdure) “WEXBUE | “UEPUTUUE | "UU EXRUL UTPUTUL | “A [UG UO UL
Jo Jo Jo Jo
SWIXA | UWeoyT | JSolLstET | JsoMVoy |————_——— uray |) oulatyxg | Urey | JSoUSTH | JSoMoT —— UvOW
j ust APYJUOPL | Uva ALYJUOTL
*698T “89ST
“panUrjuUoy—AUALVULALW J,
[July 15,
508
Ackerman. ]
66D) £9 °C
LL'6L 88°SL
79°18 LLL
12°88 9% 6L
€9°€8 98°Ld,
1G°¢g 90°84
GE"G8 e9"Sh
10°98 =| «(OL PL
ILT8 91'S
GL'6) GP'eh
92°08 08°SL
78/81 98°Gh
“4SOUsIy ““ysaM0|
11°98
IT98
69°98
COTS
90°78
88°6L
IT 6L
99°64
4Ysoysly | “SOOT
oD
=
<
te)
i
88°6L
6608
8SF8
06 F8
66F8
G6°S8
69°S8
GOTS
19°18
91°08
PP'sh
LI 'sh
)
a
ica]
)
ye
=H
I~
is
7
All
RS
8
ideo}
~~
a
109!
LVPL
F0'8L
98°92
‘qSoYsttL | “Ysemol
TS°68
G9"F8
99°68
91°68
0g'T8
90°08
96°84
GO'b6L
86'8
fe)
I~
90°12
90°FL
B0'Ls
28°92
80'S)
80°8h,
06°
9g°c)
rata)
¥9°89
SCL
PP 169
‘4solfolt| | “JSoMOT
99°08 $6"
OL'6L bLGh
6218 ST LL
TWTs ItGL
81°98 69'8L
G9'F8 66°LL
OSs 88°62
66°68 95°C)
99°08 99° FL
F608 FOOL
PP8h 09 TL
19°08 OF Sh
sas “4SOMO|
Go'8
Sh'08
98°18
IL8
OL'Ss
68°98
6678
GF 08
eP'08
OL
06
ay,
S>
kX
~~
~
8
(o)
x
~
“YoYo ly “‘qSaMO|
“898T
“LOST
‘99ST
“CO8T
“POST
‘aQuidda
‘TAC ULIAON,
“1901 O
‘Taqute}dsg
Qsnsny
“Ane
‘oun?
“AVI
Tad
*TotR AL
SAIVIIQ AT
‘ATIBVNUBSL
HLNOW AUAAY WOT AWALVURAIWAS, ATIVG
NVA] GSAT ONV ISHMO'T THY,
{ Ackerman.
d09
1870. ]
FL'GL PLS) 88°S eae 99 wh 0g PL)06 6 FL'8'9L et ‘OL aes OF 9LIZO'GL SF'PL GL PL 8E'SL 99'PL|SP PL 96°EL OS FL O'GLIOG'GL'0G'GL 99'S), 99°SL 06'S 4) ‘7 oun’ “89ST
FL GL'96'TL 09'S mice 1'89°CL|F0'EL|89 CL|0F SL GL PL|8P tah bh “SL/80" 84 86°84 96° LL 00 LL 06°SL)66'EL\08 FL'66 "SL 98° Is 89 I8 FL 18 36°18 )90° el 0S$'18) “OT Toqureydeg —.,
GE'GL\89'CL 89%, A 8956 189°C) F0'SL| OFSh 2 ish oh SL FO" 6h 9L ph OL SL 08 PL F6'SL\76'eL/8P- aL 9°9L)86'9L| 99°SL|0G Gh) 78" ph ie ‘PLIOS 741602 1g ysnsny “LOST
al cal 0 Bl excum lexan | lO =O Oe (esc aces aon ee Ons |sekO lien | ©
“ANIVYE ATHUIINGA SAVG AO AYALVYAdINAYT, “SAV TVOSON()
OF Th AG Gh F85GL\6P Al i LLG) (8h \1e"18 BPE FG8|/ST98 04°98 PL°98) 69°98 LP'S8 GES F408 FHLL L0°CL GO'TLIGL'TL 66°CL 18'GL 89°62 16 FL OL PL
| | | [eee ase Sees eae eee eae ee ie
| ee | re a a || Saar is | a S = | a ie i
TLGL CE"h F0° “GL OP" GL loo-ralze-s 98 LL'8L" 08) 0F G8 08'28'FLF8|99'F8 ‘P8"S8) GG Gare GS"OL 8G 94 PL'ZL|80°69|8T 890869 9L'0L)0L° irae TL'96°TL PLC (Poco (7
GG'SL|89'SL|CL PL 0S FL)06'SL|8 9117 h 8h 96°08) 0S °S8] F868 8E 78) F178 F8°E8|0F'S8/FS'08 FS°LL OS FL/9L'OL/9L'0L|90 TL 96°LL BS °CL)/89°CL G6'SL OF GL TaqtuoAON
8G '9L|Z8'9L|8ST'LL|/PS LLIFP SL|6S GLI FLT 802 58 | 83'G8/81'98 06°98|06°98) ZL°98 9F'S8)8P'S8 8408 8" LL|GOELIPLGLICS" oh F6'S1'99 FL/85 SL 'G6'SL 8694 «80190
SPL|60°S4)9S°SL OL 9116892) PF 840908 99 "E89¢ ue OL°G8|9F°98) 81°98 \FS°98) F9°S8/G0'F8 FLIS8 GL LL Opies 8L°TL\0G°ZL 98°CL GS A ¥6°SL\08PL/99 PL Toqutoydeas
Hel ole 96°81, 86" 81/0L°61 PLI8|89°Z8) 86°S8 29° L8 $3 '68|SE 06 9806/8906) F016 | GE "06/8888 ST°98 FO'G8/96"L4) 76 Gh SP PL. au Gh PLSL'8G'91' 0021 GL Ld ysudsny
06°L1}08°81/0L°6L 09°08 )0G°T8) 89 °C8| 00°98 aes on-be OF 16/6 L6|GL'Z6) (89°16) ZS "06| F888, 9 °S8| F628) PS°6L| 00° LL/8T°LL GP LL) 06" my FE°6490'08 8408 A ANG?
—98°LL|80°84'08'8L/69°64| FG '08| 09°18] 0678/9698 F718) P PS'S8 F368) 0968] 90°68) 86°L8| F398 8s" £8 89 TSIGLLL|9L'°SL)89 EL! Vat LPL 99'PLIPL SLOP" On /8T LL A
PG ELISE FL 0G GLP 9L|GLLL|GG"6L| G6 C8 PBes 2508 00° 98 £9" $8|86°98| |8L'98| 00'98/ FL F8, £6'G8|90°0S/OL'9L| PG LL/Gh L184 TL PL 'CL'89 GL 0P SLL FL A AVIN
8E°SL a eee F9°L41|08°81|06 68 )9L°68 OF 'S8/8L" 98 ZL'98) FS°98} (06°98 9F'G8| F8 $8. 98'T8|9L'6L/89 'SL/GPTL109 GL! F0'SL|89°EL\ 0S PLiPS FL 8S°GL ‘ TEudy
89'°CL\OP SL GL PL) OS FL|F8 FL| 9F'9L| PF'8L|8L°08 OF G8] UE"E8 | F8°S8) 99°E8) 99 68] OP G8) Fo" 08 80°S4'Z0°SL|ZG"04L|06°89/Z9°69 39°01 90°TL |@L°TL 196" TL 89°CL F (OUI
09 TL)98°L'9L EL! F8°FL166°92)00°L2 Won GOs Ob ee 99°E8'0G'P8|8E'F8| |ZO'F8| OF'Z8| F308) 00°44) 89°64) 00°89) 8Z°L9| 81°89 Gh 89 80°69 08" 69 Ob OL/O9 TL Areniqod
Poh OSC) OF- 61/08 Ph 86S) 9P79L 9161 )6°6 G8 G6 8 81598 75°98) 8-98 79°88 85-78 98° of Ns LL OF GL 96/89 86°19 OF L Joh, ae 89/69 ae eal eee ALVIUY (?
| |
Eres Te | 0k 6 8 L 9 G i tg 6 [ 2 | & | G | Io | 06 | GL | 8L Pe | OIE |) GIL GAR |) BE WE 2
7S ie | Tf U U U U it U it tt U S UY At U U U itt U U U Tf U Ve =
t+ = +!
: UWVAL—UBON AUFDAD WOA SHTALVUAMINAT, ATHLNO NVa
Ze ld
3
ie)
[July 1
d10
Ackerman. ]
-|JOM SUIMOT[OF JL
=
GP OL ‘JUSIU JV WONVIPVL 0} Posodxo PUL IINIVISdUI9} VIIJ WIIMJIG POATISYO IDUAIaYIp JSoywary
“o0ZL POMIVUL “p.vog Jo VdeId v WO SUTAT ‘aTRoS AIOAT
JIM TOPOULOULIIIY V OULY OUIVS of} IV FO. FG SUIOG oINJVAOdUT9} OOF OT} “JST JSNSNY ‘99ST ‘OT GIT ‘PoAtEsqo Uns ay] 0} posodxe ainqvodtio} JSoUSTEL
°ZE oGG ‘UNS 09 posodxe purv sInzVAoduto} 99.17 WAdMJOq PIATOSqO VoUa.LOYIP IS9yvaty
TH “V “19019,0 9 ‘gost “Ure IYgz OT] WO gF'9g op Op oD ae NOr
‘T pur 0 eaatqaq ‘Q98T ‘ISUSNY WIC oy) UO OF ‘OOT ‘6G8T VOUIS POALOSGO dIMYVIEd U9} ISOS
mo
Curt "turxeu)
(‘UIW—uvou) J
‘VINUITOT aq}? A PoUTVIGO SVAL J TOILE OTT] ‘poAtesqe wad
OS[V SULALT, UNUIU PUL “WHXBUE oyNpOsqV™ ayy PUB ‘SUOTVALSgo JuvystpmMbe Fz Aq aingvaoduro} ATIVp UB9UE OYJ WOATS SUIAVT, JUSUUNAYSUT S,Jonsoa1g
‘ApIep wrout = ‘ur + FX (UE —XVT) 2 E quaseadad []IM BIMULIOT UMOUYy
odngeredttey ATIRp Weel ony of} JWosetdert JOU [[IM Wins-Jey wreyy ‘ATU ae AIV “WHUTUL PUB WIEXVUt ATIVp eMposqe ot} IT
“YJUOUE ATOAS LOF WayV] UVOUE OT] puv ‘Avod OY] UL ALP ALOAI IOJ POYWMo[VO Wood PART STOJOVE DAOGV OIL
e19F0 | 629r'0 | CSPP'O | FIFO | POFFO | ZPSP'O | ‘BePPO | O99F0 | OFVO | LyLPO | TOPO | 999F0 | LosrO | Steed ¢ Jo UroW
gor | TPIS | Ts9F'0 | S4sr0 | e100 | GhP'O | eosh'o | cesro | gIec'o | ecxg"0 | Giro | SLLr0 | 92070 | 6981
gecr0 | Treo | GrSro | Ee6r0 | SLIPO | OIFP0- | SSIh0 | 09r'0 | GzsrO | OPPFO | L99F0 | Z9GrO | O6LF0 | 898L
cs7r0 | Lc0r0 | SIFFO | GPO | goerO | O8Er'O | 9eer0 | SoerO | SSP | 91FF'O | O8Gh'0 | QNLbO | 96Fr0 | LOSI
Trop'o | Mero | FO0P0 | IspPO | ogsFo | Porro | OFF | O1OFO | ElFrO | 90s | Gelro | eosPO | 998L
LOLPO | 6GEF" GLorO | eer | G6LFO | 06LP'0 | SPOFO | S69P0 | 9840 | GLOFO | GIF | Gees" COST
ee | gee | |
od | “AON ‘pO dog “onV “AINE ‘oun | “AVITAL Wid y “IVT | "qo uve
‘XINO ‘WINIJT GNV “WIXV]
ULOATOSAY AHL ULIM AUMOLVEUdINaAYT ATIVG NVA] AHL ONINIVLEO WORX SUIOLOIV YA ATHINOTL NVA
{Aekerman.
511
1870. |
89°% OF 68° IGG 69% 6LT 90'S 62'S GGG 08°% 90S 96'S ‘[dury Apivd woh
CP = | Aer — 1) COL— |} Shits | COL — |) 10). ORES | - ESS 1 Oa | a | OS | a = W ‘d Jo “WHUTTL
eel + tS + OSileaats 80° + VOT + GL'0 + 13°0 + 06°0 ++ 90°L + Gorin ae | OVAL se LYT + TW CV JO XUIN
Dod “AON 0 ‘qdag ‘SnV “ATID GC ‘oun? “AVIN adv TOALVIAL QoL uve
‘SUALUNITIIY NI ‘NOON HLIM GHUVAKOO HLINONW AUAAT WO ‘COST “YOST ‘LOBT ‘NOILVIUVA ATIVG NVAIV
“UCU $6 'EL ‘9987 UL poTINN00 SABOA OAT UT WOTPLI[LOSO JSoVVo.y)
UU 0G OT ‘TONYI[OSO [RoOLloulo.iwg [VNUUYy UvoyL
tO. || 6TE9L , 6819 | OLO9L ) OGT9L , c@@OL | Tee9h , 6C9L | OF@OL | 8G'COL | POCOL | SIFOL | E8'COL [Sth G Jo uvo
€8°2 FS 08° 680 =| S61 £9°% OLS gore 98% EGG 80'F 0g's 18'€ 6981
86°2 08°¢ 6¢'L OFT 10% 8S GE 66% 80°Z 08°E z9's Lg ZL'b R981
69'S POE LPS £80 20S 90°% Oe HOS CLT 91% ze"e 1S? FP LOST
68'S Ore ical £0°0 Ze°G C87 0z'e era 60'S F's EF TL 6o'F 981
p29 || 90'co2 | 61192 | 9e092, | FE T9L | zLT9L | GeeoL | Zercon | OLTOL | 06'S9L | GO'9L | SEPOL | GL'S9L CORT
“UOON 98 |
jenuuy || ‘90q@ “AON 290 dag ‘SnNV “AINE ‘oun “AVITAL Tady “AVAL do Uve
ural
‘SHUVNAY AVOLONGOULINI AHL NI GHALVLS Sv
qHo0dHwat ANY ‘NOON LY AGVWN SNOILVAUUSAO S,AVA AUMAM WOtA AHOAdHa ‘SOON LY AUASsaud JIUANdSOWNLY NVA]
a
~419 ie
Ackerman. | ol ~ [July 15, 1870.
MontHiy AMPLITUDE oF ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE.
Bienes stand ; Lowest stand
(a)
oO —
Barometer. Barometer. |=2a 5
i ee Ee Remarks.
milli-|;| = jmilli-/eo=
o | oS @ | a Sissi
2 = me- |#8 = me- | 755)
S| 8 for, Sy) & ter. =
yl | a | ee eS) EEE ee
1865, |_|
| oh h 2
Jan. |3110 « M)767.19;23) 3 PM 759.61] 7.58
Feb. 23 914 ** |767.33/20) 5 “* ) 760.15) 7.18
March. |13 10° ‘' |767.70/24| 4 “* 760.30) 7.40)
April. |21; 9 ‘* |767.00,26) 4 °* |758.91) 8.09
May. eQ) 6) N1G4283 120) 4 = Seb TeSB I MoO.
June. |28 91% * |764.75)19) 4 ** |760.40) 4.35}
July. 7:9 pPmMi765.70| 5) 3 ** |761.07) 4.63
Aug. [80'39% aA M|763.75 16) AY tS fos 4:9)
B ui
Sept. | 4/8 pm|76407,28 5 -* \758.73| 5.34
h |
Oct. 3110 +a M!763.39) 2) 414‘ 1758.00) 5.39
Nov. 20 9% ‘* 1763.85|10) 4 ** 758.19} 5.66)
Dec. 18 9 * 1766.59) 6 4 ‘ 1759.69] 7.03)
1866.
h 1 eee |
Jan 12 934 4M /769.10/26, 3446PM 760.78, 832 1The highest barom. stand observed be-
Feb 17| 9 ‘* |768.8011) 4 ‘* |761.28) 7.52) tween 1863 to 1870. ;
Mar.2 |12) 94% ‘* |767,13/31} 334 *t 762.10, 5.03) 2Mar.4days without barom.observations
3 |
Apr WO eo 765.10) 18 "44s os (760.98 3.92 %Onsome days the max.A M unobserved
4 |
May. | 6) 9°4 ‘* |764.36 25] 414 ** |75881) 555) Same remark.
June. |2910 “. 1764.75.23] 314 “ 769.45) 4.30) -°Same rema.k.
July. |21/10 “ |765.07) 3] 334 ‘* (760.49) 4.58
Aug. 610 ** 1764.83 30) 3% * \ies-ee| 6.27
Sept, SiON van 764.83 30) A “S55 ia 9.67, _ & The lowest stand between 1863 to 1870.
Oct. 14] 934 ** |'762 65| 7) 444 “ 757.95| 4.70, Great hurricane U. 8. coast.
Nov. 3/10 ‘* 1763/95) 6) 334 ** \757-70)| 6225)
Dec |
1867
h h |
Jan. 28) 834 AM'768 06 20! 38 PM|758.74| 9.32!
Feb. 1| 7 ‘ |767.00 15} 41% ** 1769.50} 6.50]
March. | 5| 914 ‘* |766.05,22' 4 ‘ /759.85' 6.29}
April. |14/ 9% ‘ )765.54/22 4 ‘* (759.47) 6.07)
May. (12,10 “ |763.33 Gb 08 gas)! 2EB
June. j28)9 ‘ 765.86) 9) 4 “* 1758.50) 7.36}
July. GO) 8 765.3430) 06 “© 1759.38; 5.95}
Aug. 11) 644 “ 764.75) 3° 434 “ 759.64) 5.11)
Sept. 30) 744 “ |763.81) 7) 344 ‘* 1769.82) 3.99
Oct. We + \16eG214) 4 ara7\ elo
Nov.7 5| 734 ‘° 1766.42 9) 3844 ** 1760.19} 6.23) 7 From 23 to 28 Nov. no barom. observat.
Dec. 21! 9% ** 1766.37 12) 34% “© I760.72' 5.65)
Certif. ten pages to be conform to the registers of the Meteorological Station of Port-
au-Prince. Prof. A. Ackerman.
913
Stated Meeting, September 16, 1870.
Mr. T. P. JAmEs in the Chair.
Present, six members.
Letters accepting membership, were received from Dr. Wil-
liam Pepper, dated 1215 Walnut Street, Philad., July 16; Dr.
William Boeckh, dated Christiana, Monday, Aug. 11th; Dr.
K. R. Beadle, dated 212 south Highth Street, Philadelphia,
Sept, 7th, 1870. |
Letters acknowledging the receipt of the Society's publica-
tions, were received from the Russian Geographical Society
(79, 80); the Austrian Academy (78, 80); the Cambridge Phi-
losophical Society (X11); and the Cincinnati Observatory
(82, 83).
Letters of Envoy were received from the Russian Geogra-
phical Society ; the Austrian Academy ; M. Dora d’Istria; and
the United States Naval Observatory.
Donations for the Library were received from M. Prud-
homme de Borre, of Brussels; the Geographical Society and
Cours des Sciences, at Paris; the British Association ; London
Meteorological and Geological Societies; Cambridge Philo-
sophical Society; Canadian Naturalist; Silliman’s Journal ;
Prof. C. H. Hitchcock; the Medical News; Penn Monthly ;
Howard University; and the United States Naval, and Cin-
cinnati Observatories.
On motion, the Howard University was placed on the list
of correspondents to receive the Proceedings.
On motion, Prof. Cope’s “Eight Contribution, &c.,” was
ordered to be published in the Proceedings. (See page 553).
Pending nominations 651, 652, 654, 655, and new nomina-
tions 660, 661, were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—87E.
o14
Stated Meeting, October Tth, 1870.
Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. |
Present, sixteen members.
A letter was received from Dr. Goodwin, accepting his
appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Mr. Merrick.
A letter acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings 81 and
58, was received from the McGill University, Montreal.
A photograph for the Album was received from Mr. Samuel
Foster Haven, of Worcester, Mass.
A letter from M. Carlier, dated Great Coram St., No. 31,
near Brunswick Square, London, Sept. 15th, to Mr. Durand,
was read, to inform the Society of the fact that he had received
the Extrait d’Inscription au Grand Livre, No. 148, 986, Serie.
Téme rente, 2778; au nom: Philadelphie (La Société Philo-
sophique Americaine), &c. —
Donations for the Library were received from the Italian
Geological Ccmmittee; the London Linnean Society; the
Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science; the Cambridge
Museum of Comparative Zoology; and the U.S. R.R.&
Mining Register, of Philadelphia.
A donation for the Cabinet was received from Mr. J. A.
McNeill, consisting of a Cap worn by the natives of Chiriqu,
made of the sheath of the Coible Galen nut.
The decease of Judge Robert C. Grier, a member of the
Society, was announced with appropriate remarks, by Judge
Strong. On motion of Mr. Price, Mr. Aubrey H. Smith was
appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased.
Mr. Cope presented for publicatior in the Transactions, a
Memoir on the Ichthyology of the Antilles, which was referred
to a committee consisting of Dr. Leidy, Dr. Bridges, and Dr.
Rushenberger.
1870.] o15
Dr. Brinton described and proposed the purchase of two
rare works now for sale in London—one a Maraho Mexican
theological work and grammar, the other a Moska New
Granada grammar. 'l'he subject was referred to a committee,
consisting of Dr. Brinton, Mr. Hopper and Mr. Price.
Mr. McNeil was then introduced by Prof. Cope, and gave a
sketch of his explorations in Central America, undertaken for
the Peabody Institute, in Salem, and for the Kent Scientific
Institute, at Grand Rapids, Michigan, and his plan for a fifth
expedition, to explore ruined cities on the river which flows
into the Chiriqui lagoon. With $1,200, he could carry on
his researches for six months, and send to the Society which
employed him, objects of antiquarian, ethnological, and natu-
ral history interest.
Dr. Brinton said it was unexplored territory. No stone
monuments were known so far south. They were valuable
as furnishing possibly a key to the connexion between the
Mexican, Central American and Peruvian stone monuments.
Prof. Cope exhibited the remains of a new Cretaceous tortoise, of the
genus Adocus Cope, to be called A. syntheticus. He explained that he
had been able to establish more fully the characters of the genus Adocus ;
that it was found to possess an intergular shield, as in the Pleurodira,
but had not the sutural union of the inferior pelvic elements with the
plastron, characteristic of that type. These characters had been here-
tofore known as correlatives in the order, from the Cretaceous period to
the present time, and that this genus presented us witb the first exception
to the rule. The genus was therefore regarded as a generalized type, and
typical of a new family, the Adocide.
He also made some observations on the metatarsal region of Laclaps
aquilunguis, exhibiting the first example found, and said it proved the
distinctness of those elements from each other in that genus, and their
slender collective proportions. The specimen was an external one, with-
out trace of a rudimental one on its outer face. That its measurement,
10 inches, was indicative of a length of 18 inches for the median meta-
tarsus, a length he had already assigned to it on theoretical grounds.
Nominations Nos. 651, 652, 654, 655, 660, 661, and new
nominations Nos. 662, 663, were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
O16
Stated Meeting, October 21, 1870.
Dr. EMERSON in the Chair.
Present, seven members.
Dr. Brinton stated that the Choctaw Grammar, recently
published by the Society, is being translated into German.
It appears from two letters recently received from Dr. Berendt,
at present prosecuting his researches into the Maya language
and history in Central America, that he has added an ad-
ditional amount of knowledge of the subject equal to that
which was possessed before.
Prof. Cope read a paper on the Osteology of Megaptera
Bellicosa, one of the few whalebone whales of economic value
found within the tropics. He gave a detailed account of the
structure of a specimen from the island of St. Bartholomew,
W. I., and its variations from known species of Megaptera,
especially in the forms of the mandible and nasal bones.
Dr. Emerson read a paper on the part taken by the
American Philosophical Society and Franklin Institute in
establishing stations for meteorological observations, detailing
arrangements for procuring full reports from fifty-two points
in the State of Pennsylvania. He spoke of the important
bearing which those efforts had had upon the present state of
meteorological science:
In February last, the Congress of the United States passed a law for
instituting meteorological observations throughout the country by means
of Government telegrams. This duty has been assigned to the War De-
partment, and active measures are now in progress to carry out the
objects contemplated by the act of our National Legislature.
Through the medium of a pamphlet issued by the Signal Officer
appointed by the War Department, we are informed that stations for
making observations have already been designated throughout all of our
States and Territories, from the Atlantic to the Pacific. By such means,
we shall soon be put in possession of data for determining the conditions
of the atmosphere over a vast region, and enabled to trace the boundaries
and progressive movements of storms and tornadoes, which, generally
following definite courses, may have their coming anticipated through
storm signals.
1870.] O 1 7 | E merson
Such utilization of simultaneous meteorological observations, with
immediate transmission by the magnetic telegraph, is now carried on in
England and most parts of Europe, including Norway, Denmark, Holland,
Belgium, Prussia, Austria, France, Italy, and throughout the Russian
Empire. At your breakfast table in London, Paris, or any other of the
principal cities of Europe, you can now read in the Times, Galignani, and
other leading newspapers, the condition of the weather almost at the
same hour in the morning, in every part of Europe.
More than thirty years ago, a very active interest was taken in this
country, and especially in this city, in regard to meteorological investiga-
tions, and especially those relating to the origin and progression of storms.
Espy, Redfield, Loomis and Olmstead, on this side of the Atlantic, were
the most prominent leaders in the investigations carried on.
The work was not, however, left entirely to individuals, but learned
societies engaged init. In this city, a ‘‘ Joint Committee on Meteorology”
was instituted, consisting of four members of this Society and five mem-
bers of the Franklin Institute, which for several years labored in the
collection of observations, and other measures calculated to promote the
advancement of meteorological knowledge, and the programme of their
plans was almost identical with that now proposed to be carried out under
the auspices of Government. f
The primary meeting of this ‘‘ Joint Committee’’ was held on the 9th
of September, 1834, and the first project set on foot by it was the establish-
ment of competent observers, in different parts of our State and country,
to make simultaneous observations of the conditions of the weather, the
occurrence of storms of rain, hail or snow, the direction of the wind and.
atmospheric currents, quantities of aqueous precipitations, movements of
the barometrical column, temperature, &c.
Of the nine members of this ‘‘ Joint Committee’? when first appointed,
I find myself the only survivor ; and it seems to me a duty I owe to the
Society by which I was appointed, to bear testimony to its former efforts
for the advancement of meteorological scienec—efforts made at a time
when the only means of transmission was by the tardy and costly mail -
service, now superseded by the marvellous capacities combined in the
magnetic telegraph.
For carrying out the projects of the ‘‘ Joint Committee’? money was
needed. This could not be advanced by our Society, then in a condition
of pecuniary embarrassment, nor by the Franklin Institute, which, strange
to say, in this great city, where it should be cherished as a grand capitol
of the industrial arts creating most of wealth, has always been compara-
tively poor.
In this dilemma, application was made to the Legislature of our Com-
monwealth, from which liberal appropriations in money were obtained for
our use, $4,000 at one session, and $3,000 at another. Some of this money
was used by the ‘‘ Joint Committee’’ to defray expenses incurred in print-
ing, corresponding and collecting reports. The largest portion, however,
was spent in supplying each of the fifty-two counties then in the State,
518 Oct. 21,
Emerson.]
with a set of instruments, consisting of a barometer, two thermometers
(one self-registering), and a rain-guage.* The manufacture and distribu-
tion of these instruments was all entrusted by the Committee to my own
supervision. Most, if not all, of these instruments doubtless exist at the
present day, in the court-houses or academies in the counties to which
they were sent.
At the time to which I refer, I was much devoted to meteorological
investigations, and for several years delivered lectures on meteorology,
before the class of the Franklin Institute. I made observations several
times a day, noting the atmospheric changes as to density, temperature,
dew-point, winds, aqueous precipitations, &c. &c. It was whilst so
engaged, that I made a communication to this Society, relative to the
inapplicability, in this country, of the prognostic words inscribed on the
scale-plates of European barometers, such as fair, set fair, rainy, &c.,
which generally indicate the reverse of the prognostic on this side of the
Atlantic, where the barometer has never acquired any high degree of
credit as a weather-glass. ‘‘Stormy’’ is, perhaps, the only inscription
which might be retained for both sides of the Atlantic at or near the sea-
level.
In the course of my observations, I found that storms from the north
and north-east were generally preceded by high risings in the barometer,
especially during the winter months. This observation was recognized
as original by Sears C. Walker, a distinguished member of this Society,
and by Mr. Espy, who regarded it as one of the main supports of his
theory of storms. My communication upon these subjects, I suppose,
still exists among the manuscripts in the archives of this Society. In
reference to the barometers made for distribution in this State, it is
worthy of notice that they do not contain the ‘Enropean inscriptions on
their scale plates, ‘‘fair,’’ ‘‘set fair,’? &c., which, as I have already
stated, are calculated to mislead observers on the western side of the
Atlantic, and bring the instrument into discredit. Another reason for
omitting the inscriptions exists in the fact, that many of the barometers
went to points in the State so greatly elevated as to render deceptive and
useless any inscriptions made on scales graduated from the sea level:
The main consideration of the Committee was to ascertain the fluctua-
tions of the mercurial column as influenced by atmospheric conditions.
In pursuing his investigations concerning the phenomena connected
with the origin and movements of storms, tornados, and water-spouts,
Mr. Espy was chiefly indebted for his data to the materials brought to-
gether by the labors of the “Joint Committee,’ from which he was
enabled to map the courses of many remarkable storms, hurricanes and
water-spouts, which drew marked attention from men of science at home
and abroad.
In 1840, Mr. Espy went to Europe, and laid his views before the British
*The original standard barometer and thermometer from which the other instruments were
graduated, are now in the possession of the Frank
1870.]
{Emerson.
Days.
Hour.
Temperature of|
Air.
Temperature of
et Bulb,
Dew Point.
Course of Wind.
Lower Strata of
Clouds.
Middle Strata of
Clouds.
Upper Strata of
Clouds.
Strength of
Wind.
Weather.
Beginning of
Rain. |
End of Rain.
Barometer.
*SUOIVATOSAO
"29nUwmwo?y purop fo snjpno1g srg Burhunduoson s.toasasg(¢ 07 $W01)09.L~°7
Emerson. 020 [1870°
Scientific Association, accompanied by numerous maps and diagrams.
His communication elicited great interest, and, after its reading, was dis
cussed by some of the most eminent men in the grand Scientific Con_
gress, among whom were Professors Forbes and Phillips, and Sir David
Brewster.
Mr. Espy also visited Paris, and communicated his views to the French
Academy, by which a committee was appointed to report upon the sub-
ject, consisting of Messrs. Arago, Pouillet, and Babinet. A report was
made at considerable length, containing a beautiful analysis of Mr. Espy’s
theory, with conclusions extremely flattering to our countryman. This,
with the paper read before the British Association, may be found in Mr.
Espy’s treatise on the Philosophy of Storms—a work which contains
much of the information collected by the “ Joint Committee’’ in a con-
densed form.
I cannot conclude this communication without expressing my opinion,
that a strong and very effective impulse was given to meteorological in-
vestigations at home and abroad by the combined efforts of this Society
and its associate, in organizing that system of simultaneous meteoro-
logical observations which has since been spread over the European con-
tinent, and is now resumed in our own country under the most favorable
conditions.
In claiming for our Society the credit fairly due for its efforts formerly
made in the eause of meteorology, I do not wish to derogate from the
just claims of other institutions or individuals who have been working
earnestly in the same field of philosophical research. Any proper notice
of even one of these—the Smithsonian Institute, for exampie—would
lead me beyond the just limits of a communication adapted to the usual
order of business established by this Society.
The names appended to the first Circular issued in September, 1834, by
the ‘‘ Joint Committee,’’ were
James P. Espy, Chairman,
GouUVERNEUR Emerson, M. D.,
©. N. BANCKER,
ALEXANDER J). BAcuHE,
Committee of American Philosophical Society.
James P. Espy,
AuEx. D. BACHE,
H. D. RocGERs,
S. C. WALKER,
P. B. Gopparp, M. D.
Committee of Franklin Institute.
1870.] 521
Mr. Briggs made some remarks on the results in meteorology
obtained by Prof. Henry twelve years ago.
Pending nominations, Nos. 662 and 663 were read.
After balloting for Candidates for Membership, the following
named gentlemen were declared to be duly elected members
of the Society :—
Mr. Henry F. Q. D’Aligny, of New York.
Mr. William P. Blake, of New Haven, Conn.
Mr. George L. Vose, of Salem, Mass.
Mr. J. Imbrie Miller, of Pennsylvania.
Mr. Eckley B. Coxe, of Philadelphia.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, Nov. 4th, 1870.
Vice-President, Prof. CRESSON, in the Chair.
Present, eight members.
Letters were read from Nassau Hall and Yale College,
acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings and Transactions.
The following letter was received from the Philadelphia
College of Pharmacy, transmitting copies of resolutions
adopted by them on the subject of the establishment of a
Botanic Garden in Fairmount Park, and asking concurrence,
and the appointment of a committee.
PHILADELPHIA, Wov. 2d, 1870.
SIR :—
In accordance with instructions, it is my agreeable duty
to communicate to you the following action of the Philadelphia College
of Pharmacy.
Ata Stated Meeting of the Board of Trustees of the Philadelphia College
of Pharmacy, held November 1st, the following Resolutions were unani-
mously adopted :—
“* Resolved, That a Committee of three be selected to confer with the
Park Commissioners, in conjunction with other Committees that may be
A. P. §.—VOL. XI—38E
Cresson. ] o 22 [Nov. 4,
appointed for the same purpose, in reference to the establishment of a
Botanical Garden in Fairmount Park.”’
In accordance with the above Resolution, the following Committee was
selected :—
Prof. William Proctor, Jr.,
Prof. Robert Bridges, M. D.,
Prof. John M. Maisch.
It was also Resolved, ‘‘ That the Secretary be directed to communicate
the action of this College to the President of the Park Commissioners,
to the Horticultural Society, and to the American Philosophical Society.”
I have the honor to be
Yours, respectfully,
ALFRED B. TAYLOR,
Secretary.
To Prof. GkorcE B. Woon, M. D.,
President of the American Philosophical Society.
A letter transinitting a donation for the Library, was
received from Mr. Abbe, of the Cincinnati Observatory.
Dr. Lea took the Chair, and Prof. Cresson described the
recent auroras, of one of which he presented for publication
in the Proceedings, the following account :—
An Auroral display occurred on the evening of the 24th of October,
observed from half-past eight o’clock. A faint Auroral arch was visible
to the north, extending from Cor Caroli, which was just setting, nearly
to Castor, which was just rising, the elevation of the arc being equal to
that of star Dubhe, in Ursa Major, which was nearly at its lowest culmi-
nation. At the same time, a band, of ten degrees in width, of pink
auroral light, spanned the heavens, apparently on an arc of a great circle,
extending from the northwestern point, where the Northern Crown was
-setting, to a point in the east, where Bellatrix, in Orion, was just rising,
and passing through Menkar, in the head of the Whale, south of Aries,
through Pisces and Aquarius, through the Dolphin, through the Eagle,
with Altair near the centre of the band, south of Lyra, and through the
head of Hercules. The average width of the luminous belt was about
ten degrees, its median line corresponding very nearly with the celestial
equator.
Dr. Emerson informed the Society that the earthquake of October 20th,
1870, was felt in Canada, the New England States and New York. The
strongest manifestations of it were along the St. Lawrence River, and
especially on the shores of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, where the shocks
were reported so severe as to occasion some loss of life. In certain
523 (Cresson.
1870.]
quarters of New York city no movements were noticed, but in others
shocks were felt to an alarming extent, driving people from their houses
and workshops, and children from the public-school rooms, into the
street, with a sensation of nausea or sea-sickness. Walls were cracked,
clocks were stopped, articles were thrown from tables, steeples vibrated.
See detailed account in the Scientific American of October 29th.
Pending Nominations Nos. 661, 662 and 663, and New
Nominations Nos. 664 and 665 were read.
Prof. Wood offered the following resolution, which was
adopted :—
Resolved, That a Committee be appointed to act with Committees that
may be appointed by other Societies, in the matter of procuring the
establishment of a Botanic Garden in Fairmount Park.
Prof. H.C. Wood, Prof. Jos. Carson, and Mr. Durand, were
appointed said Committee; and, on motion of Mr. Price, the
President, Dr. G. B. Wood, was added to the Committee.
By request of Mr. Cuyler, who had been obliged by
another engagement to retire from the meeting, Mr. Price
asked that notice be given on the cards for the next meeting,
that Mr. Cuyler will then present a proposition for the removal
of the Society to Fairmount Park, with the view of obtaining
an expression of the opinion of the members as to the expe-
diency of such removal.
And the Society was then adjourned.
Stated Meeting, Nov. 21st, 1870.
Vice-President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.
Present, twenty-four members.
Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. Geo.
L. Vose, dated Minneapolis, Minn., Nov. 14th, 1870, and Mr.
Wm. P. Blake, dated New Haven, Conn., Nov. 18th, 1870.
524 aoe
A letter acknowledging receipt of diploma of membership,
was received from Mrs. Mary Somerville, dated Naples, Oct.
26th, 1870.
Letters acknowledging the receipt of the Society’s publica-
tions, were received from Sir J. F. W. Herschell (series); Mr.
R. W. Fox (82); Leeds Phil. Soe. (83); Rhode Island Hist.
Soc.; Georgia Hist. Soc.; Peabody Inst.; and Essex Institute
(all 84); the Belgian Nealen (XM. 3; and 78.979" SOs:
Amherst College (asking for deficiencies S be sansplllad) ; New
York Lyceum; N. H. Mass’ Hist. Soc.; Howard College;
New York State Library; and Penna. Hist. Soc. (all XIV, 2
and 84).
Letters of envoy were received from the Belgian Acad.,
May 80; Holland Soc., July Ist (asking that deficiencies in.
their series be supplied); Royal Geographical Soc., June 1;
and the Ulm Art and Antiquity Union, March 6th, 1869,
requesting an exchange of publications. On motion, the Ulm
Art and Antiquity Union was ordered to be placed on the
list of correspondence to receive the Proceedings.
Donations were received from M. Zantedeschi, of Padua ;
M. Finzi, of Florence; the Ulm Union; Judge Lowrie; the
London R. Astron. Soc.; Mr. John Tyndall; Mr. John Lewis
Peyton, of London; Prof. EH. Loomis, of Yale College; New
York Lyceum N. Hist; Prof. T. Eggleston, Jr.; the Albany
Institute; Franklin Institute; and the Minnesota Historical
Society ; which, on motion, was ordered to be placed on the
list of Correspondents to receive the Proceedings regularly.
The Committee to which was referred Prof. Cope’s Memoir
on the Ichthyology of the Maranon, reported in favor of its
being published in the Proceedings, with wood-cut illustra-
tions, which, on motion, was so ed
Dr. Wm. Pepper read the following Toes y notice of Sin
James Copland :—
1870.] 029
OBITUARY NOTICE OF THE LATE JAMES COPLAND, M. D.
Read by Dr. William Pepper, before the American Philosophical Society,
Philadelphia, Nov. 21, 1870.
It would be amiss to occupy any large share of the time of the Society
by a lengthy eulogy upon the wise man, whose death has furnished the
occasion of my remarks; yet in some respects the life of James
Copland presented more of variety and vicissitude than falls to the lot of
most students or practitioners of medicine. He was born in the Orkney
Islands in November, 1791, and was the eldest of nine children. His
early education was conducted at Lerwick, one of the Shetland Islands,
but at the early age of sixteen, having decided to adopt the profession of
medicine, he repaired to the justly renowned University of Edin-
burgh, where he continued four years. In 1815, at the age of twenty-four,
haying obtained his diploma, he turned his footsteps towards Jondon,
following the example of a long list of distinguished predecessors. It is
certainly strong testimony to the high standard of requirements, the
great educational facilities, and the distinguished abilities of the Faculty
at the University of Edinburgh, during the latter half of the last century,
that so many of her graduates attained the highest eminence. It was to
this school that we owed our own Kuhn, Rush, Morgan, Shippen, Wistar,
and Physick, and many of the most successful and distinguished Physi-
cians in London had migrated there from Edinburgh. Of all these
eminent men not one sought the metropolis with a better equipment of
vigorous health, strong and well trained mental powers, and indefatigable
energy than Copland.
Still he did not succeed in establishing himself there immediately, but
within a few months after his arrival in London, crossed the channel to
Paris, and spent two years in study at the French and German schools.
Upon his return to London in 1817, he became one of the Health officers
of the African Company, and spent twelve months on the Gold Coast.
While there both his own exceptionally robust constitution and wide ex-
perience in the treatment of fever and dysentery, underwent a severe trial,
for not only was he obliged to treat and nurse almost the entire ship’s crew
in an attack of yellow fever, but, after accomplishing this arduous duty,
he was himself seized and was dangerously ill. He subsequently returned
to England, but after paying a brief visit to his Oreadian home,
he again crossed to France and spent some months in attendance on the
Parisian Hospitals.
It was not until 1820 that Copland, at the age of twenty-nine years,
finally settled in London, and commenced an unbroken course of fifty
years’ laborious study and practice. From this time his success was steady
and uniform. In 1820 he was appointed Physician to the Royal Infirmary
for Diseases of Children, a post which he subsequently changed for Senior
and finally for that of Consulting Physician. In 1823 he was elected Con-
sulting Physician to Queen Charlotte’s Lying-in Hospital. He was also
sometime Physician to the South London Dispensary. His practice in-
Pepper.] 526 [Nov. 21,
om
creased quite rapidly, and for many years before his death was among the
largest and most lucrative in London. The professional honors which he re-
ceived were numerous and distinguished. In 1833 he was made a Fellow
of the Royal Society; in 1837 a Fellow of the Royal College of Physicians; in
1888 he was Gulstonian Lecturer; in 1841, 1842, and 1861 he was Censor
of the College ; Croonian Lecturer in 1844, 1845, 1846 ; seven times Coun-
cillor between 1844 and 1853; Lumleian Lecturer in 1854 and 1855 ; and
Harveian orator in 1857 ; in 1858 he was elected President of the Royal
Medico-Chirurgical Society. He was also honored by being made a mem-
ber of many learned societies out of England ; and in Jan. 17, 1845, was
elected a member of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.
Despite, however, the arduous practical duties of his profession he was
indefatigable in literary laLors. He edited the ‘‘London Medical Re-
pository ’’ for five years from 1822 to 1827, and contributed to it a vast
number of articles He also edited Richerard’s Physiology in 1824; con-
tributed notes to Griffith’s translation of Cuvier’s ‘‘ Animal Kingdom ;”
assisted in the preparation of Annesely’s magnificent work on the Diseases
of India, to such an extent that it is stated by one well informed that he
may be considered its author. His occasional articles are too numerous
to mention, but the great work of his life was his colossal ‘‘ Dictionary of
Practical Medicine.’”? The idea of such an enterprise occupied his atten-
tion as early as 1827, and he then issued a prospectus of a plan for bring-
ing out an ‘‘Encyclopedial Dictionary of Medical Science.”” The un-
dertaking was not accepted by the publishers, however, though they
subeequently entered into an arrangement with Drs. Forbes, Conolly, and
Tweedie, which resulted in the publication of an excellent Medical En-
cyclopedia.
Copland was not to be thus thwarted in his plan, and accordingly in
1830 he began, single-handed and unaided, the task of writing a similar
work. The first part of this truly great work appeared in 1832, and others
followed in regular succession, so that the greater part of it was published
in the first three years, though the last two parts composing the Dictionary
did not make their appearance until 1860, twenty-eight years after the first
part. The entire work comprises about 7,000 closely printed double-
columned royal octavo pages. The success of this publication was imme-
diate and marked. Over 10,600 copies of the English edition were sold, it
was reprinted in America and translated into German. It has also been
reissued in an abridged form under the editorship of his nephew, Mr.
James C. Copland. It is no exaggeration to say that but few
more colossal literary works have ever been achieved by any au-
thor. The number and yariety of the articles are only equaled
by the profound erudition and great practical knowledge which
they evince, and the vigor and clearness of the style in which they
are composed. One of the most important features of the work, and
which has endeared it to every true medical student, is the copious and
exhaustive Bibliography appended to every article in the Dictionary.
In the preparation of these Bibliographic lists, the acquirements and wide
range of rcading of Copland are conspicuous. The work has served as a
1870. ] yA [Pepper.
mine from which countless medical workers have extracted precious
materials, which they have, in but too many instances, reissued without
the stamp of the original and real author. Doubtless many of the theories
and views expressed in it will be, ere long, superseded; many of the
facts require rearrangement or new explanation ; but the work itself will
long live and command the admiration of posterity as an enduring monu-
ment to the great intellect, sustained ambition, and indomitable energy
of James Copland.
In person he was about the common height, of a robust build and
striking countenance. In social life he possessed many friends, and was
of a most generous and hospitable nature.
For some years before his death he had retired from the active practice
of his profession. He had suffered for a long time from gout, and for
some years had had occasional attacks of rheumatism. His death occurred
on July 12, 1870, in the 79th year of his age, after a severe illness of about
ten days.
Mr. Dubois made the following written communication
respecting Lake Superior Silver Mines.
Mr. Du Bois asks attention to a specimen of ore from the new silver-
mining region on the ncrthern shore of Lake Superior. The precise
location of the mine is on a very small island, about half-a-mile from the
main land near Thunder Cape, to the east of Thunder Bay, and north of
Isle Royale. Silver Island only measures-a few feet long and broad, out
of the water, and it was necessary first to fence it with a coffer dam: it
is still necessary to use the pump daily. They are now at work a few feet
below the bed of the lake.
Herewith two specimens are shown; one is the ore (in two pieces) ; the
other is a button of fine silver extracted from precisely the same amount
of ore. The comparison will give an idea of its surprising richness, and
will also show how much may be hidden under an exterior not promising
to a casual observer.
The matrix is a calcareous spar, or carbonate of lime, with granular
galena; the silver occurs in two conditions: mineralized in the galena,
and native in small needle-shaped filaments, some of them visible with a
glass. The return of this specimen was over $13,000 a ton; but as we
are cautious of reporting such ores by such large measure, we gave it as
$6.73 a pound. However, it turns out that they are really getting up
tons of rich ore, and sending it to be smelted at Newark, New Jersey.
Other specimens tried at the Mint yield about half as much as the extra-
ordinary piece here shown.
That Lake Superior shonld thus offer on its northern shore a bed of
silver associated with lead; and on its southern shore a mixture of silver
with copper, as well as copper alone ; is an interesting fact in mineralogy.
That it should promise us more silver, at a time when we want it for cur-
rency, is equally interesting in another point of view.
The mine, although in Canada, is owned and worked by a company of
our citizens, of Detroit and other places.
528 [Nov 21, 1870.
Prof. Henry made a verbal communication of the doings
of the International Commissioners who assembled at Paris
last summer, to consider a revision of the French metre.
Mr. Cuyler offered the following Preamble and Resolu-
tions :—
WueEREAS, The Building now owned and occupied by this Society has
ceased to be central and convenient, and has also the disadvantage of
affording only imperfect and unsafe accommodations to its Library and
other valuable properties ; whilst those who desire to consult its Books
and Manuscripts have not proper conveniences for that purpose ; and,
WueErREas, It has been suggested that it may be practicable to enlarge
the field of usefulness of this Society by adding to its other offices that
of providing for and controlling the Observatory (both Astronomical and
Meteorological), and for the Study and Recording of such other natural
phenomena as may be appropriately observed and investigated in connec-
tion with such an Institution, and that for these purposes the removal of
the Society from its present location, and its re-establishment in Fair-
mount Park, is desirable and practicable, therefore be it
Resolved, That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to appoint two Special Committees, each of which shall consist
of a Chairman and four other members, and with each of which Com-
mittees the President is requested to meet and act as an additional
member.
Resolved, That to one of these Committees shall be entrusted the duty
of digesting the plan for such an Observatory as is described in the Pre-
ambie, so far as, in their judgment, it is expedient this Society should
undertake the work of its establishment, and that they be requested also
to describe such instruments as it is requisite should be provided for use
therein, and an estimate of their cost, together with an estimate of the
probable annual expense of maintaining and conducting such an Insti-
tution.
Resolved, That the other Committee shall be charged with the duty of
considering the financial questions which are involved in such changes as
are contemplated by the Preamble and the preceding Resolutions, and of
reporting to the Society how the funds requisite for such an undertaking
can be provided.
Dr. Carson moved that the further consideration of the
Preamble and Resolutions offered by Mr. Cuyler, be postponed
to a special meeting of the Society, to be held on the evening
of the second Friday in December, notice of which should be
given to all the members of the Society, with a printed copy
of the Preamble and Resolutions; which was ordered.
And the Society was adjourned.
Noy. 18, 1870.] [Cope.
ON THE SAURODONTID A.
By Epwarp D. Corn, A. M.
Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 18th, 1870.
The genus Saurocephalus of Harlan and its allies have been referred
to the neighborhood of the Acanthopterygian family of the Sphyrenide
by Prof. Agassiz in his Poissons Fossiles, after having been regarded by
Harlan and Hays as reptilian. This was an important step in the right
expression of its affinities ; but I take the present opportunity of making
another progress in the true interpretation of its relations, favored as I
am by the opportunity of examining new material not accessible to former
authors. My conclusion, it will be observed, differs widely from that
heretofore maintained. ;
Some years after Harlan’s description of Sawrocephalus lanciformis
appeared, Dr. Hays described a second species under the name of Sau-
rodon leanus. This I believe to represent a genus distinct from the
former. A third genus more remote is characterized in the present
article.
The characters of first importance which may be assigned to these
genera are :—
Vertebre short, numerous; their neural arches united with centrum
by persistent suture. Tail vertebrated or heterocercal. Superior arch
of the mouth formed by the short premaxillaries and long maxillaries.
Teeth one-rowed, with fangs received into alveoli more or less confluent
at their openings. Anal or caudal radii*with complex segmentation.
These characters are most of them entirely contradictory of any affinity
to the Sphyreenide, those presented by the vertebrz indicating a nearer
approach to Amia. The structure of the mouth is not that of any
Acanthopterygian fish, and with the complex segmentation of some of
the radii approaches nearer such types as the Characinide. The form of
the vertebral centra is utterly different from that of the Sphyrznide:
in the Saurodontide they are short, little contracted medially, and deeply
grooved on the sides ; in the Sphyreenide, elongate, much contracted, and
exceptional among Teleosts in being smooth and grooveless !
The characters presented by the teeth and vertebrze of Saurocephalus
remind one much of Serrasalmo, though the genus is no doubt in other
respects widely removed from that group. On the characters above
enumerated, I propose the family Saurodontide. Its precise position I
am not prepared to determine at present, though I have little doubt that
Amia is its nearest living ally. With the remains of species of this group
occur numerous scales, which may belong to the former. They are
cycloid and without ganoine.
The three genera are distinguished by the form of their jaws and
teeth: in Saurocephalus the crowns are shortened, much compressed,
and with sharp edges; in Saurodon the crowns are elongate, subcylindric
and slightly curved near the apex. In Ichthyodectes the teeth are similar
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—39E.
Cope. } 5 30 [Nov. 18,
to those of Saurodon; but the margins of both jaws are without the
large foramina so prominent in both the other genera. There appear to
be some important differences also in the vertebre, which will be men-
tioned below.
In the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society for 1856,
Dr. Leidy treats Saurocephalus as a Sphyrznoid fish, and regards Sau-
rodon aS a synomyme. He corrects the erroneous references of some
European authors, showing the Saurocephalus of Dixon to be a Xiphias,
and the Saurodon of Agassiz to be some other genus which he calls
Cimolichthys, without characterizing it. This form is supposed to be
established on palatine teeth, and if so, is well distinguished, as it will
be seen below, that Saurocephalus has no teeth on the palatine bones.
He also refers two other species of supposed Sawrocephalus of Agassiz
to a new genus called Protosphyrena, without characters. This I think
rests on mandibular teeth of true Saurocephali.
SAUROCEPHALUS. Harlan.
Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. III. 837. Xiphactinus Leidy Proc. Ac.
Nat. Sci. Phil. 1870. 12.
SAUROCEPHALUS LANCIFORMIS. Harlan l. c.
Med. and Phys. Researches, 862. Leidy Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc.
1856. Tab. Saurodon lanciformis, Hays Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1830,
476.
Established on a right superior maxillary bone from a locality near the
Missouri river. It differs from that of the other species in having a very
elongate superior suture with the premaxillary bone, and in the very
short dental crowns, which are as wide as deep. The largest species;
known from the jaw.
SAUROCEPHALUS PHLEBOTOMUS. Cope sp. nov.
Established on some vertebree and portions of the cranium, the latter
including the dentary, maxillary, part of the premaxillary, the palatine
and vomerine bones, compressed into a mass by pressure, the separate
pieces preserving nearly their normal relations, From the latter the fol-
lowing characters may be derived :
Palatine bones toothless; teeth of both maxillary and dentary, with
compressed crowns, which are longer than wide at; base, and closely placed,
those of the dentary twice as large as those of the maxillary. Maxillary
bone proximally deep; dentary shallower, the maxillary with elongate
suture with the premaxillary behind.
The teeth are equilateral, without intermarginal groove or barb, and
with smooth enamel surface, or only minutely striate under the micro-
scope. A series of larger foramina extends along the alveolar margin of
the maxillary and dentary bones, one foramen to each tooth. The alve-
ole are confluent as they approach this margin.
There are three vertebra, which present two pairs of deep longitudinal
grooves, viz.: two on each side, two on the inferior, and two on the supe-
1870.] odl [Cope.
rior face of the bone ; the last receives the basal articulation of the hama-
pophyses. The centra are crushed, their measurements with those of
the jaws are as follows:
M
MEMS EMEC EMULUIN Pert retrete els c's shois) im cletecareclaveraielie\«) <clelsialepsforerofeve/e s\ls 0.025
Monewdiamecenn(Cuushed)emei.c tft sists cars uarcurs See seie lateneton «2 616 035
Short ee oe CPPRE MUrcd Se Blaney occa MPC a cay asaTat ar craps Ream eae 0175
Weptehymaxillarysboneranteriorliy.s\-\4 sis 4 -lte(celais = i-l> y= /0 sla lala = 031
Depth dentary 69 OTT ERA PAG ERT eas od INE MIT Stores ats cote .015
ene thmeroyminterion tooth .).5 if nf. se okie react: fstakinved, SRIsbale peels 006
Number ‘“ ge Sooper. Od mins pif at hanet cumemtds Repsskpncaeels 6 3
ss «¢ superior ‘‘ CSPGs anh tmnoceycncke cis Bay. piershaa iy, 1 4.5
Length crown ce fie BOTT IRA CISTI OI aS CRE HIS Reece Caton OETA .0046
The vertebree are about as large as those of a fully grown ‘‘ drum fish,”’
Pogonias.
From the yellow chalk of the upper Cretaceous of Kansas, found on the
Solomon or Nepaholla River, Kansas, at a point 160 miles above its mouth,
by Professor B. F. Mudge, Professor of Natural Science in the State
Agricultural College of Kansas.
I append a description of some caudal vertebre of a species probably
different from the S. phlebotomus. It is indicated by three consecutive
caudal vertebree which resemble those of S. prognathus and S. thaumas,
but which differ also considerably from both ; the several arches and spines
are of very great width: in S. thawmas they are narrow, and in 8. prog-
nathus, as wide, but here their width exceeds the depth and equals the
length of the centrum. As in the other caudals, the lateral grooves are
wanting and the inferior pair remain separated by alamina. The neural
suture is very distinct, and not two angled as in S. prognathus, but with
a median decurvature and rise anteriorly. The neural spines are twice
as wide as deep and lie on each other. The third vertebra is shorter than
the others and contracted distally ; it is probably the penultimate of the
series ; neural canal minute. Surface striate ridged.
Measurements. : M.
Mengti centrum anterior vertebras cy. deeeee ete aoe eens 0.021
Depth ss (at-middle)lanterior wertebras-s-. 1-24 0465- 06 015
Madthencuralareh. at base spine.cmessececse sates. coe a aaeine te ale -010
De pulySpiNe’s. iva oes es ook eee TE. Be EE 0072
Renophithirdivertebra...2 0). 20082 16 Ol cic Wek ChEIAD Pe IA 01385
Wadthinieurall archaea. See Le Ree eas Fe ae 014
es Or niki CHUTE AREAS Ont AER GRE GRE RAN il lhe Sig ane Seat a ad a .0176
From a point twenty miles east of Fort Wallace, Kansas. Professor
Mudge’s collection.
In this species the vertebre in question are longer in proportion to
their other dimensions than in those described, besides carrying wider
neural arches and spines.
Cope.] O02 LNov. 18,
SAUROCEPHALUS PROGNATHUS. Cope sp. nov.
This species is represented by a premaxillary and attached proximal
portion of the maxillary bones of the right side, and by a large number
of vertebre and other bones. These portions were associated in the
collections placed in my hands by Prof. Mudge, and relate to each other
in size, as do those of the preceding species and the Ichthyodectes
ctenodon.
The premaxillary is characterized by its great depth as compared with
its length, and by the shortness of its union with the maxillary. The
palatine condyle of the maxillary reaches a point above the middle of the
alveolar margin of the premaxillary. The latter contains alveole of seven
teeth, the anterior of which only presents a perfect crown. This is still
more elongate than the crown of the teeth of S. phiebotomus. It is com-
pressed, equilateral, smooth, and acute. Its direction is even more ob-
liquely forward than the anterior outline of the bone, which itself makes
an angle of 50° with the alveolar border. ‘
The vertebre consist of cervicals, dorsals, and caudals, to’ the number
of about sixty, most of which are supposed to have been derived from the
same animal. The groves are as in S. phlebotomus, there being two be-
low, two on each side, and two above. The latter receives the bases of
the neurapophyses, which are in many cases preserved. The inferior
pair of grooves becomes more widely separated as we approach the cervical
series, leaving an inferior plane, which is longitudinally striate grooved.
This plane widens till the grooves bounding it disappear. The inferior
lateral groove becomes widened into a pit which some of the specimens
show to have been occupied by a plug-like parapophysis, as in Hlops, etc.,
or a rib-head of similar form. The neurapophysial articular grooves be-
come pits anteriorly, and these only of all the grooves, remain on the ante-
rior two vertebra in the collection. Some of the posterior caudals preserve
large portions of the neural arches and spines. They form an oblique
zigzag suture with the body, consisting of two right angles, one project-
ing upward anteriorly another downward behind. The neural spines are
very wide and massive and in close contact antero-posteriorly ; these
probably support the caudal fin. They are deeply and elegantly grooved
from the basis upwards. The centra exhibit no lateral grooves.
An unsymmetrical fin ray accompanied these remains, and from its
mineralization, color, size, and sculpture, probably belongs to them. The
anterior margin is thinned, and with obtuse denticulations, the posterior
truncate. The section is lenticular, with a deep rabbet on one side of the
posterior edge ; section at the base, apex circular lost. The sculpture
consists of fine longitudinal raised strie, which bifurcate and send
nnmerous similar ridges to the teeth of the anterior margin. It is pro-
bably a spine of a pectoral fin. It is identical in form and sculpture with
that recently described by Leidy as X¢phactinus audaa, but differs in
specific details.
9
1870.] 538
[Cope.
M
Mon oydinmeter Of spinerrde ripe store afoletclelaltelaibelcietoloieret jalalcietatayetetet ake ce 0.0245
Basal € Cetiade se iPVeNAS crcy sh «dot sist Susy NG Useseene Wavolnde rumtete a, MOROPNER a .019
Length, two cervicals (not distorted).............00.00.50-2-.e08 033
IDiametersomuIe anteriores cielo eel e-lo ti cierctelstatee aloetolstel ay clelei 021
Hem obin ota dorsal ses oy Lisa erp bates, Stel ots )e/steke ney stiel ao) sioiete ators Pe Do eps BUG
sé GG! GEOR lets Gas ERS CRS chore einaks Simisoln Bete cee Re EID tito. oania Iori 014
_ Width neural spine of caudal, at base.....................-..008- .012
Length alveolar margin premaxillary.....................2000. 27022
‘¢ anterior ‘‘ Cae SRN lale Ut Enea Cuatce al aeeiey Mice CARIES Coe Lua .02
Wenihsiromicondyleror maxillary rycen ger rt cleesls) ace a= olalelelore 026
itenethycrownlpremaxdllaryGoobli.)(¢ $202. doers. laeicts oi ie nice cle ee = 0042
Diameter’ ‘ a TANTRA. eliototctis Hh Meio tee ore An et 002
A fragment of a large flat bone exhibits very delicate radiating grooves
which are marked by spaced impressed dots.
From the upper Cretaceous of Kansas, six miles south of the town of
Sheridan. Prof. B. F. Mudge. This species was about two thirds the
size of the species last described.
SAUROCEPHALUS AUDAX. Leidy, sp.
Xiphactinus audaz. WLeidy. Proc. A. N. Sci. Phil. 1870, 12.
Established on a pectoral spine, supposed by Leidy to be that of a
Siluroid. According to the description, it does not differ from that of 9.
prognathus in more than specific characters. Thus the anterior margin
is weakly serrate in the latter, a feature not described by Leidy in the
former. In S. audaz the posterior portions of both sides are said to be
grooved , in that part of the spine of S. prognathus preserved, one surface
only exhibits the groove in question, one of whose edges is obliquely
ridged, as in S. audaz. From Kansas; museum Smithonian.
SAUROCEPHALUS THAUMAS. Cope sp. Nov.
This is larger than any of the species here described. It is represented
by wholes or parts of from seventy to eighty vertebra, with numerous
neural and hemal spines and fin radii, and perhaps some ribs. There
are no teeth nor cranial fragments. The bulk of the vertebre is double
that of those of S. phlebotomus, and appropriate to an animal of the
size of the 9. lanciformis. It may be ultimately found to be identical
with that species ; but there is no evidence conclusive of such a view at
present in my possession.
The vertebre present the usual two inferior, two lateral, and two
superior grooves—the last for the neural arch. There are no cervical
vertebre, for these characters show them all to be dorsals and caudals.
The suture for the neurapophyses forms a regular angulate convexity
projecting downwards. The arch is not closed above anteriorly, and is
expanded laterally, while the spine is directed very obliquely backwards.
The concavities of the articular extremities are equal in the dorsals ; but
in the caudals one surface is much more deeply concave than the other,
one being funnel-shaped, and the other nearly plane in a few.
oye O34 [ov. 18,
A number of consecutive vertebre are preserved, which represent the
posterior portion of the caudal series. One of these is fortunately the
very extremity, and they demonstrate the tail to have been vertebrated
or heterocercal, after the manner of Amia. On the anterior series of
three the lateral grooves have disappeared from the centra; the neural
canal is very small, and the spines are very massive and curved back-
wards, but much less than in the more posterior parts of the column ;
they are flattened, wider than deep, and in close contact with each other. .
The anterior of the three, on the other hand, presents a narrowed edge
forwards. The hemapophyses are thin, and suturally united by a flat
gomphosis. The terminal series embraces six vertebrae, which have a
minute or obsolete neural canal, but heemal canal distinct, but apparently
interrupted. The hemal arches are united to the centra by a rather
smooth suture.
The general direction of these vertebre forms a light upward curve.
The hemal spines are flat and laminar, and their margins in contact 5
they decrease in width and length to the end of the series. The neural
spine lies obliquely backwards, and has a narrowed anterior ridge, but
stout shaft.
The anterior hemal spine in place exhibits a subglobular base, like
an articulation, and its shaft is wider than those posterior toit. A sub-
triangular flat bone, with neck and subglobular extremity, applies very
well to a concavity between the anterior pair of pleurapophyses, but does
not in that position preserve contact with the anterior margin of the
second spine. One margin of the enigmatical bone is thin and divergent ;
the other expanded laterally and straight. The latter gives off a trans-
verse prominence like half a globular knob before reaching the extremity.
Just within the latter are two large foramina, which are connected with
the extremity by a groove on each side, which meet in a notch where the
thin edge passes into the knob.
Both sides of the neural and hemal spines are concealed in this species
and in the S. prognathus by numerous parallel osseous rods, which are
somewhat angulate in section. They lie along the centra of the anterior
series of caudal vertebra, but are not to be found on vertebra of any
other part of the column. Numerous loose and fragmentary rods of the
same character accompany the loose and attached caudal vertebre, and
all of them, according to Prof. Mudge, belong to the ‘‘posterior swim-
ming organ” of this animal. There is also a collection of these rods
from the anterior region of the body, which Prof. Mudge thought occu-
pied the position of an anterior limb. They do not any of them present
a segmentation such as would be exhibited by the cartilaginous radii of
caudal and pectoral fins, and their nature might have remained doubtful
but for the explanation furnished by the anterior compound ray or spine
of the posterior, probably caudal fin. This ray, as in the case of the
pectoral spine and first anal rays of some existing Siluroid and Loricariid
fishes, is composed of a number of parallcl rods closely united. These
535
1870.] 53: [Cope.
are in their distal portions remarkably and beautifully segmented, of
which a very simple form has been figured by Kner, as existing in the
pectoral spine of the Siluroid genus, Pangasius. This segmentation
becomes more obscure proximally, and finally disappears altogether,
leaving the spine and rods homogeneous. This portion of them is quite
identical with the rods found in the positions of fins already described,
and I therefore regard these as fin radii of the attenuated form presented
by cartilaginous rays of most fishes, but ossified sufficiently to destroy
the segmentation. They are thusin the condition of the anterior rays
of the dorsal fin of some of the large Catostomidze, where they are
proximally homogeneous and bony, distally segmented and cartilaginous.
This is an important character when found in pectoral and caudal fins,
and such as I have not found described. It adds another feature to the
definition of this group.
The segmentation above alluded to presents the following characters.
The spine consists of four principal parallel rods, of which the external
on each side thins, the one to an obtuse, the other toa thin edge. The
more obtuse edge presents a groove on one side, which is occupied by a
very slender rod, and a shallow rabbet along the flat edge is occupied by
a slender flat red. Of the four principal rods the two median are the
most slender, and the flat marginal the widest. Of the two median, that
next the last is the wider. The stout marginal, or probably anterior rod,
is segmented en chevron, the angle directed forwards and lying near the
free margin. The suture of the segments is entirely straight, except
when returning it approaches the margin, where it suddenly turns to the
margin at right angles to it. The next rod is segmented without chevron
obliquely backwards and inwards; where it leaves and reaches the
margins, it is at right angles to them, and the margin projects obtusely
at those points. Between them the suture is very irregular and jagged,
sending processes forwards and backwards. The segmentation of the
next rod is similar, but more regularly serrate; distally it becomes as
irregular as in the last. The transverse marginal termini of the sutures
are serrate in both. The inner and widest rod presents a still more
regularly serrate suture, with the truncate extremities ; but, owing to the
width of the rod, the near approximation of the sutures continues for a
longer distance. When broken, the suture appears step-like,
This remarkably beautiful segmentation is paralleled remotely, as has
been stated, by some Siluroids. Much more like the recent type are the
segmented rays of the carboniferous genus, Edestus of Leidy, regarded
variously by authors as a jaw or a ray; but now generally regarded asa
ray.
Measurements. M.
Meng th iragment of (?)caudal spime... 1... 2 aja. ss 6 ee Bans see 0.25,
Width uC AN jORODANTME| GHRNGADURS. 6 obo oc cob baGdedabeanodsoe .06
Greatest thickness es SCR Nia hse Aaa eR hs ats nadie" :018 -
Width posterior rod sf a A ea 0245
Mengthiot six distal caudal vertepree..sj.s.ss-0 62+ ost ee weet ee .10
Kor
Cope. ] d00 [Nov. 18,
M.
Width hzemal spine of second of series....................- Boos ollzH!
Vertical diameter centrum first TN TEMPE AVERSA Adio cs 6 025
Length of neural spine and centrum of anterior caudal.......... 108
Transverse diameter of neural spine a “¢at base.... .0285
Antero-post. diam. four anterior caudal neural spines in contact.. .069
Length centrum of a dorsal.............. fale Scjagstetol sts ais se tener 404
AVertical diame teres si yes sisal tea Gavel pe eins ascliviegs eftiere ree eee 0615
Transverse ‘‘ Se hen fe) GCLUS TCG!) aeeyrag levels tictercogteehsets tastes ace e 041
These remains were found in place by Prof. B. F. Mudge: he states
that their extent was eight feet. As they embrace no cervical vertebree
nor portions of cranium, two feet are probably to be added, giving a total
of near ten feet for the length of this fish. It was discovered at a point
on the bank of the Solomon’s or Nepaholla river, in Kansas, 160 miles |
from its point of junction with the Kansas river.
SAURODON Hays.
Transac. Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1830, 476.
SAURODON LEANUS, Hays.
Loe. cit. Tab. xvi. Leidy Trans. Am. Philos. Soc. 1856.
From the cretaceous green sand of New Jersey.
ICHTHYODECTES. Cope, gen. nov.
In this genus the teeth are subcylindric and slender, without cutting
edges. The inner margins of the maxillary and dentary bone exhibit
no dental foramina, which are in Saurocephalus and Saurodon, of large
size.
ICHTHYODECTES CTENODON. Cope, sp. nov.
This species is established on one complete maxillary bone, and three-
fourths of the other, a large part of the dentary bone, with the entire
dental series ; numerous portions of cranial bones, with thirteen vertebra.
These, according to Prof. Mudge, were found together, and to all appear-
ance belong to the same animal. 3
The dental characters differ from those of Saurocephalus, as above
pointed out, and in this species more than in S. leanus. The crowns of
the teeth are more exserted and slender. The inner face of the crown is
more convex than the outer; but there is no angle separating the two
aspects. The apex is moderately acute, and directed a little inwards,
owing to a slight convexity of the external face. Enamel smooth. The
alveoli are very close together, and are probably only separated in their
deeper portions. There are forty-two teeth and alveoli in the maxillary
bone. The palatine condyle is low, and its anterior border falls opposite
to the last tooth, or the indented surface which was occupied by the pre-
maxillary bone. The more proximal part of the maxillary curves inwards
and backwards behind the position of the premaxillary more than in S.
prognathus. The maxillary is a rather thin and narrow bone, with a
For
1870.] O87
ae
[Cope.
broad obtuse and thinned extremity. Its superior margin is marked with
one or more acute ridges, which look as though it had a contact with a
large preorbital bone. Two fractured bones with an elongate reniform
condyle on a wide peduncle, look like the articular extremity of an oper-
culum, which view is confirmed by their application to some flat, coarsely
rugose bones which resemble parts of the latter.
The dentary bone is remarkable for its straightness and laminar char-
acter, and for the depth of the symphysis. The length of the latter is
preserved, while posteriorly to it the lower margin of the dentary is
breken away. The alveolar margin is slightly concave, and unites with
the symphyseal at an angle of 65°. There are twenty-seven teeth and
alveole, which grow a little larger to the posterior extremity of the
series ; anteriorly the alveoli are confluent externally, but posteriorly the
septa are frequently complete, though thin. In neither this bone nor the
maxillary are to be found the foramina along the bases of the teeth, cha-
racteristic of Sawrocephalus or Saurodon leanus, as pointed out by Harlan
and Hays. The vertebree forma series of 13.4 inches in length, embracing
thirteen caudals. This is indicated by the close approximation of the
inferior pits and inserted pleurapophyses, and absence of lateral grooves.
There are important differences from what has been described as charac-
teristic of Saurocephalus. The neural arches, whose bases only are pre-
served, are much lighter and narrower than in it, and its sutural union
with the centrum is less distinct. Their bases issue from pits; but their
anterior portions appear in some cases at least to be co-ossified. They
exhibit a longitudinal rib near one side. There are no heavy neural
spines preserved. The sides of the centra are longitudinally rugose
striate ; inferiorly they are rugose with exostoses.
Measurements. MM.
enetbymacalla mys Onels. Vrach eso cee seen n ee cei Kiso ce 0.158
epi lietpcomdyle wy cerita: Melee tctahhh eRV cone amen ateasia, oys\ale 031
SONI SEAT ICSRIRSICUL M/E mtcrg SECO GIy Herel ercrca eM ei ic er aoe eNana en EMER ae 022
ILEDVAAN GHONTN OL Ly WOOU DA So eo oE CO ne Ne bloT Ube oe en cere ee eno ce 0061
Dame LETACLOMAIEAL DASE tei ee eI Sele aoe ecu el aek cae 003
Heneulmalyeolanlborder OL enbaliyr qe ook 4 else ee en <ielieicfe ie ae 106
Depth symphysis ‘ Ue fone See Meaty Go Gn oe OER ee or 047
encthimopencularicomdylera wane setae en eames. ce Neer ey ieee .018
enathicentrum: anterior caudalee renner sn Seyler 024
Wadia.) <6 (CU DISITts DS SC Men Minin Smee HOt «en aeRO ae na 0278
Depth ce GS aS Gt a aA Oo ns ny Oe NORE oF eee 047
Specimens from six miles south of Sheridan, Kansas, on the north fork
of the Smoky Hill river near its mouth.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.
There have been described above, remains of three species, which
include jaws with teeth, and associated vertebre. In two of these cases
the jaws and teeth were found together; in the third they came in the
“4. P. §.—von. xI—40R
Cope.] [Noy. 18, 1870,
same small box without special indication of locality; but the vertebree
are of precisely the same size sculpture, mineralization, and color as a
large series whose locality is exactly known, to which they probably
belong. Moreover, the jaws and vertcbre bear the same relation of size
to each other in all three series. These facts render it highly probable
that the remains are in each»case rightly referred to the same animal.
That no mixture has occurred is also probable from the fact that the
large and small series (Ichthyodectes and 8. prognathus) came from the
same locality (Sheridan), while the species of intermediate size was dis-
covered 160 miles from the mouth of the Solomon river, a long distance
off. The pectoral] spine, accompanying and belonging to the 8. prog-
nathus, I have shown to be the same as the Xiphactinus of Leidy, but
probably not of the species X. audaz.
_ The fourth series described above as 8. thaumas exhibits precisely the
vertebral characters of the two other species of Saurocephalus, and I
cannot resist the evidence that it belongs to that genus or the same
family. Its remains pertain to one animal, as asserted by Prof. Mudge,
and their coler and condition, coated with a chalky deposit of a ferruginous
yellow color, lends great probability to the statement, to say nothing of
more important reasons. Noremains of pectoral spine are preserved 5
but instead, the remarkable segmented ray described. ‘This comes from
the posterior region of the vertebral column, and is, I believe, an anal
spine, or the adjacent rays or compound ray forming the margin cf the
caudal fin, This finds support in the analogous structures already men-
tioned as occurring among Siluroids, etc., and the resemblance cf the
pectoral spine to the same weapon of the same group adds to the proba-
bility of the correctness of this conclusion. ;
These remarks are made because Prof. Agassiz, in the Poissons Fos-
siles, has referred seyeral spines to the Cestraciont genus, Ptychodus,
which are'very similar in character to that described above as the anal or
caudal support of Saurocephalus thaumas. ‘These were derived from the
upper cretaceous chalk of Kent, England, where Ptychodus teeth also oc-
eur. The Saurocephalus teeth, described by Prof. Agassiz in the same work,
were, however, derived from the same chalk and the same locality, and,
from what has preceded, i believe the segmented spines should be
veferred to the latter genus rather than to Ptychodus. This is the more
probable, in view of the fact that Prof. Mudge did not procure a single
Ptychodus tooth during his exploration.
ON THE FISHES OF A FRESH WATER TERTIARY IN IDAHO,
DISCOVERED BY CAPT. CLARENCE KING.
By E. D. Corn:
The materials on which the present account is based were placed in
my hands by the Smithsonian Institution. ‘They were obtained by Capt.
Clarence King, on his expedition sent out by the Government, for the
geological exploration of the fortieth parallel west of the Mississippi river.
DSeyaISTON 039 [Cope.
As will be seen, the fossils described are evidently from a fresh water
basin, once a lake, which has, at a comparatively late period of geological
time, been elevated and desiccated.
The species and genera are chiefly cyprinide, and from the number
of the former, ten, important as throwing light on the character of the
forms of that family at a time not long preceding the establishment in
their present habitations of those now living. Remarks on these relations
are deferred to the close of the descriptions.
CYPRINID A.
Characters of the genera represented :—
A, Pharyngeal tooth series transverse to longer axis of the pharyngeal
bones.
Pharyngeal teeth 0.4—?.? with compressed roots, and probably molar
or masticatory crowns on an oblique basis, the highest extremity being
inferior, the lowest superior. DIASTICHUS.
B. The pharyngeal tooth series very oblique to the longer axis of the
pharyngeal bone.
Pharyngeal teeth 2.8(24)—??, with round bases, and probably conic
prehensile crowns ; no ala of the slender pharyngeal bones.
OLIGOBELUS.
(0. The pharyngeal tooth series nearly in the longer axis of the pharyn-
geal bones.
Pharyngeal teeth 2.5—4.2 conic prehensile. SEMOTILUS.
Pharyngeal teeth 0.5—?.?, with short, compressed crowns and narrow,
transverse masticatory face, and no prehensile hook ; bone alate.
ANCHYBOPSIS.
Pharyngeal teeth 0.4—4.0, or the outer row 1 or 2 rudimental ; crowns
molar, broad, truncate, with enamelled grinding surface.
MyYLocYyPRINUS.
DIASTICHUS. Cope.
Genus novum.
DIASTICHUS MACRODON. Cope sp. nov.
Represented by three right pharyngeal bones, of which the distal
extremities are lost. The proximal limb of the bone is long and flat, the
extremity first dilated, then contracted coincidently with a transverse
depression of the superior face, the end everted or expanded, with sym-
physeal surface within. There is no proper horizontal alar expanse, but
rather an anterior one, the front face (inferior when on a plane surface),
being a little oblique. Tooth series in the line of the axis of the superior
limb of the pharyngeal bone, its base rising exteriorly and proximally.
Outer face nearly vertical, grooved. The, teeth are knocked off in all the
specimens ; their bases are a broad, oval or parallelogram. The form of
the crown is uncertain, but I suspect it to have been more or less truncate.
FA
Cope.) O40 (Dec. 2,
Measurements. M.
ikenathiproximallimb No mere sera eae eee eee 0.027
Weptheatibasenirsttootla.ime eames oe eee eee 01
Width limb at middle........... edit vs ecnie ie clentere ee ete .008
ene ChelimbuNor Qos tren ete sein eee eis on fe Geeta ree SOL
Wepch-athirst tooth). ee merce ee sated ee Sieve Satna eninge .0058
hength toobliseriestins 7 seese seer emer’ (ener a eee eeees 0135
Widthithirditoothybasisa assem cee see ee eee eee 005
These teeth indicace a species of about the size of the carp (Cyprinus
carpto).
From Catharine’s Creek, Idaho. Mus. no. 9792.
DIASTICHUS PARVIDENS. Cope sp. nov.
In this species the bases of the teeth are considerably smaller than in
the last, and the proximal limb of the pharyngeal bone less depressed,
and more cylindric. A section of the latter below the basis of the first
tooth, is a triangle, the inner side a little shorter than the others. In the
last species it is flat in that place.
M.
Deptigimbat hrstacoothiwanmence eset hee eee ree eecee 0-011
Width limb at middle tooth............ DP ote, ees 0065
Meng th tooth seriessc.. ossieciicls caeleies esse ee Hl guanetale ones 014
Wensphepasistthindabootlierccerteiy-e rice ameter 0054
This species is represented by one pharyngeal bone of the right side,
with the extremities incomplete, associated with many fragments of the
cranium, etc. The size the same as that of D. macrodon.
No. 9782, Catharine’s Creek, Idaho.
The peculiar arrangement of the tooth series in this genus, almost at
right angles to that which is usual among Cyprinidz. is not, so far as I
know, shared by any recent genus of the family.
OLIGOBELUS. Cope.
Genus novum.
The direction of the dental series in this genus is intermediate between
that seen in Diastichus, and the usual type. It resembles and exceeds
the last described genus in the great elongation of the proximal limb of
the pharyngeal bones, which are here considerably more curved. No .
bone of the genus preserves its distal end or its teeth complete. The |
bases of the teeth are round or oval, and not in close contact. It is
scarcely likely that there were more than three in the outer row, though
this is not certain. The proximal end of the series is abbreviated, as the
first tooth of the index row is opposite its first, and the second opposite
its second. The proximal end of the series is most elevated, but does not
project beyond the lateral plane of the pone.
Should the outer series have embraced four teeth, a resemblance between
the form of this bone and that of Ericymba and Exoglossum can be
1870. ] o4 1 [Cope.
traced. This genus will, however, be distinguished from those by the
entire want of the lateral external ala common to these and other genera
of Cyprinide. Two species are represented in Capt. King’s collection.
OLIGOBELUS ARCIFERUS. Cope sp. nov.
Established on four right and one left pharyngeal bones, none of them
with the distal extremity complete. The best preserved shows teeth
2. 8—, and there is no indication of space for a fourth, though its place
of support is lost.
The proximal line is very strongly curved, and is long and slender. Its
extremity is neither grooved nor recurved, but slender ; its section would
be a flat triangle, the inner face about equal to the outer. The size of
the species equals that of Déiastichus macrodon, the largest specimen
exceeding any of the latter. It is probably the largest species obtained
by Capt. King.
M.
pout prosunal limb No. 1. eae ROA bi ene aAla ane 0.04
Poeuis tro VPs Mee aR NER AISI RGPABL DEAR AREA LE -025
DWepthineanibasis Mirsh LOOuly 2.4.1) nrlra irate a eile 0065
Width Us MN Mexks oases talkers Chayhne re taneiaren ccs he 0085
Length basis three outer teeth.............. MA a craremre teats O11
6 «¢ two inner Bees) paileccusnthe SUSCUMAG acral SEA a ae a Gh 007
Nos. 9782, 9791, Catharine’s Creek, Idaho.
OLIGOBELUS LAMINATUS. Cope sp. nov.
Established on a left pharyngeal bone which lacks the distal extremity.
It differs from the other species of the genus in its broad, flat proximal
limb of this bone. Its section is not triangular, but that of a plate with
a thin outer edge.
M.
Wad theimlbnyustibelows tins tb tootheenacmee cee eee ce oa enon 0.008
Depth ‘“ os oy PAM Wueee ela latinas ob tore eilchiattin, Accoher ces apataNG bikie ota .004
The expansion continues to near the proximal end.
No. 9791. Catharine’s Creek, Idaho.
SEMOTILUS, RarrnEesQueE.
I have referred to this existing North American genus two species of
the present series, without being entirely certain that such reference will
be finally adopted. It is based on the evidence of two pharyngeal bones
of two species, one of the right and one of the left side, the former bear-
ing four, the latter five teeth in the larger series. Should the series of
the other bone of each prove to have the same number of teeth as the
sides preserved, the species will be referable to two genera, the former
2.44.2 to Ceratichthys, the latter 2:5-5.2 to Gobio, both existing genera.
To whichever of the three genera the species are referred, it remains to
be one still in existence.
SEMOTILUS POSTICUS. Cove sp. nov.
Indicated by a left pharyngeal bone, of which the distal extremity has
been broken away. The apices of the teeth of the exterior series are
542 [Dee: 2;
Cope. ]
broken away, those of the inner row are perfect. The bases of the
former are cylindric, the latter are also cylindric, with conic crowns.
Some fragments belonging to this or an allied species present conic prox-
imal teeth, while specimens from other collections confirm the reference
to Semotilus.
The expansion of the ala is very gradual, and projects anteriorly rather
than outwards. Hence the onter face of the bone is one oblique plane
from the bases of the teeth to the edge of the ala. The latter projects
beyond the plane of the inner margin, so that the anterior face of the
bone is oblique also. The external surface of the ala is cross-ribbed.
The proximal limb of the bone is contracted, and slightly compressed
near the teeth. Teeth 2.5—; the interspace between the inner pair,
opposite the fourth of the outer series. The bases of the inner descend
to the inner anterior margin of the base vertically.
Measurements. M.
Length of tooth series...... BIS ee sits alae ner eta HOE aaecoca ULES
Dep theatpio un thro ob lee sty eye eer ea (elie ots tence NICs ce sO
a first Sees Aen e Sut asiat aah eulolootaesieteaterste staat inhieta ers s dalil
Width ee RL ral es etl ean ecies iie eee ON oRIE Nita 5 A ROOSS
ILS WATE HOOU, og pb nogcoGssh0oK6 HSCs d BESO OER Soo till
This chub was larger than the common Hastern species, the S. rhotheus,
the largest of the genus. The pharyngeal bone indicates a fish of five
or six pounds weignt. The gradual and slight expanse of the ala of
this bone distinguishes the species from any of the existing ones. Named
from the posterior direction of the teeth.
From St. Catharine’s Creek, Idaho; obtained for Capt Clarence King
by J. C. Schenk Smithsonian, No. 1489.
“
SEMOTILUS BAIRDIT. Cope.
Sp. nov.
This species differs from the last in the much less expansion of the ex-
ternal or alar margin of the pharyngeal bone. It has scarcely any alar
prominence of the angle, which also projects so little beyond the inner
margin as to render the anterior or perforated surface almost transverse.
Distal end of the bone gently curved; proximal limb compressed near the
teeth. Teeth 2.4—, those of the inner pair opposite the third and fourth
of the outer series. Bases cylindric; crowns not preserved ; outer face
of the bone with numerous foramina penetrating it backwards.
Measurements. M.
Length of tooth series....... sl otatehe hee nsaeey are Ss Caete Boden sco .d OS 0)2I
Depthvatthirdytoothvecis. see ee eee wratvor/\ lle enone te evavotaners OL
Width “f SFG Rita ietralcitas tale Beoae ewteseade eet torr Maaco me aes gee bala sleiees sae . 006
Depthiatuirstiyh eeeeeeee or ne Abate Pe UG alist Wd Raat ae 008
From the same locality and explorer as the last species. No. 1482.
This species is dedicated to Prof. Spencer F. Baird, to whom the author
is under greater obligations than to any other man, in respect to his
special pursuits,
FAQ
1870. | Diet) [Cope.
ANCHYBOPSIS. Cope.
Genus novum.
This form, characterized above, is nearly related to several now exist-
ing in the rivers of the United States, so far as the pharyngeal teeth
serve as an indication. It is well known that they are more significant
than any other part of the skeleton among the Cyprinide. They are
arranged in one series of five on the right side, whicli rises and stands on
a prominent basis superiorly, as in various genera, as Stilbe, most Hy-
bopses, ete. This prominence is due to the abrupt incurvature of the
superior limb of the bone. The crowns of the teeth are compressed, the
grinding face truncate a little obliquely, and with a slightly concave
transverse worm surface. Proximal limb small.
In Hybopsis the teeth are 4-4, but in Hemitremza Cope, 5-4, and quite
similar to those of this genus. In Hemitremia, however, the lateral line
is incomplete, and coincidence in this point is necessary for the reference
of the present form to that genus. Imperfection of the lateral line is
not known among the larger forms of true Cyprinidz on this continent,
and may not have existed in this genus. The principal ground of sepa-
ration from Hemdtremia is found in the transversely compressed and very
short crown of the teeth ; in the latter they are elongate and subcylindric.
Anchybopsis is a more typically herbivorous form, and probably had
much convoluted intestines, while in Hybopsis they are of the short
carnivorous type.
ANCHYBOPSIS LATUS. Cope.
Spec. nov.
The only species of the genus. The pharyngeal bone expands rather
abruptly into a prominent ala, without angular outline, and which soon
turns into the outline of the superiov limb. Surface of ala with trans-
verse grooves to margin. Sizes of teeth 4, 3, 2, 5, 1, the first smallest, and
with obtuse, subconic crown. Section of proximal limb at base of last, a
triangle with truncate apex directed outwards. Teeth directed inwards ;
nutritious foramina on front of bone numerous and large.
Measurements. M.
Length tooth series........ He EP An aha coon eee Pa Bris fal 0.026
a GNI TOO CMMs in. sae uah meeeneg tA am NUN ac. O11
LOIN? CHENIER CHOY WOON ce osoodicch on sa owanboosEeeGUS COT
Width bone at third tooth (exterior).......... Pen tnraa ye .016
of ue ee (aniberntom) year connie: boo LOG
OG os TEE TOON (CAIN) obo ob cocuposeocsvccooc 006
MYLOCYPRINUS. Leidy.
Proceedings Academy Natural Sciences. Philadelphia, 1870, p. 70.
This genus, named by Leidy, as above, had been noticed by Dr. J. 8.
Newberry* as allied to Mylochilus, Agass. Leidy compares it to the
carp and other Cyprinoids. Its affinities are apparently between Mylo-
* In Proceedings New York Lyceum Natural History, 1870. Copied into Nature, 1870, p. 385.
Cope. ] o4 4 [ Dee. 2,
chilus and Cyprivus; though it has fewer teeth than either, its formula
44 or 2.44.2, being that of the majority of the existing American genera.
According to Agassiz, the first-named displays 2.2.5—5.2.38 ete. ; while in
the latter they are 1.1.3—8.1.1, and have concentrically sulcate grinding
surfaces. In the present genus, these surfaces are smooth, except where
excavated by use. The inner series is represented by two rudimental
teeth, which are often wanting.
In describing the pharyngeal bones which belong to this genus, Leidy
commits the error of inverting them, calling the inferior extremity the
superior, ete. The symphyseal articulation of the bones he then regards
as designed for articulation with the cranium, a structure which, it is
needless to observe, has no existence in this division of fishes.
Among the numerous specimens brought by Capt. King, I recognize at
least three species, as follows :—
MyLocyPrinus rospustus. Leidy.
Mis: Ge
Teeth rapidly diminishing in size upwards, the last with crown from
one-fourth to one-sixth the area of that of the first, and standing on an
elevated base which projects upwards. Alar margin expanding very grad-
ually, its greatest expansion generally below opposite to the basis of the
first tooth, and considerably contracted opposite to the last tooth.. The
superior limb short, flat, abruptly incurved.
Eleven specimens, of which six belong to the left side. They vary in
the outline of the basis of the teeth ; in most, it is quite straight, in others
curved ; and, as a consequence, in these the superior part does not form
such a prominent buttress as in the first. A large species. Greatest
length of longest bone, 0.046 M.
No. 9792, Catharine’s Creek, Idaho.
A single right pharyngeal of large size may indicate another species.
The tooth series is curved, and the first tooth unusually small. The
principal peculiarity is seen in the superior limb, which is long, slender,
and transverse, with a median contraction, and less flattening than in the
other specimens. Locality the same.
MyYLOcYPRINUS KINGII. Cope.
Spec. nov.
This is represented by a single right pharyngeal bone of large size, and
is distinguished by peculiarity in the character of its teeth. These, in-
stead of diminishing in size upwards, increase, so that the fourth tooth
is larger than the first, instead of one-fifth the size as in M. robustus.
The second and third are intermediate in proportious. The crowns are
broad, transverse ovals. The proximal limb of the bone is short, and
gradually expands into the ala, whose greatest width is opposite the
second tooth. The superior limb is short, narrow, and incurved. A
trace of basis for a small tooth of an inner series.
1870.] D409
[Cope.
Measurements. M.
Greatest lencth of bone... 22... 2.06.0 0c ec cee ec ee es 0.046
es OL dentaltseries scale Ha roan 0.026
Transverse diameter first tooth..............2002ceeeeees .008
Og GG third Goo bln eo4s oes sale ane: .009
08 ss fourth: toothy co. 4. hie seis .008
Width bone at second tooth (exterior)..................- .017
es as +o ESP 5) (AMTCTION) eo wis teretste. or oot oetrara oats .018
LLaTEHN ORoEaITEN IibilO). 5 Soames oe opoes oe ona ebS Ono GSaoooI -02
From the same locality as the last. Dedicated to Capt. Clarence King,
to whom science is indebted for the survey of the fortieth parallel, and
the palaeonto]ogicai discoveries incidental to it.
MyYLocyPRINUS LONGIDENS. Cope.
This third species of the genus is represented by one right pharyngeal
bone bearing the upper three teeth. It is quite distinct from the species
already named, in several points. The ala commences by an abrupt
expansion opposite to the middle of the first tooth, instead of by a gradual
widening of the proximal limb. Hence, in this species the latter is more
slender than in the others. Next, the teeth are of nearly equal size, the
transverse diameter of the three being about equal, though the last is
rather flatter than the others. Thirdly, the teeth are more slender, the
length of the shanks being mach greater than the long diameters of the
crowns; these measurements are nearly equal in the other species.
Lastly, the type of the present species is scarcely half the size of the
most numerous individuals of the M. rcbusius and M. kingit. The basis
of the tooth series rises obliquely backwards, as in M. robustus, and
within it are the bases of two small teeth of the inner row, better devel-
oped than in that species. The diameters of the second and third teeth
are equal.
Measuremenis. M.
Greatesilength right) pharyngeal. ...-425---2-.1----20- 0.029
s Se SEUOOLUBSEIIC Sachestie aris aces ereeN syaenoneve es ehasene cus eeals .O18
oe He SoReouaaby bien joanan Sas aonb 6 coca moma AO .012
iBlevation¥second’toothmeneeannee se ener eee 007
diransverse diameLercrowlesaaias eerie. ae raee aioe e .0048
Wadthtbone aticrownl(extenior)is- a. -s-eeeee sec eee 0.115
ay ae oh (GHNFIAON)S ooaob aco obcopOpHsauS moon ollie:
From Catharine’s Creek, Idaho, No. 9192. Capt. King’s Expedition.
Collected by J. C. Schenk.
SALMONID &.
RHABDOFARIO. Cope.
Genus novum.
Teeth on the maxillary and mandibular arches large, numerous; teeth
on the vomer, glossohyal, and palatine bones, also well developed. Teeth
with hollow crowns and plicate dentine, which is ribbed on the pulp
cavity, and grooved externally. Muzzle and mandible sub-equal. Max-
A. P. §.—VOL. XI—41E
546 [Dec. 2
Cope.]
lary bone much prolonged, sub-cylindric, but little compressed distally,
bearing reduced teeth near its extremity. Preorbital bone short, sub-
orbital narrow. Inferior basihyals as deep as long.
This genus is nearlly allied to Salmo. With no other portions of the
animal than the cranial bones, the only difference I discover is in the
form of the maxillary bones, which are subeylindric or rod-like, instead of
flat or laminiform, asin Salmo. At the extremity, though flat, they are
still narrow, and I do not find surface of attachment for the supernumer-
ary bone of Salmo.
RHABDOFARIO LACUSTRIS. Cope.
Species nova.
This fish is represented by a large part of the cranium, including all
anterior to the middle of the orbits above, to the metapterygoid medially,
and to the posterior part of the dentary below. Both dentaries remain,
but the premaxillary and maxillary of one side only are preserved. There
are separate portions of the maxillary bone, of four other individuals, and
mandibular and palatine of one. These indicate a salmon of the average
size of the migratory marine species, Salmo salar.
The cranium has been compressed, but apparently not depressed, so
that the plane of the muzzle from the frontal bones is perhaps nearly pre-
served. In its present condition the profile descends very gradually, and
the muzzle has an acuminate form. The frontals are ornamented by
numerous grooves which radiate anteriorly, and are more numerous me-
dially. The premaxillaries are subvertical, or roof shaped, and their
broad lateral face is prolonged well backwards—to opposite the fifth
mandibular tooth. The distal part of the maxillary and the dentary are
striate-grooved, the latter obliquely downwards. ‘The extremities of the
dentaries are rugose, and emarginate in profile. They are not produced
or recurved at the symphysis, and the latter is not codssified in the speci-
men. The anterior extremity of the premaxillary is lost, but the remain-
ing portion supports five teeth. There are seventeen on the part of the
maxillary preserved, three in@ M.01. There are 14-15 on the dentary,
two in0 M.01. The palatine, vomerine and the glossohyal teeth are a
little smaller than the dentaries, and more as the maxillaries. All the
teeth have swollen bases, with a plurodont attachment. The crowns are
cylindric, acute, and on the lateral bones, incurved.
Measurements. M.
Length of the tooth series of the dentary.. ............ ..-.0.092
DSH Cre EVM OAS SAA oo SSoonosoonGoUOndo OKO DOR HOdo COONS .018
Depth pterygoid and palatine at last mandibular tooth.... .027
Depth premaxillary at middle....................------ .018
Length crown of a mandibular tooth.............+..+++- .008
Width of half frontal bone at nares..............0.0.e5-- 014
GEN HOCH a onocudowdgoosq0d0gdnso0000000G0000C .G085
The preorbital region is occupied by a bone somewhat T-shaped, the
vertical limb spatulate, directed downwards and forwards, with grooved
margins. Suborbital with rough marginal face.
1870.] O47 [Cope.
This specimen was found by J. C. Schenk for Capt. Clarence King, at
Castle Creek, Idaho. No. 9790 Smithsonian Collections. The other
specimens are from Catharine’s Creek, Idaho; Nos. 9785—9786. <A por-
tion of a maxillary of one of these forms indicates a fish half as large again
as the one above described.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
The six genera of fishes above described, present interesting relations
to existing ones. One of them, Semotilus, is recent, while three are
closely allied to existing genera; viz. : Rhabdofario, Anchybopsis, and
Oligobelus. Distichus and Mylocyprinus are less nearly related to living
genera. The five representing the Cyprinide can be referred to the
groups into which the existing members of the family fall; thus Semotilus
and Oligobelus are carnivorous, and Anchybopsis and Mylocyprinus
herbivorous and molluscivorous. Accompanying these fossils are three
species of the recent genus Astacus, (A. subgrundialis, ete ) which I de-
scribe in the Proceedings of the American Entomological Society for 1870.
The molluses of this formation have already been described by F. B.
Meek, and they, like the fishes, determine it to be lacustrine and fresh,
as already stated by Prof. Newberry. The species are stated by Meek *
to be distinct specifically, and in some cases generically, from all others
hitherto described from the West. lLeidy observes,+ that Mammalian
Remains received from Capt. King’s expedition include portions of Mas-
todon mirificus and Hquus excelsus, which indicate an age similar to that
of the bad lands of the Niobrara, which Hayden calJls Pliocene.
The remains described in this paper furnish few means of determining
the age of the deposit. There is, however, a great probability of their
being later than Miocene, and nothing to conflict with their determination
as of Pliocene age.
It may be added that numerous portions of skeletons of fishes remain.
to be identfied, in Capt. King’s collection
ON THE ADOCID&.
BY E. D. COPE.
ADOCUS. Cope.
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 285. Proceed. Amer. Philos..
Soc., 1870, 295; Transac. Am. Phil. Soc., 1869, 232.
Additional material enables me to add important characters to this
genus, ard to define its position with something like precision.
In the first place I find that it possesses a large intergular plate. This
I have verified on A. beatus and A. syntheticus, sp. nov. Having also
perfect xiphisternal bones of these two species, I can show that there is
no sutural attachment for the pelvic bones. The coexistence of these
two characters has been hitherto universal, and the present deviation
from it isa point of much interest. Instead of sutural surfaces, there
* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1870, 56.
7 1. c. 1870, 67.
548 [Dece. 2,
Cope.]
is an obtuse ridge corresponding to the pubis, and a knob answering to
the extremity of the ischium, both more prominent than is usual in
genera of Emydide.
This exceptional combination of characters points to the propriety of
separating Adocus as the type of a family equally distinct from the
Emydidz and the Hydraspidide, to be called the Adocide.
Further characters of the genus have been already pointed out in the
later essays above quoted. They are: the free lobes of the plastron
narrowed and shortened, furnishing extensive posterior and anterior
entrances tu the carapace. A series of intermarginal scuta on the bridge.
Costal capitula reduced or wanting.
No recent or even tertiary form of the Testudinata has yet been dis-
covered, which possesses the remarkable combination found in this genus,
and I think it must be regarded as a generalized group, and as such of
much interest to the student of paleontology.
The determination of the presence of the intergular plate in this genus
enables me to isolate from it the Baptemys of Leidy, which is otherwise
very similar. This being the case, there is reason to believe that the
latter is a Tertiary genus, and not Cretaceous one, as I had before been
inclined to suspect.
The species then are :
I. With mesosternum deeply received.
Plastron very thick. A. PECTORALIS.
Plastron thin. A. PRAVUS.
II. With transverse mesosternum.
g. Posterior lobe of plastron contracted, long as wide.
Plastron of medium thickness. A. BEATUS.
gaa. Posterior lobe broader than long, rounded.
Plastron thick, sparsely punctate. A. SYNTHETICUS.
Plastron thin, closely punctate. A. AGILIS.
ADOCUS SYNTHETICUS. Cope.
Spec. nov.
Established on a plastron which lacks the mesosternal, one episternal,
and one hyposternal; also on a marginal bone from the bridge, two im-
perfect costal bones, proximally complete, and some smaller fragments.
The bones of the p!astron present that oblique junction of element
with element diagonally across the point of crossing of longitudinal and
transverse sutures, as has been observed in all the species of the genus,
except A. pectoralis. Thus the right hyposternal, besides the usual union
with the left, presents a considerable suture for the left hyposternal, and
a lesser one for the left xiphisternal. The median dermal suture does not
coincide with the osseous behind the lyosternal bone ; but it is consider-
ably to the left of it, dividing the xiphisternal bones unequally. The
osseous suture is irregularand undulating. The hypo-xiphisternal suture
extends abruptly backwards near the margin of the plastron. This
margin behind the groin is thinned rather abruptly, with a marginal
1870.] O49
[Cope.
groove inside near the bridge, but it descends abruptly at the median
xiphisternal suture behind. The anterior extremity of the plastron is
rather broadly truncate, but little excavated, and with thick margin. The
form of the mesosternum is easily made out, from the fact of the pres-
ervation of at least one of all its corresponding marginal sutures. Its
antero-posterior length is at least .75 less than its transverse. It had no
posterior median process or spine, as in many Emydes.
As regards the scuta, the femoro-anal suture is directed backwards out-
wardly; the abdominal scuta are the longest. The pectorals, instead of
narrowing medially, as in most Cryptodira, widen interiorly, their com-
mon anterior apex being on the mesosternal bone. The gulars are much
reduced by the large intergular; each forms a spherical triangle—the
apex outwards, the suture with the humeral, concave. The intergular is
marginal, behind as wide as before, and convex; each half .66 wide as
lone.
The plastron is everywhere quite thick medially, but less so than in the
A. pectoralis. The superior surface of the xiphisternal bone presents a
curved ridge in the position of the pubic scar of the Pleurodira, which is
nearer the margin than either suture, and slightly curved backwards. A
marked sublongitudinal depression is seen between it and the median
suture. Near the latter, more than one-fourth its length from the
margin, thus farther from the latter than in Taphrosphys sp., is a smooth,
low knob corresponding to the ischium.
The posterior lobe of the plastron is broad and regularly rounded, re-
sembling thus the A. agilis. In the latter the pelvic ridges are scarcely
developed at all, and the bone is everywhere thinner.
The axillary margin within presents a strong ridge, which becomes
elevated as it rises with the axillary internal buttress of the carapace.
This ridge is much weaker in A. beatus and the other species. The ex-
ternal surface of the bones is studded with impressed dots, which are
separated by intervals posteriorly, but on the episternal bone are con-
fluent, leaving the surface rugose with small elevations. The sculpture
differs from that of A. agilis in being minuter, Jess distinct, and not dis-
posed in regular rows. The fragment of the bridge displays the axillary
and part of the anterior intermarginal plate. The former extends con-
siderably in front of exterior to the axillary notch; the latter can only
be compared with the same in A. pectoralis, as it is not preserved in the
A. agilis. It is relatively broader than in the former, and with less
oblique anterior border; the exterior angle which joins the suture of the
marginal is situated more anteriorly. A considerable extent of a mar-
ginal scutum of the bridge is preserved. Its transverse exceeds its longi-
tudinal extent, and its anterior margin is regularly convex.
One costal presents a rudiment of capitulum ; the other none.
M.
en ophyofeplastromery ae, sere ae res eral ica at OL 44
Width eS to first marginal of bridge...........0.33
Wad th" postenonlobeat cromeynearee ees e nen TO kes
Cope.] 530 [Dee. 2,
M.
Menothenosterionslobestroml eroimsensn eh eeeeeee 0.155
oe medianisutunrelepisternaleseeeisc eerie cece 0.038
ss MACSOSLCLIM Ae cay oretsvoreushiseiecenazee Cees ctor a Sea ER ENS 0.07
Width pO HB rele iene oath ta Uae ATMA les Shed wy ea Wea eR 0.095
Thickness hyosternal behind medially ................... 0.015
a hyposternal RMAs, PACER ea Ract Sct 0.020
Whidthpinteroulaniscubenmn-cemeteeiee ieee tet rere ares 0.058
enethioulary(ancero-posteriOm)rrei- reer eee 0.003
£S yfeanGal SembiUmn\..c hers daalerseciense oe sus orcuderean ie Relat 0.083
Width costal proximally No. 1 BS PaRe ie as ah Rvccce hl aneeeherey onde oan 0.088
us ss ee INOW 2 est varsiere nd alceepebensbe a abatceatpee epee 0.055
This fine species was discovered by my friend, J. C. Voorhees, in the
upper bed of cretaceous green sand, at Barnesboro, N. J. This gentle-
man is well known as the preserver of the unique and invaluable fossil of
the Lelaps aquilunguis.
ZYGORAMMA.. Cope.
Genus novum familiz ? Adocidarum.
Marginal bones of the carapace united wi h the costals by both suture
and gomphosis ; the suture existing on the free marginals, as well as on
those of the bridge, the gomphosis inferior to and more distal than the
suture. Hyposternals uniting with the marginals only, by gomphosis.
Dermal scuta distinct.
This genus is represented by a single species, which has left us but few
remains. These do not furnish positive indications for its reference to
the Cryptodire or Pleurodire divisions. The mode of union of the plastron
and carapace is, however, much more likely that of the Emydes and
Adoci; and J therefore suspect it to be Cryptodire. ‘The character of its
sculpture is also that of the last named genus, rather than of Taphrosphys.
ZYGORAMMA STRIATULA. Cope.
Sp. nov.
Represented by five marginal bones, three incomplete costals, and both
hyposternals with their external margins broken off. These bones indi-
cate a species of light and elegant construction. The hyposternals are
thin, and of nearly equal thickness transversely. Their sutures are very
coarse, and present but little irregularity at an intersection, in those of
opposite corners, excluding the other pair from contact, as is usual in
Adocus sp. The gomphosis of the hyposternal rises very obliquely. The
posterior lobe of the plastron has an acute margin, which continues as an
angle beyond the inguinal notch anteriorly. The fracture of the surface
prevents my ascertaining the existence of a series of intermargina! scuta.
The suture between the femoral and abdominal scuta divides the hypo-
sternals about equally.
The marginals at and near the bridge are nearly twice as deep as long.
The posterior of the bridge is gently convex, with the margin a little
1870.] ool [Cope
recurved. The two following (posterior to the bridge), are nearly plane
without recurved margin, which is slightly prominent at the point of
contact of the dermal suture of the marginal scuta. The posterior mar-
ginal bones are concave superiorly, the margin not otherwise recurved.
These marginals are, as usual, thickened underneath beyond the proximal
suture ; and into this the free end of the rib is inserted into a deep, oval
pit. On the terminal marginals of the bridge the pit is more distal, and
round. The free end of the rib springs from the costal bone at the
suture, and its length varies from an inch toa halfan inch. The pit for
the hyposternal is chiefly in the last bridge marginal, partly in the first
free marginal. It extends along the edge of the inner thickening, as the
latter descends on the bridge.
The sculpture of the costal bones consists of longitudinal shallow
grooves, which are more or less confluent (they are thus transverse to the
costal axis). On the marginals, the same ornamentation is varied by the
grooves being impressed punctate; behind the dermal suture, they are
directed slightly upwards ; anterior to it, they rise more obliquely. On
the posterior marginals, they are still more oblique. The sculpture of
the plastron is obliterated.
M.
vo nimalawidthvomplastrom yr. ir elecka es oelscelsecetr sales On a4:
en othehyposhermaleuirr trey sem ei receiereer ro Siow alls)
Hirst free posterior marginal width... .j.6......66:.--.- 067
iy fs oor se Seno blanco nents Spee tine 046
ue ne So oneabest, ulniclmesse eae O11
Corresponding costal, width ......................00000- 037
Mg Soe atl Ck MeS Sia miseyyatetwateua cuonciseste rst eteesicns 0045
From the upper bed of cretaceous green sand, Burlington County, New
Jersey. Discovered by my friend, Judson C. Gaskill.
The size of this species is about that of a snapping-tortoise (Chelydra).
HOMOROPHUS. Cope.
Genus novum Adocidarum.
Costal capitula wanting or rudimental. Vertebral bones of the cara-
pace co-ossified with the costals, sometimes, outlined on the inner surface,
where they appear to be lanceolate in form. The original costo-vertebral
suture, when traceable, very oblique ; the superior face of the vertebral
much wider than the inferior. Vertebral scuta often narrower than the
supposed outline of the vertebral bones ; on the posterior portions of the
carapace wanting.
This genus is evidently allied to Adocus by the character of its costal
capitula, but not having the episternal nor xiphisternal bones, nor the
outer part of the median sternals, 1 cannot add other points of resem-
blance or difference. The codssification of carapacial elements is without
parallel in the order, and the form of the vertebral bones prior to this
union, probably at an early period of life, was very peculiar. Their
¢
rue
Cope.] DIS [Dec. 2--
transverse section would be that of a broad wedge with slightly truncate
inferior apex. The neural spine lamina is attached in a strong inferior
groove of these pieces. The groove becomes wide and shallow posteriorly.
At the extremity of the vertebral series there are two isolated rugose
elevations, perhaps for the last neural spines. On each side of the last
a shallow concavity marks the point of contact of the ilium.
HoMOROPHUS INSUETUS. Cope.
Species nova.
The mesosternal bone is joined by an openly concave sutural margin of
the hyosternals on the lower surface. On the superior face the sutural
margins are straight, projecting further posteriorly and forming an obtuse
angle. The pectoro-abdominal dermal suture crosses the hyosternals near
their middle ; the abdomino-femoral, which is rather obscure, at the pos-
terior third.
The superficial sculpture of carapace and plastron is destroyed. The
‘inferior surface of the costal, displays a marked concavity exterior to the
position of the rudimental costal capitulum. The curvature of the costals
is well marked. When separated from each other, a fine sutural face
forms the inferior third of the thickness, the superior two-thirds being
fracture only. There are three vertebral dermal scuta more or less com-
pletely preserved. The outline is coffin-shaped anteriorly ; in one the
lateral margins are convex, in another concave, and then expanding again
posteriorly, the whole being fiddle shaped (panduratus). The two pos-
terior costal scuta meet on the middle line, and the last pair embraces a
pygal which is elliptic in front.
The shell is every where stout, and excessively thick ; neither hypo nor
hyosternals being thickened medially. The left hyosternal joins the right _
hyposternal at the intersection of the sutures.
M.
Length hyosternal on median suture..............-.-+--- 0.095
a hyposternal ‘‘ Soap Spite Re seared Aces clint Suc atoust eee Re 105
Thickness G6 us SO eRe atid Gs cea ae sete elegy ae ea .015
median costal proximally.......... eae oat O11
ug ANbETOR VET LED Aen ee ee sear eee Pais A 014
Length Bo RES ENIEU TS Sh ttekectoa Stet tae he Meee Toe ate orca 06
Width ido: fanterorly:.. eee ee ete eee eee eee eee 0285
se CFM OSLO TIOLLY: 5a ahsicne abstentions oie: shee seade e ee le Loner aere sol
Sante raverteralescice anverlOLhye mysterio ate 035
Length ‘‘ og ue SN LRG he cast ad ae a eee, eared eae -06
The free edge of the hyposternal is thinned to an edge rather abruptly.
The last distinct vertebral scutum is wider than the others, a costal suture
going off near its posterior margin.
The slight enclosure of the mesosternal bone gives the plastron a re-
semblance to those of Adocus syntheticus, A. beatus, and A. agilis. The
last is much thinner ; the second difters entirely in the characters of the
vertebral scuta, &c. It is nearer the A. syntheticus, but besides the
187).] D038 [Cope.
generic differences in the carapace, the abdomino-femoral dermal suture
crosses at the posterior third of the hyposternal bones, instead of at their
middle, as in the Adocus syntheticus.
This species, like the last, was found in the upper bed of the Cretaceous
green sand, at the works of the Pemberton Marl Company, New Jersey,
by Judson C. Gaskill, the director. The name of this gentleman fre-
quently occurs in my contributions to the paleontology of the Cretaceous,
and I take the present opportunity of expressing my indebtedness for the
constant liberality with which he has aided in the advance of the science.
Without his attention to and enlightened interest in the subject, many
interesting points in the history of the life of the Cretaceous periods
would not have come to light. Those desirous of seeing one of the fine
sections of the middle marl bed to be found in the state, will be repaid by
a visit to the opening made under the direction of Mr. Gaskill.
EIGHTH CONTRIBUTION TO THE HERPETOLOGY OF
TROPICAL AMERICA.
Read before the A. P. S., September 16, 1870.
By E. D. Corr.
The materials whose examination has furnished the following addi-
tions to zoological science, consist of four collections. These are, first:
one from Pebas, Equador, on the Amazon, from John Hauxwell; second,
that made by Prof. Agassiz, of the Thayer Expedition to Brazil; third, a
collection from Turk’s Island, West Indies, obtained from Prof. Adrian J.
Kbell; and fourthly, a small collection made by Dr. R. E. van Rijgersma
at St. Eustatia.
The first collection furnished the following species in addition to those
already determined by me from the same locality, in two papers, viz: in
Proceedings Ac. Nat. Sciences 1868, 96, and do. of the American Philo-
sophical Society 1869, 156.
: OPHIDIA.
Erythrolamprus esculapii. 2
Lygophis nicagus, Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1868, p. 152.
Oxyrhopus petolarius, var. G. (Giinther)
Oxyrhopus plumbeus. L.
Xenodon angustirostris? Peters.
Hydrops callostictus, Giinth., Ann. Mag. N. H. tab.
Helicops chrysostictus, Cope, (Tachynectes) Pr. A. N. S. Phil. 1862, 71.
Thrasops ahaetulla. LL.
Rhinobothryum lentiginosum Scopoli.
LACERTILIA.
Anolis nasicus.
Polychrus marmoratus.
Doryphorus castor, Cope, sp. nov.
Hyperanodon ochrocollaris Spix.
A. P. §S.—VOL. XI—42E
Cope.] 554 [Sep.16,
BATRACHIA.
Hyla polytaenia, Cope, Proceed. Am. Philos. Soc. 1869, 164.
Hyla leucophyllata Beireis var. triangulum Gthr ; see Cope, l.c. p. 156.
Hypsiboas* punctatus Daud. Dum. Bibr. ete. Of a pink color in the
yellow dots, in life.
Hypsiboas hypselops, Cope, sp. nov.
Hypsiboas lanciformis, Cope, sp. nov.
Scytopis (Dryomelictes) aurantiacus Dandin.
Pithecopus tomopternus, Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1868, 112.
Pithecopus tarsius, Cope, 1. ec, 113.
Phyllomedsa scleroderma, Cope, 1. c. 112; very large examples.
Coecilia.
HyPsIBOAS HYPSELOPS, Cope, sp. nov.
Of the group of H. crepitans Wied. The fingers are not webbed beyond
the basis of the proximal phalanges, except perhaps on the external one.
When the arm is extended, they reach a trifle beyond the groin. The
hind limb extended brings the heel a little beyond the muzzle. The
general form is slender ; the head broad and flat. The canthus rostralis
is distinct, but very coneave, and the rostrals prominent on a narrow
truncate muzzle. The outline of the head is rather acuminate to the apex,
intermediate in form between H. crepitans and H. boans. The eyes are
very large and prominent, entering only 1.5 times in the rather elongate
muzzle. ‘The tympanum is small, one-third the orbit in diameter and one-
half the interorbital width. Dermal free, margins none ; a slightly promi-
nent fold on the elbow and spur on the heel, only a prominence on the
other. Skin above smooth. Digital dilatations hardly .50 diameter of
tympanic membrane.
Color, above bright chestnut brown, below pale violet ; no marks on the
head or back. Upper arm of the same color, asisa band on superior face
femur. Front and back of femur, sides .66 of distance to axilla, and intero-
anterior fave of tarsus and metatarsus, with vertical black bands. They
are very distinct and wider on the front than the back of the femur; the
latter connect faintly above. Three or four faint cross bars on tibia above.
Two black spots on back of brachium, and one or two on front of ante-
brachium.
Vomerine tooth series arched as in other species, tongue broad. Ostia
pharyngea very small, one-fourth choane,
Length of head and body, 0m. 056 ; of hind limb, .091m ; of foot .088m;
of tarsus .02; width of jaws below tympanum .02; length from same
point (axial) .016.
The acuminate muzzle, larger eye, and anterior femoral bars, distin-
guish this from the H. crepitans. The same characters separate it from
H. indris, with the additional ones of smaller tympanum and larger limbs.
From Pebas Equador, Jno. Hauxwell’s collections.
*The name of the allied genus Cinclidium, Journ. Ac. N. Sci. 1867, 200, having been used before
for a valid genus of plants, I propose to change it to Cincloscopus.
1870.] D009 [Cope.
HYPSIBOAS INDRIS, Cope.
Journ. Ac Nat. Sci. Phila. 1867, 201.
This species with the small feet and dilations of the H. crepitans, exhibits
the broader head of the H. leprieurii type, with the vomerine series in-
curved anteriorly as in the majority of species of the genus. The spur
on the thumb is smaller than in any species of the genus in the single
specimen at our disposal, and the antebrachial and tarsal folds are distinct.
Gular region smooth. There is a cross band between the eyes darker than
the ground color; the femora are crossed above by broad, rather indistinct
cross-bands very different from those on the posterior face, and similar to
those on the tibia; in H. circumdatus, the same narrow black bands are
continued from behind to the front of the tarsus, without interruption.
Indistinet brown markings on the labial regions.
The shorter hind limbs, distinguish this species from the H. crepitans.
Habitat Surinam Hering. Mus. Academy Nat. Science, Philada.
HypsIBOAS CIRCUMDATUS, Cope.
Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci. Philada. 1867, 201.
Breadth of cranium at tympanum equal from end muzzle to opposite mid-
dle line of humerus ; canthus rostralis little marked, concave. Sacral
width twice in coccyx, three times from articulation of latter to opposite
outher canthus of eyes. Tympanum two-thirds occular opening. Vom-
erine series width divergent, oblique, scarcely curved ; palmation of band
to middle antepenultimate of foot to origin of penultimate phalange of
longest toe. Thumb an incurved unusually elongate osseous spur. Areol-
ations wanting on the breast, upper and under lip indistinctly yellow
margined. Femoral bands ten, blackish, very narrow and nearly sur-
rounding the leg : seven broader cross the tibia.
This species differs from the H. palmata in its much shorter palmation,
smaller size and different coloration ; from the H. crepitans, in its stouter
form, and much stouter feet and hands, and different coloration, compar-
ative measurements given under the head of the latter exhibit this.
Habitat, Brazil, no. Mus. Compar. Zoology, one
specimen.
The thumb-spur of this species is more striking than in any other of the
genus.
i)
H. crepitans and H. cireumdatus.
in line in line
Bnd muzzle to end coccyx............-. 2 3 2
do do OLIGIMECOC CYR ae il 5.75, 1 9.75
do do poster. marg. tympanum 8.5 10
Width cranium at latter point......... 9.5 11.25
From muzzle to opps’t outer canthus eyes 3 4
ATHLETOLMEe <Ene Mbeya eles oe aetiel 5,5 1 9.25
Carpus and longest digit.............. 8.5 9.25
IROStEHIOLNEXLLE MMT yo) eorers fat oe os he ete 3 10.25 4 9.25
AMIDE Seo be ARR Are AES Ar Ms AegaS Per Sd 1 2 1 5
NATSUS Sea cetoo tad rere cic pens Tateic, hoo Cro ats 8.5 10
Metatarsus and longest digit.......... 10 13.25
The three species just described have the palmation of the toes extend-
Cope.] 596 [Sept. 16,
ing to the base of the third phalange. In H. fasciatus Gthr. the web only
extends to the base of the second.
HyYPsIBOAS LANCIFORMIS, Cope. Sp. nov.
This is a large species of the H. boans group. It is characterized by its
elongate acuminate head, with nearly straight, sharp canthus rostralis and
vertical concave loreal region. Eyes prominent, large, their diameter
twice in leneth of muzzle, equal to interorbital width, and not quite twice
the diameter of the membranum tympani. A prominent dermal fold pro-
ceeds from it, overhanging the tympanum, ‘to near the middle of the side;
its margin is roughly glandular. No dermal margins nor spurs on the
limbs. Fingers not webbed beyond the metacarpals ; reaching when the
limb is extended, to the hind face of the femur. Hind limbs very long,
the muzzle making the second third of the extended tibia. Web extend-
ing to the end of the second phalange of the fourth toe of the foot. Ostia
pharyngea small, one-fifth of the verylarge choane. Tongue oval, longer
than wide. Vomerine teeth forming two angulate series, the two short
limbs of the angle uniting on the median line, without interruption.
Finger-dilatations large, not quite half the tympanum in diameter.
Color, bright chestnut brown above and on the sides, shading into smoky
in the groin. The whole under surface a dark maroon. <A black band
passes from the end of the muzzle, as wide as the loreal region, through
the eye and tympanum to along the axilla. Upper lip witha broad yellow
band, interrupted on the premaxillary apex, and continued a short dis-
tance in front of the canthus oris on the mandible. No cross bars or
bands on the sides or limbs; femur behind and before, smoky maroon.
A few irregular scattered dots on the back, and an indistinct series of
fourteen brown cross bands on the back and head. Dilatations of the
three inner fingers yellow above. Length, head and body, 0m.087; of
hind limb .158m. ; of foot .067; of tarsus .083. Width of sacrum .016 ;
of head below posterior margin of tympana .028m. ; length (axial) from
same point .027. Length of fore limb .05m.
This peculiar species resembles externally, a Polypedates. It need only
be compared to the Hypsiboas boans D. B. and H. oxyrhina R. and L. From
the former it differs in the entire absence of black or other colored bars on
the femora and flanks, in the darker coloration of the under surfaces, etc.,
and the more elongate, lance-shaped head. Its thumb spur is much weaker
than in most species of the genus. From H. oxhyrhina it differs much in
coloration and in the longer hind limbs. Thus according to Reinhardt, and
Liitken in that species, the proportion of theirlength to the total is, .107m.
to .075m.; that is, 1.33 per cent. In H. lanciformis, the proportion is 1.81.
The white margins of the limbs, breast and lower lip as well as the marbled
coloration described ky these authors; are here entirely wanting. Pebas,
Equador. J. Hauxwell’s collection.
DoRYPHORUS CASTOR, Cope. Sp. nov.
Scales of the abdomen weakly keeled, nearly equal to those of the back,
which are more strongly keeled. Scales of the sides scarcely smaller than
1870.] 5o7 [Cope.
either. Gular fold moderate, its scales subequal. Mental scales uniform,
smooth. No auricular scales; temporal scales rough, Occipital plate
large, longer than wide ; interorbital series three ; muzzle scales large
smooth, polygonal, only four rows between canthus rostralis. One canthal
scale ; two loreal rows ; nostril between two scales ; labials (large) 5—6.
Oblique folds on sides of neck. The arm extended reaches the middle of
the femur; the leg, the tympanic drum. Body slender ; tail perfectly
flat, wider than the body, with 35 cross-rows of keeled scales, which are
only produced into spines at the edge of the tail.
Color, blackish olive, gradually lighter to the head, which is thickly
black spotted on a green ground. A broad crescentic black collar which
is broadly light margined behind, much more indistinctly before. The
posterior border is against broadly margined with black behind. Limbs
closely green spotted on a blackish ground. Tail uniform brown. Belly
black, on the sides dark green, medially, femora dark.
Total length, 0m.093 ; from muzzle to angle of mandible, .016 ; to col-
lar, 021 ; to vent, .06 ; length fore limb, .082 ; of hind limb, .088 ; width
head at mandibular angles, 01.
From Pepas Equador ; J. Hauxwell’s collection.
TRETIOSCINCUS LAZVICAUDUS, Cope. sp. nov.
Scales large, those of both body and tail, entirely smooth. Several be-
hind the occipital plates larger than the others. Limbs short. Size about
that of the T. bifasciatus.
Color, a dark clear olive above; paler below, alight green band from the
temporal region along the canthus rostralis to the end of the muzzle, and
another parallel along the upper lip. No other markings.
From Occidental Department, Nicaragua. Discovered by J. A. Mac-
Neil, a successful explorer of that region. Mus. Essex Institute, and
Acad. Nat. Science.
This Ecpleopod, differs from its congener T. bifasciatus Dum. in the
absence of carine on the caudal scales, and in other points, and in the
coloration.
HIOMALOCHILUS CHRYSOGASTER, Cope. sp.nov.
General form quite slender, the head narrow. Scales in fomiibese
longitudinal series, those of the median larger than the lateral. Occipital
and parietal regions covered with numerous enlarged smooth polygonal
scales. Two short longitudinal plates represent the frontal ; each is in
immediate contact with the superciliary of its side, which exceeds it in
length. Three pair of supranasals, the anterior not separated from thie
anterior nasal ; six scales in two cross rows in the place of the prefrontals
bound the superciliaries and frontals in front. Superciliaries undivided.
Nasal a little higher than wide, the apex visible from above. Two loreals,
the anterior larger ; two prococulars, the superior large, the inferior in
place of the summit of the sixth and seventh labials. Four postoculars,
the superior bounding the posterior margin of the superciliary. Superior
labials fourteen, seventh and eighth entering the orbit. Inferior labials
Cope.] 008 [Sept. 16,
fourteen ; anterior four, very elongate inward. Gastrosteges, 200; anal,
1; urosteges, 78.
Color, light fawn brown above, below golden yellow. A series of fifty-
four deep brown spots extend on the dorsal region to opposite the vent,
and seventeen on the tail, in the individual described. ‘These spots are
darker edged and are occasionally confluent into a short irregular band.
They are often transverse and are generally twelve scales wiae, and three
or four long.
Length .0m 665; of tail, .108 ; rictus ovis, .016.
From Turk’s Island, obtained by my friend, Professor Adrian J. Ebell.
This Boa is very distinct from the Homalochili heretofore described, and
exhibits a decided tendency to Ungalia, especially to such species as U.
dipsadina. The species of Homalochilus Fischer, are; H. multisectus,
Cope, Proc. A. N. Science, Philadelphia, 1862, 70. H. striatus, Fischer,
Abh. Natur. Hamburg. 1856, 101. JZ. strigilatus, Cope, 1. c. p. 71; H.
chrysogaster, Cope, supra, and ZH. tortilis, Jan. (Dendophilus tortilis Jan.
Iconographie des Ophidiens Plate). The last named belongs here, as I
learned from a study of the type specimen in the Mus. Milan. It differs
very much from the species above described, but I cannot now point out
its characters, having mislaid my MS. description. The Hpicrates versi-
color of Steindachner, beautifully figured in the Denkschriften of the
Wiener Academie, belongs to this genus, and appears to be H. strigilatus
m., previously named.
The collection from Turk’s Island embraced the following species :
Homalochilus chysogaster, Cope.
Mabuia cepedei, Gray.
Anolis ordinatus, Cope, Pr. A. N. Sci. Phila. 1864, 17.
Cyclura (Ctenosaura) carinata, Harlan Journ. A. N. Sci. IV, p. 242.
I would here notice that Dr. John Giindlach, has published in the Re-
pertorio Fisico, etc., de Cuba, 1868, a catalogue of the Batrachiaand Rep-
tila of the Island of Cuba, which furnishes a desideratum of long standing.
I observe, however, that he interjects assertions as to the probability of
several of my species being synonymes of others, as Anolis porcus, A. iso-
lepis, Liocephalus raviceps and macropus, etc. As I suspect that these
suggestions are not original with Dr. Giindlach, I will observe that as a
general rule, it is unsafe for American naturalists to rely on assertions of
some Continental European zoologists, as to identity of the species
of each other, or of American zoologists, since it is an old practice,
the offspring of autocracy rather than of science, and which deceives
only temporarily.
ENULIUS MURINUS, Cope. gen. et. sp. Nov.
Char. Genericus. Palatine, pherygoid, and anterior portion of maxil-
lary bones edentulous ; a long, strong grooved tooth on the posterior part
of the maxillary bone. Internasal plates present ; rostral prominent de-
pressed ; two distinct nasals, a loreal, no preocular, two postoculars.
5
1870. ] 999 [Cope.
Scales smooth, with one apical pore-pit. Anal plate and subcaudals
double.
_ This genus has head-shields arranged like those of Rhegnops, Cope,
(Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1866, 128), but the dentition is entirely dis-
tinct. It is nearer to Tantilia B. and G. but that genus does not present
the edentulus characters, and exhibits a preoccular instead of a loreal
plate. The pupilis round. The general form is slender for a Calamari-
an serpent, and the tail is unusually elongate ; the head is not distinct.
Char. Specificus. Scales in sixteen or seventeen rows. Labials 6-7, third
and fourth in orbit. Two postorbitals ; temporals, 1—2—3. Rostral
broad, crescent shaped ; internasals half as large as prefrontals. Frontal
nearly triangular, with apex behind ; anterior border strongly convex.
Superciliaries sub-triangular, with short apex anterior. Occipitals elon-
gate. Geneials one pair followed by a row of three scales. The tail
measures between one-third and one-fourth of the total length, nearer
one-third, but the only specimen now by me has the extremity mutilated.
Gastrosteges, 216. Length of a specimen, 0m.220; other larger ones are
not now before me.
Color, mouse-color above, white below, a pale spot on each nasal plate,
and a dusky one on each side behind the rictus oris. From Chinandega,
in the Occidental department, Nicaragua, discovered by J. H. McNiel.
Several specimens were taken from a well, forty feet deep.
This species in scutellation and form of head is related to the Calamar-
inz, and itis doubtless a borrower, but its scale pores and long tail are
exceptional features.
CONTRIBUTION TO THE ICHTHYOLOGY OF THE MARANON.
(Read before the Amer. Phil. Soc. Aug. 19 1870.)
BY E. D. COPE, A. M.
CHARACINID &.
TETRAGONOPTERUS ORIENTALIS, Cope.
D. 11, A. 29; scales 7-387-8. The depth of the body one-half the length
(without caudal fin) ; the head one-fourth of the same. Dorsal fin above
a point a short distance behind the origin of the ventrals. Anterior anal
rays not elongate. Diameter one-third length of head, 1.5 times in the
convex interorbital width. The extremity of the mandible extends a
little beyond the line of the anterior rim of the orbit. Pectoral extend-
ing a little beyond basis of ventrals. A broad silver band from upper
opening of operculum te caudal, with a black spot near each end.
Length 0.097 M.
From Para. Mus. J. Carson Brevoort.
TETRAGONOPTERUS STILBE. Cope.
Depth contained 2.4 times in length (without caudal) ; length of head
8.5 times in the same. Radii, D. 11, A. 88, scales 8—39—10. Inter-
orbital width equal that of eye, and one-third length of head. Dorsal
960 Aug. 19,
[Cope.
fin elevated, a little behind the line of the origin of the ventrals. The
maxillary extends to near the line of the anterior margin of the orbit.
The anterior radii of the anal fin are elongate. Total length .075 M.
Length of anterior dorsal rays .018 M. ; length of anal rays .013 M.
A silver lateral band with a posthumeral and basal caudal spots, the
former very distinct.
This species has much the shape of an Abramis; its form is deep,
rather abruptly contracted at the extremities, and the supraoccipital
region is slightly concave. Allied to the T. abramis of Jenyns.
Para. Mus. J. Carson Brevoort.
TETRAGONOPTERUS HAUXWELLIANUS. Cope.
Radii D. 11; A. 47; squamation 9-10—47—10-11. Depth of body 2.2
times in length, exclusive of caudal fin. Profile above concave; end of
muzzle convex. Interorbital width greater than diameter of orbit; eye
three times in head. No teeth on the maxillary, which extends only to
the line of the anterior margin of the orbit. Caudal peduncle contracted.
Color silver olive, with silver white band on side, and indistinct humeral
and caudal spot. Total length .056 M.
This is a deep bodied species, with more than usually distinct lateral
silver band. Its anal radii are more numerous than in any other species,
except the T. spilurus C. V., which differs in having teeth on the max-
illary bone, ete.
Dedicated to John Hauxwell, a successful naturalist and explorer, from
whom most of the species here described were procured.
Pebas, Equador.
TETRAGONOPTERUS PECTINATUS. Cope.
Radii D. 10, A. 41; scales 4-5—41—6. Form elongate, fusiform, com-
pressed ; depth into length without caudal 2.75 times; length of head
nearly four times in the same. Interorbital width equal diameter orbit ;
diameter of eye one third length of head. Maxillary bone elongate, ex-
tending to below middle of pupil, furnished with minute teeth throughout
the length of its anterior margin. Profile straight, convex between
orbits, muzzle projecting beyond mandible. Dorsal rays prolonged ;
anterior anals also moderately elongate. The origin of the dorsal is ex-
actly over that of the anal.
A narrow silver green band on the posterior half the body; no caudal
spot ; humeral spot half way between lines of operculum and dorsal first
ray. Totallength .045 M.
This is a peculiar species, resembling technically only the T. artedii of
Cuv. and Val. as described by Giinther. This is a more elongate fish,
with smaller eye, and other characters. ‘The complete dentition of the
maxillary bone is unusual in the genus.
From Pebas, Equador. Hauxwell’s collections.
1870. ] d61 [Cope.
HEMIGRAMMUS ROBUSTULUS. Cope.
Radii D. 10, A. 27; scales 7—85—6. Form deep compressed ; length
without caudal 2.25 times depth, and 3.5 times length of head. Profile
straight, steeply descending to the obtuse muzzle. Interorbital width
greater than diameter of orbit; eye one-third of head. Five stout but
small teeth on the maxillary bone, which latter reaches to the line of the
middle of the pupil, hence the gape of the open mouth is greater than in
some other species. The dorsal fin is not so elevated as in some species
of Tetragonopterus, and originates behind the line of the ventrals. The
greatest elevation of the dorsal line is in advance of its origin. Sub-
orbital bone large ; mandible longer than muzzle.
Muzzle black ; cheeks black punctate ; body brown, a greenish lateral
band with indistinct humeral and caudal spots. Middle of caudal fin
blackish. Total length .051 M.; to origin ventrals .018 M. ; to origin of
anal .025 M.
This little Characin I refer to the genus Hemigrammus of Gill,* because
* Ann, Lyc. New York, 1858.
the lateral line is only half developed, extending in the present species to
beneath the middle of the dorsal fin. The general form and dentition are
stout. The gill rakers are elongate on the inferior, but sparse and short
on the superior limb of the hyoid arches.
From Pebas, Equador. Numerous specimens from Hauxwell’s col-
lection.
MYLETES LIPPINCOTTIANUS. Cope.
Radii D. 16, A. 39; lateral line 80. Depth of body two-thirds length
without caudal ; thus the form is discoid. Muzzle
very obtuse; mandible longer. Orbit one-third
of head, and 1.5 times into very convex inter-
orbital region. Thirty-two ventral spines. Adi-
pose fin two-thirds the length of the rayed dor-
sal; caudal with a very narrow sinus-like emargi-
nation above the middle of the edge. Ventrals
not reaching vent, commencing a little in advance
of the line of the first dorsal ray.
Color yellow silvery; dorsal region with steel
reflections ; a dusky spot above the middle of the
pectoral on the lateral line.
The teeth of the external premaxillary series
are very small, and in close contact with those of
the second.
Length .112 M. to line of origin of anal .057;
depth .068 ; do. of head at orbit .022 M.
From Para, Brazil, J. C. Brevoort’s collection.
Dedicated to my friend, James 8. Lippincott, author of important con-
tributions to Meteorology, Agriculture and other subjects.
A. P. §.—VOL. XI—43E
RRE
Cope. J ob 2 [Aug. 19,
STETHAPRION ERYTHROPS. Cope gen. et sp. nov.
Character genericus. Dorsal not elongate, anal prolonged. Premaxillary
teeth compressed, lobed, in two rows; no maxillaries. Mandibulars
lobed, without conic teeth posteriorly. No keel of spines on the ventral
region. Branchial fissures extended.
This new genus displays most of the characters of Mylesinus Cuv. Val.,
but is entirely without the exposed ventral spines characteristic of that
genus and of Myletes. The trenchant four-lobed molars of the posterior
series differ entirely from those of Myletes ; the dentition, indeed, is not
very different from that of Tetragonopterus.
Character spectficus. Radii; D. 12; A. 40; squam-
ation 21—61—21. Form discoid, abdominal outline
more convex than the dorsal, which is irregular.
It is convex above the nape, descending along the
base of the dorsal fin, convex in front of the adipose,
and concave behind it. Depth 1.5 times in length
without caudal, head 3.66 times in the same. Hye
large, not quite equal to the diameter of the moder-
ately convex interorbital space, 2.5 times in length
of the head. The maxillary is elongate, and extends
to the line of the anterior margin of the orbit. The
denticulations of the teeth are apical, those of the
mandibulars four or five in number. ‘The outer
teeth of the anterior premaxillary series small. Ventrals small, below
the line of origin of the dorsal. Adipose fin small, caudal fureate. Anal
fin narrow, not lobed, anterior radii moderately elongate.
[1870. 963 Cope.
Color silvery, anal fin dark edged ; a brighter band on caudal peduncle,
darker edged above. An indistinct postscapular spot. Total length
.095 M. The color of the irides in the type specimen, which has not been
very long in alcohol, is a dark red.
There is a spine directed forwards from the base of the first dorsal ray,
along the back, which is free for more than the eighth of an inch.
From Pebas; J. Hauxwell’s coll.
HoLoTAXIS MELANOSTOMUsS. Cope gen. et sp. nov.
Char. Genericus No adipose fin; origin of dorsal fin posterior to
that of the ventral. Teeth on the premaxillary, maxillary and man-
dibular bones, all simple conic, those of the first ane last, in two rows.
Suborbital bones very large; gill opening large. Scales without lateral
line.
This genus is simply Pyrrhulina with maxillary teeth.
Character specificus. Rather elongate; depth .0125 M.; length .07 M.,
length of head .014 M.; width of do. behind .0065 M. Radii D. 9.; A. I.
10; V. 8. Scales 7—25. Above brownish, below yellowish ; on the sides
the scales with orange bases and brown edges forming longitudinal lines.
A black band through the operculum and orbit round the edge of the
premaxillary ; another round the edge of the mandible. A black spot on
the middle of the dorsal fin.
This species is evidently near the Pyrrhulina filamentosa of Cuv. and
Val., but the caudal fin is regularly emarginate, and has not the peculiar
form ascribed to that species by those authors.
Numerous specimens from Pebas, Equador, Hauxwell’s coll.
PLETHODECTES ERYTHRURUS. Cope gen. et sp. nov.
Character genericus. Adipose fin present, dorsal short, originating
above the ventrals. Anal short. Lateral line present on the inferior row
of scales ; belly not compressed ; gill opening wide. Teeth on the max-
illary, premaxillary and dentary bones. Macxillaries in one row, simple,
conic ; premaxillaries in two rows, those of the external simple conic, of
the inner tricuspid ; mandibulars in an outer row of tricuspid teeth, and
two simple conic in the middle behind them. Maxillary arch angulate,
the maxillary bones extending downwards on each side of the dentary.
This genus appears to be nearest to Piabucina Cuv. Val. It differs in
Cope. ] 9) 6 4
[Aug. 19
the presence of the lateral line, and in having two series of premaxillary
teeth instead of one, of which the external is simple and not tricuspid.
There are also two series of teeth on the dentaries of Piabucina. The
suborbital bones of this genus are large.
_ Character specificus. Form medium, head elongate, broad and flat above,
interorbital width 2.5 times in length. Diameter of orbit nearly three
times in length of head, equal to length of muzzle. Length of head one-
third of total without caudal fin. Greatest depth one-fourth of same.
Scales large, 1. series 6 at ventrals ; transverse (above 1. line) 16. Radii,
D. 12; A. 11; V. 9; caudal deeply forked.
Color light olive: : ion of head and muzzle, ventral, anal, and dorsal fins
blackish. Caudal fin red, dusky medially.
There are three longitudinal ridges on the cranium above, of which
the median is very weak. Total length 0 M.068; length to opercular
margin, .0175 M.; to basis of ventral, .0285 M.; to basis of anal, .042 M.;
to bases of caudal, .052 M. From Pebas, Equador ; Hauxwell’s collection.
APHYOCHARAX FILIGERUS. Cope sp. nov.
Head small, the length contained five times in total, without caudal fin ;
height 4.25 times in the same. Eye three times in length of head, a little
exceeding muzzle. Dersal fin originating half way between lines of
origin of ventrals and anal. Anal long, the anterior rays much prolonged,
filiform, extending backwards to the last fifth of the length of the base.
Dorsal elevated ; Radii, D. 10; A. 28. 1.1. scales 38; tubes on a few of
the anterior only; 1. tr. 12. Premaxillary teeth seven on each side, max-
illaries numerous, occupying most of the margin of the bone. Color olive
above, yellowish below, lower lobe of caudal blackish. Length 0M. .06.
This, the second species of this genus just described by Giinther (Proc.
Zool. Loc. London, 1868, 245), differs from the type species, A. pusillus,
in the longer anal fin (there are only 18 rays in the latter), with much
prolonged anterior radii, the shorter head, the more numerous maxillary
teeth, &e.
From Pebas, Eastern Ecuador, Hauxwell’s Collection. Dedicated to
the discoverer, a successful naturalist and explorer.
ROEBGIDES BICORNIS. Cope sp. noy.
Radii D 11, A 51; seales 1. tr. 18—16; the back is gibbous ; the outline
of the front plane; the rete slightly descending, and
overhanging the mandible; depth one-third of Tengen,
without caudal fin; length of head 3.5 times in :same ;
eye large, 3.5 times in head ; inter-orbital region narrower,
convex; two horn-like teeth projecting forwards; two
small ones on each side posteriorly, directed outwards ;
mandible with four equal conic processes ; mandible with
four canines; premaxillary teeth irregular, maxillaries
sparse; pectorals and ventrals extending beyond basis
of anal; length 0.07 M.; to ventrals .02 M. ; to anal .025
M. ; origins of dorsal and anal opposite.
1870.] 069 : [Cope.
Color pale, with a silver lateral band, and black humeral and basal
caudal spot.
Pebas, Eastern Equador, Hauxwells Collection.
This species is near the R. myersii Gill, M.S., but is a shallower
fish, with smaller eye, and fewer horns on the upper jaw. The Hystri-
codon xenodon Reinhardt, Vidensk. Med. Kjobenhavn, 1849 37, has much
larger scales.
ANACYRTUS TECTIFER. Cope sp. nov.
Radii; D. 11; A. 37, Seales from basis of dorsal to basis of anal 12—10.
A short, deep species ; depth 3.2 times in length, without caudal fin ; head
3.6 in the same; eye 3.75 times in length of head; equal interorbital
width ; head elevated, front slightly concave in profile, end of muzzle
descending ; scales rather large ; ventrals reaching anal fin, pectorals not
Maxillary teeth numerous, equal, premaxillary series confluent, three
canines on each side ; mandible with two on each side ; mandible longer
than muzzle, when open.
White, without silvery lateral band ; inferior half operculum golden ; a
large black spot in front of the origin of the dorsal, on the side : a black
spot at the basis of caudal; ante-orhital region punctulate; length
0.M. 068 ; to end of maxillary .0075 M. to origin of ventral fins .0225 M. ;
to origin of anal .031 M. The origin of the dorsal is in advance of the
line of the origin of the anal. Its last ray is much behind the latter
point.
This species is named from the fact that the free anterior margin of
the nasal bones is more prolonged than in other species, and overhangs
the nares and premasxillaries. The few anal radii and coloration also
distinguish this fish from its allies.
Pebas, Ecuador. Hauxwell’s Collection.
CYNOPOTAMUS GULO. Cope sp. nov.
Form slender; the depth of the body near three-fourths the length of
the head, four and one-third times in the total, without caudal fin.
Length of head three and a quarter times in the same. Eye 3.75 times
in the length of the head. Maxillary bone extending a little beyond the
line of the posterior rim of the orbit. Fourteen rows of scales between
origin of dorsal and lateral line. Fin radii D. 12, A. 41. The profile of
the head is scarcely concave and slopes regularly to the premaxillary
border. A few scattered canines form an inner premaxillary row.
There is a canine at each end of each premaxillary of the outer row.
The outer mandibular row consists of four equidistant canines on each
side in front, and numerous small teeth behind.
Color pale. Lower half the opercle golden. A black humeral spot,
and a silver lateral band extending from it to the caudal fin, at the base
of which is a black spot.
Length 0M .09. To opercular margin .025. To origin dorsal (vertical
line) .035. To origin of anal .044.
Cope. ] 566 [Aug. 19,
From Pebas, Eastern Peru. Numerous specimens from Hauxwell’s
Collection.
Other Characinide contained in the collection are, Macrodon trahira
Spix ; Erythrinus brevicanda, Giinth ; Hydrocyon sp. indet ; Myletes duri-
ventris Cuv.; Tetragonopterus ortonii, Gill M.S.S. Proc. A. N. Sci.,
Phila., 1870 ; Gasteropelecus stellatus Kner; Chalcinus brachypomus, C.
V.; Leporinus frederici, Bloch; Curimatus sp. indet.
The Characins obtained at Para by De Schulte Buckow for J. Carson
Brevoort’s Collection, already mentioned, are Leporinus striatus Kner. ;
L. megalepis, Gunth. ; Schizodon fasciatus, Spix ; Tetragonopterus lepi-
durus Kner. ; T. fasciatus; T. stilbe, Cope, T. Gasteropelecus sternicla
L. ; Chalcinus brachypomus C. V.; Myletes lippincottianus, Cope; Ser-
rasalmo piraya; Serrasalmo maculatus, Kner. The last agrees closely
with Kner’s figure and description, except that the young only is spotted,
and the caudal fin of young and adult are yellow-edged outside the
blackish cross band.
ODONTOSTILBE FUGITIVA. Cope gen. et. sp. nov.
Char. Gen. Teeth in a single series on the premaxillary and dentary
bones only, broadly spatulate and crenate. Anal fin elongate. Lateral
line continued to the caudal fin.
This genus differs from Chirodon (Girard) chiefly in the complete
development of the lateral line of tubules.
Char. Spec. D.10, A. 24, 1.1.35. Transverse line at vent 11 ; at ventral
fins 5—d5. Teeth, two on each maxillary, five ou
each premaxillary, and six on each dentary. The
premaxillaries with seven cusps each, the median
more prominent. Those of the other bones with
sinilar cusps of more equal length. Depth of body
3.9 times in length, exclusive of caudal fin. Head
' four times in the same, its profile convex longitu-
dinally and transversely, with interorbital width
equal diameter of orbit. Latter 2.5 times in length of head. Caudal fin
deeply forked. Ventral just in advance of below first dorsal ray. Pec-
toral barely reaching ventral. Olive silvery, with a silver band, dark-
edged above and below, from opposite middle of pectoral fin to basis of
caudal. A dark spot at latter point. Cheeks silvery. Length two inches.
Pebas, Eastern Equador. Hauxwell’s Collections.
This little Characin is allied to the Chirodon alburnus, Gthr. (P. Z. 8.
Lond. 1869, 424,) but has teeth on the maxillary, fewer and differently
formed on the other bones, more anal radii, different proportionis, ete.
SILURID 4.
HypoPptoroMA BILOBATUM. Cope sp. nov.
Oharacter.—Form rather slender. Adipose fin reduced to a microscopic
spine. Teeth numerous, aa on each side of the mouth. Caudal fin
deeply forked, with nearly equal lobes.
1870. ] O07 [Cope.
Description,—Radii, D. I. 7, A, 6, P. I. 6, V. I. 5. Two rows of plates
of the lateral line to a little behind the anal fin; then one row. Trans-
verse series 24 to caudal. Three plates between occiput and dorsal fin.
Fourteen plates across dorsal line behind dorsal fin. Sutures of vertex
obliterated, but those on each side of the suture rising from the middle of
the orbit are of equal width. Three plates along each canthus rostralis,
with a median rostral. Temporal region rugose. Sides and muzzle
below, with close, card-like spinules. Plates everywhere comb-like
behind. Spines and outer radii of all the fins, spinulose. The pectoral
spine is, in addition, serrate on the inner margins.
. i /
or AY :
ss =a | [ REFs.€
StS Les:
Length of head to occiput 3.5 times in total less caudalis ; width behind
pectorals five times, and depth at dorsal 7.5 times in the same. Orbit
round, one-third of interorbital width. Pectorals to middle of ventrals ;
ventrals to beyond vent, but not to anal fin. Basis of dorsal twice to
adipose spine (!), which is small, articulating ina groove in the summit of
the interhemal bone, which appears between the shields. First dorsal
ray weak, jointed distally. ;
Interoperculum very large, entirely inferior. Thoracic bones covered
with rugosities, separated externally. Three rows of abdominal plates,
four in the first cross-row. :
The lobes of the caudal fin are acute and nearly equal. Length four
inches. Color olive, top of head and dorsal region darker. A black spot
in the middle of the caudal fin.
Cope. ] 968 [Aug. 19.
This is the second representative of a remarkable genus recently de-
seribed by Giinther (Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1868, 234), and which has
as yet been found only inthe upper Amazon and its tributaries. The
opercular apparatus is so modified as to reduce the operculum to a very
small bone, and to give the interoperculum an entirely inferior position
and increased size. The general appearance is intermediate between that
of Hoplosternum and Loricaria.
From Pebas, Equador. Hauxwell’s collection, with Caliichthys asper
and the following species of Nematognathi.
DORAS PECTINIFRONS. Cope sp. nov.
Radii D. I. 5, “A. 12; P. 1:5; V.6. lateral line 27. Superior and
inferior face of caudal region with shields with posterior and lateral
spines. Lateral plates elevated, with a prominent point posteriorly
directed above and below the prominent median spine. On the anterior
half the side one to three series of irregular posteriorly directed spines
above the lateral series, and a few irregular ones below it. Margins of
the cephalo-nuchal shield prominent all round, often recurved, rugose ;
pectinate above the orbits, and at the posterior projection on each side
the dorsal fin. Two serrate ridges mark the premaxillary spines, and
the preorbital bones are crested laterally and superiorly, the superior
crest coinb-like. Preopercular angle with a serrate crest ; scapula serrate.
Dorsal and pectoral spines elongate, both serrate before and behind, and
with two spinulose ridges on each side. Humeral spine reaching last
third of pectoral, with an external series of straight spines. Caudal fin
rounded. Maxillary barbel not quite reaching basis of pectoral spine.
No spine in adipose dorsal.
Color everywhere black, gular, thoracic, and abdominal regions white
spotted. Caudal fin with a yellowish cross-bar near the extremity.
Length of type specimen three inches.
Pebas, Equador. Hauxwell’s collection. Allied technically to the D.
armatulus of Cuy. and Val.
BUNOCEPHALUS ALEUROPSIS. Cope sp. nov.
Radii D. 5-6, A. 9, P. I. 4, C. 10. Base of first dorsal ray nearer end
of muzzle than origin of caudal fin; its distance from former a little
more than .4 of total length. Maxillary barbel extending to near the
middle of the pectoral spine. Width of head at preopercula 5.66 times
in length, exclusive of caudal fin. Length of caudal fin 5.70 times in
total length. Length of head to operculum 6.1 times in total (without
caudal). Five series of wartlets along each side of the tail. Tail wide
as deep medially, compressed distally. Length four inches; greatest
(scapular) width a little less than .25 of the total (with caudal fin).
Color brown, the head densely punctulated with white above. Sides
and back with dark brown blotches. Dorsal fin with extremities of anal
and caudals, blacl or blackish.
From Pebas, Eastern Equador. John Hauxwell’s collection.
This species is near the B. gronovii Blecker, but has different radial
formule and larger maxillary barbels, etc. In the latter the fins have,
according to Giinther, D. 5, A. 6, P. I. 5.
[</e
1870.] 069 [Cope.
o
PSEUDORHAMDIA PISCATRIX. Cope sp. nov.
Head above granular rugose, except between and in front of the pre-
frontals. Occipital process convex, not keeled, apex in contact with
basal dorsal shield; its length exceeding a little its width at the base.
Head narrow, with narrow truncate muzzle and nearly equal jaws; the
width at base of pectoral spines equal length to behind orbit. Orbit 3.3
times in length of head, equal interorbital width. Radii D. I. 6, A. 12,
P. I. 9, V. 6, not reaching anal. Caudal deeply forked lobes subequal.
Beards very long; the maxillary reaching to near the extremity of the
caudal fin, the external mentals to beyond the base of the pectorals, the
inner to beyond the middle of the pectorals. The pectoral spine is serrate
on both edges ; the dorsal on the posterior only. The longest ray of the
dorsal when depressed reaches the base of the adipose fin. The adipose
subtriangular, its base one-seventh the total length, without caudal fin.
Head to opercular opening 3.75 times in length to basis of caudal fin.
Length five inches. Pebas.
RHAMDIA CYANOSTIGMA. Cope sp. nov.
Radii D. I. 6, the spine not thicker than the other rays, and weaker
than tbe pectoral; A. 12, V. 6; P. I. 8; its spine minutely serrate within
and without. Top of the head smooth, or with a slight rugosity on the
postfrontal region. Head to operculum a little more than .2 of length
to basis of caudal fin; length to basis of dorsal one-third of the same,
Depth of body 7.33 times in the same length; length of adipose fin 3.33
times in the same. Depressed dorsal not reaching adipose; pectoral
reaching only .66 distance to ventrals ; latter reaching half way to anal.
Caudal fin very deeply furcate, lobes equal. The maxillary barbel reaches
to near the end of the adipose fin. Length four inches; general form
slender. Color plumbeous ; head above blackish, with an iridescent blue
spot above the posterior margin of the orbit on each side.
From Pebas, Equador. Hauxwell’s collection.
This species is allied to the R. dorsalis Gill, from the same region, but
is a more slender fish, with more numerous anal radii and longer barbels.
CHROMIDID &.
CRENICICHLA CYANONOTUS. Cope sp. nov.
D. xxiv. 11, A. III. 8; scales 5-66-13. Depth of body 6.25 times in
total length ; length of head a little more than four times in the same.
Orbit large, equal length of muzzle, 3.75 times in length of head, a little
less than interorbital width. The head is thus broad and short; above
quite plane. Scales of body rather large, seven rows on the cheek. End
of maxillary marking anterior third of orbit. External teeth stronger.
The ends of the pectoral and ventral fins mark the thirteenth dorsal spine.
The longest dorsal spine equals the length of the premaxillary bone with
spine. Color olive, with seven indistinct brown cross-bands directed ob-
liquely backwards to the middle line of the side. A dark band from orbit
to axilla. A black, white(?) edged spot on the upper caudal radii. Dor-
sal and anal fins without spots, blue at the base. Length six inches.
From the upper Maranon, near Pebas. John Hauxwell’s collection.
Cope.] O10 [Aug 19,
CRENICICHLA LUCIUS. Cope sp. nov.
Radii D. xix. 138; A. III. 10. Squamation 4—6413. Depth of body
one-seventh of totallength. Length of head three and a half times in
the same. Head elongate, pike-like, the mandible strongly projecting,
the outer series of teeth not larger than the others. Orbit, diameter less
than length of muzzle, nearly five times in length of head, equal inter-
orbital width. Length of longest dorsal spine three-fourths that of the
premaxillary bone with spine. Scales large, eight rows on the cheek.
Maxillary bone reaching the anterior fourth of the orbit. Ventral and
pectoral fins marking the eleventh dorsal spine.
Color olivaceous, above brown. A darker band from muzzle to opercular
angle. <A black spot at base of caudal radii, edged with yellow. Dorsal
and anal fins unspotted. Length six inches, width of head behind .75 inch.
This species is near the C. lacustris of Castelnau’s fine work, and differs
in the following points. The latter is a less elongate species, the depth
being only one-sixth the length. The scales are less numerous, counting
4—51—11. There is a brown spot on the middle of the dorsal fin, and
some longitudinal shades on the posterior part not found in the C. luctus.
Both species were sent by John Hauxwell from the tributaries of the
Upper Maranon, in Equador.
ACARA FLAVILABRIS. Cope sp. nov.
Three series of scales on the cheek. Radii D. xvi. 10. A. III. 8 squam-
ation 83—26—9. Depth 2.25 times, head three times in length without
caudal fin. Orbit, diameter a little exceeding muzzle, one-third length of
head ; inter-orbital width two-fifths the same. The length of the longest
dorsal spine is equal to that of the muzzle.
Color brown, several darker cross shades across the dorsal region; a
large black ocellus on lateral line, Nootherspots. Fins dusky. Lower
lip yellow, Total length four inches; depth of head 1.1 inch. Front
slightly convex in profile.
From near Pebas, Ecuador, John Hauxwell’s Collections. It was asso-
ciated with several specimens of Mesops taeniatus Giinth. (Catals. B. M.
iv. p. 812), from the same locality. In the same collection occurred Rivu-
lus micropus Steind. var., Sternopygus macrurus, S. virescens and Carapus
fasciatus. ;
TETRAODONTID &.
TETRAODON PsiTtTacus L.
Cheilichthys (Mill). Steind. Verh. Zool. Bot. Ver. Vienna 18, p. Tab.
This species was brought by Natterer from some of the fresh waters
of Brazil, according to Steindachner. It occurs in the present collection
from Equador, from a point 2,300 miles from salt water.
EXPLANATION OF WOOD CUTS.
Fig. 3. Myletes lippincottianus, Cope, mouth showing dentition.
Fig. 4. Odontostilbe fugitiva, Cope, ibid.
Fig. 5. Stethaprion erythrops, Cope, natural size; 5a, mouth with dentition.
Fig. 6. Plethodectes erythrurus, Cope, natural size; 6a, mouth with dentition.
Fig. 7. Reboides bicornis, Cope, mouth with dentition.
Fig. 8. Hypoptopoma bilobatum, Cope, natural size; 8a, same seen from below.
d71
Stated Meeting, December 2d, 1870.
Dr. G. B. Woop, President, in the Chair.
Present, fourteen members.
A letter of acknowledgment was received from the R.
Danish Society of Sciences, dated November 5, 1870 (81, 82
31066 8)
Donations for the Library were received from the Prussian
Academy; Silliman’s Journal; the Connecticut Academy ;
the American Oriental Society; Mr. James J. Barclay, of
Philadelphia; and Dr. Rushenberger.
Dr. H. C. Wood presented for publication in the Transac-
tions of the Society a Monograph of the Fresh Water Alga
of the United States, which was referred to a Committee con-
sisting of Dr. Carson, Dr. Bridges, and Mr. Durand.
Dr. Pepper communicated “ Observations upon a Skeleton,”
exhibiting a unique case of Universal Hypostasis associated.
with Osteoporosis, illustrated by Drawings. Dr. Leidy, Dr.
Coates, and Dr. Allen were appointed a Committee to act in
conjunction with the Secretaries respecting the publication of
this paper.
Prof. Cope communicated a paper on the Fishes of the
Fresh Water Tertiary in Idaho, discovered by Cae Clarence
King; and another on the Adocide.
Prof. Cope made the following verbal communication on
- fossils, which he exhibited and described :-—
Prof. Cope exhibited vertebree of two species of Pythonomorpha, the
largest known to exist. One of these, Mosasaurus maximus Cope, from
the New Jersey Cretaceous, was represented by vertebra, whose centra
were 3.5 inches in diameter across the articular extremities. Those of
M. missuriensis Harl. measured 2.5 inches in a specimen of seventy-five
feet in length, according to W. E. Web»; so that the I. maximus prob-
ably exceeded that length. This measurement was also confirmed by
statements of persons engaged in digging marl in New Jersey. The
second species exhibited was still larger, and appeared to belong to the
genus Liodon. The diameter of the convex articular extremity was more
than 5.5 inches, indicating a great length for the anima’, perhaps one
A. P. S.—VOL. xI—44n
hundred feet. lt was named ZL. dyspelor Cope. The centra were de-
pressed in the dorsal region, and had the smooth margin bordering the
ball and rugose surface within this band. An emargination for the neural
eanal. Caudals pentagonal anteriorly, becoming soon higher than wide.
From near Fort McRae, New Mexico.
Several other species of the order had recently been found by Prof.
Mudge in Kansas. Two of these were ZLiodons, and were named L.
ictertcus and L. mudgei, respectively. The former was allied to L. validus
Cope, having depressed dorsal vertebra ; but the quadrate bone had a
less prominent and more medially placed external angle and ridge. The
L. mudgei had depressed vertebre ; but the external angle of the quad-
rate more posterior, and not continued so far down. ‘The third was a
Clidastes, much the largest of the genus, nearly equalling the Liodon
palidus in size, and differing from the described species in the lack
obliquity of the articular extremities, and other points. He vamed it
Clidastes cineriarum Cope.
The Treasurer’s report was read.
Prof. Trego, Chairman of the Publication Committee, read
the report of that Committee; when,
On motion, the Committee was instructed no longer to for-
ward copies of the Transactions to delinquent subscribers,
after due notice given.
Pending nominations Nos. 661, 666, and new nominations,
Nos. 667, 668, were read.
And the Society was adjourned.
Special Meeting, December 9th, 1870.
Dr. Woop, President, in the Chair.
Present, twenty members.
The Preamble and resolutions for considering which this
meeting was called, were read, debated, and withdrawn by
Mr. Cuyler, by permission of the Society.
It was then on motion of Mr. Cuyler,
Resoived, That a Committee consisting of the President of the Society
and five members be appointed, whose duties it shall be to consider and
report whether it is desirable, and if desirable, whether it be practicable
0713
to establish in the city of Philadelphia, under the auspices of the Society,
an Observatory, Astronomical and Physical, either or both, and if so at
what cost, on what site, and what instruments are requsite for such
purposes, and at what cost such instruments can be procured.
The following gentlemen were nominated and on motion
appointed to constitute said committee; Mr. Cuyler, Prof.
Frazer, Prof. Henry, Prof. Kendall, and Mr. Fairman Rogers.
And the Society was adjourned.
Stated Meeting, December 16th, 1570.
Dr. G. B. Woop, President,.in the Chair.
Present, fourteen members.
Letters of acknowledgement were received from the Emden
Nat. Hist. Society (77-80), the Buenos Ayres Museum (78, 79,
80), the Soc. Antiquaries, London (82), and the Nat. Hist. Soc.
at Newcastle on Tyne (82).
ihetters of emyoi were received from the Mmden) N. EH:
Society, Oct. 1, and the Bureau of Geological Research of
Sweden, Stockholm, May Ist, 1870.
A: printed Circular memorial in behalf of the collections in
Paris, threatened by the bombardment, was received from the
Provost and professors of Trinity College and the University
of Dublin.
Donations for the Library were received from the Imp.
Russian Academy, the Nat. Hist. Soc. at Moscow, the Austrian
Geological Ins., Dr. Heidinger of Vienna, the Observatory at
Prague, the Societies at Emden and Frankfort, the Societies
of Science and Antiquities at Copenhagen, the Swedish
Geological Bureau, the R. Lombard Institute, the Institute at
Venice, M. A. de la Rive of Geneva, the London Geographical
Soc., the Meteorological Committee of the R.S., and the Editors,
of Nature, the Hist. Soc. at Quebec, the Hssex Institute,
Boston N. H.8., New Jersey Historical Society, Prof. A. M.
a
Cope. ] D i4 Dee. 18,
Mayer of Bethlehem, the Medical News and Penn. Monthly,
Peabody Institute in Baltimore, Surgeon General’s Office in
Washington, the Publishing Bureau of the U. S. Com-
missioners to the Paris Int. Exp. of 1867, War Maps from the
Chief Engineer’s Bureau in the War Office, a map of Ohio
from Prof. Newberry, and the Annals of the Buenos Ayres
Public Museum.
The Committee to which was referred the paper of Dr.
Horatio C. Wood on Fresh water Algze, reported in favor of
its publication in the Transactions. The subject was, on
motion, referred to the Publication Committee with instructions
to report at the next meeting.
An obituary notice of Mr. Franklin Peale, a late member
of this Society, was read by Mr. Robert Patterson.
An obituary notice of Mr. Samuel Vaughan Merrick, a late
member of this Society, was read by the Rev. Dr. Goodwin.
Prof. Cope made a communication on certain extinct Astici
from the Fresh water Tertiary of Idaho. And another on
four species of Pythomorphia from the Cretaceous of Kansas.
The reading of the report of the Finance Committee was, on
motion, postponed to the next meeting.
Mr. Marsh, Treasurer of the Building Fund Trust, presented
the annual Report of the Trustees.
Pending nominations 661 to 668 were read.
Motions for appropriations for the ensuing year were post-
poned to the next meeting.
And the Society was adjourned.
ON SOME SPECIES OF PYTHONOMORPHA FROM THE CRE-
TACEOUS BEDS OF KANSAS AND NEW MEXICO.
BY PROF. E. D. COPE.
Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 18th, 1870.
LIopDON DYSPELOR. Cope.
Species nova.
This’species is represented by numerous vertebre of the dorsal, lumbar,
and caudal regions, and other remains, which will at a future time be
more fully described than is possible at present. The vertebree indicate
the largest Mosasauroid reptile known, and are remarkable for their form
as well as size.
mie
1870.] D719 [Cope.
The centra of the dorsals are much depressed, quite as in LF. perlatus,
Cope, and Mosasaurus brumbyi, Gibbes. Their articular faces are of
transverse lenticular form, the superior arch being a little more convex
than the inferior, and obtusely emarginate for the flocr of the neural
canal. The superior outline is thus bilobed; the lobes rounded. "he
transverse curvature of the articular ball is quite regular, and not, as in
Mosasaurus maximus, more steeply inclined at the external or lateral
angles. A rather broad, smooth band separates the edge of the ball from
the surfaces of the centrum adjacent. The latter are rather finely striate
ridged from the edge of this band. The inferior outline of the centrum
is strongly concave, and with two venous foramina separated by a wide
interval. The basis of the diapophysis on a lumbar is very broad, mea-
suring more than half the length of the centrum. In general characters
this lumbar resembles the dorsal, including the emargination for the
neural canal, but is shortened in relation to its length.
The depressed form of the lumbar centra gives place gradually on the
caudals to a more elevated pentagonal outline, which is still more reduced
in width in more posterior regions. The hemal arches are articulated,
and on the anterior caudals to slightly elevated bases; on the more pos-
terior, the bases are reduced in height, and more widely and deeply ex-
cavated. I have not seen the most distal caudals, and hence cannot de-
termine whether their chevron bones articulate in pits, as isthe case with
those of L. perlatus, L. proriger, etc. Ona caudal where the depth of
the centrum a little exceeds the transverse diameter, the diapophysis has
become narrow and thick. The excavation for the neural canal is strongly
marked on the more anterior caudal. The smooth border of the articular
ball is here narrow, and the superficial rugee are fine, and confined to the
anterior part of the centrum.
Measurements. M.
Transverse diameter ball posterior dorsal.............. 5605 sooo, WRAL
Vertical f¢ Domi Ac baeeees ote AEA Se RUA TREES ot rete ee 6 all
ot ot anterior caudal..... SSS COAT E te ore oe 094
Transverse Hg a PL acy brat eeuseaeispse ss, Sveboees edeereeerapni tei Ose)
itenathycentimimcaudales. 1 -- 2. a. BGS Clos Senet a ONG sobbed a) Oral
Transverse diameter neural canal............. dunce ues Sous seco olliilatay
as zs basis dig pophiySis ir. mnmeeer eee eps raepyat aoe,
Re af sf up of a more distal caudal.... .0278
Longitudinal diameter chevron articulation of caudal............ 023
Meno piecent nuns serene rane HEA SRE pane bod SE SDeS coo alliéls}
Depihtballtcentnmmnys- ease soa. Sick Real pbaesicl cists sv, Tula) jae OS
iWaid Glave. se SOTO Oe ORANG 6,316.6 eee re iocah eterna 091
eneihweontrumona lumbar. sc: | eee cick oceiaeo. Mepgocies lO.)
Widtihtoteanticular:balllee ces. 454.. eee: Sores nrc tacit eek) pai oO
In instituting a comparison between this and other known Mosasauride,
it wiJl be necessary to consider species referred to Mosasaurus as well as
to Liodon, from the fact that some of the former may really be Liodons.
A 76
Cope.] vi [Dee. 18,
The Liodons with compressed or round dorsal or lumbar vertebrae may
be dismissed from comparison. Of the depressed species, J. perlatus,
Cope, is known from specimens of one-third or less the size of the present
one, which are further peculiar in having the diapophyses of the lumbars
to stand on the anterior half only of the centrum. In JZ. tctericus, Cope,
the centra are less depressed, and the size still smaller than in the last.
Among Mosasauri with depressed vertebral centra, it is to be noted
that none present so great a degree of depression and lateral extension
except the M. brumbyi of Gibbes. They are all also much smaller. The
M. brumbyt was founded by Dr. Gibbes on two lumbar vertebrie from the
Cretaceous of Alabama, which resemble those of the M/. dyspelor in form,
and also in size. It is probably its nearest ally, and may be a Liodon.
Dr. Gibbes established the genus Amphorostens for it, but without suf-
ficient evidence to support it. The principal point of distinction between
it and the L. dyspelor which I observe is the lack in the former of the
strong emargination of the superior margin of the articular surface for
the floor of the neural canal, which is so marked in the latter. I have
only the figures of Gibbes to rely on for this particular, and it is scarcely
probable that the artist would have overlooked it had it existed. Should
the bounding prominences have been worn off, then the restored centrum
would have had a notably greater vertical diameter than in the L. dyspelor
in the same portions of the vertebral column. As a second character, I
note that, relying as before on Gibbes’ figures, the external angles of the
depressed bail are not so extended laterally in AZ. brumby?.
In size the vertebre of the present animal exceed those of the J.
brumbyt. The latter has been hitherto the largest known species of the
order Pythonomorpha, exceeding two-fold in its measurements the J.
giganteus of Belgium. So the present saurian is twice as great in dimen-
sions as the New Jersey species I have called WM. maazimus. If, as appears
certain, the MW. missuriensis discovered by Webb measures seventy-five
feet in length, the MW. maximus measured eighty, and the M. dyspelor
could not have been less than one hundred feet in length. This is much
the largest reptile known, and approaches very nearly the extreme of the
Mammalian growth seen in the whales, though of course without their
bulk. Such monsters may well excite our surprise as well as our curiosity
in the inquiry as to their source of food supply, and what the character
of those cotemporary animals preserved in the same geologic horizon.
The locality whence this reptile was procured is near Fort McRae, in
New Mexico. It was discovered by Dr. W. B. Lyon, surgeon at that
post, and by him sent to the Army Medical Museum at Washington,
whose director placed it in the collection of the Smithsonian Institution.
The attention to the paleontology of his neighborhood by Dr. Lyon will
always be cause of satisfaction to students, and his name will be remem-
bered with that of Turner (discoverer of the Hlasmosaurus platyurus,
Cope), Sternberg, and others.
The stratum is the yellow chalk of the upper cretaceous, which has
yielded the L. ictericus, L. proriger, Polycotylus, ete., in Kansas, and of
ini
Cr
1S70. (Cope.
whose western extension into New Mexico, the present species is evi-
dence.
LIopoN IcTERICUS, Cope.
Char. External angle of the os quadratum close by the meatus, and
continued as a rounded ridge separating the anterior and external faces
of the bone. Median posterior ridge not prominent. Centra of dorsal
vertebre depressed. Humerus broad, short.
Description. This species is represented by portions of cranium, as
postfrontal, suspensorial, pterygoid, articular, and quadrate bones ; by
parts or wholes of several vertebra, which are all dorsals, and by scapula
and coracoid with many elements of the fore limb. The latter include
humerus, radius, a carpal and numerous metacarpals and phalanges.
The species is first well characterized by the form of the quadrate bone.
This element lacks a portion of the ala, and the postero-superior decurved
process, but is otherwise perfect. Its form is intermediate between that
in L. validus, Cope, and Mosasaurus depressus, Cope. Its external angle
of the proximal extremity is posterior to its usual position, as in the |
former species, but is less prominent than in it. It extends to near the
distal end, disappearing between the extremities of the median posterior,
and the distal longitudinal angles. The former of these is short, and it
disappears by a gradual descent distally, in a very rugose margin. The
distal longitudinal is short and acute, not prominent at the distal
extremity. From the posterior position of the proximal external
angle, the alar articular surface is somewhat elongate. The postero-ex-
ternal face above the meatus is proportionately short. The meatal pit is
searcely one fifth the usual size, so far as determinable from the present
surface, but it is possible that the greater part is filled by an impacted
mass of bone derived from the adjacent ridge. The margins of the articular
extremities and of the ala are striate and papillose rugose. No meatal
knob.
The suspensorium is slender. It is peculiar in the great extent of the
exoccipital element, which covers the whole superior surface, and extends
externally over the opisthotic to the squamosal, concealing the former ex-
cept its anterior margin. The proétic sends a small proximal portion
only to the superior face.
The pterygoid has been free from its fellow medially. <A distal and
median portions have been lost; the remaining fragments present bases
and alveole for eleven teeth. The fangs are rugulose and but little
swollen ; probably five to seven stood on the lost portions. The bases of
the crowns are circular. The external process of the bone is slender and
flat.
The portion of the mandible preserved, includes much of the articular,
and adherent parts of the angular. The latter forms a narrow band on
the lower edge of the external face, and one twice as wide on the inner
face. The only characteristic feature is the lowness of the ridge which
descends and extends anteriorly from the anterior margin of the cotylus
for the quadratum.
Cope.] 9718 [Dec. 18,
Of the vertebrae several are so distorted by pressure as to be uncharacter-
istic. ‘Two well preserved anterior dorsals have transversely oval articular
surfaces excavated openly above for the neural canal. One is from a
position anterior to the other, and these surfaces are less oval, though still
transverse. ‘The centra of both are very concave in profile below, and
expand both inferiorily and laterally to the edge of the cup. A deep
groove surrounds the base of the posterior face. In the anterior dorsal
the neural arch is preserved. It exhibits an approach to a zygosphen
articulation more marked than in any other Liodon, and is hence nearer
Clidastes in this respect as well as in the slender pterygoid. A zygosphen
is not separated from the zygapophyses, owing to their connection by a
lamina of bone. The notches at the posterior end of the arch for this
prominence are marked. ‘The neural spine had along anterior ala, the
base of which extends to the summit of the neural arch. It presents a
fine striation vertical to the centrum and oblique to the edge of the bone,
as is seen in C. propython, Cope. The diapophysis on this vertebra looks
obliquely upwards and carries a vertical articular surface which is con-
cave behind. The line of its lower extremity falls the depth of the
neural arch below the latter, and of its upper reaches the apex of the canal
in front. The more posterior vertebra has as usual a broader articular rib
surface, the diapophysis being flattened above and below. The marginal
and angular surfaces are striate-rugose on these and the other vertebra.
One of the free hypapophyses of a cervical is preserved. It has a sub-
trigonal section and is longer than wide, and obtuse. Its posterior faces
are exceedingly rugose.
A cervical rib is compressed and short. Head narrow, large simple,
the adjacent sides striate-rugose. Sides with a shallow groove.
The scapular arch is represented by an entire right scapula and proximal
part of right coracoid. The former is broader than in any of the species
in which I have seen it (four only), and is flat, and thin above. Its
anterior extension is greatest below ; its posterior above, at the superior
angle. The lower posterior margin is strongly concave and thickened.
The antero-superior margin is a regularly convex arc of more than 180°.
The lower portion in front is on a different plane, and is the rudimental
acromion. The articular surface is rugose, and the glenoid cavity not
less so.
The proximal portion of the coracoid is flat. It presents the usual
foramen near the anterior margin, and the shorter concavity of the
anterior margin leads to the belief that the anterior extremity of the bone
is the more prolonged as in Clidastes propython.
The glenoid cavity is not concave, but merely two adjacent flattened
rugose surfaces.
Consequently the humerus has no head, but merely an elongate articular
surface, which exhibits a median keel and a short angular expansion near
the middle. This bone is of remarkable form, more resembling that I have
described in Olidastes propython* than any other, and very different from
that described by Leidy in Platecarpus tympaniticus. Itis a broad flat
* See Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1869, 219. Tab. XII, fig. 17,
1870.) 5719 [Cope.
bone expanded at the extremities in one plane distally, so as to be as wide
as long. In the present individual it is crushed by pressure, so that its
thickness is not readily determinable. Its external surface rises into a
crest medially at the narrowest portion, which continues to the lateral
angle of the proximal end, following paraliel to one of the borders.
A moderate thickening exists on the opposite side a little beyond the ex-
tremity of the crest. Strongly rugose striz extend to the edges of the
articular faces. An oval rugose muscular insertion exists on the least:
prominent of the distal angles, and not on a process as in C. propython.
A bone which from its analogy to the radius of the last named species
I suppose to be that bone, accompanies the others. It is flat, truncate
proximally and with nearly parallel borders on the proximal half. Distally
it is obliquely expanded, the outline forming a segment of an ellipse whose
axis is oblique to that of the bone. Its extremities are rugose-striate.
One carpal remains : it is a quinquelateral bone, one side being marginal
and coneave. Perhaps it is the intermedial. There are several elements
which are probably metacarpals. The general structure of the whole limb
may be determined from these and from the numerous phalunges.
The former are flattened and with oblique extremities ; the latter more
cylindric, with a transverse truncation. Both havea median contraction,
which becomes less marked in the distal ones ; these are also more cylin-
dric, entirely so at the distal extremities, which are concave. All of
these element are rod-like, much more slender than any of those figured
by Cuvier or Leidy. Those immediately following the metacarpals are
flattened, but thickened distally.
The number of digits cannot be readily determined, but four may be
certainly distinguished. The general similarity in construction of the
manus to that of a Cetacean mammal is noteworthy.
Measuremenis. M.
Length suspensorium (anteriorly)...................... 0.111
Width rs Me CIA yyy echo evar a eeio 031
Ouadratepereatestilenethemeeer ia ahi pee rae eae 099
es WAC Mele Gao sssocwe oH oad duce auouinaacoe 066
Be thicknessibelaimad ryan anion omer eel. eens 038
of Henothydistalextremiby scene n acer eect cel. 043
IRtenyeoids lene thisixaalyeolinery rice serie acetic cee 055
AMberiondorsal lene thecenbrumiys a sane eae eee sees .059
re She sWACLEN GUI Ne cat ere sie cuore. eeaitler Nek a a lao sleet ats 0515
ss CY i (OVS) OF Dy Cal oy ene eRe ICre ee aie aR ae oa .038
re ‘« expanse poster. zvgapophyses............ 0395
ee ee fe diapophyseseecen eee saornleors 091
ne joe wadthimearalcanale ee teers. sce aor .0135
sf “= depth Feely (Mic tek cle vai Meme GRE ste O11
Posterior ‘‘ cer EA sear tevstaie yah ateeceuerctewe aunt coat evap chee .049
oe HAMEL WLC GENS Ue Mtaperchcresnis etsy eee Ney obss ns i, eles tae 0425
fe Sembee EN OGMVCEMUERUTIM amicus Toe ers cranes sree che .0555
ns ‘¢ expanse diapophyses...........:........ .088
A. P. S.—VOL. XI—45E
Cope.] 580
[Dee. 18,
Scaylavlem othictersiterreees lore tortie Srae eee are te ee oer eae 145
‘ Width qproxdm alisha ele iele sities eer ee ee 07
es Ses erie CHIARA Se Vandy ea cache tow eben ATRIOS 112
Coracoidi widths sproxamdtl yi s os meets oieleccletsl soiree eteeticrs .066
binimerus lengths ees cae TUS i Seyi, 5) ie cues aneyetstaienia Ontnee 154
“6 Width! proscimmalic tei ee Iie secneratsaet ater smiees 119
ef OG SieneONENe sa6 46 BAI ray LS See SE OO 075
ay ‘¢ distal (restored from C. propython)...... .158
RENNES IgV ie CSc dun ogseoddodapooogHouuKoondodaoS sole 115
GG) NAG [ORIEN Sus cn coopgpodaodadgnoosooaaDoONr .061
ae for saistali(@blique) piers sy: elie tee ae eto 105
Carpal lemo thier) ciie)tckpeuey neler sia nese ferrets arora 04
. UE TTN WAKO tT Ciena a RARE Are ES eo UG! PnP AN ENR A nid ie Eco laid io'c .037
Metacampalslengt lis. 2)2'5i!s crs vette cit: cterac) step taro .095
a Wwidtheproximallivepeyemieis. yori soriecrercre cee 045
ag SC ome ial yA aeeptes cs «ok Mons ie peyote dr diye .018
¢é 66 SAGAS tay eeietonsi. » 2's shedcordseetatry oleae 034
Bhalange (niedial) lem othe ceye cys cektaers vee eile. eros 085
a Wid thiproxiailliy. sem ser clearence 027
“i (distal) glemo tiny y nets rhein ene teareiereinens 059
OY Coo wid hudistallliys striae cei oie 0082
Ramus mandibuli, depth in front of cotylus.. .......... 056
Cree mica ilo WeverNoasscodesoovonsodadcasudoodsoeNsOO INN 074
The total length of the anterior limb could not have been less than
0.90 M., which allows of five phalanges in the longest digit. There may
have been more. That the digits were of unequal length is indicated by
portions of two in matrix accompanying the specimens, where the articu-
lation of two phalanges falls opposite the shaft of one of the adjoining
digit. The phalanges were separated by a short interval of cartilage.
The size of this reptile was near that of L. validus, perhaps thirty-five
to forty feet in length.
The affinities of this species as incidentally pointed out, are to those
Liodons which approach Clidastes. Thisis indicated by the many pterygoid
teeth, the rudimental zygosphen articulation, the regular striz of the
bones, and the forms of the limb bones. In Mosasaurus the humerus is
shorter and the phalanges are longer.
The specimens on which this species rests were discovered by Prof. Bb.
F. Mudge, formerly State Geologist of Kansas, now Professor of Geology
in the State Agricultural College of Kansas, on the north bank of the
Smoky Hill River, thirty miles east of Fort Wallace, Kansas.
Numerous fragments of another larger individual were found by Prof.
Mudge near the same locality, which belong probably to the same species.
Among them is a portion of the maxillary bone with bases of two teeth ;
the bases of the crowns where broken off are not compressed, but slightly
oval. <A radius is a flat bone, more dilated at one extremity than that of
Clidastes propython.
1870 ] 581 [Cope.
M
Werth feraaruisiyacvayersiad-ke chile) vole) sievel fala ePateyerate sfetetsh okaye (ors alors 0.108
Width do. narrower extremity...............ce cess eee eee 064
re Somer Se OCI RDe ach aeons Sintec. Sate s\5. agilis)
oF SSA CLITA Gs cae let an ala pieepetattel Ceep ey el MN Mid CaN eae A aren 042
This species cannot be confounded with the Z. proriger, Cope, and L.
congrops, Cope, owing to its depressed vertebral centra ; from ZL. mitchillii,
DeKay, the equal and numerous pterygoid teeth separate it at once.
LIODON MUDGEI, Cope.
Tam not quite sure whether this species belongs to this genus or to
Mosasaurus. The characters of its quadrate bone, size, &c., induce me
to refer it provisionally to the former.
Its determination rests on a series of specimens from the yellow chalk
at a point six miles south of Sheridan, Kansas. They consist of three
vertebrae and fragments of atlas, with numerous portions of cranium and
proximal extremity of scapula.
The parts of craniwm preserved are the frontal bone without the
anterior extremity, and with the adjacent parietal almost complete, parts
of the basisphenoid, the suspensorium, the ossa quadrata, and the greater
part of the articular. The frontal is flat with thin edge, longitudinally
hollowed on each side of the median line, which is marked by a low but
acute keel. There is an abundance of foramina and delicate grooves on
the surface, and posteriorly elevated strive, which converge to the median
keel. The median square projection of the border of the parietal is in
advance of the lateral portion of the same, and not behind it as in Cl
dastes propython. The fontanelle is large. A marked feature is that the
parietal crests unite into a low median ridge a short distance behind the
fontanelle and are not, asin Clidastes propython, separated by a horizontal
plane. The sutures of the bones forming the side of the brain-case are
very obscure. Nevertheless it appears that the descending margin of the
parietal does not descend to the front of the alisphenoid, but is margined
inferiorly by the latter to the postorbital expansion. No part of the in-
ferior margin of the alisphenoid can reach the sphenoid, as it terminates
in a thin edge except for a short distance medially where it is broken off.
The inferior aspect of the parietal and frontal bones presents a furcate
keel corresponding to the divergent parietal crests, and a very large
funnel for the epiphysis of the brain. The olfactory groove is deep and
regular.
The articular bone is characterized by the prominent longitudinal
erest which descends on the inner side, from the front of the glenoid
cavity to below the posterior attachment of the coronoid bone, where it
terminates in a thin edge. Also by the short distance between the
margin of the glenoid cavity (cotylus) to commencement (or end) of coro-
noid suture, indicating a shortening of the posterior part, at least, of the
cranium. The bone is continued forwards only immediately under the
coronoid (cfr L. ictericus).
582 [Dec. 18,
Cope.]
The proximal extremity of the quwadrate is characteristic, and exhibits
features intermediate between those of Liodon ictericus, Cope, and the
typical species of Mosasaurus, as M. fulciatus, M. dekayt, &e. The
proximal articular face is much like that of IM. depressus (Trans. Amer.
Philos. Soc., 1869, p. 181, Fig. 48, No. 3). The external angle is much
smaller than in the Liodons and more anterior, nevertheless it is con-
tinued distally as a ridge-like angle separating the antero-lateral from the
postero-lateral faces as in them, and not presenting the gradual blending
of the two surfaces characteristic of the genus Mosasaurus. The postero-
lateral face is thus flat proximally, and the meatal pit, which is well de-
veloped, cannot be seen from the antero-lateral face. The distal part of
the quadrate is lost, so that I cannot determine the character of the ridges
there.
The basal element of the axis bears a strong hypapophysis without
articular faces, but very rugose surfaces. The same portion of the atlas
is a convex parallelopipedon, with median rugose tuberosity and very
rugose extremities. Its surface is not separated from its body anteriorly
by a deep groove as in L. tctericus.
The articular facets of the scapula are much broader than in the other
species here described, indicating a head or wider articulation of humerus.
No limb bones were preserved.
The vertebrz are too much injured to be characteristic, with one ex-
ception. This oneisa posterior dorsal, and had had compressed centrum,
or at least not depressed. ‘The inferior face is convex transversely, and
there is a slight concavity below each diapophysis.
Measurements. M.
Ranie bal len oubtrotsiacrct reece ie erreriirhe ce reece 0.074
BG width between anterior and crests............... .048
“iG Neat wid bli acne cf terraiauclcntean te .Ust men gaeetels .022
Hrontalemberonrbivalawilcitiie rer sreoeerecmerict err riioe .092
Oomabenie WAC BIOs coccoodss0esccgscddaccsogcronsees 02
se length from pit to proximal end................ . 02
eons, lene n LOWE ClGGsocoscosbbdondodaodesccousr .015
ae depth in front of cotylus............ adsa paste easiees .00
86 GS ENG CNol OMONONl. 644005 coonsnoacss00uc 055
Posterion dorsaldlemothe eerste eee een rote aerte 0495
Scapula proximaltawidithive see reece ORO Oo 0 051
This species differs from all those of Mosasaurus and Liodon, in which
the form of the quadrate is known in the character of that bone. From
L. levis and L. congrops in which that element is unknown, it differs in
the stouter or less slender vertebre ; from L. proriger in its much smaller
size.
Its size is a little less than the Z. ictericus or L. validus. It is dedicated
to Professor Mudge, in recognition of the valuable results of his investiga-
tions as State Geologist of Kansas.
(>)
1870. | 583 [Cope.
CLIDASTES CINERIARUM, Cope.
The largest species of this genus as indicated by the zygosphen articu-
lation of the vertebree.
The locality where it was found is the same as the last, but the
specimeus were taken from the gray bed, perhaps the same that produced
the Hlasmosaurus platywrus, Cope. They consist of vertebre and ptery-
goid teeth. There are two anterior dorsals, three lumbars, and one caudal.
The articular faces of the caudals are broad vertical ovals. They increase
in width on the lumbars till on the last of these they assume the sub-
pentagonal form characteristic of many species, and which is still moie
marked on the caudal. The centrum of the anterior dorsal is much com-
pressed ; inferiorly, slightly concave longitudinally, regularly and promi-
nently convex transversely. Conversely, the rims of the cup and ball are
strongly expanded, the latter with surrounding groove. The diapophyses
of the lumbars are of considerable length, exceeding in this respect those
of Mosasawrus we possess, where these parts are preserved. On the
median of the lumbars the inferior surface of the centrum first becomes
truncate or plane, and separated from that below the diapophyses, which
become slightly concave. The expansion of the ball becomes more ab-
rupt and striking on these vertebre. The caudal is a little more com-
pressed than the lumbars, and presents the character of codssified chevron
bones. These are slender and longitudinally grooved.
A single pterygoid tooth was found in the matrix on one of the dorsals.
The basis is short and much swollen; the crown curved, acute, a little
compressed, and with an obtuse cutting edge posteriorly.
Measurements.
Vertebre, &c , from brown bed.
M.
Anterior dorsal, length centrum..................2..0-:: 0.0608
HG O83. Glooun ayeni@nlkye ANN sees oodde swe aeeuene 6 038
f “¢ width a vite iiaitrady Seayee purer cheneeel cst eue Nae .088
‘¢ diameter behind diapophyses..... Ret AK, 029
a en Gepihpariculartace Ton abeaeaee ee cee 022
umibarveslene Lhecentrunl eee eee eer mer arin ie .06
AS CRSA TOE es pigoina sod ues roel oc come ete 037
ac APUG LIEN Bich Fay 2s ene icy Bie tT rane is kai7) > SARS eee MRI 089
ee length remnant of diapophysis................. 046
a IN@, By Weiaedd ny COMBATING 6g a usoo cea dudumououo ues 055
i AW ACLLNEZ COSC ycnvyey eee iL eek -us tanto) ee .0182
Caudalglengthyee nt nmin. toc tareysleri epee oretes a clove oes 041
o¢ CS] DOV GDN ora Gaus otras Bae eee N Or blo oc Seis erates 04
s WANA G Salo do UDO ME OC ee COE oe he OO OO ee ener D een 04
a HbaAsiscdiapopliysisee. i wares acer cl ack iia can 0245
fs Samet Ween. Chev GONEEAN IE eel mirls jer yn eese .0115
Prenycorditoothpheight crowilses. -piyis- eve aces teens ae 0125
as “a diameterspedestalous ease cee eens: 013
Goodwin.] 584 [Dec. 46,
This species was found by Prof. Mudge near the locality of the Liodon
mudget, six miles south of Sheridan, Kansas.
It is only necessary to compare this species with CO. intermedius, Leidy,*
as the C. iguanavus and C. propython have depressed vertebral centrz.
Those of the first are rounded, of the present compressed. The C.
intermedius also agrees with the two others in the obliquity of the
articular faces to the vertical transverse plane of the centrum; in the
present species these planes are parallel. This species is also larger than
the C. iguanavus, Cope; the C. intermedius is smaller.
There is another species from New Jersey to which it is more nearly
allied, a vertebra of which I have described under the head of ZLiodon
levis (Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1869, 205), and figured 1. c. Tab. V.
fig. 5, under the erroneous name Macrosaurus validus. This probably
does not belong to the Liodon levis, which does not possess the zygosphen
articulation but is most likely allied to the present species, and a true
Clidastes. When compared with a vertebra from the same position in
the column as determined by the position of the diapophyses, the articu-
lar faces are still more compressed, and the inferior surface of the centrum
instead of being regularly convex, forms a plane separated from lateral
coneayities by an obtuse angle. There is less expansion of the margins
of the cup and ball. The size is also greater. I propose to distinguish
this species as Clidastes antivalidus, Cope. It is from the darker stratum
of the green sand near Medford, New Jersey.
Obituary Notice of SAMUEL VAUGHAN MeERRIck, Esq., by DanieL R.
Goopwin, D. D.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 16, 1870.)
Mr. Samuel Vaughan Merrick, who died on the 18th of August last, was,
at the time of his decease, among the oldest members of this Society.
Elected in 1833, his membership covered more than the average period of
a generation. His wasa noiseless and unobtrusive, but an eminently active
and beneficent life, moving on like the current of a deep and quiet river,
silently depositing the accumulations of rich alluvium along its banks, and
bearing the freighted wealth of thousands upon its bosom. He was not
what iscommonly recognized as a great or a distinguished man. His life
does not stand out before us in bold relief, in marked individuality, leay-
ing upon the mere casual observer the impression of its definite outline ;
but was buried and mingled in the moving and surging mass of the world
around him. It might be thought fitting, therefore, to dismiss our notice
of him in a few passing words ; but to me there seem to be special rea-
sons, in this very peculiarity of the case, for pursuing an opposite course;
and I shall, therefore, ask the indulgence of the Society in giving a some-
what greater extension to this paper than is usual; though less, after all,
than the subject, in my judgment, demands. Great usefulness was Mr.
* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1870, p. 4,
1870.] D085 (Goodwin.
Merrick’s distinction. Solidity, energy, practical sagacity, were his char-
acteristics. In the wildly moving and fermenting mass with which his
life was mixed up, it was ever a guiding and propelling element of pro-
gress, and a leavening element of good, but an element requiring some
attention and study for its distinct apprehension and full appreciation.
If we have more men of this kind of greatness than of the other, we have
reason to rejoice in the fact. A community in which such men abound
need never be ashamed, unless social improvement and happiness are occa-
sions for humiliation.
This is a Philosophical Society; but we are not, and we need not all be
philosophers in the narrower technical sense. He who leaves the world in
a high degree better, wiser and happier, for his having lived init, is either,
in the large and more generous sense, a philosopher, or something more
and better than a philosopher.
It is true, that classifications of men are always deficient in logical pre-
cision. They express only leading tendencies or marked degrees. But
one of the most general, and, at the same time, most simple and fruitful
in its applications, is the two-fold division into men of thought and men of
action. But these two classes are not to be kept aloof from each other,
still less to be arrayed in mutual conflict. They are reciprocally comple-
mentary and helpful. One aim of this Society is, to aid in bringing them
into their appropriate relation to each other. And few among us have
labored more successfully for the accomplishment of this end, or have pre-
sented in themselves a better illustration of the happy union of these two
characters, than Mr. Merrick. To suppose that this Society was designed
to embrace only men of mere thought, that it confines its mission to mere
speculation or pure science, is a great mistake. Its aim is eminently
practical. It seeks thought, scientific observation, certainly; but it seeks
_ thought only as related to its applications. It would utilize thought, and
it would rationalize action. It would reduce action under the stimulus
and guidance of thought; and it would provoke thought to its intensest
and, at the same time, its most healthful exertion on the field of action.
This Society is not the arena of combat, but the armory and foyer of the
combatants; it is not the theatre of action, but the post-scenitum of the
actors. It seeks to bring thought into its widest play as well as its fullest
development. It aims to make thought permeate and leaven the mass.
Not only do we, therefore, welcome men of action rising into the sphere
of thought, but we admire and cheer on men of thought descending into
the dust and struggle of action. The dignity of labor is the true dignity
of man. To enforce this truth is one of the highest aims of this Society.
The elevation of man is the noblest end of philosophy.
It is in this view that Mr. Merrick’s career presents itself in its true
significance, and in its proper relations to this Sogiety.
This will best appear from a rapid sketch of his life and character.
Mr. Merrick was born at Hallowell, Maine, on the 4th of May, 1801. His
father, John Merrick, was a man of marked character, and extraordinary
mental vigo:. In 1798 he came to this country from England, where he
(S
Goodwin. ] 086 [Dee. 16,
had been educated for the Unitarian pulpit. Not finding in this his voca-
tion, he lived in Hallowell as a gentleman of retired leisure, or rather, of
great and varied and beneficent activity. The mcther was a daughter
of Samuel Vaughan, Esq., a merchant of London. His brother, John
Vaughan, uncle of our Samuel Vaughan Merrick, was, for a long series of
years, identified with this Society, as its Librarian and Secretary. He is
remembered with affectionate respect for his genial social qualities, and
for his rare benevolence and kindness of heart. He cared for the stranger.
Every foreigner, of whatever nationality, who chanced to be in Philadel-
phia, found in him more than the official consul of his country,—a sym-
pathizing friend.
In his uncle’s business house, our 8. V. Merrick was placed at the age
of 15, to be trained as a wine merchant. At the age of 19, a proposition
was made to him to leave that business, and enter an opening which pre-
sented itself for the manufacture of machinery. This was to exchange
the profession of the merchant for that of the mechanic,—a step which
it is significant to observe was at that day regarded as involving little less
than social degradation. Young Merrick, in the full determination to
hew his own way in the world, accepted the offer, doffed his coat, and
rolled up his sleeves to the work. The firm of Merrick & Agnew was
established ; and soon gained unusual celebrity as manufacturers of im-
proved Fire-engines. Professors in New England colleges used to ex-
hibit these engines to their classes as illustrations in mechanics and speci-
mens of American ingenuity and workmanship.*
Young Merrick rapidly developed, under his own teaching, a remark-
able engineering and mechanical talent.
After some years he was ready to enlarge his field of operations; the
‘“‘Southwark Foundry’’ was established; the firm of ‘‘ Merrick and
Towne’’ was founded in 1837, and entered into the general and extensive
manufacture of various kinds of machinery and apparatus, particularly of
steam engines and boilers. Asan illustration of the energy and enterprise
of the firm may be mentioned the fact, that, at so early a period and in
the infancy of mechanical engineering in this country, they contracted
for and constructed the engines of the U.S. Steam frigate Mississippi,
which proved to be one of the speediest, safest, most trustworthy and
serviceable ships in the navy. It was chiefly due to the faithfulness,
skill, and perfect finish with which her machinery was constructed, that
abroad, as wellas at home, she became an object of national pride. In her
Commodore Perry made his visit to Japan and rode out the cyclones of
the China sea; and she continued high in the list for effective service,
until, on the night of the 14th of March, 1863, she ran aground and was
blown up under the guns of Port Hudson.
In 1849 Mr. Towne retired from the firm, which was continued under the
*Later in life, Mr. Merrick retained his early interest in the improvement of Fire Engines, al-
though they were no longer manufactured at his works; and for many years he took personally
an active and leading part in the Fire Department, until he secured the introduction of the Steam
Fire Engines throughout the city.
1870.] O87 [Goodwin.
well-known style of ‘‘ Merrick and Son,’’ and * Merrick and Sons,”’ al-
though Mr. Merrick’s active connection with it ceased from the year 1860.
The development of this great business establishment was the main work
of his life, and he persevered in it for a period of near a quarter of a
century. He retired from it with large wealth honorably acquired in a
business whose great private gains were conditioned upon conferring im-
mensely greater public benefits; in works and enterprises which sensibly
contributed to the growth and prosperity of the city and to the welfare
of the state. He retired when the establishment which he had reared
was still in the flood tide of success, for it was never more active or useful
than during the years of the late rebellion.
At an early period in his career, Mr. Merrick became deeply impressed
with the importance to mechanics, for their success and elevation, of more
thought and intelligence, of more acquaintance with the progress of
mechanical arts and inventions, and of more of mutual intercourse and
social stimulus. With this view he projected and urged forward the
establishment of the Franklin Institute ; and it may be said, I think,
without disparagement to the claims of any other of its original members,
that no man has a better title to be considered its fownder than Mr.
Merrick. For a long series of years he continued one of its most active
and honored members ; until, from its small and unpretenticus beginnings,
as little more than an association of mechanics for mutual improvement,
it was developed into the chief centre of practical science in the city, be-
came an honor to Philadelphia, and enjoyed a familiar national and
European reputation.
_ Tn one point of view the Franklin Institute has taken as its specialty
and almost absorbed into itself one portion of the work which pertains to
the general scope of this Society. Among our own founders was Ben-
jamin Franklin himself, a most thorough utilitarian, who always regarded
science with an eye to its practical applications, and considered them
among the principal motives for all scientific effort and enquiry. And, in
general, so far as the founders of this Society were philosophers, they were
eminently Socratic philosophers ; and such is the philosophy which they
designed the Society they established always to represent. The Franklin
Institute may, therefore, be considered as an offshoot, or a department,
or a section—not in form but in fact—of the American Philosophical
Society. And this may explain why, in later years, Mr. Merrick may
seem to have relinquished his active participation in our work—it was
because his interest and energies were absorbed in the Franklin Institute.
The Managers of the Institute have expressed their own sense of
the merits and character of Mr. Merrick, in the resolutions which are
here subjoined :
“ Resolved, That the Managers of the Franklin Institute have received with the
deepest sorrow the announcement of the death of Sainuel V. Merrick, the founder of
the Institute, for many years its president, and always its earnest, liberal and devoted
friend. Associated with it as he was in its early efforts for the public confidence and
support; participating as he did in all the great labors and enterprises by which it
A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—46E
Goodwin.] 288 Dec. 16,
won its way to the honorable reputation it now enjoys; his name and character are
so mingled with its history that, while the Institute endures, his will be an enduring
memory.
‘* Resoived, That the Managers of the Institute, many of whom have been for years
associated with the deceased in the care of its affairs, and in the other walks of life, in
which he was so distinguished for broad and wise intelligence, for untiring zeal, and
for great public spirit, will ever cherish with feelings of proud and affectionate remem-
brance, the kindly and honorable associations which have always distinguished his re-
lations with them.
** Resolved, That, in token of our sense of the loss we have sustained, the Hall of the
Institute be closed on Monday next; that the Managers attend his funeral in a body»
and that the members of the Institute be invited to join with them in paying the last
earthly trihute of respect to their honored associate and friend.”
To Mr. Merrick before all others, the City owes the introduction of gas
as a means of illumination, instead of the oil formerly relied upon for
the purpose—a reliance so precarious, inefficieut, clumsy, filthy and ex-
pensive, that we all, as we look back, should now feel its restoration em-
phatically a return to the Dark Ages. Not so did the case look from the
other end of the glass. Mr. Merrick, with his characteristic, practical
sagacity, early saw the advantages of substituting gas for the material
formerly employed ; and he perseveringly urged its substitution, amidst
an extraordinary excitement of public feeling, and a most earnest and
confident opposition on the part of some of the most respectable and
intelligent of his fellow citizens—an opposition which we now regard with
wonder, and which those who participated in it remember as a strange
dream. We see things now in a different light ; and it is difficult for us
to place ourselves at the point of view from which the subject was then
contemplated ; yet it is only by so doing that we can duly appreciate the
prophetic vision and indomitable energy of those who persevered for
years in urging on, step by step, the proposed improvement.
Mr. Merrick songht and obtained a seat in the City Councils, that there
he might labor directly to secure the change. He was appointed Chair-
man of a Committee of the Common Council, which, after corresponding
with the authorities of the few other cities in this country where gas had
been partially introduced, reported with a full and triumphant answer to
all the objections which had been urged against it. To his great satis-
faction, he subsequently received an appointment from the Councils
to visit England and parts of Europe, for the purpose of inquiring into
the facts connected with the use of illuminating gas in those countries.
On his return, in 1834, he made a fuil report, which was marked by
great wisdom and ability. Whereupon it was resolved that the experi-
ment should be tried in Philadelphia. Mr. Merrick was appointed, as
chief engineer, to take charge of the erection of the works, of the manu-
facture of the gas, and of the whole business of introducing and dis-
tributing it in the city. This task he performed without the least waste,
failure, mistake, or delay, but with singular economy, skill, and prompti-
tude, to entire and universal public satisfaction. On the 8th of February,
1836, the lamps were lighted ; and in their next annual report the Trustees
of the Gas Works render the following emphatic testimony :
1370.] 589 [Goodwin.
‘“«The works are built in the most substantial manner, and, for the
perfection and economy of their operation, are certainly unrivalled in this
country ; the rapidity with which they were constructed and the complete
adaptation of every part of the apparatus to its intended purpose, reflect
the highest credit on the engineer, Samuel V. Merrick, Esq., whose
faithfulness and ability in discharging the arduous and novel duties of
this undertaking, it gives us much pleasure thus publicly to notice.’
In their report of the year following they say :
‘‘In conclusion the Trustees have to state that Samuel V. Merrick,
Ksq., the able engineer who constructed the first section of the works,
having found that his continued attention to them interfered too much
with his private engagements, tendered his resignation, which the Board
reluctantly accepted on the 8th of February, 1837. As the extensions
were about to be made, the trustees requested Mr. Merrick to devote
oceasionally, to a general superintendence of the new works, so much of
his time as he should be able to spare, or as might be deemed necessary,
in consultation with the superintendent. This duty has been performed
to their utmost satisfaction, and the trustees can only repeat here their
unqualified approbation of the conduct of that gentleman, and their ad-
miration for the signal success which has attended the works put up by
lanes
At a meeting of the Stockholders held in the ensuing week, it was
resolved :
“That the trustees be hereby authorized to appropriate the sum of $600
to be expended in the purchase of one or more pieces of plate ; to bear such
inscription expressive of the approbation of the Stockholders as they may
think proper ; to be presented to Samuel V. Merrick, Esq.’’
Nothing is more striking in all Mr. Merrick’s connection with this
business than the largeness of his views for the general good, and the un-
selfish public spirit which marked all his labors. He sought to promote
the comfort and convenience of his fellow citizens, and permanently to
diminish the burden of taxation. He sought also to develop the resources
and industrial wealth of the State. In his report on his return from
Europe are these noteworthy words: ‘‘I deem it an argument of no
small moment in favor of this mode of lighting, that every material used
in the fabrication of this gas will be the product of Pennsylvania labor.
The bituminous coal from which it is to be made, may be drawn irom the
rich mines now open in the interior of the State ; the fuel, from the ex-
haustless body of anthracite ; and the lime for purification, from our own
vicinity ; and not a lamp will shed its rays over our streets which has not
paid a tribute to the internal improvements of the State.”’
In like manner, it was distinctly as a public benefactor, it was from a
sensitive regard for the welfare and prosperity of the city and State of his
adoption, that, some ten years later, Mr. Merrick led off in another great
enterprise. He was one of the prime movers in the establishment of the
Pennsylvania Central Railroad Company, and was its first President.
The books were opened for subscription to its stock in 1846, and its
Goodwin.] 090 [Dec. 16.
President made his first report in 1847. This document contains a clear
and business like statement of the means of the Company, and of the
plans for their immediate use. And not only so, it wisely suggests and
urges their increase, also without incurring any debt,—the avoidance of
which was a fixed principle in all his administrative arrangements ; and
it sets forth such far reaching views of future growth and enlarge-
ment that it looks almost like history written before the time.
His motives for throwing himself into this enterprise, and the motives
upon which he invited others to participate in it, appear in his report
addressed to the stockholders in September of the next year (1848), in
which he earnestly urges them to increase their subscriptions. ‘* The
absolute necessity,’’ says he, ‘‘of this road to the trade of Philadelphia
is universally acknowledged. The completion of the Cincinnati and
Sandusky road brings that city within three days ride of New York for
eight months in the year.
‘‘The trade of the Ohio river, which once belonged to Philadelphia, is
now diverted to New York by this new channel of the lakes.
‘‘Hundreds of passengers daily pass over that road to New York.
Where the travel goes, there goes the trade. ey 7 o %
‘¢ You are engaged in a great struggle for the trade of the West. To
obtain it a portion of your earnings must be devoted to open the highway.
Once open, it will maintain and enlarge itself. Railroads and Canals
have built up New York ; and so well convinced are the citizens of their
value, that they are now making a third avenue to the lakes, both the
others being crowded with trade.
‘Boston has been built up by the same means, and if we expect to
maintain our position, we must follow their example.”’
In fact even Baltimore had got the start of Philadelphia; and if the
Pennsylvania Central had not been opened just when it was, not only the
trade of Ohio and the far West, but even that of the western part of our
own State would have been irretrievably diverted to Baltimore, on the
one side, and New York on the other.
Such were the circumstances and motives under which this great work
was undertaken. When Mr. Merrick, again compelled by the pressure
of his own private business, retired from the Presidency, Sept. 1, 1849,
the road was opened for travel from Harrisburg to Lewistown, and nearly
completed to the base of the Alleghanies, the western division was begun,
and a small portion in use, the whole route was surveyed and the cost of
construction estimated, and negotiations had been successfully concluded
for connection with the cities of Ohio and with the avenues of the more
distant West. The Board oz Directors in the following November, thus
refer to Mr. Merrick in closing their report :
‘“‘The distinguished gentleman who had, with signal ability, admin-
istered the affairs of the company from the date of its organizatiou, was
constrained, by reasons altogetber personal and private, to tender his
resignation in August last, and it was reluctantly az:cepted by the Board.
1870. ] O91 [Goodwin.
His continuance as a Director ensure to the Company the benefit of his
enlarged experience, sound judgment, and thorough acquaintance with
the work.*
Thus the foundations of the great edifice were laid, and the plans and ma-
terials provided for the superstructure. The seed was planted, and had ger-
minated ; it had shot up its trunk, and was already beginning to send out
its wide-spreading branches. The Pennsylvania Railroad Company is now
one of the greatest and most powerful corporations in the country, with
a gross annual income exceeding the original estimated cost of the con-
struction of its entire original track from Harrisburg to Pittsburgh. It is
by far the most important.and indispensable business agency of Phila-
delphia and of Pennsylvania. Strike it out of existence, and the city
would be stunned by the blow, and even the State would stagger under it.
It is an immense power for good or for evil. But whatever motives may
actuate its present or future managers, and however its influence may
be abused or its energies perverted, we have this security that it cannot
be made profitable to its owners without continually benefiting the com-
munity. And by whatever motives or principles its action may hereafter
be controlled, ‘‘the past, at least, is secure ;’’ its projectors and origin-
ators were actuated by a generous devotion to the public good, they
sought to promote the prosperity of the city and the growth and develop-
ment of this great commonwealth. As one of its founders, and as its
first President, Mr. Merrick’s name is identified with its whole history.
He shares the glory of its subsequent greatness, while it inherits the
prestige of his noble purpose and character.
When, after nearly another decade, an effort was made to construct a
Railroad from Sunbury to Erie, thus completing the connection between
Philadelphia and the lakes, through the great western coal fields of Penn-
sylvania ; and when, after many ineffectual struggles, the enterprise
threatened to prove a disastrous failure, all eyes were turned to Mr.
Merrick. He was recognized as the only man in the community who
* The following is Mr. Merrick’s letter of resignation:
“ OFFICE PENNA. R. R. Co., PHITADA, Aug. 22, 1849.
“To the Directors of the Penna. R. R. Co. ¢
** GENTLEMEN :—Circumstances connected with my private affairs compel me to announce to
you my intention of resigning the office with which you have entrusted me.
**T need scarcely say that I take this step with great reluctance.
“Identified as I am in feeling and interest with the great work which, above all others, is des-
tined to add to the prosperity of Philadelphia, I had hoped to have been prominently instrumental
in urging it to final completion; and although I relinquish the position I have occupied as the
President of the Company, my exertions will not be wanting in forwarding its interests.
“It is no small cause of regret that my official connection is severed with gentlemen, both of the
Board and in the office, with whom J have acted in the most uninterrupted harmony and good
feeling, a continuation of which it will always be my pleasure to cultivate.
“Desirous of resuming my private business at as early a date as possible, and at the same time
give an opportunity to select a successor, I leave to the Board to fix the date at which my resigna-
tion shall take effect.
“ Very respectfully,
“*S. V. Mrerricz,
“President Penna. R. R. Co.”
Goodwin.] 092 [ Dee. 15,
could retrieve its affairs, and push it on to speedy success. Early in 1865
the Presidency of this road was offered him, and urged upon his accept-
ance. He was upon the point of declining it when the following letter
was addressed to him, which, with its signatures, speaks for itself, and for
him also.
“ PHILADELPHIA, Feb. 21st, 1856.
“To SamuEL V. Mernick, Esq.:
“ Dear Sir: We have learned that the Presidency of the Sunbury and
Erie Railroad Company has been tendered to you, under such circum-
stances as render it reasonably certain that your character and ability
may conduct that enterprise to a successful completion.
‘We are sensibie that such a position cannot present any peculiar at-
tractions, but that any favorable consideration you may give to the
application would have its origin in a high sense of public duty.
‘¢There are occasions when purely personal motives ought properly to
yield to public claims, and in the exigency which calls for an efficient and
tried man to administer the affairs of the important work above named,
we may well address ourselves to you to assume the Presidency. Your
perfect organization and successful administration of the affairs of the
Pennsylvania Railroad Company are so well remembered by our fellow
citizens, that we are sure the whole community would hail with pleasure
your acceptance of the proffered trust.
‘‘ We feel confident that you can organize an administration and adopt
financial and other plans, which will at once place the Sunbury and Hrie
Railroad in its proper attitude before the people, and insure such aid from
public and private sources as will realize an early completion of a work
that must open for the trade of our city one of the richest agricultural and
mineral districts of the State.
“‘On behalf of the great interests involved, we call on you to accept
the office.
We are very truly and respectfully yours,
JOHN GRIGG, C,. H. FisHEr,
THoMaAs ROBINS, Tuos. T. Lea,
Wm. H. Bowen, S. A. MERCER,
Isaac R. DAvis, F. FRALEY,
Aua@’N 8. ROBERTS, C. 8. Boxer,
A. E. Borin, S. F. Smirn,
Frep’k LENNIG, C. H. Roemrs,
JAMES C. HAND, Jos. PATTERSON,
A. J. Lewis, JOHN Farnum,
Morris L. HALLOWELL, J. RICHARDSON,
THOMAS ALLIBONE.”’
To such an appeal to his sense cf public duty Mr. Merrick could not
turn a deaf ear.
1870.] 093
[Goodwin.
The following was his reply :
““ PHILADELPHIA, Feb. 238d, 1856.
‘“©GENTLEMEN: I was duly honored with your letter of the 21st inst.,
urging my acceptance of the Presidency of the Sunbury and Erie Railroad
Company. The peculiar circumstances in which that work had recently
been placed, gave a weight to the application made to me, which was well
calculated to overcome all considerations but those of public duty, With-
out, however, the expression of such a wish on the part of my fellow
citizens, as indicated in your letter, I should have felt constrained to de-
cline the offer; but the reasons urged by you, in addition to those
presented by the gentlemen who tendered the appointment, caused me to
yield a reluctant assent.
“‘ Accepting this trust at your solicitation, as representatives of the
public feeling and interests of the city, and relying upon your co-opera-
tion, I remain,
Very truly and respectfully,
S. V. MERRICK.”
Mr. Merrick began at once with an energetic reformation and remodel-
ing of the whole organization and administration of the road. But
searcely had he addressed himself to the Herculean task, when the terrible
commercial crisis of 1857 swept over the country, prostrating even many
old establishments, and utterly paralyzing new enterprises, completely
thwarting all plans for securing aid, public or private, arresting the pro-
gress of the road, and bringing the Company to the verge of bankruptcy.
In fact, it was saved only by large advances from Mr. Merrick’s own
private resources—advances equally difficult aud dangerous for a business
man at that time to make. At the risk of ruining himself, and by almost
superhuman efforts, he carried the Company through the storm. His own
health was prostrated ; and, after remaining in the Presidency nearly two
years—as long, in fact, as he had ever anticipated being able to continue
in it—he sent in the following letter of resignation :
“To the Board of Managers of the Sunbury and Erie Railroad Company:
Gentlemen: I have long contemplated declining a reélection to the
post of President of this Company in February next, as it interferes too
much with my own affairs to warrant further continuance. Believing
that the interests of the Company will be promoted by the immediate
election of some other gentleman who will devote himself to the impor-
tant interests at stake, I beg leave to tender my resignation.
* : * * * % * %*% * *
The field is now open for an energetic prosecution of the work as soon
as the returning tide of prosperity shall have fairly set in upon the com-
merce of the country, and I may indulge the hope that a brighter day
may soon dawn on the Sunbury and Erie Railroad.
With every wish for the final success of the enterprise, I remain, very
respectfully,
8S. V. MERRICK, President.’
Goodwin. ] a9 4 [Vee. 16,
The road was soon after completed, and its bonds, that were issued
with Mr. Merrick’s name, have long been at par.
Nor did his labors in the cause of the public improvements of the State,
and for the enlargement of the business and prosperity of Philadelphia
end here. To his vigorous and wise counsels it has been, in a large de-
gree, due, that the affairs of the Catawissa Railroad have been retrieved
from a condition of imminent ruin. The road owes it to him that it now
rests upon a solid basis, and has a promise of permanent prosperity and
usefulness. The regard in which he was held by the Managers of that
road will appear from the resolution adopted by them on the occasion of
his decease.
‘‘The death of our late associate, Samuel V. Merrick, Esq., who for fourteen years
has been a Director of this Company, the value of whose counsel all appreciated, has
gen announced to us so unexpectedly, in the midst of current business, in which his
energies were actively engaged, that we fail to realize the extent of our loss.
‘ The character of Mr. Merrick needs no eulogy at our hands; his long and useful
life has been spent in ‘ good works.’ The mention of his name in connection with any
enterprise has always iuspired confidence and respect. In relation to this Company,
the interest of which appeared to be his special pride—through the period of its darkest
history, he always manifested a cheerful confidence that time and energy would re-
lieve it of all difficulties; and we rejoice that he lived to see his prediction verified.”
In the eleemosynary institutions of the City, Mr. Merrick took a deep
and active interest, and particularly in anything that promised to help
the poor and weak to help themselves. He was among the founders, and
most efficient managers of the Western Savings Fund; and to him is
largely due the safe and solid character of this beneficial institution. Its
Managers have given expression to their deep sense of his wisdom and
worth in the following testimonial :
** Resolved, That it is with profound sorrow the Managers of the Western Savings
Fund Society record the unexpected demise of SAMUEL V. MERRICK.
““By this sad memorial they will perpetuate the recollection of a man associated
with the Institution from its foundation, who was distinguished by remarkable traits
of character, that rendered him eminently useful to the world, and made him univer-
sally honored in every position he was called to fill. Wise in council, broad and com-
prehensive in his views, liberal and good in his deeds, and, above all, crowned with
the possession of a truly Christian and Catholic spirit, his loss to society, and especially
to his friends, will be long and keenly felt.”
At the time of his decease, Mr. Merrick, besides an active connection
with many other of the public corporations, and most of the leading
charities of the city, was a prominent member of the Board of Trade,
one of the Port Wardens of Philadelphia, and a member of the Board of
Commissioners for the erection of the South Street Bridge.
Immediately upon his demise, the following expression was adopted by
the last mentioned body :
‘““WHEREAS, This Board, and the City of Philadelphia, have suffered a great loss by
the death of our colleague,
Mr. SAMUEL V. MERRICK,
who for many years devoted his abilities, services and time, in promoting the interests
of the municipal, charitable and scientific institutions of Philadelphia.
Resolved, That the President be requested to communicate to Mr. Merrick’s family
our sympathy and condolence in their affliction.”
1870. ] 999
[Goodwin.
But neither Philadelphia nor Pennsylvania bounded his sympathy and
public spirit, or his ideas of loyalty and patriotism. His heart embraced
the whole country. He loved her flag. He was cevotedly attached to
her Union. When that flag was assailed, and that Union imperilled, his
soul was stirred to its lowest depths. All conservative as he was in prin-
ciple and feeling, he gave his full support to the Government through all
the changing fortunes of the dark struggle, until the rebellion was sup-
pressed. In the work of the Sanitary Commission he took a special in-
terest, not only contributing freely to its funds, but rendering his personal
services, at the time of the Great Central Fair, until his health was se-
riously endangered.
After the war, his attention was particularly drawn to the cause of
general education at the South ; and he gave large sums for the support
of schools in that part of the country, both for blacks and whites. At
the suggestion of a younger sister, he joined forces with her and his
brother, and they, with their own independent funds, have built a com-
modious school house of brick, and established a school for the instruc-
tion of the negroes, in one of the counties in Virginia.
In fact, his benefactions have been more and larger than will ever be
generally known ; and always bestowed in a spirit of glad liberality, and
with a modest unconsciousness of doing anything more than a matter of
course. In this feeling he resorted to no artificial contrivances to hide
his gifts ; still less did he ever seek to have them bruited abroad. Cases
have come to light in which an applicant, in behalf of some scheme of be-
nevolence, after having explained the object, has hoped for a hundred or two
dollars at the most, and been surprised by receiving from him a check for
ten times that amount. Other cases of his giving by thousands have been
known only in the circle of his own family, and to them only after a time
and, as it were, by accident—in such a way, in short, as to indicate that
these were but specimens of many similar cases of which his intimate
friends knew nothing. It was a saying of Sir Isaac Newton, that ‘those
who give nothing before their death, never in fact give at all.’”’ On
this principle Mr. Merrick acted. He gave while he lived, and left it to his
heirs to follow his example after he was dead. And surely the living
spring, with its perennial flow, is better than the sudden inundation from
any pent-up reservoir.
Mr. Merrick was a consistent Christian. Jn this relation, also, his
active benevolence, so characteristic of him, could not fail to display itself.
At the time of his death he was one of the Wardens of Grace Church,
of which he had been a member nearly thirty years. In the erection and
endowment of the Episcopal Hospital, he manifested a lively and prac-
tical interest ; and to him, more than to any other man, the Diocese of
Pennsylvania is indebted for its Episcopal residence.
Mr. Merrick’s was an eminently successful life. He was always equal
to what he undertook, to every occasion and to every position in which
Providence placed him. He sought to raise others with himself. He
respected labor, and he dignified it. Few men have done more to elevate
A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—47E
Goodwin. ] 096 [Dec. 16,
the mechanic to a higher intelligence and a more respectable social posi-
tion. There have been men who have amassed millions, and who have
not failed to give generously of their abundance when it could be done
with great éclat; but who had, nevertheless, either grown rich at the
expense of their neighbors, as mere gambling’ speculators, or been loose
in their principles of integrity, or excessively parsimonious in their per-
sonal habits, or hard and rigorous to the last cent in all their daily trans-
actions, especially with their dependents, employés, and clerks. Not so
with Mr. Merrick. He expended freely as he went ; he was generous and
kind to all his dependents; in raising himself he lifted up others; their
rising was the very mode and condition of his ; all his operatives respected
and loved him; all his business transactions were for the mutual benefit
of the parties concerned ; all his prosperity was the prosperity of those
around him, and of the city in which he lived.
Tt is no small achievement thus to acquire a large property—by honest
industry, by extraordinary skill, and tact, and enterprise, without parsi-
mony, or stint, or exaction, but in the spirit and constant exercise of a
large liberality. Indeed, this is one of the grandest schemes of benevo-
lence and philanthropy that a man can conceive and ¢carry out.
It implies a certain greatness of mind, a certain self-containedness,
voluntarily to stop in the career of acquisition and leave the field to
others.
It is no slight mark of the eminence and worth of any man that, at his
decease, he should leave a sensible gap in a great city, that his departure
should be widely felt as a public bereavement.
Eyery gas-burning lamp that lights our streets, our halls and our par-
lors, is a perpetual illumination of the name of Merrick. Merrick and
Franklin, both sons of New England, will remain indissolubly associated
as long as our Franklin Institute retains its name and remembers its
founder. The great railways converging upon Philadelphia will be ave-
nues and radiants for the enduring fame of the citizen who planned, and
early presided over, the Pennsylvania Road, which has become the head
of the great family, and now stretches its arms over a continent. His fire
engines were long since eloquent with his name in many a city and village
of the land ; the beautiful frigate Mississippi: bore it proudly around the
globe ; and later, in our great national life struggle, the same name re-
verberated along the rebel coast with the guns of our best and mightiest
armored steamship of war.*
To sum up the character of our departed friend: He was a man of
quick perception, of clear intelligence, of singular forecast, of large and
liberal views, of rare sagacity, of imperious, even overbearing, will, and
of indomitable energy ; a just man, of honorable sentiments, of strict in-
tegrity, to be trusted anywhere and in anything, faithful in the least and
in the greatest alike ; a man of a kindly nature, of ready sympathy, in-
stinctively and on principle benevolent, always benevolent—his benevolence
* The New Ironsides was furnished to the Government, hull, armor, and machinery, by ‘‘ Mer-
rick & Sons.”
i)
1870.] 997 ‘ [Patterson.
was not stinted by increasing years or increasing wealth, but grew rather
with his means and his habit of exercising it; a man of ardent patriot-
ism, he identified his own life with that of his country ; of an ever gen-
erous and ready public spirit, he was in all relations a good citizen ; reli-
gious, not without profession, but without cant, and beneficent without
ostentation ; his character, like his person, was of a noble and massive
rather than of a graceful make. He was every inch a man.
And now, should it be thought that I have but followed the example
of all manufacturers of obituaries, dealing only in loose and empty pane-
gyric, I do not plead guilty to the charge. What has been said rather falls
short of the truth than transgresses it.
If it be suggested that, after all, this certainly cannot be so very extra-
ordinary a case, that Mr. Merrick was not so very great or remarkable a
man, for we have among us every day many men qtite as great, as good,
and as useful as he, I cannot by any means concur in the suggestion ; and
yet I do believe, and rejoice to believe, that we have more good, earnest,
public spirited, sagacious and energetic men, quietly working on among
us, than we are sometimes, in our habitual querulousness, disposed to
acknowledge. Amidst all our complaints, often unreasoning and inconsid-
erate complaints, of the degeneracy and corruption of the times, there is
more of real greatness and goodness around us than we are aware of.
Great and good men have not all passed away with the former generations.
They are with us still. And it is one of the lessons we may learn from a
review of such a life as Mr. Merrick’s, to see and recognise the treasures
we possess. If we have many such men as Mr. Merrick, let us rejoice ;
let us so look to them while they live, and so remember them when they
are gone, that by all means we may have more.
An Obituary Notice of FRANKLIN PEALE:
Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 16th, 1870, by
RoBERT PATTERSON.
At the meeting of the American Philosophical Society, held February
19th, 1796, the proceedings were diversified by a singular incident, which
we find thus recorded in the minutes:
‘‘Mr. Peale presented to the Society a young son of four months and
four days old, being the first child born in the Philosophical Hall, and
requested that the Society would give him a name. On which, the Soci-
ety unanimously agreed that, after the name of the chief founder and
late President of the Society he should be named FRANKLIN.”’ Tradi-
tion adds, that the infant was thereupon so named in the President's
chair, given to the Society by Benjamin Franklin.
This child, in a peculiar sense the child of the Society, was FRANKLIN
PEALE, our late associate, to whose memory I now, honored by your
choice, seek to render a feeble tribute.
The father of Franklin Peale was Charles Wilson Peale, a man of va-
rious gifts, but eminent as a painter, and as the founder of the once
Patterson. ] 298 [Dec. 16,
noted Philadelphia Museum. To him the country owes an extensive
series of portraits of the most distinguished men of our revolutionary
and post-revolutionary era. In the course of his profession, having been
called on to make drawings of bones of the mammoth, his attention be-
came attracted to natural history, and he began the accumulation of ob-
jects illustrating that department of science.* From very small beginnings,
Wilson Peale, by energy, enthusiasm and self-sacrifice above all praise, suc-
ceeded in building up the Museum referred to, which Philadelphians of
a past generation recall as one of the most interesting and useful institu-
tions of our city. He was a member of our Society—which was natu-
rally much interested in the success of his work—whence it happened
that, while the Museum was stillin its early stage of growth, in the year
1794, it was located in our building, the same which we now occupy ;
and here, in the northwest room, seéond story, now known as the Libra-
rian’s room, FRANKLIN PEALE was born, on the 15th day of October,
1795. His mother was Elizabeth De Peyster, second wife of Charles
Wilson Peale. She died while he was quite young, but his childhood and
youth were tenderly cared for by a stepmother, Wilson Peale’s third wife,
a member of the Society of Friends.
The father’s views on the subject of education were peculiar. The
children were not directed according to any systematic routine, but left
much to their own choice in their course of study. They were guided
according to a fancied ability, and means were furnished (but not always
the teachers) to stimulate them to the acquisition of the knowledge to-
wards which their minds seemed naturally bent. Books, tools, canvas,
and pencils, besides the opportunities to see what had been done by
others, he thought sufficient, provided there was a disposition to learn ;
otherwise he considered any attempt to push them forward as but lost
time. If such a plan of education seems open to criticism, it may, per-
haps, be justified by the result, which has furnished to us, in the Peale
family, Rembrandt, the artist; Franklin, the mechanician; and Titian,
the naturalist.
The instruction received by Mr. Peale seems, therefore, to have been
quite irregular. He had no systematic course of training, either in school
or college. He went first to a country school in Bucks County, was a
short time at the University of Pennsylvania, and finished his education
at the Academy in Germantown, where the family then resided.
The bent of Mr. Peale’s genius towards mechanics was developed at a
very early period. While quite young, he became distinguished as a
manufacturer of all the usual apparatus for games, and many curious
toys. Asa school boy, he demonstrated a fondness for surveying as well
as mechanics—in the interval of school hours surveying his father’s farm
near Germantown, and developing also the water power of some neigh-
boring streams.
* [may be pardoned, I trust. the mention of the fact, since it illustrates a family friendship, ex-
tending now through several generations, that the first article presented to Mr. Peale, and the
earliest encouragement of his project, was from Robert Patterson, a former President of the Soci-
ety, and the grandfather of the writer.
1870.] 099 [Patterson.
At the age of 17, he entered the factory of Hodgson & Bro., on the
Brandywine, Delaware, to learn machine making. From his industry,
patience and neatness, he rose superior to his teachers. He became
skilful as a turner and founder, and in the use of tools, and a very éxcel-
lent draftsman. He here prepared the working drawings for the machines
required for a cotton factory at Germantown, and had them constructed
under his supervision, and in great part by his personal skill and labor.
When barely 19 he left Delaware to take charge of the cotton factory
just mentioned, of which he had the management for several years. He
afterwards removed to Philadelphia, and entered into the establishment
of John & Coleman Sellers, making machinery for card sticking.
Mr. Peale now separated himself for a time from the strict line of his
profession, and entered upon the management of his father’s Museum.
For this duty he was well fitted, on account of his administrative abili-
ties, his taste, and his talent for arrangement, as well as by a competent
knowledge of the subjects to which it was devoted. The Museum was
something more than a place of deposit for birds, beasts and fishes, but
was a collection of curiosities in art, in mechanism, and in antiquity.
Mr. Peale, in the pursuit of his own profession, had not neglected other
fields of knowledge. He was ever an ardent student and observer. It
was not likely, therefore, that he should have been unlearned in any of
the subjects which the Museum was intended to illustrate, and which he
had heard discussed from his childhood. While not professing a particular
fondness for natural history, he so far mastered the subject as to deliver
lectures upon it, availing himself of the special facilities placed at his
disposal. His mechanical genius, also, found room for display, in adding
to the curiosities of the establishment. Many of us will remember his
curious speaking toy, besides other ingenious inventions which cannot now
be specified.
It was while engaged at the Museum that Mr. Peale placed there a
miniature locomotive, the first seen in this country, and manufactured by
his friend, M. W. Baldwin, ona plan agreed on between Mr. Peale and
himself. It was put in operation on a track, making the circuit of
the Arcade, in which the Museum then was, drawing two miniature cars,
with seats for four passengers. The valuable aid of Mr. Peale was after-
wards given to Mr. Baldwin in the construction of the locomotive for the
Philadelphia and Germantown R. R., in 1832, the success of which led
to the establishment of Mr. Baldwin in the great business of his life.
Mr. Peale’s position at the Museum was of advantage in bringing his
peculiar and varied talents more conspicuously before the public. The
establishment was largely visited, often by distinguished men of our own
and other citles, and many learned to admire the ingenious young man-
ager. His society and friendship were sought after, and he assumed his
proper place as one of the select band then most active among us in the
pursuit of science and art.
The Franklin Institute, then young and earnest, as it still is in the ad-
vancement of knowledge, secured the services of Mr. Peale for a series of
Patterson. ] 600 [Dec. 16,
oe
lectures on a subject adapted to his special talents. He here delivered
two courses, in the winter of 1831-2 and 1832-3, on Mechanics, or rather
on Machines. These were fully illustrated either by the machines them-
selves, or diagrams, were novel in their character, and justly added to
Mr. Peale’s reputation. He was long an active member of the Institute,
giving efficient labor on its most important committees, and at the annual
exhibitions, and occasionally contributing articles on mechanical subjects
to its Journal.
In 1888, Mr. Peale entered upon that connection with the Mint of the
United States, which gave a full opportunity for the display of his special
abilities, and through which his reputation was firmly established. Dr.
Samuel Moore, then Director, conceived the project of a mission to Eu-
rope, for the purpose of examining and reporting on such chemical, me-
chanical and metallurgic methods and improvements, as might be deemed
worthy of introduction into our Mint. He procured the needful authority,
and appropriations, and having the fullest confidence in Mr. Peale, selected
him as the agent for this purpose. He accepted the trust and sailed for Ku-
ropein May ofthe same year, being officially designated as Assistant Assayer.
Mr. Peale remained abroad two years. The subjects of special interest to
the Director had been the Sulphuric Acid process of Refining (or Parting, )
and the Humid Assay of Silver, on which full investigations were required,
but Mr. Peale was not restricted in his inquiries, nor in truth was he one
likely to overlook any particulars bearing directly or remotely upon the
broad objects of his mission. His intelligent, patient labor, mastered
every detail. By partial reports during his absence, but more especially
by a full and final report after his return, accompanied by plans and
drawings, our Mint was placed in full possession of all that was then
worthy to be known of the establishments, public and private, whose or-
ganization and methods affiliated them with ourown. The direct results
of the mission, were the introduction of the humid assay, some improve-
ments in the details of the refining process, and the labor-saving method
of duplicating working dies for coinage. The indirect results were per-
haps, equally important. For the thoughts and labors of a man of genius
in mechanics (as Mr. Peale was,) could not be concentrated on the details
of Mint processes, without planning many valuable improvements. Hap-
pily for the public service, Dr. R. M. Patterson, the Director who succeed-
ed Dr. Moore, (in July, 1835,) was Mr. Peale’s warm friend, and a great
admirer of his talents. His ‘‘mission’’ did not cease, therefore, with his
return from Hurope, but he became associated permanently with the Mint,
for a time as Assistant Assayer, then as Melter and Refiner (in 1836), and
finally as Chief Coiner (in 1839). His first great werk was in the con-
struction of the steam coining presses, substituted for the hand presses
then in use. The first steam press was manufactured under his supervi-
sion, by Merrick, Agnew & Tyler, and turned out its first specimens in
March, 1836. Presses subsequently manufactured for our own and other
mints, have been improved in minor points, but their principle of action
1870 ] 601 [Patterson.
remains the same. Other improvements which he introduced, were the
so-called milling machine, for raising the edge of the planchet ; the steam
engines, small and large ; the automatic or retroactive return of the draw-
bench ; and, in particular, the scales for the weighing of gold and silver.
These last are models of simple mechanism and nice accuracy. So, in fact,
was all of Mr. Peale’s work. And we may add, that he brought to all
the eye of anartist. It was not enough that a machine should be effec-
tive ; it must also be graceful and attractive. ‘‘ Nihil tetigit quod non
ornavit.’’ But I cannot enter at large into details of his labors at the
mint. I simply add my conviction, (which I know to have been that of
the revered Director already named, under whose administration the work
was accomplished,*) that without Franklin Peale, the most of that which
attracts the admiration of the visitor to the coining department of the
Mint would have been wanting. The mark of his inventive genius is here
conspicuous, and I have often thought, as I passed through that part of
the establishment, how appropriately might be there ascribed to his honor,
the words, ‘‘Si monumentum requiris, circumspice.’’ But amore com-
petent judge than myself, thoroughly qualified by long experience in mint
affairs, has spoken to this point in words which I take the liberty to quote:
‘¢Tt has been my privilege (he says,) to visit the mints of London and
Paris, and to witness their inferiority in their mechanical arrangements,
tothe Mint in Philadelphia. The superiority of our Mint is most mani-
fest in just those points where his hand has touched, and when Ameri-
cams visiting the mints of Europe, feel a pride in remembering the supe-
riority of their own, they ought to know that to the genius and taste of
Franklin Peale are they mainly indebted for it. At the mints of both
Paris and London, he was well known and inquired for with interest.”’
Mr. Peale’s connection with the Mint ceased in December, 1854, and he
retired for some time from all publicemployment. Jn 1864, he was elect-
ed President of the Hazleton Coal and Rail Road Company, in the direc-
tion of which he had been for many yearsanactive member. He continued
in this office until 1867, when he resigned, and finally closed his long
career of active business life.
I have thus hastily sketched the professional life of Mr. Peale, by which
his public reputation was established ; but any notice of his character
would be far from complete which left out what we may call its esthetic
side, including those varied accomplishments and elegant tastes, which
made him one of the most interesting of men.
We have already referred to the artistic hand which he brought to his
mechanical work. This was a characteristic naturally growing out of his
strong love and devotion toart. In the society in which he was brought up,
—his father and brother eminent as painters,—he came to a knowledge
of the subject rare among amateurs. He was for many years a member
of the Academy of Fine Arts, which his father had been instrumental in
establishing, and for the last fifteen years of his life, one of the Board of
Directors, and a member of its most important committees. We are told
*Dr. Robert M, Patterson, the father of the writer, and late President of this Society.
Patterson. ] 602
[Dec. 16,
by one of his eminent associates in the Academy, that ‘‘he was zealously
devoted to the discharge of the duties assigned him, always observing a
scrupulous regard for the interests of the contributizg artists and pupils of
the Academy. His courtuous manners and almost “Raining gentleness,
made him a great favorite with the lady students especially. He was sin-
cere in the utterance of his convictions, honest in action, and sound in
judgment. His taste was refined and his ideas elevated. He was, in short,
a most valuable member of the Board. His departure from the scene in
which he labored so industriously and efficiently, las created a vacuum
not easily filled.”’
Mr. Peale was an excellent musician, and I believe a self-taught one.
He was endowed with a most agreeable cultivated tenor voice, to which
the guitar was the appropriate accompaniment, and on which instrument
he became a great proficient. His love of music was a passion, and in
private circles and public associations he was foremost in promoting its
cultivation. His house was for many successive seasons made charming
to his friends, as the resort of the best amateur and professional talent of
our city, met together to illustrate, in a manner altogether worthy the
choicest instrumental and vocal compositions. Mr. Peale was one of the
founders of the Musical Fund Society, to which Philadelphia owes so
much asthe means of spreading a cultivated musical taste among us.
He was among the most active members in promoting its objects in art
and charity, and at his decease was President of the Society.
In manly accomplishments, Mr. Peale was conspicuous, carrying into
these the elegant refinement so marked in his character, and lending also
the aid of his mechanical genius. The graceful art of archery was par-
ticularly attractive to him, and in his efforts to establish it as an addition
to our out-door amusements, I cannot but think he showed a taste and
judgment in happy contrast to what has been exhibited in the develop-
ment of those boisterous and half-savage games, cricket and base ball, or
which we now hear so much. He was one of the founders of the club of
United Bowmen, and a long series of medals and badges, which he pre-
served with some pride, attest a skill in which he was confessed the chief.
His love of the art and affection for his fellow-members, was shown to the
last, for by his special request his remains were borne to the grave by his
associates of the club.
Tn another beautiful gymnastic art, that of skating, he was a proficient
from his youth to the last years of his life. And it was, I think, an
admirable sight to observe him, when past seventy, moving along with
firmness and grace, happy in the enjoyment of his younger friends, and
never so pleased as when aiding by his hand or counsel the fairer sex.
He was President of the Skaters’ Club at his death. And I ought to
mention here that Mr. Peale was the inventor of Skaters Reel, a simple
expedient for rescuing persons breaking through the ice that has probably
been the means of saving many lives.
But the activity of Mr. Peale was by no means limited to his pro-
fessional duties, or to art and recreation. He was zealous in good works.
; 9
1$70.] 603 { Patterson.
Tn particular, the Pennsylvania Institution for the Instruction of the Blind
long engaged his sympathy and unwearied labor. He was elected a
manager in 1839, served on its most important committees, and was
finally elected President in 1863, holding that office at his decease. He
was rarely absent from the managers’ meetings, and presided only a few
weeks before his death. His tender, affectionate manner made him
greatly loved by the pupils, while his intelligence and the soundness of
his judgment secured the esteem and confidence of the officers and of his
fellow managers.
For some years before his death, Mr. Peale was greatly interested in
that branch of Archeology which relates to the so-called Stone Age. He
determined to make a collection of implements illustrating that age, and
by energy and patience succeeded in accumulating over twelve hundred
specimens, many of them very choice. The most of these were gathered
by himself at the ancient homes of the Shawnees and Delawares, around
the Water Gap where he spent many autumns; others were secured by
exchange or purchase. These have all been arranged for easy examina-
tion on a plan devised by himself, and full of his characteristic ingenuity
and taste, and he has left behind a manuscript catalogue with an intro-
duction and full descriptive details which leave nothing further to be
desired. It affords me great satisfaction to add that this valuable collec-
tion, the latest labor of Mr. Peale, is to be presented to this Society.
I have left to the close, what perhaps should have been earliest men-
tioned, all reference to Mr. Peale’s association with our own Society.
He was elected a member October 18, 1833, and ever after took a constant
and active interest in our proceedings. He was for many years one of
the Curators, and filled that office at his death. Our published minutes
show many communications from him, on a variety of subjects, but of
late these were mostly relative to the stone ag2, on which he was always
heard with the interest inspired by his enthusiasm and fulness of knowledge.
Mr. Peale was twice married. By his first marriage, which took place
in his minority, he had a daughter, his only child, who still survives.
His second wife was a niece of Stephen Girard. She lives to lament the
death of her husband, and I may not, therefore, refer more particularly
to those accomplishments and virtues by which'she crowned his happiness,
and made delightful his home.
I have thus far considered for the most part the outer life of Mr. Peale,
by which he became known to the public at large, but I cannot conclude
without some reference to his inner life as it was disclosed to his more in-
timate friends. These, while they admired his varied knowledge, saw
upon a close inspection other traits which made still more excellent the
character of the man. Of these I may mention his gentleness and loving
tenderness to all, but especially to the young. With children he was a
universal favorite. He never wearied in contributing to their amusement
or instruction. And this was no light burden on his time, for a toy from
Mr. Peale was not such as comes from the shops, but all that he ac-
A. P. §.—VOL, XI—48E
604 [Dee. 16,
Patterson. ]
complished, from a kite to a complicated engine, was beautiful in form
and finish. On oceasions, and especially if a charitable object were to be
promoted, he would don the costume of an Eastern Juggler, and astonish
the young, and even children of a larger growth, with apparently miracu-
lous feats, for which he had constructed apparatus of his own. Even to
the brute creation the same tender nature was exhibited. A scientific
friend recalls even now the self restraint with which, when a youth,
ardent in the search for entomological specimens, he spared a water-
spider, of rare species, that had shown a touching instinct in the pro-
tection of its young. He was always most ready in imparting information
to inquirers wliom his happy faculty and clearness in explanation gathered
round him. An enthusiastic lover and explorer of nature, it was in the
fields and woods that he became perhaps most interesting. He was
familiar with the names and habits of plants, animals, and insects, and
mineralogy and geology, and from the fulness of his knowledge dispensed
liberally.
A marked characteristic of Mr. Peale was his untiring energy. He
was never idle, always laboring on some systematic plan. Even his re-
creations were methodically arranged, and a part of the means by which
his body and mind were invigorated for work. And with him there were
no small duties. Each one was sacred. No temptation or pleasure could
induce him to forego a responsibility. A promise was its performance.
Punctuality was a prominent virtue, any infringement on which he re-
gretted as wasting another’s time.
Finally, Mr. Peale was a reverential, humble, Christian man. A faith
better than philosophy sustained him in the closing hour, and he went
calmly to his rest murmuring ‘‘The Lord is my Shepherd,”’ like unto a
little child trusting toa parent’s promise. His dying words distinctly and
clearly uttered were: ‘‘If this is death, it is as 1 wished, perfect peace,
perfect comfort, perfect joy.”’
The vigorous constitution of Mr. Peale carried him in robust health to
a term some years beyond, that allotted to man by the Psalmist. For
months before his death, however, he was observed to be failing, a fact
of which he was himself fully conscious, speaking to his friends with
perfect composure of his approaching end. He was nevertheless able,
almost to the last, to attend to his accustomed duties, and his closing
illness was but a brief one. He died at his residence, 1131 Girard Street,
on the 5th of May, 1870, in the 75th year of his age.
* 1870.] 605 [Cope.
ON THREE EXTINCT ASTACI FROM THE FRESH-WATER TER-
RITORY OF IDAHO. By Pror. E. D. Cope.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Dec. 16th, 1870.)
ASTACUS SUBGRUNDIALIS, Cope.
This craw-fish is represented by four specimens, which include the ce-
phalothorax and region of the front, one of them including, also, the
post-abdomen to the end, with limbs; three specimens with cheles,
one including a pair; and one other specimen representing the post-
abdomen.
The prominent characters of the species may be stated diagnostically
thus: Two tubercles on each side the front, the anterior spiniform and
external to the basis of the lateral ridge of the ensiform process. The
latter narrow, medially grooved, acute, with five spinous points on each
side, and a terminal recurved spinelet. Surface of the cephalothorax
smooth or obsoletely wrinkled. Cheles nearly smooth, not granulate,
the superior edge spiniferous. Margins of the segments of postabdomen
produced into acuminate plates.
I cannot determine the presence or absence of hooks on any of the
legs. The cheles are badly preserved in specimens of this species.
The last segment of the cheles is furnished with a longitudinal series
of strong reverted spines along the superior margin. They dimin-
ish in length proximally ; four or five are most prominent. In a speci-
men much smaller than the type, where the surface is preserved, it is
nearly smooth, and minutely striate. The longitudinal groove of the
penultimate joint is well marked ; this segment is not spiniferous.
The antennal plates are large, and extend to nearly opposite the end
of the ensiform process at the front. The free abdominal segment is
punctate on its anterior half. The outer lamina of the postabdominal
segment is four times as wide as that of the others, with convex outline
to a point directed outwards and backwards. The lamine of the other
segments are acuminate triangular and transverse.
The transverse suture of the external lamina of the flipper, marks the
posterior fourth of the whole length of the lamina.
The lateral suture of the cephalothorax is deeply impressed.
Four of the specimens represent individuals of large size: two are
smaller. The measurements are as follows:
M
enothtordorsalysuture, INO pecs sors) sciot enn eteys cis olor sienehel- koopa 0.0415
“¢ of ensiform process only........ Se se ba Mmetamepe A eau arate Pate .0182
Width ie nO ALD AS Care cwatcis eat nae fous orale tehae avery yey 005
Wenothepostabdominalandelipper... sete ise se ee ant 072
CS (wlll) Taree lemming, ists Seer is opaccee AoC oabeoo é5eouc 015
CP ROME CTD ATA AL LPO OT sry erey stave yelayetehere alle clers css gs 3) aravetens egeacere tN .02
Po LeEMMNAliseoOmenttlippelp ene eesti reece .005
cM SecOndEpalabdominalmleosnerrne er eral 024
‘¢ dorsum No. 2 from basal spine to suture................ .021
Cope. ] 606 [ Dee. 16,
Wadthibasisuixe duclawaot clielesasnameenrieeeccice ecient 009
Length penultimate joint cheles, No. 3........................-. 0175
Widthydistalvemad of iSamencns xh css dm ctevereste oe koe eicie er ledeienastentons .O115
In the small specimen (No. 2) it appears to be the inferior margin of
the cheles which is spiniferous. The mesonotum is exposed, and is of
moderate width.
From a fresh water deposit in the Teritory of Idaho, near Hot Spring
Mountain. Obtained by Capt. Clarence King’s expedition. Museum
Smithonian, No. 9779.
ASTACUS CHENODERMA, Cope, sp. nov.
This species is represented by the cheles of opposite sides of one in-
dividual,with which I associate with great probability one from the right
side of a second. Part of a cephalothorax of a third is associated, but
without conclusive evidence of identity, chiefly because of a near re-
semblance in the sculpture.
The first mentioned are remakable for their long slender form, and the
absence of all spinous armature from their margins. The surface of all
parts is covered with thickly placed granular tubercles. The external
surface is regularly convex on the middle line, the inner convex on the
lower portion, the convexity separated from the lower margin by a groove.
Upper portion gradually thinned out to the edge. The edges are simply
rugose like the sides, though more coarsely so, with small granular promi-
nences. The denticulation of the opposed edges of this joint are in-
significant, thongh but a small part of the latter is cleared from the
matrix.
In the second specimen part of the penultimate segment is preserved.
Its inferior margin is unarmed, but on the middle of the outer face is a
series of short spines rather distantly placed.
In the third, represented by a cephalothorax, the dorsal suture is regu-
larly convex backwards, and the mesonotum of moderate width. The
surface is delicately wrinkled by the confluent bases of fine pointed
granules directed forwards. They become more scattered on the sides
of the cephalothorax. As in the last species there are two spines on each
side the front.
M.
Length from anterior spine to middle of cross suture..... 0.0235
Width between posterior spines................--.--+5-: .0105
‘¢ mesonotum .25 inch from front..............-.... 007
Length of last segment of cheles (No. 1).................. 045
AVWViiclbhwbasalenoaistemwpan cciicetem eectocier incr eicerr crt 0173
GS reveal ave MANS 5a5 cocoocaacnodcodonnbenOD000 .006
From Catharine’s creek, Idaho; collected for Capt. Clarence King by
J. ©. Schenk. No. 9779, Museum Smithonian.
ASTACUS BREVIFORCEPS, Cope.
Species nova.
Established primarily on three cheles or last segments of the fore limbs;
with these I have associated a cephalothorax of one, and abdominal and
1870.] 607
[Cope,
postabdominal regions of three individuals. The only reason for such
reference of the latter, is their superficial texture, in which they resemble
the cheles, and differ from the corresponding parts in the two other species.
The cheles are short and thick, the section of the stoutest proximal
part being an oblique oyal. The inferior edge is thinned by lengitudinal
contraction above and below it. The fixed process is of a rather short
conic form. The surface is granular tuberculate, except on the convex
faces, where it is finely vermiculate rugose.
M.
Wencthelast segment cheles. js .cece eee Shop suiecole sla chveass cect 0.08%
ANIC a oe aeons Sep srcuiet: east eden iia Elperecreuhniaiere Siaciehie sumwsuee |. Oeil
IPRORAONeN, WINS VSMEIS CUBWINKIP. Gave sGoodssocunedoecncuonosamocnous sols
The cephalothorax associated is quite similar to that of A. subgrundi-
alas, and may possibly belong to it. It however, differs in the finely ver-
miculate rugose character of its surface. The ruge are generally trans-
verse on the back and sides. The supra-anteunal lamina is exhibited in
a clear manner ; it is as long as the spine of the muzzle, and as wide at
the base.
The superior surfaces of the abdominal segments are marked with a
delicate vermiculate rugosity, like that of the last specimens. In A. swb-
grundialis, itisimpressed punctate. Thisspecies also differs from the latter
in that the transverse marginal lamina of the first postabdominal segment,
is narrower than in the latter, its width not equaling twice that of one of
the others, instead of being four times as wide. The succeeding lami-
ne are acuminate elongate, and slightly curved forward. It is, however,
quite uncertain as to whether these postabdominal specimens belong to
the species which has the stout cheles. Some of the specimens indi-
cate individuals larger than those referred to A. subgrundialis.
From the same locality and collection as the last. No. 9779.
GENERAL REMARKS.
The preceding species differ from those at present inhabiting North
America, as I have been able to determine by examining the excellent
monograph of the latter, published in the catalogue of the Museum.
Compar. Zoology, by Dr. J. H. Hagen. They differ from all of them in the
prominence and acumination of the lateral margins of the postabdominal
segments. In the serrate simple frontal process, the first described re—
sembles the Astacus gambelii Girard, but its process is longer and nar-
rower.
I have already described * twelve species of fishes from the same local-
ity and deposit, whence these Astaci were procured.
* Proceed, Amer, Philos, Soc. 1870, December 8.
Cope. ] 608 [ Nov. 18, 1870.
NOTE ON SAUROCEPHALUS, HARLAN.
By E. D. Cops, in the Meeting November 18, 1870.
Prof. Cope called attention to the cretaceous group of fishes represented
by Saurocephalus of Harlan. He said they had been regarded as related
to the Acanthopterygian family of Sphyrenide.
He showed that they were more like certain Malacopterygian families in
the structure of the mouth; that the neural arches of the vertebra were
not coossified ; and that the tail was vertebrated in a manner between
the types of Salmonidw and Amiide. He said the pectoral rays of the
group had been described by Leidy under the name of Xtphactinus, and
that the caudal rays were remarkably and beautifully segmented. He
said that they had been hitherto regarded by authors as spines or rays of
the cestraciont genus Ptychodus.
Prof. Cope also made a communication on the results of the explora-
tions of certain caves in the island of Anguilla in the West Indies, by
Dr. Van Rijgersma. He stated that the vertebrata embraced eleven
species, of which one was a Crocodilian, two birds, one a deer, and five
rodents. Of the latter, three were of gigantic size, including, beside the
two species of Chinchillas already described (Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soe.,
1869, 188), a third, larger than either, which was named Loxomylus lati-
dens, Cope. It differed from the LZ. longidens, Cope, in having teeth with
triturating surface less oblique to the axis of the tooth, and wider than
long, instead of longer than wide, and with a certain irregularity in the outer
margin. The distal end of the femur measured 32 inches across ; the se-
ries of superior molars 23 inches ; width of two inferior incisors in place
one inch and two lines. The bones of the deer indicated a species a little
over half the size of the Chinchilla.
Proceedings, Amer. Philos, Soc.
SECTIONS OF TERTIARY ROCK STRATA
Vol, XE Teenie M2,
In Cuttings éf the Union Pacific Railroad, one mile west of Bear River City, Wyoming Terr., U. S.
Rartroap Currine, No. 1 (page 420).
STE
\\
MIE See ae
:
ING TD) 1 XG
BUSINESS.
ACMI OMe CLLOMS ey ccnatonmteccicissicsleinisicietteisiawiercicieileleisisteic ister ieiseretos dnocboEK0e 2, 274
SURGES COM TTA KiiGeesaqconcdsosbnebod doa daddacuoonesanpocudbEaodolAcounAoane 6, 278
Special Committee OnAWinchellisiMarshalliG yOupcmecreccelsletclesscisiseicieloee sie etciete 24
Lyon’s New species Of @rinoidea.... 3... cece nce cccccscs 24
b6 us WEW Vas CATI CES er aaa ask aicise cisicisialelers erettrevet Velen 113, 115
WG ts IBRinioM GOMGIHO WISS5oooooudodoonodcedussaoauodooconeKoE 115
ce ee TEKS WAAC .6b concede conodboudadoanSboudessodos 146
ee ne Brinton’s Arawack language.........-...06+s.seecee sooon: PAY)
rs Cope’s Megadactylus Polyzelus.............--..eeee-ceee 277
i st Hrasems Metalluncical@hantsasseeccerooyacccoeerteeeee 447
U6 i MahanoandeVoskaybookseanenece cece econ eee 515
or “ Cope’s Ichthyology of the Marafion.................--.... 524
oC OG The Michaux Legacy, 6, 24, 114, 193, 201, 212, ae ay 442, 447
* te Ren tinewthepHalley eee eee eee , 84, 03, 111
OG OC The Michaux Oak Grove and Botonie Garden........ 312, 523
66 ce A Meteorological Observatory . 627, 572
Cleaning and Varnishing the Portr aits. BgeoandooooboCOyeS 2239)
Memorial to Congress respecting the Eclipse.......... 13
TNS TRA HISIAUOVOTUISO) OMX en eee ooo SoM MICU MEE a cat chee Map iyla.s uene Mire ni te Sau 84
NO MASA lame Ore MUTTN Oy wEIROOl, sodobcossosbanccdnbposaooougdssdoonbesonuooooe 115, 214
TPUIFIN'S ROTA cIOUNNEN INS DURIMEOl, oo oobodsosoUbos scan von cbosdoncongecoooccsucusbeuns 370
MAhiaAnM asus LORY Ol S Palm CEUUMME Mine lasteletore see ence ecieleiacinionice ec ene ann 3, 14, 192
ConmppesthenadustpunTchased eye tattle cteveravetereeayevetatate iain eee ee rere ee eee 275
HO CCCAUMESMSSUCORINION SU sivecverarelcksrarerecersveleretstosloete erate a ree oe eee nS Ree 3
ANDRO OA AKOING) Hare IHD WNAKd> Cooodcosucos sc duusoaumucooSoob obo beseGed GobuessuoDeD 239
heberesident]s resignation withawawmlee sees saeci- ceisler 441, 442
Order governing additions to memoirs going through the Press...........-.e++.+++- 278
Order respecting delinquent subscribers to the Tr ALISA HOTS is ina ann On 572
Mr. Cuyler’s motion respecting the Physical Observatory inthe Park............... 572
Riembers Hlected.
IBIGCHIGIE bo Snondobosoocbo}oMUOnGuadauodaeoddooenobEnAsadeodedc 7, 111, 210, 278, 368, 447, 521
Agassiz. Mrs. Elizabeth, of Cambridge Horne, George H., M. D., of Philada. 7
NVIASSoetetetetetelelaisietaroieeeietetcisrelaverieestaieterets 2 Huxley, Thomas F. of London....... 7
Anderson, George W., of West Haver- Lartet, Edward, of PAT SN ee 7
TROTRG Ld EF Oo ca Sie toe tere ricer 211 Linant Bey, of Cairo ees 7
Baird, Henry C., Philadelphia........ 7 Lippincott, Joshua B., of Philadelphia 7
Beadle, Rd. E. R., of Philadelphia.... 447 Lyman, Benjamin S., of Philada...... 7
Binney, Horace Jr., of Philadelphia... 7 Mariette Bey, Aug guste, ost CORVIKOA Ghons 7
Birch, Samuel, of London........¢.... 7 Mayer, Alfred M., of South Bethlehem
Blackmore, William, of Salisbnry, aan ls nisiien mamnees auiis aeiecre me ener 211
(Gconidon) ne lamd ys seeeeeeee ee 7 Miller, J. Imbrie, of Pennsylvania... 521
Blake, William P., of New Haven, Ct 521
Boekh, Dr: C. W., of Christiania, Nor-
NEN SCE Rater a SSE eere ny DEO Catia Here e ers 447
Brinton, D. G., M. D. of Philadelphia. 112
Brugsch, Een MF OMBeulinusseee reece 7
Bullock, Charles, of Philadelphia..... 211
Carlier, Auguste, of Paris............. he
Gesell wom ROMere eee. 7
Chabas, Francois, of CRO surSaone 7
Coffin, J. H. C., U.S. N., Supt. Naut.
Almanac, Washington eo Bat edo esas 112
Cox, Hon. J. D., of Washington, D.C. 368
Coxe, Eckley Be of Philadelphia haaodon 521
D’Aligny, Henry F.Q., of New York.. 52]
Darwin, Charles, of England beer otis (aie 210
DeRougé, Emmanuel, of Paris........ 7
Dumichen, Johannes of Germany..... 7
Flower, William Hi. , Of London....... 7
Fr auenfeld, George Von, of Vienna.. 211
Gabb, William M., of Philadelphia... ri
Gruner, Louis, Ecole des Mines, Paris 210
Hakakian iBeyOMCAILOM eee eee
Hale, Rey. E.E., of Roxbury (Boston)
IASG ered eee SRE BREE atid oR ies 278
Hitchcock, Prof. Charles H., of New
York City Beat alevers la yeahs fovebele kar anteaters 368
GCHEIELGS Ferdinand Von, of Vi-
Giltacsopop poaodaso hare moo aodeenee 211
Hooker, Joseph D., M. D., of Kew
Ganrdensraieccyconoa ces ccna nee eee 7
Hopper, Edward, of Philadelphia.... 211
A. P. $.—VOL. x1.—49E
Mitchell, Miss Maria, of Vassar Col
lege; IN GAVE alee oe alata 210
Naumann, Carl Fr., of Leipsig........ 210
Nillson, Hi, Ot IONE! «5 .6osdsenoonse T
Pepper, Dr. Wm.. of Philada......... 447
Phillips, onmeonOxtordes ao seeeae 7
Prestwich, Joseph, of London........ a
Quiney, Edmund, of Dedham, Mass... 368
Rawlinson, George, of England....... 210
Reeves, Samuel Je, of Philada 05.555 I
Rolleston, George, "of Oxford.......... eitlh
Rutimeyer, Carl L., omBaseleeereeeeee Uf
Seidensticker, Oswald, OMAN Boooasen 78
Seiler, Mrs. Emma, of Philada........ 278
Siebold, Carl T. E. Von, of Munich.... 210
Somerville, Mrs, Mary, of England,
MON? Oe INYO ES ob5000g008 SoogoboRaban 210
Tilghman, W. M., of Philada.......... 278
Tyndale, Hector, ot Philada ....- ert
Tyson, Philip T., of Baltimore. o AL
Vogt, Carl, of Geneva............ so6 Pll)
Vose, George L., of Salem, Mass...... 521
Wharton, Joseph, OHA NEO. 5 bases 112
White, ANS Wy, , President Cornell Uni-
versity, Ithaca, NARS Ue ie 2 112
Whittier, John Greenleaf, of Ames-
DUAR TASS nse a eee ae ra Ra 278
Williamson, Major R.S8., U. S. Engi-
NIE OLS a eiiic saree eter eee eae eee 368
Worsaae, J. J. A., of Copenhagen.... 7
612
Photographs Received.
Chitin, dis 18 Concdscogoc0a0 Bo000nans0e IL neh ease Del Dogeaeseneoaacedonaoonll «.. 442
ible, Wye. (Sh 185 eccsanoepooaseacedsobe BIL ING WAKO, JEONG Lele WN jog oneadcaosoqcoOKer 442
lel@a, Wikcoodacedasgaoucapodcdous4dgodbo Blots} | TOV MeARONG 1s Wy Ossoncsasosoncadec 368
Members Deceased.
Baneker, C. N., (obituary read, 85).... 14 Grier, R. C............... ails itis misleroeee 514.
Binney, "Horace Jr. BA (obituary read, Meigs, Ce OS Sa ea 146
Sil) sadsoososaauaqcodagodocdbEdauceuus 279 Merrick, S. V., (obituary read, 584)... 496
ChRSing MOMnssassecdcca sooccdocee Bh Mery INO) Paulding, OJoilal (IANA ane au OOD a. G0 os 24
Ciawake: Sire GAINES se cadooageedéoousoeRs 447 Peale, Fr: an (obituary read, 597). 369
GIEVelanl dee eae er raceleeiseee 193 Simpson. BIS aeh Gee es a ET OG Bo 835
Copland, Sir James, (obituary read, 5) 496 Stevens, Alexander,...... 24.
Wied ocanuddodsoueaaapooosOOOOeOOOs - 201 Von Martius, C. F. P 3
Dunglison, Robley.. .. 91 List of surviving members read.-..- 6, 278
Erdmann, AME aa) EL AO Rane co . 215
Memoirs and Communications.
Ackerman, A.: Meteorological register at Bois-Chéne...............2..++2+-447, 499
Allen, D. H.: On Human osteology SES AOC EERE aOR Onec saae deren Soa bi 117, 370
Briggs, Hi.: On Prof. Henry’s meteorological results..............ce-scceeseenscne 521
Brinton, B. G.: On the Maya language..............+--+++-- SUiaisssistoseniaaneenee 4
ee ‘¢ Chol and Cokehiquel JAM SUAP CS. ects visisieloaaterstoclecelee 13
BO “6 MSS. Arawak Vocabulary of Schultz 114, 192
60 ‘¢ Byinegton’s MSS. Choctaw grammar 317 4497 516
06 VISIO KE Ce SramMImMal inser yaoi eileen rere 301
Chase, P. E.: On Philadelphia life TAUPYES ee hee NOE SUT CUT Oe ain Ai en 13
ge Cosmicalrelations of light and gravity..........---....-.--.00+.. 103
Ee SDT CUE VSS iy se sce aioe oe ora aratalisv evel ralcberetevechavcole lesen neta orcas atoeare et eee 113
00 SIGE! TANT oo coo podD on scaes00s0OLpDEODOSHSgGG0L 2000000 exerecerets 202
ce Solarandrelectricniohtisicecsssscee eae eee eee ECE eee 276
06 Additional deductions from the rain fall tables.....-.....-...... 979
“e FUSING ts CLES 2 esa ie cyst tanta SOEs ea ove Petes ores wore tova re vey s ecoven eye te pete a 284
0g Monthly rainfall variations at IA MIGNON Soodsadadaannodcdasas 314
Of Comparison of mechanical equivalents..............-... *ucdhe iat 313
Cresson, J. €.: Profile of the Schuylkill flood............-... 0.00.2 e eee eee, 209
sé ANaACler Sion On Aes wl Us codcasavacboousocudonosasaodebo0c 498
06 DEScHIpPHONOhTeEcentaunorasw cere ce. aeeceeas Sint Shas alsiage ene orators 622
Cope, E. D.: On Mylodon Annectens.......---.-.-- 22.2 eee sees ence tees ceeeeeee 15
ts MHelCretAaACeOuUs LOLLOISES sche saesiertersis eee cake hie eee eee 16
06 INTENT MUOSERENUORO OL ME Qu soebooo oboodeseescucasdsocoucouce 116, 146
‘ Seventh contribution to the Herpetology of tropical America. 147
ce Synopsis of Extinct Mammalia of the cave formations in the Uni-
FedeStaLces-y liwithbaihneelplavesil--ecscieceeee eee eC hoe eee eee 171
6 Second addition to the History of the fishes of the Cretaceous of
THEMWMICEA States ewe cercesicciooas cae ee eect steiner 194, 212, 240
oc Some Etheostomine Perch from Tennessee and North Carolina.. 261
te Some Reptilia of the Cretaceous formation of the U.S....... PN, PB
bs Moiar tooth and fragment of a skeleton...............+..-.-0+0.. 278
‘ Fourth contribution to the history of the Fauna of the Miocene
and Eocene periods of the United States.........-...-.......... J 285
“ Adocus, a genus of Cretaceous Emydide............ SHAN ole 295
“ Note on Skeletons found near Woodbury......:...............0- 310
ss Photographie pictures of figures of the human foot on OOS: AL iene 311
uc TOSS iS esperar eodco on Pao advance cope cay Goud oan domed else Lo)
ve Vertebree and other WANG of anew species of Bottosaurus....... 367
“c Fishes of the Tertiary shales of Green River, Wyoming Ter.. .370, 380
“6 Anew. Chimeeridkirom Ne wiWJerseyenneceeesee eee eee eee 384
te THe My SiLOSAUnUS HLONTOSUS werieeeeeraeeeecee eee een eel :
ve URE TES EE CPM LL VOTO Eeh ea MEST DN RMR TAIN VG Wik SORA eR OIA He NU Sh 44
“ AVBEISKO INCOMES. dood ddoenossonoossdocanes woodecaaasbagnoce i
ve Some Australian skulls and a Maori skull
“ A partial synopsis of the fishes of the fresh waters of North Car-
CONN CEI. ENR es ret alee Dy ERO INE PARE AP ai ah nO eo oe 442, 448
“ AP iOYe Koval Toro EVN WUC RG agadoboonodaconouadodubouddebdoacaodocHondods 496
“e IMOSOSAURUSE BLUM VA-eeeeereeenereeec choo eee CLE eee 497
“ RhesehnhivolosygotthePAmtilleSteen Lecce eerie he ee ere reer eee 514
“ Some remains of a new Cretaceous tortoise...-...-...........2002 DIS
st The Osteology of Megaptera Bellicosa................csceceunn- ve 516
Cope, 195 LD 158 (Oya) INNS SEVTTROO OMA oo ano noonobouo onannononbdennoodadondanpensosene 529
Fishes of the fresh water tertiary in Idaho, discovered by Capt.
CONTEST CGI Gaododn ooode sodbadbcoos eu mucedesaaRobOdeD 088, 553, 559
ts Contribution to the Ichthyology of the ME ENTIOT oo eo weHeaeae 496, 559
G eee Contr ibution to the Herpetology of Tropical America, 496,
Gian ouodudcUSSDAMadoudeoRGnounacnb Hboo OHO Opie meso aDeubacated
$s Tdaho freshwater fossil fishes........... gacdoaonsodeauuEcopaoode. 571
+ Mososaurus maximus, &¢......... olelelslsio}syeteietayateleletsta|syeleye/s1= doodeddce 571
Os PUI SANTO GTO ACHE ae wssckersisreteveiaer nie fale tcd falere atmo neers re eteate oi otatetareieiee 547
fe Species of Pythonomorpha, from Kansas and New Mexico....... 574.
es Hossils/from) Wein diaisland\ caves en vce seecee cece eecceccce 608
Dubois, W. E.: On Specimen of silver ore.. BECO EC EOE OIccnccRUbo Sco Hciasceneabdon GEN Mer
ne Silver Coins struck at the Mint BEE CaRE CA CHOSE Roca Enis b b doccononneckicn 233
% Written communication respecting Lake Superior silver mines 527
Davidson, Geo.: On obtaining the longitude of San Francisco.............:ssescceneesees 91
Emerson, G.: On an improvement in . Whitney’ s Cotton Gin.. 84
Robbin’s process for preserving wood from mould ‘and decay. 111
s The part taken by the Am. Phil. Soe. in establishing Sees)
for meteorological observations. . -.. O16
te Information concerning the ear thquake of Oct. 20th, "1870. . 522
Frazer, Persifer, Jr.: A chart exhibiting all the metallurgical processes now
employed at Friberg, with descriptive text.............. 442
Genth, F. A.: On Rhodium Gola in San Domingo and gold sand from the soil of
Philadelphia..
oe On native lead and iron in ‘gold tailings from Montana Territory... "443
Halderman, 8.S8.: On Beads from Indian OTANVES! Histuicisislsienisveisioniesclen cose 569
Hayden, EF. V.: Notes on the geology of Wyoming and Colorado Ter. No. 2...15, 431
NG Appendix to hisreport on Geology of Yellow and Missourt Rivers 112
ce Geological map of the Upper Missouri... : 115
oP Field notes on the geology of Colorado and New Mexico... 212, 234
oe Description of a large collection of fossil HSIECS insects, ee emia 316
a Photographs of fossil fish... 368
ne Three sections of strata belonging to the Bear river er oup, “Wyo-
ming Territory... 870, 420
a Preliminary iist of fossils collected i in} New Mexico and California
DY SEW BOWES oun See AGRA LGR UES CU RG BARAT SET ae ge 425
fs Description of fossil fishes from the upper coal measures of Ne- in
OTK c60d0 sng 05000 coobonD DOD cao cHanmIMAodDDUODOe DD00DUGO00N0 :
Horn, G. H.: On the revision of the Tenebrionide of America... ys 115
Kirkwood > D.: On the periodicity of the sun’s spots.......-.-.......0000-.00- “92, 95
Cometssandameteorsmecneeeecccciece cece cerca 218, 215
sf The periodicity of certain rings. . Baers Coe)
i oe The mass of Asteroids between Mars and J upiter.. seseee 498
Lea, Isaac: On thirteen new species of Crinoidea............. 2 cece cece etc eee eee cee 14
Lesley, J. PY WOnitherAurorasBorealic (on sAlnnil sth aeaeat eee semana 111
a Section across the Allegheny mountains.................+- 115
be TLonnadoat Cave City in Wentucky--eesceceeneneecscees 277
Lowrie, W .#H.: Some suggestions on the maintaining forces of Cosmical motion 195
“A search for the normal cause of the recession of Cosmical
TOM SS pe iets raters elevajas Stone srnisison sieiolerote etoteieratovele cia evelalersiomcniosersteet ie 213, 22
Marsh’; On the meteorsiot Aususti 24th, W869 ere eos ences ces ce cleiclele cietenielels 194
Marston, Com Onirelics tromivjerai Cruzin een ain aan Ltn ey Onin 83
Mayer, Alfred: Abstract of results of measurements and Sere ot the
photographs of the total eclipse of August 7, 1869........... 202, 204
McClure: Drawings of the appearance of the sun in the eclipse on ania 7, 1869.... 202
McNeil; On his Explorations in Central AMeYVica.............. ccc ce cece eee eee eee 415
Morton: PICREGS DINO KOA RYONS CI WKS COMORs Goods adgbosanoscoscoousocenbocenouoKe 202
Orr, Hector: Extraor dinary mildness of the winter illustrated................... 279
ie On the hail storm of May 8th)... 225. 0..22).0.......0.. PES OCB edtoe :
Pepper: Ona unique casciomUniversalbEbyperostosisueseseeeeee eee eee eee
IDOE, US Cok LANA TNO MOMS. aocsodonbeaoodoeasondosobasonubonnoncouceubeoses
Roscoe, Dr.: Letter respecting a supposed Laurentian fossil
Rothwell: New map ofthe Anthracite\Coal Basins... e.c5e.s+ es sees eee 118
Sheafer, P, W.;: Boring records in the Anthracite Region...................-.. 93, 107
Coal borings in the Wilkesbarre Basin................ss+--ssee-. 235
Tyson, Phillip T.: Section of the Cumberland Coal Basin............-+.... 0... 9
Winchell; Alexander: On the Geoloetal ee and couivalents of the Marshall
(GrROWIO, welts IO, Gases saooubeoobebs 15, 57, 245, 275, 369, 385
Wood, G. B.: Indian relics from southern Noe MSHBENVoosooogccgosundaoosbodoCGes 213
OO Experiments on the revival of peach trees...............ceeeecesees 237
tf Communications concerning an Indian skeleton................... 283
Wood, H.C.Jr.,: Prodomus of astudy of the fresh water Alga, of eastern
INO RHE AUN EECA eee erie tere ay apetaa c nreiauia vaca RR iL tee calla aed 119
Gb Concerning recent experiments Ni WEAN s pnve5doomanne 214
U6 On the medical activity of the hemp plant as grown in North
PNSTRONL CR ere ioe eee eee ree a neta eo UNE an Rel aye OD ES
On the fresh water Algee of the United States............571, 574
614
Correspondence:
Prof. Bache’s correspondence returned.............. jdoobAeOOODAo Gobo DBaCOSADSos00S 442
A bronze medal from the Balavian Society of Experimental Science at Rotterdam 282
Prof. Henry, respecting the Byington MSS........... cece eee w cece ec tec ces ceecec cece: 385
M. Carlier, respecting the Michaux legacy... .....-------ccce.ssecccesetssesececseser 514
Dr. Dewey’s report on Carices. Letter read relating t0..............cee cece esse eens 284
Gen. Humphreys’ correspondence respecting the geological reports............-e06 170
National Delecraphic) Storm SULVCY:. 1 ec ce se cecle clelsie + © cleicie cle ls ntelsjoreisiolele/ctelere «)elsiereisietele 278
Ehiladelphia Colle selorm Pharma cyer ns sceiae easels clas clociersieeeieieieciees sisielaalerrotenre 52
Schimper’s Palaeontologie Vegetable.......-.........- cece sen cece ee ceeae tees tseseee 201
Myr. Sullivan to Mr. James, respecting posthumous work by Schwartz, the bryologist. 194
Societies placed on the list of correspondents :
GeologicaliSurviey Ol SWedeMicnsecemiecccescins ssclene aviesiceeerectnecee ieeccietereer
TOW ALGRWIMIVETSIE Ye \bictsisieleie soos seit nic secieite mole cei ee neeee Cine eee eee
Imperial Central Meteorological Institute.........
Georgia Historical Society.................02-.55-
Ulm Art and Antiquity Union
IMefeOLOLOoICaANOMCEs coer acca ieicceeeciceior been eter beet Gece eee EEE
IMontrealUNaty HUStsiSOCIELY jets ccoaiis oe wiecteisive eee ce oles sels ee eecle eee eee Eee
INewrBedtordhPublieibraliyies sane We wisee ce eics orien etek oe aie ee OEE Eee
iINewsObsenvatonyatehaniseeeseeceteeee rece eee eee a apnea stuart
society of Phy. and Natural Sciences, Bordeaux ..............-.---cseer ener ee wen sce s 5)
Surgzeom General’siofices Washinetone-se- sno: ose ence ere enone: eee 1
Umiversityoteln diana iercishincmt sn cctiscacs sccm eee rerits Geib Cee eee erin 280
y
“
t a oy
ray ve
ree
Leta etal
Pe a
Pec l yUWEU
iS) AC) aio
Y
=|
II
2
S
=
Mw: ts if Ale ee i rea i uv UR ieArny i i j
NUNUW UG oe eu voter UeN Moe MeN
ro NSWYW Wri Se ee oge rc UtuY
.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11